INDEX VOLUME - III

Syllabus -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-5
CIVIL JE/AE, PSC & PSU's Previous Exam Papers Analysis Chart------------------------- 6-13
Trend Analysis of Previous Year Papers Through Bar Graph and Pie Chart -----------------14

1. Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering-------------------------------15-469

1. Soil Mechanics : An Introduction --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 15-23
2. Basic Definition of Soil, and their Relationships --------------------------------------------------------------- 24-75
3. Index Properties of Soil and their Determination ------------------------------------------------------------- 76-135
4. Classification of Soil and Soil Structure ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 136-169
5. Permeability of Soil and Yield of Well------------------------------------------------------------------------ 170-204
6. Effective Stress, Capillarity, Seepage Stress Distribution Analysis -------------------------------------- 205-244
7. Soil Compaction--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 245-266
8. Compressibility and Consolidation----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 267-301
9. Shear Strength of Soil -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 302-337
10. Stability Analysis of Slopes. ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 338-347
11. Earth Pressure and Retaining Wall --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 348-375
12. Shallow Foundation and Bearing Capacity------------------------------------------------------------------ 376-433
13. Deep Foundation------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 434-458
14. Soil Stabilization and Soil Exploration ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 459-466
15. Machine Foundation -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 467-469
2. Highway Engineering ---------------------------------------------------------- 470-704
1. Introduction and Planning of Highway ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 470-485
2. Geometric Design ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 485-580
3. Traffic Engineering Studies ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 581-598
4. Traffic Control Regulation -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 599-618
5. Highway Material & Testing ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 619-654
6. Pavement Design (Flexible & Rigid) -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 654-694
7. Highway Maintenance and Construction -------------------------------------------------------------------- 695-704
3. Railway Engineering ----------------------------------------------------------- 705-772
1. Basic of Railway & Rail Joints --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 705-722
2. Alignment (Ballast Sleepers and Track Fasteners) --------------------------------------------------------- 722-736
3. Geometric Design of the Track -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 736-750
4. Track Stress and Creep ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 751-755
5. Point and Crossing ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 755-762
6. Railway Station & Yard Signalling and Control System & Tractive Resistance----------------------- 763-772
4. Bridge Engineering ------------------------------------------------------------ 773-784
5. Airport Engineering ----------------------------------------------------------- 785-795
6. Tunnel Engineering ------------------------------------------------------------ 796-800

Note:-Building material, Concrete technology, Building construction & Construction

Management and accounts. (Study Volume I).
Fluid Mechanics, Strength of Material, Applied Mechanics (Study Volume II).
Reinforcement Concrete Technology, Design of Steel, Structural Engineering,
Estimation & Costing (Study Volume IV)
Environmental Engineering, Surveying, Irrigation, Hydrology (Study Volume V)

3
02.
HIGHWAY ENGINEERING
(c) Map Study, Reconnaissance, Preliminary
1. Introduction and Planning of surveys, Final location and detailed surveys
Highway (d) Map Study, Preliminary surveys, Final location
and detailed surveys, Reconnaissance
1. The Nagpur road plan formula were prepared DSSSB JE (Mains) 19.03.2021 (Morning)
assuming SSC JE 23.03.2021 (Afternoon)
(a) Star and Grid pattern MH WCD 2019
MH Nagar Parishad Mains 2018
(b) Hexagonal pattern MH Asst. Town Planning 2018
(c) Rectangular and block pattern NBCC JE 2018
(d) Minimum travel pattern KPCL JE 2018
DSSSB JE (Mains) 19.03.2021 (Morning) Ans. (c) : Order of engineering survey for highway
MH Nagar Parishad Mains 2018 alignment–
Maharastra JE 2018 Shift-II
Map study–Gives a rough guidance of the routes to be
MP Vyapam Sub Engg. 09.07.2017 9.00 AM
KPSC JE 9.9.2017 further study in the field.
Nagaland PSC JE 2016 Paper-I Reconnaissance–To examine general characteristics
CGVYAPAM Sub Egg 2016 of the area with a view to select possible alternate
JKSSB JE 2013 alignments.
Ans. (a) : Nagpur Road plan (1943–63)– In this first Preliminary survey–Air is to finalize the most
20 year road development plan popularly known as the suitable alignment out of various alternative.
Nagpur road plan, all road where classified into five Final location and detailed surveys–Alignment
categories and 20 year development programme from finalized in the design office during primary survey is
period 1943–63. to be first located on the field.
• The Nagpur road plan formula where prepared on the 4. Who was the surveyor general of roads in
basis of star and grid pattern. England whose new concept of road
• The total road length 5,32,700 km with a density of construction became known by the year 1827?
16 km of road length per 100 km . 2 (a) Napoleon (b) John Macadam
(c) Pierre Tresaguet (d) Thomas Telford
• It is design star and grid pattern.
DSSSB JE (Mains) 19.03.2021 (Morning)
• This plan divide into 5 categories road (NH, SH,
Ans. (b) : Macadam construction–
MDR, ODR, VR)
• John macadam (1756-1836) put forward an entirely
2. According to the recommendations of famous new method of road construction as compared to all
Nagpur highway plan, all NHs, and of the methods.
___________ should be provided with a • Macadam was the surveyor general of roads in
durable hard pavement. England and his new concept of road construction
(a) Small district roads became known by the year 1827.
(b) Other district roads
(c) State highways Exam Point
(d) Major district roads The G.T. road from Lahore to Calcutta in
DSSSB JE 20.03.2021 Morning undivided India, was constructed during–
Ans. (c) : • According to the recommendations of 1540-1545 AD
Nagpur Highway plan, all NHs and state highway The longest road was constructed during the time
should be provided with a durable hard pavement. of ______ (Note: from Lahore to Delhi)–
• In this first 20 year road development plan, popularly Shershah Suri
known as the 'Nagpur road plan'. Name of the department which was formed to
3. Stages of Engineering Surveys for Highway look after the work of road construction during
Locations in the following order the period of Lord Dalhousie–
(a) Preliminary surveys, Map Study, Central Public Works Department
Reconnaissance, final location and detailed An unmetalled road is– Earthen roads only
surveys 5. Which of the following periods are true?
(b) Preliminary surveys, Map Study, Final (a) Pierre tresaguet (1716-1796)
location and detailed surveys, (b) Macadam Construction (1756-1854)
Reconnaissance (c) Telford construction (1757-1854)
Highway Engineering 470 YCT
 (d) Metcalf Construction (1717-1890) (d) Based on type of Pavement
DSSSB JE (Mains) 19.03.2021 (Morning) DSSSB JE (Mains) 19.03.2021 (Morning)
Ans. (a) : Pierre tresaguet (1716-1796)–Developed Ans. (a) : Based on the type of carriage way or the
an improved method of construction in france by the road pavement, the roads are classified as–
year 1964 AD. Tresaguet developed several methods (i) Paved Roads (ii) Unpaved Roads
of construction. Paved roads–If they are provided with a hard
Metcalf construction (1717-1810) pavement course which should be at least a water
Telford construction (1757-1834) bound macadam (WBM) layer.
Macadam construction (1756-1836) Unpaved roads–If they are not provided with a hard
6. The importance of subgrade drainage and pavement course of at least a WBM layer. Thus earth
compaction was recognized and so the subgrade roads and gravel roads may be called unpaved roads.
was compacted and was prepared with a cross 9. The following is the one of the main features of
slope of 1 in 36. In which type of Road the roman roads
Construction, the above statement came into (a) The total thickness of the construction was as
picture? high as 0.75 to 1.2 meters at some places
(a) Tresaguet Construction (b) The wearing course consisted of dressed
(b) Telfords Construction moderate stone-blocks set in mud mortar.
(c) Macadam Construction (c) They were built after the hard stratum is
(d) Metcalf Construction removed.
DSSSB JE (Mains) 19.03.2021 (Morning) (d) They were built once the soft soil is reached.
Ans. (c) : Macadam construction– DSSSB JE (Mains) 19.03.2021 (Morning)
• The most important modification made in macadam's Ans. (a) : The main features of the roman roads are–
method with respect to the older methods are– (i) They were built straight regardless of gradients
(i) The importance of subgrade drainage and (ii) They were built after the soft soil was removed and
compaction were recognized and so the subgrade was a hard stratum was reached.
compacted and was prepared with a cross slope of 1 in (iii) The total thickness of the construction was as high
36. as 0.75 to 1.2 metres at some places, even though the
(ii) Macadam was the first person to suggest that heavy magnitude of wheel loads of animal drawn vehicles
foundation stones are not at all necessary to be placed was very low.
at the bottom layer of construction. 10. The branch of transportation engineering which
deals with the planning, design, construction and
Exam Point maintenance of airports and other facilities for
A road within a town is called– the operation of aircrafts is termed as
Street (a) Airport Engineering
The portion of the road surface, which is used by (b) Railway Engineering
the vehicular traffic is known as– Carriage way (c) Harbour Engineering
The portion of the road for high speed vehicles is (d) Highway Engineering
known as– Express way DSSSB JE (Mains) 19.03.2021 (Morning)
An access from a road to private property is
known as– Drive way Ans. (a) : Airport engineering–The branch of
transportation engineering which deals with the
7. The planning, design, construction and planning, design, construction and maintenance of
maintenance of road and roadway facilities to airports and other facilities for the operate of aircraft is
the needs of road traffic are covered under termed as airport engineering.
(a) Harbour Engineering • The transportation by airways is the fastest among
(b) Highway Engineering
the all method.
(c) Airport Engineering
• Air travel also provides more comfort apart from
(d) Railway engineering
saving in transportation time for passengers and the
DSSSB JE (Mains) 19.03.2021 (Morning)
goods between the airports.
Ans. (b) : • The planning, design, construction and
11. Bombay Road Plan is called:
maintenance of road and roadway facilities to the
(a) Fourth 20 year Road Plan
needs of traffic are covered under highway
(b) First 20 year Road Plan
engineering.
(c) Third 20 year Road Plan
• National highway authority of India (NHAI) is
(d) Second 20 year Road Plan
responsible to develop, maintain and operate the
DSSSB JE (Mains) 19.03.2021 (Morning)
national highways.
Ans. (d) : • Bombay road plan is called second 20 year
8. Under which classification of roads, paved
(1961-81) road plan.
roads are classified?
(a) Based on type of Carriage way • The target is 32 km/100 sq. km area.
(b) Based on Seasons • Construction of 1600 km express ways was also
(c) Based on population then includes in the plan.

Highway Engineering 471 YCT

12. The interchange suitable for crossing of two Ans. (d) : Nagpur Road plan–
major roads of equal importance is • A conference of the chief engineers of all the state
(a) Clover leaf interchange and provinces was convinced in 1943 by the
(b) Directional interchange government of India at Nagpur, at initiative of the
(c) Trumpet interchange Indian road congress to finalize the first road
(d) Diamond interchange development for the country as a whole.
DSSSB JE (Mains) 19.03.2021 (Evening) • This is a landmark in the history of road
Ans. (a) : Cloverleaf interchange– development in India, as it was the first attempt to
• This type of interchange provides for continuous prepare a co-ordinated road development
movement to all interchanging traffic and is programme in a planned manner.
particularly suitable for the crossing of two major 16. The road classification system which
roads of equal importance in rural areas. categorized the roads into three classes
13. A part of land that is acquired during initial primary system, was adopted in Indian in
stages of construction for future expansion is (a) First 20 year road development plan (1943-
called 1961)
(a) Footpath (b) Camber (b) Second 20 year road development plan (1961-
(c) Right of way (d) Kerb 1981)
DSSSB JE (Mains) 20.03.2021 (Evening) (c) Third 20 year road development plan (1981-
Ans. (c) : Right of way– 2001)
• Right of way is the area of land acquired for the road, (d) Fourth 20 year road development plan (2001-
along its alignment. 2021)
• The width of this acquired land is known as land RPSC Lect. (Tech.Edu.) Paper-II 2021
width and it depends on the importance of the road and Ans. (c) : • According to the third road development
possible future development. plan the roads in the country are classified into three
14. Pradhan Mantri Gram Sadak Yojana classes, for the purpose of transport planning,
(PMGSY) was launched in the year functional identification and assigning priorities on a
(a) 2000 (b) 2008 road network.
(c) 2013 (d) 2015 (1) Primary system–
DSSSB JE (Mains) 20.03.2021 (Evening) (A) Express ways
(B) National highways
Ans. (a) : • Pradham Mantri Gram Sadak Yojana (2) Secondary system
(PMGSY) was launched in the year 2000. (A) State highways
• PMGSY was launched by Indian govt. to increase the (B) Major district roads
connectivity of village. (3) Tertiary system
(A) Other district roads
Exam Point (B) Village roads
The Central Road Organisation (C.R.O.) was set 17. As per IRC, what shall be the maximum length
up in– 1930 of truck and trailer combination of road
The width of different roads as recommended in vehicle?
Nagpur plan by the Indian Road Congress for (a) 12 m (b) 16 m
hilly region is Different for – (c) 18 m (d) 11 m
National Highways SSC JE Civil 28.10.2020 (Evening)
The National Highway Authority of India Ans. (c) : As per IRC, the maximum length of truck
(NHAI) was setup in– 1988 and trailer combination of road vehicles is 18 m.
IRTDA (Indian Roads and Transport • Other vehicle length (max) = 10.60 m
Development Association) was set up at Bombay • Width of vehicle = 2.5 m
in– 1927 • Height of vehicle generally = 3.80 m
For the administration of road transport a Motor ⇒ Height of vehicle (for double decker bus) = 4.75 m
Vehicle Act was enacted in– 1939 18. The road portion used by vehicular traffic is
The road length per hundred square kilometers known as :
in India is– 35 – 50 km (a) Foot path (b) Motor way
According to Bombay Road plan, the road (c) Express way (d) Carriage way
density in per 100m2 was– 32 km KPSC Overseer, Gr-II, Irri. Dept. (code 42/2017)
According to Nagpur Road plan, the road density Ans. (d) : Carriageway–
in per 100m2 was– 16 km • The road portion used for vehicular traffic is know as
15. Which of the following can be considered as a carriageway.
taking off point in road planning in India ? • The pavement or carriageway width depends on the
(a) Lucknow plan (b) Delhi plan width of traffic lane and number of lanes.
(c) Bombay plan (d) Nagpur plan • For pavement having two or more lanes, width of
SSC JE 23.03.2021 (Morning) 3.5m per lane is considered sufficient.
Highway Engineering 472 YCT
 Exam Point (c) area of the country/40
G.T. Road stands for– Grand Trunk Roads (d) area of the country/25
Earthen roads or low cost roads are generally [ESE-2000]
constructed as– Village roads Ans. (b)
Generally the life of an earthen road varies in • Length of National Highways (NH)
between– 2 to 4 years Area of the country
The inventor of road making as a building =
science, was– Sully 50
The road foundation for modern highways • Length of state Highways (SH)
construction was developed by– Area of the state
=
Telford and Macadam simultaneously 25
In Telford construction, the side portions were
• Length of the major district roads (MDR)
made up of only one layer of broken stones and
= Area of the state/12.5
levelled off to give a camber not greater than–
or
1 in 60
= 90 × number of towns in the state
19. Assertion (A): Level grades may be used in fill
• Total length of the all categories of roads in a
sections for roads in rural areas.
district i.e
Reason (R): On fill sections in rural areas,
crowned pavements and sloping shoulders can NH + SH + MDR + ODR + VR
take care of surface drainage. = Area of district × 0.82
(a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct 22. In Which one of the road, soil profile sampling
explanation of is done up to a depth of 1m to 3m below the
(b) Both A and R are true but R is not a correct existing ground level?
explanation of (a) Preliminary survey
(c) A is true but R is false (b) Final location survey
(d) A is false but R is true (c) Construction survey
[ESE-1997] (d) Material location survey
Ans. (a) [ESE-2003]
• The purpose of surface drainage is the fast disposal Ans. (a) Preliminary Survey : Aim is to finalize the
of rain water on road surface so as to minimize most suitable alignment out of various alternative.
danger to moving vehicles. This is achieved by • All modern equipment like theodolite are used.
development by road.
• The primary survey is involved with the following
• The sides cross fall or crowning the carriageway
steps.
giving proper cross slope to the shoulders and
(1) Primary traversing
verges, providing requisite longitudinal gradient.
(2) Topographical features
20. Which one of the following is the chronological
(3) Levelling works
sequence in regard to road construction/
(4) Drainage studies and hydrological features.
design/development:
(a) Telford, Tresaguet, CBR, Macadam (5) Determination of final centre line.
(b) Tresaguet, Telford, Macadam, CBR (6) Material survey
(c) Macadam, CBR, Treasaguet, Telford • Soil sampling is to be done 1 to 3 m below ground
(d) Tresaguet, Macadam, Telford, CBR line or finished grade line of the road which ever is
[ESE-1998] lower.
Ans. (b) 23. Under the Nagpur Road Plan, which of the
• Tresaguet construction was started in 1764 AD in following are NOT relevant in planning the
France. road development programme in a backward
• Telford construction was started in 1803 AD in district?
London (England). 1. Existing agriculture drainage network of
• Macadam construction was started in 1815 AD in drain canals.
England. 2. Existing number of Panchayat unions.
• CBR construction was started in 1928 AD in USA. 3. Existing length of mud-track roads.
So, the chronological sequence in regard to road 4. Number of villages with population of 10000
construction/design/development is : and above.
Tresaguet → Telford → Macadam → CBR (a) 1, 2, 3 & 4 (b) 1, 2 & 3
(1764 AD) (1803 AD) (1815 AD) (1928 AD) (c) 1, 2 & 4 (d) 2, 3 & 4
21. The length of National Highways as per 3rd 20 [ESE-2013]
year (Lucknow) road plan is given by: Ans. (a) Nagpur road plan (1943) :
(a) area of the country/75 • The first attempt to prepare a coordinated road
(b) area of the country/50 development program is a planned manner.
Highway Engineering 473 YCT
• The first 20 year road development plan (1943- (b) Star and grid pattern
1963) popularly know as 'Nagpur road plan'. (c) Star and block pattern
• All run way roads were classified into five (d) Star and circular pattern
categories. (UPSSSC JE 31-07-2016)
(viz, NH, SH, MDR, ODR and VR) RRB JE Ranchi 04.01.2015
• The target for Nagpur road development plan was Ans : (b) Nagpur road plan–
aimed at 16 km per 100 sq. km area of the country. • The first 20 years road development plan (1943-1963)
• Recommended grid pattern of road system is star popularly known as ''Nagpur road plan''.
and grid. • Recommended pattern of Nagpur road plan system is
24. The roads connecting major parts of country star and grid.
and capital of state are classified as • Provides inter communication facilities to each off the
(a) Major district road (b) State highway village, towns, district head quarters, state capitals etc.
(c) National Highway (d) Minor district road 28. Which of the following statements is/are
HPSSC JE Code 459/2019 correct with respect to Lucknow Road Plan?
Ans. (c) : National highway– Main frame on which (1) Expressways of total length 2000 km should
entire road communication is based, highest be developed for fast travel.
specifications. (2) Total length of National Highways in the
• A national highway connects state capitals industrial country should be 66000 km
tours, places of strategic importance, neighboring (3) Total length of State Highways in the country
countries etc. should be 145000 km.
25. Roads which connect villages with towns of Select the answer from the codes given below
cities are classified as : (a) Only 1 (b) 1 & 3
(a) Major district road (b) State highway (c) 2 & 3 (d) 1, 2 & 3
(c) Minor district road (d) Village road (UPSSSC JE 31-07-2016)
Nagaland PSC 2015 Paper-I RRB JE Patna 04.01.2015
Ans. (d) : Village road– Ans : (d) Lucknow road plan–
• Village roads are roads connecting villages or • The third-twenty year plan (1981-2001)
groups of village, with each other to the nearest road of • Target 82 km/100 sq. km.
a higher category. • Expressways of total length 2000 km should be
• It was specified that these village roads should be in developed for fast travel.
essence farm tracks, but is was desired that the • Total length of national highways in the country
prevalent of leaving such tracks to develop the area of km 2
maintain by themselves. should be 66000 km or
50
• Total length of state highway in the country should be
Exam Point 145000 km.
Separate classes of highways with superior
area of km 2
facilities and design standards, normally permit • Length of state highway = or 62.5 ×
only fast moving vehicles– Express ways 25
The transport system is cheapest in construction number of towns.
and maintenance– Road way
An underground passage used by pedestrains, Exam Point
vehicular traffic, etc., is called– Sub-way The strip of land acquired and reserved for
Parking lanes are provided on– Urban roads construction and future development of a road
An Assistant Engineer directly controls– symmetrically about the central alignment is
Junior Engineer called– Right-of-way
Economic survey of a proposed road project
26. Road which connects district headquarters of a includes a detailed study of–
state is called : Agricultural and industrial products available
(a) State highway (b) National highway in the area
(c) District road (d) Minor district road Line up to which the plinth of a building
Nagaland PSC 2015 Paper-I adjoining a street may be lawfully extended is
Kerala PSC code 147/2015 called– Building line
Ans. (a) : State highway– State highway are arterial The national highway number of Pune-sholapur-
roads of a state, connecting up with the national Hyderabad-Vijaywada is– 9 (Previously)
highways of adjacent state, district head quarters and 65 (Latest)
important cities within the state and serving as the 29. The minimum coefficient of lateral friction for
main arteries for traffic to and from district roads. a highway is
27. Which road pattern was assumed to prepare (a) 1.0 (b) 0.5
the formula of Nagpur Road Plan? (c) 0.3 (d) 0.15
(a) Rectangular or block pattern KPSC JTO Code 10/2020
Highway Engineering 474 YCT
 Ans. (d) : In the case of horizontal curve design. 34. The city roads which are meant for through
Minimum coefficient of lateral friction is 0.15 is traffic usually on a continuous route are known
recommended. as
• IRC has recommended longitudinal frictional (a) carriage way (b) express way
coefficient 0.35 to 0.4. (c) arterial streets (d) sub-arterial streets
MH CIDCO 2016
• Coefficient of friction is less when pavement surface
MH Pimpri-Chinchwad MNC 2015
is smooth and wet.
Ans. (c) : Arterial street– It is a general term
30. The period of long term plan for the denoting a street primarily meant for through traffic
development of roads in India, known as usually on a continuous routs. They are generally
Bombay Plan, is divided highway with fully or partially controlled
(a) 15 years (b) 20 years access parking loading and unloading activities are
(c) 25 years (d) 30 years usually restricted and regulated.
Nagaland PSC 2016 Paper-I
Ans. (b) : Bombay road plan (1961-81)
• The second twenty year road development plan for
the period 1961-81 was initiated by the IRC and was
finalized 1959.
• This road development plan is also known as
Bombay road plan.
35. MDR stands for
• The plan gave due consideration to the development (a) Maximum Daily Returns
that are taking place and development that have to take (b) Minor Developed roads
place in our country in varies fields during the plan (c) Major District roads
period. (d) None of these
31. Following is a symbol of : MH PWD 2016
Ans. (c) : : MDR stand for- Major district road.
(a) Unmetalled Road (b) Metalled Road Other,
(c) Village Road (d) Bituminous Road NH – National Highway
Gujarat BMC Technical Assistant 2017 SH – State Highway
Ans. (a) : ODR – Other District Road
VR – Village Road
Symbol of unmetalled road. This 5 category road divided in Nagpur road plan
32. Earthen roads or low cost roads are generally (1943–1963)
constructed as– 36. ODR means
(a) Other district road (a) Other District Road
(b) State highways (b) Optimum Daily Return
(c) Major district roads (c) Ordinary Double Roads
(d) Village Roads (d) None of these
MH PWD 2016
MH Nagpur Zila Parishad 2015
Ans. (a) : ODR means Other District Road
Ans. (d) : The earthen road is the cheapest type of road
NH – National Highway
in which the pavement structure is constructed totally SH – State Highway
from the soil available at the site. It is also called the MDR – Major district road.
earthen road. VR – Village Road
It is lowest from of pavement surface used and is This 5 category road divided in Nagpur road plan
considered as the first stage in the development of (1943–1963)
road pavement construction that called low cost road. 37. In which one of the following year,
33. The longest road constructed during the time Government of India brought into effect Motor
of Shershah Suri was from vehicles Act?
(a) Delhi to kolkata (Calcutta) (a) 1929 (b) 1934
(b) Lahore to Delhi (c) 1939 (d) 1950
(c) Lahore to Kolkata (Calcutta) MH Nagar Parishad Mains 2018
(d) Lahore to Agra Ans. (c) : Motor vehicle act – 1939
MH Pimpri-Chinchwad MNC 2015 Indian road congress– 1934
Ans. (c) : The longest road constructed during the time CRRI – 1950
of Shershahsuri was from Lahore to Kolkata. This road National highway act – 1956
also called grand trunk road. Nagpur road plan – 1943 – 1963
The grand trunk road formerly known as Uttarpath, Bombay road plan – 1961 – 1981
Sarak-e- Azom, Badshahi Sarak. Lucknow road plan – 1981 – 2001
Highway Engineering 475 YCT
 Exam Point 40. Third Road Development Plan was prepared
The roads connecting villages with the towns or for the period of
cities are classified as– Village road (a) 1921 - 1941 (b) 1941 - 1961
A road within a city or town is called as– (c) 1961 - 1981 (d) 1981 - 2001
Country road DSSSB JE (Mains) 19.03.2021 (Morning)
Roads connecting cities, ports, industrial areas MH PWD 2018
and defences establishments are called– Ans. (d) : The third twenty year plan–
National highway (1981-2001) (Lucknow plan)
The road connecting a district head quarters of • Target 82 km/100 sq. km.
one state to the district head quarters of another • Expressways 2000 km.
bordering state is called– State Highway Area in km 2
• Length of NH =
38. Which one of the following road pattern has 50
been adopted in the city roads of chandigarh? Area in km 2
(a) Rectangular or block pattern • Length of SH =
(b) Radial or star & block pattern 25
(c) Radial or star & Circular pattern Or 62.5 × number of towns.
(d) Hexagonal pattern 41. Which of the following is not an economic
MH Nagar Parishad Mains 2018 studies, involved in the highway development
Ans. (a) : Rectangular or block pattern– In this programme?
pattern the main road is provided a direct approach to (a) Trend of population growth
outside the city. This pattern has been adopted in the (b) Industrial development
city road of Chandigarh. (c) Soil survey
(d) Per capita income
Exam Point UPPCL JE 25.02.2020
The Central Road Research Institute is Ans. (c) : • Soil survey is not an economic studies,
controlled by– involved in the highway development programme.
Shipping and Transport Ministry • As the following option in this question an economic
In India the first preference is given to roads for– studies, involved in the highway development
Transportation purposes programme except soil survey.
According to the recommendation of Nagpur
Conference the width formation of an ideal 42. The longest road was constructed during the
National Highway in hard rock cutting is– time of ______ (Note: from Lahore to Delhi).
7.9 m (a) Sher Shah Suri (b) Deepak Suri
The Nagpur Road Plan which is First 20-year (c) Santosh Suri (d) Suresh Suri
Road Development Plan assumes of the patterns MP VYAPAM Sub Engg. 3.04.2016, 2.00 pm
of the road network– Star and Grid pattern RRB JE Ranchi 04.01.2015
Standard IRC loading adopted in general for all Ans : (a) The longest road was constructed during the
permanent structures is– Class A time of Sher Shah Suri from Lahore to Kolkata.
The target of achieving an overall density of 43. Which type of road was constructed during
road length in third twenty year Road 1540 to 1545 A.D.?
Development Plan (1981–2001) was– (a) grand trunk (b) road trunk
82 km/100 km2 (c) city trunk (d) town trunk
39. According to third Road development Plan, MP VYAPAM Sub Engg. 3.04.2016, 2.00 pm
which of the following category of roads is Ans : (a) Grand trunk road–
included in the Secondary system? • Grand truck road is one of the south asia's oldest and
(a) Expressways longest major roads.
(b) National Highways • Over the years, it has functional both as a major trade
(c) Major District Roads route and as a convenient right of way for invading
(d) Other District Roads armies.
MH Asst. Town Planning 2018 • Grand trunk road was constructed during the 1540 to
Ans. (c) : According to third 20 year plan– (1981- 1545 A.D. by Sher Shah Suri.
2001)- It is also called Lucknow road plan. 44. Name of the department which was formed to
• In this plan road are Classified into primary, look after the work of road construction during
secondary and territory road system. the period of Lord Dalhousie.
• Over all density target– 82 km per 100 sq km area. (a) Public works department
• This plan designed square and grid pattern/ system. (b) Private works department
Primary Road– Express highway (2000km) and (c) state works department
National Highway (d) central Public works Department
Secondary road– State Highway + major district road. MP VYAPAM Sub Engg. 3.04.2016, 2.00 pm
Territory road– Other district road + village road. RRB JE Kolkata 04.01.2015
Highway Engineering 476 YCT
 Ans : (d) • Central public works department was Exam Point
formed to look after the work of road construction As per I.R.C. it is considered appropriate that
during the period of lord Dalhousie. roads in rural areas should be designed for–
• Lord Dalhousie founded the central public works 10-15 years
department through which works programme like A road connecting one town with another is
construction of roads, bridge and other public utility. called a– Country Road
45. Which among the following organizations was The city roads which are meant for through
set up in 1930? traffic usually on a continuous route are known
(a) central road organization as– Arterial streets
(b) state road organization As per IRC the recommended land width for
(c) town road organization National Highway passing through plain area is
(d) urban road organization normally– 60 metre
MP VYAPAM Sub Engg. 3.04.2016, 2.00 pm The road within a city or town is called as–
Ans:(a) • Central road organization was formed an 1930. Urban Road
• Central road fund – 1929 The Classification of Road as per location is–
• Indian road congress – 1934 Country Road, Urban Raod, Hilly Road
• Motor vehicle act – 1939 49. The _______board was established in 1960.
• Central road research insititue – 1950 (a) Border Road Development
46. In India the first preference is given to roads (b) Central Road Development
for what purposes? (c) State Road Development
(a) transportation (b) safety aids (d) Defence Road Development
(c) signal (d) pedestrian signal MP VYAPAM Sub Engg. 3.04.2016, 2.00 pm
MP VYAPAM Sub Engg. 3.04.2016, 2.00 pm Ans : (a) • The border roads organization is a road
RRB JE Ranchi 04.01.2015 construction executive force in India that provides
Ans : (a) • In India the first preference is given to support to end is a part of the Indian armed forces.
roads for transportation. • Establishment in 7 may 1960.
• Due to the overall economic depression in the country • Head quarters – New Delhi.
after first world war the road development fund was not 50. According to Nagpur plan, Indian roads have
used for development world. been classified into
• Transportation is essential for the economic property (a) 4 categories (b) 5 categories
and general development of the country. (c) 6 categories (d) 7 categories
• The inadequate transportation facilities retard the Karnataka PSC JE Code 114/2016
process of socio-economic development of the country. KPSC JE 10.09.2017
47. What is the road within a city or town is called Ans. (b) : The Nagpur Road Plan classified the roads
as? in India base on location and function into following
(a) urban road (b) town road five categories–
(c) country road (d) rural road 1. National Highway (NH)
MP VYAPAM Sub Engg. 3.04.2016, 2.00 pm 2. State highway (SH)
RRB JE: 26.08. 2015 3. Major District Roads (MDR)
Ans : (a) Urban road – 4. Other District Roads (ODR)
5. Village roads (VR)
• The road within a city or town is called as urban
road.
• The urban road play an important role in the
Exam Point
Based on location and function, Nagpur Road
development of town or city and they attract many
evils such as heavy traffic, congestion, ribbon Plan has classified the roads in India into–
development etc. 5 categories
The organization was set up in 1930–
48. Border Roads organisation for hilly regions,
Central road organization
was formed in
(a) 1947 (b) 1954 Give the full form of CRRI–
(c) 1960 (d) 1962 Central Road Research Institute
Nagaland PSC 2016 Paper-I The headquarter of the Indian Roads and
HPSSC JE 2015 Transport Development Association is at–
Ans. (c) : The border roads organization (BRO) was Mumbai(Bombay)
conceived and raised in the year 1960 by Pandit The headquarter of the Indian Roads Congress is
Jawahar Lal Nehru, the great visionary and the first at– New Delhi
Prime minister of India. This was done with the aim of 51. The length of state highways as per 3rd 20 year
coordinating the speedy development of network of (Lucknow) road plan is given by
roads in the North and the North Eastern Border (a) Area of the country /75
regions of the country. (b) Area of the country /50
Highway Engineering 477 YCT
 (c) Area of the country /40 Ans. (c) : IIIrd 20 year road plan (Lucknow) 1981–
(d) Area of the country /25 2001
Nagaland PSC 2017 Paper-I 82 km/ 100 km2 area
Nagaland PSC CTSE 2017 Paper-I
Road are divided into three major category
Ans. (d) : According to third twenty year plan–
(i) Primary – Express way
Area in km 2 NH
(i) Length of NH =
50 (ii) Secondary – SH
Area in km 2 MDR
(ii) Length of SH =
25 (iii) ODR & VR
or 62.5×no. of towns. 56. Which of the following category of roads is
Area in km 2 included in the Secondary system according to
(iii) Length of MDR =
12.5 third Road development Plan?
or 90 × no. of towns. (a) Expressways
52. The target of second 20 year plan is to provide (b) National Highways
a total length of _____ per 100 square (c) Major District Roads
kilometers areas :- (d) Other District Roads
(a) 16 kms (b) 40 kms MH PWD 2019
(c) 32 kms (d) All of above Ans. (c) : IIIrd 20 year road plan (Lucknow) 1981–
CGVYAPAM Sub Egg 2016
2001
Ans. (c) : For :
st 82 km/ 100 km2 area
1 20 year plan target = 16 kms/100 sq.km
2nd 20 year plan target = 32 kms/100 sq.km Road are divided into three major category
rd
3 20 year plan target = 82 kms/100 sq.km (i) Primary – Express way
53. The survey in which best alignment is finalized NH
from various alternative proposed alignments (ii) Secondary – SH
is : MDR
(a) Reconnaissance (b) Preliminary survey (iii) ODR & VR
(c) Detailed survey (d) Map study 57. In which one of the following year Jayakar
CGVYAPAM Sub Egg 2016 committee was formed?
Ans. (b) : Preliminary survey– In preliminary survey (a) 1927 (b) 1928
aim is to finalize the most suitable alignment out of (c) 1932 (d) 1934
various alternative alignments. All modern equipment MH PWD 2019
like theodolite are used.
Ans. (a) : Jayakar committee (1927) –
54. Reconnaissance survey for highway location is road development should be considered as a matter
the–
(a) First stage of survey of national interest
(b) Secondary stage of survey Tax on petrol should be levied to collect for road
(c) Third stage of survey development work. Central Road fund was formed
(d) Fourth stage of survey in 1929
MH PWD 2019 A research organisation should be instituted to
Ans. (b) : Reconnaissance survey–The purpose of the carryout research and development work.
reconnaissance survey is to evaluate the feasibility of CRRI was formed in 1950
one or more corridor routes for a highway between A semi- official technical body should be formed to
specific point that may be many kms away and can act as advisory body on various aspect of road.
taking in to account the following- IRC was formed in 1934
(i) Topography, geology, climate and traffic volume. 58. Which are the roads that connect district
(ii) Social and demographic, land use. headquarters and important cities of a state ?
(iii) Economic. (a) State highways
• It is second engineering survey. (b) Expressways
• It is carried out in territory which has not been (c) Collector streets
previously surveyed for the purpose of laying a new (d) National highways
railway line/ or highway alignment.
DSSSB JE 4.11.2019, Afternoon
55. Which one of the following is other name of
Ans. (a) : State highway connecting up with the
third twenty year road development plan?
(a) Nagpur road plan (b) Bombay road plan national highway, district head quarters and important
(c) Lucknow road plan (d) None of the above cities within the state and serving as the main arteries
MH PWD 2019 for traffic to and from district roads.
Highway Engineering 478 YCT
59. Below figure represents : Exam Point
Give the full form of IRC–
Indian Road Congress
All the specifications for highway planning and
design are given by- IRC
The road development plan for India for the
period of 1981 to 2001 is also known as–
Lucknow plan
The length of National Highways as per 3rd 20
year (Lucknow) road plan is given by–
Area of Country/50
(a) Cross section of two lane city road in built up The Border Roads Development Board was
area establised in– 1960
(b) Cross section of VR or ODR in embankment
62. A road within a town is called ................
in rural area (a) Trunk road (b) Country road
(c) Cross section of MDR in cutting in rural area (c) Carriage way (d) Street
(d) Cross section of NH or SH in embankment in GSSSB Surveyor 2016
rural area Ans. (d) : A road within a town is called street.
DSSSB JE 20.11.2019, Morning • Collector streets provides access to arterial streets
Ans. (b) : The cross sectional elements in a highway and they collect and distribute traffic from and to local
design pertain to those features which deal with its streets which provide access to abutting property.
width. They embrace aspects such as right of way 63. Indian Road Congress (IRC) was set up in the
width, roadway width, central reservations (median) year:
shoulders, camber, side slopes, horizontal and vertical (a) 1950 (b) 1978
clearances etc. (c) 1956 (d) 1934
Note– The most appropriate correct option is (d) SSC JE 23.03.2021 (Morning)
SSC JE 23.03.2021 (Afternoon)
Exam Point SSC JE Civil 28.10.2020 (Evening)
UKSSSC JE 20.12.2020 Morning
In C.P.W.D. circle incharge is designated as– Kerala PSC LSG Code 141/2016
Superintending engineer KPSC JE Code 30/2014
The professional head of public works Ans. (d) : • At the instance of central government a
department in a state is– Chief engineer semi-official technical body known as Indian Road
The officer of public works department who is Congress (IRC) was formed in 1934.
mainly responsible for execution of works is– • This, It may be recalled, is one of the main
Executive Engineer recommendations made by the Jayakar Committee.
In a country road length in km is taken to a 1. Jayakar committee Formed in Nov. 1927
population of– One lakh Recommended in Feb.
60. What is the width of arterial roads in case of 1928
Bombay Plan? 2. Central Road Fund 1929
(a) Three lane width (b) Double lane width 3. Indian Road 1934
Congress
(c) Single lane width (d) Four lane width
4. Motor Vehicle Act 1939
DSSSB JE -23.10.2019 Second Shift
5. First 20 Year Road 1943-1963 (but it finish
Ans. (b) : • The width of arterial roads in case of Plan (Nagpur Road in 1961)
Bombay plan is double lane width. Plan)
• The construction of 1600 km of express ways was 6. CRRI 1950
also then included in the plan. 7. Second 20 Year Road 1961-1981
• The target of road length about 32 km per 100 sq. km. Plan (Bombay Road
61. Give the full form of CRRI. Plan)
(a) Central Road Research Institute 8. Third 20 Year Road 1981-2001
(b) Central Research Road Institute Plan (Lucknow Road
(c) Central Railway Research Institute Plan)
(d) Central Research Railway Institute 9. National Highway 1956
Haryana SSC JE 13.04.2018, Morning Act
64. Which one of the following transport system is
Ans. (a) : Central road research institute (CRRI) setup cheapest in construction and maintenance?
in 1950. (a) Rail way (b) Road way
• It may be in line with Jayakar committee's (c) Air way (d) Water way
recommendation, located in New Delhi. KPSC JE Code 80/2014
Highway Engineering 479 YCT
 Ans. (d) : Water ways is the cheapest and the oldest (d) Scattered growth
mode of transport, it operates on a natural track and KERALA PSC Code 196/2015
hence does not require huge capital investment in the Ans. (b) : The building activity expands along the
construction and maintenance of its track except in sides of main roads is known as Ribbon development.
case of canal, the cost of operational water way is also Ribbon development–Ribbon development is
very less. building houses along the routes of communications
65. The conventional sign shown in the figure from a human settlement.
below represents a. • This resulting ribbons of development are clearly
visible on land use maps an aerial photographs giving
cities and the countryside a particular character.
• This development tends to help in better transport
facilities.
• It provides easy access to goods and services.

Exam Point
The conference of chief engineers of all
provinces was held at Nagpur to look into the
(a) road bridge (b) railway bridge problem of road development– 1943
(c) canal bridge (d) aquaduct The Central Road Research Institute (C.R.R.I.)
SSC JE 2.3.2017, Evening Shift was started in Delhi, in– 1951
Ans. (a) The traditional symbol shown in the figure The period of long term plan for the
indicates a river over which a bridge or road passes. development of roads in India, known as
Hence it is a road bridge. Bombay Plan– 20 years
The among the following organizations was set
up in 1930– Central road organization
The Indian Roads Congress (I.R.C.) was set up
in– 1934
68. In India roads are classified according to?
(a) Lucknow Road Plan (b) Bombay Road Plan
(c) Nagpur Road Plan (d) Delhi Road Plan
MESCOM AE 2017
Ans. (c) : Nagpur Road Plan:- The first road
development plan (Nagpur plan) was formulated in
1943. After independence, the first five year plan
Aquaduct (1951-56) classified road into National Highways,
66. According to the recommendation of Nagpur State Highways, District Road, and village roads.
Conference the width formation of an ideal Lucknow Road Plan:- The plan has set the target
National Highway in hard rock cutting is length of NH to be completed by the end of seventh,
........... eighth and ninth few year plan periods. It aims at
(a) 8.9 m (b) 7.9 m improving the transportation facilities in villages towns
(c) 6.9 m (d) 6.5 m etc. such that no part of country is further than 50 km
SSC JE 2.3.2017, Evening Shift from NH.
Bombay Road Plan:- According a 20-year plan was
Ans. (b) Based on Nagpur road plan– According to
drafted by the roads wing of government of India
the recommendation of Nagpur conference the width
which is popularly known as the Bombay plan. The
formation of an ideal. National highway is hard rock
highlights of the plan were. It was the second 20 year
cutting is 7.9 m.
road plan (1961-1981). The total road length target to
• To discuss improving the condition of roads, the
construct was above lakhs.
government convent a conference of chief engineers of
provinces at Nagpur in 1943, and road divided in five 69. Division of the Indian roads into four classes as
order. national highway, state highway, district roads
(i) National highway (NH) and village roads was proposed by :
(ii) State highway (SH) (a) Pierre Tresaguet
(iii) Major district road (MDR) (b) National Transport Policy Committee
(iv) Other district road (ODR) (c) The Indian Roads Congress in 1934
(v) Village road (VR) (d) The Nagpur Roads Plan
SSC JE 23.09.2019 (Morning)
67. The building activity expands along the sides of
main roads is known as: Ans. (c) : Indian Roads Congress (IRC) was formed in
(a) Concentric spread 1934. The Indian Roads Congress was constituted to
(b) Ribbon development provide a forum for regular pooling of experience and
(c) Satellite growth ideas on all matters affecting the planning,
Highway Engineering 480 YCT
 construction and maintenance of roads in India. The • A Research organization should be instituted to
IRC has played important role in the formulation of the carryout research and development work.
three 20 year road development plans in India. • CRRI was formed in 1950.
Nagpur Roads Plan– Roads should be divided into five • A Semi-official technical body should be formed to
classes :– act as advisory body on various aspect of road.
• National Highway (NH) traversing the length and • IRC was formed in 1934.
breadth of the country, linking provincial capitals 72. BOT indicates–
and serving strategic and administrative needs of the (a) Building-Observation-training
country. (b) Built-Operate-Transfer
• State Highway would be the other main roads of the (c) Building-Operation-Transport
province. (d) Build-Organization-Transport
• District Roads are those which take off from the MH PWD Nashik 2015
main roads leading to the interior of the districts Ans. (b) : BOT– Built Operate Transfer.
depending upon the importance, some of them would Under a BOT contract a private firm would build a
be classified as Major District Roads (MDRs) and road, tolls charge to road user for a period, and then
the others as other District Roads (ODRs). transfer the road to the government.
• Village Roads are those which give connectivity to 73. The color of upper part of kilometer stone on
the villages. road side in case of state highway is
Note : The commission has rejected the question in (a) Green (b) Yellow
revised answer key (c) Brown (d) Red
70. The road development plan for India for the RRB JE Jammu : 26.08. 2015
period of 1981 to 2001 is also known as : Ans: (a)
(a) Lucknow plan (b) Kanpur plan • National highway – Yellow & white
(c) Nagpur plan (d) Bombay plan • State highway – Green & white
SSC JE 23.09.2019 (Morning) • City / district roads – Blue / black & white
Ans. (a) : Lucknow Road Plan– The IIIrd road • Rural roads – Orange of white
development plan for India for the period of 1981 to 74. The study of the transportation system that
2001 is also called "Lucknow Road Plan". meets the travel need of several people by
• This plan has been prepared keeping in view the sharing a vehicle is known as
growth pattern envisaged in various fields by the (a) Mass transportation
century. (b) Passenger transport
• In it, 12 lakh kilometres were envisaged to be (c) Intelligent transport system
(d) Goods transportation
developed by the year 2001 with an increase in a
BSPHCL 8.02.2019 Shift-I
road density of 82km/100km2. It was also
envisaged to link all the villages, towns etc such Ans. (a) : Mass transportation–
that no part of the country would be at more than • Mass transportation is any kind of transportation
50 km distance from NH. system in which large numbers of people are carried
within a single vehicle or combination of vehicles.
• 1943-63 Nagpur Road Plan (I–20 year road
• Airplanes, railways, buses, trolleys, light rail systems
development plan)
and subways are example of mass transportation.
• 1961-1981 Bombay Road Plan (II road
development plan) 75. Hill road is the one passing through:
(a) Bridges (b) Steep terrain
71. Which one of the following is/are important (c) Plain terrain (d) Water bodies
recommendations given by Jayakar committee UKSSSC JE 19.12.2020 Afternoon
in 1927? Ans. (b) : Hill road is the one having the steep terrain
(a) The road development in the country should of cross slope having greater then 60%.
be considered as a national interest 76. This loading normally adopted on all roads on
(b) An extra tax should be levied on petrol from which permanent bridges and culverts are
road users for development of central roads constructed, is__________.
funds (a) IRC Class A loading
(c) A research organization should be instituted (b) IRC Class AA loading
to carry out research & development work (c) IRC Class B loading
(d) All the other options (d) IRC Class 70 R loading
MH WCD 2019 UKSSSC JE 19.12.2020 Afternoon
Ans. (d) : Jayakar committee (1927) Ans. (a) : The loading depends on the type and nature
of features of the road. The roads on which permanent
• Road development should be considered as a matter
bridges and culverts are there IRC class A loading.
of national interest. IRC class AA loading– It consists of either a tracked
• Tax on petrol should be levied to collect for road vehicle 700 kN or a wheeled vehicle of 400 kN.
development work. Central Road fund was formed Ex =combat tank use by army.
in 1927. IRC class B loading– Temperary structure road.
Highway Engineering 481 YCT
77. In a district where the rainfall is heavy, major Ans. (c) : The various road pattern may be classified
district road of water-bound macadam pavement, as follows–
3.8 m wide, is to be constructed. What should be (a) Rectangular or block pattern.
the height of the crown with respect to the edges, (b) Radial or star and block pattern.
if the cross fall rate is 1 in 33. (c) Radial or star and circular pattern.
(a) 0.082 m (b) 0.058 m
81. Which of the following types of road
(c) 0.073 m (d) 0.167 m
construction is based on scientific thinking ?
DSSSB JE 20.11.2019, Shift II
(a) Tresaguet construction
Ans. (b) : (b) Macadam construction
(c) Metcalf construction
(d) Telford construction
DSSSB JE 5.11.2019, Morning
Ans. (b) : Macadam construction (1756-1856)–
• The first method based on scientific thinking.
• The importance of sub grade draining and
compaction was recognized and cross slope of 1 in 36
was proposed from sub grade level itself.
W
Height of crown w.r.t. of edge = 82. National highway, state highway, major
2N district road, minor district roads and village
W
h= road classification was proposed by :
2N (a) Lucknow road plan
3.8 (b) Bombay road plan
= = 0.058 m
2 × 3.3 (c) Jayakar committee
78. The Central Road Research Institute (CRRI) (d) Nagpur road plan
was proposed by the : DSSSB JE 5.11.2019, Morning
(a) Nagpur Road Plan Ans. (d) : The Nagpur road plan classified the roads in
(b) Bombay Road Plan India based on location and function into following
(c) National Transport Development Policy five categories
Committee (i) National Highway (NH)
(d) Jayakar Committee (ii) State Highway (SH)
DSSSB JE 5.11.2019, Morning (iii) Major district roads (MDR)
Ans. (d) : Most of the recommendation of the jayakar (iv) Other district roads (ODR)
committee were accepted by the government, and (v) Village roads (VR)
major item were implemented subsequently. 83. The main Highways running through the
• The central road research institute was started in 1950. length and breadth for the country connecting
• The central road fund was formed in the year 1929. major ports, capitals of States, Foreign
• Semi-official technical body called the Indian road highways are known as :
congress was formed in 1934. (a) Provincial Highways (b) National Highways
79. Who constructed one of the first and oldest (c) State Highways (d) All of the above
roads and is considered to be a pioneer in the WBPSC SAE 2000
field of road construction? Ans. (b) : National Highways are main highways
(a) Egyptians (b) Persians running through the length and breadth of the country
(c) Aryans (d) Romans connecting major parts, state capitals, large industrial and
DSSSB JE 5.11.2019, Morning tourist centers, etc. National Highways in India are
Ans. (d) : Roman roads– designated as NH followed by the highway number. The
• Roman's are the pioneers in road construction rome traffic on National Highways has been growing due to the
29 roads were meeting. recent economic growth in India and the Government of
• During this period of roman civilization many India is taking steps to improve management techniques
roads were built of stone blocks of considerable to provide hindrance-free traffic movement by way of
thickness. widening roads, grade separation, construction of
• They were built straight regardless of gradients. bypasses, bridges, rail-road crossings, and utilizing the
• They were built after the soft said was removed and latest technologies. Even though the National Highways
a hard stratum was reached. represent only 2% of the total network length, they handle
80. Which of the following is NOT an urban road about 40% of the total road traffic.
pattern ? 84. Arterial roads of a State connecting up with the
(a) Grid iron (b) Hexagonal national highways of adjacent States, district
(c) Pentagonal (d) Star head quarters and important cities within the
DSSSB JE 5.11.2019, Morning State is known as:
Highway Engineering 482 YCT
 (a) National Highway (b) State Highway Ans. (b) : Minimum radius of curvature of National
(c) District Highway (d) Major District Road Highway or State Highway in hilly region free from
WBPSC SAE 2000 snow is kept 33 m.
Ans. (b) : State highway–State highway are arterial 89. The full width of road acquired before
roads of a state, connecting up with the national finalising a highway is known:
highway of adjacent state, district head quarters and (a) width of formation (b) right of way
important cities within the state and serving as the (c) carriageway (d) roadway
main arteries for traffic to and from district roads. WBPSC SAE 2001
• The NH and SH have the same design speed and Ans. (b) : Right of way– The road land width or the
geometric design specifications. right of way width is the width of land secured and
85. Recommended normal land width of N.H. & preserved in public interest for road development
S.H. as per I.R.C. is: purposes.
(a) 45 M (b) 90 M • The right of way should be adequate to accommodate
(c) 100 M (d) 120 M all the elements that make up the cross section of the
WBPSC SAE 2000 highway and may reasonably provide for future
Ans. (a) : Land Width For Plain & Rolling Area development.
Types of Open Built-up 90. State highways should preferable of:
Roads area(Rural) area(Urban) (a) three lane width (b) single lane width
1. National & 30 m – 60 m 30 m – 60 m (c) two lane width (d) four lane width
State (Normal 45 m) (Normal 30 m) WBPSC SAE 2001
Highway Ans. (c) : State highway –
(N.H & S.H) • These highway are also called provincial highways.
2. Major 25 m – 30 m 15 m – 25 m • These highways serve as arterial routes of traffic to
District (Normal 25 m) (Normal 20 m) and from district roads within the state.
Roads • State highway should preferably be of two lane
(M.D.R) width.
3. Other 15 m – 25 m 15 m – 20 m • They should also have a modern type of surfacing
District (Normal 15 m) (Normal 15 m)
the responsible of construction and maintenance of
Roads these road lies with state governments.
(O.D.R)
4. Village 12 m – 18 m 10 m – 15 m 91. On the recommendations of Nagpur
Roads (VR) (Normal 12 m) (Normal 10 m) Conference, the minimum width of a village
86. Village roads are meant to connect a village to: road may be:
(a) Railway station (a) 2.45 m (b) 2.75 m
(b) Town (c) 3.66 m (d) 4.90 m
(c) Nearest district roads WBPSC SAE 2002
(d) All of the above Ans. (a) : On the recommendations of Nagpur
WBPSC SAE 2003 conference, the minimum width of a village road may
Ans. (b) : Village roads– Village roads are roads be 2.45 m.
connecting villages or groups of village with each • The other district roads, village road and national
other to the nearest road of a higher category. trails should be provided with a property engineered
• Village roads are meant to connect a village to town. earth surface, but improvements such as gravelling,
soil stabilization, macadam or trackways could be
87. City road fulfils:
considered where necessary.
(a) Admission of air and light to building
(b) Access to property 92. The second twenty year road plan is also called
(c) Provisions of underground sewers, water ________.
mains, gas and telephones pipe lines etc. (a) Lucknow Plan (b) Kanpur Plan
(d) All of the above (c) Bombay Plan (d) Nagpur Plan
WBPSC SAE 2003 MP Sub Engineer 2020
Ans. (d) : City road fulfils– TSPSC HMWSS Manager 2020
(a) Provisions of underground sewers, water mains, Ans. (c) : Three road development plan
gas and telephone pipe lines etc. Ist 20 year 2nd 20 year 3rd 20 year
(b) Admission of air and light to building. road plan road plan road plan
(c) Access for property. Venue Nagpur Bombay Lucknow
88. Minimum radius of curvature of National Year 1943 1961 1981
Highway or State Highway in hilly region free Target at 16 km/100 32 km/100 82 km/100
from snow is kept: end km2 area km2 area km2 area
(a) 60 m (b) 33 m 93. For a highway project, preliminary survey is
(c) 50 m (d) 30 m done for____________.
WBPSC SAE 2003 (a) quality control tests
Highway Engineering 483 YCT
 (b) design details of embankment Ans. (b) : A road connecting two towns is known as
(c) preparation of subgrade country road.
(d) topographic details and soil survey 98. In which year Motor Vehicle Act was brought
MP Sub Engineer 2020 into effect by Government of India to regulate
Ans. (d) : Preliminary survey– the road traffic in the form of traffic laws,
Main objective of the preliminary survey are : ordinances and regulations.
(i) To collect all the necessary physical information (a) 1959 (b) 1929
and details of topograph, drainage and soil. (c) 1949 (d) 1939
(ii) To estimate quantity of earthquake materials and TSPSC HMWSSB Manager 2020
other construction aspect and to work out the cost of Ans. (d) : In year 1939, meter vehicle act was brought
alternate proposal. into effect by government of India to regulate the road
(iii) To finalizes the best alignment from all traffic in the form of traffic laws, ordinances and
consideration. regulations.
94. According to Border Road Organisation, class 99. The rate of change of velocity is known as
5 of hill road has width of ________. _____.
(a) 5.6m (b) 6m (a) acceleration (b) speed
(c) 4.2m (d) 4.9m (c) momentum (d) displacement
MP Sub Engineer 2020 PGCIL DET 17.11.2018 Shift-II
Ans. (d) : Ans. (a) : • The rate change of velocity is called as
According to BRO, the hill road classified as– acceleration.
(i) National highways • Acceleration unit is m/s2 while velocity is m/s
(ii) Class 9 (6 m wide) ∆v ∆v ∆d m
(iii) Class 5 (4.9 m wide) • Acceleration = = = =
(iv) Class 3 (2.45 m to 3.65 m wide) ∆t ∆t ∆t.∆t s 2
95. The Nagpur Road Plan which is the First 20 100. The headquarter of the Indian Road Congress
year Road Development Plan assumes which of is at:
the following patterns of the road network? (a) Mumbai (b) Kolkata
(a) Star and Block Pattern (c) Chennai (d) New Delhi
(b) Radial and Circular Pattern Kerala JID 12.12.2019
Karnataka PSC JE Code 126/2018
(c) Rectangular Pattern
KPSC JE 13.11.2016
(d) Star and Grid Pattern KPSC JE Code 102/2014
BSPHCL29.01.2019 Shift-I Ans. (d) : India Road congress set up in December
Ans. (d) : Nagpur road plan (1943)– 1934, on the recommendations of the Indian Road
• The first 20 years road development plan (1943- Development committee (Jayakar Committee) The
1963) popularly known as Nagpur road plan. headquarter of IRC is New Delhi.
• Recommended pattern by road system is star & grid. 101. IRC stands for
• The target for Nagpur road development plan was (a) International Road Congress
aimed at 16 km per 100 sq. km area of the country. (b) Indian Road Congress
96. The road foundation for modern highways (c) Indian Revenue Committee
construction was developed by (d) None of these
a) Telford Haryana SSC JE 13.04.2018, Afternoon
(b) Macadam MH PWD 2016
(c) Tresguet Ans. (b) : IRC– Stand for Indian road congress.
(d) Telford and Macadam simultaneously IRC formed in 1934
Mizoram PSC 26.03.2010 Paper-II • Other CRF (central road fund)– 1929
Ans. (d) : Development of highway- • Central road research institute (CRRI) – 1950
Roman Road : No gradient thickness • Motor vehicle act–1939
about 0.75 to 1.2 m. 102. The roads connecting capital cities of states is
Tresguet construction : Gradient provided called:
thickness reduced to 0.3 m. (a) national highway (b) expressway
Telford construction : Subgrade with 9m, (c) state highway (d) capital highway
binding layer of wearing HPSSC JE Code 522/2019
course 4 cm. HPSSC JE Code 438/2018
Macadam Construction : Suggested no requirement Mizoram PSC Disaster Mgmt. 2015 Paper III
of heavy stones in PSSSB JE 22.11.2015
foundation. WBPSC JE 2005, 2007
WBPSC SAE 2004
97. A road connecting two towns is known as
(a) Urban road (b) Country road Ans. (a) : • National highway (NH) are main highway
(c) Highway (d) None of the above running through the length and breadth of India,
WBPSC SAE 2000 connecting major ports, foreign highway capitals of
Highway Engineering 484 YCT
 large states and large industrial and tourist centres Ans. (b) : • The desirable camber for straight roads
including roads required for strategic movements of with water bound macadam or gravel surface is 1 in 40
defense of India. to 1 in 33.
National highway–NH are the most important roads
Range of camber in area
connecting cities of different state. Type of Road of
• Provincial Highway are the main road within a state S.N
surface Heavy Low
connecting important town of the state. rainfall rainfall
State highway– Road linking a state capital with 1. Cement concrete 1 in 50 or 1 in 60 or
different district headquarters are known as state and thick 2% 1.7%
highway. bituminous surface
103. An access from a road to private property is 2. Thin bituminous 1 in 40 or 1 in 50 or
known as surface 2.5% 2%
(a) Bypas road 3. Water bound 1 in 33 or 1 in 40 or
(b) Fly over macadam and 3% 2.5%
(c) Drive way gravel pavement
(d) Loop road 4. Earth road 1 in 25 or 1 in 33 or
Mizoram PSC Disaster Mgmt. 2015, Paper III 4% 3%
Ans. (c) : Drive way – An access from a road to 107. A vehicle or train enters a curve, it experiences
private property is known as drive way. a centrifugal force which tends to cause
• Drive way connects the highway with commercial derailment, overturning, or side slipping of
establishment like fuel stations, service stations etc. vehicles; the raising of the outer edge of a curve
104. As per IRC the formation width of a major over the inner one is known as
district road is (a) Uniform force (b) Lower elevation
(c) Superelevation (d) Constant force
(a) 6 m (b) 7.5 m
Punjab PSC SDE 15.06.2021
(c) 9.0 m (d) 12.0 m
WBPSC JE 2007 Ans. (c) : In order to counteract the effect of
centrifugal force and to reduce the tendency of the
Ans. (c) : As per IRC the formation width of a major
vehicle/train to over turn or skid or derailment, the
district road is 9 m. For village road formation width is outer edge of the pavement/curve is raised with respect
7.5 m. For national highway and state highway to the inner edge, thus providing a transverse slope
formation width is 12 m. through out the length of the horizontal curve.
105. The road connecting a district headquarters of This transverse inclination to the curve surface is
one state to the district headquarters of a known as super elevation or cant or banking.
neighboring state is called 108. Which of the following is associated with
(a) State highway "limiting gradient" on highways?
(b) National highway (a) Requirement of maximum tractive effort for a
(c) Major district road short distance
(d) Other district road (b) Requirement of minimum tractive effort on
the whole gradient
Kerala JID 12.12.2019
(c) Efficient drainage condition
Ans. (a) : State highway–It is usually road that link (d) Alignment design in general
important cities, town and district headquarters within Panjab PSC SDO 14.06.2021
the state. Ans. (c) : Where topography of a place compels
National highway–Link all major cities of extreme adopting steeper gradients than ruling gradients,
part of the country. These are the primary road limiting gradients are used in view of enormous
systems. increase in cost in constructing roads with gentler
gradients. However the length of continuous grade
line steeper than ruling value should be limited. On
2. Geometric Design rolling terrain and on hill roads, it may be frequently
106. The desirable camber for straight roads with necessary to exceed ruling gradient and adopt limiting
water bound macadam or gravel surface, is gradient, but care should be taken to separate such
(a) 1 in 33 to 1 in 25 stretches of steep gradients by providing either a level
(b) 1 in 40 to 1 in 33 road of a road with easier grade
(c) 1 in 40 to 1 in 50 Terrain Limiting
(d) None of these gradient
HPSSSC JE 11.04.2021 Plain or rolling 5%
HPSSC JE CODE 502/2018 Mountainous terrain and steep 6%
HPSSC JE Code 545/2018 terrain, elevation > 3000 m
SSC JE 2011 (Morning) Steep terrain < 3000 m 7%
Highway Engineering 485 YCT
109. Horizontal curves on highways are provided : Ans. (d) : Width of Carriage way–It is decided on the
(a) to break the monotony of driving. basis of capacity which depend on traffic lane and
(b) to discourage the tendency to increase speed. number of lanes.
(c) to decrease the mental strain on drivers. No. of lane Carriage way
(d) All of these width (m)
HPPCL JE Civil 13.02.2021 Single lane 3.75
Ans. (d) : Horizontal curves on highways are Two lane, no kerb 7.0
provided– Two lane, raised kerbs 7.5
• To break the monotony of driving. Intermediate carriage 5.5
• To discourage the tendency to increase speed. Multi-lane 3.5 m per lane
• To decrease the mental strain on drivers. 113. The range of camber provided in the area of
110. Grade compensation is provided in the case of : heavy rainfall for water bound macadam
(a) Decrease in resistance to traction due to (WBM) and gravel pavement is
gradient (a) 3% (b) 4%
(b) Increase in resistance to traction due to (c) 5% (d) 2.5%
gradient RPSC ACF and FRO 24.02.2021
(c) Increase in resistance to traction due to Ans. (a) : Camber depends on type of pavement &
horizontal curve and gradient rain fall –
(d) Increase in resistance to traction due to Rain fall
horizontal curve Camber type
Heavy Light
JMRC JE 05.02.2021
(i) Cement concrete or high 2% 1.7%
Ans. (b) : Grade compensation in curvature is type of bituminous surface
provided to off – load the extra resistance due to
curvature. Compensation in BGy is 0.04% per degree (ii) Thin bituminous surface 2.5% 2%
of curvature. 80 while providing/fixing the gradient in (iii) WBM 3% 2.5%
a curvature care is to be taken for compensation. (iv) Earth Road 4% 3%
111. The main object of a preliminary survey is : 114. Which one of the following equipment is used
(a) to collect the necessary physical information to measure the pavement unevenness index?
and details of topography, drainage and soil (a) Bump Integrator
properties. (b) Odometer
(b) to estimate cost of alternative alignment. (c) Network Survey vehicles
(c) to finalise the best alignment. (d) None of the above
(d) All of these MH Nagar Parishad Mains 2018
HPPCL JE Civil 13.02.2021 MH PWD 2019
Ans. (d) : The main object of the preliminary survey Ans. (a) : Surface unevenness affect the surface
are– roughness but the latter is measured over a long
(i) To survey the various alternative alignments distance at high speed. The IRC also specified
proposed after the reconnaissance and to collect maximum permissible value of roughness in mm/km
all the necessary physical information and details for road either towed fifth wheel bump indicator or car
of topography, drainage and soil. mounted bump indicator can be used for measuring
(ii) To estimate quantity of earth work materials and the road roughness.
other construction aspects and to workout the An unevenness Index value–
cost of alternative proposals. • Less than 1500 mm/km– good
(iii) To finalize the best alignment from all • Less than 2500 mm/km– satisfactory
considerations. • Greater than 3200 mm/km- uncomfortable even for
speed of 55 km/hr
112. The width of carriageway for a two lane road
with raised kerbs, as recommended by IRC is: 115. According to IRC, the width of the
(a) 7.0m (b) 5.5 m carriageway is
(c) 8.5m (d) 7.5m (a) 3.75m for single lane
DSSSB JE (Mains) 20.03.2021 (Evening) (b) 7.0m for two lane without raised kerbs
SSC JE Civil 11.12.2020 (Evening) (c) 7.5m for two lane with raised kerbs
MH PWD 2018 (d) all of the above
MH Nagar Parishad Mains 2018 MH Aurangabad MNC 2019
LMRC AM 2018 Shift-II Ans. (d) : Width of carriage way – (IRC)
PGCIL 13.09.2018 Single lane – 3.75m
PGCIL DET 17.11.2018 Shift-II Two lane (No kerb)– 7.0 m
MH PWD 2018
Nagaland PSC CTSE 2017 Paper-I
Two lane (with kerbs) – 7.5m
Nagaland PSC 2017 Paper-I Intermediate carriage – 5.5m
KMC 2009 Multi- lane – 3.5 per lane
Highway Engineering 486 YCT
 Exam Point Ans. (b) : Reaction time– Reaction time of the driver
In PIEV theory, P stands for- Perception is the time taken from the instant the object is visible
Street inlets for draining rain water are located to the driver to the instant the brakes are effectively
along the road side on straight roads at an applied.
interval of– 30 to 60 m • The reaction time for calculation of stopping distance
From the point of tangency before an may be assumed 2.5 sec.
intersection, the route markers are fixed at a 120. The value of camber recommended for thin
distance of– 100m to 150m bituminous surface in area of heavy rainfall is
In highway construction, rolling starts from– (a) 1 in 33 (b) 1 in 40
Sides and proceed to centre (c) 1 in 25 (d) 1 in 50
Nagaland PSC 2017 Paper-I
116. Stopping sight distance is the minimum
Ans. (b) : Recommended value of camber for different
distance available on a highway which is the type of roads surfaces–
(a) distance of sufficient length to stop the
vehicle without collision S.N. Type of road Range of camber
(b) distance visible to a driver during night surface
driving Heavy Light
(c) height of the object above the road surface rainfall rainfall
(d) distance equal to the height of the driver's eye 1 Cement concrete and 1 in 50 1 in 60
high type bituminous (2%) (1.7%)
above the road surface
surface
KPSC JE 2.7.2016
2 Thin bituminous 1 in 40 1 in 50
Ans. (a) : Stopping sight distance (SSD)– surface (2.5%) (2.0%)
The minimum sight distance available on a highway at 3 WBM, gravel 1 in 33 1 in 40
any spot should be of sufficient length to stop a vehicle (3%) (2.5%)
travelling at a design speed, safely without collision 4 Earthen road 1 in 25 1 in 33
with any other obstruction. (4%) (3%)
117. Steps in the new project work follow : 121. The width of formation of road means the
(a) Location of final alignment, Map study, width of
reconnaissance survey, preliminary survey, (a) Carriage way
detailed survey (b) Pavement and shoulders
(b) Map study, reconnaissance survey, (c) Embankment at top level
preliminary survey, location of final (d) Embankment at ground level
alignment, detailed survey WBPSC SAE 2000
(c) Location of final alignment, Map study, Ans. (c) : Width of formation or roadway is the sum of
reconnaissance survey, detailed survey width of pavement or carriage way including
(d) None of the above separators if any and the shoulders. Formation or
HPSSC JE CODE 552/2018 roadway width is the top width of highway
Ans. (b) : Engineering survey for highway alignment– embankment or bottom width of highway cutting
1. Map study excluding the side drains.
2. Reconnaissance survey 122. In the Hill roads, if several alternate alignments
3. Preliminary survey are surveyed which fulfill the geometric
4. Final location and detailed survey standards, then the preferred alignment is the
118. The full width of land acquired before one which has resisting length as
finalizing a highway alignment is known as (a) Maximum
(a) width of formation (b) right of way (b) Minimum
(c) carriageway (d) roadway (c) Very near to average resisting length of all
Assam PSC AE (PRD) 2020 the alignments
(d) Zero
Ans. (b) : Right of way– JKSSB JE 2013
• Right of way is the area of land acquired for the Ans. (b) : In the Hill roads, if several alternate
road, along its alignment. alignments are surveyed which fulfill the geometric
• The width of this acquired land is known as land standards, then the preferred alignment is the one
width and it depends on the importance of the road which has resisting length as minimum.
and possible future development. 123. What is Compound curve?
119. The reaction time for calculation of stopping (a) Two or more arcs of same radii meeting each
distance may be assumed as other at common tangent point
(a) 5 secs (b) 2.5 secs (b) Two or more arcs of same radii meeting each
(c) 0.5 secs (d) 10.0 secs other at initial tangent point
Nagaland PSC 2017 Paper-I (c) Two or more arcs of different radii meeting
MH PWD 2016 each other at common tangent point
Highway Engineering 487 YCT
 (d) Two or more arcs of different radii meeting Exam Point
each other at different tangent points Normal formation width of a hill road for one-
JKSSB JE 2013 way traffic, is– 4.8 m
Ans. (c) : Compound curve– A portion of the traffic way and roadway used by
• Compound curve is a combination of two or more the pedal bycyclists is only called– Cycle track
simple circular curves with different radii. Footpaths are higher than the road surface. The
• In this case both or all the curves lie on the same range of their height is– 15cm to 20 cm
side of the common tangent. 126. In the cross-section of a road, formation width
is defined as
(a) width of carriageway including separators, if
any
(b) width of shoulders
(c) width of carriageway excluding separators, if
any
(d) width of carriageway including separators, if
any plus width of shoulders
RPSC Lect. (Tech.Edu.) Paper-II 2021
Ans. (d) : Formation width–
124. The width of National & State Highways in • Width of formation or roadway is the sum of
plain and rolling terrain for single lane is widths of pavement or carriageway including
(a) 12.0 m (b) 6.25 m separates if any, and the shoulders.
(c) 14.0 m (d) 8.80 m • Formation or roadway width is the top width of the
HSSC JE 12.4.2018, Evening highway embankment or the bottom width of
RRB JE Ranchi 26.08.2015 highway cutting excluding the side drains.
Ans. (a) : 127. Which one of the following shape of transition
Road Roadway width in (m) curve is recommended by Indian road
classification Plain and Mountainous congress?
rolling and steep (a) Circular (b) Spiral
terrain terrain (c) Parabolic (d) Lemniscates
NH/SH 12 6.25 (single lane) RPSC Lect. (Tech.Edu.) Paper-II 2021
MDR 9 4.75 (single lane) JPSC AE Paper-II 10.04.2021
NPCIL JE 2020
ODR 7.5 – 9.0 4.75 (single lane) Maharashtra JE 2018 Shift-II
VR 7.5 4.0 (single lane) M.P. VYAPAM Draftsman 1.9.2018 9.00 am
Ans. (b) : Spiral or Clothoid– Various form of curve
Exam Point are suitable for highway transitions, but the one most
The width of formation for two–lane national or
popular and recommended for IRC is the spiral.
state highway located in mountainous and steep
• It is the easy to set out in the field and the rate of change
terrain– 8.8 m
of acceleration is uniform through the length.
The road surfacing should be– Impervious,
Transition curve–The IRC recommends the use of the
Durable, Stable
spiral as transition curve in the horizontal alignment of
The IRC recommended width of a single lane
highway due to following reasons–
carriageway– 3.75 m
• The ideal shape of transition curve should be such
The width of carriageway for multi–lane
that rate of introducting of centrifugal force should be
pavements as recommended by the Indian Roads constant. In ideal transition curve the length (Ls)
Congress is– 3.5 m per lane should be inversely proportional to radius (R).
In State Highways width of carriage way shoulder
1
on should be– 8m and 2m wide Ls ∝ or Ls.R = Constant
The minimum width of the NH should be– r
5.7 m • The spiral transition fulfils the above condition.
As per IRC standards,The minimum roadway 128. The type of transition curves generally
width on single lane bridge is– 4.25m provided on hill roads, is
(a) circular (b) spiral
125. The minimum coefficient of lateral friction for
(c) cubic parabola (d) lemniscate
a highways is : WBPSC JE 2018
(a) 1 (b) 0.5
Ans. (b) : On hill roads generally spiral curve are
(c) 0.4 (d) 0.15 provided. Spiral curves are used in horizontal
UKSSSC JE 2017 (PTCUL, UPCL) alignments to provide a gradual transition between
Ans. (d) : IRC recommends, tangent sections and circular curves. While a circular
longitudinal friction coefficient value = 0.35-0.40 curve has a radius that is constant, a spiral curve has a
lateral friction coefficient value = 0.15 radius that varies along its length.
Highway Engineering 488 YCT
129. Find the area of permanent land required for a 133. The minimum width of shoulder,
state highway for one kilometer length, the recommended by IRC is
width of permanent land being 30 metre. (a) 3.75 m (b) 7.0 m
(a) 1 hectare (b) 8 hectare (c) 2.5 m (d) 4.6 m
(c) 3 hectare (d) 12 hectare DSSSB JE (Mains) 20.03.2021 (Afternoon)
DSSSB JE (Mains) 20.03.2021 (Evening) CGPSC, AP, Lecturer Exam 2016
MH Beed Zila Parishad 2013
Ans. (c) : Length of highway = 1 km
Ans. (c) : Road shoulders– Shoulders are provided
width = 30 metre = 0.030 km
along the road edge to serve as on emergency lane for
Area = 1 × 0.03 vehicle.
= 0.03 sq. km
• As per IRC The minimum width of shoulder should
Area = 3 hectare be 2.5m.
130. When the highway pavement surface is smooth • Repair of broken down vehicle/ or to act as an
and also wet, the coefficient of friction emergency lane.
(a) Neither increases nor reduces • For feature widening of road
(b) Increases up normally • Overtaking operation etc.
(c) Increases 134. While aligning a hill road with a ruling
(d) Reduces gradient of 6 percent, a horizontal curve of
DGVCL 06.01.2021 (Morning) radius 68 m is encountered. Find the
Ans. (d) : • Coefficient of friction is less when compensated gradient at the curve.
pavement surface is smooth and wet. (a) 4 percent (b) 3.3 percent
• Also decrease with increase in temperature tyre (c) 4.90 percent (d) 5.5 percent
pressure and load. DSSSB JE (Mains) 20.03.2021 (Afternoon)
• New tyres are move dependable than smooth and old Ans. (c) : N = 6%, R = 68m
ones in adverse surface and condition lice wet. 30 + R 30 + 68
Grade compensation = = = 1.44
131. The preferable unevenness index upto speed of R 68
100 kmph is 75 75
(a) 620 cm/km (b) 250 cm/km or = = 1.10
(c) 500 cm/km (d) 400 cm/km R 68
DSSSB JE (Mains) 20.03.2021 (Evening) use minimum i.e., 1.10%
Compensated gradient = 6 – 1.10 = 4.9%
Ans. (b) : An evenness index should be kept below 150
cm/km for good pavement surface of high speed
highway. Exam Point
100 kmph → 250 cm/km The desirable slope for highway embankment in
More than 100 kmph → 350 cm/km accordance with safety conditions is– 1 in 3
132. Consider two cars approaching from the The width of shoulders provided on a road side
opposite directions at 90 km/h and 60 km/h. If varies in between– 1.2m and 1.8 m
For non-passing sight distance a stationary
the reaction time is 2.5s, coefficient of friction
object of this height is considered– 15 cm
is 0.7 and brake efficiency is 50% in both the The boundaries between the pavement and
cases, the minimum sight distance required to shoulders or foot paths are known as– Kerbs
avoid a head-on collision will be nearly Width of the shoulders of carriage way is
(a) 154 m (b) 188 m generally kept– 250 cm
(c) 212 m (d) 236 m
135. The radius of 30 curve in design of tracks will
ESE 2019
be
Ans. (d) (a) 573 m (b) 860 m
SSD = SDD1 + SSD2 (c) 1719 m (d) 2292 m
v2 MH WCD 2019
SSD1 = vt + Ans. (a) : radius R = ?
2gfη
Std. chain length = 30 m take
252  m  1720
= 25 × 2.5 + Taken g = 10 for 30 m std chain = R =
2 ×10 × ( 0.7 × 0.5 )  
sec 2  D
= 151.78m 1720
Similarly R= = 573m
3
16.67 2 136. The radius of 20 curve in design of tracks will
SSD 2 = 16.67 × 2.5 +
2 × 10 × ( 0.7 × 0.5 ) be–
(a) 573 m (b) 860 m
= 81.36m
(c) 1719 m (d) 2292 m
SSD = SSD1 + SSD2 = 233.14 m ≃ 236m
MH WCD 2019
Highway Engineering 489 YCT
 Ans. (b) : D = 20, R= ? 139. Cant is provided in road construction at :
1720 (a) Junction of road
R= (b) Outer side of road curve
2 (c) Inner side of road curve
R = 860m
(d) None of these
137. The full form of PIEV of the PIEV theory is : UJVNL JE 2016
(a) Perception, Intellection, Emotion, Volition
(b) Perception, Intellection, Emotion, Vision Ans. (b) : Cant– Cant or super elevation is the
(c) Perception, Intelligence, Emotion, Volition difference in height between the outer and the inner side
(d) Propound, Intellection, Emotion, Volition of road.
RRB JE CBT-II 28–08–2019 (morning) It is provided by gradually lifting the outer edge. To
PGCIL 13.09.2018 neutralize the lateral effect of forces.
Ans. (a) : PIEV Theory– Total reaction time of drives 140. If the average centre to centre spacing of
is split into four parts. vehicles is 30 meters, then the basic capacity of
(i) Perception (ii) Intellection (iii) Emotion the traffic lane at a speed of 60 kmph is :
(iv) Volition (a) 2,000 vehicles per day
(b) 2,000 vehicles per hour
(c) 2,500 vehicles per hour
(d) 2,500 vehicles per day
Odisha JE (Mains) 2015
Ans. (b) : Given,
S = 30 m
V = 60 kmph
P = Perception 1000V 1000 × 60
C= , C=
I = Intellection S 30
E = Emotion = 2000 vehicles per hour per lane.
V = Volition 141. The co-efficient of average rolling friction of a
Exam Point road is fr and its grade is +G%. If the grade of
If R is the radius of the curve and L is the length this road is doubled, what will be the
of the long chord, the shift of the curve is (all in percentage change in the braking distance (for
the design vehicle to come to a stop) measured
L2
meter units)– along the horizontal (assume all other
24R parameters are kept unchanged)?
The roadways width 'b', shoulder width 's' and (a) 0.01 G × 100/(fr + 0.02G)
carriage way width 'w' should be related as– (b) 0.01 G × 100/(fr + 0.01G)
b = w +2s (c) 2 fr × 100/(fr + 0.01 G)
Right of way is the summation of the width of– (d) None of these
Carriage way, shoulder and road margins HPSSSC JE 11.04.2021
The portion of road between the edge of road
formation and the edge of pavement is known V2
Ans. (a) : Braking distance (d) =
as– Berm 254 ( f ± n% )
138. A road is being designed for a speed of 110 When gradient (n1) = + G%,
km/hr on a horizontal curve with a super
V2
elevation of 8%. If the coefficient a side friction d1
is 0.10, the minimum radius of the curve (in m) 254 ( f r ± G% )
required for safe vehicular movement is When gradient (n2) = + 2G%
(a) 115.0 (b) 152.3 V2
(c) 264.3 (d) 528.5 d2
HPSSC JE - 18.04.2021 254 ( f r + 2G% )
Ans. (d) : Given,
% change =
( d1 − d 2 ) ×100
V = 110 kmph
d1
e = 8% = 0.08
f = 0.10  V 2
V2 
=  −  × 100
(110 ) (r ) (r ) 
2
V2  254 f + 0.01G 254 f + 0.02G
e+f= ⇒ 0.08 + 0.10 =
127R 127R V2
254 ( f r + 0.01G )
2
110
R=
127 ( 0.08 + 0.10 ) 0.01G
= × 100
R = 529.30m ( f r + 0.02G )
Highway Engineering 490 YCT
142. The value of standard load at 2.5 mm Exam Point
penetration is The width of the right of way is decided to
(a) 13.44 kN (b) 20.16 kN accommodate– Vertical curve
(c) 7.5 kN (d) 10.08 kN The full width of road acquired before finalizing
GSSSB AAE 07.02.2021 a highway is– Right way
Ans. (a) : Standard values for 2.5mm and 5.0mm As per IRC recommendations, the roadway
penetration over standard aggregated are given in table. width for single lane NH or SH in mountainous
Standard load values or steep terrain is– 6.25 m
Pressure The width of National & State Highways in plain
Penetration Load
and rolling terrain for single lane is– 12.0 m
( mm ) ( kg ) ( kg / cm )
2
The convexity provided to the carriageway
between the crown and edge of the pavement, is
2.5 1370 70 known as– Camber
5 2055 105 In scanty rainfall regions, the camber provided
will be– Flatter
 1370 × 9.81kN 146. Calculate the safe stopping sight distance for
1370K gf = 1000 design speed of 55 kmph for two way traffic on
 a two lane road. Coefficients of friction is 0.37
 = 13.4397
 and reaction time of driver is 2.7 seconds.
≃ 13.44kN (a) 146.80 m (b) 16.4 m

 (c) 122.8 m (d) 73.40 m
143. What is the time horizon for long-term DSSSB JE (Mains) 20.03.2021 (Afternoon)
transport planning? Ans. (d) : Given,
(a) 50 years (b) 30 years V = 55 kmph
(c) 20 years (d) 5 years t = 2.7
DSSSB JE 20.03.2021 Morning f = 0.37
Ans. (d) : The time horizon for long-term transport V2
planning is 5 years. SSD = 0.278Vt +
254f
144. The radius of a horizontal circular curve is 90
552
m. the design speed is 45 kmph and the design = 0.278 × 55 × 2.7 + = 73.47m
coefficient of lateral friction is 0.15 calculate 254 × 0.37
the required super elevation. 147. As per IRC class AA loading the nose to tail
(a) 1 in 45.8 (b) 1 in 21.2 spacing between two successive vehicles shall
(c) 1 in 36.8 (d) 1 in 26.8 NOT be les than:
DSSSB JE (Mains) 20.03.2021 (Afternoon) (a) 90 m (b) 50 m
Ans. (c) : Given, (c) 10 m (d) 30 m
R = 90m CG SPHCL AE 2018
V = 45 kmph Ans. (a) : IRC class AA loading–
f = 0.15 • The nose to tail spacing between two successive
V2 vehicles shall not less than 90m.
e+f = IRC class A loading–
127R
• The nose to tail distance between successive trains
452
e= − 0.15 shall not be less than 18.4 m.
127 × 90 148. Determine the rate of super elevation for a
e = 0.0271 = 1in 36.8 horizontal highway curve radius of 500 m and
145. The extra widening of pavement at horizontal speed 100 kmph.
curves on two lane roads is not required if the (a) 0.389 (b) 0.089
radius of curve is greater than: (c) 0.28 (d) 0.027
(a) 300 m (b) 250 m DSSSB JE (Mains) 20.03.2021 (Evening)
(c) 200 m (d) 100 m Ans. (b) : Given,
KPSC Over Seer Gr-II
Irro : Dept (Code 42/2017) V = 100 kmph
DSSSB JE (Mains) 20.03.2021 (Afternoon) R = 500 m
Ans. (a) : IRC recommended values of extra widening V2
e+f=
for single and two lane pavement are given below; 127R
• If R > 300m, then extra widening is not provided. f = 0,
• If R < 50 m, then extra widening is provided at ( 0.75V )
2
V2 1002
inner edge. e= = =
127R 225R 225 × 500
• If 50 < R < 300m, then extra widening is = 0.0888 ≃ 0.089m
provided at both the edges.
Highway Engineering 491 YCT
 Exam Point 151. When a vehicle traverses a horizontal curve,
Camber specified for water bound Macadam the horizontal force acting outwards through
Road is– 1 in 40 to 1 in 30 the centre of gravity of the vehicle is called :
The camber of road should approximately be– (a) Eccentric force (b) Centripetal force
Equal to half of the longitudinal gradient (c) Centrifugal force (d) Restoring force
The shape of the camber best suited for cement TNCSC AE 16.12.2020
concrete pavements is– Straight line Ans. (c) :
A camber on a pavement, is provided by– • When a vehicle traverse a horizontal curve, the
Parabolic method, Straight line method, horizontal force acting outwards through the centre
Straight & Parabolic at crown of gravity of the vehicle is called centrifugal force.
149. A vehicle is travelling in a highway having a • Centripetal force :
camber of 6%. The speed of the vehicle is 55
km/hr. The radius beyond which no super
elevation is required, to be _____.
(a) 45 m (b) 224 m
(c) 27 m (d) 67.9m
DGVCL 5.1.2021 Evening
Ans. (b) : Given
V = 55 kmph
When, no super elevation is required then we take emin mv 2
= camber value emin = 6% = 0.06 FC =
R
V2
∴ emin + f = V ↑ FC ↑
127R
R ↑ FC ↓
( 0.75V )
2

f = 0, e min = A centripetal force is a net force that act on an

127R object to keep it moving along a circular path.
V2 • Restoring force is a force which acts to bring a
e min = body to its equilibrium position.
225R
2 The restoring force is a function only of position of
V
R= the mass or particle.
225e min 152. What is the mechanical extra widening
552 required for a two-lane pavement of width 7 m
= on a horizontal curve of radius 250 m, if the
225 × 0.06
= 224.07m longest wheel base of a vehicle expected on the
road is 5 m with a design speed of 70 km/h ?
150. As the speed of the vehicles moving on the road (a) 0.155 m (b) 0.225 m
vary considerably, it has been recommended (c) 0.100 m (d) 0.552 m
that the super-elevation shall be found out by SSC JE 23.03.2021 (Morning)
taking average speed as ______.
(a) Three-fourth of the actual speed Ans. (c) : Given,
l = 5m
(b) Same as the actual speed
R = 250 m, n = 2 lane
(c) Half of the actual speed
(d) 1.5 times of actual speed nl 2
Wm =
DGVCL 5.1.2021 Afternoon 2R
Ans. (a) : Calculate the super elevation corresponding 2 × 52
3 = = 0.100m
to of the actual speed & neglecting the lateral 2 × 250
4 153. As per IRC (Indian Roads Congress)
friction, recommendation, what will be the designed
( ) stopping sight distance (in metres) at the
2
3 V
4 vehicle speed of 80 km/h on a rural highway ?
⇒ e+o =
127R (a) 120 (b) 140
(c) 70 (d) 60
( 0.75V )
2

e= SSC JE 23.03.2021 (Morning)

127R Ans. (a) : As per IRC, stopping sight distance-
V2 Design speed 20 25 30 40 50 60 70 80 100
e= (kmph)
225R Minimum 20 25 30 30 60 80 100 120 180
Here, V = Kmph stopping sight
R = metre distance (m)

Highway Engineering 492 YCT

154. In a horizontal highway curve, if the width of Ans. (d) :
the highway is 10 m and the outer edge is 40
cm higher with respect to the inner edge, then
the super elevation is :
(a) 1 in 20 (b) 1 in 50
(c) 1 in 25 (d) 1 in 40
SSC JE 23.03.2021 (Afternoon) 2x 2
Ans. (c) : y=
NW
2 × ( 4)
2

= = 0.08m
50 × 8
157. Maximum superelevation recommended by the
40cm IRC for urban road stretches with frequent
tan θ = e = intersections is
10m
40cm (a) 5.5% (b) 10.0%
= (c) 7.0% (d) 4.0%
10 ×100cm RPSC Lect. (Tech.Edu.) Paper-II 2021
1
= Ans. (d) : • Maximum superelevation recommended
25 by the IRC for urban road stretches with frequent
= 1 in 25 intersection is 4%
155. What will be ruling minimum radius for •10% → for Hilly Area
horizontal curve of NH (National Highway) in e max = 
plain terrain ? in plain terrain ? •7% → for plain & Rolling Terrain
(Assume ruling design speed = 127 km/h,
minimum design speed = 80 km/h, rate of super Exam Point
elevation e = 0.05 and coefficient of friction = For water bound macadam roads in heavy
0.05) rainfall region, generally recommended value of
(a) 800 m (b) 1270 m camber is– 1 IN 33
(c) 400 m (d) 1300 m The cross slope of pavement surface adopted in
SSC JE 23.03.2021 (Afternoon) macadam road is– 1 IN 36
5 The highest point (in cross section) of a curved
Ans. (b) : Given, V = 127 × = 35.277 m/sec road surface, commonly at or near the center is
18 called as– Crown
V2 The amount of camber provided in highway
R rullingmin =
( emax + f ) g surface located in an area having light rainfall is
1 in 60. The most appropriate road surface
35.277 2 corresponding to the provided camber will be–
= = 1268.569 ≃ 1270m
( 0.05 + 0.05 ) 9.18 Cement concrete
158. Vertical alignment of a two lane road is
Exam Point normally designed considering
Excessive camber on pavements may cause– (a) Ruling gradient
Erosion of the berms (b) Limiting gradient
Recommended value of camber for thin (c) Exceptional gradient
bituminous surface is in the range of– (d) Minimum gradient
1/40 to 1/50 RPSC Lect. (Tech.Edu.) Paper-II 2021
Camber in the road is provided for– Ans. (a) : Ruling Gradient-
Effective drainage • It is the maximum gradient within which
The recommended camber for bituminous type designer wants to design the vertical profile of
of road– 1 IN 48 to 1 IN 60 the road, hence it is also known as design
The camber for cement concrete and high type gradients.
bituminous surface for heavy rain fall condition • It depends upon topography, length of the grade,
is– 1 IN 50 design speed, pulling power of vehicle and
156. An 8 m wide bituminous concrete pavement of presence of horizontal curves.
a state highway is to be constructed in a heavy 159. For the purpose of calculating headlight sight
rainfall region. What should be the height of distance for a valley curve, the height of
the crown with respect to the edges if cross fall headlight above the road surface, as per Indian
of 1 in 50 used ? Roads Congress, is taken as
(a) 0.07 m (b) 0.058 m (a) 0.15 m (b) 0.75 m
(c) 0.062 m (d) 0.08 m (c) 1.0 m (d) 1.2 m
SSC JE 23.03.2021 (Afternoon) RPSC Lect. (Tech.Edu.) Paper-II 2021
Highway Engineering 493 YCT
 Ans. (b) : According to IRC recommended– I.R.C. suggests
• The height of head light above road surface, is the coefficient of lateral friction as 0.15 and for
taken as 0.75 m as per Indian Road congress. coefficient of longitudinal friction as 0.35-0.4
• The beam of head light is up to one degree depending of the speed.
upwards from the grade of road. 163. The gradient on which a motor vehicle moving
• While designing the valley curve, the height of with a constant speed continues to descend
the object is assumed hill. with the same speed without any application of
power brakes is
160. The design of horizontal transition curve (a) Ruling gradient
length for highways should take into account (b) Limiting gradient
(a) two factors, namely, comfort and rate of (c) Exceptional gradient
change of super elevation (d) Floating gradient
(b) two factors, namely, the rate of change of RPSC ACF and FRO 24.02.2021
super elevation and minimum length formula Ans. (d) : Floating gradient– The gradient on which a
given by IRC motor vehicle moving with a constant speed
(c) only one factor, namely, the rate of change of continuous to descend with the same speed without
centrifugal acceleration any application of power brakes is called floating
(d) three factors, namely allowable values of rate gradient i.e. the vehicle does not require any tractive
of change of centrifugal acceleration, and effort to maintain the specific speed.
super elevation and the minimum length Ruling gradient– It is that maximum gradient within
formula given by IRC which the designer attempts to design the vertical
RPSC Lect. (Tech.Edu.) Paper-II 2021 profile of the road hence is known as design gradient.
Ans. (d) : The design of horizontal transition curve Limiting gradient– These are steeper than ruling
length for highways should take into account, three gradient used in view of enormous increase in cast in
factors. constructing roads with gentler, gradients.
(i) According to rate of change of centrifugal Exceptional gradient– This is steeper than above two
acceleration. gradients and is provided if it is unavoidable.
(ii) According to rate of change of super elevation. 164. If D is the degree of a curve, the percentage
(iii) According to empirical formula (IRC). reduction of gradient, is
161. Calculated the safe stopping sight distance for (a) 0.01 D (b) 0.02 D
design speed of 50 kmph for a two - way traffic (c) 0.03 D (d) 0.04 D
on a two lane road. Assume f = 0.37 and RPSC ACF and FRO 24.02.2021
reaction time (t) = 2.5 sec Ans. (d) : According to the IRC the grade
(a) 61.4 m (b) 65.2 m compensation is not necessary for gradients flatter than
(c) 63.7 m (d) 65.5 m 4.0 percent and therefore when applying grade
RPSC ACF and FRO 24.02.2021 compensation correction, the gradients need not be
Ans. (a) : Safe stopping sight distance. eased beyond 4 percent.
V 2 165. As per IRC recommendations, the maximum
SSD = 0.278 Vt + limit of super elevation for mixed traffic in
254f
plain terrain is :
( 50 )
2

= 0.278 × 50 × 2.5 + (a) 1 In 15 (b) 1 In 12.5

254 × 0.37 (c) 1 In 10 (d) 1 In 7.5
= 61.4 m (e) Equal to camber
162. What is the value of the lateral coefficient of JKSSB JE
the friction as per the IRC? HPSSC JE 2015
SSC JE 23.1.2018, Morning Shift Odisha JE (Mains) 02.08.2015
Nagaland PSC 2017 Paper-I AAI (Aeronautical JE) 2015
OR Odisha JE (Main) 2014
The lateral coefficient of friction recommended Ans. (a) : As per IRC recommendations, the maximum
by IRC in case of horizontal curve design is limit of super-elevation for mixed traffic in plain
(a) 0.20 (b) 0.15 terrain is 1 in 15.
(c) 0.40 (d) 0.30 • Mixed traffic facilities are most appropriate on roads
RPSC ACF and FRO 24.02.2021 with low volumes of traffic operating at low speeds.
NCL Overseer 22.02.2020
 1
0.07 = 15 for plain & rolling terrain
Kerala PSC JTO 2020
MH Asst. Town Planning 2018
MH PWD 2018
 1
e max = 0.1 = for hilly terrain
Ans. (b) : The frictional force that develops between  10
1
the wheel and the pavement is the load acting 0.04 = for urban road
multiplied by a factor called coefficient of friction.  25

Highway Engineering 494 YCT

 Exam Point (a) 0.35 m (b) 0.38 m
The vertical distance between the centre of the (c) 0.69 m (d) 0.73 m
lantern and the carriage way is– ESE 2019
Mounting height MESCOM AE 2017
The cross–sections for a highway is taken at– Ans. (c) : Width = 7m, Radius = 200m
Right angle to the center line, l = 6.5m, v = 65 km ph, n = 2
30 meters apart nl 2 v
From the shape is not preferable in camber– Extra widening = +
2R 9.5 R
Round shape
2 × ( 6.5 )
2
The recommended camber value on a relatively 65
+
imprevious pavement surface is– 1.7 to 2.0% 2 × 200 9.5 200
The camber of shoulders in water bound = .211 + .483 = 0.69 m
macadam roads is–
Equal to the cross slope of pavement Exam Point
If cross slope of a country is 10% to 25% the The main object of providing a camber is–
terrain is classified as– Rolling To drain off rain water from road surface, as
On kankar road, the camber generally provided quickly as possible
is– 1 IN 24 to 1 in 30 The slope of the line joining the crown and edge
166. Transition curves are introduced at either end of the road surface is known as–
of a circular curve, to obtain : Cross-fall/cross-slope/camber
(a) Gradual increase of super elevation from zero It cross slope of a country is greater than 60%,
at the tangent point to the specified amount at the terrain is classified as– Steep
the junction of the transition curve with main The desirable camber for straight cement
curve concrete roads, is– 1 in 60 to 1 in 40
(b) Gradually decrease of curvature from zero at The cross slopes on earthen roads should not be
the tangent point to the specified quantity at less than– 1 in 50
the junction of the transition curve with main For earthen roads, the camber should be
curve preferably– 1 in 25 to 1 in 33
(c) Gradual change of gradient from zero at the
tangent point to the specified amount at the 168. If R is the radius of the main curve, ∆ is the
junction of the transition curve with main angle of deflection, S is the shift and L is the
curve length of the transition curve, then total
(d) All of these tangent length of the curve is :
(e) None of these (a) (R + S) tan ∆/2 – L/2
Odisha JE (Mains) 02.08.2015 (b) (R + S) tan ∆/2 + L/2
Odisha JE (Main) 2014 (c) (R – S) tan ∆/2 – L/2
Ans. (a) : Transition curves are introduced at either (d) (R – S) tan ∆/2 + L/2
end of a circular curve to obtain– (e) None of these
• Gradual increase of superelevation from zero at the Gujarat BMC Technical Assistant 2017
tangent point to the specified amount at the junction of Odisha JE (Mains) 02.08.2015
the transition curve with main curve. Odisha JE (Mains) 2014
• To introduce gradually the centrifugal force between ∆ L
the tangent point and the beginning of the circular Ans. (b) : Ts = ( R + S ) tan +
curve. 2 2
Where,
Ts = total tangent length of the curve
R = Radius of the curvature
∆ = Deflection angle
L = Length of the transition curve
L2
S = Shift =
• It is used on both highway and railway between 24R
tangent and a circular curve in order to have a smooth 169. To drain out the rain water from road what
transition from tangent to the curve and from curve to provision is made :
the tangent. (a) Cant (b) Kerb
167. Calculate the extra widening required for a (c) Camber (d) None of these
pavement of width 7 m on a horizontal curve of UJVNL JE 2016
radius 200 m if the longest wheel base of Ans. (c) : Cross slope or camber–Camber is the slope
vehicle expected on the road is 6.5 m. Design provided to the road surface in the transverse direction
speed is 65 kmph to drain off the rain water from the road surface.
Highway Engineering 495 YCT
170. A vehicle has wheel base of 5.5 m. What is the Ans. (d) : Given,
off tracking negotiation of a curved path with a Design speed (v) = 47 kmph
mean radius of 31.5 m? (take width of Coefficient of friction (f) = 0.38
pavement as 3.5 m) Reaction of time of driver (t) = 2.5 sec
(a) 0.17 m (b) 0.96 m Lag distance = 0.278 vt
(c) 0.087 m (d) 0.48 m = 0.278 × 47 × 2.5
SSC JE Civil 30.10.2020 (Evening) = 32.66 m
Ans. (d) : Given, For two-way traffic on a single lane = 2 × 32.66
Wheel base = 5.5 m = 65.32 m
Radius of curve = 31.5 m 174. Calculate the theoretical capacity (C) of a
Width of pavement = 3.5 m traffic lane with one-way traffic flow for the
∵ Off tracking (Mechanical widening) given data.
nl 2 1× ( 5.5 )
2
30.25 1. Traffic flow at a stream speed = 40 km/h
= = = = 0.48 m 2. Average centre to centre spacing of vehicles
2R 2 × 31.5 63
= 12.8 m
171. According to IRC recommendations, what (a) 312.5 vehicles/hour/lane
shall be the rounded off value of overtaking (b) 3125 vehicles/hour/lane
sight distance, on a two lane highway for the (c) 31.25 vehicles/hours/lane
case in which design speed = 50 km/h, time (d) 3.125 vehicles/hour/lane
component for overtaking manoeuvre and for SSC JE Civil 30.10.2020 (Evening)
opposing vehicle are 10 seconds and 7 seconds,
Ans. (b) : Given,
respectively?
(a) 470 m (b) 165 m Traffic flow at a stream speed (V) = 40 km/H
(c) 340 m (d) 235 m Average centre to centre spacing of vehicle (S) = 12.8
SSC JE Civil 30.10.2020 (Evening) Theoretical capacity = 1000 V = 1000 × 40
Ans. (d) : According to IRC- Over-taking sight S 12.8
distance– C = 3125 Vehicles/Hour/Lane
Speed/hour 40 50 60 70 80 100
Minimum 165 235 300 390 470 640 Exam Point
overtaking One of the natural factors influencing camber is–
sight Amount of rainfall
distance (m) Permissible tolerance in grade, camber and
Note– alignment of a cement concrete road is– 0.01%
• Intermediate sight distance = 2 × SSD .......... is the highest point on road surface–
(SSD = Stopping sight distance) Crown
• Minimum length of overtaking zone A camber consisting of two straight slopes
= 3 × (OSD) joining at the centre is called– Sloped camber
Desire overtaking zone = 5 (OSD) 175. Total width of the pavement on a horizontal
172. If g1 = +1.2% and g2 = –0.8% and rate of circular curve = 7.5 m and the super elevation
change of grade = 0.1% per 20 m chain, then is 0.06 m. Calculate the magnitudes of raising
the length of the vertical curve is: at outer edge of the pavement with respect to
(a) 10 chains (b) 20 chains the centre line and inner edge, respectively.
(c) 30 chains (d) 15 chains (a) 0.06 m; 0.225 m (b) 0.06 m; 0.45 m
SSC JE Civil 30.10.2020 (Evening) (c) 0.225 m; 0.45 m (d) 0.225 m; 0.06 m
Ans. (b) : Given, SSC JE Civil 30.10.2020 (Evening)
g1 = +1.2% Ans. (c) : Given,
g2 = –0.8% width of pavement = 7.5 m
Rate of change of grade = 0.1% per 20m chain super elevation e = 0.06 m
 g1 − g 2  7.5 × 0.06
Length of vertical curve =   Height reference to centre line = = 0.225 m
 r  2
Raising at outer edge of pavement = 7.5×0.06 = 0.45 m
 1.2 − ( −0.8 ) 
  = 20 Chain 176. Which of the following geometric shape is NOT
 0.1  used as a transition curve in the alignment of
173. Calculate the lag distance for design speed of highways?
47 km/h for two-way traffic on a single-lane (a) Semicircle (b) Lemniscate
road (assume coefficient of friction as 0.38 and (c) Spiral (d) Cubic parabola
reaction time of driver as 2.5 seconds). SSC JE Civil 28.10.2020 (Evening)
(a) 55.52 m (b) 32.64 m Ans. (a) : Three geometric shape is used a transition
(c) 111.04 m (d) 65.28 m curve in the alignment of highways.
SSC JE Civil 30.10.2020 (Evening) (i) Lemniscate curve
Highway Engineering 496 YCT
 (ii) Spiral (cubic spiral) 2 × (7)
2
50 98 50
(iii) Cubic parabola Ew = + = +
Note– 2 × 100 9.5 100 200 95
Cubic spiral–For national highway used. Ew = 1.01 m
Cubic parabola–Used in railway. 179. The sight distance is defined as the:
(i) The spiral curve satisfies the requirements of an (a) length of the runway
ideal transition (b) total length of road to be traversed
(ii) Geometric's property of spiral is such that the (c) length of the roadway a driver can see ahead
calculation and setting out the curve in the field is at any particular time.
simple and easy. (d) nautical distance for which ships can continue
signaling
Exam Point SSC JE Civil 29.10.2020 (Morning)
The camber, for the drainage of surface water, Ans. (c) : Sight Distance or Visibility Distance is
was first introduced by– Tresaguet length of the roadway a driver can see ahead at any
Relation between gradient (g) and camber (c) in particular time. It is of three type–
g (i) Stopping sight distance
case of roads, is– c=
2 (ii) Intermediate sight distance
The value of ruling gradient in plains as per IRC (iii) Overtaking sight distance
recommendation is– 1 in 30 180. If the maximum allowable speed of a vehicle is
The terrain may be classified as rolling terrain if 20 m/s and can accelerate at 0.25 m/s2, then
the cross-slop of land is– what must be the radius of the circular curve
Between 10% and 25% and length of transition curve such that ratio of
The type of gradient is normally adopted in the centrifugal force on vehicle to its weight is 1 :
design of roads– Ruling gradient 4?
It is defined as the total rise or fall between any (Take g = 10 m/s2)
two points chosen on the alignment divided by (a) 160 m, 200 m (b) 250 m, 160 m
the horizontal distance between two points– (c) 250 m, 320 m (d) 160 m, 500 m
Average gradient SSC JE Civil 29.10.2020 (Morning)
177. The maximum rate of super elevation (e) is Ans. (a) :
given by Maximum allowable speed (V) = 20 m/s
V 2
V 2 Acceleration (c) = 0.25 m/s2
(a) e = (b) e = Centrifugal force (P) 1
525R 424R =
Weight (W) 4
V2 V2
(c) e = (d) e =
225R 2000R P 1
e= = = 0.25
ISRO TA 21.04.2018 W 4
Karnataka PSC JE 2017
TNPSC JE/Supervisor 2012 V2
Radius of circular curve (R) =
Ans. (c) : The maximum rate of super elevation (e) is g×e
V2 ( 20)
2
given by, e=
225R R=
V = speed of vehicle in kmph 10 × 0.25
= 160 m
R = radius of curvature in meters 3
178. What is the total extra widening required for Length of transition curve (L) = V
pavement width 7 m on a horizontal curve of CR
radius 100 m if the longest wheel base expected 203
on the road is 7 m and design speed is 50 km/h? L=
(a) 2 m (b) 4 m 0.25 × 160
(c) 1 m (d) 3 m L = 200 m
SSC JE Civil 28.10.2020 (Evening) 181. Which of the following curves fulfils the
Ans. (c) : Given requirements of an ideal transition curve in
Pavement width = 7 m horizontal alignment of the highways, for such
Curve radius (R) = 100 m curves radius is inversely proportional to the
Length (l) = 7 m length and centrifugal acceleration is uniform
Design speed (V) = 50 km/h throughout the length?
n=2 (a) Cubic parabolic curve
So, Ew = W m + W P (b) Circular curve
(c) Spiral curve
nl 2 V
Ew = + (d) Sine curve
2R 9.5 R SSC JE Civil 29.10.2020 (Morning)
Highway Engineering 497 YCT
 Ans. (c) : Spiral curve -The requirements of an ideal Exam Point
transition curve in horizontal alignment of the The gradient which determines the maximum
highways, for such curves radius is inversely load that an engine can haul at a section is
proportional to the length and centrifugal acceleration defined as– Ruling gradient
is uniform throughout the length . The ruling gradient for plain and rolling terrain
Ideal shape of transition curve is clothoid which means is– 3.3%
"Euler spiral" whose curvature is equal to its arc The slope of the road pavement in the
length. longitudinal direction is called– Gradient
The rate of rise of fall or road surface along its
Transition curve is a curve in plan which is provided to
length with respect to the horizontal is–
change the horizontal alignment from straight to
Gradient
circular curve gradually means the radius of transition The minimum furrow grade to assure surface
curve varies between infinity to R or R to infinity. drainage is– 0.05%
IRC recommends Spiral or clothoid as the ideal Compared to a level surface, on a descending
transition curve due to following reasons: gradient the stopping sight distance is– More
• It satisfies that rate of change of centrifugal If ruling gradient is 1 in 20 and there is also a
acceleration is constant i.e., Ls × R = constant. horizontal curve of radius 76 m, then the
Where Ls = length of transition curve R = radius of compensated gradient should be– 4%
curve. Gradient resistance of moving vehicles along
down slopes, is– –9kg/tonne
• The calculation and field implementation of spiral The steepest gradient which is to be permitted on
curve is simple and easy. the road is called– Maximum gradient,
• It enhances aesthetics also. Limiting gradient
182. Two cars are moving in the opposite direction The maximum design gradient for vertical
with speeds 25 m/s and 20m/s respectively. If profile of a road is– Ruling gradient
total reaction time is 2.5 seconds and design For jeep roads, the absolute maximum gradient
for short lengths is– 1 in 10
coefficient of friction is 0.35, then what must be
Any gradient on a road is said to be an
the minimum sight distance to avoid head on
exceptional gradient, if it is–
collision? (Take g = 10 m/s2.)
Less than minimum gradient or more than
(a) 258.93 m (b) 225 m maximum gradient
(c) 112.5 m (d) 34.07 m A gradient of 1° represents a rise or fall of 1 m in
SSC JE Civil 29.10.2020 (Morning) a horizontal distance of– 57.3m
Ans. (a) : 183. What is the maximum limit of super elevation
Car A Car B as recommended by IRC on hilly roads?
VA = 25 m/s, VB = 20 m/s (a) 10% (b) 7%
(c) 4% (d) 30%
Reaction time (t) = 2.5 sec SSC JE Civil 29.10.2020 (Morning)
Coefficient of friction (f) = 0.35 Assam PSC AE (PRD) 2020
g = 10 m/s2 M.P. VYAPAM Draftsman 1.9.2018 9.00 am
For Car A– MH PWD 2016
HSSC PWD JE DEPT. (CAT-7) 2015
V2 MH Nanded Zila Parishad 2014
S.S.DA = V×t + WBPSC JE 2005
2gf
Nagaland PSC 2015 Paper-I
( 25)
2
Ans. (a) : Super elevation– The super elevation
= 25 × 2.5 + (e) is expressed as the ratio of the height of outer
2 × 10 × 0.35
edge with respect to the horizontal width.
= 151.78 m
For Car B– BC
e= = tan θ
AC
( 20 )
2

S.S.DB = 20 × 2.5 +
2 × 10 × 0.35 v2
e+f =
S.S.DB = 107.14 m 127R
Total minimum sight distance required to avoid head where V is speed in kmph
on collision = SSDA + SSDB R = radius of curvature (in m)
= 151.78 + 107.14 e = super elevation
= 258.92 m f = coefficient of lateral friction.
Highway Engineering 498 YCT
 Ans. (a) : Given,
V = 72 km/h = 20 m/s
t = 2.0 sec
f = 0.4
g = 10m/s2
For single lane two-way traffic
 V2 
Terrain Maximum Super Elevation SSD = 2  Vt + 
Urban Area 4%  2gf 
Plain Area 7%  202 
Hilly Area 10% = 2  20 × 2 + 
 2 × 10 × 0.4 
• Max. super elevation for plain and rolling terrain,
hilly terrain bound by snow = 7%. = 180 m
• Minimum super elevation for drainage purpose 187. A 7.5 m wide two-lane road on a plain terrain
= 2-4%. is to be laid along a horizontal curve of radius
184. A two-lane road with design speed 60 km/h has 400 m. For a design speed of 100 kmph, super-
a horizontal curve of radius 400 m. What will elevation is provided as per IRC : 73 –
be the super elevation required to be provided Consider acceleration due to gravity as 9.81
for the mixed traffic conditions at the curve as m/s2. The level difference between the inner
per IRC 38-1998? and outer edges of the road (in m, up to three
(a) 7% (b) 8.7% decimal places) is :
(c) 4.0% (d) 6.4% (a) 0.525 m (b) 0.760 m
SSC JE Civil 30.10.2020 (Morning) (c) 0.750 m (d) None of these
Ans. (c) : Given, HPPCL JE Civil 13.02.2021
Design speed (v) = 60 km/h Ans. (a) : Given,
Radius of horizontal curve (R) = 400m R = 400 m
v2 V = 100 kmph = 27.777 m/s
Max. Super elevation ( e ) =
225R V2
e + f =
( 60 ) gR
2

e= = 0.04 f = 0
225 × 400
e = 4% V2 27.777 2
e= =
185. For a hill road with the ruling gradient of 6% gR 9.81× 400
what will be the compensated gradient at a
e = 0.196
curve of radius 60 m?
(a) 4.75% (b) 5.5% for the design purpose emax = 0.07
(c) 4.5% (d) 5% Here, e > emax
SSC JE Civil 30.10.2020 (Morning) So, we taken e = 0.07
Ans. (a) : Given,
Rulling Gradient = 6%
Radius of road curve (R) = 60 m
 30 + R
 % x
Grade compensation = min m  R tan θ = e =
7.5
 or 75 %
 x = 0.07 × 7.5
R
= 0.525m
 30 + 60
 60 % = 1.5% 188. The length of a transition curve, is governed
= min m  by:
 75 % = 1.25% (a) Rate of change of radial acceleration
 60 (b) Rate of change of super elevation
= 1.25% (c) Both (A) and (B)
Compensated gradient = (6% – 1.25%) = 4.75% (d) None of these
186. Calculate the safe stopping sight distance for a HPPCL JE Civil 13.02.2021
design speed of 72 km/h for two way traffic on Ans. (c) : The length of a transition curve is governed
a single lane road. The reaction time of driver
by
is 2.0 sec. (assume f = 0.4 and g = 10 m/s2)
(a) 180.00 (b) 136.23 • Rate of change of radial acceleration.
(c) 164.42 (d) 674.24 • Rate of change of superelevation.
HPPCL JE Civil 13.02.2021 • By IRC method.
Highway Engineering 499 YCT
189. The top width of the embankment of road is such a case, the pressure on the inner and outer wheels
called _______. will be equal.
(a) Roadway (b) Carriageway So,
(c) Right of way (d) None of these
V2
KPSC Overseer (Irrigation) 2017 e=
KPSC Overseer, Gr-II, Irri. Dept. (code 24/2017) 127R
Ans. (a) : • The top width of highway embankment or 191. The maximum super elevation to be provided on
bottom width of highway cutting excluding the side a road curve is 1 in 15. If the rate of change of
drains is called 'Road way width' or formation width. super elevation is specified as 1 in 120 and the
• Carriage way, the portion of road way constructed road width is 10m, then the minimum length of
for movement of vehicle traffic is called as 'carriage the transition curve on either end will be:
way or crust'. (a) 180m (b) 125m
(c) 80m (d) 30m
RPSC ACF and FRO 24.02.2021
[ESE-1995]
Ans. (c) Length of transition curve L = eWN
1 1 1
e= , = = N = 120
15 N 120
W = 10 m
1
∴ L= ×10 × 120
15
L = 80m
Exam Point
The gradients at hair pin bends or other sharp Exam Point
corners with inside curves of 10 to 15 m should While aligning a hill road with a ruling gradient
never exceed– 1 in 20 of 1 in 20, a horizontal curve of radius 80m is
A gradient along which the vehicle does not encountered. The compensated gradient on the
require any tractive effort to maintain a specified curve will be– 1 in 25
speed, is known as– floating gradient The geometric element to be considered in
The minimum design speed of various types of designing a highway passing through a rolling
highways in plain terrain is the same as the terrain– Ruling minimum radius
ruling design speed of– Rolling terrain Exceptional gradient should not be provided in a
Exceptional gradient in plains is– 1 in 15 length more than– 100m
An upgrade 1% is followed by a downgrade 2%. An essential gradient, which has to be provided
The equation of the parabolic curve of length L for the purpose of road drainage, is called–
( g1 -g 2 ) 2 Minimum gradient
to be introduced, is given by– y= x
Rolling resistance of a wheel depends upon–
200L
Vehicle load, Ground conditions
190. If a vehicle is moving with a speed of V kmph,
For an earthen road the min. desirable gradient
negotiating a curve with a radius of R meters, is– 1 in 120
and coefficient friction is assumed to be zero,
the equilibrium super elevation necessary to 192. A summit curve is formed at the intersection of
a 3% up gradient and 5% down gradient. To
counteract the centrifugal force fully is given
provide a stopping distance of 128m, the length
by
of summit curve needed will be:
v2 v2 (a) 271m (b) 298m
(a) (b) (c) 322m (d) 340m
127R 12.7R HPSSC JE Code 463/2018
v2 v2 [ESE-1995]
(c) (d) Ans. (b) Deviation angle, n1 = 3%, n2 = 5%
225R 190R N = n1 – (–n2) = n1 + n2
APPSC AE Env. & Civil Common 2016 Paper-II N = 3% + 5% = 8%
DFCCIL, 17-04-2016 L > SSD, S = 128 m.
V2 NS2 8 (128) 2
Ans. (a) : e + f = …………..(i) Length of summit curve L = = ×
127R 4.4 100 4.4
If the entire centrifugal force is counteracted by the L = 298 m.
superelevation, frictional force will not be called into 193. A vehicle was stopped in two seconds by fully
play. jamming the breaks. The skid marks measured
Thus f = 0, in equation (i) the superelevation then 9.8metres. The average skid resistance
provided is said to be equilibrium superelevation. In coefficient will be:
Highway Engineering 500 YCT
 (a) 0.7 (b) 0.5 0.065 × 100 2
(c) 0.4 (d) 0.25 L=
1.50 + 0.035 × 100
[ESE-1997]
L = 130 meter.
Ans. (b) Initial speed of vehicle : V = fgt
196. The height of single decked vehicle normal
V2 f 2g2 t 2
S= = application is :
2fg 2fg (a) 2.50 m (b) 3.80 m
S = 9.8 m. (c) 5.00 m (d) 4.7 m
t = 2 sec. DSSSB JE 5.11.2019, Morning
2S 2 × 9.8 Ans. (b) : • The height of single decked vehicle
f= 2 = = 0.5
gt 9.8 × 22 normal application is 3.80 m.
194. Which of the criteria given below are used for • The maximum width of vehicle as per IRC is 2.44 m.
the design of valley vertical curves on roads? 197. Which one of the following is correct
1. Rider comfort relationship between intermediate sight
2. Headlight sight distance distances (ISD) & stopping sight distance
3. Drainage (SSD)?
Select the correct answer using the codes given MH PWD 2019
below:
Nagaland PSC 2017 Paper-I
(a) 1, 2 & 3 (b) 1 & 3
(c) 2 & 3 (d) 1 & 2 OR
[ESE-1998] Which one of the following expressions gives
intermediate sight distance as per IRC
Ans. (a)
standards?
(SSD + OSD)
(a) 2 SSD (b)
2
(OSD + SSD)
(c) (d) 2 OSD
2
RPSC Lect. (Tech. Edu.) Paper-II 2021
RPSC ACF 24.02.2021
Design of valley curves : MH PWD 2018
• Cubic parabola is generally preferred is valley [ESE-1999]
curve as per IRC.
Ans. (a) As per IRC 66 : 1976–
Criteria :
Intermediate sight distance (ISD) :
(1) Vehicle head light distance
(2) Motorists comfort (Rate of change of centrifugal It is twice the stopping sight distance.
acceleration) ISD = 2 × stopping sight distance.
(3) Cross drainage control at lowest point of velley. ISD = 2 SSD
(4) General aesthetic considerations. • When OSD cannot be provided. ISD is provided to
• The valley curve is usually made fully transitively given limited over taking opportunities to fast
by providing two similar transition curve of a equal vehicles.
length (without a circular curve in between). 198. Total reaction time of a driver does not depend
195. If a descending gradient of 1 in 25 meets an upon
ascending gradient of 1 in 40, then the length of (a) perception time
valley curve required for a headlight sight (b) brake reaction time
distance of 100m will be: (c) condition of mind of the driver
(a) 30m (b) 130m
(d) speed of vehicle
(c) 310m (d) 630m
[ESE-1999] Mizoram PSC/ (PWD) 2020 Paper-III
Ans. (b) Deviation angle, N = n1–(–n2) = n1 + n2 [ESE-2000]
1 1 Ans. (d) : Total reaction time of the driver is time
N= + , S = 100 m taken from the instant the object is visible to the driver
25 40 to the instant the brakes are effectively applied.
= 0.065
The amount of time gap depends on several factors.
L > S where : S Head light sight distance.
The total reaction time may be split into two parts.
NS2 (i) Perception time
L=
(1.5 + 0.035S) (ii) Brake reaction time.
Highway Engineering 501 YCT
 Exam Point Exam Point
If the cross slope of a terrain is 20%, according Full amount of extra width of pavement, on the
to IRC classification, it is a– Rolling terrain curve, is provided at–
Exceptional gradient for Hilly road is– 1 IN 12 Beginning of the circular curve
The most favourable gradient for alignment of a Grade compensation on a horizontal curve on a
road is– Ruling gradient highway is not necessary when–
In grades of highway is an emergency escape Gradient is flatter than 4 percent
ramp provided– Down grade If L is the length of moving vehicle and R is the
Centre line for an urban road of more than 4 radius of curve, the extra mechanical width b to
lanes is–Two thick parallel lines with a gap of L2
75 mm in between be provide on horizontal curve–
2R
The extra widening required for pavement of At sharp horizontal curves of highways of radius
width 10.5m. on a horizontal curve of radius R 'R' (in metres), the percentage reduction in
3l 2 gradient provided to compensate the loss of
metres is given by–
2R traction force due to curvature is– 75/R
Where, l=length of wheel base of vehicle in m. The extra widening of pavements recommended
The shoulder provided along the road edge by IRC for hill roads having radius 150 m is–
should be– Rougher than the traffic lanes 0m
199. Consider the following factors: Extra widening of pavements provided because
1. Reaction time of off-tracking is known as–
2. Speed Mechanical widening
3. Coefficient of longitudinal friction 201. For a given road, safe stopping sight distance is
4. Gradient 80m and passing sight distance is 300m. What
Which of these factors taken into account for is the intermediate sight distance?
computing braking distance? (a) 220m (b) 190m
(a) 1 & 3 (b) 1, 2 & 4 (c) 160m (d) 150m
(c) 2, 3 & 4 (d) 2 & 3 [ESE-2004]
[ESE-2002] Ans. (c) Stopping sight distance = 80 m
Ans. (c) SSD = Lag distance (L)+ Braking distance (B) Passing sight distance = 300 m
⇒ Lag distance (L) = v.t Intermediate sight distance = 2 × SSD = 2 × 80
Braking distance (B)– On a level ground is obtaining ISD = 160 m.
by equating work done in stopping the vehicle to kinetic 202. What is the minimum length of a transition
energy lost. curve for a design speed of 80kmph in a
V 2 horizontal curve of 240m radius?
B= (a) 32m (b) 42m
254(f ± 0.01n) (c) 52m (d) 72m
v = design speed, f = coefficient of friction Odisha SSC JE 2014
[ESE-2006]
n = gradiant Ans. (d) As per IRC the length of transition curve is
So, B depends upon speed, gradient and coefficient of found by–
friction. Based on rate of change of centrifugal acceleration
V3
200. The camber provided on a sloping roads is 1 in
48. Which one of the following is the ruling
C=
Ls R
( m / sec3 ) ...(i)
gradient? V in m/sec, R in m, Ls in m
(a) 1 in 15 (b) 1 in 20
80
(c) 1 in 24 (d) 1 in 30
[ESE-2003]
C=
75 + V
( m / sec3 )
Ans. (d) Ruling Gradient : Also known as 'Design 0.5 < C < 0.8 ....(ii)
Gradient'. During normal course, the gradient on road Given, V = 80 kmph
should never exceed this value. R = 240 m
The gradient is fixed in such a way that speed of the V = 22.22 m/sec
vehicle should not decrease while moving on the from equation (ii)
gradient. 80
C= = 0.516
According to IRC 52 : 1981 value of ruling gradient 75 + 80
given below : it is between 0.5 < C < 0.8
1 in 30 → Plain and rolling terrain from equation (i)
1 in 20 → Mountainous terrain
( 22.22 )
3

1 in 16.7 → Steep terrain Ls = = 88.58 m

thus for sloping road it is 1 in 30 0.516 × 240

Highway Engineering 502 YCT

203. A rising gradient of 1 in 50 meets a falling List-II
gradient of 1 in 30. Which one of the following 1. Disparity between relevant travel distances
is the length of vertical curve if the stopping 2. Vehicle movement on a curve
sight distance is 120m? 3. Summit curves
(a) 174m (b) 158m 4. Prevention of flooding
(c) 140m (d) 120m Codes:
[ESE-2006] A B C D
Ans. (a) Deviation angle : (a) 2 1 4 3
1 1 (b) 3 1 4 2
n1 = , n2 = (c) 2 4 1 3
50 30 (d) 3 4 1 2
N = n1 – (– n2) S = 120 m [ESE-2011]
= n1 + n2 Ans. (c) When a vehicle traverses a horizontal curve,
1 1 4 the centrifugal force acts horizontally outwards through
N= + =
50 30 75 the centre of gravity of the vehicle.
Let, L > SSD • This centrifugal force is counteracted by the
NS2 4 120 2 transverse frictional resistance developed between
L= = × the tyres and the pavement which enables the
4.4 75 4.4
vehicle to change the direction along the curve and
L = 174.5 m.
to maintain the stability of the vehicle.
204. Full amount of super-elevation on a horizontal • Summit curves are designed so as to provide
curve is provided at the adequate sight distance and to avoid accidents.
(a) beginning of the transition curve
• Cut-off lagoons are structures created along the
(b) centre of the circular curve
important roadways to protect if from flooding.
(c) end of the transition curve
(d) centre of the transition curve 206. The transitional property of a lemniscate curve
HPSSC JE CODE 552/2018 is disrupted when its deflection angle is around
(a) 300 (b) 450
[ESE-2010] 0
(c) 60 (d) 900
Ans. (c) : Superelevation– Super-elevation as cant is
[ESE-2012]
the transverse slop provide at horizontal curve to
Ans. (c) Lemniscate curve :
counteract the centrifugal force, by raising the outs
edge of the pavement with respect to the inner edge, • Mostly used in modern roads where deflection
throughout the length of the horizontal curve. angle (n) the curve is large.
• The superelevation should be attained gradually over • When deflection angle is around 60º, then
the full length of transition over the full length of lemniscate curve disrupted transitional property.
transition curve so that the design superelevation (full • Radius of curve decreases more rapidly with the
amount of curves elevation) is available at the starting length.
point of the (is circular curve or end of the transition • The curve can be set by polar coordinates.
curve.
• In case where transition curve can not be provided
Exam Point
The widening of a road is not required when its
for some season, two thirds of the super elevation may
radius will be– More than 460 m
be attained at the straight portion before the start of the
Set–back distance is the distance between–
circular curve and balance one third in the circular
Road land boundry and building line
curve.
On sharp curves widening of the carriage way is
done by–
Providing more width on the inner curve
V
Psychological widening width is–
9.5 R
When the distance between the axles is 'l' and
radius of the curve is R then mechanical
205. Match List-I with List-II and select the correct
answer using the code given below the lists: l2
widening width is–
List-I 2R
A. Lateral friction The mechanical widening required for a
B. Cut-off lagoons pavement of width 7m on a horizontal curve of
C. Skid radius 490 m, if the longest wheel base of
D. Sight distance vehicle expected on the road is 7.0 m– 0.1m

Highway Engineering 503 YCT

207. If R is the radius of the curve and L is the Ans. (c) Given that :
Length of the long chord, the shift of the curve R = 500 m, V = 100 kmph
is (all in meter units) V 2
2
(a) L /R 2
(b) L /2R Super elevation e =
225R
(c) L2/24R (d) L2/6R
Nagaland PSC CTSE 2017 Paper-I (100) 2
= = 0.088
HESCOM AE 2017 225 × 500
HPSSC JE 2015 Now, Limit e = 0.07
[ESE-2012]  if f < 0.15, 
 V2  
- e max   super elevation 
2
Ls f= 
Ans. (c) : Shift of Transition curve (S) =  127R   provided is o.k.
24R  
Ls = Length of Long chord 2
100
R = radius of curve = − 0.07
Length of summit curve for SSD– 127 × 500
L > SSD L < SSD f = 0.087, 0.087 (Ok) < 0.15
2 So, e = 0.07
NS 4.4
L= L = 2S − 210. Gradients in hair-pin bends with inside curves
4.4 N of 10 to 15 m should never exceed
208. The ratio between the adopted centrifugal (a) 1 in 40 (b) 1 in 20
ratios for roads and railways is: (c) 1 in 60 (d) 1 in 80
(a) 3:1 (b) 4:1 WBPSC JE 2005
(c) 2:1 (d) 5:1 Ans. (a) : IRC 52-198, clause 14.1
HPSSC JE CODE 502/2018 Maximum gradient in hair-pin bend should never
[ESE-2012] exceed 1 : 40 (2.5%)
Ans. (c) Centrifugal ratio : Minimum gradient = 1 in 200 (0.5%)
P v 2 211. The roughness of road is measured by
= (a) Bankleman beam
W gR
(b) Bump integrator
1 (c) Dynamic cone penetrometer
For road =
4 (d) Falling weight deflect meter
HPSSC JE Code 386/2018
1
For railway = Nagaland PSC 2017 Paper-I
8 CGPSC, AP, Lecture Exam 2016
road 1/ 4 2 Odisha SSC JE 2014
= = = 2 :1 Ans. (b) : Bump integrator–
railway 1/ 8 1
• The roughness of road is measurement by bump
integrator.
Exam Point
• Uneveness is a cumulative measure of vertical
Psychological widening on road curves is given
undulations of pavement per unit length of the road.
0.1V
by (symbols have the usual meaning)– • Uneveness is measure by using bump integrator
R developed by CRRI.
A terrain with cross-slope less than 10 percent, is • For good pavement, cumulative undulation should
called– level terrain not be more than
The convexity provided on the surface of a 150 cm/km length of road
highway is known as– Camber {B.I. = 630 [IRT]1.12 }
According to IRC, what should be the maximum IRT = International roughness
length of a semi trailer tractor combination Unevenness (mm/km) Index
vehicle– 16 m 0-1500 Good
If V is the design speed in km/hour and R is 1500-2500 Satisfactory
radius of the curve of hill road, the super- 2500-3200 Bad-repairing work
V2 >3200 uncomfortable
elevation– Dynamic cone pentrometer– The dynamic cone
225R
penetrometer (DCP) is used to determine underlying
209. The rate of super-elevation for a horizontal soil strength by measuring the penetration of the
curve of radius 500m in a national highway for device into the soil after each hammer below.
a design speed of 100kmph is: Falling weight deflect meter– A falling weight
(a) 0.04 (b) 0.063
deflectometer is a testing device used by civil
(c) 0.07 (d) 0.70
engineers the evaluate the physical properties of
[ESE-2013]
Highway Engineering 504 YCT
 pavement in highways, local roads, airport pavements, Ans. (d) Centrifugal ratio/Impact factor/stability
harbor areas, railing tracks and elsewhere. factor
Benkelman beam– The Benkelman beam enables • It is defined as the ratio of the centrifugal force to the
precise and non-destructive measurements of the load weight of the vehicle.
bearing capacity of road surface layers mode of asphalt P Wv 2 v2
or pavement. C.R. = = =
212. The summit curve on a two-lane-two way
W gRW gR
depends on V2
(a) Allowable rate of change of centrifugal e=
gR
acceleration
v = speed of vehicle,
(b) Coefficient of lateral friction R= radius of the horizontal curve
(c) Required stopping sigh distance G = Acceleration due to gravity
(d) Required overtaking sight distance
Nagaland PSC CTSE 2017 Paper-I Exam Point
Ans. (d) : Length of summit curve depends on– Length of vehicles does not affect–
I. stopping side distance for single lane two highway. Width of shoulders
II. overtaking sight distance for two lane two way Suggested designed speed for arterial roads
highway. (urban) as per IRC is– 80
213. Shortest sight distance and friction factor are Highway Geometrics are designed for–
(a) Directly proportional to each other 98th percentile speed
(b) Inversely proportional to each other The IRC recommendation for ruling design speed
(c) Unrelated on a National Highway, in plain terrain, is–
(d) Both 1 and 2 depends upon nature 100 km/h
Nagaland PSC 2017 Paper-I Width of vehicles affects the width of– lanes,
Shoulders, parking spaces
Ans. (b) : Shortest / stopping/non-passing sight
To calculate the minimum value of ruling radius
distance and frictional coefficient are inversely
of horizontal curves in plains, the design speed is
proportional to each other.
given by– 16 kmph
V2 When unevenness index is more than 350 cm/km
SSD = 0.278 vt +
254 (f ± S%) length, then the comfortable speed is less than–
SSD = Lag distance + Braking 50 kmph
Braking distance of inversely proportional to the 216. The highest point on the road surface is called
coefficient of friction i.e. SSD is inversely proportional KPSC Overseer, Gr-II, Irri. Dept. (code 42/2017)
to f . MH Pimpri-Chinehwad MNC 2015
214. The rear wheels do not follow the same path as OR
that of the front wheels. This phenomenon is The highest point on a carriage way is known
called as
(a) Extra widening (b) Transition curve (a) Camber (b) Super elevation
(c) Off tracking (d) Coning of wheel (c) Crown (d) Gradient
RRB JE CBT-II 28–08–2019 (morning) RRB JE CBT-II 28–08–2019 (evening)
M.P. VYAPAM Sub Engg. 4.9.2018, 2.00 pm
Ans. (c) : When the rear wheel of vehicle don't follow MP VYAPAM Sub Engg. 9.07.2017, 2.00 pm
the same path as that of the front wheel is called off Chandigarh JE 17.07.2016
tracking while negotiating the horizontal curve. UPSSSC JE 2015 Paper-I
nl 2 Ans : (c) The highest point on a carriage way is known
Wm = as summit/crown or peak point.
2R
Camber– It is transverse slope provided in roadway for
where, Wm = mechanical widening, drainage purpose only.
n = number of traffic lanes, Superelevation– When a vehicle is travelling on
l = length of wheel base(m), horizontal curve, centrifugal force outer edge of
R = Radius of curve (m), pavement is raised w.r.t. inner edge which is termed as
215. The superelevation 'e' is expressed as– superelevation.
(where V = Speed of vehicle, g = Acceleration Gradient– It is defined as the rate of rising or falls
due to gravity, R = radius of the horizontal along the length of the road w.r.t. the horizontal.
curve, W = weight of the vehicle, G = Universal
gravitational constant)
(a) e = v3/gR (b) e = h /GR
(c) e = W/ GR (d) e = v2/ gR
RRB JE CBT-II 29–08–2019 (evening)
Highway Engineering 505 YCT
 Exam Point Ans : (b) Median– A divided highway or dividing strip
in the middle to separate traffic movement.
The minimum radius for intersection curve when
the speed is 35 kmph is– 35 m  min imum desirable width of 5.0 m
 for Rural highway
The average speed maintained by a vehicle over
IRC recommend 
a particular stretch of road, while the vehicle is  Restricted upto 3m where land is not
in motion, is known as– Running speed 
 available
With all other relevant conditions remaining the Kerb– A vertical sloping member along the edge of a
same, the speed of a vehicle negotiating a curve pavement provided for supporting raised footpaths or
1 • It is function to strengthen and protect the pavement
is proportional to– edge.
Weight of the vehicle
• Control drainage and present a more finished surface.
If A is the projected area of a vehicle in square 219. If V is the velocity of a moving vehicle, R is the
metres, V is speed of the vehicles in kilometres radius of the curve and G is the acceleration
per hour and C is a constant, then the wind due to gravity, W is the width of carriage way,
resistance R to the moving vehicles, is given by– the Super elevation is:
R = CAV2 WV W2 V
(a) (b)
At highway stretches where the required GR GR
overtaking sight distance cannot be provided, it WV2 WV2
is necessary to incorporate– (c) (d)
GR GR 2
Atleast twice the stopping sight distance GSSSB Sub-overseer 2020
217. When one body rolls over the surface of GSSSB Surveyor 1.4.2018
Mizoram PSC 26.03.2010 Paper-II
another body, the resistance to its motion is WBPSC SAE 2003
called- WBPSC SAE 2001
(a) Sliding friction Ans. (c) :
(b) Static friction
(c) Rolling friction
(d) Electrostatic friction
RRB JE CBT-II 28–08–2019 (evening)
Ans : (c) Rolling friction takes place when an object
rolls on the surface. It take place due to the deformation
of surfaces. eg: sliping of vehicle tyre.
Sliding friction– The term sliding friction refers to the h V2
resistance created by two objects sliding against each e= =
w gR
other.
Static friction– Static friction is force that keeps on wV 2
h=
object at rest. gR
Electrostatic friction– It is one of the possible 220. What would be the minimum Stopping Sight
constituents of noncontact friction between two bodies Distance (SSD) in meters on a highway at a
in relative motion separate by a vacuum or an air gap. descending gradient of 2% for a design speed
218. Kerb and median are two elements in a of 80kmph?
highway cross-section. Choose the correct (a) 48 (b) 85
(c) 110 (d) 132
match.
Punjab JE July 2018
(a) Kerb and median classification names are not Ans. (d) : Given,
based on position in pavement cross-section V = 80 kmph = 22.22 m/sec
but based on their shape Descending gradient (n) = 2%
(b) Kerb for both the side edges of the pavement v2
and 1 median at the centre line of the SSD = vt +  n 
pavement 2g  f − 
 100 
(c) Median is a longitudinal element and kerb is Assumed, f = 0.35
a lateral element
( 22.22 )
2

(d) 1 Kerb at the middle and 2 medians at the = 22.22 × 2.5 +

side edges 2 × 9.81( 0.35 − 0.02 )
RRB JE CBT-II 28–08–2019 (evening) = 131.8 ≈ 132 m
Highway Engineering 506 YCT
221. The camber for hill roads in case of bituminous Ans. (d) : The highest point on the carriage way is
surfacing is adopted as known as crown.
(a) 2.0% (b) 2.5% 224. The portion of a road surface, which is used by
(c) 3.0% (d) 3.5% vehicular traffic, is known as
MGVCL JE 2017 (a) Carriage-way (b) Shoulder
Gujarat BMC TA 2016
(c) Express way (d) All of these
Bihar WRD JE 2016
HPSSC JE Code 459/2019
SSC JE 2011 (Evening)
PSSSB JE 22.11.2015
Ans. (b) WBPSC SAE 2003
Range of camber in Ans. (a) : Carriage way– The portion of a road
Type of road surface area of surface, which is used by vehicular traffic.
Heavy Low Type of road Width of
Rainfall rainfall Single lane 3.75 m
1. Cement concrete and 1 in 50 or 1 in 60 or Dual lane (no kerb) 7m
thick bituminous 2% 1.7% Dual lane (with raised kerb) 7.5 m
surface
Multilane 3.5 m per lane
2. Thin bituminous 1 in 40 or 1 in 50 or
Intermediate lane 5.5 m
surface 2.5% 2%
Shoulder– Shoulder are provided to accommodate
3. WBM ad gravel 1 in 33 or 1 in 40 or
stopped vehicles and to provide lateral confined to the
pavement 3% 2.5%
pavement layers.
4. Earth road 1 i 25 or 1 i 33 or
• Desirable width of shoulder is 4.5 m with a
4% 3%
minimum of 2.5 m on a two lane rural highway.
Exam Point Expressway– Expressway are the highest class of
In case of a multi–lane road, overtaking is roads in India.
generally permitted– • In India, expressways are controlled– access
From both right and left sides highways where entrance and exit is controlled by
The portion of a road used by vehicular traffic is the use of ramps that are incorporated into the
called– Carriage way design of the expressway.
The colour of the light used for visibility during
fog is– Yellow
Exam Point
To measure the covered distance, the vehicle's The stopping sight distance for traffic control on
wheel is attached to the vehicle– Odometer highway depends on total reaction time of the
With increase in speed of the traffic stream, the driver. This time is best explained by "PIEV"
minimum spacing of vehicles– Increases theory. Here E stands for– Emotion
In order to give satisfactory service throughout The distance travelled by a moving vehicle
the year, the road surface should– during perception and brake reaction time is
known as- Lag distance
Have smooth gradient
2000 M 60 Means that– Stopping Sight Distance is always–
Number of vehicles per days is 2000, traffic is Less than overtaking sight distance
For a vehicle with a speed of V m/s on a road
mixed and design speed is 60 kmph
The stopping sight distance for traffic control on surface with the coefficient of friction f and
highway depends on total reaction time of the acceleration due to gravity g, the braking
driver. This time is best explained by "PIEV'' distance is given by– V2/2gf
theory. Here V stands for– Volition time 225. What is the minimum width recommended for
222. Transition curves are used where there is an urban kerbed road ?
(a) 5.5 m (b) 3.75 m
sudden change of
(a) Gradient (b) Rise (c) 7.5 m (d) 7.0 m
(c) Fall (d) Curve DSSSB JE 5.11.2019, Morning
HPSSC JE Code 459/2019 Ans. (a) : The minimum width recommended for an
urban kerbed road is 5.5 m.
Ans. (d) :.
IRC specification for carriage way width
• Transition curve is provided to change the horizontal
Single lane 3.75 m
alignment from straight to circular curve gradually and
Two lane without kerb 7.0 m
has a radius which decrease from infinity at the
straight end (tangent point) to the desired radius of the Two lane with kerbs 7.5 m
circular curve at the other end (curve point). Intermediate carriage 5.5 m
Multi-lane 3.5 m per lane
223. The highest point on the carriage way is known
as 226. As per IRC, the recommended value of
(a) Camber (b) Super elevation carriageway width for intermediate carriage
(c) Side slope (d) None of these is–––––
HPSSC JE Code 459/2019 (a) 6m (b) 7.0m
Highway Engineering 507 YCT
 (c) 5.5m (d) 6.5m 230. Thickness of the road surfacing depends upon the
MH PWD 2019 (a) Kinds of traffic (b) Traffic intensity
Ans. (c) : As per IRC Recommended- (c) Type of material (d) All of the above
Road classification Width of Nagaland PSC 2015 Paper-I
carriage ways(m) Ans. (d) : Thickness of the road surface depends upon
Single lane road 3.75 m the kinds of traffic, traffic intensity and type of material.
Two lanes, without raised kerbs 7m 231. A precise survey is :
Two lanes, with raised kerbs 7.5 m (a) Reconnaissance (b) Preliminary survey
Intermediate carriage ways 5.5 m (c) Final location survey (d) Economic survey
Multi-lane pavement 3.5 m per lane Nagaland PSC 2015 Paper-I
227. The width of carriageway in multiple lane Ans. (c) : A precise survey is final location survey.
roads should be Final location survey– Final location survey is done
(a) 3.5 m (b) 3.75 m to prepare working details and make accurate cost
(c) 5.5 m (d) 7 m estimates in certain cases.
Karnataka PSC JE Code 114/2016 Preliminary survey– The preliminary survey is the
foundation that the reset of the project is built from.
Ans. (a) : Width of pavement or carriageway–
Reconnaissance survey– The reconnaissance survey
Class of Road Width of is an extensive study of an entire area that might be
carriageway used for a road or airfield.
Single lane 3.75 m 232. Expected life of a cement concrete road is :
Two lane without raised curve 7.0 m (a) 10 years (b) 20 years
Two lane with raised kerb 7.5 m (c) 40 years (d) 80 years
Intermediate carriage way 5.5 m Nagaland PSC 2015 Paper-I
Multilane pavement 3.5 m/lane Ans. (c) : The expected life of a cement concrete road
228. As per IRC recommendations, what should be is 40 yrs.
the width of carriage way for a single lane • The roads having their wearing surface consistency
Maharashtra JE 2018 Shift-II of cement concrete (plane or reinforced) are known as
ISRO TA 28.08.2016 cement concrete roads or concrete roads.
OR 233. The minimum gradient necessary to ensure
For a single lane traffic, the desirable lane proper drainage in earthern road is :
width is– (a) 1 in 40 (b) 1 in 60
AAI (Aeronautical JE) 2015 (c) 1 in 120 (d) 1 in 100
OR Nagaland PSC 2015 Paper-I
The width of carriage way for a single lane is Ans. (c) : The minimum gradient necessary to ensure
recommended as proper draining in earthen road is 1 in 120.
(a) 3.75 m (b) 4.00 m
(c) 5.50 m (d) 7.5 m
ISRO TA 08.04.2018
Exam Point
The minimum stopping sight distance on a single
Karnataka PSC JE Code 114/2016
lane road, having two–way traffic is equal to–
WBPSC JE 2016
Twice the stopping distance
MH PWD Nashik 2015 The design value of stopping sight distance for a
Ans. (a) : The maximum permissible width of a vehicle two–lane, two–way traffic would be–
is 2.44 and the desirable side clearance for single lane Equal to stopping sight distance
traffic is 0.68 m. This require minimum of lane width Maximum stopping distance for moving vehicle
of 3.75 during on road with designed speed of
IRC specification for carriageway width– 80km/hour is– 120 m
Single lane 3.75 m For a vehicle moving with speed of 80 km per
Two lane, no kerbs 7.0 m hour, the brake reaction time, in ordinary case–
Two lane, raised kerbs 7.50 m 2.5 sec
Intermediate carriage 5.5 m The driver's eye level above the road is taken to
Multi-lane 3.5 m per lane calculate the sight distance– 120 cm
229. Convexity provided on the surface of a 234. Width of psycological widening is :
highway is called : V V2
(a) Curve (b) Camber (a) (b)
(c) Gradient (d) Superelevation 9.5 R 9.5 R
WBPSC SAE 2002 V V2
Nagaland PSC 2015 Paper-I (c) (d)
9.5R 9.5R
Ans. (b) : convexity provided on the surface of a RPSC Lect. (Tech.Edu.) Paper-II 2021
highway is called camber. Nagaland PSC 2015 Paper-I
Highway Engineering 508 YCT
 Ans. (a) : Psychological widening– Extra widening Ans : (c) As per IRC,
provided for overtaking and crossing operation is Coefficient of friction (f) lies between 0.35 to 0.40
termed as psychological widening. v2
V SSD = vt +
Wpsy = 2gf
9.5 R t = reaction time
V – km/hr v = speed of vehicle
R – Radius of curve g = acceleration due to gravity
235. A vehicle moving at 40 km/h speed was stopped f = coefficient of friction
by applying brake and the length of the skid • 0.4 for v = 20 to 30 kmph
mark was 12.2 m. If the average skid resistance • 0.35 > 80 kmph
of the pavement is 0.70, the brake efficiency of
the test vehicle will be nearly Exam Point
(a) 80% (b) 74% In stopping sight distance calculation, the total
(c) 68% (d) 62% reaction time of a driver as per IRC is taken as–
ESE 2019 2.5 seconds
Ans. (b) Sb = 12.2m The stopping or non–passing sight distance length
f = 0.7 required for a summit curve is calculate using–
5 GS2/4.5
v = 40 × = 11.11m / s A road is so designed that the stopping sight
18
distance is 92 m. the intermediate sight distance
v2 11.112 (m) will be– 184
Sb = = = 8.81m Taken g = 10 m 
2gf 2 ×10 × 0.7   The length of the road ahead of the vehicle
 sec 2 
which is visible to the driver is called as–
v2  v2  1 Sight distance
But Sb = 12.2 = = ×
2gηf  2gf  η The intermediate sight distance is equal to–
Twice of stopping sight distance
8.81 The safe stopping sight distance is determined
= 12.2
η by–
8.81 Adding lag distance and the braking distance
η= = 72% ≃ 74% 239. Grade compensation on curves is a minimum
12.2
of:
236. Minimum right of way required for National (a) 55/R (b) 75/R
and State Highways in built up area should be : (c) 100/R (d) 150/R
(a) 46 m (b) 30 m KPSC JTO Code 10/2020
(c) 24.4 m (d) 15.5 m
Ans. (b) : Grade compensation– When sharp
Nagaland PSC 2015 Paper-I
horizontal curve is to be provided on a road which has
Ans. (b) : already the maximum permissible gradient then the
Type of road Built up area gradient shall be decrease to compensate for loss of
National and state 30m-60m (normal 30 m) tractive effort due to the curve.
highway Grade compensation
Major district road 15m-25m (normal 20 m)
30 + R 75
Other district road 15m-20m(normal 15 m) = % or %
Village road 10m-15m (normal 10 m) R R
237. Life of an earthen road varies in the range of : which is minimum.
(a) Less than 1 year (b) 2-4 years 240. Coefficient of friction is less when the
(c) 5-10 years (d) 12-30 years pavement surface is
Nagaland PSC 2015 Paper-I (a) Smooth and wet (b) Smooth and dry
Ans. (b) : Life of an earthen road varies in the range of (c) Dry (d) Rough
2-4 years. Nagaland PSC 2016 Paper-I
• Earth road is a type of road whose whole pavement Ans. (a) : Coefficient of friction is less when the
section is constructed with the locally available earth pavement surface is smooth and wet.
material preferably. • In dry condition, the value of friction force will be
238. What range of coefficient of friction has been more in old tyre as compared to new tyre whereas in
recommended by IRC for the calculation of wet condition friction force will be more in new tyre
stopping sight distance? due to less lubrication effect.
(a) 0.40 to 0.25 (b) 0.40. to 0.15 241. Compared to level surface, on a descending
(c) 0.40 to 0.35 (d) 0.25 to 0.15 gradient, the stopping sight distance is
MH PWD 2019, 2018 (a) Less (b) More
MH WCD 2019 (c) Same (d) Dependent on the speed
UPSSSC JE 31-07-2016 Nagaland PSC 2016 Paper-I
Highway Engineering 509 YCT
 Ans. (b) : Compared to level surface on a descending 246. The ruling design speed for steep terrain State
gradient, the stopping sight distance is more whereas highway is
on a ascending gradient, the SSD is less. (a) 30 Km/hr. (b) 40 Km/hr.
242. On a single lane road with two way traffic, the (c) 50 Km/hr. (d) 60 Km/hr.
minimum stopping sight distance is equal to Mizroam PSC JE RRD 2016 Paper-II
(a) Stopping distance Ans. (b) :
(b) Two times the stopping distance Steep Terrain
(c) Half the stopping distance Ruling (kmph) Minimum (kmph)
(d) Three times the stopping distance NH/SH - 40 30
Nagaland PSC 2016 Paper-I MDR - 30 20
Ans. (b) : ODR - 25 20
Single lane two way = 2 SSD VR - 25 20
Single lane one way = SSD 247. The pavement width of road is depends upon
Two lane two way = SSD (a) Terrain (b) Types of traffic
243. Most suitable material for highway (c) Nos. of lanes (d) Formation width
embankments is Mizroam PSC JE RRD 2016 Paper-II
(a) Granular soil (b) Organic soil Ans. (c) : The pavement width of road is depends upon
(c) Silts (d) Clay number of lanes.
CRPF SI Overseer 2017 It is pavement width (which is metalled (blacktop) nor
Chandigarh JE 17.07.2016 formation width or road width.
Nagaland PSC 2016 Paper-I
CG PWD, NRDA JE Exam 2015 Exam Point
Ans. (a) : Most suitable material for highway Proper geometric design will help in–
embankment is granular soil. Reduction of accident
• Granular soil means gravel, sand or silt (coarse Distance along centre line of a road, over which
grained soil) with little or no clay content. a driver can see the opposite object is called–
• Granular soil has no cohesive strength. Sight distance
244. Select the correct statement. The situation is not considered in the design of
(a) Psychological extra widening depends on the sight distance– Eye level sight distance
number of traffic lanes. The stopping sight depends upon–
(b) Mechanical extra widening depends on the Speed of Vehicles
speed of vehicle. The minimum length of overtaking zone be–
(c) Psychological extra widening depends on the Three times the safe overtaking distance
length of wheel base. 248. Raising outer edge of the road with respect to
(d) Psychological extra widening depends on the inner edge on curve is known as
speed of vehicle, (a) Cant (b) Banking
HPSSC JE 2015 (c) Super elevation (d) All of these
Nagaland PSC 2016 Paper-I Mizroam PSC JE RRD 2016 Paper-II
Ans. (d) : Psychological widening- Ans. (d) : Raising outer edge of the road w.r.t. inner
• There is a tendency for the drivers to drive closer edge on curve is known as cant/superelevation/
to the edges of the pavements on curve. So banking.
psychological widening is also required to provide.
IRC proposed an empirical formula for the e + µ v2
=
psychological widening. 1 − eµ gR
V  where v2
Wps = (m)  e+f =
9.5 R V = speed of vehiclein kmph gR
Wps ∝ V 249. As per IRC-52-2001 the desirable road land
• So, psychological extra widening depends on the width for National & State highway in open
speed of the vehicle. area is
(a) 18.00 m (b) 20.00 m
245. Which of the following shapes is preferred in a
valley curve. (c) 24.00 m (d) 30.00 m
(a) Simple parabola (b) Cubic parabola Mizroam PSC JE RRD 2016 Paper-II
(c) Spiral (d) Lemniscate Ans. (c) :
Nagaland PSC 2016 Paper-I Type of roads Open area
Ans. (b) : For gradually introducing and increasing the Normal Exceptional
centrifugal force acting downwards, the best shape that N.H. & S.H. 24m 18m
could be given for a valley curve is a transition curve. MDR 18m 15m
• Cubic parabola is generally preferred in vertical ODR 15m 12m
valley curves. Village roads 9m 9m
Highway Engineering 510 YCT
250. At sharp horizontal curves of highways of 254. When R is the radius of the curve (in meter), D
radius 'R' (in metres), the percentage reduction is the degree of curve (in degree) and length of
in gradient provided to compensate the loss of the chord is 30m, the relation between R and D
traction force due to curvature is: is–
(a) 50/R (b) 75/R 1520 1719
(c) 100/R (d) None of these (a) R = (b) R =
D D
BCCL JE 30.04.2017
4500 1146
Ans : (b) At sharp horizontal curves of highways of (c) R = (d) R =
radius 'R' m, the percentage reduction in gradient D D
provided to compensate the loss of tractive force due to UPRVUNL JE 2016
curvature is 75/R%. 30 2πR
Ans : (b) =
251. The distance within which a motor vehicle can D 3600
be stopped depends upon: 30 × 360
(a) Total reaction time of the driver R=
(b) Speed of vehicle and efficiency of brakes 2πD
(c) Gradient of the road 1718.87
=
(d) All the above D
BCCL JE 30.04.2017 1719
Ans : (d) The distance within which a motor vehicle R=
can be stopped depends upon– D
v2 255. The equation of Lemniscate curve for
SSD = vt + transition curve is given by :
2g ( f ± e )
p p
(a) Total reaction time of the driver. (a) r = (b) r =
2sin 2α 3cos 2α
(b) Speed of vehicle and efficiency of brakes.
(c) Gradient of the road. p p
(c) r = (d) r =
252. Safe stopping sight distances for design speed 3 tan 2α 3sin 2α
of 60 kmph, coefficient of friction 0.36, reaction GPHC JE 2018
time of driver 2.5 seconds for two way traffic in Ans. (d) : The equation of laminscate curve is–
a two lane road is: p
(a) 63.60 m (b) 81.05 m r=
3sin 2α
(c) 84.50 m (d) 91.51 m Where,
BCCL JE 30.04.2017 r = radius of curvature at any point
Ans : (b) Given– p = polar ray at any point
Design speed of vehicle (v) = 60 kmph α = polar deflection angle
Coefficient of friction (f) = 0.36 Note – Such curves are provided in roads.
Reaction time of driver (t) = 2.5 sec
256. The Camber recommended for cement road in
v2
SSD = 0.278 vt + light rainfall is :
254f (a) 1 in 30 (b) 1 in 40
602 (c) 1 in 50 (d) 1 in 60
= 0.278 × 60 × 2.5 + MHPWD 2019
254 × 0.36
SSD = 81.05 m GPHC JE 2018
253. Expression for stopping distance (SD) for a Ans. (d) : The camber recommended for cement road
vehicle is: in light rainfall is 1 in 60.
(a) SD = vt + v2/2gf (b) SD = vt + v2/4gf Heavy Light
2
(c) SD = vt + v /8gf (d) SD = vt + v2/16gf rainfall rainfall
Where:v = speed of vehicle, Cement concrete and thick
1 in 50 1 in 60
t = reaction time of drive, bituminous surface
f = design coefficient of friction. Thin bituminous surface 1 in 40 1 in 50
DSSSB JE (Mains) 19.03.2021 (Morning) Water bound macadam 1 in 33 1 in 40
BCCL JE 30.04.2017 Earthen road 1 in 25 1 in 33
v2 257. What is the value of “off tracking” while a
Ans : (a) SSD = vt + vehicle is negotiating a curve of radius 40m
2gf
with a wheel base of 7.0 m?
v = speed of vehicle (a) 0.75 m (b) 0.69 m
t = reaction time of driver (c) 0.61 m (d) 0.52 m
f = coefficient of friction
Odisha SSC JE 2014
Highway Engineering 511 YCT
 Ans. (c) : Given– Exam Point
Radius (R) = 40 m Compared to a level surface, on a descending
Wheel base length (l) = 7 m gradient the stopping sight distance is– More
ℓ2 72 The effect of grade on safe overtaking sight
Off tracking = = = 0.61m distance is–
2R 2 × 40 To increase it on both descending
258. What is the super elevation for a horizontal and ascending grades
highway curve designed for a speed of 100 If the stopping distance is 60 meters, then the
kmph and radius 500 m in mixed traffic minimum stopping sight distance for two lane,
conditions? two way traffic is– 60m
(a) 8.9% (b) 6.2% Travel speed is–
(c) 0 (d) 7% Distance covered
Odisha SSC JE 2014 Time of travel including halting time
Ans. (d) : Given – Length of a vehicle controls the design of–
Design speed (v) = 100 kmph Overtaking distance
Radius (R) = 500 m ν2
Stopping distance is given by– νt +
For mixed traffic conditions, 2g ( µ ± i )
(100) = 8.9%
2
v2 In hill roads, minimum sight distance required
e= =
225R 225 × 500 is– Stopping sight distance
So, 261. As per IRC, the value of camber is least for this
e < 0.07 → provide type of road surface
e > 0.07 → 0.07 (a) Cement concrete
(b) Water bound macadam
Hence, super-elevation for a horizontal highway curve
(c) Earth
→ 7% (d) Bituminous
259. The rise of outer edge of the road with respect Karnataka PSC JE Code 114/2016
to the inner edge at the horizontal curve is Ans. (a) :
called Type of Road surface Camber
(a) Camber (b) Super elevation Heavy Light
(c) Extra widening (d) Shoulder Rainfall Rainfall
DMRC JE 2014 PAPER-I Cement concrete surface 2.0% 1.7%
Karnataka PSC JE Code 114/2016 Bituminous surface 2.5% 2.0%
CGVYAPAM Sub Egg 2012 Water bound macadam 3.0% 2.5%
Ans. (b) : A vehicle negotiates a curved path, it is surface
subjected to an outward force known as centrifugal Earth surface 4.0% 3.0%
force. In order to resist this force, the outer edge of the 262. Stopping sight distance is the minimum
road is generally raised above the inner edge. This is distance available on a highway which is the
known as super elevation. (a) distance of sufficient length to stop the
260. Which type of camber is preferable for fast vehicle without collision.
moving vehicles ? (b) distance visible to a driver during night
(a) Straight line (b) Parabolic driving.
(c) Composite (d) None of these (c) height of the object above the road surface.
(d) distance equal to the height of the driver’s eye
Karnataka PSC JE Code 114/2016
above the road surface.
Ans. (b) : Camber or cross slope– Mizoram PSC/(PWD) 2020 Paper-III
• Camber is the slope provided to the road surface in Karnataka PSC JE Code 114/2016
the transverse direction to drain off the drain water Ans. (a) : Stopping sight distance (SSD)
from the road surface. • The minimum sight distance available on a highway
• The camber may be given a parabolic, elliptic or at any spot should be sufficient length to stop a vehicle
straight line shape. traveling at design speed, safely without collision with
• Parabolic and elliptic are preferred by fast moving any other obstruction.
vehicles because they require frequent crossing the • The sight distance available on a road to a driver at
crown line during over taking operations. any instance depend on–
• When very flat cross slope is provided as in cement A. Feature of the road ahead.
concrete pavement, straight line shape of camber may B. Height of the driver's eye above the road surface.
be provided. C. Height of the object above the road surface.
Highway Engineering 512 YCT
 Exam Point 265. For the construction of highway (or railway) :
A road is so designed that the stopping sight (a) Longitudinal sections are required
(b) Both longitudinal and cross sections are
distance is 92 m. the intermediate sight distance
required
(m) will be– 184
(c) Cross sections are required
The opportunities to cross slow moving traffic at
(d) Either (a) or (c)
intervals is not provided in case of– (e) None of these
Four lane highways Odisha JE (Main) 2014
The desirable length of overtaking zone for a
Ans. (b) : We need both longitudinal and cross-section
highway as per Indian Road Congress
because at every interval there might difference in land
recommendations is equal to- profile so that we will get clear idea of landfilling or
Five times overtaking sight cutting to maintain level surface.
distance (Maximum)
266. A vehicle has a wheel base of 7.5 m. What is the
The longest distance at which a driver, whose
off-tracking while negotiating a curved path
line of sight is 1.2 m above the road surface, can with a mean radius of 40 m?
see the top of an object 10cm high on the surface (a) 0.703 m (b) 0.603 m
of road, is called– (c) 0.803 m (d) 0.903 m
Stopping or non-passing sight distance NPCIL JE 2020
263. The formation width of a double lane NH Ans. (a) : Given,
embankment is Wheel base (l) = 7.5 m
(a) 7.0 m (b) 7.4 m Radius (R) = 40 m
(c) 11.0 m (d) 12.0 m or more ℓ2
Karnataka PSC JE Code 114/2016 Off tracking =
2R
KPSC JE 2.7.2016
( 7.5) = 0.703 m
2
Ans. (d) : Width of formation– Width of formation of =
roadways in the sum of the widths of pavement of 2 × 40
carriage way including separators and shoulders. This 267. The desirable length of the overtaking zone, as
dose not include the extra land in formation/cutting. per IRC guidelines, is
S.N Road way with m at (a) 3 times the overtaking sight distance
Plain and Mountaino (b) 5 times the overtaking sight distance
rolling us and steep (c) 7 times the overtaking sight distance
terrain terrain (d) 9 times the overtaking sight distance
Punjab JE 2016
1 NH & State
CG PHE Sub Engg. Exam 2016
Highway
A. Single lane 12.0 m 6.25 m Ans. (b) : As per IRC,
B. Double lane 12.0 m 8.80 m Desirable length of the overtaking zone = 5 OSD
Minimum length of the overtaking zone = 3 OSD
2. Major district road
OSD = overtaking sight distance
A. Single lane 9.0 m 4.75 m
268. Calculate the minimum design value of the safe
B. Double lane 9.0 m –
stopping sight distance (in meters), as per IRC:
3. Other District road
73-1980 guidelines, for a vehicle travelling at a
A. Single lane 7.5 m 4.75 speed of 30 km/h?
B. Double lane 9.0 m – Given: The coefficient of longitudinal friction
4. Village road-single 7.5 m 4.00 m as 0.40 and perception & brake reaction time
lane as 2.5 seconds.
264. What is the width of formation for two-lane (a) 20 (b) 30
national or state highway located in (c) 40 (d) 50
mountainous and steep terrain? Punjab JE 2016
(a) 8.8 m (b) 6.25 m Ans. (b) : Given–
(c) 12.0 m (d) 9.0 m Design speed (v) = 30 km/h
MP VYAPAM Sub Engg. 8.07.2017, 2.00 pm Coefficient of longitudinal fraction (f) = 0.4
Ans : (a) Reaction time (t) = 2.5 sec
• The width of formation for two-lane National or v2
state highway located in mountainous and steep SSD = 0.278 vt + 254 f
terrain is 8.80m
( 30 )
2
• The width of formation or road way N.H and S.H.
= 0.278 × 30 × 2.5 +
located in mountainous and steep terrain for single 254 × 0.4
lane is 6.25 m. = 29.7 ≈ 30 m
Highway Engineering 513 YCT
269. Minimum super elevation provided is 272. A road or a railway over a valley is called
(a) 7% (a) an aqueduct (b) viaduct
(b) 10% (c) causeway (d) road bridge
(c) not less than the grade of the road Tamil Nadu PSC 2019
(d) not less than camber at the section Ans. (b) : Viaduct– A road or a railway over a valley.
Tamil Nadu PSC 2019 Causeway– A causeway is a track, road or railway on
Ans. (d) : • The minimum superelevation provided is the upper point of an embankment across ''a low, or
not less than camber of the section. wet place, or piece of water''.
• The road surface should have a minimum camber to • It can be constructed of earth, masonry, wood or
drain off rainwater. concrete.
270. What is the superelevation for a horizontal Aqueduct– Aqueduct or water bridges are bridges
highway curve of radius 500m and speed 100 constructed to convey water course across gaps such as
kmph in mixed traffic condition? valleys or ravines.
(a) 6.2% (b) 8.9% 273. Limiting gradient value on plain terrain is
(c) 0% (d) 7% (a) 3.3% (b) 5%
RRB JE CBT-II 29–08–2019 (evening) (c) 7% (d) 9%
Tamil Nadu PSC 2019
( 0.75v )
2

Ans. (d) e = Ans. (b) : Gradient table–

127xR Terrain
Ruling
Limitin
Exceptional
condition g
( 0.75x100 )
2

e= Plain 3.3% 5% 6.7%

127x500 Hilly 5% 6% 7 (< 3000 m MSL)
e= 0.0885 > (0.07) so, we taken 7% Steep 6% 7% 8 (< 3000 MSL)
• IRC recommends 0.07 or 7% of superelevation.
Exam Point
v2
271. Super elevation (e) = where, V is the Total reaction time of a driver does not depend
127R upon– Perception time
(a) Centrifugal force The area of most acute vision of a driver is a
(b) Weight of the vehicle cone of– 30 to 50
(c) Speed of vehicle in kmph Generally for mixed traffic, from practical
(d) Frictional force considerations as per IRC guidelines in India, the
Tamil Nadu PSC 2019 super elevation is calculated for (here friction is
V 2 neglected)– 75% of the design speed
Ans. (c) : e + f = The value of the super-elevation will be more
127R
when–
Where, V = Speed in km/hr Speed is more and radius of curvature is less
R = Radius in (m) The equilibrium super-elevation required to
f = Design value of lateral friction = 0.15 counteract the centrifugal force fully is given
e = Rate of superelevation - tan θ
V2
by–
Exam Point 127R
Where V= Designated speed in km/hour and
The stopping sight distance (S) of a vehicle for R=Radius of curve in m.
Indian highways is given by–
274. Reaction time of a driver
0.278V 2 (a) Decreases with increase in time
S = 0.28V.t +
2gf (b) Increases with increase in time
The distance, measured along the centre line of a (c) Is same for all speed
road, over which a driver can see the opposite (d) Does not depend upon the speed
object on the road surface, is called– Nagaland PSC 2016 Paper-I
Sight distance Ans. (b) : Reaction time– Reaction time of the driver
A summit curve is formed at the intersection of is the time taken from the instant the object is visible
3% up gradient and 5% down gradient. To to the driver to the instant the brakes are effectively
provide a stopping distance of 128m, the length applied.
of summit curve needed will be– 298m Generally reaction time taken is 2.5
For sight distance calculation time of perception Lag distance– The distance travelled by the vehicle
and reaction depends on– Alertness of driver during the total reaction time is known as lag distance
Which expressions gives intermediate sight Dlag = 0.278vt
distance as per I.R.C. standards? (SSD: stopping
sight distance; OSD : overtaking sight distance)– v = km/hr
2 SSD Reaction time decrease with increase of speed.
Highway Engineering 514 YCT
275. The main objective of providing a camber is 280. The usual width of side drains along highways
(a) to make the road surface impervious in hilly region is
(b) to make the road surface durable (a) 50 cm (b) 60 cm
(c) to drain off rain water from road surface, as (c) 70 cm (d) 80 cm
quickly as possible IOF JE 2016
(d) all of the above Ans. (b) : The usual width of side drains along
Mizoram PSC/(PWD) 2020 Paper-III highways in hilly region is 60 cm.
SJVNL JE 07.10.2018
Manipur AE Paper-II 2016 281. Along horizontal curves if centrifugal force
MH PWD Nashik 2015 exceeds lateral friction vehicles may
Nagaland PSC 2015 Paper-I (a) Skid (b) Slip
WBPSC SAE 2000 (c) Not affected at all (d) None of these
Ans. (c) : Camber is provided on the road surface to IOF JE 2016
achieve the following objective to drain off rain water Ans. (a) : Along horizontal curves if centrifugal force
from the surface of the carriageway as quickly as possible exceeds lateral friction vehicles may skid.
to improve the architectural appearance of the roadway. • If lateral friction exceeds centrifugal force then slip.
276. The minimum values of coefficient of friction, 282. The expression used to calculate the safe
desirable along longitudinal direction and allowable speed at a curve of radius 'R' is:
lateral direction, are _____ respectively. (a) √(27.94*R) (b) √(29.74*R)
(a) 0.35 and 0.15 (b) 0.15 and 0.35
(c) √(42.97*R) (d) √(24.97*R)
(c) 0.5 and 0.3 (d) 0.3 and 0.5
LMRC AM 2018 Shift-II
LMRC AM 2018 Shift-II
2
PGCIL 13.09.2018 V
Ans. (a) : e + f =
Ans. (a) : The minimum values of coefficient of 127R
friction, desirable along longitudinal and lateral For the plain and rolling terrain
direction are 0.35 and 0.15 respectively. e = 7% = 0.07
277. The minimum skid resistance number (SN) for f = 0.15 (lateral friction factor)
Indian roads to have a level 1 serviceability V2
indicator is : Then 0.07 + 0.15 =
(a) 50 (b) 40 127R
(c) 35 (d) 25 V 2
= 27.94R
LMRC AM 2018 Shift-II V = 27.94 × R
Ans. (a) : The minimum skid resistance number (SN)
for Indian roads to have a level 1 serviceability Exam Point
indicator is 50.
Assuming the rate of super-elevation to be 1 in
• Skid resistance is the friction developed to prevent a
400, the length of the transition curve required to
tire from sliding along the pavement surface.
attain a maximum super-elevation of 15 cm will
278. Which of the following is one of the factor be– 60 m
influencing the provision of camber?
To avoid overturninging of bullock carts on road
(a) Topography
(b) Amount of rainfall curves, the maximum super-elevation
(c) Sub-grade characteristics recommended by IRC is– 1 in 15
(d) Drainage Cant deficiency occurs when a vehicle travels
LMRC AM 2018 Shift-II around a curve at– Higher speed
Ans. (b) : Amount of rainfall is one of the factor The minimum value of super-elevation for
influencing the provision of camber. concrete pavements is– 1 in 60
For the design of superelevation for mixed
279. Design of horizontal curves on highways is
traffic conditions, the speed is reduced by– 25%
based on
The superelevation on a track remains constant
(a) Design speed of vehicles
along– The circular curve
(b) Permissible friction on the road surface
(c) Permissible centrifugal ratio Super elevation is used to counter all of the
(d) All of these except– Acceleration of vehicles
IOF JE 2016 The minimum super elevation on curves should
not be less than– Camber
Ans. (d) : Design of horizontal curves on highways is
based on – 283. When a vehicle traces a horizontal curve, it is
• Design speed of vehicles. subjected to centrifugal force in ____direction.
• Permissible friction on the road surface. (a) inward (b) outward
• Permissible centrifugal ratio. (c) forward (d) backward
A horizontal curve provides a transition between two WB AE 2020
tangent strips of roadway, allowing a vehicle to Ans. (b) : Centrifugal force always act outward when a
negotiate a turn at a gradual rate rather than a sharp cut. vehicle traces a horizontal curve.
Highway Engineering 515 YCT
284. A basic requirement of intersection at grade is 287. The formula to find stopping sight distance is :
(a) the relative angle of approach should be high v2
(b) it should clearly guide the driver (a) 0.278vt + (b) 0.87v2 + 2vt
(c) the area of conflict should be small 254f
(c) 0.25vt + v2f (d) 0.30 t + v2
(d) the relative speed should be high
Gujarat BMC Technical Assistant 2017
WB AE 2020
GSSSB Municipal Engineer 8.10.2017
Ans. (c) : The basic requirement of intersection at
grade is the area of conflict should be small. v2
Ans. (a) : SSD = vt + , v = m/s
285. Range of camber for cement concrete and high 2gf
type bituminous surface is : v2
(a) 1:33 to 1:40 (b) 1:50 to 1:60 = 0.278vt + , v = km / h
(c) 1:25 to 1:33 (d) 1:33 to 1:50 254f
Gujarat BMC Technical Assistant 2017 288. When a rising grade joins a falling grade the
type of curve provided is :
Ans. (b) :
(a) Valley curve (b) Transition curve
Pavement type Camber (c) Sag curve (d) Summit curve
Cement concrete 1.7 to 2% (1 : 50 to 1 : 60) Gujarat BMC Technical Assistant 2017
Bituminous 2 to 2.5% (1 : 40 to 1 : 50)
Gravel 2.5 to 3% (1 : 33 to 1 : 40) Ans. (d) : When rising grade joins a falling grade
summit curve is provided.
286. A Reaction time of a driver
289. Degree of curve can be calculated by:
(a) increases with increase in speed
1620 1719
(b) decreases with increase in speed (a) D o = (b) D o =
(c) is same for all speeds R R
(d) none of the above o 1819 o 1817
(c) D = (d) D =
MH PWD 2016 R R
Ans. (b) : Reaction time– Reaction time of the driver Gujarat BMC Technical Assistant 2017
is the time taken from the instant the object is visible Ans. (b) : For 20 m length chain
to the driver to the instant the brakes are effectively 1145.92
applied. Dº =
R
Generally reaction time taken is 2.5 For 30 m length chain
Lag distance– The distance travelled by the vehicle 1719
during the total reaction time is known as lag distance Dº =
R
Dlag = 0.278vt 290. The camber and gradient on earthen roads
v = km/hr should not be more than
Reaction time decrease with increase of speed. (a) 1 in 10 (b) 1 in 20
(c) 1 in 50 (d) 1 in 80
Exam Point Chandigarh JE 17.07.2016
As per I.R.C. the super elevation to be provided Ans. (b) :
in horizontal curves of radius R is given by– • The camber and gradient on earthen roads should
V2/127R not be more than 1 in 20.
Where V is the speed in Km/h 291. The drains constructed on up slope of hill sides,
Super elevation on road is– are known as
Directly proportional to the speed of vehicle (a) Cross drains (b) Under drains
In highway construction on superelevated (c) Catch water drains (d) Side drains
curves, the rolling shall proceed from– Chandigarh JE 17.07.2016
Lower edge towards the upper edge Ans. (c) : Catch water drains– The drains
As per IRC recommendations the maximum constructed on up slope of hill sides.
limit of super elevation for mixed traffic in plain • Catch (water) drains are ditches more or less parallel
terrain is– 1 IN 15 to the road.
For super elevation design for fast and slow Cross drains– A cross drainage work is a structure
moving vehicles, the speed is taken as– carrying the discharge from a natural stream across a
75% of design speed canal intercepting the stream.
If V is the speed of a vehicle, r is the radius of Underdrains– A drainage feature installed
the curve, g is the acceleration due to gravity, W underground to collect subsurface water and transport
is the width of the carriageway, the super it to a surface outlet.
WV 2 Side drains– Side drain is a longitudinal drain which
elevation is– is parallel provided to the road.
gr • The function of the side drains (or ditches) is to
The slope on the road surface generally provided collect the water from the carriage way and
on the curves is known as– Angle of banking surrounding areas.
Highway Engineering 516 YCT
292. Perpendicular offset from the junction of Ans. (b) :
transition curve and circular curve to the As per IRC–Stopping sight distance
tangent is equal to : Design speed SSD
(a) Shift 20 kmph 20 m
(b) Two times the shift
(c) Three times the shifts 25 kmph 25 m
(d) Four times the shift 30 kmph 30 m
CRPF SI Overseer 2017 40 kmph 45 m
Ans. (d) : Perpendiculaar offset from the junction of 50 kmph 60 m
transition curve and circular curve to the tangent is 60 kmph 80 m
equal to four times the shift. 80 kmph 120 m
ℓ2 100 kmph 180 m
S=
24 R 297. The object of introducing a transition curve at
S = shift of curve each end of the circular curve is
(a) to obtain a gradual increase of curvature from
L2 zero at the tangent point to the specified
Circular curve to the tengent =
6R quantity at the junction of the transition curve
293. The camber of shoulders in water bound with the circular curve
macadam roads is (b) to provide a satisfactory means of obtaining a
(a) equal to the cross slope of pavement gradual increase of super elevation from zero
(b) less than the cross slope of pavement on the tangent point to the specified amount
(c) greater than the cross slope of pavement on the main circular curve
(d) zero (c) to accomplish gradually the transition from
Chandigarh JE 17.07.2016 the tangent to the circular curve and from the
Ans. (a) : The camber of shoulders in water bound circular curve to the tangent
macadam roads is equal to the cross slope of (d) all of the above
pavement. MH Pimpri-Chinchwad MNC 2015
294. The instrument attached to the wheel of a Ans. (d) : The object of introducing a transition curve
vehicle in order to measure the distance at each and of the circular curve is –
travelled, is called as To obtain a gradual increase of curvature from zero at
(a) Passometer (b) Pedometer the tangent point to the specified quantity at the
(c) Odometer (d) Speedometer junction of the transition curve with the circular curve.
Karnataka PSC JE Code 126/2018 To accomplish gradually the transition from the
Ans. (c) : Odometer–The instrument attached to the tangent to the circular curve and from the circular
wheel of a vehicle in order to measure the distance curve to the tangent
travelled.
• The device may be electronic, mechanical or a Exam Point
combination of the two electromechanical. Full amount of super-elevation on a horizontal
295. To avoid inconvenience to slow- moving curve is provided at the–
vehicles, the maximum value of the centrifugal End of the transition curve
ratio on roads is generally taken as The road surface is adequately super-elevated on
1 1 horizontal curve, the proper distribution of
(a) (b) pressure on the vehicle wheels–
2 4
1 Pressure on both outer and inner wheels is
(c) (d) 1 equal
8 The ruling minimum radius of the curve for
Mizoram PSC 26.03.2010 Paper-II
ruling design speed V m/sec coefficient friction
Ans. (b) : To avoid in convenience to slow-moving f, acceleration due to gravity g m/sec and
vehicles the maximum value of the centrifugal ratio on superelevation e is given by– V2/(e + f) g
1 The amount by which the outer end of the road
road's is generally taken as ⇒
4 or outer rail is raised above the inner one is
1 known as- Super-elevation
For railway centrifugal ratio = As per IRC standards, the maximum super
8
296. As per IRC, the safe stopping sight distance for elevation that can be provided on hill road not
a design speed of 80 kmph : bound by snow is- 10%
(a) 45 m (b) 120 m The maximum superelevation that is fixed by
(c) 60 m (d) 20 m Indian Road Congress (IRC) for roads in plain
and rolling terrains and in snowbound areas,
GSSSB ITI Supervisor 27.03.2016
DSSSB JE 20.11.2019, Shift II taking mixed traffic into consideration– 7.0%

Highway Engineering 517 YCT

298. An ideal horizontal transition curve is a: 300. Camber in the road is provided for
(a) Parabola (b) Circle (a) effective drainage
(c) Clothoid spiral (d) Hyperbola (b) counteracting the centrifugal force
JMRC JE 05.02.2021 (c) having proper sight distance
BMC 2019 (d) none of the above
MH PWD 2019 WB AE 2020
MH WCD 2019 KPCL JE 2018
MH Pimpri-Chinchwad MNC 2015 Mizoram PSC JE (Irr.& WRD) Oct. 2018 Paper II
KMC 2009 Karnataka PSC JE 2017
[ESE-2012] KPSC JE 9.9.2017
J & K PSC AE 2009 Nagaland PSC 2016 Paper-I
Ans. (c) : The types of transition curves commonly MH PWD 2016
adopted in horizontal alignment of highways are MH Nagpur Zila Parishad 2015
(i) Spiral or clothoid HSSC JE (CAT-13) 2015
(ii) Bernoulli's Lemniscate WBPSC JE 2007
(iii) Cubic parabola SSC JE 2011 (Morning)
Note–According to IRC ideal shape for transition Ans. (a) : Camber is the transverse slope provided to
curve is spiral because rate of change of radial the road surface for the drainage of the rainwater for
acceleration (c) remains constant. the better performance of the road.
Camber is provided for effective drainage in road.

301. The camber recommended for water bound

macadam roads is
(a) 1 in 24 to 1 in 30 (b) 1 in 30 to 1 in 48
(c) 1 in 48 to 1 in 60 (d) 1 in 60 to 1 in 80
WBPSC SAE 2003
MH Pimpri-Chinchwad MNC 2015
Ans. (b) : Camber is the transverse slope provided to
Exam Point the road surface for the drainage of the rainwater for
The superelevation 'e' is expressed as– the better performance of the road.
(where V = Speed of vehicle, g = Acceleration As per IRC
due to gravity, R = radius of the horizontal Camber (%)
curve, W = weight of the vehicle, G = Universal Type of surface
Heavy rain fall Light rain fall
gravitational constant)– e = v2/ gR (i) Cement 1 in 50 (2%) 1 in 60
Cross slope given to the pavement for safe concrete or thick (1.7%)
drainage of water is– Camber bitumen surface
The equation of determine the superelevation at (ii) thin 1 in 40 (2.5%) 1 in 50 (2%)
75% design speed is– e = (V2/ 127R) − f bituminous
The attainment of super elevation by rotation of surface
pavement about the inner edge of the pavement– (iii) 1 in 33 (3%) 1 in 40
Avoids the drainage problem in flat terrain WBM/Gravel (2.5%)
Rate of super–elevation, for a horizontal curve of pavement
radius 100m and design speed of 15 km/h is– (iv) Earthen 1 in 25 (4%) 1 in 33 (3%)
0.01 302. The super-elevation is
If the radius of curvature on a road is 600 m and (a) directly proportional to the velocity of vehicles
the allowable speed is 75 kmph, then what will (b) inversely proportional to the velocity of vehicles
be the required super elevation– 0.04 (c) directly proportional to the width of pavement
299. In case of multi-lane road, overtaking is (d) inversely proportional to the width of pavement
generally permitted from WB AE 2020
(a) left side (b) right side MH Pimpri-Chinchwad MNC 2015
(c) both sides (d) none of above Ans. (a) : Super elevation– The super elevation is
MH Pimpri-Chinchwad MNC 2015 expressed as the ratio of the height of outer edge with
Ans. (c) : In case of multi-lane road, over taking is respect to the horizontal width. e = tanθ
generally permitted from both sides right and left. v2
Overtaking or passing is the act of one vehicle going e+f =
past another slower moving vehicle, travelling in the 127R
same direction on a road. Super elevation (e) ∝ velocity of vehicles (v)

Highway Engineering 518 YCT

303. The value of the camber recommended for 305. For a highway with design speed of 100 kmph,
cement concrete roads in areas of heavy the safe overtaking sight distance is (assume
rainfall is acceleration as 0.53 m/sec2
(a) 1 in 33 (b) 1 in 40 (a) 300 m (b) 320 m
(c) 1 in 50 (d) 1 in 25 (c) 470 m (d) 750 m
MH Pune MNC 2016 MH Pune MNC 2016
MH PWD 2016 Ans. (d) : Given, design speed (v) = 100 km/hr,
Ans. (c) : Camber is the transverse slope provided to A = 0.53 m/sec2, t = 2 sec
the road surface for the drainage off the rainwater for Vb = 100 – 16 = 84 km/h
the better performance of the road. d1 = 0.278 Vb = 0.278 × 84 × 2 = 46.704 m
As per IRC
1
Type of surface
Camber (%) d2 = 0.278 VbT + aT 2
Heavy rain fall Light rain fall 2
(i) Cement 1 in 50 (2%) 1 in 60 4s
concrete or thick (1.7%) T=
a
bitumen surface
s = 0.2 Vb + 6 = 0.2 × 84 + 6
(ii) thin 1 in 40 (2.5%) 1 in 50 (2%)
bituminous = 22.8
surface 4 × 22.8
T= = 13.117
(iii) WBM/ 1 in 33 (3%) 1 in 40 0.53
Gravel pavement (2.5%)
1
(iv) Earthen 1 in 25 (4%) 1 in 33 (3%) d2 = 0.278 × 84 × 13.117 + ×0.53 × 13.1172
304. A car is moving at a speed of 72 km/hour on a 2
road having upward gradient 2%. The driver = 351.902 m
applies breaks when he sees an obstruction. If d3 = 0.278 VT
his reaction time is 1.5 seconds, assuming that = 0.278 × 100 × 13.117
the co-efficient of friction between pavement = 364.6526 m
and tyre as 0.15, what is the distance traversed OSD = d1 + d2 + d3 = 46.704 + 351.902 + 364.6526
before the car finally stops? = 763.25 ≃ 750
(a) 24 m (b) 324 m 306. The co-efficient of friction in the longitudinal
(c) 1056 m (d) 150 m direction of a highway is estimated as 0.396
MH Pune MNC 2016 The breaking for a car moving at a speed of 65
Ans. (d) : given, speed v = 72 km/hr = 20 m/sec km/hr is
t = 1.5sec (a) 87m (b) 42m
f = 0.15, n = 2% (c) 40m (d) 45m
v2 MH Pune MNC 2016
SSD = vt + Ans. (b) : given f =0.396
 n 
2g  f ±  v = 65km/hr ⇒18.05m/sec
 100 
(20) 2 v2 (18.05) 2
= 20 × 1.5 + = 149.92 ≃ 150m breaking distance = = = 42m
 2  2gf 2 × 9.81× 0.396
2 × 9.81  0.15 + 
 100  Exam Point
SSD = 150 m Raising of outer edge of a road with respect to
Exam Point inner edge, is known– Super elevation,
According to Indian Roads Congress, Cant, Banking
superelevation balances the centrifugal force While designing the superelevation of a
corresponding to– highway, its maximum value is fixed considering
Three-fourth of the design speed the need to– Avoid toppling of slow
For a constant value of coefficient of lateral moving vehicles in mixed traffic flow
friction, the value of required super-elevation The coefficient of lateral friction for equilibrium
increases with– Increase in speed and with super elevation is taken as– Zero
decrease in radius of curve Super elevation and lateral friction should not be
2
If the width of carriage way is 10m and the outer V
edge is 40cm higher than the inner edge, then the greater than–
127R
super-elevation required is– 1 in 25 The most commonly adopted method to provide
The outer edge of the road in a curved path is super-elevation on roads, is by pivoting the road
raised above the inner one, the difference in level surface about–
of two edges is called– Super elevation Inner edge so that outer edge is raised
Higher value of super elevation is highly Along a horizontal curve, if centrifugal force
undersirable for– Mixed traffic exceeds lateral friction, a vehicle may– Skid
Highway Engineering 519 YCT
307. What is the ruling minimum radius of Ans. (a) : Cross Slope –
horizontal curve of a National Highway in Cross Slope of country Terrain
plain terrain with ruling design speed of 100 0 – 10% Plain
kmph? 10 – 25% Rolling
MP VYAPAM Sub Engg. 9.07.2017, 2.00 pm 25 – 60% Mountainous
OR > 60% Steep
The ruling minimum radius of horizontal curve
of a national highway in plain terrian for a 311. If no super elevation is provided on a road
ruling design speed of 100 km/hour with e = along curves, pot hole may develop at
0.07 and f = 0.15 is close to (a) Inner edge of the road
(a) 250 m (b) 300 m (b) Outer edge of the road
(c) 360 m (d) 36 m (c) Centre of the road
MH Pune MNC 2016 (d) No where on the road
HESCOM AE 2017 MH PWD 2016
Ans. (c) : Given v = 100 km/h, e= 0.07, f = 0.15 Ans. (b) : Super elevation– The super elevation is
or v = 27.78 m/sec expressed as the ratio of outer edge with respect to the
v2 horizontal width. e = tanθ
e+f =
Rg v2
or or e + f =
127R
v2 If no super elevation is provided on a road along curve,
R=
g(e + f ) pot hole may develop at outer edge of the road.
(27.78) 2 312. The ability of a driver to stop the vehicle
R= moving with the designed speed, depends upon:
9.81(0.07 + 0.15) (a) perception time
R = 357.58m ≃ 360m (b) brake reaction time
308. The slope of line joining the crown & edge of (c) frictional resistance between road surface and
the road surface is known as– vehicle
(a) Cross Fall (b) Camber (d) all of the above
(c) Cross slope (d) Any of these MH PWD 2016
MH MSEB 2016 Ans. (d) : The ability of the driver to stop the vehicle
Ans. (d) : The slope line joining the crown edge of the moving with the design speed, depends on
road surface is known as camber/cross fall/ cross (i) Frictional resistance b/w road surface and vehicle
slope. Camber is the transverse slope provided to the (ii) Perception time
road surface for the drainage of the rain water for the (iii) Brake reaction time
better performance of the road. (iv) Efficiency of the brakes.
309. Super-elevation on roads in snow bound areas, 313. When an up gradient of a highway meets a
should generally not exceed downgrade, the vertical curve provided, is
(a) 15% (b) 12% known as
(c) 10% (d) 7% (a) valley curve (b) sag curve
MH PWD 2016 (c) summit curve (d) all the above
Ans. (d) : super elevation– The super elevation is MH PWD 2016
expressed as the ratio of the height of outer edge with Ans. (c) : Summit curve– The deviation angle will be
respect to the horizontal width. e = tanθ maximum when an ascending gradient meets with a
descending gradient. Summit curve with convexity
upwards/crest curve.
Length of summit curve– when L > SSD
NS2
Ls =
4.4
emax – 4.4
• For plain/rolling terrain– 7% (or snow bound areas ) When, L < SSD– Ls = 2S −
• For hilly area – 10% N
• For urban area with frequent intersection– 4% NS02
310. If cross slope of a country is upto 10% the When, L > OSD Ls =
9.6
terrain is classified as
(a) plain (b) rolling 9.6
(c) mountainous (d) steep When, L < OSD Ls = 2S −
N
MH PWD 2016
Highway Engineering 520 YCT
 Exam Point Ans. (c) : Appropriate answer is C) Camber of various
The perpendicular offsets from a tangent to the pavement and environmental conditions given below :
junction of a transition curve and circular curve Range of camber in areas of
Type of road rainfall
is equal to– Shift 'S' S.N.
surface
A vertical curve is designated on the basis of Heavy rainfall Light rainfall
the– 1. Cement concrete 1 in 50 1 in 60
Radius of the curve, Minimum sight distance, (2%) (1.7%)
Change of gradient 2. Bituminous 1 in 40 1 in 50
If R is the radius of the main curve, D the angle pavement (2.5%) (2%)
of deflection, S the shift, and L the length of the
transition curve. The total tangent length of the 3. WBM, gravel 1 in 33 1 in 40
(3%) (2.5%)
∆ L
combined curve is given by– ( R + S ) tan + 4. Earth road 1 in 25 1 in 33
2 2
(4%) (3%)
If super-elevation is not provided on a horizontal
curve, then the pressure on the outer wheel will Exam Point
be–
More than the pressure on the inner wheel The minimum radius of parabolic summit curve
The ends of a 40 circular curve is to be joined is equal to– L/N
with the straight, using a transition curve of v2
With usual notations, the expression
150m length. The radius of curvature of the gR
circular curve will be about– 430 m represents– Centrifugal ratio
314. Gradient on a highway is 1 in 20. Radius of the The maximum rate of change of radial
curve is 200 m. After grade compensation the acceleration allowed on transition curves is–
grade to be provided should not be less than 300mm/sec3
4%. Calculate the grade compensation. The transition curve used in the horizontal
(a) 0.38% (b) 1.15% alignment of highways as per IRC
(c) 4.63% (d) 5% recommendation is– Cubic spiral
SSC JE 27.01.2018 (Morning) In the absence of super-elevation, the formation
Ans. (a) As per IRC:– of pot holes is generally found–
On the outer edge of road
30 + R 
Gradecompensation = % If the design speed is V kmph and deviation
R  angle is N radians, then the total length of a
 min
75  valley curve in meters is given by the
or = %
 0.38 ( NV 3 )
1/2
R expression–
So, Grade compensation =
317. For water bound macadam roads in localities
30 + 200  of heavy rainfall, the recommended value of
= 1.15 
200  camber is
 min ⇒ .375 ≃ 0.38% (a) 1 in 30 (b) 1 in 36
75
or = = 0.375 (c) 1 in 48 (d) 1 in 60
200  DSSSB JE 5.11.2019, Morning
315. Sub-grade of road shall be well consolidated HPSSC JE Code 386/2018
and compacted each with a camber of: MP VYAPAM Sub Engg. 9.07.2017, 2.00 pm
(a) 1 in 30 (b) 1 in 45 MH PWD 2016
CG PHE Sub Engg Exam 2016
(c) 1 in 15 (d) 1 in 60 HSSC JE (CAT-13) 2015
PGCIL JE CE 17.12.2020 JKSSB JE 2013
Ans. (d) : Sub-grade of road shall be well consolidated Ans. (b) : As per IRC
and compacted each with a camber of 1:60. Sub-grades Camber (%)
are commonly compacted before the construction of a Type of surface Heavy Light
road pavement or railway track and are some times rain fall rain fall
stabilized by the addition of asphalt, lime or other (i) Cement concrete or 1 in 50 1 in 60
modifiers. Sub-grades is the foundation of pavement. thick bitumen surface (2%) (1.7%)
316. In concrete roads the camber is generally (ii) Thin bituminous 1 in 40 1 in 50
provided is surface (2.5%) (2%)
(a) 1 in 20 (b) 1 in 30 (iii) WBM/Gravel 1 in 33 1 in 40
(c) 1 in 60 (d) 1 in 48 pavement (3%) (2.5%)
(e) None of above (iv) Earthen 1 in 25 1 in 33
CGPSC, AP, Lecturer Exam 2016 (4%) (3%)

Highway Engineering 521 YCT

318. Side drains on both sides of a hill road, are 3. It ibs provided for the gradual change in
essential when the road is superelevation in a convenient manner.
(a) along the spur curves 4. It eliminates the damper of derailment, overturning,
(b) along the re-entrant curves slide slipping of vehicles and discomfort to the
(c) in cutting passengers.
(d) none of these 321. If Lemniscate curve of transition throughout is
MH PWD 2016 introduced to connect two parallel roads, the
Ans. (c) : The side drain are provided only on the hill maximum polar angle of the curve, is
side of road. (a) 100 (b) 150
0
• If hill road is in cutting, the side drain on both sides (c) 20 (d) 300
of a hill orad. MH PWD 2016
Ans. (d) : If Lemniscate curve of transition throughout
is introduced to connect two parallel road, the
maximum polar angle of the curve is 300
• Lemniscate curve generally adopted in city road
where the deflection angle is large.
322. If the cross slope of a country is 25% to 60%,
the terrain is classified as
(a) plain (b) rolling
(c) steep (d) mountainous
MH PWD 2019, 2016
Nagaland PSC 2016 Paper - I
MH WCD 2019
Gujarat BMC TA 2016
319. If cross slope of a country is greater than 60%, Ans. (d) :
the terrain is classified as Cross Slope Terrain
(a) rolling (b) mountainous of country
(c) steep (d) plain 0 – 10% Plain
MH PWD 2016 10 – 25% Rolling
Ans. (c) : Cross slope – 25 – 60% Mountainous
Cross Slope Terrain > 60% Steep
of country 323. The minimum design speed for hairpin bends
0 – 10% Plain in hill roads is taken as
10 – 25% Rolling (a) 20 kmph (b) 30 kmph
25 – 60% Mountainous (c) 40 kmph (d) 50 kmph
> 60% Steep MH PWD 2016
320. The following purposes served by a transition Ans. (a ) : Hair pain bend– for hill roads.
curve in a highway alignment include: Minimum speed 20 km/hr
1. Gradual introduction of the centrifugal force Minimum straight length – 20 m
on moving vehicles from zero on the straight Gradient – Minimum– 1 in 200
alignment to a constant final value on the Maximum – 1 in 40
circular curve. Minimum Radius– 14m
2. Enabling the gradual introduction of Super elevation (e) = 1 in 10
superelevation on the roadway. Exam Point
Select the correct answer using the codes given The length of transition curve is dependent on–
below : both rate of change of superelevation and rate
(a) 1 only (b) 2 only Of change of centrifugal acceleration
(c) Both 1 and 2 (d) Neither 1 nor 2 Reverse curves are provided on the routes when
ESE 2017 the two straight lines are–
Ans. (c) Parallel or meeting at a very small acute angle
Transition curve is of varying radius and varying Design of horizontal and vertical alignment,
curvature can be introduced between straight line and super elevation, sight distance and grades are
curve or between branches of compound curve or affected by– Speed of the vehicle
reverse curve to provide a transition.Purpose of In an ideal transition curve the radius of
providing transition curve: curvature is–Inversely proportional to the
1. It allows a gradual transition of curvature from the radius of the main curve
tangent to the circular curve or from circular curve The unit of rate of change of centrifugal
to the tangent. acceleration of transit curve is– m/sec3
2. The radius of curvature increases or decreases The ideal shape of a transition curve on roads is–
gradually. clothoid

Highway Engineering 522 YCT

324. To ensure that bullock carts may not overturn (b) Outer edge of the road
on curves, the maximum value of super- (c) Anywhere on the road
elevation, recommended by I.R.C., is (d) Inner edge of the road
(a) 1 in 10 (b) 1 in 12 MH WRD 2016
(c) 1 in 15 (d) 1 in 20
MH PWD 2016 Ans. (b) : At a curved section of road not provided
with super elevation, deterioration of road is most
Ans. (c) : As per IRC Recommendation– Bullock
carts may not overturn on curve maximum super likely to start from outer edge of the road.
elevation – 1 in 15 • If no super elevation is provided on a road along
emax– curves. pot holes may develop at outer edge of the
0.07–for plain & rolling terrain road.
0.04–for urban road with frequent intersection 328. In the design of horizontal alignment of
0.10–for Hilly Area. highways, which one of the following is correct
325. In which one of the following conditions, formula for calculation of impact factors?
slipping of vehicle takes place? (a) Centrifugal force / weight of vehicles
(a) Wheel revolves more than the corresponding (b) Weight of vehicles / centrifugal force
longitudinal of movement along the roads
(c) Centrifugal force x weight of vehicle
(b) Wheel revolves less than the corresponding
longitudinal of movement along the roads (d) None of the above
(c) Wheel revolves equal to the corresponding MH Nagar Parishad Mains 2018
longitudinal movement along the roads Centrifugal force
(d) None of the above Ans. (a) : Impact factor =
weight of vehicle
MH Nagar Parishad Mains 2018
Ans. (a) : Slip– Occurs when the wheel revolves more P mv 2
than the corresponding longitudinal movement along =
W R mg
the road.
Skidding– Happens when the path travelled along the v2
road surface is more than the circumferential = Rg
movement of the wheel due to friction.
P
326. Excessive camber on pavement may cause is known as the centrifugal ratio or the impact
(a) Erosion of the shoulders & side slopes W
(b) Slip of the speedy vehicles factor.
(c) Both (a) and (b) 329. Which one of the following factor control the
(d) None of (a) and (b) highway alignment?
MH WRD 2016 (a) Obligatory points
Ans. (c) : Excessive camber on pavement may cause– (b) Traffic & Economics
(i) Deterioration of central portion.
(c) Geometric design
(ii) Slip of the speedy vehicle towards the edges
(iii) Erosion of the shoulders/ berm/ side slope (d) All of the above
MH Nagar Parishad Mains 2018
Exam Point Ans. (d) : The factor control the highway alignment–
In plains the minimum length of transition curve (i) Class purpose (ii) Obligatory point
is– 2.7V2/R (iii) Gradient (iv) Type of vehicular traffic
Important factor considered in the desing of (v) Horizontal curve (vi) Obstructions
summit curve is– Sight distance (vii) Sight distance etc.
The length of a transition curve is proportional to–
V3/R 330. As per IRC recommendations, which one of the
V= velocity and R= Radius of curvature following is ruling gradient value on plain &
For a comfortable travel on highways, the rolling terrain?
centrifugal ratio should not exceed– 0.25 (a) 1 in 30 (b) 1 in 20
On horizontal curve, if the pavement is kept (c) 1 in 16.7 (d) 1 in 10
horizontal across the alignment, then the MH Nagar Parishad Mains 2018
pressure on the outer wheels will be– Ans. (a) :
More than the pressure under inner wheels
The ratio between centrifugal force and weight Type of terrain Gradient (IRC)
2
of the vehicle is– V /gR Ruling Limiting Exceptional
327. At a curved section of road not provided with Plain or rolling 3.3% 5% 6.7%
super elevation, deterioration of road is most Moutainous 5% 6% 7%
likely to start from
Steep terrain 6% 7% 8%
(a) Centre of the road
Highway Engineering 523 YCT
331. Which one of the following are different Ans. (b) : As per IRC
situation of sight distance considered in the Camber (%)
design? Type of surface Heavy Light
(i) Stopping or absolute minimum sight rain fall rain fall
distance (i) Cement concrete or 1 in 50 1 in 60
(ii) Safe overtaking distance thick bitumen surface (2%) (1.7%)
(ii) thin bituminous 1 in 40 1 in 50
(iii) Safe sight distance for entering into
surface (2.5%) (2%)
uncontrolled intersection
(iii) WBM/Gravel 1 in 33 1 in 40
(a) (i) & (ii) are correct pavement (3%) (2.5%)
(b) (ii) & (iii) are correct (iv) Earthen 1 in 25 1 in 33
(c) (i) & (iii) are correct (4%) (3%)
(d) All are correct 335. As per IRC standards, which one of the
MH Nagar Parishad Mains 2018 following is correct empirical formula for
Ans. (d): Three sight distance situation are considered calculation of length of transition curve (Ls) for
for design– plain and rolling terrain?
• Stopping sight distance or the absolute minimum Where, v = design speed (kmph) R = Radius of
curve (m)
sight distance. (a) 2.7 V2/R (b) V2/R
• Safe overtaking distance (Safe operation) 2
(c) 1.7 V /R (d) 0.7 V2/R
• Safe sight distance for entering into un-controlled MH Nagar Parishad Mains 2018
intersection. Ans. (a) : According to IRC empirical formula for
332. Which one of the following formula gives the length of transition curve (Ls)–
maximum value of grade compensations? 2.7v 2
Where, R = Radius of circular curve (m) L s = – For plain/rolling terrain
R
(a) 75/R percent (b) 65/R percent
(c) 55/R percent (d) 45/R percent v2
Ls = – for hilly area
MH PWD 2019 R
MH Nagar Parishad Mains 2018
30 + R Exam Point
Ans. (a) : Grade compensation– ( G c ) = % Overturning of vehicles on a curve can be
R
75 avoided by using– Transition curve
Maximum value of grade compensation ( G c ) = % Force is acting of vehicle during turning–
R
Where, R = Radius of curve in meter Centrifugal
* (Compensation gradient)Final = (Initial gradient - Gc) The expression used to calculate the safe
4% allowable speed at a curve of radius 'R' is–
333. As per IRC suggestions, which one of the √(27.94*R)
following is the range of radius of entry curve
The shape of transition curve suitable for high
in rural area?
(a) 20 to 35m (b) 15 to 25m ways as per IRC is– Spiral
(c) 10 to 15m (d) 35 to 40m The shift of the transition curve of radius 300 m
MH Nagar Parishad Mains 2018 and length 48 m is– 0.32m
Ans. (a) : Radius of rotary curve – The shapes is preferred in a valley curve–
v 2 Cubic parabola
(R) = If D is the degree of a curve, then percentage
127f
Entry curve – (R)Entry curve reduction– 0.04D
for 40 km/hr – 20 m ≤ (R)Entry Curve ≤ 35 m Passing zones are generally not provided on–
for 30 km/hr – 15m ≤ (R)Entry Curve ≤ 25 m Summit Curves,
( R min )Central Island = 1.33 ( R )entry curve Horizontal Curves, Two Lane Highways
336. Which one of the following is minimum
334. As per IRC, the recommended value of camber
for thin bituminous surface varies in between shoulder width as recommended by IRC?
(a) 1.7% to 2% (b) 2% to 2.5% (a) 2m (b) 2.5m
(c) 2.5% to 3% (d) 3% to 4% (c) 3m (d) 4m
MH Nagar Parishad Mains 2018 MH Nagar Parishad Mains 2018
Highway Engineering 524 YCT
 Ans. (b) Minimum solder width recommended by Ans. (a) : IRC has suggested the height of eye level of
IRC- a driver as 1.2 m and height of the object as 0.15 m
Plain/Rolling above the road surface.
NH/SH Hilly areas
terrain
(i) Single lane 4.125 m 1.25 m
(ii) Two lane 2.5 m 0.90 m
Major D.R.–
Single lane 2.625 m 0.5 m
Two lane 1.0 m –
ODR– 339. If the overtaking site Distance (OS on a
highway is 200m, the desirable and minimum
Single lane 1.875 m 0.5 m
length of overtaking zone will be
Two lane 1.0 m – (a) 400m and 800m respectively
337. The maximum rate of introduction of super (b) 800m and 400m respectively
elevation in plain & rolling terrain by raising (c) 600m and 1000m respectively
the outer edge of pavement as per (d) 1000m and 600m respectively
recommendation of IRC is given by MH Asst. Town Planning 2018
(a) 1 in 150 (b) 1 in 60 Ans. (d) : Given OSD = 200 m.
(c) 1 in 90 (d) 1 in 100 • Minimum length of overtaking Zone = 3. (OSD)
MH Nagar Parishad Mains 2018 = 3 × 200 m
Ans. (a) : As per IRC recommendation– = 600 m
(i) According to rate of change of super elevation • Desirable overtaking zone = 5 × (OSD)
= 5× 200 m = 1000 m
(ii) for plain & Rolling terrain– 1 in 150
(iii) for Built up area – 1 in 100 340. For sight distance calculation 'Time of
perception' and reaction depends on
(iv) For Hilly Area – 1 in 60 (a) speed of the vehicle (b) gradient of road
(c) alertness of driver (d) nature of pavement
Exam Point MH Asst. Town Planning 2018
In case of summit curves, the deviation angle Ans. (c) : The minimum sight distance that can be
will be maximum when– provided on a highway depend on the perception and
An ascending gradient meets with a reaction time of the driver and the forces acting on the
descending gradient braking vehicle.
According to IRC, the length of the valley curve 341. To avoid overturning and lateral skidding on a
(L), when the length of curve exceeds the horizontal curve, the centrifugal ratio (P/W)
required sight distnce (S), is given by– should always be ............ (Where, the symbols
2 have their usual meanings)
GS (a) Less than b/2h but greater than f
L=
1.5 + 0.035S (b) Less than f but greater than b/2h
If S is the non-passing sight distnce, then the (c) Greater than b/2h and f both
length of the summit curve(L), when S is greater (d) Less than b/2h and f both
4.4 MH Asst. Town Planning 2018
than L is given by– L = 2S – Ans. (d) : To avoid overturning and lateral skidding
G on horizontal curve, the centrifugal ratio should always
If S is the passing sight distance, then the length be less than b/2h and also coeff. of lateral friction (f)
of the summit curve (L), when S is less than L, is • 'f' is less than b/2h- The vehicle would skid and not
GS 2 overturn
given by– L=
9.6 • b/2h is lower than 'f'– The vehicle would overturn on
Where G= Algebraic difference of the grades the outer side before skidding.
on the two sides of the point of intersection 342. The weight of a vehicle affects the design of
(a) Camber and gradient of a road
338. As per IRC suggestion, for the calculation of (b) pavement thickness and gradient of a road
stopping sight distance, the height of eye level (c) cross drainage works and tunnels
of driver and height of the object above the (d) permissible speed of vehicle
road surface, respectively are MH Asst. Town Planning 2018
(a) 1.2m & 0.15m Ans. (b) : The weight of vehicle affect the design of-
(b) 0.15m & 1.2m (1) Pavement thickness
(c) 1.2m & 1.2m (2) Ruling gradient
(d) 0.15m & 0.15m (3) Limiting gradient
MH Nagar Parishad Mains 2018 (4) Design of bridge
Highway Engineering 525 YCT
343. As per IRC recommendation, what should be Ans. (b) : On horizontal curve, if the pavement is kept
the value of camber for concrete / bituminous horizontal across the alignment, then the pressure on
surface in case of light rainfall? the outer wheels will be more than the pressure on
(a) 2 Percentage (b) 1.7 Percentage inner wheels.
(c) 3 Percentage (d) 2.5 Percentage
MH PWD 2018 Exam Point
Maharashtra JE 2018 Shift-I
Ans. (b) : Camber– Camber is the slope provided to The minimum length of a valley curve should be
the road surface in the transverse direction to drain off such that the head light beam sight distance is
the rain water from the road surface. equal to the– Stopping sight distance
Camber (%) If the radiaus of a compound curve and a reverse
Type of road surface curve are respectively the same, the length of
Light Heavy
1. Cement concrete and high 1.7% 2.0% common tangent– of both curves will be equal
bitumin surface The length of the tangent of a simple curve
2. Thin bituminous surface 2.0% 2.5% having angle of deflection θ and radius of
3. WBM road/gravel pavement 2.5% 3.0% curvature R, is equal to– R tan θ/2
4. Earth road 3.0% 4.0% The intrinsic equation of an ideal transition curve
344. Which one of the following is the most l2
important factor in the design of summit representing a clothoid is given by– φ=
2RL
curves on highways?
(a) Sight distance requirement The standard equation of a cubic parabolic
(b) Passenger's comfort x3
transition curve provided on roads is–
(c) Impact factor 6R.L
(d) Aesthetic appearance
Maharashtra JE 2018 Shift-I 347. Keeping all other parameters as constant, the
MH PWD 2018 ratio of mechanical widening in case of 6 lanes
to 4 lanes will be
Ans. (a) : Summit curve– Summit curves with
convexity upward are formed in any one of the case (a) 0.67 (b) 1
illustrated. The deviation angle b/w the two interacting (c) 1.50 (d) 2.00
gradient is equal to the algebraic different b/w them. MH PWD 2018
• If ascending gradient meet with descending gradient nℓ2
then deviation angle is maximum. Ans. (c) : Mechanical widening =
2R
• For design summit curve on highway the sight Mechanical widening ∝ n
distance is most important factor.
6
345. The length of vertical curve in highway Mechanical widening = = 1.50
geometry is governed by : 4
(a) Gradient 348. The height of the mountable type of kerbs is
(b) Width of road about --------- cm above the pavement edge.
(c) Super-elevation (a) 10 (b) 15
(d) Sight distance requirement (c) 20 (d) 25
Mizoram PSC JE (PWD) Nov, 2018 Paper-II MH PWD 2018
Ans. (d) : Vertical curve– Ans. (a) : The height of the mountable type of kerbs is
• Vertical curve should be provided at point of change about 10 cm above the pavement edge.
of grade. • Semi barrier type kerb (medium pedestrian traffic).
• The vertical serve a number of purpose
349. Overall length of the vehicle determines :
(1) They surve as a gradual transition from one
gradient to another without discomfort to riders. (a) Overtaking sight distance
(2) They eliminate sudden humps and troughs. (b) Passing sight distance
(3) They provided adequate visibility for stopping and (c) Turning radii of curves
overtaking. (d) Extra widening.
• For summit curve, the most important consideration Nagaland PSC 2015 Paper-I
in determining the length of curve is the sight distances Ans. (d) : Overall length of the vehicle determines the
requirement. extra widening.
346. On horizontal curve, if the pavement is kept 350. Usually the time of perception is :
horizontal across the alignment, then the (a) 2 minutes (b) 1 minutes
pressure on the outer wheels will be : (c) ½ minutes (d) 2 seconds
(a) Less than pressure on inner wheels Nagaland PSC 2015 Paper-I
(b) More than the pressure on inner wheels
Ans. (d) : Usually the time of perception is 2 seconds.
(c) Equal to the pressure on inner wheels
(d) Zero • The instant we see any object to the instant we think
MH PWD 2018 to apply the brake sometime is lost.

Highway Engineering 526 YCT

 Exam Point Range of Camber
S.
If an ascending gradient of 1 in 50 meets a Type of Road Heavy Light
No.
descending gradient of 1 in 50, the length of rainfall rainfall
summit curve for a stopping sight distance of 1. Concrete Road 1in 50 1 in to 60
80m will be– 60m (2%) (1.7%)
The expression for the length of a transition 2. Bituminous 1 in 40 1 in 50
(2.5%) (2.0%)
V3 3. W.B.M. Road 1 in 33 1 in 40
curve(L) in metres is– L=
48CR (3%) (2.5%)
Where C = Rate of change of radial 4. Earthen Road 1 in 25 1 to 33
acceleration in m/s3 (4%) (3%)
R = Radius of circular curve in metres, and 353. Sub-arterial roads have a traffic mobility
V = Speed of the vehicle in kmph. (a) Higher than arterial roads
On a hill road, the radius or curve should not be (b) Lower than arterial roads
less than– 15 m (c) Equal to arterial roads
The rate of change of radial acceleration governs (d) May be higher or lower than arterial roads
the– Length of a transition curve WBPSC JE 2009
One sag (or valley) curves the available sight Ans. (b) : Sub-arterial roads have a traffic mobility
distance is determined based on– lower than arterial roads.
Night-time driving conditions • The city roads which provided lower level of travel
If N is the algebric difference of grades, S is the mobility than arterial streets are called sub-arterial
minimum sight distance in metres, the length (L) streets.
of a summit curve is– NS2/4 354. The ruling design speed on a curve is 100 km/h
351. The land secured and reserved for and the super elevation on the curve is 7%.
development of a road is called . Calculate the ruling design radius (m) of the
(a) Road way (b) Road zone curve. Take coefficient of the lateral friction as
(c) Road area (d) Right-of- way 0.15.
WBPSC JE 2009 (a) 129 (b) 189
Ans. (d) : The land secoured and reserved for (c) 358 (d) 1668
development of a road is called right of way (Row) SSC JE 27.01.2018, 10.15 am
right of way depends on drainage system, rainfall Ans. (c)
intensity and topography. e = 0.07
According to IRC for different Roads. following f = 0.15
walues of Row. v = 100 kmph
Plain and rolling R = ??
terrain V2 v2
Type of m Hilly/Stee e+f = ⇒R=
road
Max min
p terrain 127R 127 ( e + f )
ROW ROW
(m) (m) 1002
= = 357.91
NH 60 45 24 127 ( 0.07 + 0.15)
SH 45 30 20 = ≃ 358m
MDR 30 20 18
356. The length of road provided for clear visibility
ODR 25 15 15
of objects wile driving is called-
VR 18 12 9 (a) reaction time (b) braking time
352. Shape of a camber best suited for cement (c) sight distance (d) lateral distance
concrete pavements is TNPSC JE/Supervisor 2012
(a) Straight line Ans. (c) : Sight distance–Sight distance is the distance
(b) Parabolic of the road so that the driver can clearly see the road
(c) Elliptical ahead from his position can stop his vehicle by
(d) Combination of straight and parabolic identifying any object's or danger on the road in front.
HPSSC JE Code 438/2018 It is expressed in meter the sight distance is 300 meter
WBPSC JE 2009 on a flat road.
Ans. (a) : Shape of a camber best suited for cement 357. The Ruling gradient in plain terrain
concrete pavements is straight line recommended by IRC is :
• Comber provided the transverse slope of drain off (a) 1 in 20 (b) 1 in 25
surface water from the pavement surface. The Value (c) 1 in 30 (d) 1 in 40
of camber recommended by IRC for different type or GPHC JE 2018
road surface. TNPSC JE/Supervisor 2012
Highway Engineering 527 YCT
 Ans. (c) : Ruling gradient–It is a permissible gradient Nagaland PSC CTSE 2017 Paper-I
of road alignment, on which every type of motor KMC 2009
vehicle and carriage can travel for more distances Ans. (c) : IRC specification–
without applying more force, the road engineer should, Terrain /
Rulling Limiting Exceptional
it possible give preference to the controlling gradient Gradient
when determining the alignment of roads. Plain 3.3% 5.0% 6.7%
For Plain roads = 1 in 30 or 3.33% Hilly 5.0% 6.0% 7.0%
For Mountain roads = 1 in 20 or 5.00% Steep 6.0% 7.0% 8.0%
358. If the difference in elevation of an edge and 5 1
crown of a 12m wide pavement is 20 cm, the = =
100 20
camber of the pavement is
(a) 1 in 60 (b) 1 in 30 361. Distance along centre line of a road, over which
(c) 1 in 40 (d) 1 in 20 a driver can see the opposite object is called
WBPSC JE 2007 (a) Sight distance (b) Visibility
(c) Clear distance (d) None of these
Ans. (b) : Total pavement = 12 m × 0.5 = 6 m
SJVNL JE 07.10.2018
6 m pavement have 0.20 m vertical distance.
Ans. (a) : Sight distance–It is distance along centre line
0.20 20 1
∴ 1 pavement = = = of a road, over which a driver can see the opposite
6 600 30 object.
So, the camber of the pavement = 1 in 30 Stopping sight distance–
359. On earthen roads, camber should preferably be S.S.D = log distance + braking distance
(a) 1 in 20 to 1 in 24 (b) 1 in 20 to 1 in 30 v2
(c) 1 in 30 to 1 in 40 (d) 1 in 10 to 1 in 15 = 0.278vt +
Mizoram PSC JE RRD 2016 Paper-II 254 ( f ± S% )
TNPSC JE/Supervisor 2012 S% = gradient
Ans. (b) : On earthen roads, camber should v = speed in km/h
preferably be 1 in 20 to 1 in 30. t = reaction time (s)
Type of surface Camber f = coefficient of friction
Light Heavy Overtaking sight distance (OSD)–
rain fall rain fall OSD = d1 + d2 + d3
Cement concrete and d1 = 0.278 Vbt
1 1
high type bituminous 1
50 60 d2 = b + 2s ⇒ 0.278 VbT + aT2
surface 2
Thin bituminous surface 1 1 d3 = 0.278 Vc.T
S = 0.2Vb + 6
40 50
water bound macadam 4S
1 1 T=
pavement a
33 40
Earthen pavement vb = (v – 16) km/hr
1 1
25 33 Exam Point
Exam Point The percentage compensation in gradient for
ruling gradient of 4% and horizontal curve of
A curve whose radius gradually changes from an radius 760 m is- No compensation
infinite value to a finite value or vice-versa for Floating gradients are generally provided–
the purpose of giving easy change of direction of At summit curves
a road, is called is– transition curve The curve that which is usually provided on the
A horizontal curve on a road provides– road for direction change is– Simple curve
Change in the direction When an up gradient of a highway meets a
The factor which influences the design of curves, downgrade, the vertical curve provided, is
is– Speed of vehicle, known as– Summit curve
Maximum permissible super-elevation, The ratio between the adopted centrifugal ratios
Permissible centrifugal ratio for roads and railways is– 2:1
Transition curves are provided on the approach 362. Advantage of providing super-elevation is
to horizontal curves in order to– (a) To decrease the intensity of stresses in
Reduce jerk to allowable levels foundation
360. The value of ruling gradient in mountain (b) To increase the stabillity of the fast moving
terrain as per IRC recommendation is vehicles
(a) 1 in 12 (b) 1 in 15 (c) To achieve higher speed of vehicles
(c) 1 in 20 (d) 1 in 30 (d) All of the above
LMRC AM 2018 Shift-II SJVNL JE 07.10.2018
Highway Engineering 528 YCT
Ans. (d) : Advantage of super elevation– Type of Gradient (As per IRC)
(1) To decrease the intensity of stress in foundation. terrain Ruling Limiting Exceptio
(2) To increase the stability of the fast moving vehicles. nal
(3) To achieve higher speed of vehicles. Plain or 1 in 30 1 in 20 1 in 15
(4) The stability of fast moving vehicle is increase and rolling
their tendency to skid or overturn decreases. Mountainou 1 in 20 1 in 16.7 1 in 14.3
s terrain
363. The stopping sight distance depends Steep 1 in 1 in 14.3 1 in 12.7
upon........... terrian 16.7
(a) Total reaction time of the driver (Steep
(b) Speed of the vehicle terrain upto
(c) Efficiency of brakes 3000 m
(d) All of the given options height)
SJVNL JE 07.10.2018 366. For the calculation of stopping sight distance,
Haryana SSC JE 13.04.2018, Afternoon the reaction time of driver may be taken as?
SSC JE 3.3.2017, Afternoon Shift (a) 2.5 second (b) 5 second
Ans. (d) Stopping sight distance – It is the minimum (c) 7.5 second (d) 10 second
sight distance available on a highway having sufficient MH PWD 2019, 2018
length to enable the driver to stop a vehicle travelling at Maharashtra JE 2018 Shift-I
a design speed safely without collision with any Ans. (a) : Stopping sight distance depend upon
obstruction at any spot. following factor –
SSD = lag distance + braking distance (i) Total reaction time of driver
(ii) Speed of the vehicle
V2 (iii) Efficiency of brakes
SSD = vt +
2gf (iv) Frictional resistance b/w road and tyres
(v) Gradient of the road if any.
Where, V – Design speed (m/sec) Note– Total reaction time varies 0.5 to 4 sec.
f – coefficient of longitudinal friction (0.35) IRC recommends a value of 2.5 sec for total reaction
t – Reaction time (2.5 sec) time.
g – Acceleration due to gravity (m/sec2) 367. If the radial acceleration of transition curve is
364. The stopping distance for two-way traffic with 30 cm/sec3, radius is 200 m and the velocity is
single lane if lag distance is 35 m and braking 14 m/sec. The length of the transition curve
distance is 25 m. is__
(a) 60 m (b) 80 m (a) 46.0 m (b) 46.5 m
(c) 100 m (d) 120 m (c) 45.0 m (d) 45.5 m
ISRO TA 28.08.2016 MP VYAPAM Sub Engg. 9.07.2017, 2.00 pm
Ans. (a) Given,
Ans. (d) : Given,
C= 30 cm/sec3 =0.3 m/sec3
Lag distance = 35 m R = 200 m
Braking distance = 25 m V = 14 m/sec
Stopping sight distance (SSD)
(14 ) = 45.7 ≈ 46 m
3
= Lag distance + braking distance v3
Ls = =
= 35 + 25 (m) CR 0.3 × 200
= 60 m 368. The width of a dowla is generally kept between
For two way traffic with single lane = 2 × SSD 30 cm and 60 cm, and its height above the road
= 2 × 60 = 120 m level should be invariably be more than .........
(a) 50 cm (b) 30 cm
365. The maximum gradient within which the (c) 15 cm (d) 45 cm
designer attempts to design the vertical profile M.P. VYAPAM Draftsman 1.9.2018 9.00 am
of road is Ans : (b)
(a) Limiting gradient (b) Ruling gradient • The width of a dowla of a dowla is generally kept
(c) Exceptional gradient (d) Minimum gradient between 30 to 60 cm and its height above the road
ISRO TA 28.08.2016 level should be invariably be more than 30 cm.
Ans. (b) : Types of gradient – • A dowel or dowla is provided on the side of a
(i) Rulling gradient service road between the service road and channel
(ii) Limiting Gradient or canal.
(iii) Exceptional Gradient 369. The minimum length of overtaking zone be:
• The maximum gradient within the designer (a) One and half times safe overtaking distance
attempt to design the vertical profile of radius ruling (b) Three times the safe overtaking distance
gradient. (c) Twice the safe overtaking distance
Highway Engineering 529 YCT
 (d) Four times the safe overtaking distance (a) 0.07 m (b) 0.05 m
MP VYAPAM Sub Engg. 9.07.2017, 2.00 pm (c) 0.49 m (d) 0.1 m
Ans. (b) MP VYAPAM Sub Engg. 9.07.2017, 9.00 am
Minimum length of overtaking zone = 3(O.S.D) nℓ 2 2 × 72
Desirable overtaking zone = 5(O.S.D) Ans. (d) : w m = = = 0.1 m
2R 2 × 490
370. What is the crown height with respect to the 373. What is the height of kerb stone in case of
edges to be provided in case of state highway of semi-barrier type kerb ?
bituminous concrete pavement of width 7.0 m (a) 10 cm (b) 7.5 cm
and very high rainfall? (c) 15 cm (d) 20 cm
(a) 0.07 (b) 0.035 MP VYAPAM Sub Engg. 9.07.2017, 9.00 am
(c) 0.11 (d) 0.06 Ans. (c) :
MP VYAPAM Sub Engg. 8.07.2017, 2.00 pm Types of kerbs Height for road
1 1 pavement
Ans : (a) = Low or mountable kerbs 10 cm
n 50
Semi-barrier type kerbs 15 cm
w 7 Barrier type kerbs 20 cm
y= = = 0.07
2n 2 × 50 Submerged kerbs Lateral stability

Exam Point Exam Point

The longitudinal coefficient of friction on
The minimum ratio of the radii of two circular highway for calculation of stopping distance in
curves of a compound curve, is kept– 1.5 geometrical design is– 0.35 to 0.4
Transition curve is provided in horizontal The minimum values of coefficient of friction,
alignment– desirable along longitudinal direction and lateral
To prevent vehicles from skidding laterally direction, are _____ respectively– 0.35 and 0.15
For a pavement design the recommended safe The minimum skid resistance number (SN) for
lateral coefficient of friction is– 0.15 Indian roads to have a level 1 serviceability
The range of coefficient of friction has been indicator is– 50
recommended by IRC for the calculation of The magnitude of tyre pressure, controls the
stopping sight distance– 0.40 to 0.35 following–
Coefficient of friction is less when the pavement Quality of material to be used in the upper
surface is– Smooth and wet layers of pavement
When the centrifugal ratio attains a value equal When the path travelled along the road surface is
to the coefficient of lateral friction, there is a more than the circumferential movement of the
danger of– Lateral skidding wheels due to rotation, then it results in–
The coefficient of lateral friction for equilibrium Skidding
super elevation is taken as– 0 The min- (desirable) value of co-efficient of
The CORRECT values for coefficient of lateral friction along longitudinal direction is– 0.4
and longitudinal friction as per IRC– 0.15, 0.35 374. The extra widening of pavements
The instrument is used for the measurement of recommended by IRC for hill roads having
the longitudinal coefficient of friction– radius 150 m is _______.
Roughometer (a) 0 m (b) 0.5 m
371. A two- lane road with the design speed of 80 (c) 1.5 m (d) 1 m
kmph has a horizontal curve of radius 500 m. MP VYAPAM Draftsman 8.07.2017, 9.00 am
What is the rate of super elevation for mixed Ans.(a) • The extra widening of pavements
traffic? recommended by IRC for hill roads having radius 150
(a) 0.07 (b) 0.02 m is nil.
(c) 0.057 (d) 0.12 Widening of pavement at Horizontal curves
MP VYAPAM Sub Engg. 8.07.2017, 2.00 pm Radius of upto 21 41 61 101 above
Ans : (c) Given, curve (m) 20 to to to to 300
Design speed (v) = 80 kmph 40 60 100 300
Radius (R) = 500 m Extra width
For mixed traffic, (m) 1.5 1.5 1.2 0.9 0.6 Nil
Two-lane 0.9 0.6 0.6 Nil Nil Nil
( 80 ) = 0.057
2
v2 Single lane
e= =
225R 225 × 500 375. For a comfortable travel on highways, the
372. What is the mechanical widening required for centrifugal ratio should not exceed _______.
a pavement of width 7 m on a horizontal curve (a) 0.1 (b) 0.2
of radius 490 m, if the longest wheel base of (c) 0.25 (d) 0.15
vehicle expected on the road is 7.0 m ? MP VYAPAM Draftsman 8.07.2017, 9.00 am

Highway Engineering 530 YCT

 Ans. (c) : For a comfortable travel on highways and 381. The expression for the length of a transition
1 curve (L) in meters is ____ if rate of change of
railways the centrifugal ratio should not exceed or radial acceleration (C=4); radius of circular
4
curve in meters (R=3); and speed of the vehicle
1
0.25 for highways and or 0.125 for railways. (V=20).
8 (a) 13.889 (b) 14.889
376. In case of a multi-lane road, overtaking is (c) 15.889 (d) 16.889
generally permitted _______. MP VYAPAM Sub Engg. 3.04.2016, 2.00 pm
(a) not at all Ans : (b) Given,
(b) from both right and left sides C= 4, R=3, V= 20 kmph
(c) from right only
0.0215V 3 0.0215 × ( 20 )
3
(d) from left only Ls = = = 14.33m
Odisha JE (Mains) 30.06.2019 CR 4×3
MP VYAPAM Draftsman 8.07.2017, 9.00 am Where, V is kmph.
Ans. (b) : In case of a multi-lane road, overtaking is 382. When 'L' is the distance between the axles and
generally permitted from both right and left sides. 'R' is the radius of the curve, then what is the
377. Footpaths are higher than the road surface. mechanical widening width?
What is the range of their height? L2 L2
(a) 15cm to 20 cm (b) 15cm to 25 cm (a) (b)
R 2R
(c) 20cm to 25 cm (d) 15cm to 30cm
2L2 L
MP VYAPAM Sub Engg. 3.04.2016, 2.00 pm (c) (d)
Ans : (b) Footpath- These are provided in urban roads R 2R
having heavy vehicular as well as pedestrian traffic, to MP VYAPAM Sub Engg. 3.04.2016, 9.00 am
provide the protection to pedestrian. Minimum width of Ans. (b) Mechanical widening– When a vehicle
footpath should be 1.5 m and height of the footpath negotiater on horizontal curve then the rear wheel
generally taken as 15 cm to 25 cm higher than the road follows a path of sorter radius than the front wheel. It is
surface. called off tracking.
378. What are particularly provided in the case of nℓ 2
Mechanical widening (wm) =
urban roads? 2R
(a) footpaths (b) express way l = Length of wheel base
(c) carriage way (d) highway n = Number of lanes
MP VYAPAM Sub Engg. 3.04.2016, 2.00 pm R = Radius of curve
Ans : (a) Footpaths- These are provided in urban
roads having heavy vehicular as well as pedestrian
Exam Point
traffic, to provide the protection to pedestrians. An old worn out tyre may offer more friction on
Minimum width of footpath should be 1.5m and it may a dry surface than a new tyre with treads
be increased based on the pedestrian traffic volume. because–
Surface of footpath should be smooth as even smoother Old surface had more contact area
than the adjacent traffic lane to keep the pedestrian on A pavement that offers poor visibility is–
the footpath. Bituminous road
The value of unevenness index for a good
379. The State Highways should have_______wide pavement should be– 1500 mm per km
carriage-way with _____wide shoulder on each Greater unevenness causes– Accidents
side. A vehicle was stopped in two seconds by fully
(a) 8m ; 2m (b) 10m ; 4m jamming the brakes. The skid marks measured
(c) 8m ; 4m (d) 8m ; 6m 9.8 metres. The average skid resistance
MP VYAPAM Sub Engg. 3.04.2016, 2.00 pm coefficient will be– 0.5
Ans : (a) The state highways should have 8 m wide Driving vehicles on wet surfaced roads, is
carriage way with 2m wide shoulder on each side. dangerous because it may– Slip
380. The shift (S) of transitions curve is ____, if 383. According to Indian Roads Congress,
length of the transition curve (L=4) and radius the_______of a road vehicle is 2.25m.
of the curve (R=2). (a) maximum width
(a) 0.3333 (b) 0.4444
(b) maximum length and minimum width
(c) 0.55555 (d) 0.66666
MP VYAPAM Sub Engg. 3.04.2016, 2.00 pm (c) minimum width and maximum length
(d) minimum length and maximum width
Ans : (a) Given,
MP VYAPAM Sub Engg. 3.04.2016, 2.00 pm
Length of transition curve (L) = 4
Radius of curve (R) = 2 Ans : (a) According to IRC : 37 - 1983,
Width- No vehicle should have a width exceeding 2.5 m
L2 42 Height- No vehicle other than double-decker bus shall
Shift of transition curve (S) = = = 0.333m
24R 24 × 2 have a height exceeding 3.80 m for normal application

Highway Engineering 531 YCT

 and 4.2m when carrying ISO series 1 freight containers. Exam Point
Double decker buses may, however, have a height not
While doing highway alignment and survey, the
exceeding 4.75m
most appropriate first stage of route selection is–
Length- The maximum overall length of a truck trailer
Map study
combination, exclusive of front and rear bumpers, shall After planting the sapling, the soil is refilled upto
be 18m. a depth of– 15 cm below ground level
384. Find the maximum permissible value of e in a In a proposed alignment, the type of soil which
plain terrain if an 11 metre wide highway will not be preferred is – Hard rock
passing through flat open country has a For plantation of trees, the approximate size of
horizontal curve of 420 m. radius. the pit to be drugged should be– 1 × 1 × 1 m3
Given the design speed = 50 kmph Normally trees are planted, longitudinally at a
(a) e = 0.029 (b) e = 0.028 distance of– 10 to 15 m
An undesirable element to be avoided while
(c) e = 0.027 (d) e = 0.026
fixing the alignment of the highway is–
MP VYAPAM Draftsman 4.4.2016 9.00 am
proximity to a place of worship
Ans. (d) The ideal alignment of highway between two
The super elevation for 75% of design speed (V kmph) towns should be–
is calculated neglecting the friction. short, easy, safe and economical
( 0.75V )
2
387. Find the super elevation to be provided to the
e= carriageway of a road on a horizontal curve of
127R
radius 150 m, given average speed of vehicles =
( 50 )
2
v2 50 km per hour :
e= = = 0.026 (a) 0.0740m./m. (b) 0.0741m./m.
225 R 225 × 420
(c) 0.0742m./m. (d) 0.0743m./m.
385. Find the radius of horizontal curve. MP VYAPAM Draftsman 4.4.2016 9.00 am
Assume safe stopping distance = 75 m on a flat Ans. (a) Given–
highway section. R = 150, V = 50 km/hr
Set back distance = 10 m.
( 50 )
2
V2
(a) 69 m. (b) 71 m. e= = = 0.074
(c) 72 m. (d) 70 m. 225R 225 ×150
MP VYAPAM Draftsman 4.4.2016 9.00 am 388. Find the length of vertical curve– If an upgrade
Ans. (d) Given of 2.5% is followed by a downgrade of 1.5%.
Given rate of change of grade is 0.5% per 50 m
SSD = 75 m
chain.
Set back distance (M) = 10 m (a) 300 m. (b) 400 m.
S2 (c) 500 m. (d) 600 m.
Radius of horizontal curve (R) =
8M MP VYAPAM Draftsman 4.4.2016 9.00 am
Ans. (b)
( 75 )
2

= = 70.31 ≈ 70m g1 = 2.5%

8 × 10 g2 = –1.5%
386. Calculate the extra winding necessary on a r = 0.5%
four lane pavement for a radius of curve of 150 (L) = ?
m. g −g 2.5 − ( −1.5)
L= 1 2 = =8
Given : wheel base of design vehicle to be 5 m., r 0.5
design speed of 55 KPH L = 8×50
(a) 0.92 m. (b) 0.93 m. L = 400 m
(c) 0.94 m. (d) 0.95 m. 389. In places of heavy rainfall shape of side drains
MP VYAPAM Draftsman 4.4.2016 9.00 am provided on road should be :
Ans. (a) (a) Trapezoidal (b) Triangular
(c) Rectangular (d) Circular
nℓ 2 4 × ( 5 )
2

wm = = = 0.333m Nagaland PSC 2015 Paper-I

2R 2 × 150 Ans. (a) : Trape zooidal– The trape zooidal is the
V 55 most preferred shape of the drainage because of its
wp = = = 0.472m simplicity and ease.
9.5 R 9.5 150 • In places of heavy rainfall shape of side drains
Extra widening (we) = wm + np = 0.805 ≈ 0.92 m provided on road should be trapezoidal.
Highway Engineering 532 YCT
390. Minimum free board in side drains should be lowest point along a ridge or between two mountain
_____ mm below road surface. tops and the highest point between adjacent valleys or
(a) 100 (b) 200 low lands.
(c) 250 (d) 500
Nagaland PSC 2015 Paper-I
Ans. (c) : Minimum free board in side drains should be
250 mm below road surface.
391. Which of the following statement is correct :
(a) Flatter cambers are desirable for water bound
macadam roads. 395. Tree are planted longitudinally at an interval
(b) Camber should never be less than 50% of the of :
gradient. (a) 15–30 m (b) 10–15 m
(c) Steeper cambers are required for slow moving (c) 5–10 m (d) 1–5 m
traffic. Nagaland PSC 2015 Paper-I
(d) Parabolic type camber is ideal for fast
vehicles. Ans. (b) : Tree are planted longitudinally at an internal
Nagaland PSC 2015 Paper-I of 10-15 m.
Ans. (d) : Parabolic type camber is ideal for fast 396. Life of a hill road can be increased by
vehicles. providing good :
• Parabolic or elliptic shape is given so that the profile (a) Road surface (b) Drainage
is flat that at the middle and steeper towards the edges, (c) Foundation (d) Gradient
which is preferred by fast moving vehicles as they Nagaland PSC 2015 Paper-I
have to frequently cross the crown live during over Ans. (b) : Life of hill road can be increased by
taking operation on two lane highway. providing good drainage.
392. Minimum length of overtaking zone is • Catch water drains, side drains, catch pits and culvers
overtaking sight distance : are often blocked and causes over flowing during rain.
(a) Equal to (b) Twice Hence, they should be cleared periodically to prevent
(c) Three times (d) 1.5 times overflowing during rain.
Nagaland PSC 2015 Paper-I 397. Maximum ruling gradient on hilly roads as per
Ans. (c) : Minimum length of over taking zone is IRC is :
overtaking sight distance is three times. (a) 7% (b) 6.66%
393. Total deflection angle in a curve is: (c) 6.0% (d) 5%
(a) Internal angle between common and forward Nagaland PSC 2015 Paper-I
tangent Ans. (d) : Maximum ruling gradient on hilly road as
(b) Internal angle between long chord and per IRC is 5%.
forward tangent
(c) External angle between forward and rear Exam Point
tangent Alignment of road is finally decoded on the basis
(d) Internal angle between the rear and common of– Field survey
tangent Longitudinal sections and Cross–sections are
DMRC JE 12.04.2018 required for the preparation of– Highways
Ans. (c) Total deflection angle (∆) in a curve is A precise survey is– Final location survey
external angle between forward and rear tangent. First operation during the detailed survey of a
hill road, is– Fixation of Bench Marks
398. To avoid lateral skidding and overturning on a
horizontal curve, the centrifugal ratio should
always be less than.........
(a) e only (b) f only
b b
(c) only (d) Both and f
2h 2h
M.P. VYAPAM Sub Engg. 2.9.2018, 2.00 pm
394. The depression between summits is called as: Ans : (d) To avoid lateral skidding and overturning on
(a) Horizontal cliff (b) Vertical cliff a horizontal curve, the centrifugal ratio should always
(c) Overhanging cliff (d) Saddle be less than
DMRC JE 12.04.2018 b
Ans. (d) The depression between summits is called as Both and f
saddle. 2h
2
• A saddle between mountains (topography saddle) is • To prevent transverse skidding f ≥ v
the area around a saddle point. A saddle point is the gR
Highway Engineering 533 YCT
 b V2 v2
• To prevent overtaking about outer wheel > ⇒ e+f=
2h gR gR
• For number sliding and number overturning. v2
P b when f = 0 so, e =
f≥ ≤ gR
W 2h
v2
399. The safe stopping sight distance is determined If e = 0, then f = (No super elevation)
by: gR
(a) Multiplying lag distance to the braking 401. What is the average skid resistance of the
distance pavement surface when a vehicle travelling at a
(b) Adding lag distance and the braking distance speed of 36 kmph was stopped by applying
(c) Subtracting lag distance from the braking brakes fully? (Assume the skid marks were 8 m
distance in length.)
(d) Dividing lag distance by braking distance (a) 0.14 (b) 0.625
(c) 0.5 (d) 1.25
M.P. VYAPAM Sub Engg. 2.9.2018, 2.00 pm
M.P. VYAPAM Sub Engg. 2.9.2018, 2.00 pm
Ans : (b) SSD = lag distance + braking distance
Stopping sight distance– It is the minimum sight u2
Ans : (b) Average skid resistance = , L = 8m
distance available on a highway having sufficient length 2gL
to enable the drivers to stop vehicle travelling at a u = 36 kmph = 10 m/sec
design speed safety without collision with any 102
obstruction at any spot. = = 0.637 = 0.625
2 × 9.81× 8
v2
SSD = vt + 402. “Super elevation” is a term used for designing
2gf (a) Benches (b) Haul Roads
v = design speed, m/sec2 (c) Dumps (d) Magazine
t = reaction time (2.5 sec) NCL Surveyor (Mining) 7.02.2020
f = coefficient of longitudinal friction (0.35) Ans. (b) : "Super elevation'' is a term used for
g = acceleration due to gravity (m/sec2). designating haul roads.
• A haul road is a term designed for heavy or bulk
Exam Point transfer of material by haul trucks in the mining
industry.
Reconnaissance is best done with the help of–
403. Calculate the capacity (vehicle per hour) of the
Aerial photographic survey
road when reaction time of the driver is 2
The sequence of survey in a road project is–
seconds. The design speed is 80 kmph and
Topographic, reconnaissance, average length of the vehicle is 6 m. Take
preliminary and detailed coefficient of friction as 0.35.
Location of contour gradient for a highway is A. 600 B. 653
best set out from the– saddle down the hill C. 687 D. 724
The sequence of four stages of survey in a NCL Overseer 22.02.2020
highway alignment is– Ans. (b) : Given–
Map study, reconnaissance, preliminary Reaction time (t) = 2 sec.
survey and detailed survey Design speed (v) = 80 kmph
Reconnaissance is the first stage of deciding the Length of vehicle (ℓ) = 6 m
alignment of a– Hill road
Coefficient of friction (R) = 0.35
Factors controlling alignment–
Geometric design 1000V
Capacity (C) =
400. If the coefficient of friction is assumed zero, S
then the equilibrium super-elevation required V2
S = L + 0.278 Vt +
to counteract the centrifugal force fully will be 254f
given by: 802
v2 v S = 6 + 0.278 × 80 × 2 + = 122.47
(a) (b) 254 × 0.35
gR R 1000 × 80
C= = 653.22
v v2 122.47
(c) (d)
gR R 404. Gravel road require a camber of
M.P. VYAPAM Sub Engg. 2.9.2018, 2.00 pm (a) 1 : 20 (b) 1 : 25
Ans : (a) Equilibrium super elevation is when f = 0. It (c) 1 : 10 (d) 1 : 30
results is situation in which pressure on outer inner HPSSC JE Code 438/2018
wheels become equal. Ans. (d) : Gravel road require a camber of 1 : 30.
Highway Engineering 534 YCT
405. A summit curve is formed at the intersection of Ans : (d) Transition curve–
4% up gradient and 6% down gradient. To • "Over turning of vehicles on a curve can be avoided
prevent a stopping distance of 130 m, what is by using a transition curve".
the length of the summit curve? • "When a vehicle traveling on a straight road enters
(a) 384 m (b) 225 m into a horizontal curve instantaneously, it is
(c) 257 m (d) 350 m required to provide a transition curve, this may be
APPSC AE Env. & Civil Common 2016 Paper-II provided either between a tangent and a circular
Ans. (a) : Given, curve or between two branches of a compound or
N = 4% – (–6%) = 10% = 0.1 reverse curve".
S = 130 m 409. If the coefficient of friction on the road surface
L > SSD (Let) is 0.15 and a maximum super-elevation 1 in 15
is provided, then the maximum speed of the
0.1× (130 )
2 2
Ns
L= = = 384 m vehicles on a curve of 100 m radius is
4.4 4.4 (a) 32.44 km/h (b) 42.44 km/h
406. If 'V' is the velocity of the vehicle is km/h, 't' is (c) 52.44 km/h (d) 62.44 km/h
the brake reaction time in seconds and f is the Assam PSC AE (PRD) 2020
coefficient of friction, the stopping sight Ans. (c) : Given–
distance S of the vehicle is given by 1
2
f = 0.15, e = = 0.067
v 15
(a) 0.278Vt + Radius (R) = 100 m
254f v2
v e + f =
(b) 0.278V t +
2 127R
0.01f v2
0.067 + 0.15 =
v2 127 × 100
(c) 0.278Vt + v = 52.44 km/h
0.01f 410. What is the value of resultant retardation in
(d) V2 (0.278g + 0.01f) m/s2 when a longitudinal friction coefficient of
APPSC AE Env. & Civil Common 2016 Paper-II 0.36 is allowed for stopping the vehicle on
V2 road?
Ans. (a) : SSD = 0.278Vt +
254 ( f ± S% ) (a) 1.24 (b) 1.82
(c) 2.24 (d) 3.53
S =0 KPSC JE 10.09.2017
Then, Ans. (d) : Given =
V2 Coefficient of longitudinal friction (f) = 0.36
SSD = 0.278 Vt +
254f Retardation (a) = fg = 0.36 × 9.81 = 3.53 m/s2
Where, S% is gradient + ve sign for descending 411. If V is the design speed in km/hr and R is the
gradient SSD = stopping sight distance. radius (meter) of curve of a hill road, the
407. The minimum width of the pavement of an super-elevation (e) is given by which of the
intermediate lane of a National Highway following ratios?
should be V V2
(a) 5.7 m (b) 4.7 m (a) (b)
127R 127R
(c) 6.7 m (d) 7.7 m 2
APPSC AE Env. & Civil Common 2016 Paper-II V V
(c) (d)
Ans. (a) : 225R 225R
Lane Width of carriageway KPSC JE 9.9.2017
Single 3.75 m KPSC JE 10.09.2017
Double 7m Ans. (c) : Superelevation with coefficient of friction
Intermediate 5.5 m v2
Multi lane (> 2) 3.5 m per lane e + f =
127R
408. Overturning of vehicles on a curve can be For mixed traffic condition as per IRC 37 highway is
avoided by using ................ design for 75%. Design speed and neglating lertral
(a) compound curve (b) reverse curve friction,
(c) vertical curve (d) transition curve
( 0.75v )
2
HPSSC JE Code 438/2018 e+f =
M.P. VYAPAM Sub Engg. 4.9.2018, 2.00 pm 127R
GSSSB Surveyor 1.4.2018 v2
NPCC 2017 e=
MH Pune MNC 2016 225R
J & K PSC AE 2009 v = kmph, R = radius (m)
Highway Engineering 535 YCT
412. If ∆ is the angle of deflection of a simple curve Ans. (b) : On the horizontal curve, if the pavement is
of radius R, then the length of the curve is kept horizontal across the alignment, then the pressure
πR∆ πR∆ on the inner wheel will be less than the pressure on the
(a) (b)
90º 180º outer wheel.
πR ∆ πR∆ 416. The number of accidents in a year attributed to
(c) (d) taxi drivers in a city follows a Poisson
270º 360º
KPSC JE 10.09.2017 distribution with mean 3. Out of 1000 taxi
drivers, find the approximate number of
Ans. (b) : drivers with no accident in a year. (Given : e-3 =
• Length of curve 0.498).
πR∆ (a) 50 (b) 49
l=
180 (c) 45 (d) 41
• Tangent length Maharashtra PSC HOD 5.10.2014
∆ e− x ( λ )
n
T = Rτan
2 Ans. (b) : Poisson distribution =
n!
∆
• Length of chord = 2 R Sin No accident in a year,
2 e −3 λ o
 ∆ p= = e −3 = 0.498 = 49
• Mid ordinate (M) = R 1 − Cos  0!
 2 417. One of the natural factors influencing camber
is
(a) type of material used for wearing course
(b) topography of the area
(c) nature of subsoil met with
(d) amount of rainfall
TSPSC Observers 2013
Ans. (d) : One of the natural forces influencing camber
413. For mixed traffic conditions, rate of super- is amount of rainfall.
elevation for horizontal highway curve of • The amount of camber to be provided depends upon the
radius 500 m and a speed of 100 kmph is smoothness of the surface and the intensity of rainfall.
(a) 0.220 (b) 0.089 418. While negotiating a curve
(c) 0.057 (d) 0.0108 (a) wheels of both axles tread the same path
KPSC JE 10.09.2017 (b) front wheels follow a less radius than the near
Ans. (b) : Given, wheels
Radius (R) = 500 m (c) rear wheels follow a less radius than the front
Speed (v) = 100 kmph wheels
For mixed traffic conditions, (d) depending on right had or left hand curve it
(100 ) = 0.089
2
v2 varies
e= = TSPSC Observers 2013
225R 225 × 500
Ans. (c) : While negotiating a curve rear wheels follow
414. If the elevation of a road decreases, then the a less radius than the front wheels.
slope of the road in longitudinal direction is
called 419. Find the compensated gradient at horizontal
(a) super gradient (b) adverse gradient curve of radius 60 m with a ruling gradient of
(c) positive gradient (d) negative gradient 6%
Assam PSC AE (PRD) 2020 (a) 1.52 % (b) 4.75 %
(c) 1.5 % (d) 5.0%
Ans. (d) : If the elevation of a road decreases, then the
TSPSC Observers 2013
slope of the road is longitudinal direction is called
negative gradient. Ans. (b) : As per IRC,
• If the elevation of road increases, then the slope of 30 + R 
the road in longitudinal direction is called positive R 
gradient. Grade compensation (GC) =  min
75 
415. On the horizontal curve, if the pavement is
R 
kept horizontal across the alignment, then the
pressure on the inner wheel will be : 30 + 60 
(a) More than the pressure on the inner wheel 60  1.5 
(b) Less than the pressure on outer wheel
= =  = 1.25
75  1.25
(c) Same pressure on both the wheels
60 
(d) Zero
Compensated Gradient = 6% – 1.25% = 4.75%
Maharashtra PSC HOD 5.10.2014
Highway Engineering 536 YCT
420. A car of weight W is moving over a concave Ans. (a) : Given,
bridge of radius r and speed v. Which of the Design speed (v) = 50 kmph
following statements is correct when the car is Radius (R) = 100 m
at lowest point on the bridge? (R refers to
( 50 ) = 0.11 m
2
normal reaction) v2
e= =
225R 225 × 100
424. If the design speed of vehicles is 100.0 kmph,
the change of radial acceleration in m/s3 is
(a) 0.38 (b) 0.35
mv 2 mv 2
(a) R = mg − (b) R = (c) 0.42 (d) 0.44
r r
APPSC AE 2004 Paper-II
mv 2
(c) R = mg (d) R = mg + 80
r Ans. (d) : Radial acceleration (c) =
Assam Engg. College Lecturer 2021 75 + v
mv 2 80
Ans. (d) : R = mg + C= = 0.45 m / s ≃ 0.44 m / s3
3

r 75 + 100
mv 2 425. The maximum super elevation for hill road
should not exceed
Centrifugal force = r
(a) 0.005 (b) 0.050
421. For a 2-axle vehicle with axles 3.5m apart,
negotiating a curve of radius 125m along a 2- (c) 0.800 (d) 0.100
Lane highway and travelling at a speed of APPSC AE 2004 Paper-II
80km/hr, will require an extra widening at the Ans. (d) : Max SE limit as per IRC
curve as (Super elevation) Terrain
(a) 1.00m (b) 1.15m maximum
(c) 0.85m (d) 1.25m
1
Assam Engg. College Lecturer 2021 = 7% Plain and rolling terrain
Ans. (c) : Design speed (v) = 80 kmph 15
Radius (R) =125 m 1
= 10% For hill roads
Number of lane (n) = 2 10
Length (ℓ) = 3.5 m 1
= 4% For urban road.
nℓ 2 v 25
Wextrawidening = We = +
2R 9.5 R 426. Right of way is the summation off the width of
2 × ( 3.5 )
2
80 .............
= + = 0.85 m (a) carriage way and shoulder
2 × 125 9.5 125
(b) carriage way, shoulder and road margins
422. What minimum radius is required for a (c) carriage way and road margins
horizontal curve in a State Highway with
operating speed of 80 km/hr, where super- (d) road margins and shoulder
elevation provided is 0.07 and the lateral NCL Overseer 22.02.2020
friction available is 0.15. SSC JE 27.01.2018 (Morning)
(a) 230 m (b) 320 m Ans. (b) The right of way can be described generally as
(c) 350 m (d) 530 m the publically owned area of land that encompasses all
Assam Engg. College Lecturer 2021 the various cross–section elements. The right of way is
Ans. (a) : Given design speed (V) = 80 km/hr the land set aside for use as highway corridor. Right of
Super-elevation (e) = 0.07
Lateral friction (f) = 0.15 way are purchased prios to the construction of a new
road, and usually enough land is purchased. Sometimes,
v2
e+f = right of way are left vacant after the initial roadway
127R facility is constructed to allow for future highway
( 80 )
2
expansion.
0.07 + 0.15 =
127 × R 427. Calculate the safe stopping sight distance for a
R = 230 m design speed of 60 km/h for two way traffic on
423. The super elevation required for a curve of a single lane road. The reaction time of driver
100.0 m radius and a design speed of 50.0 is 2.5 sec.
kmph on a hill road is (a) 82.21 (b) 136.23
(a) 0.11 m (b) 0.08 m
(c) 0.22 m (d) 0.30 m (c) 164.42 (d) 674.24
APPSC AE 2004 Paper-II SSC JE 24.01.2018 (Evening)

Highway Engineering 537 YCT

Ans. (c) Ans. (a) : According to rate of change of centrifugal
Stopping sight distance acceleration
= lag distance + Breaking distance
0.0215V 3
v2 L=
= vt + CR
2gf
v = 60 kmph, v = 16.66 m/sec 80
C=
(16.66 )
2 75 + V
= 16.66 × 2.5 + Where, V = Speed of vehicle in (kn/hr)
2 × 9.81× 0.35
= 82.06 C = Allowable rate of change of centrifugal
∴ For single lane two way traffic SSD = 2 × SSD acceleration in (m/s3)
= 2 × 82.06 = 164.12 m R = Radius of curve in (m)
L = Length of transition curve in (m)
428. Which of the following is correct statement for
the cross slope of the shoulder? 432. The off-taking of a vehicle having a wheel base
(a) It is 1% flatter than the cross slope of of 6 m and negotiating a curve path of mean
pavement. radius 50 m is:
(b) It's minimum value is 2%. (a) 0.36 (b) 0.72
(c) It is 0.5% steeper than the cross slope of the (c) 0.24 (d) 0.33
pavement CG PHE Sub Engg Exam 2016
(d) Its value is equal to the cross slope of Ans. (a) : Given,
pavement Wheel base (l) = 6m
SSC JE 24.01.2018 (Evening) Radius (R) = 50m
Ans. (c) Shoulder– It is provided along the road edge to l2 62
serve as an emergency lane for vehicle. IRC recommends off-tracking = = = 0.36m
2R 2 × 50
the min width of shoulder is 2.5 m. The slope of the
shoulders are kept 0.5% steeper than the camber. 433. Important factor considered in the design of
summit curve is:
429. The super elevation needed for a vehicle
(a) Comfort condition
travelling at a speed of 60 kmph on a curve of
(b) Impact factor
radius 128m on a surface with a coefficient of
(c) Sight distance
friction of 0.15 is
(a) 0.71 (b) 0.15 (d) None of these
(c) 0.22 (d) 0.0 CG PHE Sub Engg Exam 2016
(e) None of above Ans. (c) : When a fast moving vehicle travels along a
CGPSC SES Exam 2016 summit curve, the centrifugal force will act upwards,
Ans. (e) : Give– against gravity and hence tyres and the pressure on the
Radius (R) = 128 m tyres and spring of the vehicle suspensions is relieved .
Speed (V) = 60 kmph So there is number on problem of discomfort to
Coefficient of friction (f) = 0.15 passenger on summit curves, particularly because the
deviation angles on roads are quite small. The only
v2
e+f= problem is designing summit curves is to provide
127R adequate sight distances. The stopping sight distance
( 60 ) − 0.15 = 0.071
2
or the absolute minimum sight distance should
e= invariably be provided at all sections of the road
127 ×128
430. For super elevation design for fast and slow system and so also on summit curves.
moving vehicles, the speed is taken as : 434. If the difference if an edge of pavement (12 m
(a) 80% of design speed wide) and its crown is 20 cm then the camber
(b) 75% of design speed in the pavement is–
(c) 70% of design speed (a) 1 : 20 (b) 1 : 30
(d) None of above (c) 1 : 60 (d) 1 : 90
CG PHE Sub Engg Exam 2016 CGVYAPAM Sub Egg 2012
BSPHCL 29.01.2019 Shift-I Ans. (b) : Given–
Ans. (b) : For superelevation design for fast and slow Width of the road (W) = 1200 cm
moving vehicles, the speed is taken as 75% of design N = slope, y = height of camber (crown) = 20 cm
speed. w 1200
431. The unit of rate of change of centrifugal y= ⇒ 20 =
2N 2× N
acceleration of transition curve is : 1200
(a) m/s3 (b) m/s2 N= = 30
(c) m/s (d) No unit 40
CG PHE Sub Engg Exam 2016 So camber is 1 in 30.

Highway Engineering 538 YCT

435. Consider the following types of roads in the Ans. (d) : Design speed (v) = 70 kmph
same rainfall region: Radius of circular curve (R) = 175 m
1. Water Bound Macadam roads Radius of transition curve = 350 m
2. Cement Concrete roads Shift of transition curve (S) = 0.75 m
3. Bituminous high-speed roads L2
S=
4. Gravel roads 24R
The correct sequence of the ascending order of L = 0.75 × 24 × 175 = 56.12 m
steepness of camber of these roads is:
439. Estimate the capacity of a capacity of a
[ESE-1995] PMGSY road having a design speed of 60
(a) 4, 1, 2, 3 (b) 4, 1, 3, 2 kmph. The average lengt of truck is 9.0. The
(c) 1, 4, 3, 2 (d) 1, 4, 2, 3 reaction time is 2.5 seconds and coefficient of
Ans. (b) As per IRC recommendation the ranges of longitudinal friction is 0.40.
rate of camber for different types of roads surfaces are (a) 413veh/hr/lane (b) 697veh/hr/lane
given below. (c) 145veh/hr/lane (d) 86veh/hr/lane
Types of road Camber slope CG PWD, NRDA JE Exam 2015
Ans. (b) : Given–
(1) Gravel roads 1 in 30 to 1 in 33
Design speed (v) = 60 kmph
(2) Water bound 1 in 33 to 1 in 40 Length (L) = 9 m, C=?
macadam Reaction time (t) = 2.5 sec.
(3) Thin bituminous 1 in 40 to 1 in 50 v2
surface SSD (S) = 0.278 vt +
254f
(4) Cement concrete 1 in 50 to 1 in 60
( 60 ) = 77.13 m
2
So correct sequence in order of steepness of camber = 0.278 × 60 × 2.5 +
is : Cement concrete roads < Bituminous high speed 254 × 0.4
roads < WBM roads < Gravel roads. 1000V 1000 × 60
Capacity(C) = = = 697 veh / hr / lane
436. Pickup the incorrect statements- Improper SSD + L 77.13 + 9
alignment of highway would result in : 440. The recommended over taking sight distanced
1. Increase in construction cost for design speed 80 km/hour is :
2. Decrease in accident rate (a) 210 m (b) 475 m
3. Increase in vehicle operation cost (c) 610 m (d) 90 m
4. Decrease in maintenance cost CGVYAPAM Sub Egg 2012
(a) 1 & 4 (b) 1 & 3
Ans. (b) :
(c) 2 & 4 (d) 2 & 3
Safe overtaking sight
CG Housing Board AE Exam 2014 Speed km/hr
distance (m)
Ans. (c) : Improper alignment of highway–
40 155
• Increase in accident rate
50 235
• Increase in vehicle operation cost
60 300
• Increase in maintenance cost
65 340
• Increase in construction cost
80 470
437. Length of a transition curve is given by the 100 640
relation L = Notation have their usual meaning
441. Match the following :
(a) V3/CR (b) 3V3/CR
3
(c) V /2CR (d) V/CR List - 1 List-2
CG Housing Board AE Exam 2014 A Width i Gradient, Grade-
Compensation
Ans. (a) : Length of transition curve
B Height ii Width of shoulder, Parking
V3 area
L=
CR C Length iii Fly over and Under passes
V = design speed (m/s) D Engine iv Highway junction, Hairpin
C = Radial acceleration (m/s3) Capacity bends
R = Radius (m) (a) iv, iii, ii, i (b) ii, iii, iv, i
438. Calculate the length of transition curve if shift (c) i, ii, iii, iv (d) i, iii, ii, iv
of transition curve is 0.75m and radius of CG Housing Board AE Exam 2014
transition curve is 350m. Radius of circular Ans. (b) : Width– Width of shoulder, parking area.
curve or 175m for a design speed of 70 kmph Height– Fly over and underpasses.
(a) 76.38m (b) 75.6m
Length– Highway junction, hair pin lends engine
(c) 37.8m (d) 56.12m
CG PWD, NRDA JE Exam 2015 capacity, gradient.
Highway Engineering 539 YCT
442. While aligning a highway in a built up area, it 446. If the cross-slope of the country lie in the range
was necessary to provide a horizontal circular of 0% to 10% then the terrain is classified as:
curve of radius 375 m. The design speed 75 (a) Plain (b) Rolling
km/h. What is the super elevation rate? (c) Mountainous (d) Steep
(a) 0.2000 (b) 0.0667 MH PWD 2019
(c) 0.1600 (d) 0.0600 Ans. (a) : Cross Slope –
(e) 0.0750 Cross Slope of country Terrain
CGPSC SES Exam 2014 0 – 10% Plain
Ans. (b) : R=375 m, V= 75 km/h, f is not given. For 10 – 25% Rolling
built up area it is just case of mixed traffic conditions, 25 – 60% Mountainous
75% of design speed taken into account:- > 60% Steep
So, e = (0.75V)2/gR 447. On which one of the following factors, the
( 75)
2
2
required camber value of a pavement depends
= V /225R = on?
225 × 375
= 0.0667 (i) Type of pavement surface
(ii) Amount of rainfall
443. While aligning a hill road with a rulling (a) Only statement (i) is true
gradient of 5%, a horizontal curve of radius
(b) Only statement (ii) is true
60m is encountered supposing a maximum
(c) Both statement (i) & (ii) are true
value of grad compensation gradient (in%) for
(d) Only statement (i) & (ii) are false
this would be:
MH PWD 2019
(a) 5.00 (b) 1.25
(c) 4.75 (d) 3.75 Ans. (c) : Camber is the transverse slope provided to
(e) 3.00 the road surface for the drainage off the rainwater for
CGPSC SES Exam 2014 the better performance of the road.
The required camber value of a pavement depends on
Ans. (d) : Grade compensation = (30 + R)/R or 75/R
whichever is less. type of pavement surface and amount of rainfall.
(30 + 60)/60 = 1.5% 448. The maximum rate of introduction of super
(75/60) = 1.25% elevation in mountainous terrain by raising the
So take Grade compensation = 1.25% outer edge of pavement as per recommendation
Hence compensation gradient = of IRC is given by------
(Gradient at road – GC)% (a) 1 in 150 (b) 1 in 100
= (5 – 1.25)% (c) 1 in 60 (d) 1 in 250
= 3.75% MH PWD 2019
444. On a level stretch designed for design speed of Ans. (c) : As per IRC recommendation–
54 kmph, if the reaction time of the driver is (i) According to rate of change of super elevation
2.5s and the braking distance is 30m then the (ii) for plain & Rolling terrain– 1 in 150
safe stopping sight distance is : (iii) for Built up area – 1 in 100
(a) 61.5 (b) 21.6m (iv) For Hilly Area – 1 in 60
(c) 51.6 (d) 67.5m 449. Which one of the following type of sight
(e) 12m distance is also known as nonpassing sight
CGPSC SES Exam 2014 distances?
Ans. (d) : (a) Stopping sight distance
Stopping sight distance (SSD) = (b) Overtaking sight distance
Lag distance + Breaking distance (c) Intermediate sight distance
= 0.278 × vt + 30 (d) None of the above
= 0.278 × 54 × 2.5 + 30 MH PWD 2019
= 67.50 m Ans. (a) : Stopping sight distance also known as non-
445. If the cross-slope of the country lie in the range passing or non-overtaking sight distance.
of 10% to 25% then the terrain is classified as: 450. Which one of the following factors affects the
(a) Plain (b) Rolling road user characteristics?
(c) Mountainous (d) Steep (a) Physical
MH PWD 2019 (b) Mental
Ans. (b) : Cross Slope – (c) Psychological & Environment
Cross Slope of country Terrain (d) All of the above
0 – 10% Plain MH PWD 2019
10 – 25% Rolling Ans. (d) : Road user characteristics –
25 – 60% Mountainous road user behavior is affected by both external and
> 60% Steep internal factor
Highway Engineering 540 YCT
 The internal factor can be classified as following 454. As per IRC recommendations, value of camber
(i) Physical factor – for cement concrete surface for light rainfall is-
Temporary factors -------- percent.
Permanent factors (a) 1.7 (b) 2
(ii) Psychological factors. (c) 2.5 (d) 3
(iii) Mental factors MH PWD 2019
The environment factor are consider as external factor Ans. (a) : Camber is the transverse slope provided to
451. As per IRC, the recommended value of the road surface for the drainage off the rainwater for
carriageway width for single lane is------ the better performance of the road.
(a) 3.75m (b) 7.0m As per IRC
(c) 5.5m (d) 6.5m Camber (%)
Type of surface
MH PWD 2019 Heavy rain fall Light rain fall
Ans. (a) : As per IRC Recommended- (i) Cement 1 in 50 (2%) 1 in 60
Width of carriage concrete or thick (1.7%)
Road classification
ways (m) bitumen surface
Single lane road 3.75 m (ii) thin 1 in 40 (2.5%) 1 in 50 (2%)
Two lanes, without raised 7m bituminous
kerbs surface
Two lanes, with raised kerbs 7.5 m (iii) 1 in 33 (3%) 1 in 40
Intermediate carriage ways 5.5 m WBM/Gravel (2.5%)
Multi-lane pavement 3.5 m per lane pavement
452. Maximum limit of super elevation in plain & (iv) Earthen 1 in 25 (4%) 1 in 33 (3%)
rolling terrains is--------- 455. Which one of the following factors control the
(a) 4 percent (b) 6 percent alignment of highway?
(c) 7 percent (d) 10 percent (a) Traffic (b) Economics
MH PWD 2019 (c) Geometric design (d) All of the above
Ans. (c) : Super elevation– The super elevation (e) is MH PWD 2019
expressed as the ratio of the height of outer edge with Ans. (d) : Factor controlling alignment–
respect to the horizontal width. • Obligatory point
• Traffic
• Economics
• Geometric design
• Other consideration
• Additional care in hill road
Stability, drainage, resisting length, geometric standard
of hill road.
BC
e= = tan θ 456. If the Overtaking site Distance (OSD) on a
AC highway is 150m, the desirable and minimum
v 2 length of overtaking zone will be
e+f = (a) 300m and 600m respectively
127R (b) 600m and 300m respectively
for rolling terrain/plain terrain – 0.07 (c) 450m and 750m respectively
for hilly Area – 0.10 (d) 750m and 450m respectively
For urban road with frequent intersection– 0.4 MH PWD 2019
453. Minimum standardized value of transverse Ans. (d) : given OSD = 150m
skid resistance for design purpose is--------- desirable overtaking zone = 5× 150 = 750m
(a) 0.15 (b) 0.35 Minimum overtaking zone = 3 × 150 = 450 m
(c) 0.4 (d) 0.25 457. For multi lane pavement width of carriageway
MH PWD 2019 is
MH WCD 2019 (a) 5.0 m per lane (b) 5.5 m per lane
Ans. (a) : Skid resistance is the force developed when (c) 3.5 m per lane (d) 4m per lane
a tire that is prevented from rotating slides along the MH PWD 2019
pavement surface. Ans. (c) : Width of carriage way – (IRC)
• Skid resistance measurements can be sued to Single lane – 3.75m
evaluated various type of material and construction Two lane (No kerb)– 7.0 m
practices. Two lane (with kerbs) – 7.5m
• Minimum standardized value of transverse skid Intermediate carriage – 5.5m
resistance is 0.15 for design purpose Multi- lane – 3.5 per lane

Highway Engineering 541 YCT

458. As per IRC suggestions the super elevation 462. As per IRC recommendations, the grade
should be provided to fully counteract the compensation is not necessary for gradient
centrifugal force due to ––––––– percent of flatter than––––– percent.
design speed. (a) 3 (b) 4
(a) 60 (b) 75 (c) 5 (d) 6
(c) 80 (d) 90 MH PWD 2019
MH PWD 2019 Ans. (b) : IRC recommendation effect of gradient
Ans. (b) : As per IRC recommendation : Super (i) Grade compensation–
elevation should be provided to fully counteract the (ii) Resistance to the vehicles
centrifugal force due to 75% of the design. (iii) Grade resistance
v = 0.75 v 30 + R
(iv) According to IRC– %
( )
2
0.75v R
e+f = Where, f = 0 75
127R (v) Maximum compensation %
v2 R
e= (vi) Not required on flat gradient < 4%
225R 463. As per IRC recommended value of camber for
459. The maximum width of the vehicle as per IRC cement concrete surface varies in between
recommendation is (a) 1.7% to 2% (b) 2% to 2.5%
(a) 3.75m (b) 5m (c) 2.5% to 3% (d) 3% to 4%
(c) 2.44m (d) 3.5m MH WCD 2019
MH PWD 2019 Ans. (a) : Camber is the transverse slope provided to
Ans. (c) : the road surface for the drainage off the rainwater for
the better performance of the road.
As per IRC
Camber (%)
Type of surface
Heavy rain fall Light rain fall
(i) Cement 1 in 50 (2%) 1 in 60
concrete or thick (1.7%)
bitumen surface
(ii) thin 1 in 40 (2.5%) 1 in 50 (2%)
bituminous
surface
460. If the Overtaking site Distance (OSD) on a (iii) 1 in 33 (3%) 1 in 40
highway is 250m, the desirable and minimum WBM/Gravel (2.5%)
length of overtaking zone will be pavement
(a) 500m and 1000m respectively (iv) Earthen 1 in 25 (4%) 1 in 33 (3%)
(b) 1000m and 500m respectively
464. In Spiral curve, the rate of change of
(c) 750m and 1250m respectively
centrifugal acceleration is throughout the
(d) 1250m and 750m respectively
length of the curve
MH PWD 2019 (a) Uniform
Ans. (d) : given OSD = 250 m (b) Linearly varying
Desirable over taking zone = 5× OSD (c) May be uniform or linearly varying
= 5× 250 = 1250 m (d) Non-linearly varying
Minimum overtaking zone = 3× OSD
MH WCD 2019
= 3× 250
= 750m Ans. (a) : Properties of ideal transition curve (spiral
curve)
461. If the Overtaking site Distance (OSD) on a Must attain specified cant at function
highway is 300m, the desirable and minimum Rate of change of cant must equal that of the curve.
length of overtaking zone will be In spiral curve, the rate of change of the centrifugal
(a) 600 m and 1200 m respectively acceleration is throughout the length of the curve
(b) 1200 m and 600 m respectively uniform.
(c) 900 m and 1500 m respectively Must meet the circular curve tangential
(d) 1500 m and 900 m respectively 465. Limiting force of friction is defined as the
MH PWD 2019 frictional force which exists when a body
Ans. (d) : Given, OSD = 300 m (a) is moving with maximum velocity
then, min. overtaking zone (b) is stationary
= 3 × OSD = 3× 300 = 900m (c) just begins to slide over the surface
desirable overtaking zone (d) none of these
= 5× OSD = 5× 300 = 1500m MH WCD 2019
Highway Engineering 542 YCT
 Ans. (c) : The maximum value of the friction force at Ans. (a) : Wheel revolve more than the corresponding
which the body resting on the another body strat to longitudinal of movement along the road that's called
slide. slipping.
If F > P (No motion b/w two bodies) Driving vehicles on wet surfaced road is dangerous
If F = P (No motion between bodies) because it may slip
If F < P (Motion will be there) 470. The ideal form of the curve for the summit
Where, F = Limiting friction force. curve is:
P= applied force. (a) Circular (b) Spiral
466. Which one of the following is correct sequence (c) Lemniscates (d) Parabolic
of the total reaction time taken by the driver? DSSSB JE -23.10.2019 First Shift
(a) Perception→intellection→volition→emotion
(b) Perception→intellection→emotion→volition Ans. (a) : The deviation angles in vertical curves of
(c) intellection→Perception→emotion→volition highways are very small and so between the same
(d) volition→intellection→emotion→Perception tangent point; a simple parabola is nearly congruent
MH WCD 2019 with a circular are, also a parabola is very easy for
Ans. (b) : Trick – PIEV arithmetical manipulation for computing ordinates.
Perception– Intellection– emotion– volition The use of simple parabola as summit curve is found to
give good riding comfort too because of these reason
in actual practice a simple parabolic curve is used as
summit curve instead of the circular arc.
471. One of the natural factors influencing camber
is:
467. The height of mountable type kerbs, semi (a) Amount of rainfall
barriers type kerbs, barriers type kerbs above (b) Type of material used for wearing coarse
the pavement edge, respectively are –––– (c) Nature of subsoil met with
(a) 10 cms, 15 cms & 20 cms (d) Topography of the area
(b) 15 cms, 20 cms & 25 cms DSSSB JE -23.10.2019 First Shift
(c) 20 cms, 15 cms & 10 cms Ans. (a) : Cross slope or camber is the slope provided to
(d) 20 cms, 25 cms & 15 cms the road surface in the transverse direction to drain of
MH WCD 2019 the rain water from the road surface.
Ans. (a) : Kerb– It is the dividing line between Usually the camber is provided on the straight roads by
carriageway and footpath. raising a crown or highest point on the ceter line.
Type of carries way and these height– The required camber of a pavement depend on :
(i) Barriers type kerb– 20 cm (i) The type of pavement surface.
(ii) Semi—barrier type kerb– 15 cm (ii) The amount of rainfall.
(iii) Mountable type kerb– 10 cm Recommended values of camber for different types of
468. In which one of the following condition road surfaces.
skidding of vehicles takes place? 472. Grade compensation on curves is a minimum
(a) Wheel revolves more than the corresponding of:
longitudinal of movement along the roads (a) 75/R (b) 100/R
(b) Wheel revolves less than the corresponding (c) 156/R (d) 56/R
longitudinal of movement along the roads DSSSB JE -23.10.2019 First Shift
(c) Wheel revolves equal to the corresponding Ans. (a) : This reduction in gradient at the horizontal
longitudinal movement along the roads curve is called grade compensation which is intended
(d) None of the above to off-set the extra tractive effort, involved at the
MH WCD 2019 curve. This is calculated from the relation.
Ans. (b) : Wheel revolves less than the corresponding 30 + R
longitudinal of movement along the road called skid. Grade compensation, percent = ; subject to a
• Wheel revolves more than the corresponding R
longitudinal of movement along the road that called slip. maximum value of 75/R where R is the radius of the
circular curve in meter.
469. In which one of the following condition slipping
• According to the IRC the grade compensation is not
of vehicle takes place?
(a) Wheel revolves more than the corresponding necessary for gradient flatter the 4.0 percent.
longitudinal of movement along the roads 473. In highways, the length of the vehicle controls
(b) Wheel revolves less than the corresponding the design of the:
longitudinal of movement along the roads (a) Geometrics and cross-sectional characteristics
(c) Wheel revolves equal to the corresponding (b) Axle and wheel load
longitudinal movement along the roads (c) Vertical profile of the road
(d) None of the above (d) Overtaking distance
MH WCD 2019 DSSSB JE -23.10.2019 First Shift
Highway Engineering 543 YCT
 Ans. (a) : Widening of pavement on horizontal Ans. (c) : Simple, compound transition curves can be
curve– On horizontal curves, specially when they are used in case of highway as they or having good
not of very large radii, it is common to widen the amount of curvature provided by the radius. But in the
pavement slightly more than normal width. case of reverse curve, it provides immediate turning,
Analysis of extra widening – which should not be present in highway as it may lead
The extra widening of pavement on horizontal curves to accidents so it is avoided.
is divided into two parts. 477. A curve consists of two arcs of equal or
(i) Mechanical widening different radii bending in opposite direction is:
(ii) Psychological widening (a) Simple curve (b) Compound curve
(c) Reverse curve (d) Transition curve
nl 2 KERALA PSC Code 197/2015
Mechanical widening, Wm =
2R Ans. (c) : A curve consists of two arcs of equal or
l = Length of wheel base, m different radii bending in opposite direction is reverse
n = number of traffic lane curve.
R = mean radius of the curve. Reverse curve–A reverse curve is composed of two or
Psychological widening – more simple curves turning in opposite directions.
V • Their points of intersection lie on opposite ends of a
WPS = common tangent, and the PT of the first curve is
9.5 R
coincident with the PC of the second.
V = design speed, kmph
• This point is called the point or reverse curvature.
nl 2 V • Reverse curve are useful when laying out such things
Hence, We = +
2R 9.5 R as pipelines, flumes and levees.
474. Super elevation on curves counteracts • The surveyor may also use them on low-speed roads
centrifugal force and the remaining impact is and railroads.
counteracted by : 478. Select the INCORRECT statement in case of
(a) lateral friction (b) medial friction transition curves :
(c) lateral slope (d) medial resistance (a) It should be tangential to the straight
(b) Its curvature should be zero at origin on
DSSSB JE 4.11.2019, Afternoon
straight
Ans. (a) : Super elevation on curves counteracts (c) The curvature at the unction with the circular
centrifugal force and the remaining impact is curve should be less than that of circular
counteracted by lateral friction curve
V2 (d) It should meet the circular curve tangentially
e+µ = DSSSB JE 4.11.2019, Evening
127R
Where, Ans. (c) : A transition curve should satisfy the
µ = coefficient of lateral friction following conditions.
e = Super elevation (i) It should meet the straight path tangentially.
(ii) It should meet the circular curve tangentially
R = Radius of curve (m)
(iii) It should hav the same raidus as that of the
V = Speed of vehicle in (km/hr)
circular curve at its junction with the circular
475. A curve which is provided to change the curve.
horizontal alignment from straight to circular (iv) The rate of increase of curvature and
curve gradually is known as : superelevation should be the same.
(a) transition curve (b) reverse curve 479. As per IRC, the width of the pavement of a
(c) sag curve (d) summit curve single lane should be a minimum of :
DSSSB JE 4.11.2019, Afternoon (a) 3.25 m (b) 3.50 m
DSSSB JE 4.11.2019, Evening (c) 3.75 m (d) 4.0 m
Ans. (a) : Transistion curve–Transition curve is a (e) 4.5 m
curve in plan which is provided to change the Odisha JE (Mains) 02.08.2015
horizotnal alignment from straight to circular gradually
Ans. (c) : As per IRC, the width of the pavement of a
means the radius of transition curve varies between
single lane should be a minimum of 3.75 m.
infinity to R or R to infinity.
• As per IRC 73-1980
Reverse curve– A reverse curve is composed of two
Width of carriage way (m)
or more simple curves turning in opposite direction.
476. Which of the following curves is avoided on a Single Two lane Two lane Multilane
highway? lane without with raised pavements
(a) Simple curve (b) Compound curve raised kerbs width per
kerbs lane
(c) Reverse curve (d) None of the above
WBPSC JE 2018 3.75 m 7.0 m 7.5 m 3.5 m

Highway Engineering 544 YCT

480. Which force can be counteracted by providing (c) Reduction of accident
super elevation of roads? (d) Reduction of carriage way
(a) Centrifugal force (b) Frictional force Haryana SSC JE 13.04.2018, Afternoon
(c) Gravitational force (d) Centripetal force Ans. (c) : Proper geometric design will help in
DSSSB JE -23.10.2019 Second Shift reduction of accident.
Ans. (a) : The force acting on a body moving in a
circular path along the radius away from the centre of 484. According to IRC standards, grade
path is called centrifugal force (P) compensation is NOT necessary for gradients?
(a) flatter than 4 percent
Wv 2 mv 2 (b) steeper than 4 percent
P= =
gR R (c) flatter than 5 percent
(d) steeper than 5 percent
P
= e + f or tan θ + f DSSSB JE 20.11.2019, Evening
W
Ans. (a) : This reduction in gradient at the horizontal
P v2 curve is called grade compensation which is intended
= e+f = to off-set the extra tractive effort, involved at the
W Rg
curve. This is calculated from the relation.
e = tanθ 30 + R
W = weight of vehicle acting downward Grade compensation, percent = ; subject to a
R
481. The force acting on a body moving in a circular maximum value of 75/R where R is the radius of the
path along the radius away from the center of circular curve in meter.
path is called:
• According to the IRC the grade compensation is not
(a) centripetal force (b) shear force
(c) centrifugal force (d) torsion necessary for gradient flatter the 4.0 percent.
KSDC-KLDC Code 41/2014 485. What is the ruling design speed recommended
Ans. (c) : The force acting on a body moving in a by IRC for rolling terrain ? Assuming type of
circular path along the radius away from the centre of road as National Highway and State Highway :
path is called centrifugal force (P) (a) 80 KMPH (b) 60 KMPH
2 2 (c) 100 KMPH (d) 120 KMPH
Wv mv
P= = DSSSB JE 20.11.2019, Evening
gR R Ans. (a) :
P Design speed (kmph)
= e + f or tan θ + f Plain Rolling Mountainous Steep
W Road Ruling Min. Ruling Min. Ruling Min. Ruling Min.
classification
P v2
= e+f = Expressways 120 100 100 80 80 60 80 60
W Rg NH & SH 100 80 80 65 50 40 40 30
e = tanθ MDR 80 65 65 50 40 30 30 20
W = weight of vehicle acting downward ODR 65 50 50 40 30 25 25 20
482. Which situation is not considered in the design VR 50 40 40 35 25 20 25 20
of sight distance? 486. According to Indian practice for two-lane
(a) Head light sight distance roads, which should be the shoulder width for
(b) Stopping sight distance rural area roads?
(c) Intermediate sight distance (a) 2.25 m (b) 2 m
(d) Eye level sight distance (c) 2.5 m (d) 1.75 m
Haryana SSC JE 13.04.2018, Morning DSSSB JE -23.10.2019 Third Shift
Ans. (d) : Sights distances considered by IRC in Ans. (c) : Shoulders are provided along the road edge
highway design are:
to serve as an emergency lane for vehicle compelled to
(i) Stopping sight distance (SSD)/Non-passing sight
be taken out of the pavement or roadway.
distance
(ii) Overtaking sight distance (OSD)/Passing sight • Shoulder also act as service lanes for vehicle that
distance have broken down.
(iii) Safe sight distance required for entering in an • The minimum shoulder width recommended by the
intersection. IRC is 2.5 m
(iv) Intermediate sight distance (ISD) 487. The minimum super elevation or curves should
(v) Head Light Sight Distance (HSD) not be less than :
483. Proper geometric design will help in (a) 5% (b) 4%
(a) Increasing speed of vehicle (c) Camber (d) None of these
(b) Reduction in gradient DMRC JE 2014 PAPER-I
Highway Engineering 545 YCT
 Ans. (c) : • The minimum super elevation provided on 491. A vehicle has wheel base of 6 metres. What will
a road must not be less than the camber of roads for the be the off-tracking while negotiating a curved
adequate drainage of water from the surface. path of mean radius 30 metres ?
Maximum Superelevation (a) 0.8 mtr (b) 0.6 mtr
Type of Urban Plain and Hilly (c) 0.2 mtr (d) 0.1 mtr
HPSSC JE CODE 552/2018
Road Road Rolling Regions
terrain ℓ2
Ans. (b) : Off tracking =
Maximum 4% or 0.04 7% or 0.07 10% or 2R
super 0.10 6× 6
elevation =
2 × 30
(emax) = 0.6 m
488. Excessive camber on pavement may cause 492. Transition curve has a radius which
(a) Both (c) and (d) (a) increases from the infinity at the tangent point
(b) None of (c) and (d) to a designed radius of the circular curve.
(c) Slip of the speedy vehicles (b) decreases from the infinity at the tangent point
(d) Erosion of the shoulders & side slopes to a designed radius of the circular curve.
NWRD SHIFT I, 25.11.2016 (c) decreases from the zero at the tangent point to
Ans. (a) : Camber is the rising of the middle of the a designed radius of the circular curve.
road surface in the transverse direction to drain of rain (d) None of the above
water from road surface. HPSSC JE CODE 552/2018
One to excessive camber on pavement may cause Ans. (b) : Transition curve is provided to change the
decoration of the shoulders and side slope and also slip horizontal alignment from straight to circular curves
gradually and has a radius which decreases from
of the speedy vehicles.
infinity at straight end to the desired radius of the
• Camber is measured in 1 in n or n%. circular curve at the other end.
• For cement concrete pavement, camber is in straight
line otherwise parabolic.
489. For a transition curve radius--------
(a) Is constant
(b) None of these
(c) Changes suddenly from infinity to some finite
value 493. If the road surface is adequately super-elevated
(d) Changes gradually from infinity to some on horizontal curve, which one of the following
finite value is the proper distribution of pressure on the
NWRD Shift III, 25.11.2016 vehicle wheels ?
Ans. (d) : For a transition curve radius changes (a) Pressure on both outer and inner wheels is
gradually from infinity to some finite value. equal.
• Transition curve is a curve in plan which is provided (b) Pressure on inner wheel is more than outer
to change the horizontal alignment from straight to wheel.
circular curve gradually means the radius of transition (c) Pressure on outer wheel is more than inner
curve varies between infinity to R or R to infinity. wheel.
(d) Pressure on inner wheel is twice than pressure
• A transition curve is provided on both ends of a on outer wheel.
circular curve. HPSSC JE CODE 552/2018
490. The amount of camber provided in a highway Ans. (a) : If these is no friction due to some practical
surface located in an area having light rainfall seasons, then f = 0 and equation become,
is 1 in 60. The most appropriate road surface
v2 v2
corresponding to the provided camber will be : e+f = ⇒e=
(a) WBM gR gR
(b) Cement concrete • This result in the situation where the pressure on the
(c) Earthen outer and inner are same, requiring very high super
(d) Thin bituminous surface elevation is called equilibrium super elevation.
HPSSC JE CODE 552/2018 495. The absolute minimum radius for a horizontal
Ans. (b) : The amount of camber provided in a curve designed for a speed for 100 kmph given
highway surface located in an area having light rainfall the permissible values for super elevation 0.08
is 1 in 60. The most appropriate road surface and co-efficient of friction 0.12 will be
corresponding to the provided camber will be cement (a) 394 m (b) 295 m
(c) 364 m (d) 252 m
concrete.
HPSSC JE CODE 502/2018
Highway Engineering 546 YCT
 Ans. (a) : Given, Based on IRC method –
emax = 0.08 V2
f = 0.12 L3 = (hilly terrain)
R
V = 100 kmph Or
Rmin = ?
2.7 V 2
v2 L3 = (plain and rolling terrain)
emax + f = R
(127 ) R min Length of transition curve = max {L1, L2, L3}
v 2
100 × 100 498. The camber for cement concrete and high type
R ab min = =
( emax + f ) ×127 ( 0.08 + 0.12 ) ×127 bituminous
condition is–
surface for heavy rain fall

R abmin = 393.7 m ≃ 394m (a) 1 in 25 (b) 1 in 33

496. A vertical curve is designed on the basis of the (c) 1 in 40 (d) 1 in 50
(a) Radius of the curve AAI (Aeronautical JE) 2015
(b) Degree of the curve Ans. (d) The camber for cement concrete and high
(c) Change of gradient type bituminous surface for heavy rain fall condition is
(d) Minimum sight distance 1 in 50 or 2%.
GSSSB Surveyor 1.4.2018 499. The stopping or non-passing sight distance
Ans. (d) : Design of vertical curves the first step in length required for a summit curve is calculate
the design is to determine the minimum length for a using–
given design speed. Factors affecting the minimum (a) GS2/9.6 (b) GS2/4.4
2
length include sufficient sight distance driver comfort (c) GS /5 (d) GS2/4.5
appearance. AAI (Aeronautical JE) 2015
• Design of vertical curves crest vertical curve if Ans. (b)
sight distance requirements are satisfied then
safety, comfort and appearance requirements are
also satisfied, h1 = height of driver's eyes, in ft h2 =
height of object, in ft.
• Design of vertical curves sag vertical curve
stopping sight distance not an issue for sag vertical  NS02   NS2 
curves instead the design controls are one of the If L > OSD,  L = 9.6  L > SSD  L =
4.4 

  
following headlight sight distance rider comfort
drainage appearance.  9.6   4.4 
If L < OSD  L = 2S −  L < SSD  L = 2S −
• Design of vertical curves crest vertical curve  N  N 
equation relating sight distance to minimum length S = stopping sight distance,
from AASHTO: h1 = 3.5 ft h2 = 0.5 ft (stopping = S0 = overtaking or intermediate sight distance.
sight distance) h3 = 4.25 ft (passing sight distance). 500. The absolute minimum radius of curve for safe
497. The length of transition curve is given by operation, for a speed of 110 kmph is
n (a) 110m (b) 440m
(a) L = n × e (b) L = (c) 220m (d) 577m
e
ASSAM PSC AE (PWD) 2020
e
(c) L = (d) L = n + e SSC JE 3.3.2017, Morning Shift
n MH Pimpri-Chinchwad MNC 2015
GSSSB Surveyor 1.4.2018 Ans. (b) According to question–
Ans. (a) : Length of transition curve  5 
(a) Based on rate of change of centrifugal acceleration v = 110 kmph 110 × m/ sec
 18 
0.0215V3 80
L1 = C= According to IRC,
CR 75 + V e = 0.07, f = 0.15 (For ruling gradient)
V = kmph
Cmin = 0.5 Absolute minimum radius (R)
2
Cmax = 0.8  110 × 5 
(b) Based on introduction of super-elevation 2  
=
v
=  18 
eN ( w + we ) g(e + f ) 9.81× (0.07 + 0.15)
L2 = (rotation of outer edge about
2 = 432.602 ≈ 440m.
central line) 501. What is the psychological widening of a
L 2 = eN ( w + we ) (rotation of pavement about inner pavement on horizontal curve of radius 230m
for ruling speed 80 kmph?
line) (a) 0.455m (b) 0.555m
Highway Engineering 547 YCT
 (c) 0.786m (d) 0.136m KPSC JE 2.7.2016
SSC JE 3.3.2017, Morning Shift Ans. (a) : Given data
MP VYAPAM Sub Engg. 3.04.2016, 9.00 am R = 300 m
Ans. (b) According to question – ℓ=8m
V = 80 kmph
n=2
R = 230 m
V = 100 kmph
V
Psychological widening (wp)= (V in kmph) Extra widening
9.5 R
nℓ2 V
80 80 we = +
wp = = 2R 9.5 R
9.5 230 144.07
2×8×8 100 V
w p = 0.555m we = + +
2 × 300 9.5 300 9.5 R
502. On horizontal curve, if the pavement is kept we = 0.82 m
horizontal across the alignment, then the
506. Which of the following shapes is preferred in
pressure on the outer wheels will be..................
(a) More than the pressure under inner wheels valley curve?
(b) Less than pressure under inner wheels (a) Cubic parabola (b) Spiral
(c) Equal to the pressure on inner wheels (c) Lemniscate (d) Simple parabola
(d) Zero HPSSC JE 2015
SSC JE 2.3.2017, Morning Shift Ans. (a) : Valley curve– Valley curve or sag curves
Ans. (a) On horizontal curve, if the pavement is kept are vertical curves with convexity downward. They are
horizontal across the alignment, then the pressure on the formed when two gradients meet as illustrated in figure
outer wheels will be more than the pressure under inner below in any of the following four ways.
wheels. • When a descending gradient meet another
descending gradient.
503. In a simple circular curve, if R is the radius, T
• When a descending gradient meets a flat gradient.
is the tangent length and θ is the deflection
• When a descending gradient meets an ascending
angle, then T = ..................
gradient.
(a) R tan (θ/2) (b) 2R tan θ
• When a ascending gradient meet, another ascending
(c) R tan 2θ (d) R2 tan θ
gradient.
KPSC JE 13.11.2016
• Shape of valley curve generally preferred cubic
Ans. (a) : parabola.
• Tangent length,
θ
T = R Tan
2
• Length of curve,
πRθ
l=
180
• Length of chord,
θ
L = 2 R Sin
2
504. The upper edge of highways are slightly
elevated with respect to inner edge. This is
called
(a) Elevators (b) Speed breakers
(c) Super elevation (d) Risers
KPSC JE 13.11.2016 507. Calculate the super elevation to be provided on
Ans. (c) : If the upper edge of highway are slightly the horizontal curve of radius 100 m. Design
elevated with respect inner edge called super-elevation. speed is 50 km/h and the design coefficient of
2 lateral friction of 0.15 is fully developed.
V
e+f = (a) 0.917 (b) 0.99
gR (c) 0.919 (d) 0.047
505. The extra widening required for a two-lane UPRVUNL JE 2019
National Highway at a horizontal curve of 300 KPSC 2015 Code 143/2015
m radius, considering a wheel base of 8 m and Ans. (d) : Given,
a design speed of 100 kmph is Design speed (V) = 50 km/h
(a) 0.82 m (b) 0.42 m Radius (R) = 100 m
(c) 0.92 m (d) 0.62 m Coefficient of lateral friction = 0.15
GSECL AE 2018 Shift -I Super elevation = ?
Highway Engineering 548 YCT
 V2  1
e+f =
Ls ∝ R 
127R  
50 2
e= − 0.15 where, Ls = length of transition curve
127 × 100
e = 0.047 C = Allowable rate of change of centrifugal
508. As per IRC 52-2001 ruling gradient for acceleration in m/sec3
mountainous terrain is R = Radius of curve in 'm'
(a) 5% (b) 6% 511. The boundaries between the pavement and
(c) 7% (d) 8% shoulder or foot paths are called :
Haryana SSC JE 13.04.2018, Morning (a) Kerbs (b) Burrow pit
Mizroam PSC JE RRD 2016 Paper-II (c) Berms (d) None
KPSC 2015 Code 143/2015 KPSC JE Code 64/2016
Ans. (a) : Ans. (a) : Kerb– It indicate the boundary between the
Terrain Ruling Limiting Exceptional pavement and footpath or shoulder.
condition gradient gradient gradient • Kerb are mainly divided in following categories.
Plain & (a) Low kerb (mountable karb)
rolling 3.30% 5% 6.7% (b) Semibarrier kerb
Terrain (c) Barrier type kerb
Mountainesus
512. Consider the following data
or steep
terrain With Design speed = 96 kmph
5% 6% 7% Speed overtaken vehicle = 80 kmph
average
elevation Reaction time for overtaking = 2 sec
>3000 m Acceleration = 2.5 kmph/sec
Steep terrain The safe overtaking sight distance on a two-
with Average way traffic road will be nearly
6% 7% 8% (a) 646 m (b) 556 m
elevation
<3000m (c) 46 m (d) 376 m
509. The psychological widening required on a ESE 2020
horizontal curve of radius 235 m for a design Ans. (a) : Given,
speed of 65 km/h is: Design speed (Vd) = 96 kmph or 26.67 m/sec.
(a) 0.446 m (b) 0.456 m Speed of overtaken vehicle (Vb) = 80 kmph or
(c) 0.646 m (d) 0.656 m 22.22m/sec.
KPSC 2015 Code 143/2015 acceleration (a) = 2.5 kmph/sec.
Ans. (a) : 5
= 2.5 × m/sec2
V 18
Psychological widening = v = kmph.
9.5 R Now,
65 Time taken in operation of overtaken (T),
Wps = = 0.446m.
9.5 235 4S 22.1× 4
T= =
a 5
510. The relationship between the length (l) and 2.5 ×
radius (r) of an ideal transition curve is given 18
by : T = 11.28 sec.
1 Space headway (s),
(a) l α r (b) ℓ α S = 0.2 × Vb + 6.1 = 0.2 × 80 + 6.1 = 22.1m
r
Now,
1
(c) l α r2 (d) ℓ α 2 OSD = 0.278 Vb × t + 0.278 × Vb × T + 2S + Vd × T
r × 0.278
KPSC JE Code 64/2016 OSD = 0.278 × 80 × 2 + 0.278 × 80 × 11.28 + 2 × 22.1
Ans. (b) : Transition curve– + 96 × 11.28 × 0.278
• For the gradual introduction of centrifugal force. = 44.48 + 250.87 + 44.2 + 301.04
• To introduce super elevation gradually OSD = 640.59m
• To introduce extra widening gradually or, OSD ≃ 646m
• To provide comfort for the driver that is to enable
smooth vehicle operation on road. 513. The difference in levels of the outer and inner
0.0215v 3 80
edges of a road curve is:
Ls = C= m / sec 3 (a) Gradient (b) Camber
CR 75 + V (c) Cross slope (d) Super elevation
[0.5 < C < 0.8] KPSC JE Code 53/2015
V = kmph KPSC JE Code 30/2014
Highway Engineering 549 YCT
 Ans. (d) : Difference in level of the outer and inner (a) 16.0 m (b) 42.3 m
edge of a road curve is known as super elevation. (c) 84.6 m (d) none of the above
Derive ASSAM PSC AE (PWD) 2020
HESCOM AE 2017
MGVCL JE 2017
Ans. (c) : N = –3% – 2% = –5%
V = 100 kmph = 27.78 m/sec
C = 0.6 m/sec3
1
 NV 3  2
L = 2 
 C 
BV 2 P V2
h= ∵ = 0.05 × 27.783
gR W gR =2
0.6
φ1 = φ2
tanφ1 = tanφ2 = 84.53m ≃ 84.60m
h P 517. A gradient along which the vehicle does not
=
B W require any tractive effort to maintain a
h V2 specified speed is known as
B× = ×B (a) ruling gradient
B gR
(b) pushing gradient
BV 2 (c) floating gradient
h=
gR (d) minimum gradient
ASSAM PSC AE (PWD) 2020
514. The convexity provided to the surface of
Ans. (c) : Floating gradient– The gradient on which a
carriageway:
(a) Kerb (b) Camber motor vehicle, moving with a constant speed continues
(c) Gradient (d) Super elevation to descend at the some speed without any application
KPSC JE Code 027/2016 of power as brackes is known as a floating gradient.
Ans. (b) : Camber– The convexity provided to the Minimum gradient– The minimum desirable slope
surface of carriageway for drain off water called which is essential for the effective drainage of rain
camber. water from the surface of the known as a minimum
• It depends on type of surface and amount of rainfall. gradient.
515. The slope of the road pavement in the Rulling gradient– The gradient which is usually
longitudinal direction is called: adopted while making the alignment of the road, is
(a) Alignment known as the rulling gradient.
(b) Gradient Pushing gradient– Pushes gradient is the gradient
(c) Super elevation where an extra engine is required to push the train.
(d) Length of summit 518. In plains the minimum length of transition
Kerala PSC LSG Code 141/2016 curve is____:
KPSC JE Code 156/2014 (a) V2/R (b) V2/1.5R
2
Ans. (b) : Gradient– (c) 2.7V /R (d) V2/24R
• The slope of the road pavement in the longitudinal SSC JE 1.3.2017 Morning Shift
direction is called gradient. Ans. (c) According to empirical formula length of
• Gradient is the rate of rise or fall along the length oftransition curve-
the road with respect to the horizontal.
IRC specifications for Road Gradient in different 2.7V 2
L= for plain and rolling terrain
terrains (%) R
Terrain Ruling Limiting Excemptional V2
Plain/rolling 3.3 5 6.7 L= for hilly area.
Hilly 5 6 7 (above 300m R
MSL) 519. Calculate the safe stopping sight distance (in
Steep 6 7 8 (above 300m m) for the descending gradient of 3% for a
MSL) design speed of 80 km/h. Take coefficient of
516. The total length of a valley forms by two friction as 0.35 and total reaction time as 2
gradients –3% and +2% curve between the two seconds.
tangent points to provide a rate of change a (a) 110.82 (b) 123.26
centrifugal acceleration 0.6 m/sec3 for a design (c) 1018.41 (d) 1092
speed 100 kmph, is SSC JE 23.1.2018, Morning Shift
Highway Engineering 550 YCT
 Ans. (b) : Given that– Ans. (d) : Cross-section of a highway–
V = 80 km/hour = design speed 1. The features of cross section of highway influences
S = 3% = Descending gradient the life of the pavement as well as the riding
t = Reaction time = 2 second comfort and safety.
f = coefficient of friction = 0.35 2. Right angle to centre line
Safe stopping sight distance (SSD) 3. Intermediate points having abrupt change in
2 gradient.
V 4. The staring end points of the curves and 30 metre
= 0.278 Vt +
254 ( f ± 3%) apart.
524. Calculate the design rate of super elevation
( 80 )
2

SSD = 0.278 × 80 × 2 + (%) on a highway in a plain terrain, if design

( 0.35 − 0.03) 254 speed of the highway is 80kmph and radius of
SSD = 44.48 + 78.79 the curve is 400m.
(a) 7 (b) 7.11
SSD = 123.22m (c) 8.2 (d) 12.6
520. The intermediate sight distance is equal to …… SSC JE 27.01.2018 (Evening)
(a) overtaking sight distance Ans. (a) Design rate of super elevation
(b) stopping sight distance v2 802
(c) twice of stopping sight distance (e) = = = 0.0711 or e = 7.11%
(d) twice of over taking sight distance 225R 225 × 400
SSC JE 25.1.2018, Morning Shift But as per IRC max. super elevation is plain terrain≯7%
Ans. : (c) Intermediate sight distance is provided only so e = 0.07 or e = 7%
when overtaking sight distance is not feasible to be 525 . The idial form of the curve for the summit
provided. curve is :
ISD = 2 × SSD (a) Spiral (b) Parabola
(c) Circle (d) Lemniscate
521. Which of the following are CORRECT values SSC JE 2011 (Morning )
for coefficient of lateral and longitudinal Ans. (c) In summit curve ideal form of curve is
friction as per IRC? circular because the sight distance is same at every
(a) 0.10, 0.15 (b) 0.15, 0.35 point of circular curve. But IRC prefers square
(c) 0.30, 0.10 (d) 0.35, 0.15 parabola (or parabola) for design purpose.
SSC JE 25.01.2018, Evening Shift In valley curve ideal form of curve is cubic parabola.
Ans. (b) As per IRC, but IRC prefers square parabola.
(i) The value of coeff of lateral friction = 0.15 526. As per IRC standards, the maximum super
(ii) The value of coeff of longitudinal friction = 0.35 elevation that can be provided on hill road not
522. Pick up the incorrect statement from the bound by snow is:
following. The width of the right–of–way is (a) 7% (b) 4% (c) 10% (d) 8%
decided to accommodate. Mizroam PSC JE RRD 2016 Paper-II
(a) Formation width (b) Side slopes UPRVUNL JE 2019
(c) Horizontal curve (d) Vertical curve WBPSC SAE 2000
SSC JE 4.3.2017, Morning Shift Ans. (c) : On hill roads not bound by snow a
Ans. (d) Right of way is the width of land required for maximum super elevation up to 10% on urban road
the road, along its alignment. stretches with frequent intersection, it may be
• The width of land acquired should be adequate to necessary to limit the maximum super elevation to
4.0%.
accommodate all the cross-section element of highway.
• Right of way governed by following factor. S. No. Terrain Super elevation
(a) width of formation. 1. Plain 7% (1 in 15)
(b) height of embankment 2. Hilly region 10% (1 in 10)
(c) side slope of embankment 3. For urban road 4% (1 in 25)
(d) sight distance consideration 527. In an ideal transition curve, the radius of
(e) Reserve and for future widening curvature is :
523. The cross-section of a highway is taken at : (a) Constant
(a) Right angle to the center line (b) Directly proportional to its distance from the
(b) 30 meters apart point of commencement
(c) Intermediate points having abrupt change in (c) Inversely proportional to radius of main curve
gradient (d) Directly proportional to radius of main curve
(d) All of these Karnataka PSC JE 2017
Odisha JE (Mains) 30.06.2019 Ans. (c) : The radius of curvature in an ideal transition
SSC JE 4.3.2017, Morning Shift curve is inversely proportional to radius of main curve.

Highway Engineering 551 YCT

528. The absolute minimum sight distance required Ans. (d) : Sight Distance– The clear distance ahead of
for stopping a vehicle moving with a speed of vehicle which is visible to the driver is known as sight
80 kmph is (assuming t = 2.5 s, f = 0.36) – distance. Sight distance available on a road depend on–
(a) 125 m (b) 200 m (a) Feature of road i.e., gradient etc.
(c) 640 m (d) None of the above (b) Height of driver's eye above road surface.
KPSC JE 9.9.2017 (c) Height of object eye above road surface.
Karnataka PSC JE 2017 (d) Speed of the vehicle.
Ans. (a) : (e) Efficiency of brakes etc.
2 532. The most commonly adopted method to
V
Stopping sight distance = Vt + provide super-elevation on roads, is by
2gf
providing the road surface about the :
5 (a) Outer edge so that the inner edge is lowered
V = 80 × in m/s
18 (b) Crown so that the outer edge is raised and
t = 2.5 sec inner edge is lowered
g = 9.81 m/sec2 (c) Inner edge so that outer edge is raised
f = 0.36 (d) Matching level of nearby road
2 GETCO 2017
 5 
 80 ×
18 
Ans. (c) : In order to counteract the effect of
5
SSD = 80 × × 2.5 +
 = 125.46m centrifugal force and to reduce the tendency of the
18 2 × 9.81× 0.36 vehicle to overturn or skid to outer edge of the
≃ 125m pavement is raised with respect to the inner edge, thus
529. As per IRC recommendations, average level of providing a transverse slope throughout the length of
illumination on important roads carrying fast the horizontal curve. This transverse inclination to the
traffic is......................... pavement surface is known as super elevation. Most
(a) 10 lux (b) 30 lux common method adopted to provide super elevation is
(c) 20 lux (d) 5 lux inner edge to outer edge.
GSECL AE 2018 Shift -I 533. On relatively impervious pavement surface like
Ans. (b) : As per IRC Recommendation the average cement concrete or bituminous concrete, a flat
level of Illumination on Important roads carrying first camber of --------------- is sufficient.
traffic is 30 lux. (a) 1.1 to 1.4% (b) 1.4 to 1.7%
• The most economical lighting layout which is (c) 1.7 to 2.0% (d) 2.0 to 2.3%
suitable for narrow roads is single side lighting. UPRVUNL JE 2019
530. For a road with camber of 3% and design MH PWD 2019
speed of 80 km/hr. the minimum radius of the Ans. (c) : Camber is the transverse slope provided to
curve beyond which no super-elevation is the road surface for the drainage off the rainwater for
needed is................ the better performance of the road.
(a) 280 m (b) 1880 m As per IRC
(c) 948 m (d) 406 m Camber (%)
Type of surface
GSECL AE 2018 Shift -I Heavy rain fall Light rain fall
Ans. (a) : Camber = 3% or 0.03, f = 0.15 (take) (i) Cement 1 in 50 (2%) 1 in 60
5 concrete or thick (1.7%)
V = 80 km/h or 80 × = 22.22 m / sec. bitumen surface
18
2
(ii) thin 1 in 40 (2.5%) 1 in 50 (2%)
V bituminous
Formula: e + f =
gR surface
V 2 (iii) WBM/ 1 in 33 (3%) 1 in 40
R= Gravel pavement (2.5%)
g(e + f ) (iv) Earthen 1 in 25 (4%) 1 in 33 (3%)
( 22.22 )
2
534. Minimum stopping distance for moving
R= = 280m vehicles on road with a design speed of 80
9.81 (0.03 + 0.15) kmph, is :
531. The sight distance available on a road to a (a) 80 m (b) 100 m
driver at any instance depends on (c) 120 m (d) 150 m
1. Features of the road ahead GETCO 2017
2. Height of the driver’s eye above the road Ans. (c) : approximate value of SSD.
surface S.N. Design speed (Kmph) SSD (m)
3. Height of the object above the road surface 1 20 20
(a) 1 and 2 only (b) 1 and 3 only 2 40 45
(c) 2 and 3 only (d) 1, 2 and 3 3 65 90
ESE 2020 4 80 120
Highway Engineering 552 YCT
535. The design of major geometric elements of Ans. (c) : Reaction time for calculating stopping sight
highways depends on: distance is taken as 2.5 sec and for overtaking sight
(a) Speed of the vehicle (b) Gradient of the road distance taken as 2 sec.
(c) Super-elevation (d) Camber 539. A district road with a bituminous pavement
BMC TA 2019 has a horizontal curve of 1000 m for a design
Ans. (a) : The design of major geometric elements of speed of 75 kmph. The super-elevation is
highways depends on speed of the vehicle and other (a) 1 in 40 (b) 1 in 50
component. (c) 1 in 60 (d) 1 in 70
Like : • Cross-section Nagaland PSC 2016 Paper-I
• Horizontal alignment HESCOM AE 2017
• Vertical alignment 2
• Sight distances V
Ans. (a) : e =
• Lateral and vertical clearances 225R
• Inter section etc. 752
536. The ______ depends on the speed of the vehicle e =
225 × 1000
coming from opposite direction e = 0.025
(a) SSD (b) OSD or
(c) ISD (d) Super-elevation 1
BMC TA 2019 e=
Ans. (b) : Overtaking Sight Distance (OSD)– The 40
minimum distance open to the vision of the driver of a 540. The slope of the line joining the crown and
vehicle intending to overtake slow vehicle ahead with edge of the road surface is known as
safety against the traffic of opposite direction is known (a) Cross fall (b) Cross-slope
as the minimum overtaking sight distance (OSD) or the (c) Camber (d) Any of the above
safe passing sight distance available. Chandigarh JE 17.07.2016
Manipur AE Paper-II 2016
Ans. (d) : The slope of the line joining the crown and
edge of the road surface is known as cross fall / cross -
slope / camber.
541. The convexity provided to the carriageway
between the crown and edge of the pavement, is
known as:
(a) Super elevation (b) Height of pavement
(c) Camber (d) None of these
KMC 2007
Ans. (c) : The convexity provided to the carriageway
OSD = d1+d2+d3
between the crown and edge of the pavement, is
Here : OSD = Overtaking sight distance in 'm'.
known as camber.
537. The radius of a horizontal circular curve is 120 • The camber is provided on the straight roads by
m, and the design speed is 50 kmph. What will
raising the center of the carriageway with respect to
be the approximately value of the coefficient of
the edges, forming a crown or highest point along the
friction required in no super elevation is
provided? center line.
(a) 0.25 (b) 0.18 542. The radius of a simple circular curve is 300m
(c) 0.16 (d) 0.19 and length of its specified chord is 30 m. The
BSPHCL JE 2019 (Shift III) degree of the curve is
Ans. (c) : Given, (a) 5.73º (b) 5.37º
R = 120 m (c) 3.57º (d) 3.75º
V = 50 kmph = 13.888 m/s HESCOM AE 2017
2 Ans. (a) : Given,
V
e+f = R = 300 m
gR D=?
e=0 for 30m,
V 2 (13.888 )
2
1720
f= = = 0.163 D=
gR 9.81× 120 R
1720
538. The reaction time for calculation of stopping D= = 5.73º
distance may be assumed as 300
(a) 5 secs (b) 0.5 secs 543. The ruling design speed on a National Highway
(c) 2.5 secs (d) 10 secs in plain terrain as per IRC recommendations is
HESCOM AE 2017 (a) 60 kmph (b) 80 kmph
Highway Engineering 553 YCT
 (c) 100 kmph (d) 120 kmph (b) road over rail track
MH PWD 2019 (c) road under rail track
MH WRD 2016 (d) both road over and under bridges
Nagaland PSC 2016 Paper-I KERALA PSC Code 197/2015
Gujarat BMC Technical Assistant 2017 Ans. (b) : The best system of a railway highway
Ans. (c) : As per IRC Recommendation (Speed) crossing is road over rail track.
Type of road Plain Rolling Hilly Steep Advantage of road ways over railways are–
NH/SH 100-80 80-65 50-40 40-30 • Construction cost of roads is much lower than
MDR 80-65 65-50 40-30 30-20 railway line.
ODR 65-50 50-40 30-25 25-20 • Roads can be constructed easily in hilly terrains and
VR 50-40 40-35 25-20 25-20 undulating topography.
544. While calculating the overtaking sight distance, 549. In ............... curves their convexity upward.
the height of the object above road surface is (a) Concave curve (b) Valley curve
assumed: (c) Summit curve (d) Ridge curve
(a) Zero (b) 50 cm Kerala PSC Code 67/2014
(c) 100 cm (d) 120 cm Ans. (c) : Summit curve– These are vertical curve
ASSAM PSC AE (PWD) 2020 with convexity upward.
KMC 2007 • Generally parabolic curves also used as summit
Ans. (d) : The overtaking sight distance, OSD is the curve.
distance measured along the center of the road which a
driver with his eye level at 1.2 m above the road
surface can see the top of an object 1.2 m above the
road surface.
545. When an upgradient of a highway meets a
downgrade the vertical curve provided is
known as:
(a) Valley curve (b) Sag curve 550. A camber consisting of two straight slopes
(c) Summit curve (d) All the above joining at the center is called:
KMC 2007 (a) Composite camber (b) Sloped camber
(c) Barrel camber (d) Curved camber
Ans. (c) : Summit curve– These are vertical curves MANIPUR AE Paper-II 2016
with convexity upwards. Kerala PSC Code 67/2014
• Square parabola is generally prefer for summit curve.
Ans. (b) : Sloped camber– In consists of two straight
• Ideal shape of summit curve is circular. slopes from the edges joining at the center of the
Algebraic difference between the gradients. carriageway. This type of camber is very simple and
N = n1 – (–n2) can be easily constructed. It is also called as straight
N = n1 + n2 camber.
546. When the path travelled along the road surface 551. In which of the following way of highway is in
is more than the circumferential movement of emergency escape ramp provided
the wheels due to rotation then it results in (a) 1 in 200 (b) 1 grade
(a) Slipping (b) Skidding (c) down grade (d) upgrade
(c) Tuming (d) Revolving Nagaland PSC 2017 Paper-I
Gujarat Electric Board 2017 Ans. (c) : During down gradient the vehicles may
Nagaland PSC 2016 Paper-I uncontrolled due to breaking so emergency ramp is
Ans. (b) : Skidding– When the path travelled along provided.
the road surface is more than the circumferential • It is typically a long-way, sand as gravel filled lane
movement of the wheels due to rotation. connected to a steep downhill grade section of a main
Slipping– When circumferential distance is more as road, and is designed to accommodate large trucks or
compared to longitudinal distance. buses.
547. A curve whose radius varies gradually from 552. Which of the following statement is wrong?
infinity to finite value equal to the radius of (a) The amount of camber depends upon the
circular to be connected is known as: rainfall of that area in which the road is to be
(a) Super elevation (b) Compound curve constructed.
(c) Reverse curve (d) Transition curve (b) The steeper the camber of road, the more
KERALA PSC Code 196/2015 inconvenient it is for the traffic
Ans. (d) : A curve whose radius varies gradually from (c) On a pavement with parabolic camber, the
infinity to finite value known as transition curve. angle of inclination of the vehicles will be
548. The best system of a railway highway crossing more at the edges
is: (d) None of the above
(a) level crossing MANIPUR AE PAPER-II 2016
Highway Engineering 554 YCT
 Ans. (d) : Camber– It is rising of the middle of the Ans. (a) : The value of camber recommended by the
road in the transverse direction to drain off water from IRC given below.
road surface. It is depends upon amount of rainfall Type of road Heavy Light
where road is constructed. Cement concrete or thick 1 in 50 1 in 60
• These are generally three type of camber provided bituminous
along the road. Thin bituminous 1 in 40 1 in 50
(i) Straight line camber WBM & Gravel road 1 in 33 1 in 40
(ii) Parabolic camber Earth 1 in 25 1 in 33
(iii) Composite camber • For kankar load 1 in 24 to l in 30 camber provided.
556. Super elevation is expressed as
(a) The difference of heights of two edges of the
carriage way to the width of the carriage way
(b) The difference of radii of curves
(c) The difference of the road gradients
(d) None of the above
MANIPUR AE PAPER-II 2016
Ans. (a) : Super elevation is the ratio of difference
Parabolic camber between height to two edges of the carriage way to the
Excessive camber should not be provided because– width of the carriage way.
• Major accidents can be caused due to instability of
highly loaded vehicle.
• The edge will wear out faster than central part.
553. As per IRC Specifications, the minimum width
for Right-of-way for double-lane National
Highways in open areas is
(a) 20 m (b) 24 m
(c) 26 m (d) 28 m
Mizoram PSC JE (PHE &PWD) Apr. 2016 Paper-II
Ans. (b) : According to I.R.C : 52-2019,
Desirable width of road land (right of way)
S. Road Open Areas Built-up Area P v2
N. Classification Normal Exceptional Normal Exceptional = e+f =
1. N.H and S.H 24 18 20 18 W gR
(Double Lane) 557. The highest point on road surface is called
2. M.D.R. 18 15 15 12 (a) Crown (b) Camber
3. O.D.R. 15 12 12 9
(c) Gradient (d) Berm
4. V.R. 9 9 9 9
MANIPUR AE PAPER-II 2016
554. In scanty rainfall areas, the camber provided
Ans. (a) : The camber is provided on the straight road
will be
by raising the centre of carriageway with respect to
(a) Flatter (b) Steeper
edge, forming a crown or highest on the central line.
(c) Zero (d) None of the above
MH Nanded Zila Parishad 2014
MANIPUR AE PAPER-II 2016
Ans. (a) : • The term scanty rainfall means very low
or less rainfall.
• A flat camber of 1.7 to 2.0% is sufficient on
relatively pavement surface like wise cement
concrete or bituminous concrete. 558. A camber of 1 in 30 means that for a 30 m wide
• Flatter camber provided for scanty rainfall area. road, the crown of the road will be above the
• Steeper camber are provided in area of heavy edge of the road as
rainfall. (a) 0.5 m (b) 0.75 m
(c) 1 m (d) 1.5 m
• Minimum camber needed to drain off surface water
MANIPUR AE PAPER-II 2016
may be adopted keeping in view the type of
pavement surface and the amount of rainfall in the Ans. (a) :
locality.
555. On kankar road the camber generally provided is
(a) 1 in 24 to 1 in 30 (b) 1 in 30 to 1 in 48
(c) 1 in 48 to 1 in 60 (d) 1 in 60 to 1 in 80
MANIPUR AE PAPER-II 2016
Highway Engineering 555 YCT
 Provide a cross slop of 1 in 30. • On hill roads not bound by snow a maximum
 30  1 superelevation upto 10 percent has been recommended.
Rise of crown with respect to edges =   × • On urban road stretches with frequent intersections, it
 2  30
= 0.5 m may be necessary to limit the maximum superelevations
to 4.0 percent keeping in view the convenience in
559. A vehicle while passing from a straight to a construction and that of turning movement of vehicles.
curved path, is under the influence of the
(a) Weight of vehicle 563. A lateral shift in the transition curve is given
(b) Centrifugal force by :
(c) Gravitational resistance (a) L3/24 R2 (b) L2/24 R
2
(d) Both (a) and (b) (c) L /2.4 R (d) L2/240R
MANIPUR AE PAPER-II 2016 HESCOM AE 2017
Ans. (d) : A vehicle while passing from a straight to a SSC JE 2019 (Evening)
curved path, in order to counteract the effect of Ans. (b) : The lateral shift in transition curve is–
centrifugal force and to reduce the tendency of the  L2s 
vehicle to overturn or skid, the outer edge of pavement S = 
 24R 
is raised with respect to inner edge, thus providing a 
transverse throughout the length of the transition The distance between the transition curve at middle
curve. and the original circular curve is called shift.
P V2 564. The radius of a horizontal circular curve is 100
= = e+f m. The design speed is 50 km/h and the design
w gR
coefficient of lateral friction is 0.15. Determine
where, w = weight of vehicle the rate of super elevation to be provided, if
560. The inward tilt given to the cross -section of the full lateral friction is assumed to develope.
road surface, throughout the length of the (a) 26.4 in 1 (b) 17 in 1
horizontal curve is known as (c) 21.2 in 1 (d) 10.5 in 1
(a) Super elevation (b) Cant SSC JE 25.09.2019 (10 AM) Shift I
(c) Banking (d) All of the above Ans. (c)
MANIPUR AE PAPER-II 2016 Radius of horizontal curve 'R' = 100 m
Ans. (d) : • The inward tilt given to the cross-section Design speed of vehicle 'V' = 50 km/h
of the road surface, throughout the length of the Lateral friction coefficient 'f' = 0.15
horizontal curve is known as super-elevation, cant or So, Rate of super elevation 'e'
banking.
V2
• The super elevation 'e' is expressed as the ratio of the e+f =
height of outer edge with respect to the horizontal 127R
width.  V2 
561. What is the radius of one degree curve? e = −f
 127R 
(a) 1719 m (b) 1769 m
(c) 1619 m (d) 1729 m
e=
( 50 ) − 0.15
2

DFCCIL JE 2018 127 × 100

Ans. (a) 2500
For 30 m e= − 0.15
12700
30 2πR
= e = 0.197− 0.15
D 3600
1
30 × 3600 1718.87 e = 0.047 ⇒ e =
R= = 21.2
2π× D D So, Rate of super elevation is "21.2 in 1"
R = 1719/1
565. The minimum furrow grade to assure surface
R = 1719m
drainage is-
562. What is the maximum superelevation that is (a) 0.02% (b) 0.05%
fixed by Indian Road Congress (IRC) for roads
(c) 0.09% (d) 0.07%
in plain and rolling terrains and in snow bound
SSC JE 2019 (Evening)
areas, taking mixed traffic into consideration?
(a) 7.0% (b) 4.0% Ans. (b) : The slope of the furrow controls the velocity
(c) 5.5% (d) 10.0% of the flow of water in furrow.
SSC JE 25.09.2019 (10 AM) Shift I A minimum furrow slope of 0.05% is needed to ensure
Ans. (a) • Indian Road Congress has fixed the surface drainage.
maximum limit of superelevation in plain and rolling • If the furrow slopes are too less then proper surface
terrains and in snow bound areas as 7.0 percent by drainage may not take place with the result that
taking mixed traffic into consideration. excessive deep percolation losses may occur.

Highway Engineering 556 YCT

 • If the hand slope is steeper than 0.5% then furrows edges, forming a crown or highest point on the center
can be set at an angle to the main slope or even line.
along the contour to keep furrow slopes within the A flat camber of 1.7 to 2.0% is sufficient on
recommended limits. relatively impervious pavement surface like cement
566. Extra widening of pavements provided because concrete or bituminous concrete. Steeper camber are
of off-tracking is known as : also provided in area of heavy rainfall.
(a) Psychological widening
(b) Mechanical widening
(c) Frictional widening
(d) Physical widening 569. The length of a transition curve depends on the
SSC JE 2019 (Evening) rate of change of ..............
Ans. (b) : Mechanical Widening– The widening (a) centrifugal acceleration
required to account for the off-tracking due to the (b) distance
rigidity of wheel base is called mechanical widening (c) speed
(Wm). (d) tangential acceleration
 nℓ2  SSC JE 2019 (Evening)
W =
 m 2R  Ans. (a) : Design of transition curve depend on–
  • Rate of change of radial (or centrifugal acceleration)
R is the mean radius of the curve and n is number of • Rate of change of super elevation
traffic lanes. 1
Psychological Widening– Extra width of pavement is • Empirical formula as per IRC) L S ∝ Length of
R
also provided for psychological reasons such as, to transition curve is also depend on the curvature.
provide for higher speeds to allow for the extra space • Length of transition curve is along the centre line of
requirement for the overhangs of vehicles and to the track from its meeting point with the straight to that
provide greater clearance for crossing and overtaking of the circular curve.
vehicles on curves. • Radius of curve is infinity at the tangent point and
 V  hence centrifugal acceleration is zero. Similarly at the
 Wpsy =  straight end radius of curve has minimum value means
 9.5 R 
V = Design speed in Kmph. centrifugal acceleration is maximum.
R = Radius of horizontal curve, m.  V3 
 LS =
CR 
[0.5 < C∠0.8]
ℓ = Length of wheel base of longest vehicle, m. 
567. The longitudinal coefficient of friction on 570. For stopping sight distance the eye level should
highway for calculation of stopping distance in be at :
geometrical design is : (a) 1.2m (b) 0.75 m
(a) 0.3 to 0.34 (b) 0.35 to 0.4 (c) 1.6m (d) 1.8m
(c) 0.25 to 0.29 (d) 0.5 SSC JE 2019 (Evening)
SSC JE 2019 (Evening) Ans. (a) • IRC has suggested the height of eye level of
Ans. (b) • The frictional resistance developed between driver as 1.2m and the height of the object as 0.15m
road and tyres or the skid resistance depends on the above the road surface.
type and condition of the road surface and the tyres. • IRC has also recommended the value of reaction
The braking distance increases with decrease in skid time t = 2.5 sec. for the calculation of stopping
resistance. distance.
• IRC specified a design friction coefficient of 0.35 to • At vertical summit curves the height of driver's eye
0.4 depending upon the speed to be used for finding and the object above road level are more important
the braking distance in the calculation of stopping sight factors affecting the visibility.
distance. 571. A portion of the roadway, contiguous with the
• Coefficient of lateral friction as 0.15 is useful in travelled way and is intended for
horizontal curve design. accommodation of stopped vehicle is called as :
568. Cross slope given to the pavement for safe (a) Carriageway width (b) Median
drainage of water is : (c) Shoulder (d) Kerb
(a) Shoulder (b) Cant SSC JE 23.09.2019 (Morning)
(c) Camber (d) Kerb Ans. (c) Shoulder– The shoulder is that portion of the
SSC JE 2019 (Evening) roadway contiguous with the travelled way and is
Ans. (c) : Cross slope or camber is the slope provided intended for accommodation of stopped vehicles,
to the road surface in the transverse direction to drain emergency use and lateral support of the pavement
off the rain water from the road surface. courses.
Camber is provided on the straight road by raising • The width of the shoulder should be adequate for
the center of the carriage way with respect to the giving working space around a stopped vehicle.
Highway Engineering 557 YCT
 • Current Indian practice for 2-lane roads suggests a Ans. (d) : Geometric design of highway deals with
shoulder width of 2.5 meters for roads in rural area. following element –
• Kerbs– A kerb is a vertical or sloping member along (i) cross- section element
the edge of a pavement or shoulder to give strength (ii) sight distance consideration
and protect the edge of the pavement. (iii) Horizontal alignment details
572. In a highway an ascending gradient of 1 in 100 (iv) vertical alignment detail
meets with a descending gradient of 1 in 80, (v) Intersection element
determine the deviation angle? (vi) Junction
1 9 575. Setback distance or clearance distance depends
(a) (b)
400 400 on which one of the following factors?
1 9 (a) Sight distance
(c) (d) (b) Radius of horizontal curve
800 800
SSC JE 23.09.2019 (Morning) (c) Length of the curve
(d) All of the above
Ans. (b)
MH WCD 2019
1
Ascending Gradient 'n1' = + MH PWD 2019
100
Ans. (d) : Setback distance – setback distance is the
1
Descending Gradient 'n2' = – distance required from the centre line of a horizontal
80 curve to an abstraction on the inner side of the curve to
provide adequate sight distance to a horizontal curve.
The setback/clearance distance depends on –
(i) Sight distance (OSD, ISD and OSD)
(ii) Radius of the curve
(iii) Length of the curve
• The angle which measures the change of direction at 576. The head light sight distance available at valley
the intersection of two grades is called the deviation curves should be at least how many times of the
angle 'N', which is equal to the algebraic difference stopping sight distance?
between the two grades. (a) 1 (b) 2
N = + n1 – (–n2) (c) 3 (d) 4
[N = n1 + n2] MH WCD 2019
1 1 4+5 MH Nagar Parishad Mains 2018
So, N= + = Ans. (a) : The head light sight distance available at
100 80 400
valley curves should be at least 1 times of the stopping
9
N= sight distance.
400 Head light sight distance should at least equal the safe
573. As per IRC suggestions, the ruling design stopping sight distance.
speeds for national highway passing through 577. Find the length of the vertical curve connecting
plain terrain & rolling terrain respectively are two grades + 0.5% and – 0.3% where rate of
(a) 100 kmph & 80 kmph change of grade is 0.1% per 30m.
(b) 80 kmph & 65 kmph (a) 60 m (b) 180 m
(c) 65 kmph & 50 kmph (c) 240 m (d) 360 m
(d) 120 kmph & 100 kmph MH WCD 2019
MH WCD 2019 Ans. (c) : given g1 = 0.5%, g2 = 0.3% r = 0.1% per
Ans. (a) : As per IRC Recommendation (Speed) 30m.
Type of road Plain Rolling Hilly Steep g − (g 2 )
NH/SH 100-80 80-65 50-40 40-30 Length of vertical curve = 1
r
MDR 80-65 65-50 40-30 30-20
0.5 − (−0.3) 0.8 × 30
ODR 65-50 50-40 30-25 25-20 = = = 240m
VR 50-40 40-35 25-20 25-20 0.1/ 30 0.1
574. Which one of the following elements of 578. On which one of the following factors, sight
highways are considered in geometric design? distance available on a road depends?
(a) Interchanges (a) Feature of the road ahead
(b) Sight distance consideration (b) Height of the driver's eye above the road
(c) Junctions surface
(d) All of the above (c) Height of the object above the road surface
MH PWD 2019 (d) All the other options
MH WCD 2019 MH WCD 2019
Highway Engineering 558 YCT
 Ans. (d) : Factor, sight distance available on a road 583. The minimum overtaking sight distance for the
depends on– (i) feature of the road ahead. design speed of 60 km/hour and one way traffic
(ii) Height of the driver's eye above the road surface. is:
(iii) Height of the object above the road surface. (a) 150m (b) 250m
(iv) Perception time and break reaction time. (c) 320m (d) 450m
(v) Speed of vehicle. MH Nanded Zila Parishad 2014
579. An ideal vertical curve to join two gradients is Ans. (c) : Given,
(a) circular (b) parabolic Design speed (V) = 60 km/hr
(c) elliptical (d) hyperbolic Time (t) = 2 sec.
MH Beed Zila Parishad 2013 Assume, acceleration (a) = 0.7 m/s2
Ans. (b) : Vertical curve– It's curve provided in the OSD = d1 + d2 + d3
vertical plane to obtain the gradual change in grade are Vb = (V – 16) = (60 – 16) = 44 km/hr
called as vertical curve. d1 = 0.278 Vbt = 0.278 × 44 × 2 = 24.464 m
• Provided at intersection of two gradients. 1
d2 = 0.278 VbT + aT2
• Safe transition between two grade 2
• To smoother the vertical profile . 4S
• To ease of the changes from on grade to other. T=
a
• An ideal vertical to join two gradient is parabolic = 9.19 sec
580. The width of national highway as per IRC S = 0.2 Vb + 6 = 14.8 m
recommendation is 1
(a) 15 mtrs (b) 18 mtrs = 0.278 × 44 × 9.19 + × 0.7 × (9.19)2
(c) 10 mtrs (d) 12 mtrs 2
MH Beed Zila Parishad 2013 d3 = 0.278 VcT
= 0.278 × 60 × 9.19 = 153.289 m
Ans. (d) :
OSD = d1 + d2 + d3
Roadway width
road = 319.72 ≃ 320 m
Plain/ rolling Mountainous/
classification 584. The maximum safe speed on roads, depends on
terrain steep terrain
NH/SH- the :
(i) single lane 12m 6.25 m (a) Type of the road surface
(ii) double lane 12m 8.80 m (b) Site distance
MDR– (c) Type of Curves
(i) single lane 9m 4.75 m (d) All the above
(ii) double lane 9m – (Pune MNC 2014)
ODR- Ans. (d) : The maximum safe speed on roads, depends
(i) single lane 7.5 m 4.75 m on –
(ii) double lane 9m – (i) Type of the highway
VR 7.5 m 4m (ii) type of the road surface
581. Formation width of National Highway (iii) Type of curve
according to IRC is: (iv) Sight distance
(a) 16-m (b) 15 m 585. The normal road land width for a National or
(c) 11.5 m (d) None of the above State highway in open areas should be–
WBPSC SAE 2003 (a) 45m (b) 30m
Ans. (d) : Formation width of National Highway (c) 24m (d) 20m
according to IRC is 12m. MH Aurangabad MNC 2019
582. As per IRC standards, which one of the MH PWD Mumbai 2015
following is correct empirical formula for Ans. (a) : Standard value of land width recommended
calculation of length of transition curve (Ls) for by IRC.
plain & rolling terrain? Road Mountainous
Plain/Rolling area
Where, v = design speed (kmph) classification /steep area
R = Radius of curve (m) Normal Range Normal
(a) 2.7 v2/R (b) 3.7 v2/R NH/SH 45m 30-60m 24m
2
(c) 0.7 v /R (d) 1.7 v2/R MDR 25m 25-30m 18m
MH WCD 2019 ODR 15m 15-25m 15m
VR 12m 12-18m 9m
Ans. (a) : According to empirical formula –
Length of transition curve for plain & rolling terrain 586. On earthen roads the camber should
preferably be–
2 2 (a) 1 in 20 to 1 in 24 (b) 1 in 30 to 1 in 48
2.7v v
Ls = For hilly areas L s = (c) 1 in 15 to 1 in 20 (d) 1 in 10 to 1 in 15
R R
MH PWD Mumbai 2015
Highway Engineering 559 YCT
 Ans. (a) : Camber is the transverse slope provided to (c) 9.0m and 9.0m (d) 7.5m and 4.8m
the road surface for the drainage off the rainwater for MH Jalgaon Zila Parishad 2015
the better performance of the road. Ans. (a) :
As per IRC road Roadway width
Camber (%) classification Plain/ Mountainous/
Type of surface Heavy rain Light rain rolling steep terrain
fall fall terrain
(i) Cement concrete or 1 in 50 1 in 60 NH/SH–
thick bitumen surface (2%) (1.7%) (i) single lane 12m 6.25 m
(ii) thin bituminous 1 in 40 1 in 50 (ii) double lane 12m 8.80 m
surface (2.5%) (2%) MDR–
(iii) WBM/Gravel 1 in 33 1 in 40 (i) single lane 9m 4.75 m
pavement (3%) (2.5%) (ii) double lane 9m –
(iv) Earthen 1 in 25 1 in 33 ODR–
(4%) (3%) (i) single lane 7.5 m 4.75 m
587. Roadway width for National Highway (2 lanes) (ii) double lane 9m –
is–--- VR 7.5 m 4m
(a) 12m (b) 9m 591. If the cross slope of a terrain is 20%, according
(c) 9.5m (d) 15m to IRC classification, it is a:
MH PWD Mumbai 2015 (a) Plain terrain (b) Rolling terrain
Ans. (a) : As per IRC (c) Mountainous terrain (d) Steep terrain
Road Roadway width KPSC 2015 Code 143/2015
classification Ans. (b) : If the cross slope of a terrain is 20%,
Plain/ Mountainous/steep according to IRC classification, it is a Rolling terrain.
rolling terrain Rolling terrain– The area of country having cross
terrain slope varying from 10 % to 25 % is known as rolling
NH/SH- terrain.
(i) single lane 12m 6.25 m Plain terrain– The area of country having cross slope
(ii) double lane 12m 8.80 m varying 0% to 10% is known as plain terrain.
MDR– Mountainous terrain– The area of country having
(i) single lane 9m 4.75 m slope varying from 25% to 60% is known as
(ii) double lane 9m – mountainous terrain.
ODR- Steep terrain– The area of country having a cross
(i) single lane 7.5 m 4.75 m slope greater than 60% is called steep terrain.
(ii) double lane 9m – 592. When a terrain is observed with a cross slope
VR 7.5 m 4m varies from 10 to 25%, it is referred as
588. On a hill road, the radius of curve should not (a) Mountain terrain (b) Steep terrain
be less than– (c) Hilly terrain (d) Rolling terrain
(a) 100 m (b) 60 m WBPSC JE 2016
(c) 30 m (d) None of these Ans. (d) : Mountain terrain –25% to 60%
MH Parbhani MNC 2015 Steep terrain – more than 60%
Ans. (d) : On a hill road, the radius of curve should not Rolling terrain – 10 to 25%
be less than 15 m. Plain terrain – upto 10%
In the initial stage of construction of hill road, no curve 593. With which of the following curves are
should have a radius less than 30m different grades usually joined together?
589. The recommended safe co-efficient of friction (a) Vertical (b) Compound
is– (c) Reverse (d) Transition
(a) 1.5 (b) 0.15 DDA JE 23.04.2018 Shift-II
(c) 1/15 (d) None of these Ans. (a) : Vertical curves are used in highway and
MH Parbhani MNC 2015 street to provide a gradual change between two
Ans. (B) : Coefficient of friction– adjacent grade lines.
IRC suggests the co-eff. of longitudinal friction as
0.35–0.40 depending on the speed.
v = 20-30 km/h– 0.40
v = 100 km/h – 0.35
coefficient of lateral friction as 0.15
590. For state highway, width of single lane is
In the figure g1 is the slope (percent) of the lower
recommended for plain and mountaining
station grade line, g2 is the slope of the higher station
terrain is
(a) 12m and 6.25m (b) 12m and 8.8m grade line.

Highway Engineering 560 YCT

594. The central portion of the road of high-speed Ans. (a) : Skid– The distance travelled by revolving
vehicles is known as the wheel of a vehicle more than its circumferential
(a) motorway (b) expressway movement.
(c) shoulder (d) carriageway Along horizontal curves, if centrifugal force exceed
ASSAM PSC JE 27.12.2020 lateral friction vehicles may skid.
Ans. (b) : The central portion of the road for high- 598. The value of ruling gradient in plains as per
speed vehicles is known as expressway. Expressway IRC is :
also called throughway and free way. (a) 1 in 10 (b) 1 in 15
Motorway– A motorway is a major road that has been (c) 1 in 20 (d) 1 in 30
especially built for fast travel over long distance. Assam Power Distribution 2017
Shoulder– The shoulder is a strip of pavement outside Ans. (d) :
an outer line. It is provided for emergency used by → Ruling gradient in plains → 1 in 30
traffic and to protect the pavement edges from traffic → Ruling gradient mount & steep terrain → 1 in 20
damage.
→ Ruling gradient steep terrain up to 3000 m height
Carriageway– A carriageway or roadway consists of a
→ 1 in 16.7
width of road on which a vehicle is not restricted by
any physical barriers or separation to move laterally. 599. Head light sight distance is the distance visible
to a driver during night driving under the
595. IRC recommends that the minimum width of
illumination of headlights. On highways,
single lane pavements is:
(a) 3.66 m (b) 3.75 m headlight sight distance is equal to:
(a) SSD (b) 2SSD
(c) 2.44 m (d) 2.74 m
(c) 3SSD (d) ISD
WBPSC SAE 2002
LMRC AM 2019
Ans. (b) :
Width of Ans. (a) Head light sight distance is equal to stopping
Classification sight distance so that the driver can take its car to rest
carriage way
safely after the application of brakes.
Single lane 3.75 m
Two lanes without Raised kerb 7.0 m 600. On the basis of radial acceleration, the length
Two lanes with raised kerb 7.5 m of the transition curve required for connecting
the circular curve of radius 200 m with radial
596. As per IRC, the maximum width of a vehicle
acceleration of 0.25m/sec3, the designed speed
should be
(a) 2 m (b) 2.44 m being 90km/h
(a) 231.5m (b) 321.5m
(c) 3.8 m (d) 1.58 m
TSPSC HMWSSB Manager 2020 (c) 312.5m (d) 123.5m
ASSAM PSC JE 27.12.2020 LMRC AM 2019
HPSSC JE Code 459/2019 Ans. (c) Radius (R) = 200 m
Odisha JE (Mains) 30.06.2019 C= 0.25 m/sec3
M.P. VYAPAM Sub Engg. 2.9.2018, 2.00 pm Velocity (v) = 90 km/hr
Karnataka PSC JE 2017 on the basis of radial acceleration, length of transition
KPSC JE 9.9.2017
Karnataka PSC JE Code 114/2016 0.0215v3
curve (L) =
Nagaland PSC 2015 Paper-I CR
Punjab JE (Local Govt.) 2014 v = speed for vehicle (in km/hr)
Ans. (b) : As per IRC, the size of vehicle should be in C = Allowable rate for charge of centrifugal
following limit– acceleration in m/sec3
(a) width- 2.44 mm (it affects extra widening) R = Radius of curve in 'm'
(b) Height- 3.8 m (excluding double decker bus) 0.0215 × (90)3
(c) Length- 11 m (single unit truck, excluding front ∴ (L) = = 313.47m ≃ 312.5 m
and rear bumpers) 0.25 × 200
601. Compensation of gradient of curve in highways
• 12 m (single unit bus, excluding front and rear
is calculated as :
bumpers)
(a) (40 + R)/R (b) (30 + R)/R
• 16 m (Truck-tractor, semi-trailer combination) (c) (50 + R)/R (d) (60 + R)/R
• 18 m (Truck Trailer combination) LMRC AM 2019
• Length of vehicle affects the Radius of curves. Ans. (b) Compensation of gradient of curve in highway
• Height of vehicle decides the height of over bridge is calculated as
crossing road. As per IRC,
597. Along horizontal curves if centrifugal force 30 + R 
exceeds lateral friction vehicles may R 
(a) Skid (b) Slip Grade compensation (GC) =  min
75 
(c) Not be affected (d) None of the above
MH Aurangabad MNC 2019 R 

Highway Engineering 561 YCT

602. What will be radius of 3º curve having 20 606. For the required extra widening of the pavement
meter arc length ? at the horizontal curves, usually which of the
(a) 382 m (b) 1146 m following factors are not depended upon?
(c) 764 m (d) 573 m (a) Radius of the curve negotiated
Rajasthan JEn (Diploma) 2020 (b) The number of stokes of the wheel of the
Ans. (a) : arc length = 20 m vehicle
0 (c) The psychological factor which is a function
angle D = 3
of the speed of the vehicle
arc length 2πR
= (d) The length of the wheel base of the vehicle
angle ( D ) 3600 BSPHCL 8.02.2019 Shift-I
20 2 × π × R Ans. (b) : Total widening (w e)
= we = mechanical widening + psychological widening
3 360
nℓ 2 V
R = 381.9718 m ≈ 382 m we = +
603. One degree of curve is equivalent to : 2R 9.5 R
1600 1700 n = Number of lanes
(a) (b) R = Radius of horizontal curve
R R
ℓ = length of wheel base (b)
1750 1800
(c) (d) 608. When an ascending gradient of 1 in 50 meets a
R R
Where R is radius of curve in meter. descending gradient of 1 in 50, the length of
summit curve for a stopping sight distance of
UPSSSC JE 2015 Paper-I
80 m will be
Ans. : (c) Radius and Degree of curve (a) Zero (b) 64 m
1750 (c) 60 m (d) 80 m
D= → if one chain length = 30 m
R JKSSB JE 2013
1146 Ans. (c) :
D= → if one chain length = 20 m Given, SSD = 80 m
R
D = Degree of curve 1  1  2  1 
N= −−  = = 
R = Radius of curve in m 50  50  50  25 
604. The maximum allowable super elevation is : Assuming L > SSD
(a) 1 in 12 (b) 1 in 18 Ns 2 1 802
(c) 1 in 15 (d) 1 in 30 L = = × = 58.18m < SSD
4.4 25 4.4
UPSSSC JE 2015 Paper-I 4.4 4.4
Ans. : (c) If L < SSD, L = 2s − = 2 × 80 −
Maximum value of super elevation =
N (1/ 25)
= 50 m < SSD
So, length of summit curve = 50 m
Nearest option (c) is correct.
609. If the design speed is V kmph and deviation
angle is N radians, then the total length of a
valley curve in meter is expressed as
(a) 3.8 NV1/2 (b) 3.8 (NV3)1/2
3 1/2
605. Which of the following is provided in the (c) 0.38 (NV ) (d) 0.38 NV3/2
transverse direction of the road surface to JKSSB JE 2013
prevent the deterioration of the pavement layer Ans. (c) : Length of valley curve –
1/ 2
by restricting the entry of water into the  NV 3 
bituminous pavement layers? νs = 2  
(a) Guard Rails (b) Camber  C 
(c) Kerbs (d) Shoulder C= 0.6 m/s3
BSPHCL 8.02.2019 Shift-I νs = 0.38 (NV )
3 1/2

Ans. (b) : Cross slope provided in the transverse 610. As compared to levelled surface, stopping sight
direction of the road surface to prevent the distance on descending gradient is
deterioration of the pavement layer by restricting the (a) Concept of sight distance is not applicable on
descending gradient
entry of water into the bituminous pavement layer
(b) More
know as camber. (c) Less
• The required cambers of a pavement depends on– (d) Same
(i) The type of pavement surface. MH WRD 2016
(ii) The amount of rainfall. JKSSB JE 2013
Highway Engineering 562 YCT
 Ans. (b) : Compared to a level surface on a descending Ans. (d) : Type of transition curve–
gradient the stopping sight distance is more. Stopping (i) Cubic parabola
sight distance for ascending and descending gradient – (ii) Lemniscate
v2 (iii) Spiral curve
SSD = 0.278vt + 615. A state highway road is to be constructed with
254(f ± (n /100)) bitumen concrete pavement of width 7 m wide
611. In order to introduce the centrifugal force and and a camber of 1 in 50 is provided. What is
super elevation gradually in the geometric the rise of crown with respect to edges?
design of highways, _______. curves should be (a) 0.05 m (b) 0.06 m
introduced between the straight and circular (c) 0.08 m (d) 0.07 m
curves . SSC JE Civil 28.10.2020 (Evening)
(a) Summit curves (b) Valley curve DSSSB JE 5.11.2019, Morning
(c) Transition curve (d) Vertical curve Ans. (d) : Given,
DSSSB JE 20.11.2019, Morning Width of road = 7 m
DSSSB JE 20.11.2019, Shift II camber (1 : n) = 1 in 50
Ans. (c) :
• In order to introduce the centrifugal force and
super elevation gradually in the geometric design
of highways transition curves should be
introduced between the straight and circular
curves. h
• The geometric property of transition is such that tan θ =
w
the calculations and setting out the curve in the 2
field is simle and easy.
1 h
612. Obligatory points in highway engineering are =
controls points governing the : n w
(a) load points on highway bridges 2
(b) locations to survey vehicles of the highway w
(c) traffic survey of the highway h=
2n
(d) alignment of the highway
DSSSB JE 5.11.2019, Morning rise of crown h = W = 7 = 7
Ans. (d) : Factor controlling the highway 2n 2 × 50 100
alignment– h = 0.07 m
(i) Obligatory point 616. What is the total mechanical widening required
(ii) Horizontal curve and Gradient for a pavement within 7 m, having a horizontal
(iii) Volume of traffic curve of radius 250 m, if the longest wheel base
(iv) Type of traffic of the vehicle expected on the road is 7.0 m ?
• The control points governing highway alignment are (a) 0.662 m (b) 0.196 m
called obligatory point, these point decide where the (c) 0.567 m (d) 0.365 m
alignment should pass and where the alignment should DSSSB JE 5.11.2019, Morning
not pass. Ans. (b) : Given,
613. Select the INCORRECT sight distance in both, Width of road = 7m (2 lane)
the geometric design of highway and traffic l = 7m
control. R = 250
(a) Sight distance for merging two lanes nl 2 2 × 7 × 7
(b) Overtaking sight distance Mechanical widening (Wm) = =
2R 2 × 250
(c) Stopping sight distance
(d) Sight distance for entering into uncontrolled = 0.196 m
intersections 617. A vehicle has a wheel base of 6 m. What is the
DSSSB JE 5.11.2019, Morning off tracking while negotiating a curved path
Ans. (a) : • Overtaking sight distance with a mean radius of 60 m ?
(a) 0.30 m (b) 0.55 m
• Stopping sight distance
(c) 0.50 m (d) 0.65 m
• Sight distance for entering into uncontrolled
DSSSB JE 5.11.2019, Morning
intersections
Ans. (a) : Given,
614. Which of the following in NOT a type of Length of wheel base (l) = 6m
transition curve ? Radius of curve (R) = 60 m
(a) Cubic parabola (b) Lemniscate
l2 6×6
(c) Spiral (d) Quadratic Off tracking = = = 0.3m
DSSSB JE 5.11.2019, Morning 2R 2 × 60

Highway Engineering 563 YCT

618. Which of the following is NOT an element of 622. Braking distance on a level road is given by the
geometrical design of highways ? relation:
(a) Sight distance consideration V
3
V
2

(b) Intersection element (a) (b)

(c) Highway alignment 2gµ 2gµ
(d) Cross-section element V
4
V
5

DSSSB JE 5.11.2019, Morning (c) (d)

2gµ 2gµ
Ans. (*) : Geometric design of highway deals with all
Y = design speed in m/sec.
the dimension and layout of visible feature of highway,
g = acceleration due to gravity
such that it provide max efficiency at minimum cost
µ = coefficient of friction
and reasonable safety. WBPSC SAE 2000
Geometric design of highway deals with following
elements V2
Ans. (b) : Breaking distance =
(A) Cross-sectional elements 2gµ
(B) Sight distance consideration Reaction distance or lag distance = Vt
(C) Horizontal alignment details Stopping sight distance =
(D) Vertical alignment details Lag distance + Braking distance
(E) Intersection details V2
619. The drainage and quick disposal of water from = Vt +
2gµ
the pavement surfaces is achieved by
providing: 623. Pick up the correct statement from the
(a) side drains (b) kerb following :
(c) super elevation (d) camber (a) Hill roads are provided camber along spur
curves
DSSSB JE 5.11.2019, Morning
(b) Hill roads are provided camber along valley
Ans. (d) : The drainage and quick disposal of water curves
from the pavement surface is achieved by providing (c) Hill roads are seldom provided a camber
camber. It is the cross-slope providing transverse (d) None of the above
direction of road. WBPSC SAE 2000
620. Curve which changes the alignment of road Ans. (c) : Camber for hill road–
from downhill to uphill is called as ______. • Steeper cross-slope as camber is adopted for hill
(a) Sag curve (b) Summit curve roads and recommended value are given below–
(c) Transition curve (d) Reverse curve Type of surface Camber (%)
DSSSB JE 23.10.2019, Shift-II Subgrade, earth road and 3 to 4
Ans. (b) Summit curve– Summit curves with shoulder
convexity upward are formed. Gravel and WBM 2.5 to 3
• When a vehicle travels along a summit curve. The Bituminous surfacing 2.5
centrifugal forces will act upwards against gravity and High type bituminous and CC 2.0
hence a part of the pressure on the tyres and spring of • In case of hill road seldom provide a camber when
necessary.
the vehicle suspensions is relieved.
Valley curve – convexity downward 624. IRC recommendation for safe stopping sight
distance for hill roads in metres for 20 km/hr.
621. A short road which is closed off at one end is
speed is:
known as ________.
(a) 30 (b) 25
(a) Cul-de-sac (b) City blocks
(c) 20 (d) 10
(c) Green belt (d) Focal point
WBPSC SAE 2003
DSSSB JE 23.10.2019, Shift-II
Ans. (c) : Stopping sight distance for hill road
Ans. (a)
V2
• A dead end, also known as a cul-de-sac, no through SSD = 0.278 Vt +
road or no exit road, is a street with only one inlet or 254f
outlet. 202
SSD = 0.278 × 20 × 2.5 +
• A city block, residential block, urban block or 254 × 0.35
simply block is a central element of urban planning SSD = 18.34 ≈ 20 m
and urban design. 625. The radius of curvature provided along a
• A green belt is a policy and land use zone transition curve is
designation used in land use planning to retain area (a) Minimum at the beginning
of largely undeveloped, wild or agricultural land (b) Equal throughout its length
surrounding or neighboring urban area. (c) Equal to the radius of circular curve
Highway Engineering 564 YCT
 (d) Varying from infinity to the radius of circular Ans. (c) :
curve.
Types of camber Camber
WBPSC JE 2009
Heavy Light
WBPSC SAE 2003
rainfall rainfall
Ans. (d) : A transition curve has a radius which
Cement concrete or 2% 1.70%
decrease from infinity at the tangent point to a
thick bituminous
designed radius of circular curve. When a transition
surface
curve is introduced between a straight and circular
Thin
curve, the radius of the transition curve decreases and bituminous 2.5% 2%
become minimum at the beginning of the circular surface
curve. WBM 3% 2.5%
Earthen road 4% 3%
629. The drains provided higher up on the hill slope
side to intercept run off from the hill is known
as:
(a) cross drain (b) longitudinal drain
(c) catch water drain (d) side drain
WBPSC SAE 2001
R → Radius of circular curve. Ans. (c) : The drains provided higher up on the hill
slope side to intercept run off from the hill known as
626. On a pavement with parabolic camber, the
catch water drain.
angle of inclination of the vehicles will be:
Side drains– These drains are also provided parallel to
(a) more at the crown
the roadway fro plain regin.
(b) less at the edges
(c) more at the edges
(d) Same at the edges as well as at the crown
WBPSC SAE 2001
Ans. (c) :

630. The suitable gradient, within which an

Engineer must endeavour to design the road is
called:
(a) limiting gradient (b) average gradient
• On a pavement with parabolic camber the angle of (c) fixed gradient (d) ruling gradient
inclination of the vehicle will be more at edge than MPPEB SE/Draftsman 4.4.2016, Morning
crown because slope of parabola more at edge than WBPSC SAE 2001
crown. Ans. (d) : Ruling gradient–
627. The pavement width of a road depends upon: • It is the max gradient designs attempts to design the
(a) terrain (b) type of traffic vertical profile of the road.
(c) number of lanes (d) the material used Limiting gradient–
WBPSC SAE 2001 • Whenever topography of a place to adopt steeper
Ans. (c) : The pavement or carriage width depends on gradient than rolling gradient, it can be extended up to
the width of traffic lane and numbers of lanes. The limiting gradient.
carriageway intended for one line of traffic movement Minimum gradient–
may be called as traffic lane, the lane width is • The minimum gradient to be provided from drainage
determined on the basis of the width of vehicle and the point of view in order to allow gravity flow of water
minimum side clearance which may be provided for inside the drainage system.
the safety. 631. The camber provided on a road is 1:35 for a
628. As per recommendation of I.R.C. the amount width of 7 m, the difference of level across the
of camber in case of earth road is: road proper is:
(a) 2.5 to 30% (b) 2 to 2.5% (a) 50 mm (b) 200 mm
(c) 3 to 4% (d) 1.7 to 2% (c) 100 mm (d) 150 mm
WBPSC SAE 2001 WBPSC SAE 2001
Highway Engineering 565 YCT
 Ans. (c) : 635. In the single lane roads where two-way
movement of traffic is permitted, the
mimimum stopping sight distance should be
___time the stopping distance.
(a) two times (b) three times
(c) fore times (d) None of the above
GSSSB ITI Supervisor 27.03.2016
7 1 Ans. (a) : Stopping sight distance–
difference of level = × = 0.1m = 100 mm
2 35 • The minimum sight distance available on a highway
632. The permissible speed as recommended by IRC at any spot should be sufficient length to stop a vehicle
for National highways on flat surfaces is: travelling at design speed, safety without collision with
(a) Not to exceed 100 km/hour any other obstruction.
(b) Not to exceed 80 km/hour • It is also called non-passing sight distance.
(c) Not to exceed 60 km/hour • For the purpose of measuring the stopping sight
(d) Not to exceed 40 km/hour distance as visibility ahead, IRC has suggested the
WBPSC SAE 2002 height of eye level of driver as 1.2 m above the road
Ans. (a) : The topography or terrain condition surface.
influence the design speed that in turn govern the
v2
designing of highway element. For example in plain SSD = vt +
terrain on NH and SH permissible design speed 100 2g ( f ± n )
kmph whereas the same speed on rolling terrain is • Single lane roads on which two way traffic is
permitted to 80 kmph and on mountainous terrain is 50 permitted, stopping sight distance is two times the
kmph. minimum stopping distance to stop both vehicle
633. On a highway the length of the road a head of coming from opposite direction.
the vehicle which is visible to the driver is
636. It is defined as the total rise or fall between any
called:
two points chosen on the alignment divided by
(a) Drivers visionary distance
(b) Road distance ahead of the driver the horizontal distance between two points
(c) Sight distance (a) Ruling gradient (b) Variable gradient
(d) Changed distance (c) Exceptional gradient (d) Average gradient
WBPSC SAE 2002 MH PWD 2016
MPPEB SE/Draftsman 4.4.2016, Morning
Ans. (c) : On a highway the length of the road a head
of the vehicle which is visible to the driver is called Ans. (d) Average gradient– The total rate of rising as
sight distance. fall between any two points along the alignment of the
634. Co-efficient of friction is the ratio of : road divided by the horizontal distance between two
(A) Force of friction to normal reaction between points known as an average gradient.
two bodies : Ruling gradient– It is the max gradient with which
(B) Force of limiting friction to reaction between designs attempt in design the vertical profile of the
two bodies : load. It is used in design.
(C) Force of friction to reaction between two Terrain Ruling gradient
bodies : Plain/Rolling 3.3%
(D) Force of limiting friction to normal reaction Hilly 5%
between two bodies : Steep 6%
NLCGET 24-11-2020 637. The rise given to the centre way with reference
MPPEB SE/Draftsman 4.4.2016, Morning to its edge is called as
Ans. (d)–Coefficient of friction is the ratio of force of (a) Shoulder width (b) Camber
limiting friction and normal reaction between to bodies. (c) Carriage way (d) Road way width
Ff = µN MPPEB SE/Draftsman 4.4.2016, Morning
Ff = limiting friction force Ans. (b)–On straight road camber is provided by
µ = Coefficient of friction raising the control line of the carriageway with respect
N = Normal force between surface to the edge forming the crown on the highest along the
central line.
• At horizontal with super elevation, the surface
drainage is provided by raising the outer edge.

Highway Engineering 566 YCT

638. The minimum length of overtaking zone should Ans. (c) : When, Lc > S, the formula for setback
be____ times the safe overtaking sight distance. distance is
(a) three (b) two α
(c) four (d) five M = R – (R-d)cos  
2
ESIC 2019
180S
Ans. (a) It is desirable to construct highway in such a Where α =
way that the length of road visible a head at every point π(R − d)
is sufficient for safe overtaking. This is seldom S is the stopping sight distance (SSD)
practicable and these may be stretches where the safe D is the distance between centre line of road an the
overtaking distance can not be provided. centre line of the inside lane Lc is the length of the
In such zones where overtaking and passing is not safe curve.
or is not possible, sign ports should be installed However, this formula is difficult in calculating so
indicating "No passing" as "Overtaking prohibited" approximate equation can be formulates by assuming
before such restricted zones starts, but the overtaking that the length of chord is equal to SSD.
opportunity for vehicle moving design speed should be Given, M = 10m, S = 80m
given at frequent interval. These zones which are meant Radius of curve
for overtaking are called overtaking zones. M S2
R= +
2 8M
10 80 × 80
R= +
2 8 × 10
R = 85 m
Nearest option (c) is correct
642. As per IRC the camber on cement concrete
639. The stopping sight distance is 110 m, then road should
intermediate sight distance will be: (a) 1 in 60 to 72 (b) 1 in 45 to 60
(a) 150 m (b) 250 m (c) 1 in 20 to 24 (d) 1 in 12 to 16
(c) 220 m (d) 200 m HPSSC JE Code 463/2018
MP Sub Engineer 2020 Ans. (b) : Cross slope provided on cement concrete
Ans. (c) : Intermediate sight distance = 2 × stopping road are 1 in 50 and 1 in 60. For heavy and light
sight distance rainfall respectively.
= 2 × 110 = 220 m Note–
Head light sight distance = stopping sight distance • The cross slope of shoulder should be kept more than
640. A non-circular curve of varying radius that of pavement, so as to avoid accumulation of water
introduced between a straight and a circular at junction of two.
curve for the purpose of giving easy changes of • Cross slope of shoulder should be 0.5% more than
direction of a route is called a _______ curve cross slope of adjoining pavement having minimum
which can be used between two branches of a value of 3% and max. value of 50%
compound or reverse curve. 5% ≮ CSshoulder = 0.5% + CSpavement ≮ 3%
(a) transition (b) Temporary 643. For pair of circular arcs used to form reverse
(c) change (d) traverse or serpentine curve,
MP Sub Engineer 2020 (a) Radii may be same or different
Ans. (a) : Transition curve is a curve in plan which is (b) There shall be a common point of tangency
provided to change the horizontal alignment from (c) Centre must be on opposite side of the
straight to circular curve gradually means the radius of common tangent
transition curve varies between infinity to R or R to (d) All of these.
infinity. NWRD SHIFT I, 25.11.2016
641. Assuming the safe stooping sight distance to be NWRD (Shift-II) 25.11.2016
80 m on a flat highway section and with a set Ans. (d) : A reverse or serpentine curve is made up of
back distance of 10 m. What would be the two are having equal or different radii bending in
radius of the negotiable horizontal curve? opposite direction with a common tangent at their
(a) 800 m (b) 160 m junction. Their centers lie on opposite sides of the
(c) 80 m (d) 70 m curve. Reverse curves are used when the straights are
HPSSC JE Code 463/2018 parallels or intersect at a very small angle.

Highway Engineering 567 YCT

644. If super elevation is not provided on a 648. The expression for the length of a transition
horizontal curve of a highway, then on which curve (L) in metres is
portion of the road are pot holes likely to V3 V3
develop? (a) L = (b) L =
(a) outer edge of road (b) inner edge of road CR 16CR
(c) centre of road (d) shoulder of road V3 V3
(c) L = (d) L =
JPSC AE Paper-II 10.04.2021 24CR 48CR
HPSSC JE Code 463/2018 Where
[ESE-2010] C = Rate of change of radial acceleration in m/s3
Ans. (a) : Pot holes- R = Radius of circular curve in metres, and
• In the absence of super elevation on the road along V = Speed of the vehicle in kmph.
curves, potholes are likely to occur at the outer GSSSB Municipal Engineer 8.10.2017
edge of the road. Ans. (d) : Length of Transition curve–
• The Indian Road Congress (IRC) has prescribed V3
the maximum value of super elevation is 1 in 15. L=
CR
645. A vehicle travelling on dry, level pavement at
3
80 km/hr. had the brakes applied. The vehicle 5 3
travelled 80 m before stopping. The coefficient   V
L= 
18
of friction that will be developed:
(a) 0.325 (b) 0.315 CR
(c) 0.345 (d) 0.355 V3 V3
HPSSC JE Code 463/2018 L= ≃
46.66 CR 48CR
Ans. (b) : Given,
SSD = 80 u = m/sec
V = 80 kmph V = kmph
C = m/sec3
V2 R=m
SSD =
254f 649. The slope on the road surface generally
802 provided on the curves is known as
80 = (a) angle of friction (b) angle of repose
254 × f
(c) angle of banking (d) none of these
80 2 NBCC JE 2018
f=
80 × 254 Ans. (c) Ranking of roads is defined as the phenomenon
f = 0.315 in which the edges are raised for the curved roads above
646. The steepest gradient in ordinary condition the inner edge to provide the necessary centripetal force
should not exceed: to the vehicle so that they take safe turn. The angle at
(a) Ruling gradient (b) Maximum gradient which the vehicle is inclined is defined as the angle of
(c) Exceptional gradient (d) Floating gradient banking.
HPSSC JE Code 463/2018
Ans. (b) : Steepest gradient in ordinary condition
should not be greater than maximum gradient.
647. The reason for providing curves on a highways 650. For plain or rolling terrain, exceptional
is gradient is
(a) To provide access to a particular locality (a) 1 in 30 (b) 1 in 20
(b) Restriction imposed by some unavoidable (c) 1 in 40 (d) 1 in 15
reasons of land HPSSC JE 396/2018
(c) Preservation of existing amenities Ans. (d) :
(d) All of the above Terrain Ruling Limiting exceptional
GSSSB Municipal Engineer 8.10.2017 gradient gradient gradient
Ans. (d) : A curve is nothing but an arc which connect Plain and 3.3% 5% 6.7%
two straight lines which are separated by some angle rolling
called deflection angle. This situation occur where the Mountainous 5% 6% 7%
alignment of a roadway changes its direction because Steep 6% 7% 8%
of unavoidable object or conditions, the object may be 651. The shoulder provided along the road edge
a hill or a lake or a temple etc. should be
• Reason for providing curve on a highway- (a) Rougher than the traffic lanes
(i) To provide access to a particular locality (b) Smoother than the traffic lanes
(ii) Restriction imposed by some unavoidable reasons (c) Of same colour as that of the pavement
of land (d) Of very low load bearing capacity
(iii) Preservation of existing amenities. JKSSB JE 2013
Highway Engineering 568 YCT
Ans. (a) :
• The surface of shoulder may be rougher than the
traffic lanes so as to discourage the vehicle to fly
over it.
• The minimum shoulder width as per IRC 2.5 m.
652. While designing super-elevation for mixed
traffic conditions, the speed gets reduced by
(a) 25% (b) 2%
(c) 15% (d) 1%
JKSSB JE 2013
Ans. (a) : For calculating super elevation for mixed Shapes of cross slope
traffic condition, velocity reduced to 25%. 655. in PIEV theory, P stands for-
V = 0.75V (a) Probability (b) Perception
V2 (c) Projection (d) Prediction
e+f=
127R HSSC JE 9.4.2018 Shift-I
( 0.75 ) V 2
2
Ans. (b) PIEV Theory
e= (f = 0) According to theory the total reaction time of driver is
127 R
split into four parts-
V2 (i) P = Perception
e= (use while designing)
225 R (ii) I = Intellection
(iii) E = Emotion
653. The stopping sight distance for traffic control
on highways depends on total reaction time of (iv) V = Volition
the driver. This time is best explained by 656. The curve has two simple curves at opposite
"PIEV" theory. Here E stands for direction is
(a) Emotion (b) Exertion (a) Summit Curve (b) Simple Curve
(c) Erection (d) Eviction (c) Compound Curve (d) Reverse Curve
BSPHCL29.01.2019 Shift-II HSSC JE 9.4.2018 Shift-I
Ans. (a) : PIEV Theory– Ans. (d) : Reverse curve–
• According to this theory the total reaction time of A reverse curve consists of two simple curves of
devices is split into four parts opposite direction that join at the common tangent
(i) Perception (P) point called the point of reverse curve.
(ii) Intellection (I)
(iii) Emotion (E)
(iv) Volition (V)
654. From the following shapes, which shapes, is not
preferable in camber?
(a) Parabolic shape
(b) Round shape
(c) Combination of straight and parabolic shape
(d) Straight line camber
HSSC JE 10.4.2018 Shift-I
Reverse curve
Ans. (b) : Camber of cross slope–
657. Which force is acting of vehicle during
• Transverse slope provided to the road to drain off
turning?
rain water from road surface is known as camber.
It is measured in 1 in 'n' or n% (e.g 1 in 50 or 2%). (a) Gravity (b) Centrifugal
Main advantage of providing camber are quick drying (c) Friction (d) Water Pressure
of pavement which in turn increases safety and HSSC JE 9.4.2018 Shift-I
subgrade protection by drainage. Ans. (b) Centrifugal force is action of vehicle during
• Camber may be provided in the shape of parabolic, turning.
elliptic or straight line shape. Suppose a vehicle of mass 'm' moves on a curve of
radius 'R' with a speed of 'V', then the centrifugal force
'P' acting on the vehicle is
mV 2 WV 2  W
P= = ∵ m =
R gR  g

Highway Engineering 569 YCT

658. As per IRC: 73-1980 (Rural Highways), the 661. The shape of the vertical curve is generally a
Roadway width of the Major District Roads, (a) Parabola (b) Circle
for single lane and two lane roads in plain and (c) Hyperbola (d) Spiral
rolling terrain shall be Mizoram PSC 26.03.2010 Paper-II
(a) 9 m (b) 7 m Ans. (a) : Vertical curves provides a mean to smoothly
(c) 6 m (d) 12 m shift from one tangent grade to another. They are
BSPHCL29.01.2019 Shift-II usually parabolic in shape.
Ans. (a) : As per IRC : 73-1980, 662. The convexity is provided to the carriage way
Width of roadway for single-lane and two-lane roads between the crown and the edge of the
in plain and rolling terrain pavement, is known as
S.N Road classification Roadway width (a) camber
(meters) (b) super-elevation
1. National Highway and state 12.0 (c) height of the pavement
Highways (d) none of the above
2. Major district roads (single 9.0 Assam PSC AE (PRD) 2020
or two lanes) APPSC AE 2004 Paper-II
Mizoram PSC 26.03.2010 Paper-II
3. Other District Roads
(i) Single lane 7.5 Ans. (a) : The convexity is provided to the carriage
(ii) Two lane 9.0 way between the crown and the edge of the pavement,
4. Village Roads (Single lane) 7.5 is known as camber.
Road are not flat but are designed and constructed to
659. The stopping sight distance for traffic control
assist in the drainage of water.
on highways depends on total reaction time of
the driver. This time is best explained by 663. On the recommendation of Indian Road
"PIEV" theory. Here V stands for Congress, the ruling gradient in plains, is
(a) Volition time (b) Violation time (a) 1 in 10 (b) 1 in 15
(c) Vulnerable time (d) Velocity time (c) 1 in 20 (d) 1 in 30
BSPHCL29.01.2019 Shift-I Mizoram PSC 26.03.2010 Paper-II
Ans. (a) : PIEV Theory Ans. (d) :
According to theory the total reaction time of driver is S. Gradient
No. Ruling Limiting Exceptional
split into four parts-
1. Plain or Rolling 1 : 30 1 : 20 1 : 15
(i) P = Perception
2. Mountains and 1 : 20 1 : 16.7 1 : 14.3
(ii) I = Intellection steel terrain with
(iii) E = Emotion 3. Elevation more 1 : 16.7 1 : 14.3 1 : 12.7
(iv) V = Volition than 3000 m
• The final decision sent by the brain to the muscle and 664. The following sectional view of road represents
this actual act of taking a decision to produce action is
done through volition time.
660. In the geometric design of highways, a type of
vertical curve used to connect two gradients
forming a convex curve is known as
(a) Sag curve (b) Summit curve
(c) Hyperbolic curve (d) Straight curve
BSPHCL29.01.2019 Shift-I (a) national highway (b) major district road
Ans. (b) : Summit curve- (c) other district road (d) village road
A summit curve is a vertical curve with convexity Mizoram PSC 26.03.2010 Paper-II
upward or concavity downward, this occur when an
Ans. (b) : The following sectional view of road
ascending gradient intersects a descending gradient or
represents major district road.
when an ascending gradient meets another ascending
gradient or an ascending gradient meets an another 665. Exceptional gradient should not be provided
descending gradient as shown in figure. for along stretch and should be separated by
flatter gradient after a length which should not
exceed
(a) Express way (b) Carriage way
(c) Shoulder (d) All the above
WBPSC SAE 2000
Ans. (b) : Gradient Should not be provided along
stretch and should be separated by flatter gradient after
a length which should not exceed is known as carriage
way. A carriage way on roadway consists of a width of
road on which a vehicle is not restricted.
Highway Engineering 570 YCT
666. The full width of land acquired for Ans. (b) : As per I.R.C 73-1980 and clause no. 9.6.3
construction of highway is known as (table (18). Widening of single lane road is necessary for
(a) Width of formation (b) Carriage way radius of curvature beyond is (61-100) m.
(c) Right of way (d) Road way 670. The equilibrium superelevation to be provided
WBPSC SAE 2000 to maintain equal pressure on inner and outer
Ans. (c) : Right of way– wheels of a vehicle at a curve of radius 150 m
Right of way is the land required to accommodate the and a speed of 55 kmph is (assume f = 0.150
road along its alignment. and h = 0.15 m)
(a) 0.158 (b) 0
The width of this acquired land is known as land width (c) 0.150 (d) 0.008
and it depends on the importance of the road and its Haryana PSC AE 2020 Paper-II
future development. Ans. (a) : Super elevation
The right of way should be adequate to accommodate
V2
all the element that make up the cross-section of the e+f =
highway. 127R
667. If the difference in elevation of an edge of the For equilibrium super elevation, f = 0
2
pavement 9 m wide and its crown is 15 cm, the V
e=
camber of the pavement is 127R
(a) 1 in 60 (b) 1 in 45 552
(c) 1 in 30 (d) 1 in 15 e= = 0.158
GSSSB ITI Supervisor 27.03.2016 127 ×150
KMC 2007 671. Assuming the reaction time for a speed of 80
km per hour as 2.5 second then the reaction
WBPSC SAE 2000
distance
Ans. (c) : Given, (a) 56m (b) 46m
Pavement width = 9 m (c) 36m (d) 200m
Crown = 15 cm MH Aurangabad MNC 2019
Ans. (a) : v = 80 km/hr. or 22.22m/sec
reaction distance = v×t
rt = 22.22 × 2.5 = 56 m.
15 cm 672. The design variables for traffic rotaries are
Camber = parameters of.
4.5 m (a) approach road (b) central island
15 cm (c) exit road (d) weaving section
= Haryana PSC AE 2020 Paper-II
450 cm
Ans. (d) : Design variable for traffic rotaries are
1 • weaving section
= = 1: 30
30 • radius of rotary
668. IRC recommend camber for WBM Road to • design speed
have nearly between • capacity of rotary
(a) 1.85%-1.25% (b) 3.00%-2.10% 673. On a hill road with a ruling gradient of 6.5% a
(c) 1.25%-1.70% (d) 4.17%-3.33% horizontal curve of radius 70 m needs to be
WBPSC SAE 2000 provided. The compensated gradient at the
Ans. (b) : curve is .
(a) 1.07% (b) 5.43%
Range of camber
(c) 6.12% (d) 3.43%
SN Types of road Heavy Light Haryana PSC AE 2020 Paper-II
rainfall rainfall Ans. (b) : Grade compensation (ac)
1. Concrete road 1 in 50 (2%) 1 in 60 (1.7%)
 30 + R   75  
2. Bituminous road 1 in 40 (2.5) 1 in 50 (2%) = min   %,  %  
3. W.B.M or Gravel 1 in 33 (3%) 1 in 40 (2.5%)  R   R  
Road  30 + 70   75  
= min   %,  %  
4. Earthen Road 1 in 25 (4%) 1 in 33 (3%)  70   70  
669. As per IRC no widening of single lane road is = min {1.42 %, 1.07%}
necessary for radius of curvature beyond GC = 1.07%
(a) 41 m - 60 m (b) 61 m - 100 m Compensated gradient = Rulling gradient – Grade
(c) 101 m - 150 m (d) 151 m and above compensation
WBPSC SAE 2000 = 6.5 – 1.07 = 5.43 %
Highway Engineering 571 YCT
674. The allowable rate of change of centrifugal 677. Longitudinal slope of a road is also known as–
acceleration for a highway with a design speed (a) camber (b) embankment
value of 70 km/hr is . (c) cut off (d) gradient
(a) 0.81 (b) 0.50 MH Nashik ZP 2014
(c) 0.67 (d) 0.55 KPSC JE Code 30/2014
Haryana PSC AE 2020 Paper-II Ans. (d) : Gradient– It is define as the rate of rising or
fall along the length of the road with respect to the
Ans. (d) : Allowable rate of change of centrifugal
horizontal is known as gradient of road.
acceleration in m/sec3.
Gradient of a road depend on –
 80  • Nature of traffic
C = 75 + V  • Nature of ground
 
V = Speed of vehicle (kmph) • Rainfall of the locality
80 678. The rate of rise or fall of a road along its
C= = 0.55 alignment is known as–
75 + 70 Mizoram PSC Disaster Mgmt. 2015, Paper III
675. When the centrifugal ratio attains a value MH Parbhani MNC 2015
equal to the coefficient of lateral friction, there Or
is a danger of ________. The Rate of rise or fall of the road surface
(a) overturning along its length is called–
(b) lateral skidding (a) Cant (b) Super elevation
(c) slipping (c) gradient (d) banks
(d) longitudinal skidding HPSSC JE Code 459/2019
Haryana SSC JE 13.04.2018, Afternoon
Haryana PSC AE 2020 Paper-II
GSSSB Surveyor 2016
MP VYAPAM Sub Engg. 9.07.2017, 9.00 am MH MSEB 2016
Ans. (b) : Impact factor or centrifugal ratio Ans. (c) : Gradient– If is defined as change in
P mv 2 elevation of the road along the length as may be
= = defined as rise or fall along the length of road w.r.t.
W Rmg
2
horizontal.
V
= It can be represented as follows.
Rg
Where,
P = centrifugal force
W = Weight of the vehicles
V2
• To prevent transverse/lateral friction f ≥ (a) 1 in x
Rg
1
b V2 (b) × 100%
• To prevent overturning about wheel ≥ x
2h gR (c) tan α
676. The max design gradient for vertical profile of 679. The rise of the carriage way at the outer edge is
a road is: termed as
(a) Ruling gradient (b) Limiting gradient (a) gradient (b) super-elevation
(c) Exceptional gradient (d) Minimum gradient (c) camber (d) transition curve
Kerala PSC Poly. Lect 2016
Kerala PSC Poly. Lect 2016 TNPSC JE/Supervisor 2012
Ans. (a) : Ruling gradient – It is the max – gradient Ans. (b) : Super elevation–Super elevation is the
with which designer attempts to design the vertical transverse slope provided to counteract the effect of
profile of the road. centrifugal force and reduce the tendency of vehicle to
Limiting Gradient – It is to be adopted when ruling overturn and to skid laterally outwards by raising the
gradient results in very high increase in cost of pavement outer edge with respect to inner edge. Super
construction due to cutting and filling generally used in elevation is represented by "e". It is also called cant or
deep valley areas. banking.
Exceptional gradient – These are given of Formula–
unavoidable situations. They are limited to a stretch of
V2
100m in a single run. e+f =
Minimum gradient – It is provided for drainage 127R
purpose. Where, e = super elevation, in meter
For concrete drain it is 1 in 500 V = Vehicle speed, kilometer per hour
For open soil drains its 1 in 200 R = Radius of the curve in meter.
Highway Engineering 572 YCT
680. The stopping sight distance of a vehicle moving B- Bridges
with a speed of 50 kmph in a two lane road is Clear width of
_______ m if the reaction time of driver is 2.3 carriageway on
sec and coefficient of longitudinal friction is road bridges in
0.38. meters
(a) 57.87 (b) 35.65 Single lane bridges 3.75
(c) 48.32 (d) 12.43 Two lane bridges 7.5
Karnataka PSC JE Code 126/2018 Bridges on divided highways 7.5 for two lane
KPSC JE 13.11.2016 with four lane dual carriageway
carriageway (2 lanes on either
V2 side of the central dividing
Ans. (a) : 0.278Vt +
254f verge)
502 683. On hill road located 3000 m above MSL, ruling
= 0.278 × 50 × 2.3 + gradient is
254 × 0.38
(a) 4% (b) 5%
= 31.97 + 25
(c) 6% (d) 7%
= 57.87 m J & K PSC AE 2009
681. Horizontal curves on highways are provided to Ans. (b) : Gradients for different terrain–
give
S.N. Terrain Type Ruling Limiting
(a) High speed for vehicles
gradient gradient
(b) Restrict speed of vehicles
(%) (%)
(c) Gradual change in gradient
1. Plain 3.3 5
(d) Gradual change in direction
(1 in 30) (1 in 20)
Karnataka PSC JE Code 126/2018
2. Rolling 3.3 5
KPSC JE 13.11.2016 (1 in 30) (1 in 20)
Ans. (d) : Horizontal transition curve– Transition 3. Mountainous 5 6
curve is provided to change the horizontal alignment (1 in 20) (1 in 16.7)
from straight to circular curve gradually and has a 4. Steep
radius which decrease from infinity at the tangent point (i) Upto 3000m 5 6
to the designed radius of the circular curve at the other height above mean (1 in 20) (1 in 16.7)
end (curve point). sea level
682. What is the carriageway width of two lanes (ii) Above 3000m 6 7
road over bridge height above mean (1 in 16.7) (1 in 14.3)
(a) 0.8 m (b) 7.0 m sea level
(c) 7.5 m (d) 8.5 m 684. What would be the safe stopping sight distance
J & K PSC AE 2009 for a design speed of 50 km/h in two way traffic
Ans. (c) : The width of carriageway for various classes on the two lane road if the lag distance is 30 m
of roads and braking distance is 60 m ?
A- Roads (a) 30 m (b) 45 m
(c) 60 m (d) 90 m
Class of Width of carriageway in meters
HPSSC JE Code 386/2018
roads Single Two Two Multi-lane
lane lanes lanes pavements Ans. (d) : SSD = lag distance + Braking distance
= 30m + 60m
without with per lane
= 90m
raised raised
kerbs kerbs 685. Rate of super-elevation, for a horizontal curve
National 3.75 7.0 7.5 3.5 of radius 100 m and design speed of 15 km/h, is
(a) 0.015 (b) 0.01
and state
(c) 0.02 (d) 0.1
highways
HPSSC JE Code 386/2018
Major 3.75
Ans. (b) : Given,
district
R = 100m
roads
V = 15 kmph
Other 3.75
V2
district e=
roads 225R
Village 3.75 152
= = 0.01
roads 225 ×100

Highway Engineering 573 YCT

686. The ruling gradient in a hill road is 6%, and a (d) lower edge towards the upper edge
horizontal curve is provided for a radius of 75 KMC 2009
metres. The compensated gradient of the road Ans. (d) : In highway construction on super-elevated
will be curves, the rolling proceed from lower edge towards
(a) 3% (b) 4% the upper edge.
(c) 5% (d) 6% 690. An exceptional grade of 1 in 12.5 may be
HPSSC JE Code 386/2018 provided along the steep terrain of a hill road
Ans. (c) : over a length not exceeding
Compensated gradient (a) 150 m at a stretch
= Gradient – grade compensation (b) 100 m at a stretch
 30 + R 75  (c) 60 m at a stretch
Grade compensation = minimum  , % (d) 45 m at a stretch
 R R
KMC 2009
(R) Radius of curve = 75 m
Ans. (b) : An exceptional grade of 1 in 12.5 may be
 30 + 75 75  provided along the steep terrain of a hill road over a
Grade compensation = minimum  , %
 75 75  length not exceeding 100 m at a stretch.
= minimum [1.41,1] % 691. As per IRC super elevation should be
calculated by the formula
Grade compensation = 1% (a) e = v2/ 225 R-f
Compensated gradient = 6 – 1 = 5% (b) e = v2/225 R
687. Grade compensation on hill road means (c) e = v2/127 R
(a) increase of gradient at steep places (d) e = v2 (127R-f)
(b) decrease of gradient at horizontal curve When e = super elevation, V-design speed in
(c) decrease of gradient at vertical curve km/hr, f-coefficient of friction between tyre
(d) increase of gradient at hair pin bend and road surface, R = radius of horizontal
KMC 2009 curve in meters
Ans. (b) : Grade compensation on hill roads means KMC 2009
decrease of gradient at horizontal curve. Ans. (b) : As per IRC super elevation should be
 30 + R 75  calculated by the formula-
Grade compensation =  ,  %minimum
 R R v2
e= V = (in kmph)
225R
R = Radius in (m)
Final compensated ≮ 4%. 692. When an upgradient on a highway meets a
steeper upgradient, the vertical curve provided
is known as
688. Effect of grade on safe overtaking sight (a) valley curve (b) sag curve
distance is (c) compound curve (d) summit curve
(a) To increase it on descending grades and to KMC 2009
decrease it on ascending grades Ans. (a & b) : Valley curve or sag forms when an
(b) To decrease it on ascending grades and to upgradient on highway meets a steeper upgradient.
increase it on descending grades
(c) To increase it on both descending and
ascending grades
(d) to decrease it on both descending and
ascending grades.
KMC 2009
WBPSC JE 2009 693. To determine the overtaking sight distance the
Ans. (c) : Effect of grade on safe overtaking sight height of driver's eye above road surface is
distance is to increase it on both descending and considered to be
ascending grades. When we take of sight distances in (a) 1.0 m (b) 1.2 m
geometric design of highways, there are two sight (c) 2.0 m (d) 2.4 m
distance that mainly comes in picture namely KMC 2009
• S.S.D and O.S.D. Ans. (b) : To determine the overtaking sight distance
• S.S.D is affected by grade/gradient of road. the height of driver eye above road surface is
689. In highway construction on super-elevated considered to be 1.2m.
curves, the rolling proceed from 694. Along a hill road it is essential to provide a side
(a) sides towards centre drain on
(b) centre towards sides (a) outer side of a spur curve
(c) upper edge towards the lower edge (b) outer side of as re-entrant cure
Highway Engineering 574 YCT
 (c) outer side of both curve and re-entrant curve (c) resist skidding
(d) inner side of both spur curve and re-entrant (d) prevent sudden increase of overturning force
curve KMC 2009
KMC 2009 Ans. (d) : A transition curve helps to prevent sudden
Ans. (d) : Along a hill road it is essential to provide a increase of overturning force as t introduce the radius
side drain on inner side on both spur curve and re- of the curve from zero to R.
entrant curve. 700. A hill road is one which passes through a
695. Minimum value of super elevation of a terrain with a cross slope of
National highway with rigid pavement may be (a) 0 to 10% (b) 10 to 25%
taken as (c) 25 to 60% (d) None of the above
(a) 7.0% (b) 4.0% UKSSSC JE 20.12.2020 Morning
(c) 1.8% (d) 0.15% WBPSC JE 2009
KMC 2009 Ans. (c) : Regions are classified according to the
Ans. (a) : Minimum value of super-elevation (e) of a cross step as per given below.
National Highway with rigid pavement may be taken % cross slopes
S.N. Terrain
as 7%. of country
696. In hill roads, minimum sight distance required 1. Plain 0 to 10
is: 2. Rolling 10 to 25
(a) stopping sight distance 3. Mountainous 25 to 60
(b) passing sight 4. Steep Greater than 60
(c) braking distance 701. In a curve, the angle of intersection of the
(d) none of the above tangents is called as:
WBPSC SAE 2004 (a) Degree of curve (b) Obtuse angle
Ans. (a) : In hill roads, minimum sight distance (c) Deflection angle (d) Internal angle
required is stopping sight distance. DDA JE 24.04.2018 Shift-II
697. The design speed of a highway is 80km/h and Ans. (c) : In a curve, the angle of intersection of the
the radius of circular curve 150m in plain tangents is called as deflection angle.
topography. Which one of the following if the Deflection angle–A deflection angle is the angle
minimum lengths of transition curve? between the onward extension of the previous leg and
(a) 115m (b) 85m the line ahead.
(c) 64m (d) 43m
(e) None of above
CGPSC SES Exam 2016
Ans. (a) : Given design speed (V) = 80 km/h
Radius (R) = 150 m
For plain topography–
(80 ) = 115m
2
2.7V 2
LS = = 2.7 ×
R 150 702. Read the following statements related to road
698. Identify the highway cross section elements alignment:
from the following: 1. Improper alignment would result in increase
1. Camber in construction cost.
2. Kerbs 2. Improper alignment would result in increase
3. Head light sight distance in maintenance cost.
4. Radius of horizontal curve 3. Improper alignment would result in decrease
(a) only 1 (b) 1, 2, 3 & 4 in vehicle operation cost.
(c) 1 & 2 (d) 2 & 4 4. Improper alignment would result in increase
CG Housing Board AE Exam 2014 in accident rate.
Ans. (c) : The characteristics of cross-sectional Identify the wrong statement:
elements are important in highway geometric design (a) 1 only (b) 2 only
because they influence the safety and comfort. (c) 3 only (d) 4 only
The basic cross sectional elements of a highway, TSPSC HMWSSB Manager 2020
pavement are– Ans. (c) : Good alignment reduces vehicle operation,
(1) Camber (2) Width of Carriageway (3) kerb (4) maintenance and construction costs.
Road margin (5) Width of formation (6) Right of way 703. The required camber of a pavement depends on
(ROW). 1. the type of pavement surface
699. A transition curve helps to 2. the amount of rainfall
(a) provide a clear sight distance 3. longitudinal slope of the road
(b) facilitate good drainage pavement 4. traffic volume
Highway Engineering 575 YCT
 Identify the correct statement: 707. Headlight sight distance should at least the
(a) 1 and 2 only (b) 1 and 3 only equal to
(c) 1 and 4 only (d) 1, 2, 3 and 4 (a) stopping sight distance
TSPSC HMWSSB Manager 2020 (b) overtaking sight distance
Ans. (a) : The Camber on pavement depends upon– (c) intermediate sight distance
(i) Type of road surface. (d) half the overtaking sight distance
(ii) Rainfall. KMC 2009
Ans. (a) : Head light sight distance (HSD) = SSD
704. Calculate the safe stopping distance for design
speed of 36 kmph for two way traffic on a two ISD = 2 ×SSD
lane road. Assume coefficient of friction as 0.25 708. In the performance of vehicles, what is the
and reaction time of driver as 2.5 seconds. value of the rolling resistance coefficient from
Indian studies for the Asphaltic concrete
Take g = 10 m2/sec.
surface?
(a) 20 m (b) 25 m
(a) 0.046 (b) 0.01
(c) 45 m (d) 40 m (c) 0.022 (d) 0.025
TSPSC HMWSSB Manager 2020 PGCIL DET 17.11.2018 Shift - II
Ans. (c) : V = 36 kmph = 10 m/s Ans. (b) : Rolling resistance coefficient due to effects
Two lane (T/W) of pavement surface.
f = 0.25, t = 2.5 sec, g = 10 m/s2 Road surface Rolling resistance
V2
SSD = Vt + Concrete, asphalt 0.013 Note :
2gf
Rolled gravel 0.02 Tar macadam is a
10 ×10 road surface made
SSD = 10 × 2.5 + = 25 + 20 = 45 m Tar macadam 0.025
by combining
2 × 10 × 0.25 Unpaved road 0.05 macadam surface,
705. Calculate the rate of super-elevation for a Field 0.1-0.35 tar and sand.
horizontal highway curve of diameter 1000 m Concrete asphalt 0.006-
and speed 50 kmph. 0.01
(a) 0.25 (b) 0.022 709. The structural damage caused by an axle load
(c) 0.22 (d) 0.0022 varies as the _________ power of its ratio of the
TSPSC HMWSSB Manager 2020 standard axle load.
(a) fourth (b) first
Ans. (b) : The super elevation for 75% of design speed
(c) second (d) third
(V kmph) is calculated neglecting the friction.
PGCIL DET 17.11.2018 Shift - II
D 1000
Super elevation, R = = = 500 m Ans. (a) : Vehicle can have many axle will which
2 2 distribute the load into different axle and pavement
( 0.75V )
2
v2 through the wheel.
e= = • 80 kN single axle load is considered to be standard
127R 225R
axle load and the design of the pavement is based an
( 50 )
2

e= = 0.022 standard axle load.

225 × 500 • Axle that not equal to 80 kN are converted into
706. Which of the following is a function of the equivalent number of standard axle load with the help
kerb? of equivalent load factor (ELF). According Mcleod
(a) To strengthen and project the pavement edge equivalent load
(b) To minimize the headlight glare Equivalent load factor or fourth power law
4
(c) To include space for safe operation of  Axle load 
crossing and turning vehicle at intersections =  
at grade  standard load 
(d) To separate the opposing streams of traffic 710. In the measurement of skid resistance, what
PGCIL DET 17.11.2018 Shift - II will be the friction factor for a car of mass 1250
kg, if it is travelling a speed of 72 kmph, when
Ans. (a) : The various function of the kerb are :
it is suddenly braked by locking the wheels?
• The strengthen and protect the pavement edge.
The vehicle comes to a stop at a distance of
• To facilitate and the control drainage. 50 m.
• To decline pavement edge. (a) 0.61 (b) 0.41
• To present a more finished surface. (c) 0.81 (d) 1.11
• To help in the orderly developed road side. PGCIL DET 17.11.2018 Shift - II
Highway Engineering 576 YCT
 Ans. (b) : Overtaking sight distance– The minimum distance
V2 2 open to the vision of the driver of a vehicle intending
V
Breaking distance (d) = = to overtake slow vehicle ahead with safety against the
2gf 254f traffic of opposite direction.
(in meter ) SSD in always less than OSD.
V= velocity (kmph) 715. Light reflection device used to guide the driver
g = acceleration due to gravity (9.81 m/sec2) along the proper alignment are called
f = coefficient of friction (a) Rumble strip (b) Delineators
v = 72 km/hour (c) Attenuators (d) Litter bin
d = 50 meter Nagaland PSC CTSE 2017 Paper-I
( 72 )
2
Ans. (b) : Light reflection device used to guide the
50 = driver along the proper alignment are called
254 f
delineators.
f = 0.4081 (Coefficient of friction)
Rumble strip– Rumble strip are a road safety feature
711. A trailer wheel, loaded to 300 kg, is locked by to alert inattentive drivers of potential danger, by
braking. The horizontal force at the tyre-road causing tactile vibration and audible rumbling
interface then developed is 1200 N. What will transmitted through the wheel into the vehicle interior.
be the skid number? Litter bin– A cantilever that holds materials which
(a) 41 (b) 61 have been thrown away.
(c) 51 (d) 31 A receptable in public place which people can deposit
PGCIL DET 17.11.2018 Shift - II small item of rubbish.
Ans. (a) : F = µN 716. The mechanical extra widening required for
1200N = f × 300 × 9.8N 7m wide pavement on a horizontal curve of
f = 0.4077, radius R meter is given by
So, (a) L2/2R (b) 2L2/3R
2
Skid No. = 100 × f (c) L /R (d) 3 L2/2R
= 100 × 0.4077 = 40.77 Nagaland PSC CTSE 2017 Paper-I
≃ 41 Nagaland PSC 2017 Paper-I
Ans. (c) : Given,
712. Service lane is the lane provided at the ____ of Width of pavement = Tm (for two lane)
a plot for service purposes.
(a) side (b) centre nl 2
Mechanical extra widening =
(c) back (d) top 2R
HPSSC JE Code 522/2019 where,
Ans. (a) : Service lane– Service lane means a n = Number of lanes
road/lane provided at the rear or side of a plot for R = Radius of curve (m)
service purpose. l = Length of wheel base (m)
So for 7 m, number of lanes (n) = 2
713. The gradient of a road depends upon the:
(a) nature of traffic (b) nature of ground 2l 2 l 2
Mechanical extra widening = =
(c) rainfall of the locality(d) all of these 2R R
HPSSC JE Code 522/2019 717. What is the maximum value of centrifugal ratio
PSSSB JE 22.11.2015 for road?
Ans. (d) : Road gradient– It is the rate of rise or fall (a) 1/4 (b) 1/8
of road level along its length. It is expressed either as (c) 1/2 (d) 1/6
the rate of rise or fall to the horizontal distance or as Nagaland PSC CTSE 2017 Paper-I
percentage rise or fall. Nagaland PSC 2017 Paper-I
Road gradients depend on– Ans. (a) : The ratio of the centrifugal force and the
(i) Nature of traffic weight is called the centrifugal ratio–
(ii) Nature of ground P
(iii) Rainfall of the locality Thus, centrifugal ratio =
w
714. The stop sight distance is always____
overtaking sight distance. wv2 1 v2
= . =
(a) equal to (b) less than gR w gR
(c) greater than (d) None of these • The maximum value of centrifugal ratio is taken as
HPSSC JE Code 522/2019 equal to 1/4 for roads and 1/8 for railway.
Ans. (b) : Stopping sight distance– Stopping sight 718. The widening of road is not required when its
distance is the distance required by a driver of a radius will be ______.
vehicle travelling at a given speed to bring his vehicle (a) Less than 350 m (b) More than 400 m
to a stop after an object on the roadway becomes (c) More than 300 m (d) More than 460 m
visible. KPSC Overseer (Irrigation) 2017
Highway Engineering 577 YCT
 Ans. (c) : Extra widening (Ew)–The extra widening of Low width With height of Nominal set
pavement on horizontal curves is divided into two a building back
parts (i) Mechanical and (ii) Psychological widening. 6 m-10 m up to 5.5 m 900 mm
nl 2 V 10 m - 18 m up to 4.5 m 900 mm
Ew = w m + w P → Ew = + 18 m - 24 m up to 4.5 m 1.5 m
2R 9.5 R
24 m at any height 2.5 m
Here, n = number of traffic lanes 721. The reaction time of driverse considered for
l = length of wheel base (m) calculating stopping sight distance and
R = radius of the curve (m) overtaking sight distance are :
V = velocity (kmph) (a) 9 s and 2 s respectively
wm = mechanical widening (b) 2 s and 9 s respectively
wP = Psychological widening (c) 2 s and 2.5 s respectively
• if R > 300 m, no extra widening will be required. (d) 2.5 s and 2 s respectively
• On single lane road, it is sufficient to provide LMRC AM 2018 Shift-II
mechanical widening. PGCIL DET 17.11.2018 Shift-II
• for multi-lane roads, the pavement widening may be PGCIL 13.09.2018
calculated by adding half the widening for two lane Ans. (d) : Reaction time of drives for stopping sight
roads to each line. distance and overtaking sight distance taken as 2.5 se
719. Consider the following statement, and 2 sec respectively.
(1) The standard percentile value of a speed 722. If the design speed is 80 kmph, perception
taken for fixating the variability of human reaction time is 3 sec and the co-efficient of
characteristic is 85th percentile friction is 0.5, the safe stopping sight distance
(2) The range of fairly clear vision is within 10º will be
to 12º (a) 290 m (b) 117 m
(3) Trend charts are useful for estimating the rate (c) 145 m (d) 213 m
of growth and for planning future expansion. WBPSC JE 2016
Which of the above statement are correct? Ans. (b) : Design speed = 80 kmph
(a) (1) and (3) (b) (2) and (3) Reaction time = 3 sec
(c) (1), (2) and (3) (d) (1) and (2) Co-efficient of friction (f) = 0.5
Nagaland PSC CTSE 2017 Paper-I v2
Ans. (c) : • The influence of all these factors and the SSD = vt +
2gf
corresponding variability cannot accounted when a
2
facility is designed, so a standardized value is often 5 
th
used as the design value. The 85 percentile value of  × 80 
 80 × 5 × 3   18 
different characteristics is taken as a standard. It SSD =  +
th  18  2 × 9.81× 0.5
represents a characteristic that at 85 percent of the
population can meet or exceed. SSD = 117.005 ≃ 117 m
• The most acute vision is within a cone of 3º to 5º, 723. The objective of providing a transition curve
fairly clear vision within 10 to 12º and the peripheral on the approach to horizontal curves in order
vision will be within 120 to 180º degrees. to
• Trend charts are useful for estimating the rate of (a) reduce the jerk to allowable levels
growth and for planning future expansion. (b) increase jerk to allowable levels
720. Set back distance required at rear of a building (c) minimize, the length of the horizontal curve
is (d) None of the above
(a) 1.25 m (b) 1.50 m WBPSC JE 2016
(c) 1.75 m (d) 2.00 m Ans. (a) : The objective of providing a transition curve
KPSC Overseer/Draftsman 2020 on the approach to horizontal curves in order to reduce
Ans. (b) : Set back distance (m)–The clearance the jerk to allowable levels.
distance or set distance required from the centre line of 724. A vertical or sloping member along the edge of
a horizontal curve to an obstruction on the inner side of a pavement in urban area is called
the curve to provide adequate sight distance depends (a) Parapet wall (b) Projection wall
upon the following factors– (c) Kerb (d) Wing wall
(i) Required stopping sight distance (SSD) WBPSC JE 2005
(ii) Radius of horizontal curve (R) Ans. (c) : A vertical or sloping member along the edge
(iii) Length of the curve (Lc) of a pavement in urban area is called kerb.
Minimum required side set backs for residential Kerb- It is the edge where a raised sidewalk or road
development– median meets street or other roadway.
Highway Engineering 578 YCT
725. Normal formation width of a hill road for one (b) Presence of the snow moisture– If snow moisture
way traffic is is more then reduce the friction so breaking efficiency
(a) 3.6 m (b) 4.8 m is less.
(c) 5.5 m (d) 6 m (c) Depends on the tyre condition also.
WBPSC JE 2018 729. The magnitude of super elevation depends on:
Ans. (b) : Normal formation width of a hilly road for (a) Speed of vehicle/radius of curve
one way traffic is 4.8 m. (b) Speed of vehicle/camber
Formation width– It is the top width of the highway (c) Density of traffic/radius of curve
embankment or the bottom width of cutting excluding (d) Road capacity/radius of curve
the side drain. KPSC JE Code 102/2014
Formation width– Carriage way width + width of
shoulder. Ans. (a) : It is rising of the outer edge of the road with
respect to inner edge in order to counteract the effect
726. The percentage compensation in gradient for
ruling gradient of 4% and horizontal curve of of centrifugal force is called super elevation.
radius 760 m is V2
(a) 0.1% (b) 1% e + f =
gR
(c) 10% (d) no compensation
WBPSC JE 2018 where, V = speed (kmph)
Ans. (d) : According to IRC, a grade compensation of, R = Radius (m)
g = Accn due to gravity (m/sec)
 30 + R  75 
 R  , R  minimum has to be provided for the It depends upon–
   1. Radius of cure
grades more than 4%. 2. Speed of vehicles
But no grade compensation is required for the lower 730. The portion of road way used by the high speed
values of the grade.
and power driven vehicles:
Here, R is the radius of the horizontal curve in meters.
(a) Motor way (b) Crete way
727. The arrangements made at the situations (c) Carriage way (d) Roadway
where two or more roads meet or cross one
KPSC JE Code 102/2014
another, such a way that one road or under
another by means of a bridge is: Ans. (a) : Motor way means a broad highway designed
(a) Roundabouts for high speed traffic having restrictions on the vehicle
(b) Grade separations types permitted and merging lanes instead of cross
(c) Grade intersections traffic.
(d) None of the above 731. The carriage way is protect by ______ wide
KPSC Code 96/2016 shoulders.
Ans. (b) : (a) 0.5 to 1.25 m (b) 1.25 m to 2 m
Grade separations–The arrangements made at the (c) 2 to 4 m (d) 4 to 6 m
situations where two or more roads meet or cross one KPSC JE Code 102/2014
another, such a way that one road or under another by
means of a bridge. Ans. (b) :
Grade intersection–In which all the exchanges
between the road take place on the same plain.
Roundabouts intersection–It is a type of circular inter
section in which road traffic is permitted to flow in one
direction around a control island and priority is
typically given to traffic already in the function.
728. The efficiency of the brakes of a vehicle depend Carriage way is protect by wide shoulders. (1.25 m to
on: 2 m).
(a) Condition of the road surface
732. As per Indian Roads Congress, the slope of
(b) Condition of the tyres
(c) Presence of the snow moisture earth in cutting should be
(d) All the above (a) 1:2 (b) 1:1
KPCL JE 2018 (c) 1:4 (d) 1:3
IOF JE 2016 RRB JE RANCHI : 04.01. 2015
Ans. (d) : The efficiency of the brakes of a vehicle Punjab JE (Local Govt.) 2014
depend on: Ans. (b) : In case of deep cutting or filing a side slope
(a) Condition of the road surface– If road surface is of 1 : 1 or 2 : 1 (i.e, 2 horizontal and 1 vertical) is
smooth then friction between road and tyre is less then usually maintained. If it is required to put new soil
break efficiency is less the skidding of vehicle is more. over old soil benching is required to be done so that a
So SSD is more. perfect bonding between old and new soil is achieved.
Highway Engineering 579 YCT
733. The ideal form of curve for the summit curve is 737. The curve provided at the change of gradient is
(a) Spiral (b) Parabola called
(c) Circular (d) none of the above (a) Vertical curve (b) Reverse curve
Punjab JE (Local Govt.) 2014 (c) Compound curve (d) Horizontal curve
HPPCL JE Civil 13.02.2021 WBPSC JE 2007
Ans. (c) : The ideal form of summit curve is circular. Ans. (a) : When an up gradient of a highway meet a
But IRC preferred parabola for design. Summit curve down grade, the vertical curve provided. The curve in
is design on the basis of sight distance only. a vertical alignment which is produced when two
For valley curve the ideal form of curve is cubic different gradients meet is known as Vertical curves.
parabola but IRC prefers square parabola (parabola). 738. Weight of vehicles affects
Valley curve is designed on the basis of comfort (a) Camber
criteria and head light sight distance criteria. (b) Passing sight distance
734. Which of the following shapes is preferred in a (c) Pavement thickness
valley curve? (d) Width of lanes
(a) Simple parabola (b) Cubic parabola Nagaland PSC 2015 Paper-I
(c) spiral (d) none of the above WBPSC JE 2007
PSSSB JE 22.11.2015
Ans. (c) : Weight of vehicles affects pavement
Ans. (b) : Valley curve–Valley curves preferred cubic thickness.
parabola as given in figure.

For a wheel load, no. of repetitions of load for which

the enabling pavement is to be designed is 1000000.
∴ N = (n1 + n2) • Single axles with single wheel on either side
4
∴ –n1 = descending gradient  Axle load in kN 
= 
+n2 = ascending gradient  65 
In all the case of maximum possible deviation angle is Angle axle with dual wheel on either side
obtained when a descending gradient meets with an 4
ascending gradient.  Axle load in kN 
= 
• Length of valley curve as per comfort condition–  80 
1/ 2
 NV 3  739. The width of carriage way is 10 m and the rise
L = 2  of camber is 1m, then what is the rate of the
 C  camber?
if c = 0.6 m/s3 (a) 1 in 10 (b) 1 in 5
than L = 0.38 (NV3)1/2 (c) 10 in 1 (d) 5 in 1
735. The minimum design speed of hair pin bend is Kerala Soil Survey Engineer 21.06.2019
(a) 15 km/hr (b) 20 km/hr Ans. (b) : Given: width of carriage way is = 10 m.
(c) 25 km/hr (d) 30 km/hr rise of camber = 1 m
Mizoram PSC Disaster Mgmt. 2015, Paper III
Ans. (b) : Hair pin bend- A hair-pin bend be
designed as circular curve with transition curves at
each end. alternatively, compound circular curves may
be provided.
• Minimum design speed - 20 km/hr
Gradient– 1
The rate of camber = or 1 in 5
Maximum - 1 in 40 (2.5%) 5
Minimum - 1 in 200 (0.5%) 740. A vehicle has a wheel base of 5.5 m. What is the
• Maximum superelevation - 1 in 14.30 (7%) off-tracking while negotiating a curved path
736. Give the full form of SSD. with a mean radius of 30 m?
(a) Stopping Sight Distance (a) 1 m (b) 0.5 m
(b) Sight Stopping Distance (c) 2.1 m (d) 3 m
(c) Station Sight Distance NPCIL JE 2020
(d) Safe Sight Distance
HSSC JE Cat-30, 6-2016 Afternoon Ans. (b) : Given,
Ans. (a) : Full form of the SSD, OSD and ISD, Wheel base (l) = 5.5m
SSD = Stopping sight distance Radius (R) = 30
( 5.5 ) = 0.504m
2
OSD = Overtaking sight distance l2
off-tracking = = =
ISD = Intermediate sight distance 2R 2 × 30
Highway Engineering 580 YCT
 Ans. (a) : Speed limit signs are circular in shape and
3. Traffic Engineering Studies have white background and red border respectively.
• As per IRC : 67-2001, a traffic sign indicating the
741. The minimum and maximum value of 15 speed limit on a road should be of circular shape with
minute peak hour factor on a section of a road White Background and Red Border.
is respectively
(a) 0.5 and 0.75 (b) 0.25 and 0.5
(c) 0.5 and 1 (d) 0.25 and 1
DSSSB JE (Mains) 20.03.2021 (Evening)
Ans. (d) : Peak Hour Factor (PHF)-It is defined as
the ratio between the number of vehicles counted
during the peak hour and four times the number of
vehicles counted during the highest 15 consecutive
Exam Point
minutes. Peak hour factor is a measure of the variation Capacity of four-lane divided rural highway is–
in demand during the peak hour. 30,000 PCU
Hourly traffic volume Capacity of one-way, two-way lane urban road
PHF15 = with no frontage access, very little cross traffic
 60 
  15 × V ( max ) and no standing cars is– 4000 PCU
 15  The number of vehicles moving in a specified
Hourly traffic volume direction on a roadway that pass a given point of
PHF5 =
 60  during specific unit of time is called–
  × V5 ( max ) Traffic volume
 5 
Where, Maximum number of vehicles can be parked
0
V15 = maximum number of vehicle during any 15 along kerb with– 90 angle parking
consecutive minutes. The traffic volume is equal to–
V5 = maximum number of vehicle during 5 Traffic density × Traffic speed
consecutive minutes. Traffic density is defined as–
Note– Value of peak hour factor (PHF) varies The number of vehicle per unit length
between 0.25 and 1.00 for 15 minute. 744. Safe speed limit in a zone corresponds to
 n  (a) From 15th percentile of cumulative speed
Peak Hour Factor (PHF) lies between  to1 . distribution curve
 60  (b) From 85th percentile of cumulative speed
742. Which of the following is an engineering distribution curve
measure to decrease the accidents rates? (c) From 98th percentile of cumulative speed
(a) Speed control (b) Safety drive distribution curve
(c) Traffic control devices (d) Road lighting (d) From 30th percentile of cumulative speed
RPSC Lect. (Tech.Edu.) Paper-II 2021 distribution curve
Ans. (c) : Traffic control devices– RPSC Lect. (Tech.Edu.) Paper-II 2021
• Traffic control devices are markers, signs and signal Nagaland PSC 2015 Paper-I
devices to inform, guide and control traffic, including Ans. (b) : 85th percentile speed–
pedestrians, motor vehicle drivers and bicyclists. • The speed at or below which 85% of vehicles are
Advantage– passing a point on the highway or only 15% of
(i) Maintain orderly flow of traffic vehicles exceed the speed at that point.
(ii) Reduce certain type of accidents • This is adopted for safe speed limit at this zone.
(iii) Improves safety and efficiency of movement of 745. Certain areas within the roadway from which
vehicles. the vehicular traffic is diverted by pavement
743. As Per IRC - 67-2001; a traffic sign indicating marking or other warning devices or by
the speed limit on a road should be of physical construction is _______.
(a) circular shaped with white background and (a) Parking area (b) Island
red border (c) Vehicle repairing area (d) Foot path
(b) triangular shape with red background and DGVCL 5.1.2021 Evening
white border Ans. (b) : • Certain area within the roadway from
(c) triangular shape with white background and which the vehicular traffic is diverted by pavement
red border marking or other warning devices or by physical
(d) circular shape with red background and white construction is called 'Island'.
border They are mainly four types.
HPSSC JE - 18.04.2021 (i) Divisional Island
RPSC Lect. (Tech.Edu.) Paper-II 2021 (ii) Channeling Island
UPRVUNL JE 2019 (iii) Pedestrian loading
HPSSC JE CODE 552/2018 (iv) Rotary Island
Highway Engineering 581 YCT
746. In a traffic survey data, 1950 M 65 means 750. In which of the following traffic signal systems,
(a) 65 vehicles/hr and 1950 vehicles/hr cycle time and cycle division are automatically
(b) Highway length 1950 kms and design speed varied?
at 65 kmph (a) Simultaneous system
(c) 1950 vehicles mixed traffic with a design (b) Flexible progressive system
speed of 65 kmph (c) Alternate system
(d) After 1950 kms, 65 km rough road
(d) Simple progressive system
DSSSB JE (Mains) 19.03.2021 (Evening)
DGVCL 5.1.2021 Afternoon
Ans. (c) : • In a traffic survey data, 1950 M 65 means,
ESE 2017
1950 vehicles mixed traffic with a design speed of 65
kmph. Ans. (b) : Flexible progressive system–
747. The shape of the stop sign according to IRC : • In this system it is possible to automatically vary the
(a) Circular (b) Triangular length of cycle, cycle division and the time schedule at
(c) Rectangular (d) Octagonal each signalized intersection with the help of a
Odisha JE (Mains) 2015 computer.
Ans. (d) : Stop sign– • This is the most efficient system of all.
• The shape of stop sign according to IRC is octagonal 751. Design hourly volume indicate
shape of red colour with white border. (a) Maximum hourly traffic volume
• The sign is intend for use on roadways where traffic (b) Hourly volume that is exceeded 29 times in a
is required to stop before entering a major road. year
(c) Hourly volume that is exceeded 9 times in a
year
(d) Hourly volume that is exceeded 19 times in a
year
748. Traffic density means
(a) Number of vehicles in specific direction per RPSC Lect. (Tech.Edu.) Paper-II 2021
hour Ans. (b) : • The design hourly volume is found from
(b) Number of vehicles in specific direction per the plot between hourly volume and the number of
lane per day hours in an year that the traffic volume is exceeded.
(c) Number of vehicles per unit length • The 30th highest hourly volume is the hourly volume
(d) Maximum number of vehicles passing a given that will be exceeded only 29 times in a year and all
point in one hour
other hourly volumes of the year will be less.
DSSSB JE (Mains) 19.03.2021 (Evening)
KPSC JTO Code 10/2020 752. Origin and destination study is to be carried
Mizoram PSC JE (Irr. and WRD) Oct. 2018 Paper-II out at a large intersection. Which of the
Ans. (c) : • Traffic density is the number of vehicles following methods shall be preferred for such a
occupying a unit length of lane of roadway at a given case?
instant, usually expressed as vehicle per kilometer. (a) Road side interview method
• Traffic volume is the product of the traffic density (b) Work spot interview method
and traffic speed. (c) Tag on car method
749. The free mean speed on a roadway is found to (d) License plate method
be 80 kmph. Under stopped condition, the RPSC Lect. (Tech.Edu.) Paper-II 2021
average spacing between the vehicles is 6.9 m. Ans. (d) : License plate method–
What is capacity flow?
(a) 900 v/hr/lane • This method is quite easy and quick as far as the
(b) 3900 v/hr/lane field work is concerned.
(c) 1900 v/hr/lane • However, this method is quite advantageous when
(d) 2900 v/hr/lane the area under consideration is small, like a large
DSSSB JE (Mains) 19.03.2021 (Evening) inter section or a small business centre.
Ans. (d) : V = 80 kmph 753. The traffic volume N, traffic density T and
S = 6.9 m traffic speed V are interrelated as :
1000 (a) N = VT
Jam density (K) = = 144.92 ≃ 145 veh/km (b) V = NT
6.9
(c) T = VN
V×K
Capacity flow = (d) N = square root of VT
4 (e) V = square root of NT
80 ×145 KPSC JTO Code 10/2020
=
4 MP VYAPAM Sub Engg. 3.04.2016, 9.00 am
= 2900 V/hr/lane Odisha JE (Mains) 02.08.2015
Highway Engineering 582 YCT
 Ans. (a) : The fundamental relationship between 757. There are 40 vehicles on a 1 km length of lane
traffic volume, density and speed may be given by the of a roadway at a given instant. It is
general equation of traffic flow– (a) traffic volume
N = VT (b) basic traffic capacity
N = Traffic volume (vehicle per hour) (c) traffic density
V = Traffic speed of vehicle (kmph) (d) practical traffic capacity
T = Traffic density (vehicle/km) SSC JE Civil 29.10.2020 (Morning)
754. Which vehicle survey is carried out with the Ans. (c) : Traffic density (k)–It is the number of
help of the police? vehicles occupying a unit length of a lane or roadway
(a) Roadside interview survey at a given instant. It is expressed in vehicle/kilometer.
(b) Home interview survey Traffic Volume (q)–It is the number of vehicles
(c) Postcard questionnaire survey passing through a point during specified unit of time. It
(d) Registration number plate survey is expressed in vehicle/hour or vehicle/day.
DSSSB JE -23.10.2019 Second Shift Traffic capacity–It is maximum numbers of vehicles
Ans. (a) : Method of collection of data (Origin and in a lane or a road that can pass a given point in unit
destination studies)– time. It is expressed in vehicles/hour/lane. It is of
A. Road side interview method : It is a quick following three types–
collection of data. A. Basic capacity–Theoretical capacity for nearly
B. Home interview method : In this method, core ideal roadway and traffic condition.
should be taken while selecting the sample size. B. Possible capacity–Capacity under prevailing
C. Return postcard method : Useful for heavy traffic. conditions of roadway and traffic.
755. In which type of transportation survey, the C. Practical capacity–It is also known as design
vehicles are stopped on a sampling basis and capacity. It varies from zero to basic capacity.
information is collected on the type of vehicle, 758. In India, yellow and white colour on a
origin, destination, trip purpose, etc? milestone indicates:
(a) Registration number plate survey (a) national highway (b) rural road
(b) Taxi survey (c) state highway (d) major district road
(c) Roadside interview survey SSC JE Civil 29.10.2020 (Morning)
(d) Tags on vehicles Ans. (a) :
SSC JE Civil 30.10.2020 (Evening) Type of Road Milestone Colour
Ans. (c) : Roadside Interview Method–Road side NATIONAL HIGHWAY Yellow and White
interview survey is one of the methods of carrying out STATE HIGHWAY Green and White
a screen-line or cordon survey. CITY/DISTRICT ROADS Blue/Black and White
• In this method, the vehicles are stopped on a RURAL ROADS Orange and White
sampling basis and information is collected on the type 759. Which among the following is not a road
of vehicle origin destination, trip purpose etc. junction the same elevation ?
Registration number plate survey–Registration (a) Diamond interchange
number plate survey consists of noting the registration (b) Unchannelized intersection
number of vehicles, entering or leaving on area at (c) Channelized intersection
survey points located on the cordon line. (d) Round about
756. For the computation of annual average daily KPSC Overseer, Gr-II, Irri. Dept. (code 83/2017)
traffic, what is the minimum number of days of Ans. (a) : Diamond inter change–
continuous traffic count made at a location? • Diamond interchange is not a road junction of same
(a) 2 days (b) 7 days elevation, it is the simplest of 4-leg interchange design.
(c) 5 days (d) 3 days • The ramps which provide for one way movement are
SSC JE Civil 11.12.2020 (Evening) usually elongated along the major highway and may be
Ans. (d) : Annual average daily traffic (AADT) :– It curved parallel to the major highway.
is the average 24-hr traffic volume at a given location
over a full 365-days. Total traffic and classified traffic
are calculated. It helps in deciding the relative
importance of a route & road development. It includes
seasonal variations also.
Average Daily Traffic (ADT) :– It is the average 24-
hr volume at a given location for some period of time
less than a year. For this minimum of 7-days count is
done to include the daily variation like on Saturday &
Sunday.
Note – Commission answered D is correct.

Highway Engineering 583 YCT

760. Which signs are in shape of equilateral triangle 763. It is a common practice to design a highway to
with apex pointing upward ? accommodate the traffic volume corresponding
(a) regulatory signs to:
(b) warning sign (a) 30th hour (b) peak hour
(c) informatory sign (c) ADT (d) 15min-peak period
(d) Any of above [ESE-1998]
HPPCL JE Civil 13.02.2021 Ans. (a) The 30th highest hourly volume is the hourly
Ans. (b) : Warning signs– volume that will be exceeded only 29 times in a year
• Warning or cautionary sign are used to warn the road and all other hourly volumes of the year will be less
users of certain hazardous conditions that exit on or than this value.
adjacent to the roadway.
• The warning signs are in the shape of equilateral
triangle with its apex pointing upwards.
• They have a white background red border and black
symbols.
761. Ratio of width of the car parking area required
at kerb for 300 parking relative to 600 parking
approximately________.
(a) 0.8 (b) 0.7
(c) 2.0 (d) 0.5
M.P. VYAPAM Sub Engg. 4.9.2018 9.00 am
[ESE-1996]
Ans (a) : 764. It was noted that on a section of road, the free
speed was 80kmph and the jam density was 70
vec/km. The maximum flow in vec/h could be
expected on this road is:
(a) 800 (b) 1400
(c) 2800 (d) 5600
[ESE-1998]
Free speed × Jam density
Ans. (b) Maximum flow =
4
1 3 80 × 70
6× + 3 = = 1400 vph.
2 2 4
ratio = 765. When two road with two-lane, two-way traffic,
3 1
6× + 3× cross at an uncontrolled intersection, the total
2 2 number of major conflict points would be:
5.598 (a) 32 (b) 24
=
6.696 (c) 16 (d) 4
= 0.83 [ESE-1999]
762. In Which one of the following grades of a Ans. (b) No. of points of conflicts on two lane roads
highway is an emergency escape ramp meeting at right angles.
provided? Type of traffic No. of conflicting points
(a) 1 in 200 (b) Zero grade Both the roads two way 24
(c) Down grade (d) Up grade One roads one way 16
Nagaland PSC CTSE 2017 Paper-I Both the roads one way 6
[ESE-1996] 766. Based on '30th hour volume' of how much
Ans. (c) The provision of emergency escape ramp on percent time during the year can the designer
long. descending grades is appropriate for slowing or willingly tolerate the unfavourable operating
stopping out of control vehicles away from the main conditions?
stream of traffic. (a) 30 (b) 29
• Loss of breaking ability through over heating or (c) 2.5 (d) 0.33
mechanical failure results in the driver loosing the [ESE-1999]
control of vehicles.
Ans. (d) Only for 29 hours in a year the traffic volume
• Four basic types of emergency escape ramps are
exceeds the design hourly time.
commonly used.
(1) Sand pile (2) Descending grade 29 × 100
So, percent time = = 0.33
(3) Horizontal grade (4) Ascending grade 365 × 24

Highway Engineering 584 YCT

 Exam Point Ans. (a) : 15th Percentile speed–The 15th percentile
If L is the length of vehicles in meters, C is the speed represents the lower speed limit if it is desire to
clear distance between two consecutive vehicles prohibit slow moving vehicles to decrease delay and
congestion.
(stopping sight distance), V is the speed of
• 85th percentile speed is known as safe speed limit.
vehicles in km per hour, the maximum number N
• 98th percentile speed for purpose of highway
1000V geometric design.
of vehicles/hour is– N=
L+C 770. On the basis of which one of the following
The travel time per unit length of road is desire line are drawn?
inversely proportional to the– Speed (a) Traffic volume studies
767. The speed distribution of vehicles at a point on (b) Traffic capacity studies
(c) Origin & destination studies
the roadway is represented as
(d) Traffic density studies
(a) Space-mean speed
MH PWD 2018
(b) Time-mean speed Maharashtra JE 2018 Shift-II
(c) Running speed Ans. (c) : Origin and destination studies–
(d) Travel speed • Plan the road network and studies.
MH PWD 2019 • Plan the schedule of different modes of
MH Asst. Town Planning 2018 transportation.
Ans. (b) : Time-mean speed– Time mean speed • Give the basis data for determining the desire line
represents the speed distribution of vehicles at a point and desire slope.
on the roadway. • Its consider one of the most important traffic study.
It is the average of instantaneous speeds of observed • Future traffic need may be estimated.
vehicles at the spot. • Its give actual direction selection of route and length
768. Which one of the following capacity represents of trip.
the maximum number of passenger cars that Note–This technique is mainly observed traffic study.
pass a given point on a lane or roadway during 771. The average speed of vehicles on a certain road
length at any time is called______.
one hour under the most nearly ideal roadway
(a) Time mean speed (b) Design speed
& traffic condition? (c) Space mean speed (d) Modal speed
(a) Basic capacity CG Environment Board AE Exam 2016
(b) Possible capacity LMRC AM 2019
(c) Practical capacity Ans. (c) Space mean speed is the average speed of
(d) None of the above vehicles on a certain road length at any time.
MH PWD 2019 n
MH WCD 2019 Space mean speed =
1
MH Nagar Parishad Mains 2018 ∑ v 
Ans. (a) : Traffic capacity– The study of traffic  i
n = No. of spot speed
volume and traffic density is known as traffic capacity.
vi = Individual value of spot speed
There are three types of capacity study
772. The instrument attached to the wheel of a
(i) Basic capacity– Basic capacity is the maximum
vehicle in order to measure the distance
number of vehicles that can pass a given point on a travelled, is called
lane or a roadway during one hour, under the ideal (a) Passometer (b) Odometer
roadway and traffic condition that can possible be (c) Pedometer (d) Speedometer
attained. KPSC JE 13.11.2016
1000V HPSSC JE Code 343/2018
theoretical maximum capacity c = Ans. (b) : The instrument attached to the wheel of a
S
vehicle in order to measure the distance travelled, is
(ii) Possible capacity called odometer.
(iii) Practical capacity 773. Match List-I (Traffic survey) with List-II
769. Which one of the following percentile speed (Method) and select the correct answer using
is considered as lower safe limit for vehicles? the codes given below the lists:
(a) 15th percentile speed List-I
(b) 85th percentile speed A. Spot speed
(c) 98th percentile speed B. Traffic volume
(d) None of the above C. O-D survey
Maharashtra JE 2018 Shift-II D. Parking survey
Highway Engineering 585 YCT
 List-II 776. Which one of the following geometric features
1. By video tape requires the magnitudes of weaving angle and
2. By road side interview weaving distance for its design?
3. By doppler radar (a) Rotary design
4. By pneumatic tube (b) Right-angle intersection
Codes: (c) Roundabout
A B C D (d) Grade-separated junction
(a) 3 1 2 4 [ESE-2009]
(b) 2 4 3 1 Ans. (a) Rotary design : Rotaries are suitable when the
(c) 3 4 2 1 traffic entering from three or more approaches are
(d) 2 1 3 4 relatively equal.
[ESE-2005] • Rotaries are suitable when there are more
Ans. (c) approaches and no separate lanes are available for
(A) Spot speed – By doppler radar right-turn traffic thus making inter section geometry
(B) Traffic volume – By pneumatic tube complex.
(C) O-D survey – By road side interview
• The design elements include design speed, radius at
(D) Parking survey – By video tape
entry, exit and the central island, weaving length
774. On a road the free speed was 65kmph and the and width, entry, exit widths.
space headway at jam density was 6.25m. What
is the maximum flow which could be expected 777. Instrument used to study the spot speed of the
on this road? vehicles on move is
(a) 2600 vph (b) 1625 vph (a) Speed recorder
(c) 1300 vph (d) 406 vph (b) Speedometer
[ESE-2006] (c) Enoscope
(d) Enometer
1000 DSSSB JE (Mains) 19.03.2021 (Evening)
Ans. (a) Jam density =
space headway(H) [ESE-2009]
1000 Ans. (c) : • Instrument used to study the spot speed of
= = 160 veh/km moving vehicle is enoscope.
6.25
• One of the simplest methods of finding spot speed is
Jam density × free speed.
Maximum flow = by using enoscope which is just a mirror box supported
4 on a tripod stand.
160 × 65 • The main advantage of enoscope is that it is a simple
= = 2600 vph
4 and cheap equipment and is easy to use.
775. Match List-I (Speed) with List-II (Application) 778. What will be the theoretical maximum capacity
and the correct answer using the code given (to nearest 10 units) for a single lane of
below the lists: highway given that the speed of the traffic
List-I stream is 40 kmph?
A.Space mean speed (a) 3000 veh/h (b) 2860 veh/h
B.Journey speed (c) 2010 veh/h (d) 2510 veh/h
C.Running speed [ESE-2015]
D.Spot Speed Ans. (b) Theoretical maximum capacity :
List-II
1. Road conditions studies 1000V
C= veh/hr
2. Regulatory measures S
3. Traffic flow studies V = 40 Kmph
4. Delay studies S = min. distance between two vehicle.
Codes: S = 0.2 V + 6
A B C D S = 0.2 × 40 + 6
(a) 3 2 1 4 S = 14 m
(b) 1 4 3 2 1000 × 40
(c) 3 4 1 2 C= = 2857.14
14
(d) 1 2 3 4 C = 2860 veh/hr (approx)
[ESE-2007]
Ans. (c) 779. Over speed and delay studies on a preselected
section of a Highway are conducted by:
Speed Application
(a) Fast moving car method
(A) Space mean speed Traffic flow studies
(b) Enoscope
(B) Journey speed Delay studies
(c) Radar
(C) Running speed Road conditions studies
(d) Traffic contours
(D) Spot speed Regulatory measures [ESE-2016]
Highway Engineering 586 YCT
Ans. (a) 1. Fast-moving car method (or Floating Car (c) sight distance
method or Moving Observer Method): In this (d) off-tracking
method, a test vehicle is driven a number of times Nagaland PSC 2017 Paper-I
through a pre-selected stretch of a route at an Ans. (b) : Cross slope or camber–
approximately average speed of the stream to find out • Cross slope or camber is the slope provided to the
journey speed, time and location of the delay. In traffic road surface in the transverse direction to drain off the
engineering, this method is used in speed and delay rain water from the road surface.
studies. • Drainage and quick disposal of water from the
2. Enoscope: This is a device that is an L-shaped mirror pavement surface by providing camber is considered
box, open at both ends with a mirror box, open at both
important because of two reasons–
ends with a mirror set at 45º angle to the arm of the
1. Prevention of entry of surface water into sub grade
device. This device is almost a ‘half-periscope’. Using
soil trough pavement.
an Enoscope an observer can measure the spot speed of
different vehicles. In traffic engineering, this device is 2. To make the surface dry soon after the rain so that
used in spot speed studies. skid resistance does not reduce.
3. Rader speed mater: The radar speed meter is a pre- 783. Total distance covered in total time is termed
calibrated device that directs a radar or an audio beam as
of a certain frequency to moving vehicles to record and (a) Uniform speed (b) Variable speed
display their spot speed. In this device, there is a (c) Instantaneous speed (d) Average speed
frequency difference in the signal transmitted and the RRB JE CBT-II 28–08–2019 (morning)
signal received which is proportional to the speed of the Ans. (d) : Average speed is the total distance covered
vehicle. In traffic engineering, this device is used in in the total time or extent of the trip
spot speed studies. Total distance
780. International Traffic Intelligent Survey Data Avg speed =
Total time taken
are related with:
(a) Origin and destination studies • Instantaneous speed is the speed of an object at a
(b) Speed and delay studies particular moment in time.
(c) Classified traffic volume studies • Uniform speed is which speed doesn't vary over time
(d) Accident profiling studies cover by a vehicle/object.
[ESE-2016] 784. Which speed is taken as design speed for
Ans. (c) International Traffic Intelligent Survey Data geometric design of highways ?
are classified with traffic volume studies. (a) 85th percentile speed
• Traffic volume studies are conducted to determine (b) 90 th percentile speed
the number, movements and classification of (c) 95 th percentile speed
roadway vehicles at a given location in order to (d) 98 th percentile speed
indentify critical flow time periods. Nagaland PSC 2016 Paper-I
(UPSSSC JE 31-07-2016)
Exam Point Ans : (d) • 98th percentile speed–For the purpose of
It is a common practice to design a highway to highway geometric design 98th percentile speed is
accommodate traffic volume corresponding to– taken.
30th hour • 15th percentile speed–The speed value which is used
Annual average daily traffic is obtained by as minimum speed on major highways.
determining average daily traffic volume 785. With increase in speed of the traffic stream, the
recorded for– 365 days minimum spacing of the vehicles
781. With increase in speed to traffic stream and (a) Increases
maximum capacity of the lane (b) Decreases
(c) First increases and then decreases after
(a) Increases
reaching the maximum value at optimum
(b) Decreases
speed
(c) First increases and then decreases (d) First decreases and then increases after
(d) As after reaching maximum value reaching the maximum value at optimum
WBPSC JE 2009 speed
Ans. (c) : With increase in speed of traffic stream the Nagaland PSC 2016 Paper-I
maximum capacity of the lane is 1st increases and then Ans. (a) : • With increase in speed of the traffic steam,
decreases after reaching maximum value at optimum the minimum spacing of the vehicles increases.
speed. • Spacing is defined as the distance between
782. What is the traffic Role of camber on highway? successive vehicle in a traffic lane, measured from
(a) Centrifugal force common reference point on the vehicles, such as the
(b) drainage front bumpers or front wheels.
Highway Engineering 587 YCT
786. Which of the following is known as design Ans. (b) : The traffic capacity of highway is always
capacity? more as compared to traffic volume.
(a) Theoretical capacity (b) Possible capacity
1000V
(c) Basic capacity (d) Practical capacity Theoretical traffic capacity C =
Nagaland PSC 2016 Paper-I S
Ans. (d) : Design/Practical capacity– Capacity flow/ maximum flow.
It is the practical capacity or a smaller value K .K
determined for use in designing the highway to q max = SF J
4
accommodate the design hourly volume.
787. Select the correct statement 1000
KJ = jam density at zero speed, KJ =
(a) Traffic capacity should always be more than S
traffic volume 791. Which one of the following is/are type of speed
(b) Traffic volume should always be more than studies considered under traffic studies
traffic capacity (i) Spot speed study
(c) Spot speed is the average speed of the vehicle (ii) Speed & delay study
at a specified section (a) Only (i)
(d) 85th percentile speed is more than 98th (b) Only (ii)
percentile speed (c) Both (i) & (ii)
Nagaland PSC 2016 Paper-I (d) Neither (i) nor (ii)
Ans. (a) : Traffic capacity should always be more than MH Nagar Parishad Mains 2018
traffic volume. Ans. (c) : Two type of speed studies considered under
• Traffic capacity represents the capacity/maximum traffic studies–
rate of flow on a roadway provided with same level of (i) spot speed study (ii) speed delay study.– Spot speed
service characteristics. studies are conducted to estimate the distribution of
• Traffic volume indicates the actual rate flow and speed of vehicles in a stream of traffic at a particular
responds to variation in traffic demand. location on a highway.
788. The capacity of a single lane road is: speed and delay study gives–
(a) Directly proportional to the average center to (i) Running speed (ii) Overall speed (iii) fluctuation in
center spacing of the vehicles speed (iv) Delay b/w two station
(b) Depends on ambient temperature 792. The free mean speed on a railway is found to
(c) Inversely proportional to the vehicular speed be 100 kmph. Under stopped condition the
(d) Inversely proportional to the average center average spacing between vehicles is 10m. The
to center spacing of the vehicles capacity flow (per lane) will be
NPCC 2017 (a) 2500 vehicles/hour
Ans : (d) • The capacity of a single road is inversely (b) 5000 vehicles/hour
proportional to the average centre to centre spacing of (c) 7500 vehicles/hour
the vehicles. (d) 10000 vehicles/hour
• The capacity of a roadway depends on a number of MH Nagar Parishad Mains 2018
prevailing roadway and traffic conditions. Ans. (a) : Umax = 100 km/h, spacing = 10m
789. The traffic census is carried out to study. 1000
(a) speed and delay Jam density = = 100 / km
10
(b) traffic volume
U K 
(c) road parking Flow capacity per lane = max ×  max 
(d) All of the above 2  2 
MH Pimpri-Chinchwad MNC 2015  100   100 
= × 
Ans. (d) : The traffic census is carried out for  2   2 
• Speed and delay study = 50 × 50
• Road parking study = 2500 vehicle / hr
• Traffic volume study
793. Which is the method adopted for measuring
• Origin and destination study. the running speed and journey speed of a
• Accident studies. vehicle?
• Traffic flow characterstics. (a) Radar speed meters
790. The traffic capacity of highway is always......... (b) Pressure contact tubes
as compared to traffic volume (c) Moving car observer method
(a) equal (b) more (d) Endoscope method
(c) less (d) none of these Maharashtra JE 2018 Shift-I
MH Pimpri-Chinchwad MNC 2015 PGCIL 13.09.2018
Highway Engineering 588 YCT
 Ans. (c) : Various method of speed and delay 796. What is the value of passenger car unit (PCU)
studies– for car on an urban roads?
(i) Moving car observes method (floating car method) (a) 1 (b) 2
(ii) Interview plate method (c) 3 (d) 4
(iii) License plate method MH PWD 2018
(iv) photographic technique Ans. (a) : • The value of passenger car unit (PCU) for
(v) Elevated observations car on an urban roads is 1.
Method of origin and destination studies • The PCU may be considered as a measure of the
(i) Road side interview relative space requirement of a vehicle class compared
(ii) Home interview method to that of a passenger car under a specified set of
(iii) Post card method roadway, traffic and other conditions.
(iv) Tag on car method 797. If the average centre to centre spacing of
(v) work spot interview method vehicles is 20m, then the basic capacity of a
traffic lane at a speed o 50kmph is
Exam Point (a) 2500 vehicles per day
The weaving length of a roadway is the
(b) 2000 vehicles per hour
distance– Between the channeling islands
(c) 2500 vehicles per hour
Capacity of a 3.75 m traffic lane is– 1000 PCU
(d) 1000 vehicles per hour
Maximum daily traffic capacity of bituminous
WBPSC JE 2009
pavements is– 1500 tonnes per day
The maximum number of vehicles beyond which Ans. (c) : Spacing of Vehicles = 20 m
the rotary may not function efficiently is– speed = 50 km/hr
5000 vehicles per hour 1000V
The basic capacity of a traffic lane =
The geometric features requires the magnitudes S
of weaving angle and weaving distances for its Where, V → space mean speed (km/w)
design– Rotary design S → Minimum space head way (m)
Which set of traffic studies is needed for 1000 × 50
functional design as well as for highway capacity W= = 2500 Vehicles/hour.
20
design- Speed and volume studies
798. The traffic which measures the proportion of
794. Which one of the following light reflecting different types of traffic and establish relative
devices are used to guide the driver along importance of roads is called
proper alignment? (a) Traffic volume study
(a) Delineator (b) Road parking study
(b) Rumble strips (c) Speed and delay study
(c) Litter bin (d) Origin and destination study
(d) None of the above TNPSC JE/Supervisor 2012
MH PWD 2018
Ans. (a) : The traffic which measures the proportion of
Ans. (a) : Delineator are light retro reflecting devices different types of traffic and establish relative
mounted by the side of the roadway to indicate the
importance of roads is called traffic volume study.
roadway to indicate the roadway alignment, especially
for night driving. • Speed and delay study are carried out over a long
The three broad types of delineators are roadway distance and therefore, it is possible to determine
indicator, hazard makers and object markers. the traffic density.
Rumble strips is a series of raised strips across a road • Origin and destination studies are helpful in
or along its edge, changing the noise a vehicles tyres planning new highways and improving new
make on the surface and so warning drivers of speed existing services.
restrictions or of the edge of the road.
Exam Point
795. Which one of the following traffic volume is
considered in design of road geometrics in Ideal entry angle of a rotary is– 600
India? The PCU value of animal driven vehicle is– 5.0
(a) 30th highest hourly traffic volume Which is not considered as a commercial vehicle
(b) 40th highest hourly traffic volume in traffic surveys–
(c) 50th highest hourly traffic volume Tractor with axle load less than 3.5 tonnes
(d) 60th highest hourly traffic volume 799. The following is not considered as a
MH PWD 2018 commercial vehicle in traffic surveys :
Ans. (a) : Thirtieth highest hourly traffic volume is (a) Small truck with axle load less than 3.0 tonnes
considered in design of road geometrics in India. (b) Tractor with axle load less than 3.5 tonnes
• It is the hourly volume that will be exceeded only 29 (c) Trolly with axle load less than 4.0 tonnes
times in a year and all other hourly volumes of the (d) Trolly with axle load less than 4.5 tonnes
years will be less than this value. MP VYAPAM Sub Engg. 22.02.2015
Highway Engineering 589 YCT
 Ans. (a) : Ans. (a) : Parallel Parking–
• Small truck with axle load less than 3.0 tonnes is not • Parallel parking is generally preferred when the
considered as a commercial vehicle in traffic survey. width of kerb parking space and the width of the
• Large commercial vehicle like truck and buses occupy street are limited.
greater space and influence the other traffic in the • Parallel parking may be with equal spacing, facing
same lane as well as the vehicle along the adjoining the same direction or may be two cars placed
lanes. closely with open intervals between two-cars units.
800. Traffic density is number of vehicles moving : 804. If the velocity of moving vehicles on a road is
(a) Per unit length 24 km/h, stopping distance is 19 m and the
(b) Passing a given point in a hour average length of vehicles is 6 m, then the basic
(c) In a specific direction per lane per day capacity of the lane is
(d) In a specific direction per hour (a) 500 vehicles per hour
Nagaland PSC 2015 Paper-I (b) 700 vehicles per hour
Ans. (a) : • Traffic density is the number of vehicle (c) 1000 vehicles per hour
occupying a unit length of lane of roadway at a given (d) 1250 vehicles per hour
instant, usually expressed as vehicle per killometer. Assam PSC AE (PRD) 2020
801. An underground passage for the movement of
1000 V
traffic is called Ans. (c) : Capacity (C) =
(a) Underground way S
(b) Sub way where, V = Velocity of moving the vehicle
(c) Flyover S = Stopping distance + Avg. length of the vehicle
(d) Basement 1000 × 24
HPSSC JE Code 438/2018 C = = 960 ≈ 1000 veh/hr
19 + 6
Ans. (a) : An underground passage for the movement
of traffic is called underground way. 805. Width of a traffic lane is
• A tunnel is an underground passage way, dug (a) 5.50 m (b) 3.75 m
through the surrounding soil/earth/rock and enclosed (c) 7.50 m (d) 7.00 m
except for entrance and exit commonly at each end. TSPSC Observers 2013
802. For a stationary container system in solid waste Ans. (b) :
collection, if Ct is number of containers • Width of a traffic lane is 3.75 m
emptied per trip, 'uc' is average unloading time • The width of traffic lane is dependent upon the
per container, np is number of container width and operational characteristics of vehicles,
pickup locations per trip' is the average time the speed, composition and volume of the traffic
spend driving between container locations, and the location of barrier curbs.
What is the pick-up time required per trip? 806. AADT in Traffic Engineering stands for
(a) Annual Average Daily Traffic
(a) Ct(uc) + (np - 1) (dbc) (b) Average Annual Daily Traffic
(b) Ct(dbc) + (np - 1) (uc) (c) Assorted Average Data of Traffic
(c) Ct(uc) + (np + 1) (dbc)
(d) Average Available District Traffic
(d) Ct(dbc) + (np + 1) (uc)
APPSC AE Env. & Civil Common 2016 Paper-II Assam Engg. College Lecturer 2021
Ans. (a) : For stationary container system (Pscs)– Ans. (a) : • Annual average daily traffic count the
Pscs = Ct(uc) + (np - 1) (dbc) number of vehicles, passing and point for a year then
Ct = number of container emptied per trip. divide it by 365.
np = number of container pick up location per trip It also includes seasonal variation.
uc = average unloading time per stationary contains for 807. Consider the following statement
stationary container system. (1) The standard percentile value of a speed
dbc = average time spent driving between container taken for fixating the variability of human
location. characteristic is 85th percentile.
803. When the width of car parking space and the (2) The range of fairly clear vision is within 10º
width of street are limited, generally preferred to 12º
parking system is (3) Trend charts are useful for estimating the rate
(a) parallel parking of growth and for planning future expansion
0 Which of the above statement are correct?
(b) 45 angle parking
0
(c) 65 angle parking (a) (1) and (3) (b) (2) and (3)
0
(d) 90 angle parking (c) (1), (2) and (3) (d) (1) and (2)
Assam PSC AE (PRD) 2020 Nagaland PSC 2017 Paper-I
Highway Engineering 590 YCT
 Ans. (c) : (b) Spot speed
• The standard percentile value of a speed taken for (c) Overall speed
fixating the variability of human characteristic is (d) Running speed
85th percentile. IDJE CGVYAPAM Exam 2016
• The range of fairly clear vision is within 10º to 12º. Ans. (d) : The mean speed maintained by a vehicle
over a particular stretch of road while the vehicle is in
• Trend charts are useful for estimating the rate of
motion which excludes delays and stoppages is known
growth and for planning future expansion.
as running speed.
808. What will be the theoretical maximum capacity Running speed is also the ratio of total distance cover
for a single lane of a highway given that the to the total running time.
speed of traffic stream is 50 Kmph? 812. Traffic carrying capacity of single lane depends
(a) 300 veh/hrs (b) 35veh/hrs
on
(c) 3185 veh/hrs (d) 3800 veh/hrs
(a) Type of vehicles
Nagaland PSC 2017 Paper-I
(b) Level crossing
Nagaland PSC CTSE 2017 Paper-I
(c) Surface texture
Ans. (c) : Given, (d) All of above
Design speed (V) = 50 kmph (e) None of above
1000V CGPSC, AP, Lecturer Exam 2016
Theoretical maximum capacity =
S Ans. (d) : Traffic carrying capacity of single lane
S = 0.2 Vkmph + 6 = 0.2 × 50 + 6 = 16 m depends on–
1000 × 50 1. Type of vehicle
Theoretical max. capacity = = 3125 2. Level crossing
16
= 3185 veh/hrs. Nearest option (C) is correct. 3. Surface texture
809. The road geometrics in India are designed for 813. Low cost road is provided where traffic volume
the is not more than :
(a) 98th highest hourly traffic volume (a) 800 tones/day
th
(b) 85 highest hourly traffic volume (b) 600 tones/day
(c) 50th highest hourly traffic volume (c) 500 tones/day
(d) 30th highest hourly traffic volume (d) None of above
(e) None of above CGVYAPAM Sub Egg 2012
CGPSC, AP, Lecturer Exam 2016 Ans. (c) : Low cast roads–
Ans. (a) : Presentation of spot speed data– • This road are provided in localities where traffic
15th percentile speed – Lower limit of speed volume does not exceed 500 tonnes/day.
85th percentile speed – Safe speed • The low cost roads are meant for low intensity of
98th percentile speed – Design speed traffic.
810. The maximum number of vehicles that can • The low cost roads are constructed with the
pass given point as a lane or roadway during maximum use of locally available road material.
one hour under prevailing roadway ad traffic 814. After plotting the cumulative speed
conditions is termed as: distribution curve, which one of the following
(a) Practical capacity represents the lower speed limit?
(b) Possible capacity (a) 15th percentile speed
(c) Design capacity (b) 20th percentile speed
(d) Basic capacity (c) 25th percentile speed
MH PWD 2019 (d) 30th percentile speed
MH WCD 2019 MH PWD 2019
IDJE CGVYAPAM Exam 2016
Ans. (a) :
Ans. (b) : The maximum number of vehicles that can
• 98th % design speed
pass given point as a lane or roadway during one hour
under prevailing roadway ad traffic conditions is • 85th % Safe Speed limit
termed as possible capacity. • 15th % lower speed limit
Basic capacity–It is maximum number of passenger
cars that can pass a given point on a lane or roadway
during 1 hr. under the most nearly ideal roadway and
traffic conditions that can be attained.
811. The mean speed maintained by a vehicle over a
particular stretch of road while the vehicle is in
motion which excludes delays and stoppages is
known as :
(a) Average speed
Highway Engineering 591 YCT
 Exam Point (c) 75000 vehicles/hour (d) 10000 vehicles/hour
MH WCD 2019
n × 3600
The Formula for traffic Volume is- q = Ans. (a) : v = 80 kmph. s = 8
T 1000
PCU equivalent for a cycle is– 0.5 jam density = = 125veh / km
Design hourly Volume is equal to– 8
Approximately 8 to 10% of AADT v × ks 80 × 125
Capacity flow = =
A flyover segregates traffic with respect to– 4 4
Grade = 2500vehicle / hour
815. As per IRC suggestions, What is the value of 819. The free mean speed on a roadway is found to
tentative equivalency factor for large bullock be 120 kmph. Under stopped condition the
cart? average spacing between vehicles is 10 m. The
(a) 2 (b) 4 capacity flow (per lane) will be–
(c) 6 (d) 8 (a) 1500 vehicles/hour (b) 2000 vehicles/hour
MH PWD 2019 (c) 2500 vehicles/hour (d) 3000 vehicles/hour
Ans. (d) : As per IRC recommendation MH WCD 2019
Vehicle type PCU Ans. (d) : Given v = 120 km/h, S = 10m
(i) passenger car, tempo, auto rickshaw 1.0 1000
(ii) Bus, Truck, Agricultural tractor– 3.0 Jam density = = 100 / km
10
trailer unit Flow capacity per lane
(iii) Motor cycle, scooter, pedal cycle 0.50 100 × 120
(iv) Cycle rickshaw 1.50 = = 3000 vehicle / hour
(vi) Small bullock cart and hand cart 6.0 4
(vii) Large Bullock cart 8.0 820. An old worn out tyre may offer more friction
816. The free mean speed on a roadway is found to on a dry surface than a new tyre with treads
be 110 kmph. Under stopped condition the because:
average spacing between vehicles is 7.5 m. The (a) New tyres have a smoother surface
capacity flow (per lane) will be (b) Hollows of treads of tyres have more friction
(a) 3122 vehicles/hour (b) 3666 vehicles/hour (c) Old tyres get more accustomed to the surface
(c) 4083 vehicles/hour (d) 5208 vehicles/hour of the road
MH PWD 2019 (d) Old tyres have more contact area
DSSSB JE -23.10.2019 First Shift
Ans. (b) : Given, V = 11 kmph, S = 7.5 m
Ans. (d) : Friction– The friction between vehicle tyre
1000
Jam density (KJ) = = 133.33 / km and pavement surface is one of the factors determining
7.5 the operating speed and distance requirements in
V × KJ stopping and accelerating the vehicles.
Capacity flow (per lane) = • Smooth and worn out tyres offer higher friction
4
110 × 133.33 factor on dry pavement than new tyres with treads
= 3666vehicle / hour because large area of contact.
4 • But one wet pavement new tyres with good treads
817. The free mean speed on a roadway is found to give higher friction factors than worn out tyres. This is
be 120 kmph. Under stopped condition the because the lubricating effect of water on the wet
average spacing between vehicles is 12.5 m. The pavement is reduced as the water entraped between the
capacity flow (per lane) will be tyre and pavement escapes into the treads of the tyre.
(a) 1500 vehicles/hour (b) 2000 vehicles/hour
821. Which of the following is method of measuring
(c) 2400 vehicles/hour (d) 2500 vehicles/hour
spot speeds ?
MH WCD 2019
I. Enoscope method
Ans. (c) : V = 120 kmph, s = 12.5 m II. Photographic method
1000 (a) Neither method I nor II
Jam density (KJ) = = 80veh / km
12.5 (b) Both methods I and II
V × KJ (c) Only method I
Capacity flow (per lane) = (d) Only method II
4 DSSSB JE 20.11.2019, Evening
120 × 80
= = 2400vehicle / hour Ans. (b) : Following method are used measuring spot
4 speed–(i) Enoscope method
818. The free mean speed on a roadway is found to (ii) Graphic recorder
be 80 kmph. Under stopped condition the (iii) Electronic meter
average spacing between vehicles is 8 m. The (iv) Photo electric meter
capacity flow (per lane) will be –––– (v) Radar speed meter
(a) 2500 vehicles/hour (b) 5000 vehicles/hour (vi) photographic method
Highway Engineering 592 YCT
 Exam Point Ans. (a) Type of vehicle cannot be justified by
automatic counters.
Highway facilities are designed for–
827. What is the first stage in traffic engineering
Thirteenth quarter highest hourly volume studies?
Accident may occur because of– Stray cattle (a) Speed and delay studies
PCU equivalent for a bus is– 3.0 (b) Origin and destination studies
A disadvantage of mechanical counting of traffic (c) Traffic volume studies
is– It cannot make classified counts (d) Spot studies
ASSAM PSC AE (PWD) 2020
822. Which of the following is a traffic factor
Ans. (c) : Traffic volume study is the first stage study
affecting vehicle operation costs ?
(a) Vertical profile in traffic engineering studies.
(b) Roughness of surface • The various traffic studies generally carried out are–
(c) Speed of travel (i) Traffic volume study
(d) Pavement width (ii) Speed studies
DSSSB JE 20.11.2019, Evening (iii) Origin and destination study
Ans. (c) : Speed of vehicle– (iv) Traffic flow characteristics
• Vehicle speed is the dominant factor affecting (v) Traffic capacity study
vehicle operating costs. Typically operating costs (vi) Parking study
decrease with increasing speed to a certain point, and (vii) Accident studies or the traffic flop.
then increase with increasing speed. 828. The traffic volume of a roadway is defined as
823. If 20 vehicle passes in 5 minute from any place the multiplication of ..........
on a road, then calculate the number of vehicle (a) speed and time headway
at that place proportional per hour : (b) speed and distance way
(a) 240 vph (b) 7200 vph (c) traffic density and speed
(c) 120 vph (d) 14,400 vph
(d) time headway and distance headway
UPRVUNL JE 2014
SSC JE 22.1.2018, Morning Shift
Ans. : (a) Number of vehicle at that place proportional
20 × 60 Ans. (c) [Traffic Volume = Traffic density × Speed]
per hour = = 240 vph Traffic volume is the number of vehicles that pass a
5
given point during specified unit of time. It is
824. From where on the road the vehicles passing expressed as vehicles/hours or vehicle/day.
12,000 vph in the space headway is 0.25 mile
Traffic density is the number of vehicles occupying
than calculate flow diversity?
(a) 12vpm (b) 8 vpm a unit length of lane of roadways at a give instant,
(c) 4 vpm (d) 2 vpm expressed as vehicles/kilometers.
UPRVUNL JE 2014 829. Calculate the capacity (vehicle per hour) of the
Ans. : (b) 1 mile = 1.61 km road when reaction time of the driver is 2
= 1610 km seconds. The design speed is 80 kmph and
12000 average length of the vehicle is 6 m. Take
flow diversity = = 7.45 coefficient of friction as 0.35.
1610
≃ 8 VPM (vehicle per metre) (a) 600 (b) 653
825. Which one of the following is not a technique (c) 687 (d) 724
under predetermined motion time system ? SSC JE 24.1.2018, Morning Shift
(a) Work factor Ans. (b) : Capacity of Road (vehicle per hour)
(b) MTM 1000.V
(c) Stopwatch time study C= ------- (1)
s
(d) Synthetic Data Where
HPSSC JE Code 545/2018 S = Sg + L
Ans. (b) : Predetermined motion time system (PMTS)
 V2 
is a work measurement technique whereby times S =  0.278.V.t. + +L
established for basic human motions are used to build  254f 
up the time for a job at a defined level of performance.
 80 2 
826. The main drawback of automatic counters-cum- S =  0.278 × 80 × 2 + +6
classifiers, used for traffic volume studies, is that  254 × 0.35 
it is not yet possible to classify and record S = 122.47
(a) Vehicle type (b) Axle spacing 1000 × 80
(c) Axle load (d) Speed so C = = 653.21
122.47
ESE 2019
Highway Engineering 593 YCT
830. The value of rigidity factor for design purpose, Ans. (a) : The ratio of contact pressure to tyre pressure
if the tyre pressure is greater than 0.7 MPa is defined as rigidity factor. Thus value of rigidity
is........ factor is 1.0 for an average tyre pressure of 7 kg/cm2.
(a) Greater than 1 (b) Less than 1 Rigidity factor is higher than unity for lower tyre
(c) Equal to 1 (d) Zero pressure and less than unity for tyre pressure higher
2
SSC JE 22.1.2018, Evening Shift than 7 kg/cm .
Ans. (b) 834. If the space mean speed of a vehicle is 50
Wheel load kmph, then the time mean speed will be _____.
Contact Pressure = (a) Less than 50 kmph
Area of Imprint (b) Greater than 50 kmph
(c) Equal to 50 kmph
(d) Zero
BMC TA 2019
Ans. (b) : Time mean Speed (Vt) : Arithmetic mean
of speed of vehicles passing a point on a highway
during an internal of time
∑ Vi ∑ q i Vi
Vt = or Vt =
n ∑ qi
Space mean speed (VS) : Average speed of
 Contact Pressure  vehicles over a certain road length at any time. It is the
 Rigidity factor =  harmonic mean of the speed.
 Tyre Pressure 
n ∑ qi
If the tyre pressure is greater than 0.7 MPa then the VS = or VS =
value of rigidity factor is less than 1. ∑
1 q 
∑ i 
If the tyre pressure is equal to 0.7 MPa Vi  Vi 
the rigidity factor is equal to 1. Vi=Observed instantaneous speed of ith vehicle (km/h)
831. Which one of the following is not a part of n= No. of vehicles observed
‘speed and delay’ studies? V'S= Mean velocity of vehicles in the speed range.
(a) Floating car method qi= No. of vehicles in the ith speed range.
(b) Vehicle number method Vt > VS = 50km / h as AS
(c) Interview technique ↓ ↓
(d) License number method
ESE 2019 Arithematic > Harmonic mean
Ans. (b) Vehicle number method is not a part of speed mean
and delay studies. 835. The macroscopic traffic stream parameter is
832. The commutative speed distribution curve is ______
usually adopted for geometric design of (a) Time headway (b) Space headway
(c) Density (d) Queue length
highway. The percentile speed adopted for
BMC TA 2019
geometric design is ...............
Ans. (c) : The traffic stream parameters can be
(a) 85th percentile speed
macroscopic which characterizes the traffic as a whole or
(b) 90th percentile speed
microscopic which studies the behavior of individual
(c) 98th percentile speed vehicle in the stream with respect to each other.
(d) 99.9th percentile speed
SSC JE 1.03.2017 (Evening) Exam Point
Ans. (c) 98th percentile speed – An advantage of manual counting of traffic is–
98th percentile speed is usually adopted commutative Permits traffic classification by the type of
speed distribution curve is geometry design of highway. vehicle
• 85th percentile speed – Safe speed limit Whose is taken into consideration for computing
• 15th percentile speed – lower speed limit traffic capacity per lane of the highway–
• 50th percentile speed – median speed limit Equivalent of passenger cars
833. The value of rigidity factor for design of A lamp post at the edge of the pavement reduces
flexible pavement is: the capacity of the lane to– 72%
(a) greater than 1 for lower tyre pressure(<7 The increase in traffic constitutes the–
kg/cm2) Generated traffic, normal traffic growth,
2 development traffic
(b) less than 1 for lower tyre pressure(<7 kg/cm )
2 For the 900 parking number of spaces is–
(c) equal to 0 for lower tyre pressure (<7 kg/cm )
(d) equal to 1 for lower tyre pressure (<7 kg/cm2) L
N=
UPRVUNL JE 2019 2.5
Highway Engineering 594 YCT
836. Spot speed study in traffic engineering can be Ans. (c) : Traffic density– Traffic density is the
found by using a : number of vehicles occupying a unit length of lane of
(a) Compass (b) Radar meter roadway at a given instant.
(c) Manometer (d) Plumb bob Traffic Volume– It is defined as the survey of number
GMC Surveyor 2018 of vehicles and pedestrian crossing section of road per
Ans.(b) : • Spot speed study in traffic engineering can unit during any selected period.
be measured by using radar speed metre. Traffic capacity– Traffic capacity is the maximum
• Other equipment used for spot measurement are traffic density a road can accommodate at given speed
graphic recorder, electronic meter, photo electric without delay.
meter, and by photographic methods. 841. The traffic conflicts that may occur in a rotary
837. Suggested number of lanes for a traffic intersection are :
capacity of 600 vehicles/hr/lane is: (a) merging and crossing
(a) 2 lanes (b) 4 lanes (b) merging and diverging
(c) 6 lanes (d) 8 lanes (c) crossing and diverging
KERALA PSC Code 196/2015 (d) crossing, merging and diverging
Ans. (b) : Assam Power Distribution 2017
Vehicles number of per Number of lane Ans. (b) : The traffic conflicts that may occur in a
hour rotary intersection are merging and diverging.
1. Very low traffic One lane 842. In traffic engineering, lines connecting origin
2. 300 vehicles per hours Two lane points with destination points are know as:
3. 300 – 600 vehicles per Three lane (a) Basic line (b) Service lines
hours (c) Alignment lines (d) Desired lines
4. 600 – 1500 vehicles per Four lane LMRC AM 2019
hours Ans. (d) Desired lines are the lines connecting origin
838. Which one of the following is/are type of speed points with destination points in traffic engineering.
studies considered under traffic studies? 843. Total number of conflict points in a right
(i) Spot speed study angled intersection of cross roads with two-way
(ii) Speed & delay study traffic on both roads are
(a) Only (i) (b) Only (ii) (a) 20 (b) 18
(c) Both (i) & (ii) (d) Neither (i) nor (ii) (c) 35 (d) 24
MH WCD 2019 SSC JE 23.03.2021 (Morning)
Ans. (c) : Two type of speed studies considered under BSPHCL 8.02.2019 Shift-I
traffic studies– DSSSB JE 05.01.2019
(i) spot speed study (ii) speed delay study.– Spot speed Ans. (d) : Number of points of conflicts on two lane
studies are conducted to estimate the distribution of roads meeting at right angles–
speed of vehicles in a stream of traffic at a particular Types of traffic Number of conflicts
location on a highway. Both the roads two way 24
speed and delay study gives– One road one way 11
(i) Running speed (ii) Overall speed (iii) fluctuation in Both the roads one way 06
speed (iv) Delay b/w two station
839. Pedestrian loading Islands are provided at Exam Point
(a) useful for the change the traffic direction The design capacity is also known as–
(b) to separate opposing flow of traffic Practical capacity
(c) to guide the traffic Highway capacity is defined as the total number
(d) regular bus stop for protection of passengers of vehicles that can pass a given point in –
Tamil Nadu PSC 2019
Unit period of time
Ans. (d) : Pedestrian islands are provided to serve as
When the width of kerb parking space and width
safety zones for the aid and protection of persons on
of street are limited, generally preferred parking
foot.
system is– Parallel parking
If a divisional island is located in an urban area where
pedestrians are present, portions of each island can be For the 600 parking number of spaces is–
considered a refuge island. L-2
N=
840. The number of vehicles occupying a unit length 2.9
of a lane of roadway at a given instant is: The theoretical capacity (C) of a highway (i.e.
(a) Traffic volume (b) Traffic capacity the number of vehicles passing any point in one
(c) Traffic density (d) Base capacity 1000V
Assam Power Distribution 2017 hour per lane) is given by– C=
KPSC 2015 Code 143/2015 S

Highway Engineering 595 YCT

844. The minimum value of 15 minutes peak hour Ans. (c) : V = 30 kmph
factor on a section of road is f = 0.45
(a) 0.1 (b) 0.2 V2
(c) 0.25 (d) 0.33 Radius of rotary curve (R) =
127 f
HSSC JE Panchyati Raj 2015
( 30 )
2
PHED JE Dept. (Cat -9) 2015
R=
V/4 127 × 0.45
Ans. (c) : PHF =
V15 R = 15.75 m
V = Peak hourly volume (veh/hr) 849. In a traffic survey, the traffic volume counts of
V15 = Max 15 minute volume within peak hour classified vehicles are to carried out on all
The minimum value of 15 minute peak hour factor on existing roads in a region, preferably for :
(a) 24 hours per day for seven days
15
a section of a road is = 0.25 (b) 24 hours per day for four days
60 (c) 24 hours per day for five days
Maximum value is 1.0 (d) 24 hours per day for six days
Minimum value is 0.25 DSSSB JE 5.11.2019, Morning
845. Scientific planning of transport system and Ans. (a) : Traffic volume is the number of vehicles
mass transit facilities in cities is based on crossing a section of road per unit time at any selected
(a) Spot speed data period.
(b) Origin and destination data • The traffic volume counts of classified vehicles are
(c) Traffic volume data to carried out on all existing roads in a region,
(d) Accident data preferably for 24 hours per day for seven days.
JKSSB JE 2013 850. A vehicle moves obliquely across the path of
Ans. (b) : Origin and destination (O & D) study– another vehicle moving in the same direction at
• Scientific planning of transportation system and mass a relatively small angle of crossing. This is
called :
transit facilities in cities should be based on origin and
(a) weaving (b) crossing
destination data of passenger trips.
(c) merging (d) diverging
• Also future traffic needs may be estimated by DSSSB JE 5.11.2019, Morning
extrapolating the data from O & D study.
Ans. (a) : A vehicle moves obliquely across the path
846. If the stopping distance and average length of a of another vehicle moving in the same direction at a
vehicle are 18 m and 6 m respectively, then the relatively small angle of crossing, this is called
theoretical maximum capacity of a traffic lane weaving.
at a speed of 10 m/sec is • The weaving maneuver may also be considered to
(a) 1000 vehicles/hr (b) 1500 vehicles/hr consist of two vehicles of adjoining lances making
(c) 2000 vehicles/hr (d) 3000 vehicles/hr 'lane changes' or merging and diverging operations
JKSSB JE 2013 along a short stretch.
1000V 851. The relationship between speed and density is
Ans. (b) : Capacity of traffic lane (C) = generally :
S
(a) Linear
1000 ×10 × 18
= = 1500 veh/hr. (b) Parabolic
(18 + 6 ) × 5 (c) No relation
847. The minimum green time required for the (d) Asymptotic to both axes
vehicular on any of the approach is _____. Kerala PSC JTO 2020
(a) 70 sec (b) 30 sec KPSC JTO Code 10/2020
(c) 50 sec (d) 16 sec Ans. (a) : The relationship between speed and density
DSSSB JE 20.11.2019, Shift II is linear
Ans. (d) : The minimum green time required for the • Relation between volume and density is parabolic.
vehicular traffic on any of the approaches is limited to
16 seconds.
848. Calculate the radius of rotary curve for a
vehicle speed of 30 kmph and coefficient of
friction as 0.45 : 852. The space at a road Junction over which traffic
(a) 12.73 m (b) 22.34 m is not allowed to move is known as
(c) 15.75 m (d) 30.5 m (a) Traffic Island (b) Camber
DSSSB JE (Mains) 20.03.2021 (Evening) (c) Foot paths (d) Pedestrian Crossing
DSSSB JE 20.11.2019, Shift II DSSSB JE 23.10.2019, Shift-II
Highway Engineering 596 YCT
Ans. (a) A traffic island is a solid or painted object in 856. If PCU of a taxi is 1.0, the same of truck will be
a road that channels traffic. It can also be a narrow strip tentatively, as per IR recommendation
of island between roads that intersect at on acute angle. (a) 0.3 (b) 1.0
Classification of traffic island – (c) 3.0 (d) 4.0
(i) Divisional island – Separate opposing flow of KMC 2009
traffic on a highway. Ans. (c) : If PCU of a taxi is 1.0, the same of a truck
(ii) Channelizing island – Used to guide the traffic will be tentatively 3 as per IRC recommendation.
into proper channel through the intersection area. 857. If L is the length of vehicles in meters, C is the
(iii) Pedestrian loading island – Providing of regular clear distance between two consecutive vehicles
bus stop and similar place for the protection of (stopping sight distance), V is the speed of
passenger. vehicles in km per hour, the maximum number
Camber –It is the slope provided to the road surface in N of vehicles/hour is .........
the transverse direction. 1000V L+C
(a) N = (b) N =
Foot path : It is used for pedestrian. L+C 1000V
853. No. of traffic lanes to be decided from the 1000L 1000C
relation: (c) N = (d) N =
C+V L+V
Peak vol. of vehicales per hour KMC 2009
(a)
Capacity of single lane of traffic SSC JE 4.3.2017, Afternoon Shift
(b) Peak vol. of vehicles per hour × Capacity of Ans. (a) If length of vehicle (L) m
single lane of traffic C is the clear distance between two consecutive
vehicles, V is the speed of vehicles, in KMPH, N of
Capacity of single lane of traffic vehicle / hour.
(c)
Peak vol. of vehicales per hour 1000V
N=
(d) None of the above L+C
WBPSC SAE 2000 858. The spot speed study on highway is conducted
Ans. (a) : The number of traffic lanes, vehicular and by
driver characteristics, and one- or two-way traffic (a) Radar (b) endoscope
movements have a direct bearing on the lane or (c) moving car method (d) traffic counter
highway capacity. Nagaland PSC CTSE 2017 Paper-I
854. As per the IRC guidelines, pedestrian green Ans. (b) : Spot speed study on highway is conducted
time is calculated for walking speed of by endoscope.
________. • The spot speed may be obtained either by finding the
(a) 2.5m/s (b) 1.2m/s running speed of vehicles over a short distance of less
(c) 3.2m/s (d) 1.8m/s than 50 metre or by finding the instantaneous speed
MP Sub Engineer 2020 while crossing a section, depending upon the method
used.
Ans. (b) : As per IRC guidelines on the basis of
• It is the simple, cheap and easy to use.
walking speed 1.2 m/sec pedestrian green time
calculated. 859. The passenger car unit value for car as per
Time required for a person to cross the intersection. IRC is
(a) 0.5 (b) 1
t = width of intersection / walking speed of person.
(c) 2 (d) 3
855. Highway facilities are designed for which of the WB AE 2020
following? Nagaland PSC CTSE 2017 Paper-I
(a) Annual average hourly volume Ans. (b) : • The passenger car unit value for car as
(b) Annual average daily traffic per IRC is 1.
(c) Thirtieth highest hourly volume • Some other vehicles and PCU value.
(d) Peak hourly volume of the year
Vehicle type Passenger Car units
JKSSB JE 2013 Tempo, auto rickshaw, 1
Ans. (c) : Thirtieth highest hourly volume– The car
design hourly volume is found from the plot between Truck, bus, tractor 3
hourly volume and the number of hours in an year that Motor cycle, scooter 0.5
the traffic volume is exceeded. For this all hourly and cycle
volumes are arranged in decreasing order and order no. Horse-drawn vehicle 4
is given to each of them. The data at order no. 30 is the 860. Which one of the following is useful to find the
30th highest hourly volume. The 30th highest hourly traffic volume distribution along the existing road
volume is the hourly volume that will be exceeded only (a) Average daily traffic (b) traffic flow maps
29 times in a year and all other hourly volume of the (c) variation charts (d) trend chart
year will be less than this value. Nagaland PSC CTSE 2017 Paper-I
Highway Engineering 597 YCT
 Ans. (a) : Average daily traffic (ADT)–It is the 865. The average of a number of spot speed
average 24 hour volume at a given location for some measurement in traffic survey is
period of time less than a year. For minimum of 7 days (a) Space means speed (b) Running speed
count is done to include the daily variation for some (c) Time mean speed (d) Journey speed
period of Sunday. Mizoram PSC Disaster Mgmt. 2015, Paper III
861. It is a safety island and serves the dual purpose Ans. (c) : Time mean speed–
of affording the protection to the pedestrians • It is the arithmetic mean of the speed of the
and segregating the traffic into the proper vehicles passing a point on a highway during an
channel interval of time.
(a) Refuge island (b) Traffic island • It represent the speed distribution of vehicles at a
(c) Turbine island (d) Multiple junction point on the roadway.
KPSC Overseer/Draftsman 2020 Space mean speed–
Ans. (a) : Pedestrian loading Islands/Refuge island is a • It is the average speed of vehicles over a certain
safety island and serves the dual purpose of affording road length at any time.
the protection to the pedestrians and segregating the • Space mean speed is the harmonic mean of the
traffic into the proper channel.
speed of the speed of the vehicles passing a point at
Exam Point highway during an interval of time.
866. Enoscope is used to determine
As per recommendations of I,R.C. traffic volume
(a) Spot speed (b) Average speed
study is carried out for rural roads for 7 days
continuously during– (c) Space-mean speed (d) Time-mean speed
Harvesting and lean season Odisha JE (Mains) 30.06.2019
Volume of traffic which would immediately use MH WCD 2019
a new road or an improved one when opened to Nagaland PSC 2017 Paper-I
traffic is known– Normal traffic growth MP VYAPAM Draftsman 8.07.2017, 9.00 am
Light reflecting device used to guide the driver Nagaland PSC 2016 Paper-I
along the proper alignment are called– GSSSB Surveyor 2016
Delineators Nagaland PSC 2015 Paper-I
862. The instrument used for registering the Punjab JE (Local Govt.) 2014
number of revolutions of a wheels is– JKSSB JE 2013
(a) pedometer (b) passometer Ans. (a) : Speed studies–
(c) pacing (d) odometer • Speed of vehicles vary with time and space.
Haryana SSC JE 11.04.2018 (Shift-I) • 2 types
Ans. (d) : Odometer– (A) Spot speed study
• The device which attached with the wheel of any (B) Average speed study
vehicle and records the number of revolutions of the Spot speed–It is measured using enoscope, loop
wheel is known as odometer. deflector, doppler radar and pressure contact tubes.
• The number of revolutions multiplied by the • Enoscope is used to determine spot speed.
circumference of the wheel and records the distance. • In its simplest principle, the observer is stationed on
863. Speed of vehicles follow a _____ distribution. one side of the road and starts a stopwatch when a
(a) binomial (b) normal vehicle crosses that section.
(c) probability (d) position • The main advantage of this method is that it is a
PGCIL 13.09.2018 simple and cheap equipment and is easy to use.
Ans. (b) : Speed of vehicle follow normal distribution. 867. Traffic volume is equal to
864. The traffic way provided in such a way that (a) Traffic density × Traffic speed
during floods, water is allowed to flow across Traffic density
the communication route: (b)
(a) Super passage (b) Cause way Trafficspeed
(c) Fly over (d) Bye pass Traffic speed
KPSC Code 96/2016 (c)
Traffic density
Ans. (b) :
Cause way–The traffic way provided in such a way (d) None of the above
that during floods, water is allowed to flow across the WBPSC JE 2007
communication route. Ans. (a) : Traffic volume–At any cross-section of the
Super passage–The hydraulic structure in which the road in a particular unit time interval either 1 hour, 1
drainage is taken over the irrigation canal. The day, 1 month, 1 year etc. the passing of total number of
structure is suitable when the bed level of drainage is vehicles is known as traffic volume.
above the full supply level of the canal. Traffic volume = Traffic density × Traffic speed
Highway Engineering 598 YCT
 872. Average free flow speed and the jam density
4. Traffic Control Regulation observed on a road stretch are 80 km/h and
868. Webster design method used in: 100 vehicles/km respectively. For a linear
(a) Method of speed studies speed-density relationship, the maximum flow
(b) Determination of road capacity on the road stretch (in vehicles/h) is:
(c) Design of Transition Curves (a) 800 veh/hour (b) 2000 veh/hour
(d) Design of Traffic Signals (c) 1800 veh/hr (d) 2200 veh/hour
Assam Engg. College Lect. 2021 HPSSC JE - 18.04.2021
M.P. VYAPAM Sub Engg. 2.9.2018, 2.00 pm Ans. (b) : Vsf = 80 km/h
Kj = 100 veh/km
Ans : (d) • Webster design method used in design of
Vsf × K j 80 ×100
traffic signals. qmax = =
• It is rational approach method. 4 4
• Other two design method are trial cycle method and = 2000 veh/hr.
approximate method. 873. Compulsory direction control signs are :
(a) Circular in shape with a yellow background
869. On a right-angled road intersection with two-
and white direction arrows.
way traffic the total number of conflict points (b) Circular in shape with a black background
are and white direction arrows.
(a) 4 (b) 12 (c) Circular in shape with a blue background and
(c) 24 (d) 16 white direction arrows.
DSSSB JE (Mains) 20.03.2021 (Afternoon) (d) Rectangular in shape a blue background and
Nagaland PSC 2016 Paper-I white direction arrows.
UPRVUNL JE 2014 HPSSSC JE 11.04.2021
Ans. (c) : On a right angled road intersection, the total Ans. (c) : Compulsory direction control sign–
number of conflict points are- • They are provided where the traffic has to be moved
• Both roads are two-way traffic = 24 (Major-16, to specific direction only.
Minor-8) • These signs are having circular shape, blue
• Both roads are one-way traffic = 6 background and white arrows
• One road is two way, other one-way = 11
870. What is the overloading capacity quite
common in India for a “single unit three
truck”?
(a) 45 tonnes (b) 40 tonnes
(c) 30 tonnes (d) 28 tonnes 874. The signpost should be painted in:
DSSSB JE 20.03.2021 Morning (a) 25 cm alternatively in black and white bands
Ans. (c) : • A single unit three truck can carry 15 (b) 70 cm white and green bands
tonnes of pay load, through overloading upto 30 tonnes (c) 50 cm black and yellow bands
is quite common. (d) 10 cm yellow and black bands
• An average two-axled single unit truck is permitted DSSSB JE (Mains) 20.03.2021 (Evening)
to carry 10 tonnes of pay load, through overloading up Ans. (a) : The sign post should be painted in 25 cm
to 20 tonnes is quite common. alternatively in black and white bands.
871. Which of the below is not one of the basic 875. According to IRC, the maximum volume of
forms of channelization for transport? traffic that a rotary can efficiency handle is :
(a) Cross intersection (a) 2500 vehicle /hr (b) 3000 vehicle /hr
(b) T-Intersection (c) 3500 vehicle /hr (d) 2000 vehicle /hr
(c) Rotary intersection RPSC ACF and FRO 24.02.2021
(d) Y-intersection Ans. (b) : According to IRC, the maximum volume of
DSSSB JE 20.03.2021 Morning traffic that a rotary can efficiently handle is 3000
Ans. (c) : vehicle /hr.
• Rotary intersection is not one of the basic form of 876. Desire lines are plotted in
channelization for transport. (a) Traffic volume studies
• Channelization may be either partial or complete (b) Speed studies
with divisional and direction island and medians. (c) Accident studies
(d) Origin and destination studies
• The example of channelized intersection are–
GSSSB AAE 07.02.2021
(i) Tee - intersection MH WCD 2019
(ii) Cross intersection Nagaland PSC CTSE 2017 Paper-I
(iii) Y-intersection Nagaland PSC 2016 Paper-I
Highway Engineering 599 YCT
 Ans. (d) : Desire line is a graphical representation (3) Cautionary/Warning Sign
prepared in almost all origin and destination study. Shape - Triangular
Desire line are straight lines connecting the origin
point with destination.
The width of such desire lines in drawn
proportional to the number of trips in both
direction.
877. "Dead Slow" is a
(a) regulatory sign
880. The fatal head-on accidents generally or mostly
(b) warning sign
occur at
(c) informatory sign
(a) 4-Lane divided highways
(d) none of the above
(b) Unsignalised road intersections
GSSSB AAE 07.02.2021
MH PWD 2016 (c) Urban roads in peak-hours
(d) Undivided highways
Ans. (a) : Regulatory sign– The term regulatory sign
Assam Engg. College Lecturer 2021
describes a range of sign that are used to indicate
traffic laws. Regulatory sign– Dead slow, stop, speed Ans. (d) : • Fatal head on accidents generally occurs at
limit, keep right Wrong way, one way, .......... etc. an undivided highways.
878. Maximum number of vehicles can be parked 881. The average speed maintained by a vehicle
with over a particular stretch of road, while the
(a) parallel parking vehicle is in motion, is known as
(b) 300 angle parking (a) design speed (b) running speed
(c) 450 angle parking (c) spot speed (d) overall speed
(d) 900 angle parking ASSAM PSC JE 27.12.2020
RPSC Lect. (Tech.Edu.) Paper-II 2021 Ans. (b) : Running speed– The average maintained
Nagaland PSC 2016 Paper-I by a vehicle over a particular stretch of road, while the
MH PWD 2016 vehicle is in motion, is known as running speed.
AAI (Aeronautical JE) 2015 Design speed– Design speed is a selected speed used
Ans. (d) : • Angle parking accommodates more to determine the various geometric features of the
vehicles per unit length of kerb and maximum vehicles road.
that can be parked is with an angle of 90 degree. Spot speed– Spot speed is the instantaneous speed of a
• Angle parking or parallel may be allowed in the kerb vehicle at any specific location.
parking. Overall speed– The highest overall speed at which a
879. The traffic signs that are circular and driver can travel on a given highway under favorable
equilateral triangular in shape are, weather conditions and under prevailing traffic
respectively: conditions without at any time exceeding the safe
(a) Cautionary and Mandatory signs speed as determined by the design speed on a section
(b) Informatory and Warning signs by section basis.
(c) Mandatory and Cautionary signs 882. Traffic density is :
(d) Warning and Prohibitory signs (a) No. of vehicles passing a point in a specific
Assam Engg. College Lecturer 2021 direction in per lane per day
Ans. (c) : Classification of signs (b) No. of vehicles passing a point in a specific
(1) Mandatory/Regulatory Sign direction per hour
Shape - Circular (c) Maximum no. of vehicles passing a given
point in one hour
(d) No. of vehicles occupied per unit length of
road at an instant
Kerala PSC JTO 2020
Ans. (d) : Traffic density is the number of vehicle
occupied per unit length of road at an instant.
(2) Informatory sign/Guide sign It is expressed as Vehicle/km.
Shape - Rectangular 883. The maximum number of vehicles moving on a
road at any section during one hour is known
as
(a) traffic density
(b) traffic volume
(c) resist skidding
(d) prevent sudden increase of overturning force
KMC 2009
Highway Engineering 600 YCT
 Ans. (b) : Traffic density– It is the number of 886. Optimum signal cycle in Webster Method is
vehicles occupying a unit length of lane of roadway at given by Co :
a given instant. It is usually expressed as vehicle/hour 1.5 L + 10 1.5 L + 5
(a) C0 = (b) C0 =
or vehicles/day. 1+ Y 1+ Y
Traffic Volume– It is the number of vehicle that pass 1.5L + 5 1.65 L + 5
a given point during specific unit of time. It is usually (c) C0 = (d) C0 =
1- Y 1− Y
expressed as vehicles/hour or vehicles/day. M.P. VYAPAM Sub Engg. 4.9.2018 9.00 am
Traffic capacity– It is the ability of a roadway to
Ans (c) : Websters method
accommodate traffic volume. It is expressed at
maximum number of vehicle in a lane or a road that 1.5L + 5
C0 =
can pass a given point n unit time. 1- Y
Traffic speed– The total number of vehicles passing a C0 = Optimum cycle time
given point in a given time. Traffic flow is expressed L = Total lost time
as vehicle per hour. 887. Webster's method is used for:
884. The normal flows on two approach roads at an (a) Road marking
intersection are respectively 500 pcu/h and 300 (b) Marking centerline of the road
pcu/h. The corresponding saturation flow is (c) Determining design traffic volume
1600 pcu/h on each road. The total lost time (d) Determining optimum signal cycle
per single cycle is 16 s. The optimum cycle time MP VYAPAM Sub Engg. 8.07.2017, 2.00 pm
by Webster’s method is Ans : ( d ) Webster's Method–
(a) 72.5 s (b) 58.0 s • This is a rational method
(c) 48.0 s (d) 19.3 s • Optimum signal cycle time based on least delay at
ESE 2018 intersections is worked out.
Ans. (b) • Saturation flow (s) and normal flow (q) values per
Lost time per cycle = 16 sec unit time on each road meeting at junction are required
Normal flows, q1 = 500 Vph for signal design.
q2 = 300 Vph 1.5L + 5
• Optimum cycle time (C0) =
Saturation flows s1 = 1600 Vph 1− Y
q q
y = y1 + y2 = 1 + 2 Exam Point
S1 S2
For the parallel parking number of spaces is–
500 300 800
= + = = 0.5 L
1600 1600 1600 N=
6.6
As per Webster, cycle time Minimum permissible speed on high speed
1.5L + 5 1.5(16) + 5 roads, is decided on the basis of–
Co = =
1– y 1 – 0.5 15 percentile cumulative frequency
Co = 58 sec Moving car observer methods is a procedure–
To find the traffic flow of a traffic stream
885. The theoretical capacity of a one-way traffic Speed regulations on roads is decided on the
lane with a stream speed of 50 kmph, when the basis of– 85 percentile cumulative frequency
average vehicle length and reaction time are Traffic engineering deals with the–
5.5 m and 0.7 sec, respectively, is .............. Traffic operation,
veh/hr/lane. Design and application of control devices,
(a) 3467 (b) 4467 Analysis of traffic characteristics
(c) 4356 (d) 3283 Maximum daily traffic capacity of bituminous
Haryana PSC AE 2020 Paper-II pavements is– 1500 tonnes per day
Ans. (d) : V = 50 kmph 888. Name of the survey data which is plotted by
l = 5.5 m means of desire line's
T = 0.7 sec (a) Accident
SSD = 0.278 V× t + L (b) origin and destination
= 0.278 × 50 × 0.7 + 5.5 (c) classified volume
= 15.2 m (d) speed and delay
Theoretical capacity – Nagaland PSC 2017 Paper-I
1000 V Ans. (b) : Origin and destination studies is plotted by
C= desire lines.
S
• Desire lines are straight lines connecting the origin
1000 × 50 points with destinations.
C=
15.23 • The width of such desire lines is drawn proportional
C = 3282.99 = 3283 veh/hr/lane to the number of trips in both directions.
Highway Engineering 601 YCT
889. 'School ahead' is ------------------ road sign. Exam Point
(a) Informatory (b) Compulsory International Traffic Intelligent survey Data are
(c) Cautionary (d) None of these related with– Classified traffic volume studies
MH PWD Nashik 2015 Increase in traffic volume, due to increase in
Ans. (c) : Cautionary road sign– These signs are transport vehicles, is known as–
meant to warn the driver about the hazard/ situation Generated traffic growth
laying a head on the road. The traffic carrying capacity of a single lane,
• Cautionary signs are triangular in shape with red depends on– Level crossings,
border. type of the vehicles, road intersections
892. Select the correct match of the given
Exp. Right hand curve left hand curve, right/ information.
lest pin band, right/left reverse band........ etc. 1. Regulatory signs A. prohibitory
signs, restriction
890. The free mean speed on a roadway is found to end signs, stop
be 80 kmph. Under stopped condition the and give way
average spacing between vehicles is 10m. The signs, etc.
capacity flow (per lane) will be– 2. Warning signs B. cross road, side
(a) 1500 vehicles/hour road right,
(b) 2000 vehicles/hour narrow bridge
(c) 2500 vehicles/hour etc.
(d) 3000 vehicles/hour 3. Informatory signs C. parking signs,
MH WCD 2019 flood gauge,
HPSSC JE CODE 552/2018 facility
Ans. (b) : V = 80 km/h. S = 10m information
1000 1000 sign, etc.
Jam density = = = 100 / km (a) 1→B, 2→C,3→A (b) 1→A, 2→C,3→B
S 10
(c) 1→C, 2→A,3→B (d) 1→A, 2→B,3→C
V.K J
The capacity flow = SSC JE Civil 30.10.2020 (Evening)
4 Ans. (d) :
80 × 100
= = 2000vehicle / hour
4
891. A traffic rotary is justified were :
(a) The number of intersecting road between 4
and 7
(b) The space is limited and costly
(c) When traffic volume is less than 500 vehicles
per hour
(d) When traffic volume is more than 500 893. In which type of traffic signal system do signals
vehicles per hour along a given road shows the same indication
(e) When traffic volume is more than 1000 (green, red, etc.) at the same time?
vehicles per hour (a) Simple progressive system
Odisha JE (Mains) 30.06.2019 (b) Flexible progressive system
Ans. (a) : Guidelines for the selection or rotaries– (c) Simultaneous system
• There are few guidelines that help in deciding the (d) Alternative system
suitability of a rotary. They are listed below. SSC JE Civil 30.10.2020 (Evening)
1. Rotaries are suitable when the traffic entering from Ans. (c) : Simultaneous System–Under this system,
all the four approaches are relatively equal. all the signals along a given street always display the
2. A total volume of about 3000 vehicles per hour can same indication to the same traffic stream at the same
considered as the upper limiting case and a volume time.
of 500 vehicles per hour is the lower limit from all Disadvantage–It is not conductive to give continuous
legs. movement of all vehicles.
3. A rotary is very beneficial when the proportion of The overall speed is often reduced.
the right-turn traffic is very high, typically if it is The division of the cycle time is the same at all the
more than 30 percent. intersection.
4. Rotaries are suitable when there are more than four 894. Regulatory signs are generally circular in
approaches or if there is no separate lanes available shape. Identify a regulatory sign which is NOT
for right-turn traffic rotaries are ideally suited if the circular in shape.
intersection geometry is complex. (a) No parking sign
Highway Engineering 602 YCT
 (b) Restriction Ends sign Ans. (c) : In traffic signals red colour light is used to
(c) Stop sign stop vehicles because it is having longer wave length
(d) Speed limit sign and low frequency compared to any other colour on
SSC JE Civil 11.12.2020 (Evening) visible spectrum.
Ans. (c) : Regulatory signs–These signs require the The colour which is having longer wavelength will
driver to obey the signs for the safety of other road undergo lesser scattering hence it is visible from a
users. These signs have generally black legend on a longer distance. So, red light is able to travel the
white background. longest distance through fog, rain and the alike.
• Regulatory signs are generally circular in shape like
speed limit signs, prohibitory signs, No parking and 897. Which of the following is taken as the highest
No stopping except the stop sign of octagonal shape. safe speed limit derived from spot speed study.
for a highway?
(a) 98th percentile speed
(b) 85th percentile speed
(c) 80th percentile speed
Stop sign Speed limit sign No entry
(d) 90th percentile speed
SSC JE Civil 30.10.2020 (Morning)
LMRC AM 2019
One Way No Stopping No parking MH PWD 2018
895. How many major crossing conflict points exist Ans. (b) : Presentation of Spot Speed data–
th
on a right-angled two-lane road intersection 15 percentile speed – Lower limit of speed
with two-way traffic on both roads? 85th percentile speed – Safe speed
(a) 32 (b) 44 98th percentile speed – Design speed
(c) 16 (d) 24
SSC JE Civil 28.10.2020 (Evening)
Ans. (c) :

A. Both road are one way = 6 898. Grade separation had the advantage of
B. one road is two way, other one; one way = 11 (a) easy right turn
C. Both road are two way = 24 (b) no speed restriction
• Major conflicts = 16 (for crossing) (c) number of points of conflicts is nil
• Minor conflicts = 8 (for merging) (d) occupying the least space
896. Red light is used as signal for stop as it is APPSC AEE 2011 Paper-II
visible from greater distances than other TSPSC Observers 2013
colours because of its: Ans. (c) : Grade separation–
(a) smallest wavelength and low frequency A grade separation is a crossing of a highway and a
compared to any other colour on visible railway, two highway or a pedestrian walkway and a
spectrum highway at different levels without interruption.
(b) high frequency and small wavelength Advantages–
compared to any other colour on visible • It provides maximum facility to crossing traffic and
spectrum avoid accidents while crossing.
(c) longest wavelength and low frequency • They provide increased safety for turning traffic.
compared to any other colour on visible • They help to increase speed limits.
spectrum
(d) longest wavelength and high frequency • Reduces number of conflict to nil.
compared to any other colour on visible Disadvantage–
spectrum • They are space intensive i.e it takes a lot of space.
SSC JE Civil 29.10.2020 (Morning) • They are costly to build.
Highway Engineering 603 YCT
899. Unguarded level crossing comes under Exam Point
(a) warning sign (b) informatory sign
The particular places where pedestrians are to
(c) regulator sign (d) route marker sign
cross the pavement which are properly marked
APPSC AEE 2011 Paper-II
by the pavement marking is known as–
Ans. (a) : Unguarded level crossing–It comes under Marked crosswalk lines
warning sign. Webster's method is used for–
• Sign indicates that there is a railway crossing not Determining optimum signal cycle
manned by personnel. A road sign indicating ‘no parking’ is–
• It has to be crossed by driver himself very Mandatory sign
cautiously. When two equally important roads cross roughly
Classification of traffic signs at right angles, the suitable shape of central
(1) Mandatory/Regulatory sign island is– Circular
• Give way, STOP, compulsory left, speed limit are The provision of traffic signals at intersections–
example of regulatory signs. Reduces right angled collisions but may
• It's violation is a legal offence. increase rear end collisions
(2) Cautionary/Warning sign
• Men at work, major road ahead, hair pin bend are 902. The weaving length of a roadway is the
example of warning sign. distance
• Warn road users of existence of certain hazardous (a) Equal to half circumference of rotary
conditions. (b) Between the channelising islands
(3) Informatory sign (c) Equal to diameter of rotary
• Petrol pump, hospital direction sign are example of (d) Equal to total width of adjoining radial roads
informatory sign. Nagaland PSC 2016 Paper-I
• It is used for guiding the road users. Ans. (b) : Weaving length
900. C.T.C. stands for • It is the distance between the channelising islands.
(a) Critical track control
(b) Centralized traffic control
(c) Critical track channeliser
(d) Centralized traffic channeliser
Nagaland PSC 2017 Paper-II
Ans. (b) : CTC
• CTC stands for centralized traffic control.
• It is the new generation product designed for the
purpose of meeting requirement of railway
transportation network.
• CTC combines professional techniques such as
railway signaling, railway communication and
railway transport with modern information
technologies.
901. For the movement of vehicles at an intersection 903. When two equally important roads cross
of two roads, two lanes, without any roughly at right angles, the suitable shape of
interference, the type of grade separator central island is
generally preferred to, is (a) Circular (b) Elliptical
(a) Trumpet (b) Diamond interchange (c) Tangent (d) Turbine
(c) Delta (d) Clover leaf BSPHCL JE 29.01.2019 Shift III
Nagaland PSC 2016 Paper-I BSPHCL JE 29.01.2019 Shift I
Ans. (d) : Cover leaf– Nagaland PSC 2016 Paper-I
Ans. (a) : When two equally important roads crosses
roughly at right angles, then shape adopted for central
island is circular.
904. The most economical lighting layout which is
suitable for narrow roads is
(a) Single side lighting
(b) Staggered system
(c) Central lighting system
• Full clover leaf interchange eliminates all crossing (d) Double side lighting
movement conflicts by the use of weaving sections. Nagaland PSC 2016 Paper-I
• It helps for the movement of vehicles at an Ans. (a) : The most economical lighting layout for
intersection of two roads, without any interference. narrow roads is single side lighting

Highway Engineering 604 YCT

905. The background colour of an informatory sign Ans. (a) : Classification of signs–
board is (1) Mandatory/Regulatory
(a) Red (b) Yellow Shape–Circular
(c) Green (d) White (2) Informatory Sign
CRPF SI Overseer 2017 Shape–Rectangular
Nagaland PSC 2016 Paper-I (3) Cautionary/Warning sign
HSSC JE (CAT-13) 2015 Space–Triangular
MH Jalgaon Zila Parishad 2015
909. ______ is a platform situated on carriage way
Ans. (b) : Informatory sign so as to divided the streams of traffic and also
Background colour - Yellow to provide safe area for pedestrians.
Shape - Rectangular (a) Refuge island (b) Camber
Mandatory/Regulator Sign (c) Road junction (d) Weather roads
Background colour - White NPCIL JE 2020
Shape - Circular Ans. (a) : Refuge Island–A raised platform or a
Cautionary/Warning Sign guarded area situated in the carriageway as to divide
Background colour - Yellow the streams of traffic and to provide a safety area for
Shape - Triangular pedestrains.
906. Which of the following is indicated by a
warning sign? Exam Point
(a) Level crossing The IRC recommendation for warning sign is
(b) No parking expressed by– Triangle on top
(c) End of speed limit On highways the sign of "Dead Slow" is a–
(d) Overtaking prohibited Regulatory sign
Nagaland PSC 2016 Paper-I The provision of traffic signals at inter-sections–
Ans. (a) : Warning Sign Reduces right angled collision but may
increase rear end collision
Example–Level crossing, Hair pin bend, Men at work,
Disadvantage of traffic signals–
major road ahead The rear–end collisions increase
Mandatory sign
Example–Give way, STOP, Compulsory left, Speed 910. In traffic sign, sign in circular shape, blue
background, a red border, and an oblique red
limit
bar at an angle of 45o is used as,
Informatory sign
(a) Stop sign (b) No-parking sign
Example–Petrol pump, Hospital direction sign.
(c) Prohibitory sign (d) Speed limit sign
907. Centre line markings are used Tamil Nadu PSC 2019
(a) To designate traffic lanes Ans. (b) : No parking Sign
(b) In roadways meant for two way traffic
(c) To indicate that overtaking is not permitted
(d) To designate proper parking of vehicles
Nagaland PSC 2016 Paper-I
Ans. (b) : Centre line marking
• Centre line separates the opposing streams of traffic
and facilitates their movement • No parking sign has blue background, red border
• Usually no centre line is provided for roads having with 45º oblique bar
width less than 5m and for roads having more than 911. Which of the following is not an example of
four lanes regulatory sign?
(a) Stop sign (b) Give way sign
• Centre line may be marked with either single
(c) One-way sign (d) T-intersection sign
broken line, single solid line, double broken line or
LMRC AM 2018 Shift-II
double solid line.
Ans. (d) : Regulatory sign–
Background – White
Shape – Circular
908. The following sign are represented in circular • Dead slow is a regulatory sign
shape :
(a) Regulatory (b) Warning
(c) Informatory (d) Guide
GSSSB Sub-overseer 2020
GPHC JE 2018
Highway Engineering 605 YCT
 Ans. (d) : Traffic Manoeuvre–
Diverging –

Example–STOP, GIVE WAY, One way sign, Merging–

Compulsory keep left, Speed Limit, Horn prohibited.
• T-Intersection sign is a warning sign.
912. When a number of roads are meeting at a point
Crossing–
and only one of the roads is important, then the
suitable shape of rotary is
(a) circular (b) tangent 916. As per the recommendation of Indian Standard
Institution (ISI), which one of the following
(c) elliptical (d) turbine
average level of illumination on important
HPSSC JE 2015 roads carrying fast traffic?
Ans. (b) : • When a number of roads are crossing at a (a) 30 lux (b) 40 lux
point and only one of the roads is important then shape (c) 50 lux (d) 60 lux
of rotary is tangent MH Nagar Parishad Mains 2018
• When a number of roads are crossing and two roads Ans. (a) : (Group A1)– Importance traffic routes
are equally important and intersect at right angle then caring fast traffic avg. level of Illumination on road
circular rotary is used. surface 30 lux.
(Group A2)– Other main road carrying mixed traffic,
913. Which of the following road component is laid like main city streets arterial road, throughway etc.
on urban roads to allow kerb parking ? • Avg. level of Illumination on road surface 15 lux.
(a) Lay byes 917. Fill in the blanks with appropriate words
(b) Drive ways regarding Traffic Signals : A part of the signal
(c) Parking lanes cycle allocated to traffic movement or a
(d) Bus bays combination of traffic movement is called ........
UPPCL JE 25.02.2020 and any of the division of the signal cycle
Ans. (c) : It is provided on urban lanes for side during which signal indications do not change
is called the..........
parking. for parking preferred because it is safe for
(a) Interval, phase
moving vehicles on road. Minimum parking lane (b) Phase, interval
width-3m in parallel parking case. (c) Interval, clearance time
Bus Byes– Provided by recessing the kerb for bus stop. (d) Clearance time, interval
They are provided so that they do not obstruct MH Nagar Parishad Mains 2018
movement of vehicles in carriage way. Provided at Ans. (b) : Phase– A part of the signal cycle allocated
least 75 m away from intersection. to traffic movement or a combination of traffic
Lay Byes– It is a short strip of road on side of main movement.
road where vehicles can stop for a while. Interval– It is any of the division of the signal cycle
Drive ways– A short private road that loads from a during which signal indications do not change.
public road to a house or garage. 918. Which one of the following correctly represent
914. The most efficient traffic signal system is the specification of "STOP" regulatory sign?
(a) simultaneous system (a) Octagonal shape, red in colour with white
(b) alternate system border
(c) flexible progressive system (b) Hexagonal shape red in colour with white
border
(d) simple progressive system
(c) Octagonal shape white in colour with red
ASSAM PSC AE (PWD) 2020 border
MH PWD 2016 (d) Hexagonal shape, white in colour with red
Odisha JE (Mains) 2015 border
Ans. (c) : Flexible Progressive system– When the MH PWD 2019
offset and cycle length can be changed to meet MH Nagar Parishad Mains 2018
demands of fluctuating traffic at different times of the Ans. (a) : Stop sign– It is a regulatory sign.
day. It is most efficient traffic signal system. –It is octagonal shape, red in colour with white border.
915. The traffic manoeuvre means
(a) diverging (b) merging
(c) crossing (d) all the above
MH PWD 2016
Highway Engineering 606 YCT
919. Which one of the following formula is used to Exam Point
calculate the proportion of weaving traffic?
The height of mandatory traffic sign discs above
Where, a = left turning traffic moving along
the ground level should be– 2.8 m
left extreme lane d = Right turning traffic
moving along right extreme lane b = When a number of roads are meeting at a point
Crossing/weaving traffic turning towards right and only one of the roads is important, then the
while entering the rotary, c = Crossing / suitable shape of rotary is– tangent
weaving traffic turning towards left while The color of upper part of kilometer stone on
leaving the rotary road side in case of state highway is– Green
(a) (b + c) / (a + b + c + d) Mostly traffic sign is applied to the traffic line–
(b) (a + d) / (a + b + c + d) Normal
(c) (a + b + c + d) / (b + c) The highway traffic movement means–
(d) (a + b + c + d) / (a + d) Diverging, Crossing, merging
MH Nagar Parishad Mains 2018 The most suitable traffic signal system for mixed
Ans. (a) : Given, traffic condition is– Flexible progressive
a = crossing waving traffic turning toward right 922. Which of the following is NOT a traffic control
while entering the rotary. signals?
b = Crossing/weaving traffic turning towards right (a) Fixed-time signal
while entering the rotary. (b) Manually operated signal
c = crossing/weaving traffic turning toward left (c) Traffic actuated signal
while leaving the rotary. (d) Pedestrian signal
d = Right running traffic moving along right extreme
MH PWD 2018
(b + c)
lane weaving traffic = Ans. (d) : Type of traffic signals–The signal are
(a + b + c + d) classified into following type.
920. Which one of the following is/are type of traffic (i) Traffic control signals
control signals? A. Fixed control signal
(a) Fixed time signal B. Manually operated signal
(b) Manually operated signal C. Traffic actuated signal
(c) Traffic actuated signal (ii) Pedestrian signal
(d) All of the above (iii) Special traffic signal
MH WCD 2019 923. Which of the following instrument is used for
MH Nagar Parishad Mains 2018
measuring illumination level of light?
Ans. (d) : Traffic signal– Traffic signals are the (a) Lux meter
control devices which alternatively direct the traffic to (b) Frequency meter
stop and proceed at intersection using red and green
(c) Harmonic analyser
traffic light signal automatically.
(d) Digital multi meter
Types of traffic signals–
(i) Traffic control signals–(a) Fixed time signals UPPCL JE 25.02.2020
(b) Manually operated signals Ans. (a) :
(c) Traffic actuated signals • Lux meter is an instrument for measuring
(ii) Pedestrian signals illumination level in light or count of light.
(iii) Special traffic signal • Used in photography and in fine working.
921. The shape of Regulatory signs for road users of 924. Which of the following is a limitation of traffic
STOP and GIVE-WAY signs are respectively rotary?
(a) Circular and Octagonal (a) Rotaries can be constructed with advantage
(b) Triangular and Octagonal when the number of intersecting roads is
(c) Triangular and circular between four and seven
(d) Octagonal and Triangular (b) All traffic including those turning right or
Nagar Parishad Pre 2018 straight have equal opportunity as those
Ans. (d) : A stop sign is a traffic sign designed to notify turning left
drivers that they must come to a complete stop and make (c) When the distance between intersections on
sure the intersection is safely clear off vehicles. an important highway is less, rotaries become
troublesome.
(d) Capacity of rotary intersection is the highest
of all other intersection at grade
UPPCL JE 25.02.2020
Ans. (c) : The guidelines of traffic rotary–
Give way sign– It indicates that merging drivers must (1) Rotaries are suitable when the traffic movement
prepare to stop if necessary to let a driver on another entering from all the four approaches are
approach proceed. relatively equal.
Highway Engineering 607 YCT
 (2) A traffic volume of about 3000 vehicle per hour Ans. (c) Rotary Intersection
can be considered as upper limit and a volume of • A rotary intersection is a specialised form of
500 vehicle per hour is lower limit. intersection at grade in which the traffic moves in one
(3) A rotary is beneficial when the right turn traffic direction round a central island.
is high and is more than 30% • Rotaries are suitable when traffic volume are
(4) Rotary are suitable when there are more than four approximately equal of each leg.
approaches.
• According to IRC, maximum traffic volume of 3000
(5) When the distance between intersection highway
PCU/hr entering from all legs and volume of 500
is reduced rotary become troublesome as entry
and exit width get reduced. PCU/hr should be minimum limit
925. What does a yellow sign with a skull and Exam Point
crossbones indicate? Traffic conflicts that may occur in a rotary inter–
(a) There is a risk from motorcyclists section are– Merging and diverging
(b) There is a risk from pirates. Optimum signal cycle in Webster Method is
(c) There is a risk from animals 1.5L + 5
(d) There is risk of toxic hazard. given by Co – Co =
UPPCL JE 25.02.2020 1- Y
The shape of 'Give Way' sign in the traffic signal
Ans. (d) : Skull and cross-bones is a symbol of a is– Inverted triangle
human skull with two long bones crossed.
Webster design method used in–
• It is a symbol of death and as warning symbol of Design of Traffic Signals
poisonous substance and danger toxic hazard. Annual average daily traffic is obtained by
• Used mainly by military forces. determining average daily traffic volume
926. Which of the following is not a correct recorded for– 365 days
statement with respect to basic requirements of
intersection at grade? 929. Following sign in figure indicates which
(a) Good lighting at night is desirable cautionary precautions :
(b) At the intersection the area of conflict should
be as big as possible
(c) Sudden change of path should be avoided
(d) Geometric features should adequately
provided
UPPCL JE 25.02.2020
Ans. (b) : The basic requirement of intersection at
grade are– (a) Dead end cross road
(i) At the intersection the area of conflict should be as (b) Side road right
small as possible (c) Side road left
(ii) Sudden change of path should be avoided (d) Narrow bridge
(iii) Geometric features like turning radius and width of MP VYAPAM Draftsman 4.4.2016 9.00 am
pavement should be adequately provided. Ans. (a)
(iv) Good lighting at night is desirable.
(v) Adequate visibility should be available for vehicles
approaching the intersection.
927. A safety sign which tells you that you must
NOT do something (e.g. don't dig), should be in
which colour?
(a) Yellow (b) Black
(c) Green (d) Red
UPPCL JE 25.02.2020
Ans. (d) : Red colour is used as a sign of for
prohibition of work for security concern or purpose.
928. The road intersection where all converging
vehicles are forced to move round a large
central island in one direction before they can
weave out of traffic flow into their respective
direction radiating from the central island is
Narror Bridge
called as____.
(a) Clover leaf
(b) Staggered intersection
(c) Rotary intersection
(d) Skewed intersection
Right hand curve
MP VYAPAM Sub Engg. 9.07.2017, 2.00 pm
Highway Engineering 608 YCT
930. Following sign signifies which action Ans. (a) : Keep Left

• Keep left is a mandatory sign.

(a) Axle load limit
Mandatory sign
(b) Load limit
(c) Length limit
(d) Restriction end sign
MP VYAPAM Draftsman 4.4.2016 9.00 am
Ans. (d)

935. PCU means :

(a) Personal car unit
(b) Passenger car unit
(c) Passenger care unit
Restriction end sign (d) Personal care unit
Tamilnadu PSC 2019
PGCIL 13.09.2018
Maharashtra PSC HOD 5.10.2014
Ans. (b) : PCU (passengers car unit)
• It is difficult to estimate the traffic volume and
capacity of road way facilities under mixed traffic
flow, unless the different vehicle classes are converted
to one common stand and vehicle unit.
931. 'Divisional island' is provided to prevent : • A common practice to consider the passengers car
(a) Head on collision as the standard vehicle unit to convert the other
(b) Nose to tail collision vehicle classes and this unit is called passengers car
(c) Tail to tail collision unit or PSU.
(d) Side swipe vehicle Class Equivalency
Nagaland PSC 2015 Paper-I factor
Ans. (a) : Divisional Island Passenger car, Tempo, auto rickshaw 1
• These separate the opposing flow of traffic on a Bus, Truck, Agricultural tractor 3
highway with four or more lanes Motorcycle, scooters pedal cycle 0.5
• It helps in preventing head on collision. Horse drawn vehicle 4
932. Traffic signs are to be placed at a cone of : Small bullock cart and hand cart 6
(a) 20º (b) 15º large bullock cart 8
(c) 10º (d) 3º 936. The range of volume to capacity ratio
Nagaland PSC 2015 Paper-I theoretically
Ans. (d) : • Traffic signs are to be placed at a cone of (a) 0 to 1.0 (b) 0.5 to 1.0
3º. (c) 0.5 to 1.5 (d) 0 to 1.5
TSPSC Observers 2013
933. Traffic signals are advantageous in :
(a) No rear end collision Ans. (a) : Volume to capacity ratio–
(b) Orderly movement of traffic • It is the measurement of the operating capacity of
(c) Easy segregation of traffic roadway or intersection where the number of vehicles
(d) Quick movement of vehicles passing through is divided by the number of vehicles
Nagaland PSC 2015 Paper-I that would theoretically pass through when at capacity.
Ans. (b) : Traffic signals are advantageous in–
• Orderly movement of traffic.
• They help in reducing the frequency of an accident
• They provide authority to drivers to move with
confidence.
• They provide economy over manual control at the
intersection.
934. A road sign that indicates to 'Keep left' is a :
(a) Mandatory sign (b) Warning sign
(c) Probitory sign (d) Informatory sign • Range of volume to capacity ratio theoretically is 0
Nagaland PSC 2015 Paper-I to 1.
Highway Engineering 609 YCT
937. The duration of green time of a traffic signal (e) None of above
depends on: CGPSC, AP, Lecturer Exam 2016
(a) traffic density (b) traffic volume Ans. (a) :
(c) traffic speed (d) All of the above
Nagaland PSC 2017 Paper-I
[ESE-2015]
Ans. (b)
• The concept of green time in a traffic signal is
depend on the traffic volume.
• The green time signal was introduced as a means of • Overtaking prohibiting is a regulatory sign
determining the number of vehicles crossing a • Regulatory signs are generally circular in shape.
section of road per unit time at any selected period.
• Regulatory signs having generally white background.
• Traffic volume studies are conducted to collect data
on the number vehicles and/or pedestrians that pass Exam Point
a point on a highway facility during a specified time The shape and colour of speed limit signboard
period. are–
938. When two road's with A and B, A is one way Circular and having white background, red
and B is two way the total number of potential border and black numerals indicating speed
major conflict point would be limit
(a) 32 (b) 24 An artificially built, raised platform of any
(c) 11 (d) 16 suitable shape at an intersection for the
Nagaland PSC 2017 Paper-I channelisation of traffic is called– Central island
Ans. (c) : Number of potential conflicts Traffic signs are classified into which
(A) Both roads are one way = 6 categories– Mandatory (Regulatory),
(B) One road is two way, other one- one way = 11 Warning and Informatory Sign
(C) Both roads are two way = 24 (Major = 16, Minor = 8) Average illumination on important roads as per
939. Determine the optimum cycle length if the sum I.S. recommendation is– 30 lux
of the ratio's of normal flows to saturation flow The capacity of a single lane road is–
of two directional flow is 0.75 and the total lost Inversely proportional to the average center
time per cycle is 8 seconds- to center spacing of the vehicles
(a) 68 seconds (b) 60 seconds The shape of the STOP sign according to IRC:
(c) 80 seconds (d) 80 seconds 67-2001 is- Octagonal
CG Housing Board AE Exam 2014 942. For pedal cycle, suggested PCU value for
Ans. (a) : According to Webster method urban roads at mild block section is
(a) 0.5 (b) 0.7
1.5L + 5
Optimum cycle time (sec) = C 0 = (c) 0.4 (d) 0.1
1− Y CGPSC, AP, Lecturer Exam 2016
n
q Ans. (a) : • Pedal cycle PCU value is 0.5
Y = ∑ i = 0.75 (given)
i −1 Si
Vehicle class Equivalency
factor
1.5 × 8 + 5
C0 = Passenger car, Tempo, Auto rickshaw 1
1 − 0.75 Motor cycle, Scooter, Pedal Cycle 0.5
C0 = 68 sec Cycle, Rickshaw 1.5
Where, L = Total Lost Time Bus, Truck 3
C0 = Optimum cycle time 943. Which is a type of interchange from following?
940. Determine the number of potential conflicts (a) Diamond (b) Trumpet
having two way traffic operation if road A (c) Clover leaf (d) All of above
consists of 2 lane and road B consists of 4 (e) None of above
Lanes- CGPSC, AP, Lecturer Exam 2016
(a) 24 (b) 32 Ans. (d) :
(c) 16 (d) 11
CG Housing Board AE Exam 2014
Ans. (b) : • For two way traffic one road is 2 land and
other road is 4 lane have total 32 conflict points.
941. Which of the following is regulatory sign?
(a) Overtaking prohibited
(b) Half pin bend left
(c) Flood gauge
(d) T-intersection a head
Highway Engineering 610 YCT
944. At an intersection signal is provided, where 947. In Traffic signal, which of the following is
there are a large number of nothing but any of the division of the signal
(a) Crossing traffic and right turning traffic cycle during which signal indications do not
(b) Right turning traffic and left turning traffic change?
(c) Crossing traffic and left turning traffic (a) Interval
(d) Left turning traffic (b) Phase
(e) None of above (c) Both Interval and Phase
CGPSC, AP, Lecturer Exam 2016 (d) Clearance time
Ans. (a) : Intersection signals are provided MH PWD 2019
• At crossing traffic Ans. (a) : Interval– It is any of the division of the
• At right turning traffic signal cycle during which signal Indication do not
945. Which one of the following type of conflict can change.
occur at an intersection? Phase– A part of the signal cycle allocated to traffic
(a) Crossing conflict movement or a combination of traffic movement
(b) Merging conflict 948. In the design of traffic rotaries in India, the
(c) Diverging conflict value of design speed in urban area & rural
(d) All of the above area, respectively are
MH PWD 2019 (a) 30 kmph & 40 kmph
MH WCD 2019 (b) 40 kmph & 50 kmph
Ans. (d) : Type of conflict occur at an intersection- (c) 50 kmph & 40 kmph
(i) Merging conflict (d) 40 kmph & 50 kmph
(ii) Diverging conflict MH PWD 2019
(iii) Crossing conflict Ans. (a) : Design of traffic rotaries in India–
(i) V = 40 km/hr– for rural area
(ii) V = 30 km/hr– for urban area

Where V = design speed.

V2
Radius of rotary R =
127f
Where, f = 0.43 to 0.47 for speed of 30 to 40 km/hr
949. Which one of the following is/are type of traffic
Exam Point island?
(a) Divisional island
At a road junction, 7 cross conflict points are (b) Channelizing island
severe if– Both are two-way roads (c) Pedestrian loading island & rotary
The duration of green time of a traffic signal (d) All the other options
depends on– Traffic volume MH WCD 2019
The advantage of a rotary is– Ans. (d) : Traffic island is physical structure or a
No waiting by traffic painted object found on roads.
The length of the side of warning sign boards of Type of traffic Island–
roads is– 45 cm (i) Divisional island
The traffic manoeuvre means– (ii) Pedestrain loading island
Diverging, merging, crossing (iii) Channelizing island
Pedestrain loading island is located in between– (iv) Rotary Island
Cycle lane and motor vehicle vane 950. For two major roads with divided carriageway
946. While designing traffic rotaries, the value of crossing at right angle, a full clover leaf
design speed in urban area is interchange with four indirect ramps is provided.
(a) 30 kmph (b) 40 kmph Following statements are made on turning
(c) 50 kmph (d) 60 kmph movements of vehicles to all directions from both
MH PWD 2019 roads. Identify the correct statement:
Ans. (a) : Design of traffic rotaries in India– (a) Merging from left is not possible but
(i) V = 40 km/hr– for rural area diverging to left is possible
(ii) V = 30 km/hr– for urban area (b) Both merging from left and diverging left are
possible
Where V = design speed. (c) Merging from left is possible, but diverging is
V2 not possible
Radius of rotary R = (d) Neither merging from left nor diverging to
127f left is possible
Where, f = 0.43 to 0.47 for speed of 30 to 40 km/hr PHED JE Dept. (Cat -9) 2015
Highway Engineering 611 YCT
 Ans. (b) : For full clover leaf both merging from left 954. In Traffic signal, which of the following is
and diverting to left are possible nothing but a part of the signal cycle allocated
to a traffic movement or a combination of
traffic movement?
(a) Interval
(b) Phase
(c) Clearance time
(d) Clearance time or interval
MH PWD 2019
Ans. (b) : Phase– A phase is the sequence of
conditions applied to one or more streams of traffic,
951. A two lane national highway and a two lane which during the cycle receive simultaneous identical
state highway intersects perpendicularly (right signal indication.
angles). Assuming that both the roads are two Ex.– 2–phase system, 3- Phase system, 4- Phase
way the number of conflict points at the system
intersection is:
(a) 11 (b) 24 the number of phase should be kept to a minimum in
(c) 17 (d) 32 order to minimize delay
DSSSB JE -23.10.2019 First Shift 955. In type of road making, Marking indicated for
Ans. (b) : Number of potential conflicts pedestrian crossings comes under :
(A) Both roads are one way = 6 (a) Object markings
(B) One road is two way, other one is one way = 11 (b) Carriage way markings
(C) Both roads are two way = 24 (Major-16, Minor-8) (c) Longitudinal pavement marking
952. Which equipment is used for measuring the (d) Both Carriage way markings and Object
level of physical activity done by a human markings
being ?
(a) Odometer (b) Speedometer DSSSB JE 20.11.2019, Morning
(c) Passometer (d) Pedometer Ans. (b) : Carriageway marking is done for pedestrian
DSSSB JE 4.11.2019, Afternoon crossings
Ans. (d) : Odometer– • Pedestrian crossing of road marking for a particular
• Device used for measuring distance travelled by a intersection depends on several variable such as speed,
vehicle. characteristics of traffic, availability of space.
Speedometer • Pedestrian crossings are provided at places where
• Instrument that indicate speed of a vehicle conflict between vehicular and pedestrian traffic is
• It is combined with an odometer severe.
Passometer
• At intersections, the pedestrian crossings should be
• It is an electromechanical and portable instrument
which count the number of paces or velocity of body preceded by a stop line at a distance of 2 to 3 m for
movement. unsiganlized intersections.
Pedometer 956. Which of these is INCORRECT in case of
• It is portable electronic or electromechanical device channelised intersection of roads.
that counts each step of person. (a) Separates conflicts
953. In parking surveys, the total number of (b) Protects pedestrians
vehicles parked in an area at a specified (c) Controls speed
moment is known as : (d) Very cheap to construct
(a) Parking accumulation DSSSB JE -23.10.2019 Second Shift
(b) Parking index Ans. (d) : Channelized Intersection
(c) Parking turn over • It is the separation or regulation of conflicting traffic
(d) Parking volume movements into definite paths of travel by traffic
DSSSB JE 20.11.2019, Morning islands or pavement marking to facilitate the safe and
Ans. (a) : Parking Accumulation orderly movements of both vehicles and pedestrian.
• It is defined as number of vehicles parked at a given Objectives
instant of time. 1. Separation of manoeuver areas
• Normally this is expressed by accumulation curve. 2 Reduce excessively large paved areas.
Parking index 3. Control of speed
• It is also called occupancy or efficiency 4. Provide space for traffic control devices
• It is defined as ratio of number of days occupied in a 5. Protection of pedestrians and reduction of crossing
time duration to the total space available. distances between refuses.

Highway Engineering 612 YCT

 Exam Point (2) Parking Load
For the movement of vehicles at an intersection • It gives area under accumulation curve
of two roads, without any interference, the type • It is expressed as vehicle hours.
of grade separator generally preferred to, is– (3) Parking Index
Clover leaf • It is called as occupancy or efficiency
An elliptical rotary island is provided when– • It is defined as ratio of number of bays occupied in a
Most of the traffic is along its major axis time duration to the total space available.
Rotary is ideally suited– (4) Parking Duration
When traffic is more than 4 streams join at • It is the length of time spent in parking space.
the junction • It is the ratio of total vehicle hours to the number of
'End of speed limit' is a– Informatory sign vehicles parked.
'Level crossing' is a– Warning sign Parking load
Parking duration =
957. What is the other name for a spiral intersection Parking volume
of roads?
(a) Y-intersection 960. Which of these is not an advantage of rotary
(b) Scissors intersection intersection?
(c) Rotary intersection (a) Orderly traffic flow is maintained
(d) T-intersection (b) It is most suited for 5 or more intersections
DSSSB JE -23.10.2019 Second Shift (c) When used on high speed roads, require
Ans. (c) : • Spiral intersection of roads are also called extremely large size
as rotary intersection (d) In normal condition traffic proceeds
Traffic operations in a rotary simultaneously
(1) Diverging DSSSB JE -23.10.2019 Third Shift
(2) Merging Ans. (c) : Advantage of rotary intersection –
(3) Weaving (i) Crossing manoeuver is converted into weaving or
Design elements merging and diverging operations.
(ii) All traffic including those turning right or going
straight across. The rotary have equal opportunity as
those turning left.
(iii) There is no necessity of traffic police or signal to
control the traffic as the traffic rotary could function
by itself as a traffic controlled intersection.
(vi) The possible number of accidents and the severity
of accidents are quite low.
• The IRC suggests that the maximum volume of
traffic that a rotary can efficiently handle is 3000
vehicles per hour entering from all the legs of the
intersection.
958. Yellow (amber) colour of a coloured light 961. Traffic signs are classified into which
traffic signal in a junction indicates: categories?
(a) go (b) stop (a) Warning and Informatory Sign
(c) be ready to go (d) clearance time (b) Regulatory, Warning and Informatory Sign
KSDC-KLDC Code 41/2014 (c) Regulatory and Informatory Sign
Ans. (d) : Yellow (Amber) colour of a coloured light
(d) Regulatory and Warning Sign
traffic signal in a junction tell us clearance time.
Change interval is also called yellow time. NMRC JE 2019
• Normal value is generally (3 to 6) sec. Ans. : (b)
959. The length of time spent in a parking space is Traffic signs are classified into 4 categories –
known as : • Regulatory / Mandatory signs– Stop, no entry,
(a) parking index (b) parking volume speed limit, no parking
(c) parking load (d) parking duration • Warning signs– Cross roads, stop fail, speed breaker,
DSSSB JE 20.11.2019, Evening right/left hand curve.
Ans. (d) : Parking statistics • Informatory signs –Hospitals, keep left, parking, turn
(1) Parking volume light, public telephone
• Total number of vehicles parked at a given duration
of time. • Guiding signs– Town name board, city limit sign,
• It does account for repetition of vehicles. route maker for N.H.
Highway Engineering 613 YCT
 Exam Point Ans. : (b) Type of intersection
The traffic survey schemes is most relevant (1) At grade intersection
when deciding on locating major routes in a (A) Divisional Island
city– Origin and destination survey (B) Rotary
A portion of the traffic way that is used by (C) Pedestrian loading Island
pedestrains only is called– (D) Channelizing Island
Foot path/Side walk/Foot way (2) Grade separated Intersection
The following is indicated by a warning sign– (A) Trumpet interchange
Level of crossing (B) Clover leaf interchange
'Fixed delay' in a highway is due to– (C) Diamond interchange
Traffic signals
(D) Directional interchange
The most economical lighting layout which is
suitable for narrow roads is– 966. Most traffic sign is applied on traffic line :
Single side lighting (a) Normal
As per IRC recommendations, the average level (b) Parallel
of illumination of important roads carrying fast (c) Inclined and parallel
traffic is– 30 lux (d) Inclined
A basic requirement of 'Intersection at grade' is– UPRVUNL JE 2014
The area of conflict should be small Ans. : (a) • Most signs applied on traffic line is normal
962. ______ sign is posted when dual carriageway is to the moving traffic.
ending and single carriageway is starting. • Traffic signs are mostly normal because to make the
(a) Series of bends driver clearly visible the sign boards and traffic signals.
(b) Start of dual carriageway
967. Assertion (A) : In an intersection design, the
(c) End of dual carriageway
relative speed is dependent on the absolute
(d) Overhead cable speed of intersecting vehicles and the angles
NLC GET 24.11.2020 between them.
Ans. (c) : The dual carriage way sign is sometimes Reason (R) : When the angle of merging is
called the end of dual motorway' sign, it is usually small, relative speed will be high.
used in dual carriageway. (a) Both (A) and (R) are true and (R) is the
The sign warn the driver that incoming traffic will be correct explanation of (A).
more closer as there will no more dual lanes passing in
(b) Both (A) and (R) are true and (R) is not the
each direction.
correct explanation of (A).
963. In relation to traffic, the Amber time in the (c) (A) is true and (R) is false.
time cycle is seen when the time goes on :
(d) (R) is true and (A) is false.
(a) Red (b) Yellow
(c) Green (d) Either red or green HPSSC JE CODE 552/2018
UPRVUNL JE 2014 Ans. (c) : • In an intersection design, relative speed is
Ans. : (b) • Amber time in time cycle is seen when dependent on absolute speed of intersecting vehicles
time goes on yellow. and the angles between them.
• Yellow (Amber) time is also called as clearance time. • When the angle of merging is small, the relative
• Normally value is generally 3 to 6 m. speed will also be low.
964. What caution information is the back ground • If collision between two vehicles at small angle at
colour of traffic sign board? about same speed or low relative speed, the impact
(a) White (b) Yellow would vehicle collide at high relative speed.
(c) Green (d) Red • As relative speed increases, the judgment of drivers
UPRVUNL JE 2014 regarding time and the distance is likely to be more
inaccurate, thus increasing the possibility and severity
Ans. : (b) • Cautionary/Warning sign is triangles in
of accidents.
shape and it has yellow background colour
• Mandatory/Regulatory sign is circular is shape and it • Thus at intersection design care has to be taken to
has white background colour. keep the relative speed low.
• Informatory sign is rectangular in shape and it has 968. Light reflecting devices used to guide the
yellow background colour. driver along the proper alignment are called:
965. ............ is a type of intersection : (a) rumble stripe (b) Delineators
(a) Grade differentiated (c) litter bin (d) Non of the above
(b) Grade separated HPSSC JE Code 463/2018
(c) Grade collimated Nagaland PSC 2017 Paper-I
(d) Grade merged KPSC JE 2.7.2016
UPRVUNL JE 2014 [ESE-2010]
Highway Engineering 614 YCT
Ans (b) Delineators : Ans. (d) : I.R.C 65-1976 recommends a minimum
• The role of delineators is to provide visual weaving length of 45 m for a design speed of 40 km/h
assistance to drivers about alignment of the road and 30 m for 30 km/h. A maximum limit to weaving
ahead, especially at night. length is also considered desirable to discourage
• Delineators location involving changes in speeding near the rotary.
horizontal/vertical geometry, and during severe 971. The regulatory or mandatory sign known as
weather conditions such as heavy rain, fog or snow. "Give Way" is represented using which of the
following shapes?
• Normally, reflectors are used on the delineators for
(a) T-shape (b) Rectangular
better night time visibility. (c) Circular (d) Triangular
• Delineators are classified under three types. M.P. VYAPAM Sub Engg. 4.9.2018, 2.00 pm
(1) Roadway indicators BSPHCL JE 2019 (Shift III)
(2) Hazard markers, and Nagaland PSC CTSE 2017 Paper-I
(3) Object markers. Ans. (d) : Mandatory sign or regulatory signs indicate
969. Which of the following is a warning sign? requirements, restrictions and prohibition. These
(a) One–Way (b) Speed limit include signs, such as, STOP, GIVE WAY, SPEED
(c) Cycle crossing (d) Parking LIMIT, No Entry etc. These are usually circular with
KPSC 2015 Code 143/2015 dia 600 mm or 900 mm with white background and red
Ans. (c) : cycle crossing is a warning sign. border. Stop sign is octagonal with red background and
- Indian motor vehicles act categories the traffic signs white border, while Give way sign in inverted triangle
with red border and white background.
into.
1- Regulatory sign or mandatory sign
2- warning sign or cautionary sign
3- Informatory sign
- Regulatory sign:-
1) One way sign 972. If A is the projected area of a vehicle in square
2) speed limit meters, V is speed of the vehicles in kilometers
3) Load limit per hour and C is a constant, then the wind
4) Right turn prohibited. resistance R to the moving vehicles, is given by
Warning sign:- (a) R = CAV (b) R = CAV2
1) cycle crossing AV 2
2) Narrow bridge (c) R = CAV3 (d)
C
3) School ahead HESCOM AE 2017
4) Pedestrian crossing Ans. (b) : Wind resistance (R) of the moving vehicle is
Exam Point given by
R = CdAV2
An advantage of 'one way traffic' system is– Where,
Reduced number of points of conflicts R = Wind Resistance
Traffic signs and devices should be placed Cd = Co-efficient of drag
within a cone of– 100 A = Projected area of a vehicle
A separate provision for a right turn lane is to be V = Speed of vehicle in kmph
provided when right turning traffic is more than– 973. The number of vehicles moving in a specified
1 direction on a roadway that pass a given point
33 % of total traffic during specified unit of time is called:
3
(a) Traffic volume (b) Traffic density
The distance between padestrain crossing and (c) Basic capacity (d) Traffic capacity
the stop line at a unsignalised intersection will KMC 2007
be– 2 to 3 m Ans. (a) : Traffic volume–The traffic volume is the
The purpose of a 'divisional island' is to number of vehicles moving in a specified direction in a
eliminate– Side swipe roadway that passes a given point during specified unit
Mandatory signs are displayed on a disc having a of time.
diameter– 60 cm Traffic density–It is defined as the total number of
970. The recommended value of weaving length in a passenger cars that can pass a given point on a lane or
rotary intersection for a design speed of 30 a roadway during one hour the most ideal roadway and
km/h is ______. traffic conditions that can possibly be attained.
(a) 45-90 m (b) 20-40 m Traffic capacity–The total number of vehicles that
can pass a given point on the highway in a unit period
(c) 90-110 m (d) 30-60 m
of time.
UPRVUNL JE 2019
Highway Engineering 615 YCT
974. Traffic control device : Length–
(a) Signs (b) Signals Truck-tractor semi-trailer combination – 16m
(c) Markings (d) All above Truck-trailer combination – 18m
GMC Surveyor 2018 Single Unit Truck (2 or more axles) – 11m
Ans.(d) : Traffic Control Device– Single Unit Bus (2 or more axles) – 12m
• It direct, guide and inform drivers by offering visual Maximum Width – 12m
or tactile indicators. Height–
Classification of traffic control device Buses and trucks for normal application – 3.8m
(1) Signs Truck carrying containers – 4.2m
(2) Signals Double Decker Bus – 4.75m
(3) Road design and marking Weight–
(4) Barriers or channelizers Single axle with dual wheels – 10.2 Tonnes
975. Choose the Informatory sign from the Tandem axle (spacing between
following traffic signs :- axles not less than 1.2m and
(a) Give way more than 2.5m) – 18 Tonnes
(b) Speed limit 979. Which one of the following correctly represent the
(c) Narrow Bridge specification of "GIVE WAY" regulatory sign?
(d) Compulsory turn left (a) Triangular shape, white in colour with red
Mizoram PSC JE (PWD) Nov, 2018 Paper-II border
Ans. (*) : • Give way, speed limit, compulsory turn (b) Rectangular shape, red in colour with white
left are mandatory/regulatory sign. border
(c) Triangular shape, red in colour with white
• Narrow bridge is a warning/cautionary sign.
border
• Informatory signs help for information and guidance
(d) Rectangular shape, white in colour with red
or road users.
border
976. A complete cycle of Signal is the sum of MH WCD 2019
(a) Green time + Red time MH PWD 2019
(b) Green time + Red time + Amber time Ans. (a) : Give way sign– It is indicates that merging
(c) Green time + Amber time
drivers must prepare to stop if necessary to let a driver
(d) Red time + Amber time
on another approach proceed.
MESCOM AE 2017
Ans. (b) : • A complete cycle of signal is sum of green
time, red time and amber time.
Complete cycle= Give way sign is a regulatory sign. It is triangular
Green time + Red time + Amber time shape, white in colour with red border.
977. Transport Demand projection is done by using
(a) Gravity Model Exam Point
(b) Classification Model The entrance and exit curves of a rotary have–
(c) Regression Model Different radii & different widths of pavement
(d) Moore's Algorithm Thick white and black lines of 2 m to 4 long
MESCOM AE 2017 provided along the width of a highway
Ans. (a) : Gravity model was created to anticipate indicates– Pedestrian crossing
migration between cities, it can also be used to The centre of the disc used for mandatory sign is
anticipate the traffic between two places. kept above the ground level at a height of– 2.8 m
978. What should be the maximum length of the A channelization island should have–
Small entry radius and large exit radius
semi-trailer tractor combination vehicle
The factors are not strictly related to designed of
(shown in the given figure) as per IRC (Indian
traffic rotary intersections– Ramps and
Road Congress)?
interchanges, Acceleration lanes
Yellow colour of a 'Coloured light traffic signal'
indicates– Be ready to go
A road sign indicating 'Parking for four wheeler
vehicles' is– Informatory sign
(a) 20 m (b) 10 m
980. Which one of the following factors control the
(c) 12 m (d) 16 m
alignment of highway?
SSC JE 25.09.2019 (10 AM) Shift I
(a) Obligatory points
Ans. (d) India Road Congress standards for important (b) Traffic & Economics
roads catering to high volume of traffic, the largest (c) Geometric design
vehicle such as a single unit truck, semi-trailer (d) All the other options
combination will govern- MH WCD 2019
Highway Engineering 616 YCT
 Ans. (d) : Factor controlling alignment– Ans. (d) : Guide Island–A raised space located before
obligatory point entry to the crossing to regulate the direction of the
Traffic traffic is known as guide island.
Geometric design Traffic island–Traffic island are raised area
Other consideration constructed within the roadway to establish physical
Additional care in hill road channels through which the vehicular traffic may be
Stability, drainage, resisting length, geometric standard guided.
of hill road. 985. What about the traffic signals is/are not
981. 'NO PARKING' is a--------- road sign. correct?
(a) Informatory (b) Mandatory (a) Reduce accidents
(c) Cautionary (d) Warning (b) Provide orderly movement of vehicles
MH PWD Mumbai 2015 (c) Flow without safety
Ans. (b) : Mandatory sign are road sign that are used (d) Only (a) and (c)
to set the obligations of all traffic that uses a specific HPSSC JE 396/2018
area of road. these sign indicate what must on do, Ans. (c) : • Traffic signals reduces accidents.
rather than must not do. Mandatory road signs are • It provide orderly movement of vehicles.
generally round in shape with red border. Same of • They provide authority to driver to move with
them are blue in colour "Stop" "give way" are octagon confidence.
and triangular, respectively in shape. • The provide economy over manual control at
Exp. Stop, Giveway, No Parking....... etc. intersection.
Exam Point 986. For the movement of vehicles at the
intersection of two roads, without any
Centre line marking are used– interference, the type of grade separation
In roadways meant for two way traffic generally provided is
A disadvantage of Traffic Signals is– (a) delta (b) clover leaf
waiting vehicles let off exhaust gases into the (c) diamond interchange (d) trumpet
environment Mizoram PSC 26.03.2010 Paper-II
A road sign indicates 'Keep Left' is– Ans. (b) : For the movement of vehicles at the
Mandatory sign intersection of two roads, without any interference the
An advantage of traffic signal is– type of grade separation generally provided is clover
Orderly movement of vehicles leaf.
‘Dead Slow’ is a– Regulatory sign 987. The following road sign indicates
Regulatory signs are–
Red circular discs 60 cm dia. placed 2.8 m
above G.L.
A complete signal time cycle constitutes–
Red timing, yellow timing, green timing
Along highways confirmatory route marking are
generally fixed– (a) one-way sign
After the crossing on the left side (b) prohibited both ways
982. 'Kiss and ride' is an example of ______. (c) no entry
(a) Angle parking (d) none of the above
(b) Peripheral parking Mizoram PSC 26.03.2010 Paper-II
(c) On street parking Ans. (a) : This indicates that the traffic flow is allowed
(d) Off street parking in only one direction. The way beyond this sign
LMRC AM 2019 restricts entry of the traffic however, the incoming
Ans. (b) 'Kiss and ride' is an example of peripheral traffic flow remains normal.
parking. 988. The duration of time that elapses between the
983. Speed limit signs are: start of two consecutive green periods for an
(a) Informatory signs (b) Warning signs approach at an intersection is called as
(c) Prohibitory signs (d) Regulatory signs (a) Phase length (b) Green time
LMRC AM 2019 (c) Cycle length (d) Clearance time
Haryana PSC AE 2020 Paper-II
Ans. (d) Speed limit signs are regulatory signs.
Ans. (c) : Time elapse between two consecutive green
984. A raised space located before entry to the
period called cycle length.
crossing to regulate the direction of the traffic Websters method –
is known as:
1.5L + 5
(a) Traffic island (b) Refuge island Co = , L = 2 n+ R
(c) Rotary (d) Guide island 1− Y
WBPSC SAE 2000 Where, Co = cycle time
Highway Engineering 617 YCT
 L = Total lost time Ans. (d) : A loop road also known as ring, (beltline,
n = number of phase beltway, orbital) is a road or a series of connected
R = all red time roads encircling a town, city or country. The most
Y = Y1 + Y2 common purpose of a ring road is to assist in reducing
qA qB traffic volumes in the urban centre, such as by offering
Y1 = , Y2 = ,
SA SB an alternate route around the city for drivers who do
qA = Normal flow on road A not need to stop in the city core.
qB = Normal flow on road B 994. Mandatory signs are displayed on a disc having
sA = Saturation flow on road A a diameter:
sB = Saturation flow on road B (a) 100 cm (b) 50 cm
989. The colour of light used for visibility during fog (c) 30 cm (d) 60 cm
Kerala JID 12.12.2019
is _________. HPSSC JE Code 502/2018
(a) White (b) Red Mizoram PSC Disaster Mgmt. 2015, Paper III
(c) Green (d) Yellow Ans. (d) : Mandatory signs giving positive instruction
UKSSSC JE 20.12.2020 Evening are circular with white symbol on a blue background.
MH Parbhani MNC 2015 It is displayed on disc having a diameter 60 cm.
Ans. (d) : The yellow colour being easily traceable, so
the yellow colour light is used for used for visibility Exam Point
during fog. A three level round about is preferred to a
990. The average walking speed for pedestrians colover leaf junction when–
assumed for timing pedestrian signals is _____. Less area is available
(a) 0.5 m/s (b) 2.5 m/s For the most effective traffic control, adopt–
(c) 2.1 m/s (d) 1.2 m/s Limited number of traffic signs
PGCIL DET 17.11.2018 Shift - II If the traffic detectors are used on all the
Ans. (d) : The average walking speed of a pedestrians approaches to an intersection, the control signal
assumed for timing pedestrian signal is 1.2 m/s. is known as– Full traffic –actuated signal
• It depends on the mainly age of people (elderly) (0– The traffic signal system are the cycle length and
20%) of elderly people follow this average speed. cycle division are automatically varied–
991. Which of the following is mandatory sign? Flexible progressive system
(a) Slippery road sign Grade separation had the advantage of–
(b) Men -at-work sign Easy right turn
(c) Route marker sign The most efficient traffic signal system is–
(d) Stop sign Flexible progressive system
PGCIL DET 17.11.2018 Shift - II 995. Regulatory signs are shown at a height of
Ans. (d) : • STOP is a mandatory sign. _____ from road surface.
(a) 2.8 m (b) 2.0 m
• Give way, compulsory left, speed limit, no parking
(c) 1.5 m (d) 3.0 m
are mandatory signs.
Kerala JID 12.12.2019
• Violation of mandatory sign is legal offence.
Ans. (a) : Most regulatory sign are circular. A Red
992. Identify the element (s) for causes of an Ring or Red circle indicates a prohibition. Its shown at
accident: height of 2.8 m from road surface.
(a) Road users ex:-Do not enter, One way, No passing, No left or U turn.
(b) Vehicles
(c) Road and its condition
(d) All of these
PGCIL 13.09.2018
Ans. (d) : Cause of an accident– All option correct
996. Which one of the following is not an
(i) over speeding
informatory sign?
(ii) Road users
(a) cross road ahead (b) name of destination
(iii) Vehicles condition
(c) name of road (d) speed limit
(iv) Road and its condition
Kerala JID 12.12.2019
(v) Fatigue
(vi) alcohols Ans. (a & d) : Informatory sign are meant to provide
(vii) failure to understand signs etc. information about direction, destination distance etc. to
the above. Informatory signs are normally blue in
993. A road provided to divert traffic to avoid
obstructions: colour.
(a) Bypass Road (b) Urban Road ex:- Parking, Bus stop, Filling station.
(c) Arterial Road (d) Loop Road • Cross road is a cautionary sign
KPSC JE Code 137/2014 • Speed limit is a regulatory sign.
Highway Engineering 618 YCT
 (c) 45 percent and 30 percent
5. Highway Material & Testing (d) 35 percent and 40 percent
DSSSB JE (Mains) 20.03.2021 (Afternoon)
Ans. (c) : Crushing Test (for strength)-
997. Which of the following grades of bitumen is
harder ? • Size of aggregate = 10 to 12 mm
(a) 30/40 (b) 60/70 • Number of Layer = 3
(c) 80/100 (d) All are equal • Rate of loading : 4 Ton/min up to 10 min
Punjab PSC SDE 15.06.2021 • Sieve Size : 2.36 mm
Nagaland PSC 2016 Paper-I W2
Chandigarh JE 17.07.2016 A.C.V. = × 100
ODISHA JE (Mains) 2015 W1
MH PWD 2016 W1 = Total wt. of Agg
Ans. (a) : 30/40 grades of bitumen is harder because W2 wt of Agg passing
the penetration of 30/40 grade bitumen is 3 to 4 mm 2.36 mm sieve
which is least, hence it is hardest as compared to other A.C.V. = Agg crushing value
option. A.C.V. for surface course 30%
• 30/40 grade of bitumen can withstand very high For base course 45%
traffic loads.
• The characteristic this grade confirm to that of S35 Exam Point
grade of IS 73-1992.
Most suitable material for highway
• 30/40 grade is used in specialized like airport
embankments is– Granular soil
runways and also in very heavy traffic volume
Bitumen is generally obtained from–
roads in costals cities in the country.
Petroleum product
• Suited for areas where difference in minimum and The a strength measurement test commonly
o
maximum temperature is 25 C. adopted for evaluation of soil subgrade– Falling
998. For confirming the shearing strength of weight deflectometer
pavement soil, if the CBR value at 2.5 mm is The classification of soil of Highway Research
greater than the CBR value at 5 mm, then Board is based on–
adopt _____. Both on particle size constitution and
(a) CBR value of 2.5 mm plasticity specialty
(b) The average CBR value of 2.5 mm & 5 mm According to Highway Research Board, soils are
(c) CBR value of 5 mm classified into– 7 types
(d) CBR value of 9.5 mm Bituminous materials are used in highway
DGVCL 5.1.2021 Evening construction primarily because of their–
Ans. (a) : California bearing ratio (CBR) test: Cementing and water proofing properties
• For evaluating the stability of soil sub grade and In a gravel road, the amount of clay in a gravel
base course materials for flexible pavements. mix varies in between– 15% to 25%
• If value of CBR at 2.5 mm > value of CBR at 5mm, In gravel road the binding material used is– Clay
adopt CBR value of 2.5 while if value of CBR at 1001. Grader is used mainly for
2.5 mm < Value of CBR at 5mm. Then repeat the (a) trimming and finishing
test and after it value of CBR at 5mm comes (b) shaping and trimming
greater, finally adopt the greater value. (c) finishing and shaping
999. The maximum stripping value of aggregates in (d) finishing, shaping and trimming
bituminous construction should NOT be more HPSSSC JE 11.04.2021
than:
Ans. (d) : Grader are multipurpose machines used for
(a) 18% (b) 25%
finishing, shaping and trimming.
(c) 5% (d) 10%
Punjab PSC SDE 15.06.2021 1002. The test used to evaluate the load supporting
DMRC JE 13.4.2018 2nd Shift capacity of supporting power of pavement
layers is
Ans. (c) : Indian Road congress (IRC) has specified
(a) California resistance value test
that stripping value of aggregate should not exceed 5%
(b) Plate bearing test
for use in bituminous surface dressing, penetration
(c) California bearing ration test
macadam, bituminous macadam and carpet
(d) Triaxial test
construction, when aggregate coated with bitumen is
DSSSB JE (Mains) 19.03.2021 (Morning)
immerged in water bath at 40oC for 24 hours.
Ans. (b) : Plate bearing test–
1000. The aggregate crushing value for good quality
• To evaluate the support capability of soil.
aggregate to be used in base course and surface
course shall not exceed ________ respectively. • It is a field test.
(a) 40 percent and 35 percent • It is applicable in the design of both rigid and
(b) 30 percent and 45 percent flexible pavement.
Highway Engineering 619 YCT
 • Diameter of plate = 75 cm and static load 320 kg • Static innovation test is one specified by IRC the
(0.07 kg/cm2) principle of the test is by increasing aggregate fully
P coated with binder in water maintained at 400C
k= kg / cm3 temperature for 24 hours.
0.125 • IRC has specified maximum stripping value of
Here,
aggregate should not exceed 5%.
k = modulus of subgrade reaction
Abrasion test– Abrasion test is done by los angles
P = pressure corresponding to settlement of 0.125 cm.
testing machine.
1003. If the California Bearing Ratio (CBR) value of
subgrade soil of a flexible pavement is 2.5%, 1006. According to Highway Research Board, soils
the resilient modulus of subgrade soil is are classified into _____ types.
calculated as per Indian Roads Congress as (a) 4 (b) 2
(a) 5 MPa (c) 10 (d) 7
(b) 25 MPa RRB JE Jammu : 26.08. 2015
(c) 31.64 MPa Ans : (d) Highway research board (HRB) classification
(d) 44 MPa of soils–
RPSC Lect. (Tech.Edu.) Paper-II 2021 • This is also called American association of state
Ans. (b) : highway officials (AASHO).
CBR Modulus of subgrade reaction (K) • According to highway research board soils are
2 20 classified into seven groups.
3 27 • A-1 to A-7, A-1, A-2 and A-3 soils are granular soils
4 34 percentage fines passing 0.074 mm sieve being less than
5 41 35 percent.
7 48 • A-4, A-5, A-6 and A-7 soils are fine grained or silt-
10 54 clay soils, passing 0.074 mm sieve being greater than 35
20 68 percent.
50 136
1007. Grade of bitumen expressed in terms of
100 218
(a) Ductility (b) Penetration
Subgrade reaction for CBR = 2.5%
(c) Softening (d) Viscosity
( 27 − 20 ) MESCOM AE 2017
K2.5 = 20 + (2.5 – 2)
(3 − 2) Ans. (b) : The penetration test is carried out to
= 20 + 0.5 × 7 characterize the bitumen, based on the hardness. Thus
= 20 + 3.5 is has the name penetration bitumen. The penetration
= 23.5 bitumen grades ranges from 15 to 450 for road
K2.5 ≈ 25 MPa bitumen.
1004. IS 6241 : 1971 specifies the mode of testing the 1008. The resistance of a material to penetration is :
pavement aggregates for (a) Toughness (b) hardness
(a) Stripping (b) Flakiness (c) Fatigue (d) Roughness
(c) moisture content (d) Size Odisha JE (Mains) 2015
DSSSB JE (Mains) 19.03.2021 (Evening) Ans. (b) : Penetration test–
Ans. (a) : • It is the resistance of flow or measurement of
• The specification of ministry of transport and hardness of bitumen.
shipping recommend the determination of stripping • Unit of measurement is 1/10 mm.
value by the static immersion method in accordance • Therefore, 80/100 means penetration of 8-10 mm.
with IS 6241 : 1971. • Total weight of needle assembly is 100 gm.
• This is used to ascertain the suitability of road • Grading of bitumen is done using this test value.
aggregates for bituminous road construction.
1009. By conducting which one of the following test,
1005. The following tests are conducted on the coarse
modulus of subgrade reaction is evaluated?
aggregates for Road Construction:
(a) Impact test, Shape test and Penetration test (a) Plate bearing test (b) Triaxial test
(b) C.B.R. value, Ductility test, Crushing test (c) Direct shear test (d) CBR test
(c) Bitumen Adhesion test, Abrasion test MH PWD 2018
(d) Permeability test, Crushing test, Viscosity test Ans. (a) : Plate bearing test–
MP VYAPAM Sub Engg. 22.02.2015 • It is a loading test which is carried out on a
Ans. (c) : Bitumen adhesive test, abrasion test– subgrade soil in the field with lord bearing area to
Bitumen adhesion test– Bitumen adheres well to all find supporting power of subgrade reaction (k).
normal types of road aggregates provided they are dry • It consists of set of plates of diameter 75 cm, 60
and free from dust presence of water cause stripping of cm, 45 cm and 30 cm, standard size of plate for
binder from the coated aggregate. plate bearing test is 75 cm.

Highway Engineering 620 YCT

1010. Bureau of India Standards classifies bitumen (d) Kg per degree centigrade
into grades 65/25, 85/40 etc. The first and (e) Pulling speed
second numbers respectively refer to: Odisha JE (Mains) 30.06.2019
(a) softening point and penetration Ans. (a) : Ductility test–Bitumen should be
(b) penetration and softening point sufficiently ductile and capable of being stretched
(c) flash point and penetration without breaking. Ductility is measured as the distance
(d) flash point and softening point
in cm/mm to which a standard briquette of size 10 × 10
Maharastra (PWD) 2018
mm can be stretched before the thread breaks at a
UPRVUNL JE 2016
standard temperature of 27ºC and the rate of
Ans. (a) The Bureau of Indian standards classifies
elongation is 50 mm per minute.
bitumen into grades 65/25, 85/40 etc. in this
arrangement the first number represents softening point Ductility is measure of adhesiveness and elasticity of
and second number represents the penetration are bitumen. Minimum ductility value according to ISI is
consistency. 75 cm for grade 45 and above.
1011. The abrasion value should NOT be more than Exam Point
_____for concrete other than the wearing
surface. The binding material for water bound macadam
(a) 10% (b) 50% road is– Stone dust
(c) 25% (d) 30% Abrasion test is conducted to find–
PGCIL 13.09.2018 Hardness of aggregates
Ans. (b) : Abrasion value– Temperature of heating aggregate in hot mix is
≯ 40% for WBM course in range of– 200-210oC
≯ 35% for bitumen concrete Not related to shape of aggregate–
≯ 50% for concrete other than wearing surface. Stripping value
1012. Which of the following is not a test used for The natural frequency of a system increases
judging the aggregates for their desirable with–
properties and suitability on roads? Both increase in the stiffness of the system
(a) Los Angels abrasion test and decrease in the mass of the system
(b) Soundness test The maximum allowable Los Angeles abrasion
(c) Specific gravity test value for high quality surface course is– 30%
(d) Vee-Bee test 1015. Most suitable soil for highway embankment is :
BSPHCL29.01.2019 Shift-II (a) Granular soil (b) Organic soil
Ans. (d) : Test used for judging the aggregates for (c) Silts (d) Clays
their desirable properties and suitability on roads are– KPSC Overseer, Gr-II, Irri. Dept. (code 85/ 2016)
(a) Crushing test Ans. (a) : • Most suitable soil for highway
(b) Abrasion test – Loss angles abrasion test, Dowel
embankment is granular soil.
abrasion test, Dorry abrasion test
(c) Impact test • Granular soil have more strength and stability.
(d) Soundness test • Granular soil should have good drainage properties.
(e) Shape test 1016. Which among the following is not included in
(f) Specific gravity test the shape test for road aggregates ?
1013. In 80/100 grade bitumen, 80/100 represents : (a) Flakiness index
(a) Unit weight (b) Kinematic viscosity (b) Elongation index
(c) Dynamic viscosity (d) Penetration (c) Angularity number
(e) Consistency (d) Group index
Odisha JE (Mains) 30.06.2019 KPSC Overseer, Gr-II, Irri. Dept. (code 83/2017)
Ans. (d) : In 80/100 grade bitumen, 80/100 represents Ans. (d) : Shape test–
softening point and penetration value. The particle shape of aggregate mass is determined by
• Softening tested by ring and ball test, it is the the percentage of flaky and elongated particles
temperature at which bitumen attains a particular contained in it and by its angularity, the evaluation of
degree of softness under standardised test condition. shape of the particles made in terms of flakiness index,
• Grade of bitumen (hardness of bitumen) tested by elongation index and angularity number.
penetration test. 1017. Which one of the following causes ravelling in
1 bituminous pavement?
Penetration = × reading on scale
10 (a) Use of soft bitumen
1014. Ductility of bitumen is expressed in : (b) Excessive bitumen content
(a) mm (c) Low bitumen content
(b) Degree centigrade (d) Use of open-graded aggregates
(c) Per degree centigrade [ESE-1995]
Highway Engineering 621 YCT
Ans. (d) Ravelling is most common but easily 1020. The amount of mechanical energy imposed on
preventable failure modes of bituminous pavements. It the aggregate during the aggregate impact test
occurs as individual aggregate particles dislodge from is of the order of:
the pavement surface down wards. (a) 5320kg-cm (b) 6750kg-cm
Primary causes of ravelling : (c) 7980kg-cm (d) 11400kg-cm
• Inadequate compaction of pavement. [ESE-1998]
• Placement in wet weather. Ans. (c) A metal hammer of weight 13.5– 14.0 kg
• Poor mix design. having a free fall from a height 38 cm is dropped 15
• Cleanliness of aggregate. times in aggregate impact test.
• Overheating of mix. So energy imparted = 14 × 38× 15 = 7980 kg-cm
Open graded aggregate is aggregate in which a skip
between gradations has been deliberately achieved so 1021. Which one of the following binders is
that the voids are not filled with intermediate size recommended for a wet and cold climate?
particles. (a) 80/100 penetration asphalt
1018. A typical Marshall test graph is shown in the (b) Tar
given figure. The variable on the X-axis if % (c) Cutback
binder content by weight of total mix. The (d) Emulsion
variable on the Y-axis for the given graph will [ESE-1998]
be: Ans. (d)
• Cut back bitumen is used for cold weather
bituminous road construction and maintenance.
• Emulsion are used in maintenance and patch repair
works. It can be used in wet weather even when it is
raining.
(a) stability value (b) flow value • If the viscosity of bitumen is reduced by volatile
(c) percentage of voids (d) unit weight dilutent, it is called cut back.
[ESE-1995] 1022. Which one of the following pairs is NOT
Ans. (b) Flow value is the deformation of specimen in correctly matched?
0.25 mm units upto the maximum load. It should be (a) Horizontal curves-Superelevation
between 8 to 16. (b) O and D studies-Desire lines
• Marshall stability value is the maximum stability value (c) Los Angels test-Hardness of aggregates
is the maximum load in kg before failure. Its minimum (d) Soundness test-Purity of bitumen
specified value is 340 kg. The stability first increases [ESE-1999]
and then decreases with increase in bitumen content.
Ans. (d) In order to counteract the effect of centrifugal
• Unit weight also increases initially and then
decreases. force and to reduce the tendency of vehicles to over turn
• Percentage of voids in total mix always decrease with or skid, super elevation is provided in horizontal curves.
increase in bitumen content. • Desire line are graphical representation of origin and
• The percentage of voids filled with bitumen increase destination studies.
with increase in bitumen content. But the graph is • Los Angels test is carried out to test the hardness
convex upward. property of stones.
1019. Which one of the following diagrams illustrates • Soundness test is to study the resistance of aggregate
the relationship between VMA and % bitumen to weathering action.
content (BT) in Marshall test? 1023. For carrying out bituminous patch work
during the rainy season, the most suitable
binder is:
(a) road tar
(b) hot bitumen
(c) cutback bitumen
(d) bituminous emulsion
[ESE-1999]
Ans. (d) Bituminous emulsion is used in bituminous
construction especially in maintenance and patch repair
works.
[ESE-1996] • Its main advantage is that it can be used in wet
Ans. (b) Curve (a) – % air voids in total mix (Vv) weather even when it is raining.
Curve (b) – VMA (% voids in mineral agg) • If bitumen is suspended in a finely divided condition
Curve (c) – Unit weight (g/cc) in an aqueous medium and stabilized with an
Curve (d) – Flow value emulsifier, the material is known as 'Emulsion'.

Highway Engineering 622 YCT

1024. Bitumen grade 80/100 indicates that under the • Bituminous concrete for nominal aggregate size 19
standard test conditions, penetration value of mm, 5–6% and for nominal aggregate size 13 mm,
bitumen would vary from: 5-7%.
(a) 0.8mm to 1mm (b) 8mm to 10mm • Bituminous mastic, 14–17%.
(c) 8cm to 10cm (d) 0.08mm to 0.1mm 1026. Match List-I (Type of binder) with List-II
[ESE-2000] (Uses) and select the correct answer using the
Ans. (b) Determine hardness or softness of bitumen. codes given below the lists:
It can be measured by the depth in tenths of a List-I
milimeter (0.1 mm) to which a standard loaded A.80/100 penetration grade bitumen
needle will penetrate vertically in 5 seconds. So, for
B.85/25 blown-bitumen
80/100 grade bitumen, the depth of penetration is 8
C.MC-70 cutback
mm to 10 mm.
D.RT-5 road tar
• Sample is maintained at a temperature of 25º C.
List-II
• Total weight of needle assembly is 100 gm.
1. Mastic-asphalt
Exam Point 2. Bituminous roads
The stone is the best for road construction– 3. Grouting works
Aggregate having impact value 18% 4. Prime-coat
Thickness of pavement will be maximum for– Codes:
Soil with CBR 4% A B C D
In Los Angeles Abrasion Test on aggregates, if (a) 3 4 1 2
the speed of the drum is increased to 50 rpm, (b) 2 1 4 3
then the abrasion value will– Increase (c) 3 1 4 2
California Bearing Ratio method of designing (d) 2 4 1 3
flexible pavement is more accurate, as it [ESE 2006]
involves– Ans. (b)
Specifications of the road making materials
Types of binder Uses
California Bearing Ratio (CBR)–
(A) 80/100 penetration grade Bituminous roads
Is a measure of soil strength
bitumen
1025. Match List-I (Type of construction) with List-
(B) 85/25 Blown bitumen Mastic–asphalt
II (% Bitumen content) and select the correct
answer using the codes given below the lists: (C) MC–70 cutback Prime-coat
List-I (D) RT-5 Road tar Grouting works.
A. Bituminous macadam 1027. Which one of the following is not a desirable
B. Dense bituminous macadam property of the subgrade soil as a highway
C. Bituminous concrete material?
D. Bituminous mastic (a) Stability
List-II (b) Ease of compaction
1. 3-3.5% (c) Good drainage
2. ≮4% (d) Bitumen adhesion
[ESE-2009]
3. 14-17%
4. Min. 4.5% Ans. (d) The desirable properties of soil as a highway
Codes: material are as follows :
A B C D (1) Stability
(a) 4 2 1 3 (2) Incompressibility
(b) 1 2 4 3 (3) Permanency of strength
(c) 4 3 1 2 (4) Good drainage
(d) 1 3 4 2 (5) Minimum changes in volume and stability under
[ESE-2002] adverse conditions of weather and ground water.
Ans. (b) The specification regarding the bitumen (6) Ease of compaction.
content as per ministry of surface transport are as 1028. The consistency and flow resistance of a sample
follows: of bitumen can be determinated through which
• Bituminous macadam for nominal aggregate size 40 of the following tests?
mm, 3.1–3.4% and for nominal aggregate size 19 (a) Viscosity test
mm, 3.3–3.5%. (b) Penetration test
• Dense bituminous macadam for nominal aggregate (c) Ductility test
size 40 mm minimum 4% and for nominal (d) Softening point test
aggregate size 25 mm minimum 4.5% [ESE-2016]
Highway Engineering 623 YCT
Ans. (a) Viscosity Test– Viscosity is the general term Ans. (b) Ring and ball apparatus– A softening point is
for consistency and it is a measure of resistance of flow. the temperature at which the substance attains a particular
• Orifice type viscometer' may be used. degree of softening under specified condition of test.
• It is the number of seconds required for 50 ml of • It is done by ring and ball test.
• The steel ball is placed upon the bitumen sample
material to flow through an orifice of specified size at
and the liquid medium is then heated at a rate of
specified temperatures. 50C per minute.
• Suitable to test cut backs and tars (10 mm orifice • Softening point of various grades used in paving
viscometer) jobs vary between 350 to 700C.
1029. Flexible concrete is a mix comprising of:
(a) Gravel, filler and 30/40 bitumen Exam Point
(b) Sand, filler and 30/40 bitumen only If the aggregate impact value is 20 to 30 percent,
(c) Gravel, sand, filler and 60/70 bitumen then it is classified as–
(d) Sand, filler and 60/70 bitumen only Satisfactory for road surfacing
[ESE-2016] The strength of the subgrade of Roads is
Ans. (c) Flexible concrete is a cement–containing expressed by– C.B.R. value
Los Angeles machine is used to test aggregate–
composite material designed to have the stretchable
Abrasion resistance
materials. California Bearing Ratio method of designing
• Gravel, sand, filler and 60/70 bitumen are used in flexible pavement is more accurate, as it
flexible concrete. involves–
• In order to reach a more flexible structure, flexible Specifications of the road making materials
concrete is obtained by making some changes in the When used in road work, the coefficient of
material of traditional concrete production. hardness of a stone should be greater than– 17
Charpy test is– An impact test
1030. The Flakiness index and Elongation index test
The specified limit of maximum variation in
is NOT applicable to aggregate sizes smaller CBR for CBR values upto 10%– 3. 0%
than ______. Usually, what is the maximum permissible Los
(a) 10 mm (b) 12 mm Angeles abrasion value (%) for dense
(c) 4.75 mm (d) 6.3 mm bituminous macadam– 35
DSSSB JE 23.10.2019 Second Shift 1033. The penetration value of residue from
Ans. (d) Flakiness Index : Flakiness index of distillation upto 360oC of rapid curing cutback
aggregate is the percentage by weight of aggregate bitumen is-
particles whose least dimension is less 0.6 their mean (a) 80 to 120 (b) 30 to 120
dimensions. This test is applicable to aggregate sizes (c) 100 to 160 (d) 40 to 80
larger than 6.3 mm. RRB JE CBT-II 28–08–2019 (evening)
Elongation Index : The elongation index of an Ans : (a) A penetration value of residue from
aggregate is the percentage by weight of particles whose distillation up to 360ºC of rapid curing cut back
greatest dimensions is greater than 1.8 times their mean bitumen is (80 to 120)º.
Rapid curing– Rapid curing cut back are bitumen with a
dimensions this test is also applicable to aggregate size petroleum distillate such as Neptha or gasoline, which
larger than 6.3 mm. rapid by evaporate after used in construction of pavement.
1031. Aggregate crushing value indicates which one Medium curing– With boiling point solvent such as
of the following crushing value kerosene and light diesel.
(a) Durability (b) Toughness Slow curing– High boiling point gas
(c) Hardness (d) Strength 1034. ______ is used as a solvent in making 'cut back'
Nagaland PSC 2017 Paper-I bitumen.
Ans. (d) : Aggregate crushing value– The strength of (a) Petrol (b) Diesel
coarse aggregate may be assessed by crushing test. (c) Kerosene (d) Turpentine
The aggregate crushing value provides relative LMRC J.E. 13.05.2018 (shift-I)
measure of resistance to crushing under gradually Ans. (c) : Cutback Bitumen–Cutback bitumen is a
applied compressive load. type of bitumen which is obtained when viscosity of
bitumen is reduced by volatile diluent.
• Test is done to achieve a high quality of pavement,
It is generally used in colder regions.
aggregate possessing high resistance to crushing or Different types of cutback bitumen are–
low aggregate crushing value are preferred. (i) Rapid curing cutback (RC)–In this bitumen is
1032. Ring and ball apparatus is used for which of fluxed with NAPTHA/GASOLINE
the following tests of bitumen? (ii) Medium curing cutback (MC)–In this bitumen is
(a) Penetration (b) Softening point fluxed with KEROSENE.
(c) Ductility (d) Malleability (iii) Slow curing cutback (SC)–In this bitumen is
DMRC JE 12.04.2018 fluxed with high boiling point diluent.
Highway Engineering 624 YCT
1035. Specific gravity of bitumen ranges between: 1040. Weight of stones to be used while performing
(a) 0.61 to 0.76 (b) 0.82 to 0.95 attrition and los Angels abrasion test is :
(c) 0.97 to 1.02 (d) 1.05 to 1.41 (a) 8 kg (b) 7.5 kg
LMRC J.E. 13.05.2018 (shift-I) (c) 5 kg (d) 2 kg
M.P. VYAPAM Sub Engg. 2.9.2018, 2.00 pm Nagaland PSC 2015 Paper-I
MH PWD 2019 Ans. (c) : For performing the attrition and loss Angels
Ans. (c): Specific gravity of bitumen– abrasion test the weight of specimen is taken usually in
• Pure bitumen– 0.97 to 1.02 the range of 5-10 kg.
• Tars have SG rang from 1.10 to 1.25. • It depends on gradation of aggregate.
Note– The specific gravity of cutback may be lower • Dowel attrition value recommended by IRC
depending on type and proportion. W
= 2 ×100
1036. As per IS:73 (2013) guidelines, the grading of W1
bitumen samples should be done based upon • Loss angles abrasion value maximum for wbm is
which one of the following value? = 40% and for bituminous concrete max value = 35%
(a) Viscosity value (b) Ductility value
(c) Flow value (d) Stability value 1041. Californian Bearing Ratio (CBR) is used
Punjab JE July 2018 (a) for calculating the stress deformation
characteristics
Ans. (a) : As per IS 73 (2013) guideline. (b) to evaluate the subgrade strength of roads and
• Grading of bitumen should be done by absolute pavements
viscosity units instead of the conventional (c) to evaluate the safe load bearing capacity of
penetration units. soil
• Viscosity is defined as inverse of fluidity. (d) to estimate the net load bearing capacity of
• Viscosity is the general term of consistency and its soil
measure of resistance to flow. GPSC AM (GMDC) 2020
• Measurement by float test set-up. Ans. (b) : CBR is used to determine the material
1037. Which of the following is the best stabilizer for proportion for pavement design.
black cotton soil ? • It is an empirical test to measure the strength of
(a) Cement (b) Bitumen material and is not a true representation of the resilient
(c) Calcium chloride (d) Lime modulus.
Nagaland PSC 2015 Paper-I • It is method of evaluating and classifying soil
Ans. (d) : To improve its shrinkage and swelling subgrade and base course material for flexible
characteristics the lime is mixed with black cotton soil pavement.
(high plastic soil) Load carried by specimen
• Flyash and husk ash also are good, cost effective CBR = ×100
Load carried by standard specimen
material for stabilization of black cotton.
• For fine grained soil, soil-cement stabilization is 1042. What is the specified limit of maximum
done. variation is CBR for CBR values upto 10%
(a) 1.0% (b) 3. 0%
• The basic of bituminous stabilization are water
(c) 5. 0% (d) 10. 0%
proofing and binding. It is use full for granular and
(UPSSSC JE 31-07-2016)
coarse grains.
Ans : (b)
• Some time for soil too to plug up the void and water
proofing action are provided to soil. Permissible variation CBR %
3% up to 10%
• The cut back and emulsion (4 to 6%) is mixed.
5% 10 to 30%
1038. Binding material used in a gravel road is : 10% 30 to 60%
(a) Clay (b) Cement Note : At least 3 samples should be tested on each type
(c) Lime (d) Surkhi
of soil at the same density and moisture content, if
Nagaland PSC 2015 Paper-I
variation is more than permissible value and average of
Ans. (a) : Binding material used in a gravel road is six sample should be considered.
clay, loam or stone screenings.
• The top 50 cm of subgrade should be compacted at
• These has little binding property. least upto 95 to 100% of proctor density.
• Excess of these has a tendency to cause road to
1043. Which of the following test measures the
soften in wet weather and to crack in dry weather.
toughness of road aggregates?
1039. The thickness of premix carpet laid in India is : (a) Crushing strength test
(a) 20 mm (b) 150 mm (b) Abrasion test
(c) 100 mm (d) 75 mm (c) Impact test
Nagaland PSC 2015 Paper-I (d) Shape test
Ans. (a) : The thickness of premix carpet laid in India Nagaland PSC 2016 Paper-I
is taken 20 mm. WBPSC JE 2009
Highway Engineering 625 YCT
 Ans. (c) : Impact test– A test designed to evaluate the • Rigid pavements posses note worthy flexural
toughness of stone or the resistance of the aggregate to strength or flexural rigidity.
fracture under repeated impact is called impact test. • Rigid pavement transfer the load through slab action
• The aggregate impact value should not normally but not grain to grain as in case of flexible
exceed 30% of aggregate to be used in wearing pavement.
course of pavements. • The effect of impact on the design of rigid pavement
• The maximum permissible value is 35% for is accounted for adopting an increased stress relative
bituminous macadam and 40% for water bond to that produced by static wheel load.
macadam base courses. 1048. If the aggregate impact value is less than 10,
1044. The impact test is performed on road then it is classified as -
aggregates to evaluate its (a) Very strong
(a) Hardness (b) Soundness (b) Exceptionally strong
(c) Strength (d) Toughness (c) Good for pavement surface coarse
Karnataka PSC JE Code 114/2016 (d) Weak for pavement surface coarse
Ans. (d) : Aggregate Impact Test– NPCIL JE 2020
• During construction process of pavement layers, Ans. (b) : Recommended Aggregate impact test
particularly compaction by heavy rollers and also values–
due to movement of heavy wheel loads of traffic, Aggregate Impact Classification
the road aggregate are subjected to impact or value
pounding action and there is possibility of stones < 10% Exceptionally strong
breaking into smaller pieces. 10–20% Strong
• It advantage is that in addition to measuring the 20–30% Satisfactory for road surfacing
toughness value the test result is considered to gives > 35% Weak for road surfacing
an indirect indication of the strength characteristics.
1045. The penetration test is performed on bitumen Exam Point
to evaluate its Resistance of the action of moving load
(a) grade (b) ductility (rubbing) is known as– Abrasion
(c) viscosity (d) strength The Los angels abrasion value (%) of aggregates
Karnataka PSC JE Code 114/2016 to be used for the final layer of Bituminous
Ans. (a) : Penetration test is a commonly adopted test concrete is limited to– 30
on bitumen to grade the material in terms of its As per I.R.C. for bitumen bound macadam
hardness. Grading of bitumen helps to assess its maximum aggregate impact value in % will be–
suitability in different climatic condition and types of 30
construction. The maximum stripping value of aggregates in
1046. The following grade of bitumen is preferred in bituminous construction should NOT be more
hot climate than– 5%
(a) 30/40 (b) 50/60 The tests is used to determine the rate of wear of
(c) 60/70 (d) 90/100 stones– Attrition test
Karnataka PSC JE Code 114/2016 1049. What is the percentage content of asphalt in
Ans. (a) : A grade of 30/40 bitumen is penetration the cut-back asphalt?
value is in the range 3 mm to 4 mm at standard test (a) 10% (b) 50%
conditions. In hot climates, a lower penetration grade (c) 85% (d) 30%
is preferred. RRB JE CBT-II 29–08–2019 (evening)
1047. In CBR test, surcharge weights are used to Ans. (c) A cutback asphalt is a simply combination of
(a) stimulate worst natural moisture conditions asphalt cement and petroleum solvent like emulsion,
(b) increase density of the sample cutbacks are used because they reduce asphalt viscosity
(c) stimulate the effect of overlying pavement for lower temperature uses.
(d) prevent horizontal movement of piston → Cutback asphalt= 85% of asphalt cement + 15%
during test cutter by weight.
Karnataka PSC JE Code 114/2016
1050. The combined name for the two tests–
Ans. (c) : CBR test–
elongation index and flakiness index is
• The CBR method limitations gives the total (a) Stability test (b) Shape test
thickness required of the pavement above a (c) Surface test (d) Strength test
subgrade and this thickness value would remain
RRB JE CBT-II 29–08–2019 (evening)
same respective of the quality of material used in
component layer. Ans. (b) Shape test include:-
• It surcharge weights are used to stimulate the effect 1) Elongation Index → Road construction (<15%)
of overlaying pavement. 2) Flakiness Index → Road construction <15% to 25%)
• The component of material should be judiciously 3) Angularity Number:- Degree of packing should and
chosen for durability and economy. measures void in excess of 33%
Highway Engineering 626 YCT
1051. The Marshall Method is used for the mix Ans. (c) :
design of which one of the following? • Penetration test measure hardness and softness of
(a) Concrete mixes bitumen.
(b) Granular mixes • It measure the distance a standard blunt pointed
(c) Bituminous mixes
needle will vertically penetrate a sample of material
(d) Cement mortar mixes
at 25oC
Punjab JE 2016
1
Ans. (c) : Marshall mix design– The mix design • The unit of measurement in mm.
determines the optimum bitumen content for the 10
evaluation of performance of bitunous mixed flow test 1055. Consistency and flow resistance of bitumen can
and stability test are performed. The marshall stability be determined from which of the following?
and flow test provides the performance prediction (a) Ductility test (b) Penetration test
measure for the marshall mix design method. (c) Softening point test (d) Viscosity test
1052. Bituminous concrete is a mix comprising of Mizoram PSC/ (PWD) 2020 Paper-III
(a) fine aggregate, filler and bitumen Ans. (d) : The viscosity of liquid is the property that
(b) fine aggregate and bitumen retards the flow when a force is applied to a liquid. The
(c) coarse aggregate, fine aggregate, filler and slower the movement of the liquid the higher the
bitumen
viscosity, in this sense viscosity is the pure measure of
(d) coarse aggregate, filler and bitumen
consistency.
Mizoram PSC/ (PWD) 2020 Paper-III
Ans. (c) : Bituminous concrete is a mixture comprising 1056. The minimum ductility range prescribed for
of coarse aggregate, fine aggregate, filler and Bitumen. bitumen to be used in pavement construction is :
(a) 75 - 100 cm (b) 50 - 75 cm
1053. As per IRC 37:2012, the fatigue life of a flexible
(c) 50 - 60 cm (d) 5 - 60 cm
pavement consisting of granular base and sub-
base depends upon LMRC AM 2018 Shift-II
1. Resilient Modulus of bituminous layers Ans. (b) : The ductility values of bitumen vary from 5
2. Horizontal tensile strain at the bottom of to over 100 for different bitumen grades.
bituminous layer • A minimum ductility value of 75 cm has been
3. Mix design of bitumen specified by the IS for bitumen of grade 45 and above.
4. Vertical subgrade strain • A minimum value of 50 cm is commonly specified.
Which of the above statements are correct? 1057. Toughness property of an aggregate can be
(a) 1, 2 and 4 only (b) 1, 3 and 4 only tested by adopting :
(c) 1, 2 and 3 only (d) 2, 3 and 4 only (a) Aggregate crushing strength test
ESE 2018 (b) Aggregate Impact test
Ans. (c) As per IRC: 37-2012, clause No: 6.2.2 (c) Los Angels Abrasion test
3.89 0.854
1  1  (d) Angularity number
N f = 2.21× 10 –4   ×   LMRC AM 2018 Shift-II
 εt   MR  Ans. (b) : Impact Test : [For toughness]
Where
• Size of aggregate = 10 to 12 mm
Nf = Fatigue life in terms of standard axles
• Weight of hammer = 13.5 to 14 kg
εt = Tensile strain at the bottom of bituminous layer
MR = Resilient modulus of bituminous layer • Height of fall = 38 cm
From the options given in the question • Number of blows = 15
Flexible pavement consisting of granular base and sub w
Aggregate impact value (AIV) = 2 ×100
base depends on w1
1. Resilient Modulus (MR) AIV >/ 30% for surface course
2. Horizontal tensile strain at the bottom of bituminous
>/ 35% for base course
layer
Statements 1 and 2 are correct 1058. The unit standard load, in kg/cm2, for a
Statement -4 is wrong. The design is independent of standard penetration of 2.5 mm in CBR test
vertical sub-grade strain. Infact it depends on setup is :
horizontal sub-grade strain. (a) 1370 (b) 2055
∴ The appropriate answer is (c). (c) 70 (d) 105
MH PWD 2019
1054. The penetration test for bitumen is conducted
LMRC AM 2018 Shift-II
at a temperature of
(a) 60ºC (b) 37ºC Ans. (c) : The unit standard load carried out by
(c) 25ºC (d) 50ºC standard specimen at–
Mizoram PSC/ (PWD) 2020 Paper-III 2.5 mm 1370 kg [70 kg/cm2]
MH PWD 2018 5 mm 2055 kg [105 kg/cm2]

Highway Engineering 627 YCT

 Exam Point 1062. In marshall testing of bituminous mix as
bitumen content increases, the flow value
The strengths is most important for pavement (a) remains constant
concrete– Flexural (b) decreases first and then increased
Which tests is preferred in laboratory to (c) increases monotonically
determine the extent of weathering of aggregate (d) increases first and then decreases
for road works– Soundness test WB AE 2020
As per IS 383–1970, the crushing value of an
Ans. (c) : The flow value
aggregate used to cement concrete pavement
should not exceed– 45% Bitumen content are increased
In CBR test, If the CBR value at 5mm is greater
than that at 2.5 mm– The test should be repeated
In CBR test the value of CBR is calculated at–
Both 2.5 mm and 5.0 mm penetrations
For concreting the surface of the runways, roads
and pavements, the aggregate impact value shall
not exceed by weight– 0.3
The standards for testing of road macadam in 1063. When used in road work, the coefficient of
Aggregate Impact Test– hardness of stone should be greater than ;
14 kg wt, 38cm drop, 15 blows (a) 17 (b) 10
1059. The desirable thickness of the bituminous mix (c) 15 (d) 12
specimen to be subjected to Marshall Stability UPPCL JE CE 2015
Testing is : Ans. (a) : Abrasion test– The abrasion test is
(a) 63.5 mm (b) 65.3 mm performed to find the hardness coefficient of the stone.
(c) 68.3 mm (d) 63.8 mm
• A cylinder shaped sample of 25 mm φ and 25 mm
DSSSB JE 20.11.2019, Evening
LMRC AM 2018 Shift-II height is prepared for the stone whose hardness of
coefficient is to be determine.
Ans. (a) : Marshall stability testing– The apparatus
consists of a cylindrical mould 10 mm diameter and 6.35 Re duction in weight
cm height, with a base plate and color. A compaction of sample in grams
Coefficient of hardness = 20 –
pedestal and hammer are used to compact a specimen by 3
4.54 kg weight with 45.7 cm height of fall. • If coefficient of hardness value is 0-14 then stone is
Note:- The weight of the mixed aggregate taken for soft and used in road ballast.
the preparation of the specimen may be suitability • If coefficient of hardness vary between 14-17 then
altered to obtain a compacted thickness of 63.5 ± 3.0 stone is medium hard.
mm. Three or four specimen may be prepared. • If coefficient of hardness value is 17 then stone is
1060. The minimum desired Marshall Stability value very hard.
for a dense bituminous mix to be used in
bituminous concrete surface course is: 1064. Which one of following is not a IRC
(a) 900 kg (b) 500 kg recommended bituminous grade?
(c) 700 kg (d) 800 kg (a) 30/40 (b) 60/70
LMRC AM 2018 Shift-II (c) 80/100 (d) 70/90
Ans. (a) : The minimum desired marshall stability Gujarat BMC Technical Assistant 2017
value for a dense mix to be used in bituminous Ans. (d) : (i) Bitumen 80/100– The characteristics of
concrete surface course is 900 kg. this grade confirmed to that of S 90 grade as per IS 73-
• Optimum bitumen content % – 5 minimum 1992.
• Marshall stability (kg) – 900 kg minimum (ii) Bitumen 60 /70– This is harder grade than 80/100
1061. The pressure sustained per unit deformation of and confirmed to S 65 grade of IS 73-1992.
subgrade at specified deformation level using (iii) Bitumen 30/40– This is the hardest of all grades
specified plate size is termed as: and confirmed to S 35 grade of IS 73-1992.
(a) CBR 1065. The result of ring and ball softening point test
(b) Safe bearing capacity on asphalts is given in terms of
(c) Tangent modulus (a) Viscosity (b) Time
(d) Modulus of subgrade reaction (c) Flow (d) Temperature
NPCC 2017 Chandigarh JE 17.07.2016
Ans : (d) Plate Bearing Test– Ans. (d) : The softening point is the temperature at
P which the substance attains a particular degree of
k= kg / cm 3

0.125 softening under specified condition of test. The

Where, softening point is determine by ring & ball test.
k = Modulus of subgrade reaction • The softening point of various bitumen grades used
P = Pressure corresponding to settlement of 0.125 cm. in paving jobs vary between 350 to 700C.

Highway Engineering 628 YCT

1066. Softening point of bitumen to be used for road 1070. The ductility of bitumen is expressed as :
construction at a place where maximum (a) Time (b) Distance
temperature is 40o C should be (c) Speed (d) None of the above
(a) less than 40oC (b) greater than 40oC Rajasthan JEn (Diploma) 2016 Shift-I
o
(c) equal to 40 C (d) None of the above Ans. (b) : The ductility of bitumen is expressed as
Chandigarh JE 17.07.2016 distance in cm to which it will elongated before
Ans. (b) : Generally higher softening point indicates breaking when a standard briquette specimen of the
lower temperature susceptibility and is preferred in material is pulled apart at specified speed and a
warm climates. specified temperature.
• Hard grade bitumen possess higher softening point The ductility value of bitumen vary from 5 to over 100
than soft grade bitumens. for different bitumen grade.
• The softening point of various bitumen grades used • A minimum value of 50 cm in commonly specified.
in paving jobs vary between 350 to 700C. 1071. Bitumen of grade 60/70 means :
• For satisfactory performance and avoidance of (a) Its penetration value is 6 mm to 7 mm
bleeding, bitumen should have a softening point 5oC (b) Its penetration value is 60 cm to 70 cm
to 10oC above the maximum atmospheric (c) Its penetration value is 60 mm and softening
temperature. points is 70
1067. Penetration test on bitumen is used for (d) Its specific gravity is 0.6 to 0.7
determining its : M.P. VYAPAM Sub Engg. 4.9.2018 9.00 am
(a) grade Ans (a) : Bitumen of grade 60/70 means–
(b) viscosity
• Its penetration value is found from 6 mm to 7 mm.
(c) ductility
(d) temperature susceptibility • If grade of bitumen is 80/100 then penetration value
CRPF SI Overseer 2017 lies between 8 to 10 mm.
SSC JE 2.3.2017, Morning Shift 1072. Which one of the following component is added
Ans. (a) : The penetration test determinations the in rapid curing cutback bitumen?
hardness or softness of bitumen by measuring the depth (a) gasoline
in mm. (b) kerosene
• The bitumen grade is specified in terms of penetration (c) High boiling point gases
value 80/100. (d) None of the above
1068. The ductility value of bitumen is ................. MH PWD 2019
(a) Equal to that of tar Ans. (a) : Rapid curing cut back bitumen is made by
(b) More than that of tar reducing the viscosity of ordinary bitumen by adding
(c) Less than that of tar mostly petroleum type (gasoline) and Naptha.
(d) None of these • Rapid curing cutback bitumen are typically used as
SSC JE 2.3.2017, Morning Shift prime coat and tack coat.
Ans. (c) The ductility of binder is an indication of its Cut back bitumen are graded on the basis of its curing–
elasticity and ability to deform under load and return to (i) RC (Rapid curing) Gasoline, Naptha, Petrol
original condition. (ii) MC (Medium curing) Kerosine or liquid diesel
Comparison between Tar and Bitumen (iii) SC (Slow curing) Diesel or fuel oil
Properties Bitumen Tar 1073. Which one of the following are standard load
1. Colour Black to Colour same as values obtained from average of a large
dark brown bitumen number of tests on crushed stone at 5.0 mm?
2. Temperature Less more temperature (a) 2055 kg (b) 1370 kg
susceptibility temperature susceptible resulting (c) 2255 kg (d) 1570 kg
susceptible in greater variation in MH PWD 2019
viscosity with Ans. (a) : CBR Test - Empirical test, which measures
temperature. the strength (Base material of material and its not the
3. Ductility Less ductile More ductile true representation of resilient.
1069. The softening point of various bituminous Modulus
grades in (degree centigrade) for paving jobs • The pressure up to penetration (rate 1.25 mm/min) of
vary between : 12.5 mm and its ratio of the bearing value of standard
(a) 10–20 (b) 20–30 crushed rock is termed as CBR.
(c) 35–70 (d) 70–100 Load carried by specimen
Rajasthan JEn (Diploma) 2016 Shift-I CBR = ×100
Rajasthan JE (Diploma) 2016 Shift II Load carried by standard penetration
Ans. (c) : The softening point of various bitumen Load carried by std. penetration at –
between grade in (degree centigrade) for paving jobs 2.5 mm – 1370 kg (stress 70 kg/cm2)
vary between 35º-70ºC. 5.0 mm – 2055 kg (105 kg/cm2)

Highway Engineering 629 YCT

1074. Asphalt is soluble in............. Ans. (d) : Good quality stone must –
(a) water (b) partially in water (i) be durable
(c) fully in CS2 (d) partially in CS2 (ii) free from clay
MH Yavatmal ZP 2013 (iii) resist action of acid ........... etc.
Ans. (c) : Solubility test – Pure bitumen (asphalt) is Water absorption for building construction 5%, Water
fully soluble in carbon di-sulphide and carbon absorption for road pavement 0.6%
tetrachloride. 1078. CBR stands for
• If some quantity remains undissolved it exhibits the (a) California Board of Research
quantity of inert minerals present in the bitumen. (b) California Bearing Ratio
Bitumen should be soluble in CS2 at least 99%. (c) Central Board of Roads
1075. According to IS, bitumen is classified into........ (d) Central Board of Research
(a) 2 grades (b) 4 grades MH PWD 2016
(c) 8 grades (d) 10 grades WBPSC SAE 2001
MH Nashik ZP 2014 Ans. (b) : CBR– California bearing ratio the CBR
Ans. (d) : Bitumen – A viscous liquid or a solid Value are usually calculated for penetration of 2.5
consisting essentially of hydrocarbon and their mm and 5.0 mm
derivatives which is soluble in trichlore - ethylene is
Load carried by specimen
substantially nonvolatile and soften gradually when CRB = ×100
heated. Load carried by standard specimen
Bitumen contains (hydrocarbon) – Carbon (85%), Penetration Total std. load Unit std. load
hydrogen (12%) and oxygen (3%). kg/cm2
According to IS bitumen is classified into 10 grade. 2.5 mm 1370 70
5.0 mm 2055 105
Exam Point
1079. In CBR test the value of CBR is calculated at
Los Angles testing machine is used to conduct– (a) 2.5 mm penetration only
Abrasion test (b) 5.0 mm penetration only
As per IRC standards, aggregates subjected to (c) 7.5 mm penetration only
soundness test should have an average loss in (d) both 2.5 mm and 5.0 mm penetrations
weight not more than .............. when tested in Assam PSC AE (PWD) 2020
sodium sulphate after 10 cycles– 12% MH WRD 2016
The Los Angels abrasion value requirement for SSC JE 2011 (Evening)
coarse aggregates used in water bound macadam Ans. (d) : The CBR Values are usually calculated for
for the base course– Between 0 to 40% penetration of 2.5 mm and 5 mm.
Toughness property of an aggregate can be Corrected load value
tested by adopting– Aggregate Impact test CBR = × 100
The unit standard load, in kg/cm2, for a standard Standard Load
penetration of 2.5 mm in CBR test setup is– 70 Total std. Unit std. load
Penetration
1076. The ring and ball test is used to determine the load kg.f (kg/cm2)
...........of bitumen 2.5 mm 1370 70
(a) specific gravity (b) flash and fire point 5.0 mm 2055 105
(c) viscosity (d) softening point Generally the CBR value at 2.5 mm will be greater
M.P. VYAPAM Sub Engg. 2.9.2018, 2.00 pm than at 5 mm and in such a case CBR is taken for
Ans : (d) Ring and ball test to measure softening point design purpose.
of bitumen ring ball test is performed. 1080. The penetration test of bitumen determines the
• It is temperature at which bitumen attains a particular hardness or softness by measuring the depth in
degree of softness under standardized test conditions. ............... to which a standard loaded needle
• The softening point of paving grade bitumen 80/100 is will penetrate vertically.
35-500C. (a) One - tenth of a millimeter
• It indicates the temperature at which bitumen passes (b) One - fifth of a millimeter
from solid to liquid consistency. (c) One - ninth of a millimeter
• To avoid bleeding, bitumen should have a softening (d) None of the above
point 5 to 100C above the maximum atmospheric MH Nagar Parishad Mains 2018
temperature. Ans. (a) : Penetration test– It measures the hardness
1077. Good quality stone must be or softness of bitumen by measuring the depth in one
(a) Durable (b) Free from clay tenths of a millimeter to which a standard loaded needle
(c) Resist action of acid (d) All of these will penetrate vertically in 5 sec, while the temperature of
MH PWD 2016 the bitumen sample is maintained at 250C.
Highway Engineering 630 YCT
1082. The property of stones to withstand the adverse (d) 2055 kg and 1370 kg
action of weather is known as............. MH Asst. Town Planning 2018
(a) Soundness (b) Toughness Ans. (c) : CBR test measure the strength of the
(c) Hardness (d) None of the above material and are not a true presentation of the resilient
MH Nagar Parishad Mains 2018 modulus.
Ans. (a) : The aggregates used in road are subjected to In CBR test– pressure for 5mm penetration is also
physical and chemical action of rain and ground water, recorded and CBR corresponding to 2.5 mm
the impurities in them and that of atmosphere. Thus it penetration is computed.
is desirable that the road stone used in the construction
Penetration Standard load
should be sound enough, to withstand the weathering
action. 2.5 mm 1370 kg
• The property of stone to withstand the adverse 5.0 mm 2055 kg
action of weather is known as soundness. Note– CBR value is used to measure thickness of
• To check soundness of aggregates (IS : 2386 Part flexible pavement and to check the strength of material
V) the aggregate of specified size are subjected to for flexible pavement design.
cycle of alternate wetting in a saturated solution of 1085. Which one of the following test is conducted on
either sodium sulphate or magnesium sulphate for bitumen to evaluate the consistency property?
16-18 hours and then dried in oven at 105-1100C at (a) Ductility test
constant weight. (b) Penetration test
• After five cycle, loss in weight should not exceed (c) Flash & fire point test
12 percent when tested by sodium sulphate and 18 (d) Viscosity test
percent with magnesium sulphate solution. Maharashtra JE 2018 Shift-II
1083. Which one of the following process is used for MH PWD 2018
obtaining petroleum bitumen? Ans. (d) : Viscosity's the general term for consistency
(a) atmospheric vacuum distillation
and it is measure of resistance of flow.
(b) destructive distillation
(c) liquefaction • Viscosity of liquid bitumen is measured by efflux
(d) none of the above viscometers or saybolt furol.
MH Nagar Parishad Mains 2018 • The liquid is kept at a constant temperature and is
Ans. (a) : Atmospheric vacuum distillation process is made to pass through an orifice.
used for obtaining petroleum bitumen. • Dia of orifice varies in the range of 3 to 10 mm and
• Petroleum bitumen, normally called "Bitumen" or the volume of fluid is in the range of 50 to 200 ml.
asphalt is produced by refining crude oil. It is used as 1086. Which one of the following test is conducted to
binder in road, building products. It is very viscous, evaluate the weathering property of aggregate?
black/dark brown material. (a) Crushing test (b) Abrasion test
Exam Point (c) soundness test (d) Angularity test
MH PWD 2018
Generally, CBR test is a penetration test meant Ans. (c) : Soundness test of aggregate–The
for the evaluation of subgrade strength of roads
soundness test determine an aggregate's resistance to
and pavements. The full form of CBR is–
disintegration by weathering. Aggregate that are
Callifornia Bearing Ratio
The compressive strength of stone is found out durable, resistant weathering are less likely to degrade
by– Crushing test in the field.
Generally, a cement concrete road is discouraged • 1 Kg of coarse aggregate is taken as sample and
because– Its initial cost is high immersed in sodium sulphate and magnesium
The following test is performed for quick sulphate for 16-18 hours and then dried in over at
determination of the quality of subgrade soil– 105º-110º C.
C.B.R. • Immersion, drying and cooling process is repeated
Abrasion test is conducted to find– for 5 complete cycle.
Hardness of aggregate • And the loss in weight should not exceed 12%
While performing Attrition and Los Angles
when tested with sodium sulphate and 18% with
abrasion test the weight of stone to be used
should be– 5 kg MgSO4 solution
1084. For C.B.R. test on soil subgrade, the standard 1087. During CBR value determination, load
load values obtained from the average of a sustained by standard aggregate at 5mm
large number of tests on crushed stones at 2.5 penetration is taken as :
mm and 5.0 mm penetration are (a) 1370 kg (b) 2000 kg
(a) 1230 kg and 1855 kg (c) 2055 kg (d) 3000 kg
(b) 1855 kg and 1230 kg MH PWD 2018
(c) 1370 kg and 2055 kg Maharashtra JE 2018 Shift-I
Highway Engineering 631 YCT
 Ans. (c) : • Aggregate which are flaky or elongated can are
load or stressof soil detrimental to higher workability and stability of fixes.
CBR = • Rounded shape aggregate are highly workable.
load or stressof standard rock
• Angular aggregate has great binding property.
• CBR value are usually calculate for penetration of • The range of angularity number of aggregates used
2.5 mm and 5.0 mm. for construction is a toll.
• If CBR for 5 mm exceeds that for 2.5 mm, the test 100w
shall be repeated for checking. Angularity number = 67 -
• If the check test again gives similar results then high C × Ga
value obtained by 5.0 mm penetration is adopted and 1091. Which one of the following test is conducted to
reported as CBR value. evaluate the hardness property of aggregates?
Penetration of plunger (mm) Standard load (kg) (a) Water absorption test (b) Impact test
2.5 mm 1370 kg (c) Soundness test (d) Abrasion test
5.0 mm 2055 kg MH PWD 2018
7.5 mm 2630 kg Ans. (d) : Hardness of aggregate is evaluated by
1088. Which one of the following test is conducted to abrasion test.
evaluate the strength property of aggregate? • It is performed to decide whether they are suitable
(a) Crushing test (b) Abrasion test for different pavement construction works.
(c) Soundness test (d) Angularity test • The maximum value of 40% is allowed for WBM
MH PWD 2018 base course.
Ans. (a) : To check the strength property of aggregate • For bituminous coarse maximum value is 35%
the crushing test is performed. • Following test are performed for hardness test of
• The aggregate crushing value provides a relative aggregate–
measure of resistance to crushing under gradually (1) Less angles abrasion test (2) Dowel abrasion test
applied crushing load. (3) Dorry abrasion tests.
• A value less than 10 signifies an exceptionally strong 1092. The ductility test of bituminous material is
aggregates, while above 35 would normally be conducted at…….. and at a rate of pull of…….
regarded as weak aggregate. per minute.
Surface course < 30% crushing value (a) 25 degree celsius & 25 mm respectively
Base course < 45% crushing value
(b) 27 degree celsius & 50 mm respectively
1089. Which one of the following substance is (c) 27 degree celsius & 25 mm respectively
blended with bitumen for production rapid (d) 25 degree celsius & 50 mm respectively
curing cutback bitumen? MH PWD 2018
(a) petrol
(b) Diesel Ans. (b) : Ductility is measured by stretching a
(c) High boiling point gases standard briquette of bitumen having a cross sectional
(d) None of the above area of 1 cm2 at temperature of 270C and the rate of
MH PWD 2018 pull being 50 mm/min.
Ans. (a) : Cut back– Cut back is define as bitumen • The distance in cm that the briquette can be stretched
whose viscosity has been reduced by the addition of a before breaking is the ductility.
volatile diluent. • Its value varies from 5 to 100
Depending upon the diluent used, there are three type • A minimum value of 50 is commonly specified for
of cut back. waxy bitumen value may be as low as 15.
Rapid curing– Bitumen which has been fluxed with a • IRC has recommended a minimum ductility value of
neptha, petrol type of distillate. 75 cm for grades of 45 and above.
Medium curing– Bitumen has been fluxed with a
1093. BIS Classifies bitumen into grades 85/25, 85/40
kerosene type of distilate.
Slow curing– A liquid residue produced in the refining etc. The first and second numbers respectively
process, containing little or no volatile constituents. refer to
• High boiling point gases is blended with bitumen for (a) softening point and penetration
production of slow curing cut back bitumen. (b) penetration and softening point
(c) flash point and penetration
1090. Which one of the following test is conducted to
evaluate the shape property of aggregate? (d) flash point and softening point
(a) Crushing test (b) Abrasion test DSSSB JE 23.10.2019 First Shift
(c) Soundness test (d) Angularity test ISRO TA 08.04.2018
MH PWD 2018 LMRC JE 2016
Ans. (d) : Shape of aggregate is evaluated by doing Ans. (a) : Penetration test of bitumen–
angularity test. • Grades 85/25, 85/40 - the first number represent
• The particle shape of aggregate mass is determined softening and second number represent penetration.
by the percentage of flaky and elongated particle in it. • To find out the hardness or softness of bitumen.

Highway Engineering 632 YCT

 • To determine the consistency of bitumen material. Grade Purpose
• Grade of bitumen. 85/25 & 95/15 Used in expansion and
• The test carried out with a standard penetrometer Contraction joint in
with a needle loaded with 100 gm. structures fixing of insulating
• Unit of penetration is 1/10 mm. codes in building
1094. Bitumen in 85/25 & 115/25 Damp-proof coarse,
(a) Solid state is called asphalt insulation of cold storage,
(b) Semi fluid state is called mineral tar coating of pipe
(c) Fluid state is called petroleum 85/25 & 25/40 Sticking of bitumen felt
(d) All above 115/15 & 135/10 Manufacture of bitumen felt
MH PWD 2016 1098. Bitumen is a hydrocarbon which contains.......
MH Nashik JP 2014 (a) 85% carbon, 12% hydrogen & 3% oxygen
SSC JE 2007 (b) 65% carbon, 30% hydrogen & 5% oxygen
Ans. (d) : Bitumen – A viscous liquid or a solid. (c) 70% carbon, 25% hydrogen & 5% oxygen
Consisting essentially of hydrocarbon and derivatives. (d) 80% carbon, 17% hydrogen & 3% oxygen
Bitumen contains (hydrocarbon) – Carbon (85%), MH Chandrapur MNC 2017
hydrogen (12% ) and oxygen (3%). Ans. (a) : Bitumen– A viscous liquid or a solid
Bitumen in – consisting essentially of hydrocarbon and their
• Solid Stated is called asphalt derivatives which is soluble in trichloro - ethylene is
• Semi fluid state is called mineral tar. substantially nonvolatile and soften gradually when
• Fluid state is called petroleum. heated.
Bitumen contains (hydrocarbon)– Carbon (85%),
1095. If in a Dorry abrasion test the loss in weigh is hydrogen (12%) and oxygen (3%).
21 gms, then the co-efficient of hardness is
(a) 13 (b) 17 Exam Point
(c) 9.5 (d) 21
BSPHCL 29.01.2019 Shift-II The toughness of road aggregate is measured
(Pune MNC 2016) by– Impact test
Ans. (a) : Coefficient of hardness The strength of the subgrade of Roads is
expressed by– C.B.R. value
Loss of weight of gram
= 20 − California Bearing Ratio (CBR) is a–
3 Measure to indicate the relative strengths of
21 paving materials
= 20 − = 13
3 In a CBR test, If the CBR value at 5 mm is
1096. Bitumen felt is greater than that at 2.5 mm–
(a) used as water proofing material The test should be repeated
(b) used as damp proofing material The test measures the toughness of road
(c) made from bitumen and Hessian fiber aggregates– Impact test
(d) all of the above Los Angeles testing machine is used to conduct–
MH PWD 2016 Abrasion test
Ans. (d) : Bitumen felt– It is a glass fibre or poly ester Resistance of the action of moving load
fleece impregnated with bituminous material e.g. for (rubbing) is known as– Abrasion
bitumen which is produced in roll form and is used as 1099. When a volatile dilutent is added to bitumen to
water proofing damp proofing for roof covering. change its viscosity, the resultant material is
• It is also called roofing felt. called.
This is of two type (a) Viscous bitumen (b) Emulsion
(i) Fibre base (c) Cut back (d) Coal tar
(ii) Hassian base WBPSC JE 2009
1097. R-grade bitumen is also known as : Ans. . (c) : When a volatile dilutent is added to
(a) residual bitumen (b) straight run bitumen bitumen to change its viscosity the resultant material is
(c) cutbacks bitumen (d) blown bitumen called cut back.
MH Kolhapur MNC 2017 →It is a fluid binding
Ans. (d) : Blown bitumen– blown bitumen due to its →In cut back 80% bitumen and 20% solvent. Cut back
higher melting point and greater resistance to flow than are of three types
(1) Rapid cut back [RC]
ordinary straight-run bitumen is generally used on
(2) Medium cut back [MC]
building construction.
(3) Slow cut back [SC]
• Blown bitumen should confirm to requirement of
1100. Asphalt is a
Indian standard 102. It is available in six grades (a) Pure bitumen
namely 85/25, 85/40, 95/40, 95/15, 143/15, 135/100 (b) by-product of bitumen
and 155/6. (c) impure bitumen
Highway Engineering 633 YCT
 (d) Mixture of bitumen and inert material Ans. (c) : Cut back– Cut back is define as bitumen
WBPSC JE 2009 whose viscosity has been reduced by the addition of a
Ans. (d) : Asphalt :- It is black or brownish black in volatile diluent.
colour. It is a native mixture of hydro carbon- a Depending upon the diluent used, there are three type
product of decomposition of animal and vegetable of cut back.
substance. At temperature between 50-100°C it is in Rapid curing– Bitumen which has been fluxed with a
liquid state but at temperature less than this it remain neptha type of distillate.
in solid state Asphalt is a mixture of bitumen and inert Medium curing– Bitumen has been fluxed with a
material kerosene type of distilate.
Composition Percentage Slow curing– A liquid residue produced in the refining
Bitumen 52% process, containing little or no volatile constituents.
Inorganic matter 38% • High boiling point gases is blended with bitumen for
organic matter 10% production of slow curing cut back bitumen.
1101. Binder normally used in flexible pavement 1105. Which one of the following test is conducted on
construction is bitumen to determine the safety towards
(a) Cement (b) Line handling of hot bitumen?
(c) Bitumen (d) None of the above (a) Ductility test
WBPSC JE 2009 (b) Penetration test
Ans. (c) : Bitumen (asphalt) is petroleum based (c) Flash & fire point test
material which is used as binder in flexible pavement (d) Softening point test
and bitumen has severe adverse impact on Maharashtra JE 2018 Shift-I
environment as well as on living being. Ans. (c) : Flash and fire point test–
1102. The type of aggregates not suitable for high • The flash point is the lowest temperature in oC at
strength concrete and for pavements subjected which the application of a test flame causes the
to tension is vapour from bitumen to catch fire immediately and
(a) rounded aggregate (b) irregular aggregate the form the flash.
(c) angular aggregate (d) flaky aggregate • It is approximately 175oC.
SSC JE 27.01.2018, 10.15 am • The fire point is the lowest temperature at which
Ans. (a) The aggregate with rounded shape has the the application of test flame causes the bitumen to
minimum percentage of voids ranging from 32 to 33%. ignite and burns for at least 5 sec under specified
It gives minimum ratio of surface area to the given test condition.
volume and hence requires minimum water for • The safe limit of heating bitumen in usually 50oC
lubrication. It gives good workability for the given below the flash point.
amount of water and hence needs less cement for a
given water cement ratio. The only disadvantage is that 1106. Which of the following is the binding material
the interlocking between its particles is less and hence in water bound macadam roads?
development of bond is poor that is why rounded (a) Cement (b) Sand
aggregate is not suitable for high strength concrete and (c) Stone dust (d) Brick dust
for pavement subjected to the tension. M.P. VYAPAM Draftsman 1.9.2018 9.00 am
1103. Which bitumen test is conducted to determine Ans : (c) • The binding material used in a water bound
hardness of bitumen? macadam is a stone dust.
(a) Float test (b) Spot test • Stone dust in a waste material obtained from crusher
(c) Penetration test (d) Softening point test plants.
UPPCL JE 25.02.2020 1107. Water Bound macadam Roads are constructed
Nagaland PSC 2017 Paper-I with the following type of materials:
Ans. (c) : Penetration test is conduct to obtain hardness (a) Crushed stone aggregates
of bitumen at a temperature of 25ºC of a sample. (b) Soil and Gravel mixture
• Pointed needle penetrates the sample of material at (c) Disintegrated Rocks
25ºC (the load being 100 g and time of application of (d) Moorum
load being 5 sec). MP VYAPAM Sub Engg. 22.02.2015
• A unit of penetration is 1/10 mm. Ans. (a) : WBM– Water bound macadam are
1104. Which one of the following substance is constructed with coarse aggregates (either crushed or
blended with bitumen for production of slow broken stone, crushed slag, over burnt (Jhama) brick
curing cutback bitumen? aggregates or any other naturally occurring aggregates
(a) Petrol such as kankar and laterite of suitable quality.
(b) Diesel • The crushed or broken stone shall be hard, durable
(c) High boiling point gases and free from excess flat, elongated, soft and
(d) None of the above disintegrated particles, dirt and other deleterious
Maharashtra JE 2018 Shift-I material.

Highway Engineering 634 YCT

• WBM work shall consist of clean, crushed 1110. Which one of the following tests is preferred in
aggregates mechanically interlocked by rolling and laboratory to determine the extent of
bonding together with screening, binding material weathering of aggregate for road works?
where necessary and water laid on a properly prepared (a) Soundness test (b) Crushing test
subgrade /sub-base/ base or existing pavement. (c) Impact test (d) Abrasion test
M.P. VYAPAM Sub Engg. 4.9.2018, 2.00 pm
Exam Point Ans : (a) Soundness test of aggregate– It determines
an aggregate resistance to disintegration by weathering
Main drawback of CBR method is that it– action.
Gives the total thickness which remains the • Aggregates that are durable, resistant, weathering are
same irrespective in the component layers less likely to degrade in the field.
The Los angels abrasion value (%) of aggregates • Loss of weight should not exceed 12% is tested in
to be used for the final layer of Bituminous sodium sulphate and 18% if tested in MgSO4.
concrete is limited to– 30 1111. In highway material testing, Los Angels testing
The maximum limit of water absorption for machine is used to conduct the
aggregate suitable for road construction is– 0.6% (a) Abrasion test
Usually, what is the maximum permissible Los (b) Attrition test
Angeles abrasion value (%) for dense (c) Impact test
bituminous macadam– 55 (d) Crushing strength test
The result of ring and ball test on bitumen is APPSC AE Env. & Civil Common 2016 Paper-II
given in terms of– Temperature Ans. (a) : Loss Angels testing machine–
The phenomena in which, the segregation of • It is an abrasion test.
bitumen and aggregates takes place in the • Loss Angels abrasion testing is done to find the
presence of moisture is called- Stripping hardness of aggregates.
For penetration test on bitumen, the • It is performed to find the percent wear due to
penetrometer consists of a needle assembly with relative rubbing action between the aggregates and
a total weight of– 100 gram steel balls are used as abrasive charge.
1112. What Bitumen of grade 80/100 means?
1108. Find the coefficient of hardness, if the loss in
(a) its penetration value lies between 8 to 10 mm
weight is 25 gm as per dorry abrasion test : (b) its penetration value is 8 mm
(a) 11.4 (b) 11.5 (c) its penetration value is 10 cm
(c) 11.6 (d) 11.7 (d) its penetration value lies between 8 to 10 cm
MP VYAPAM Draftsman 4.4.2016 9.00 am APPSC AE Env. & Civil Common 2016 Paper-II
Ans. (c) Given Ans. (a) : • The unit of penetration is 1/10 mm.
Loss in weight of sample · 25 g • 80/100 penetration value means a penetration of 8-10
So, Coefficient of hardness mm.
Loss in weight of sample • Penetration limits enables bitumen to be classified on
= 20 − the basis of consistency.
3
• Common grade of bitumen are 30/40, 60/70, 80/100.
25
= 20 − 1113. For road pavements, the cement generally used is
3 (a) ordinary portland cement
60 − 25 (b) rapid hardening cement
=
3 (c) low heat cement
= 11.66 (d) blast furnace slag cement
Assam PSC AE (PRD) 2020
1109. Consider the following statement :
SSC JE 23.01.2018 (Evening)
(A) The specific gravity of bitumen is 0.99
Ans. (b) : For road pavements, the cement generally
(B) Specific gravity of asphalt varies from 1.29
used is rapid hardening cement. It is suitable for repair
to 1.31 of roads and bridges and when load is applied in a
Select the correct option : short period of time.
(a) A is true; B is false • Rapid hardening Portland cement (IS : 8041) has
(b) B is true; A is false high lime content and can be obtained by increasing
(c) Both A and B is true the C3S content but is normally obtained from OPC
(d) Both A and B are false clinker by finer grinding.
Nagaland PSC 2015 Paper-I Initial setting time – 30 Minutes (minimum)
Ans. (a) : The specific gravity of bitumen is 0.97– Final setting time– 10 Hours (Maximum)
1.02. Compressive strength–
The specific gravity at 15.6ºC (60º F) is commonly 1 day – 16 N/mm2
used when buying/selling asphalt cements. A typical 3 day – 27.5 N/mm2
specific gravity for asphalt is around 1.03. • Surface area of particles – 3250 cm2/gm
Highway Engineering 635 YCT
1114. Which test is carried out to know the resistance 1118. Which has the highest viscosity?
to flow of a given bituminous material? (a) RT-1 (b) RT-2
(a) Ductility (b) Viscosity (c) RT-3 (d) RT-4
(c) Softening point (d) Penetration Nagaland PSC 2017 Paper-I
Assam PSC AE (PRD) 2020 Ans. (d) : The highest viscosity is RT-4
Ans. (b) : Viscosity test of bitumen is carried out to Cut backs are designed by numerals representing
know the resistance to flow of a given bituminous progressively thick or viscous or viscous cutback.
material. RC- 2 has highest viscosity than RC-1 but RC-2.
• Absolute or dynamic viscosity is measured by MC-2 and SC-2 have same viscosity.
means of sliding plate viscometer.
1119. What is the percentage content of asphalt in
• The viscosity of liquid bitumen is measured by
the cut-back asphalt?
efflux viscometers.
(a) 10% (b) 30%
• Furol viscosity is standardized test.
(c) 50% (d) 80%
1115. A sample of bitumen has the softening point of SSC JE 24.01.2018 (Evening)
520C. Its penetration at this temperature would
be Ans. (d) → Cut-back asphalt is simply a combination of
(a) 800 (b) 750 asphalt cement and petroleum solvent.
(c) 600 (d) Cannot be predicted → % of asphalt in cut-back asphalt is approx. 80%.
Assam Engg. College Lecturer 2021 1120. Name of the test to be conducted for
Ans. (A) : The softening point of paving bitumen determining the purity of bitumen :
80/100 is 35–500C (a) Rolling thin film over (RTRO) test
• As given in question temperature is at 520C then its (b) Softening point test
penetration value will lies between 800 to 1000. (c) Pressure ageing vessel test
• The softening value of various paving grades vary (d) Solubility
between 350 to 70oC. IDJE CGVYAPAM JE Exam 2016
1116. The bulk specific gravity and the maximum Ans. (d) : Solubility Test– Pure bitumen is completely
theoretical specific gravity of a compacted soluble in solvents like carbon disulphide and carbon
bituminous mixture are 2.373 gm/cc and 2.478 tetra chloride. Insoluble material should be less than
gm/cc respectively. The air voids in the mix 1%.
would be A material is said to be cracked if solubility is more
(a) 4.2 per cent (b) 4.8 per cent than 0.5%. The minimum proportional of bitumen
(c) 5.0 per cent (d) 5.3 per cent soluble in carbon disulphide is specified as 99 percent.
Assam Engg. College Lecturer 2021
1121. For concreting the surface of the runways,
Ans. (a) : Air void % roads and pavements, the aggregate impact
 G − Gm  value shall not exceed by weight
Vav =  t  × 100 (a) 0.2 (b) 0.25
 Gt 
Gm = bulk specific gravity (c) 0.3 (d) 0.45
Gt = Theoretical specific gravity SSC JE 24.01.2018 (Evening)
Ans. (c)
 G 
= 1 − m  × 100 Aggregate Impact value Classification
 Gt  < 10% Exceptionally strong
 2.373  10-20% strong
= 1 −  × 100 20-30% Satisfactory for road
 2.478 
surfacing
= 4.23%
> 35% weak
1117. In highway pavement emulsion are mainly
used in 1122. What are the aggregate properties obtained
(a) Surface dressing from loss angles abrasion test and impact test?
(b) Patching and maintenance (a) Hardness : Toughness
(c) bitumen macadam (b) Toughness : Crushing strength
(d) asphaltic concrete (c) Toughness : Hardness
Nagaland PSC 2017 Paper-I (d) Hardness : Crushing strength
Ans. (b) : In highway pavement emulsion are used IDJE CGVYAPAM JE Exam 2016
especially in maintenance and patch repair works. Ans. (a) : Loss angles abrasion test is performed to
• The main advantage of emulsion is that it can be get hardness property of aggregate.
used in wet weather even when it is raining. • The principle of loss angles abrasion test is to find
• Emulsion can be used for soil stabilization in deserts. the percentage wear due to relative rubbing action
• Bitumen content is emulsion range from 40 to 60% between the aggregate and steel balls used as abrasive
and rest is water. charge
Highway Engineering 636 YCT
 Impact test–This test is carried out to evaluate the Ans. (b) : • Aggregates impact value indicates the
resistance to impact of aggregate or toughness of toughness of the aggregates.
aggregate. • It is carried out to evaluate the resistance to impact of
W aggregates.
Aggregate impact value (AIV) = 2 × 100 • The crushed aggregates are allowed to pass through
W1
2.36 mm is sieve.
AIV >/ 30% for surface course
>/ 35% for base course  W2 
 Aggregates impact value = ×100 
 W 1 
Exam Point
1126. Steam refined bitumen is known as
Bitumen is generally obtained from– (a) Pure bitumen (b) Refined bitumen
Petroleum product (c) Straight run bitumen (d) Treated bitumen
Penetration test on bitumen is used for MH Aurangabad MNC 2019
determination of its– grade Ans. (c) : Steam refined bitumen–
Specific gravity of bitumen is– • It is also said as paving bitumens [class 1] or
c1 - a1 straight run bitumens
S= • These are usually produced from the residue from
(b1
)(
- a1 d1 - c1 ) atmospheric distillation of petroleum crude oil by
Where a1= mass zero specific gravity bottle applying further distillation under vacuum, solvent
b1= a1+full of distilled water + precipitation or a combination of these process or
1 1
c = a +bottle half filled with bitumen a combination of these process.
d1= c1+rest filled with distilled water • Also called "steam-refined bitumens" or "straight-
RC-2, MC-2 and SC-2 correspond to– reduced bitumens"
Same viscosity • Where open steam is used, it is know as steam
Unit of viscosity of bitumen is– Centipoises refining/distillation.
Ductility of bitumen ranges between– 5-100 • Steam refined bitumen known as refined bitumen.
Grade of bitumen used for cold climate is– 1127. Which one of the following is the range of
80/100 specific gravity for tars?
1123. Softening point test is performed to identify (a) 0.97 to 1.02 (b) 1.02 to 1.10
following property : (c) 1.10 to 1.25 (d) 1.25 to 1.50
(a) Durability MH PWD 2019
(b) Volatile temperature Nagaland PSC 2017 Paper-I
(c) Temperature susceptibility Ans. (c) Specific gravity of tar = 1.10 to 1.25
(d) Solubility Specific gravity of bitumen = 0.97 to 1.02
CG Housing Board AE Exam 2014 The ductility of bitumen is less than that of tar.
Tar is produced by the destructive distillation of coal
Ans. (c) : • Softening point test of bitumen is done to
or wood
identify the temperature susceptibility of bitumen
1128. As per IRC specifications, the stripping value
• It is the temperature at which bitumen attains a particular
of aggregates should not exceed --------- percent
degree of softness under standardized test condition. for use in bituminous surface dressing when
1124. The consistency and flow resistance of bitumen aggregate coated with bitumen is immersed in
is measured by: water bath at 40 degree for 24 hours
(a) Ductility test (b) Penetration test (a) 25 (b) 35
(c) Softening point test (d) None of above (c) 40 (d) 50
CGPSC, AP, Lecturer Exam 2016 MH PWD 2019
Ans. (d) : • The viscosity of liquid is the property that Ans. (a) : As per IRC the stripping value of aggregate
retard the flow of bitumen and viscosity is the general should not exceed 25% for the use in bituminous
term for consistency. macadam, and carpet construction when aggregate coated
• When a force is applied to a liquid the slower the with bitumen in immersed in water bath at 400 for 24 hr.
movement at the liquid higher the viscosity. In this 1129. Softening point test of bitumen is done by–
sense viscosity is the pure measure of consistency. (a) penetrometer
• Viscosity is measured by efflux viscometer when (b) Los angel abrasion testing machine
bitumen is in liquid form (c) ring and ball apparatus
• Furol viscosity is standardized test of viscosity. (d) none of these
1125. Aggregate impact value indicates which MH PWD 2019
property of aggregate: Ans. (c) : Softening point test– It is conducted with
(a) Durability (b) Toughness the help of rings & ball apparatus
(c) Hardness (d) Strength • Penetrometer– Penetration test of bitumen.
(e) None of above • Los angles abrasion testing machine- abrasion/
CGPSC, AP, Lecturer Exam 2016 hardness of aggregate
Highway Engineering 637 YCT
1130. Which one of the following property of Ans. (d) : Abrasion test is done by
bitumen is determined by using Penetration (i) Los Angels abrasion test.
test? (ii) Deval abrasion test
(a) Grade (b) Viscosity (ii) Dorry abrasion test
(c) Ductility (d) Specific gravity w2
MH PWD 2019 Abrasion value of aggregate (AVA) = w ×100
1
Ans. (a) : Penetration test IS1203-1978–
AVA ≯ 30% for surface course
• To determine the penetration grade of bitumen to be
≯ 50% for base course
used for road construction.
• Unit of penetration is 1/10mm 1133. ––––––– of Bituminous emulsion is suitable for
Std. test condition – surface dressing and penetration macadam
0 type of construction.
temperature – 25 C
(a) Rapid setting (RS) type
Load on needle – 100 gram
(b) Medium setting (MS) type
Time in which penetration are recorded – 05 seconds (c) Slow setting (SS) type
Penetration grade Repeatability (d) Both Medium setting (MS) type & Slow
0 – 80 4% setting (SS) type
80 – 225 5% MH WCD 2019
Above 225 7% Ans. (a) : A rapid setting type emulsion is suitable for
1131. The ductility value of bitumen for suitability in surface dressing and penetration macadam type of
road construction should not be less than construction.
(a) 50 cm (b) 40 cm • Medium setting type emulsion is used for premix
(c) 35 cm (d) 45 cm with coarse aggregate.
MH PWD 2019 • Slow setting emulsion is preferred which give
Ans. (a) : Ductility is determined by ductility to test sufficient time for uniform laying of the mix. An
the property of the binder. This test is believed to special type of emulsion, to slow the tie process of
measure the adhesive property of bitumen and its water evaporation. This type of emulsifier are
ability to stretch . relatively very stable.
• The ductility value of bitumen for suitability in road 1134. Which one of the following apparatus is used to
construction should not less than 50 cm. conduct the flash & fire point test?
(a) Pensky Marten closed cup apparatus
Exam Point (b) Pycnometer
Specific gravity of bitumen is– 0.97 to 1.02 (c) Orifice type viscometer
Which type of material is used for cold mix– (d) None of the above
Emulsion MH WCD 2019
Ring and Ball apparatus is used for the following Ans. (a) : Pensky marten closed up apparatus or open
test of bitumen– Softening point cup is used to conduct the flash fire point test.
Bitumen of grade 80/100 means– • The minimum specified flash point of bitumen used
Its penetration value is 8 to 10 mm in pavement construction is 1750C
Prime coat is ............. viscous than tack coat and • The safe limit for heating bitumen is normally 500C
hence applied ........... tack coat– Less, before below the flash point
The purpose of conducting marshall stability
test– For Bituminous mix Design
This is generally used for pre–mixing tar
macadam in base course– RT–4
Softening point of bitumen to be used for road 1135. Bitumen is derived from
construction at a place where maximum (a) Destructive distillation of coal tar
temperature is 40oC should be– (b) Destructive distillation of petroleum
Greater than 40 degree (c) Fractional distillation of petroleum
Bitumen in– Solid state is called asphalt, (d) Naturally occurring ores
Semifluid state is called mineral tar, PHED JE Dept. (Cat -9) 2015
Fluid state is called petroleum Ans. (c) : Bitumen
1132. Which one of the following is a type of abrasion Refined bitumen is the residual fraction obtained by
test on aggregate? fractional distillation of crude oil 'It is the heaviest
(a) Los Angels abrasion test fraction and the one with the highest boiling point,
(b) Deval abrasion test at 525ºC'. It has specific gravity between 0.97 to 1.02
(c) Dorry abrasion test • Whereas the tar is found by the destructive
(d) All the other options distillation of coal or wood, it has higher viscosity that
MH WCD 2019 lies between 1.10 to 1.25.
Highway Engineering 638 YCT
1136. A combined value of flakiness and elongation Ans. (c) : • Ring and ball test is performed for
index is to be determined for a sample of softening point test of bitumen.
aggregates. The sequence in which the two tests • Softening point is the temperatures at which bitumen
are conducted is: attains a particular degree of softness under
(a) Elongation index test followed by flakiness standardized test conditions.
index test on no elongated aggregates
1139. A form of Bitumen that is obtained by fluxing
(b) Elongation index test followed by flakiness
asphaltic bitumen in presence of some suitable
index test on the whole sample
liquid distillates of coal tar or petroleum is :
(c) Flakiness index test followed by elongation
(a) Cut-back bitumen (b) Bitumen emulsion
index test on the whole sample
(c) Plastic bitumen (d) Blown bitumen
(d) Flakiness index test followed by elongation
index test on the non-flaky aggregates DSSSB JE 20.11.2019, Morning
DSSSB JE -23.10.2019 First Shift Ans. (a) : • A form of bitumen that is obtained by
Ans. (d) : Flakiness index test : If least lateral fluxing asphaltic bitumen in presence of some suitable
dimension < 0.6 × mean dimension → flacky particle. distillates of coal tar or petroleum is called as cutback
bitumen.
• In order to perform this test sufficient quantity of
aggregates must be considered, such that 200 pieces • It contains 85% bitumen and 15% solvent.
of each traction can be gauged. • Cut back bitumen are available in three types.
• Particle of each fraction are passed turn by turn 1. Rapid curing
through the respective opening over the "thickness 2. Medium curing
gauge" and weight of aggregates passing through 3. Slow curing
these opening is noted and when expressed in terms 1140. According to friction coefficient test, as per
of original weight of aggregates is termed as MORTH specifications, the polished stone
"Flakiness index" value of coarse aggregates used in bituminous
Elongation index test– concrete and semi dense bituminous concrete
If, Greater size > 1.8 times of its mean size → surfacing of roads should not be less than
elongated aggregate. _____
• In order to perform this test sufficient quantity of (a) 55 (b) 45
aggregates must be taken, such that 200 pieces of (c) 30 (d) 50
each fraction can be gauged. DSSSB JE 20.11.2019, Morning
• Particle are then passed through, respective opening Ans. (a) : According to friction coefficient test, as per
over the length gauge and aggregates retained over MORTH specifications, the polished stone value of
these opening is weighed and is expressed in termed coarse aggregates used in bituminous concrete and
of original weight of aggregates and is referred as semi dense bituminous concrete surfacing of roads
elongation index. should not be less than 55.
• Flakiness index test followed by elongation index 1141. In angularity number test, the angularity
test on the non-flaky aggregates. number for aggregates used in construction
• These test are not applicable for aggregates having generally ranges from ______.
thickness more than 6.3 mm. (a) 5 to 10 (b) 10 to 100
1137. _______ is used for Ductility test of bitumen. (c) 0 to 11 (d) 0 to 15
(a) ball and ring DSSSB JE 20.11.2019, Morning
(b) Specific gravity bottle Ans. (c) : • Angularity represents the degree of
(c) Briquette Mould packing.
(d) cylinder • Angularity No = 67 – % solid volume
DSSSB JE 4.11.2019, Afternoon • 67 represents the volume of solid (in %) of most
Ans. (c) : • Bitumen ductility test is done by briquette rounded gravel in a well computed state with would
mould having across sectional area of 1 sq-cm at a have 33% voids.
temp 27ºC Thus the angularity no. measures the voids in excess of
• The rate of pull being 5 cm/min. 33%.
• A minimum value of 50 is commonly specified for • Higher the angularity number, more angular is the
waxy bitumen, values may be as low as 15. aggregate
• Bitumen binder should be sufficiently ductile, i.e., it 100 W
should be capable of being stretched without breaking. Angularity = 67 −
C× Ga
1138. In bitumen test, Ring and Ball apparatus is
C = Weight of water in same cylinder
used to find the :
Ga = Sp. gravity of aggregates.
(a) viscosity (b) penetration
(c) softening point (d) specific gravity • The range of angularity no. for aggregates used for
DSSSB JE 4.11.2019, Afternoon construction lies 0 to 11.
Highway Engineering 639 YCT
1142. Which apparatus is used to find the softening Ans. (a) : • The unit standard load for a standard
point of bitumen? penetration of 2.5 mm in CBR test set-up is 1370 kg
(a) Penetrometer (70 kg/cm2) and 2055 kg (105 kg/cm2) for 5.0 mm
(b) Furol viscometer penetration respectively.
(c) Ring and Ball apparatus Load carried by specimen
(d) Briquette Mould CBR = ×100
DSSSB JE -23.10.2019 Second Shift Load carried by standard specimen
Ans. (c) : • Ring and ball apparatus is used to measure Exam Point
softening point of bitumen. Bitumen emulsion is–
• Softening point is the temperature at which bitumen Liquid containing bitumen in suspension
attains a particular degree of softness under The grades of bitumen is the most suitable for a
standardised test conditions. 7–day maximum average air temperature of
• The softening point of paving grade bitumen 80/100 15°C– VG10
is 35º-50ºC. The significance of softening point is that According to IS 73, the minimum penetration of
it indicates the temperature at which bitumen passes VG 30 grade bitumen tested at 25°C is– 45
from solid to liquid consistency. Mastic asphalt is generally used for–
1143. Briquette Mould is used for which of the Damp proof course and water proof layer
following test of bitumen? Recommended grade of tar for grouting purpose
(a) Flash and Fire point test is– RT –5
(b) Specific Gravity test The Bitumen grade 80/100 indicates–
(c) Ductility test Penetration value
(d) Adhesion test The ductility of bitumen is expressed as–
DSSSB JE 23.10.2019, Shift-II Distance
Ans. (c) Briquette Mould is used to test the ductility of The equipments is most suitable for mixing wet
the bitumen. mix macadam– Pan mixer
• Bitumen binder should be sufficiently ductile, i.e. it Marshall stability test for bituminous mixtures is
should be capable of being stretched without breaking, carried out at what temperature (±1 deg C)– 60
ductility is the opposite of brittleness. As per IRC, the minimum elastic recovery for
• It is measured at 27ºC and the rate of pull being crumb rubber modified bitumen should be– 50%
5cm/min. 1146. Which of the following tests is used to find the
toughness property of aggregate?
(a) Aggregate impact test
(b) Angularity number test
(c) Aggregate crushing strength test
(d) Los Angels abrasion test
DSSSB JE 20.11.2019, Evening
Ans. (a) : • Toughness property of aggregate is found
by impact test.
• Aggregate passing 12.5 mm sieve and retained on 10
mm sieve is filled in cylindrical steel cup of internal
1144. Asphalt is a mixture of dia 10.2 mm and depth 5 cm which is attached to metal
(a) bitumen and asbestos base of impact testing machine.
(b) bitumen and cement W
• Aggregate impact value = 2 ×100
(c) bar and asbestos W1
(d) bitumen and inert mineral matter • Aggregate to be used for wearing course, the impact
KSDC-KLDC Code 41/2014 value shouldn't exceed 30 percent, for bituminous
Ans. (d) : Asphalt is a mixture of bitumen and some macadam the maximum permissible value of IRC is 40
inert material or minerals. percent.
Asphalt–Asphalt is a mixture of bitumen and some 1147. The laboratory test to determine hardness of
inert materials or minerals the road aggregates is :
• Asphalt mixture contains coarse aggregate, fine (a) Impact Test
aggregates, filler and asphalt mixed in a specified ratio. (b) Los Angels Abrasion Test
• It is used as the surface course or binder course of (c) Crushing Test
asphalt pavement on roads. (d) Soundness Test
1145. The unit standard load, in for a standard DMRC JE 2014 PAPER-I
penetration of 2.5 mm in CBR test set-up, is : Ans. (b) : There are three type of laboratory test
(a) 13.44 kN (b) 35.32 kN performed to determine hardness of the road
(c) 70 kN (d) 105 kN aggregates
DSSSB JE 20.11.2019, Evening (i) Los Angles abrasion test
Highway Engineering 640 YCT
 (ii) Davel abrasion test Fire point–The lowest temperature at which Bitumen
(iii) Dorry abrasion test get ignited and burn. Eg. Pensky-Martens apparatus.
• Los Angles abrasion test is a preferred one for Loss on heating test–When the bitumen is heated, it
carrying out the hardness property and has been losses the volatile and get hardered, not more than 1%
standardized in India (IS : 2386 Part-IV). loss in weight is desirable. Less loss on heat better is
• The principle of Los Angels abrasion test is to find bitumen.
the percentage wear due to relative rubbing action 1151. The test to determine the hardness property of
between the aggregate and steel balls used as abrasive aggregates used in highway is :
charge. (a) Soundness test (b) Crushing test
• Abrasion value of good aggregates for high (c) Abrasion test (d) Impact test
pavement material should be less than 30%, however NLC GET 24.11.2020
for base course in WBM it may be 50%. Ans. (c) : Abrasion test is used to determine the
Coefficient of hardness hardness property of aggregates in highway by Los
Loss of weight in gram Angels Abrasion test.
= 20 –
3 For base course >/ 50% and for surface course >/ 30%.
1148. Which among the following indicates shape test • Aggregate crushing value → By UTH
for aggregate? Base course >/ 45% and surface course >/ 30%
(a) CBR Test (b) Deval Test •Aggregate impact value → By Impact testing
(c) Elongation Test (d) Los Angels Test machine
NMRC JE 2019 Base course > 40% and wearing course >/ 30%
Ans. : (c) Elongation index of an aggregate is the • Soundness test → Weathering of aggregate
percentage by weight of particle whose greatest >/ 18% (MgSO4)
dimension (Length) is greater than (1.8 times or 9/5 >/ 12% (Na2SO4)
times) their mean dimension. • Flakiness and elongation index → >/ 15% for both.
1149. Which among the following is NOT performed • Angularity No. (0-11)
on bitumen?
1152. What will be the purpose of the penetration
(a) Softening Point Test (b) Viscosity Test
test on bitumen?
(c) Los Angels Test (d) Penetration Test
(a) Knowing its ductility
NMRC JE 2019
(b) To know is viscosity
Ans. : (c) To ensure the quality of bitumen several tests (c) Knowing temperature sensitivity
are performed which are as follows – (d) Knowing its grade
• Ductility test UPRVUNL JE 2014
• Flash and fire point test
Ans. : (d) • The penetration test of bitumen is done to
• Float test
classify the grades
• Penetration test
• It is direct measure of hardness of bitumen at 25ºC
• Loss on heating test using 100g of load for a 5 sec of application.
• Softening point test • 30/40, 60/70, 80/100 are the common grades of
• Special gravity test bitumen.
• Water content
1150. A test for detecting overheated or cracked Exam Point
bitumen is : As per BIS bitumen grade 85/40, 65/25 etc. the
(a) Spot test (b) Flash and fire test first and second number represents–
(c) Solubility test (d) Loss on heating test Softening and penetration point
NLC GET 24.11.2020 Kerosene is used as a solvent in making of–
Ans. (a) : A test for detecting overheated or cracked 'Cut back' bitumen
bitumen is Spot test. The viscous liquid obtained from the destructive
• Spot test is a test for detecting over heated or cracked distillation of organic material is known as– Tar
bitumen. In this 2g of Bitumen is dissolved in 10 ml of The approximate bitumen content (expressed in
naptha. A drop of solution is drop on a filter paper, if percentage) in the refined asphalt– 52
the strain or the spot on the paper is uniform in color, The percentage content of asphalt in the cut-back
then bitumen is uncracked, but the spot form dark or asphalt– 80%
black brown colour then it is cracked. Which test of bitumen Ring and Ball apparatus is
Solubility test–To measure the quantity of impurity used– Softening point test
present in bitumen, the insolubility shouldn't be more In the softening point test of the bitumen with
than 1%. the help of ring and ball apparatus, what is the
Flash-fire test–Flash point is the temperature at which diametre (cm) of the steel ball– 0.95
bitumen get vapours to catch fire. In the form of flash The property of bitumen is related to the pensky-
standard flashing point – 175º as per ISI. Marten test– Flash and fire point
Highway Engineering 641 YCT
1153. Do not use of ballast while concrete is : 1157. Match the list I and II-
(a) Granular surface
(b) Need rough surface A Penetration test 1 Design of
(c) Need smooth surface bituminous
(d) Need bright surface concrete mix
UPRVUNL JE 2014
B Marshal test 2 Hardness of
Ans. : (d) Do not use of ballast while concrete is need aggregate
bright surface.
C Ring and ball 3 Gradation of
• Aggregates to be used for bearing course, the impact test asphalt
value shouldn't exceed 30 percent. For bituminous
macadam the maximum permissible value defined by D Los Angels 4 Determination of
softening point
IRC is 40 percent.
• It is given in IS 283-1970 Code-
A B C D
1154. For concrete that needs to be used for wearing
surfaces, such as run ways, roads and (a) 2 1 4 3
pavements, according to IS 283-1970, the (b) 1 2 4 3
aggregate impact value shall not exceed ........% (c) 3 1 4 2
by weight. (d) 2 1 3 4
(a) 30 (b) 25 GSSSB Sub-overseer 2020
(c) 35 (d) 45 Ans. (c) : Penetration test
DMRC JE 19.2.2020 (Evening) • Gradation of asphalt is done by performing
Ans. (a) : For concrete that needs to be used for penetration test on bitumen.
wearing surfaces, such as run ways, roads and • Marshal test – Design of bituminous concrete mix is
pavements, according to IS 283-1970, the aggregate done by performing Marshal test.
impact value shall not exceed 30% by weight. • Ring and ball test – It is done to test the softening
1155. What are the standards for testing of road point of bitumen
macadam in Aggregate Impact Test ? • Los angles – This test is performed to determine the
(a) 14 kg wt, 38 cm drop, 15 blows hardness of aggregates
(b) 14 kg wt, 35 cm drop, 20 blows 1158. The impact tests are used to determine. .............
(c) 18 kg wt, 35 cm drop, 15 blows (a) Ultimate crushing strength
(d) 18 kg wt, 30 cm drop, 20 blows (b) Toughness
HPSSC JE CODE 552/2018 (c) Ductility
Ans. (a) : • In impact test aggregates passing 12.5 mm (d) Tenacity
sieve and retained on 10 mm sieve is filled in a SSC JE 3.3.2017, Afternoon Shift
cylindrical steel cup of internal dia 10.2 mm and depth Ans. (b) For determining the toughness of stone, it is
5 cm which is attached to a metal base of impact subjected to impact test in a page impact test machine.
testing machine The aggregate impact value test is carried out tot
• The material is filled in 3 layers where each layer is evaluate the resistance to impact of aggregate or
tempered for 25 number of blows toughness of aggregates. The crushed stone is passed
• Metal hammer of weight 13.5 to 14 kg is arranged to through 2.36 mm sieve and the aggregate impact value
drop with a free full of 38.0 cm by vertical guides and is tested.
the test specimen is subjected to 15 number of blows. W2
1156. As per IRC the difference in temperature in AIV = × 100
W1
between aggregate and binder should not be
(a) More than 140C (b) Less than 140C for bearing course AIV 30%.
0
(c) Less than 20 C (d) More than 200C For bituminous macadum AIV 40%
HPSSC JE CODE 502/2018 1159. A subgrade soil sample was tested using
Ans. (a) : Preparation of the base standard CBR apparatus and the observations
• Bituminous macadam mix shall be in the range of are as given below. Assuming that the load
150ºC to 163ºC and that of the aggregate in the penetration is convex throughout, the CBR
range of 155ºC to 163ºC. Provided that the value (%) of the sample is
difference in temperature between the binder and Load (kg) Penetration (mm)
aggregates at no time exceeds 14ºC.
• Mixing shall be through to ensure that a 60.5 2.5
homogeneous mixture is obtained in which all 80.5 5.0
particles of aggregates are coated uniformly and (a) 6.5 (b) 5.5
discharge temperature of mix shall be between (c) 4.4 (d) 3.9
130ºC to 160ºC. KPSC JE 2.7.2016
Highway Engineering 642 YCT
 Ans. (c) : Ans. (d) : Rapid curing cut back bitumen–
Load (kg) Penetration (mm) • A rapid curing cut back bitumen is said to cure as
60.5 2.5 the petroleum solvent that evaporates.
80.5 50 • Prepared with, rapidly evaporating diluents such as
CBR Value a naptha or gasoline.
60.5 • By mixing diluents we reduce the viscosity of an
for 2.5 mm penetration = × 100 = 4.41
1370 ordinary bitumen.
80.5 1164. In the softening point test of the bitumen with
for 5 mm penetration = × 100 = 3.917 the help of ring and ball apparatus, what is the
2055
diametre (cm) of the steel ball?
then 4.41 is adopted because it have greater CBR
(a) 0.35 (b) 0.65
value.
(c) 0.95 (d) 1.25
1160. Most suitable material for highway SSC JE 22.1.2018, Evening Shift
embankments is
Ans. (c) The softening point is the temperature at which
(a) granular soil (b) organic soil
the substance attains a particular degree of softening
(c) silts (d) clays
under specified condition of test.
HPSSC JE 2015
• Softening point of various bitumen grades generally
Ans. (a) : • The materials used in embankments, lies in between 350C to 700C. The softening point of
subgrades, earthen shoulders and miscellaneous back bitumen is usually determined by ring and ball test.
fills shall be soil, moorum, gravel, a mixture of these.
1165. Which of the following property of bitumen is
The following types of material shall be considered
unsuitable for embankment. related to the pensky-Marten test?
(a) Ductility (b) Softening point
• Clay having liquid limit exceeding 70 and plasticity
(c) Flash and fire point (d) Viscosity
index exceeding 45; and materials with salts resulting
SSC JE 22.1.2018, Evening Shift
in leaching in the embankment.
• Where an expansive clay with acceptable "free Ans. (c) Flash and fire point test is conducted on
swelling index" value is used as a fill material, bitumen to know the safe mixing and application
subgrade and top 500 mm portion of the embankment temperature values of particular bitumen grade with the
just below subgrade shall be non-expansive in nature. help of Pensky-Martens closed tester.
• Softening points test is conducted by using Ring and
1161. The maximum limit of water absorption for
Ball apparatus.
aggregate suitable for road construction is
(a) 0.40 % (b) 0.60 % • Ductility test on bitumen measures the distance in
(c) 0.80 % (d) 1.00 % centimeters to which it elongates before breaking when
Assam PSC AE (PWD) 2020 a briquette specimen of the materials is pulled at a
Mizoram PSC JE (Irr.& WRD) Oct. 2018 Paper II specified speed and at specified temperature.
MH PWD 2016 1166. The viscous liquid obtained from the
Ans. (b) : • The specific gravity of aggregates destructive distillation of organic material is
normally used in road construction ranges from about known as .........
2.5 to 3.0 with an average of about 2.8, the water (a) paint (b) slag
absorption value shall not be more than 0.6 percent by (c) tar (d) None of these
unit weight of aggregate. SSC JE 29.01.2018, Evening Shift
• The water absorption value of building stone should Ans. (c) 'Tar' is the wood or coal product. This is
not be greater than 5% by self weight. obtained by destructive distillation of wood or coal
1162. The bitumen grade 80/100 indicates: (organic materials). This is highly organic i.e. carbon
(a) Viscosity (b) Specific gravity content is very high. This is viscous in nature. The tar
(c) Penetration (d) None of these has both medical & industrial uses.
KPSC JE Code 64/2016 1167. What is the approximate bitumen content
Ans. (c) : Penetration test is a measure of hardness or (expressed in percentage) in the refined
grade of bituminous material. asphalt?
• A 80/100 grade bitumen indicates that its penetration (a) 5 (b) 20
value lies between 8 mm to 10 mm. (c) 36 (d) 52
Different other grades– 30/40, 60/70, 80/100. SSC JE 29.01.2018, Evening Shift
Note–80/200 grade used for colder regions. Ans. (d) Refined Asphalt cements consists of almost
1163. Rapid curing cutback bitumen is produced by pure bitumen, which by definition is entirely soluble in
lending bitumen with : carbon di-sulphide. Only very little amounts of
(a) Benzene (b) Kerosene impurities are generally present in refined asphalt
(c) Diesel (d) Petrol cement. The approximate bitumen content in refined
KPSC JE Code 64/2016 asphalt is 52% .
Highway Engineering 643 YCT
1168. Which one of the following tests, is used to test 1170. Log Angles machines is used to test the
aggregate for its abrasion resistance: aggregate for .............
(a) Deval attrition test (a) Crushing strength (b) Impact value
(b) Dorry abrasion test (c) Abrasion resistance (d) Water absorption
(c) Los Angels test BMC TA 2019
(d) All option are correct SSC JE 4.3.2017, Morning Shift
SSC JE 22.1.2018, Evening Shift SSC JE 2012
Ans. (d) Abrasion test is carried out to test the hardness Ans. (c) Abrasion test – Use apparatus is Los angles
property of aggregates and to decide whether they are machine.
suitable for different pavement construction works.  Original − final 
Los – Angels abrasion test is to find out the percentage % wear =   × 100
 Original 
wear due to relative rubbing action between the
aggregate and steel balls used as abrasive charge. % abrasion (wearing) for wear surface (top) >/ 30%
Los–Angels machine consists of circular, drum of % abrasion (wearing) for base of road >/ 50%
internal diameter 700mm and length. 520mm mounted 1171. Bitumen is generally obtained from
on horizontal axis. (a) Organic material (b) Synthetic material
(c) Petroleum product (d) Coal
Exam Point SSC JE 2008
The resistance of a material to Penetration is– Ans. : (c) Bitumen is generally obtained from
Hardness petroleum product. Bitumen contain 87% carbon, 8%
The penetration test on bitumen is used for hydrogen and up to 5% sulphur, 1% nitrogen, 1%
determining its– Grade oxygen.
The ductility value of bitumen is– 1172. California bearing ratio is used to find :
Less than that of tar (a) The bearing capacity of soil
VG 30 grade of paving bitumen is suitable for 7 (b) The thickness of a flexible pavement
day Average Maximum Air Temperature (0oC) (c) Ratio of ultimate bearing capacity to net
ranging between– 38–45 bearing capacity
Bitumen is graded by viscosity at T°C, where T (d) Depth of foundation
is– 60 GETCO 2017
The standard penetration of VG 40 as stipulated Ans. (b) : In this method, the CBR values are used to
by the Indian standard is a minimum of– 35.00 determine the total thickness of the flexible pavement
The flash point temperature (degree C) of paving and its various layers.
grades of bitumen as per the Indian standard is–
220 1173. Heating asphalt with sand and mineral fillers
The grade of coal tar pitch is said to be hard if its produces:
softening point lies in the range of– 82-92 (a) asphaltic felt (b) distilled asphalt
The apparatus used to find the ductility of (c) asphalitc terrazzo (d) mastic asphalt
asbestos is– Briquette mould UPRVUNL JE 2019
1169. Which of the following test is used for the Ans. (d) : Heating asphalt with sand and mineral filters
bitumen? produces as mastic asphalt. Mastic asphalt concrete or
(a) Slump test (b) Abrasion test sheet asphalt is produced by heating hard grade blown
(c) Penetration test (d) Fineness test bitumen in green cooker (mix) unit. It become a
SSC JE 25.01.2018, Evening Shift viscous liquid after which the aggregate mix is added.
Ans. (c) : • Slump test is a test which is performed for 1174. As per IRC standards, aggregates subjected to
checking the workability of concrete. soundness test should have an average loss in
• Abrasion test is performed on the brick, stones, weight not more than _____ when tested in
aggregates etc. sodium sulphate after 10 cycles.
• Fineness test is performed for measuring the particle (a) 18% (b) 12%
size distribution of soil, cement sand etc. (c) 10% (d) 15%
• On bitumen a number of tests are performed some UPRVUNL JE 2019
are given following– Ans. (b) : As per IRC standards, aggregates subjected
(a) Penetration test (d) Specific gravity test to soundness test should have an average loss in
(b) Ductility test (e) Viscosity test weight not more than 12% when tested in sodium
(c) Softening point test (f) Flash & fire test etc. sulphate after to cycles and the loss of weight should
not exceed 18% with magnesium sulphate solution.
1175. When the angular number of an aggregate
sample is 2, it indicates that the aggregates are
more ________.
(a) rounded (b) flaky
(c) angular (d) partly rounded
UPRVUNL JE 2019
Highway Engineering 644 YCT
 Ans. (a) : The angularity number is calculated from Ans. (a) : CBR test was developed the California
100W division of highway as a method of classifying and
the formula = Angularity Number = 67 - evaluating soil-subgrade and base course materials for
C × Ga flexible pavements.
where, 1180. ______ is used as a solvent in making 'cut back'
w = mean weight of aggregates in the cylinder (gm) bitumen.
C = weight of water required in the cylinder (gm) (a) Petrol (b) Diesel
Ga = specific gravity of aggregate. (range of angularity (c) Kerosene (d) Turpentine
varies from 0-11). LMRC JE 2018 Shift-I
• For rounded aggregate Angularly no. will be 2. Ans. (*) : Cutbacks are designated by numerals
1176. Which of the following is the grade of a representing progressively thicker or viscous cutback
Bitumen? for example RC-2 is more thicker than RC-1 but RC-2,
(a) VG 10 (b) VG 20 MC-2 and SC-2.
(c) VG 30 (d) All of the above • Petroleum such as naptha or gasoline in RC-cutback
BMC TA 2019 • Kerosene and light diesel oil used in medium curing
Ans. (d) : Viscosity Grade Bitumen : The new cutback
method of grading the product has now rested on • High boiling point gas oil is blended with bitumen in
the viscosity of the Bitumen (at 60º C and 135º C), SC-cutback.
the new grades have thus evolved with
nomenclature : 1181. The Los Angels abrasion value requirement for
coarse aggregates used in water bound
Minimum of Approximate
macadam for the base course:
Grades absolute viscosity, penetration
(a) Between 60 to 70% (b) Between 40 to 50%
poise @ 60º C grade
(c) Between 0 to 40% (d) Between 50 to 60%
VG 10 800 80-100
SSC JE 25.09.2019 (10 AM) Shift I
VG 20 1600 80-90
VG 30 2400 50-70 Ans. (c)
Los Angels Abrasion or Hardness Test [IS:2386-
VG 40 3200 40-60
1963]-Los Angels abrasion test is generally carried
1177. As per IS:383 (1970), the maximum limit of out to evaluate the hardness property of aggregates
aggregate crushing value for aggregates used in and to decide its suitability for different pavement
concrete other than wearing surfaces should be construction works.
(a) 20% by weight (b) 45% by weight The principle of Los Angels abrasion test is to find
(c) 15% by weight (d) 30% by weight the percentage wear due to the rubbing action
BSPHCL JE 2019 (Shift III) between the aggregate and steel balls used as
Ans. (b) : As per IS:383 (1970), abrasive charge.
Aggregate Crushing value- When determined in A maximum value of 40% percent is allowed for
accordance with IS : 2386 (Part IV):1963 shall not water bound macadam base course.
exceed 45% for aggregate used for concrete other than For bituminous concrete, a maximum value of 35%
for wearing surfaces ,and 30% for concrete for wearing is specified.
surfaces, such as runways, roads and pavements.
1182. While conducting the softening point test on
1178. Los Angels testing machine is generally used to bitumen, the result is expressed as:
conduct (a) Temperature (b) Time
(a) Attrition Test on stones (c) Viscosity (d) Flow
(b) Impact Test on stones SSC JE 25.09.2019 (10 AM) Shift I
(c) Abrasion Test on stones Ans. (a)
(d) Crushing Value Test on stones Softening Point Test (IS : 1205–1978)
BSPHCL JE 2019 (Shift III) Softening point denotes the temperature at which the
Ans. (c) : bitumen attains a particular degree of softening under
Impact test - Impact machine the specifications of test. The softening point of
Attrition Test - Dorry testing machine bitumen is usually determined by Ring and Ball test.
Abrasion Test - Los Angels machine
1179. California Bearing Ratio (CBR) test is
conducted on this layer to determine pavement
thickness in modern flexible pavement
construction. Identify the layer.
(a) Sub-grade
(b) Granular Sub-base
(c) Water Bound Macadam
(d) Wet Mix Macadam Generally higher softening point indicates lower
Mizoram PSC JE (PHE&PWD) Apr. 2016 Paper-II temperature susceptibility and is preferred in warm
Highway Engineering 645 YCT
climates. A brass ring containing test sample of bitumen 1187. What is the soil expansion ratio when the
is suspended in liquid like water or glycerin at a given standard callifornia dial tolerance test (sample
temperature. height is 125 mm) gives a difference of 0.125
The softening point of various bitumen grades used in mm in the final dial gauge reading?
paving jobs vary between 350 to 700C. (a) 10 (b) 1
1183. In A–30 grade bitumen, A stands for : (c) 100 (d) 0.1
(a) Ahmedabad (b) Arunachal Pradesh DDA 23.04.2018 Shift-I
(c) Assam (d) Andhra Pradesh P or 5mm
SSC JE 2019 (Evening) Ans. (d) : CBR% = 2.5 × 100
Pstd 2.5 or 5 mm
Ans. (c) : Paving bitumen from Assam Petroleum
denoted as A-type and designated as grade A30, A35 load carried by specimen
CBR% = ×100
and A90, etc. Where A stands for Assam. load carried by standard specimen
Paving bitumen from other sources denoted as S-type 0.125 12.5
and designated as grades S35, S90 etc. Where S stands = ×100 = = 0.1
for strength run. 125 125
1184. Which one of the following test is/are used to 1188. The test carried out to know the resistance to
arbitrarily determine the adhesion of flow, of a given bituminous material is :
bituminous binder to an aggregate in presence (a) Softening point (b) Penetration
of water? (c) Viscosity (d) Ductility
(a) Static immersion test Assam Power Distribution 2017
(b) Dynamic & chemical immersion test Ans. (c) : The resistance to flow of the liquid is called
(c) Immersion mechanical test as viscosity. The bitumen resistance to flow is
(d) All of the above measured by standard tar viscometer.
MH WCD 2019 • Furol viscosity is standardized test.
Ans. (d) : Test are conducted to arbitrarily determine • The viscosity of liquid bitumen is measured by efflux
the adhesion of bituminous binder to an aggregate in viscometers.
the presence of water. 1189. The aggregate impact value should NOT
Test bitumen adhesion test is specified by IRC and exceed ___ for water bound macadam base
is quite simple. course.
Dynamic & Chemical immersion test (a) 27% (b) 30%
Immersion mechanical test. (c) 40% (d) 35%
1185. Generally a cement concrete road is disliked ESIC 2019
because : Ans. (c) : Specifications of materials for WBM
(a) Its initial cost is high pavement
(b) It requires long time for curing Property Requirements for pavement
(c) It causes glare due to reflected sunlight (max. value, %) layer
(d) It becomes noisy under iron wheeled traffic Sub base Base Surface
MH Nanded Zila Parishad 2014 course course
Ans. (a) : Disadvantage (disliked) of concrete road– 1. Los Angeles 60 50 40
(i) The initial cast of concrete road is high. abrasion value
(ii) They are liable to crake and warp due to 2. Aggregate 50 40 30
temperature variation.
impact value
(iii) Less resilient than bituminous or WBM road.
(iv) Required long time curing and thus can not be 3. Flakiness index 15 15
opened to traffic earlier.............. etc. 1190. The following is not true for bitumen :
(a) It is an excellent binding material
1186. Which test is performed for quick
(b) It gives an impermeable surface
determination of the quality of sub-grade soil?
(a) C.B.R. (b) Stripping (c) It softens when heated
(c) Thread (d) None of these (d) It decreases the strength of pavement
MH Nanded Zila Parishad 2014 MGVCL JE 2017
Ans. (a) : CBR Test– CBR Test measure the strength Ans. (d) : Bitumen–
of the material (subgrade). It is preformed for quick (1) It is excellent binding material
determination of the quality of subgrade soil. (2) It gives an impermeable surface
Pressure for 5mm penetration is also recorded and (3) It softens when needed.
CBR. 1191. The compressive strength of stone is found out
Corresponding to 2.5mm penetration is computed. by :
Penetration Std. load Standard stress (a) Attrition test (b) Crushing test
2.5mm 1370 kg 70 kg/cm2 (c) Hardness test (d) Impact test
5.0 mm 2055 kg 105 kg/cm2 RRB JE Allahabad : 04.01. 2015
Highway Engineering 646 YCT
Ans. (b) : Compressive strength of stone Exam Point
• Compressive strength of stone is determined by doing The percentage content of asphalt in the cut-back
its crushing test. asphalt– 85%
• The aggregate crushing value provides a relative The penetration value of residue from distillation
measure of resistance to crushing under gradually upto 360oC of rapid curing cutback bitumen is-
applied crushing load. 80 to 120
• The crushing value for surface course should be less In Highway Construction engineering, the
than 30% and should not exceeds 45% for base course. equipment HMA means–
Hot Mix Asphalt Plant
1192. The standard penetration of VG 40 as
The desirable thickness of the bituminous mix
stipulated by the Indian standard is a specimen to be subjected to Marshall Stability
minimum of: Testing is– 63.5 mm
(a) 60.00 (b) 80.00 The minimum desired Marshall Stability value
(c) 45.00 (d) 35.00 for a dense bituminous mix to be used in
DDA JE 23.04.2018 Shift-II bituminous concrete surface course is– 900 kg
Ans. (d) : The standard penetration of VG 40 as In A–30 grade bitumen, A stands for– Assam
stipulated by the Indian standard is not less than 40mm The minimum ductility range prescribed for
so answer will be 35 mm accordingly given answer. bitumen to be used in pavement construction is–
1193. The binder of water-bound macadam is 50 - 75 cm
(a) cement mortar 1196. The maximum limiting Los Angels abrasion
(b) lime mortar value for cement concrete pavement slab as per
(c) stone dust in presence of moisture IRC is :
(d) none of the above (a) 25 percent (b) 5 percent
(c) 15 percent (d) 35 percent
ASSAM PSC JE 27.12.2020
DSSSB JE 20.11.2019, Shift II
Ans. (c) : The term Macadam in the present time
Ans. (d) :
means the road surface and base constructed of
S.N Type of pavement Max
crushed or broken aggregates cemented together the
permissible
water by rolling action. The binding action of water abrasion
bound macadam is achieved by stone dust (screening) value in%
used as filler in the presence of water. 1. Bituminous bound macadam 50
1194. For California Bearing Ratio test, the soil 2. WBM surfacing course 40
should be soaked for how many days? 3. Bituminous penetration 40
(a) 2 (b) 2.5 macadam
(c) 4.5 (d) 4 4. Bituminous surface dressing, 35
JKSSB JE 2013 cement concrete surface course
Ans. (d) : The specimen in the mould is soaked in 5. Bituminous concrete surface 30
water for four days. The swelling and water absorption course
value are noted. 6. Water bound macadam sub base 60
• Load is applied on the sample by standard plunger course
with the dia of 50 mm at the rate of 1.25 mm/min. 1197. Find the CBR value at 2.5 mm penetration.
• The load value an standard crushed stones are 1370 The load sustained by the specimen at 2.5
2 2 penetration is 64.6 kg and the load sustained by
kg (70 kg/cm ) and 2055 kg (105 kg/cm ) at 2.5 mm
standard aggregates at 2.5 mm penetration
and 5 mm penetrations respectively.
level is 1370 kg.
Note– In new construction the CBR test may be (a) 4.7 percent (b) 10.3 percent
soaked in water for four days period before testing. (c) 8.4 percent (d) 2.1 percent
1195. The weight of crushed aggregate sample is 20 DSSSB JE 20.11.2019, Shift II
gm and the weight of test sample is 200 gm. Ans. (a) : • Specimen at 2.5 penetration is 64.6 kg.
Find out the aggregate crushing value. • Load sustained by standard aggregates at 2.5 mm
(a) 10 percent (b) 20 percent penetration level is 1370 kg then CBR value of
(c) 70 percent (d) 50 percent Load of specimen
DSSSB JE 20.11.2019, Shift II specimen = ×100
Load at standard specimen
Ans. (a) :
W 64.6
Aggregate crushing value = 2 × 100 = × 100 = 4.7%
W1 1370
1198. Elongated aggregates are those whose length is
20
⇒ ×100 = 10 percent (a) Equal to its mean dimension
200 (b) 0.6 times its mean dimension
Highway Engineering 647 YCT
 (c) 1.8 times its mean dimension Ans. (b) : Based on the strength property, the coarse
(d) 1.2 times its mean dimension aggregates may be divided as hard aggregates and soft
DSSSB JE 23.10.2019, Shift-II aggregates. Generally for the bearing course of
Ans. (c) Elongated aggregate are those, greater size of superior pavement types. hard aggregates are preferred
which is greater than 1.8 times of its mean size. to resist the abrading and crushing effects of heavy
• Flaky particles are those least lateral dimension of traffic loads and to resist adverse weather condition. In
which is smaller then 0.6 of its mean dimension. the case of low-cost road construction for use in lower
1199. Bituminous binder applied in fluid state to layers of pavement structures, soft aggregates can also
partially compacted aggregate layer, the be used. The soft aggregate include moorum, kankar,
method is known as: laterite, brick aggregated and slag. A different set of
(a) Surface dressing (b) Primming test specifications are adopted for soft aggregates.
(c) Premising (d) Grouting
1204. A good road aggregate should offer maximum
WBPSC SAE 2000
possible resistance to the hammering effects of
Ans. (d) : Grouted or penetration macadam wheel loads and this property is known as:
A. Semi grouted macadam– A bituminous binder (a) toughness (b) hardness
applied in fluid state to partially compacted aggregate
(c) durability (d) strength
layer and penetrates to only half of depth.
B. Fully grouted macadam–If bituminous binder WBPSC SAE 2001
penetrates to full depth of aggregate layer, adopted in Ans. (a) : The hammering effect of wheel load an road
region of very high rainfall. is known as impact load.
1200. Size of aggregates for road construction is • The resistance to impact load of the wheel that comes
determined by: over aggregate is known as the toughness of aggregate.
(a) Shape of the aggregate 1205. The quality of sub-grade is termed as excellent
(b) Weight of the aggregate if is maximum dry density varies between/is:
(c) Density of the aggregate (a) 1.2 to 1.4 gm/cc (b) 1.3 to 1.5 gm/cc
(d) Sieve analysis of aggregate (c) 1.7 to 1.8 gm/cc (d) above 2 gm/cc
WBPSC SAE 2000 WBPSC SAE 2002
Ans. (d) : • Size of aggregates for road construction is Ans. (c) : Density required for embankment and
determined by sieve analysis of aggregate. subgrade
• It should be well prepared, sized and graded S.N Type of work Maximum
aggregates must be especially emphesized. laboratory
1201. The weight of hammer in impact testing dry unit wt.
machine is: 1. Embankment up to 3 metre Not less than
(a) 12 kg to 13 kg (b) 13.5 kg to 14 kg height, not subjected to 15.2 kN/cum
(c) 1.5 kg to 17.5 kg (d) Less than 12 kg
extensive flooding
WBPSC SAE 2003
2. Embankment exceeding 3 Not less than
Ans. (b) : The weight of hammer in impact testing
meters height or 16.0 kN/m3
machine is 13.5 to 14 kg is arranged to drop with free
embankments of any height
fall of 38.0 cm by vertical guides and test specimen is
subjected to 15 number of blows. subjected to long period of
inundation
1202. Bitumen is being tested by:
(a) specific gravity test 3. Sub-grade and earthen Not less than
(b) liquidity test shoulder/verges/backfill 17.5 kN/cum
(c) static immersion test Note– kN/Cum unit can be changed in gm/cc then it
(d) chemical immersion test will be 1.75 gm/cc.
WBPSC SAE 2001 1206. The most important tests for determining
Ans. (a) : There are various type of test are performed consistency of bituminous materials are:
on bitumen (a) Volatisation tests
(i) Specific gravity (b) Float tests
(ii) Viscosity test (c) Ductility test
(iii) Penetration test (d) Penetration test and viscosity test
(iv) Flash and fire test WBPSC SAE 2002
(v) Ductility test Ans. (b) : The most important test to know the
(iv) Float test consistency of bitumen is known as the float test.
(vii) Loss on heating test
(viii) Water content test • And it can be best as per the recommendation for
testing of gradation of bitumen
1203. Example of soft aggregate used for road
construction is: • Penetration test is also based on the consistency test
(a) stone chips (b) moorum and mostly used for grade test of bitumen
(c) gypsum (d) cement • Penetration limits enables bitumen to be classified on
WBPSC SAE 2001 the basis of consistency.
Highway Engineering 648 YCT
 Exam Point 1210. Flash point test on bitumen is performed to
determine the :
The aggregate impact value should NOT exceed (a) lowest temperature at which the materials get
___ for water bound macadam base course–40% ignited and burns.
The minimum ductility value generally specified (b) lowest temperature at which the vapour of a
in pavement construction is– 50-75 substance takes fire in the form of a flash
Test is not required in tar– Penetration point (c) maximum temperature at which the vapour of
The equipments is most suitable for mixing wet
a substance takes fire in the form of a flash
mix macadam– Twin–shaft mixer
The considered to be the highest quality (d) maximum temperature at which the materials
construction in the group of black top pavements get ignited and burns.
is– Bituminous concrete GAIL 2018
The penetration test on bitumen is used for Ans. (b) : The flash point is the lowest temperature in
determining its– Grade degree Cº at which the application of a test Flame
In the premix method of Bitumen road causes. The vapour from bitumen to catch fire
construction aggregate is also heated– momentarily in the form of a flash.
To get a homogeneous mix • The fire point is the temperature in degree C at
The resistance of a material to Penetration is– which the application of the test flame causes the
Hardness bitumen to ignite and burn for at least 5 second under
As per I.R.C. the difference in temperature in specified condition test.
between aggregate and binder should not be– 1211. As recommended by Indian Road Congress,
More than 14 °C for heavy duty roads, the percentage wear of
1207. Bitumen is soluble in : road stones should not exceed:
(a) Diesel (b) Water (a) 6 (b) 10
(c) Petrol (d) Carbon disulphide (c) 11 (d) 12
NBCC JE 2017 WBPSC SAE 2002
Ans. (d) : Solubility–
Ans. (b) : • As recommended by Indian road congress,
• The solubility of bitumen is triclorethylene is a
for heavy duty roads, the percentage wear of road
measure of its purity.
stones should not exceed more than 10% for
• A minimum value of 99% is generally desired.
exceptionally strong aggregates
• It is also soluble in carbon disulfide, chloroform, ether
and acetone, partially soluble aromatic organic solvents • While above 35 would be regard as weak aggregate.
and insoluble in water at 20ºC. • Crushing value for surface course should be less than
1208. In CBR test, If the CBR value at 5mm is 30% and should be not more than 45% for base course.
greater than that at 2.5 mm: 1212. The stone pieces used as road stones should be:
(a) The higher value should be chosen (a) Flaky in shape
(b) The test should be repeated (b) Cubical in shape with sharp well defined
(c) Average value of the two should be used edges
(d) None of these (c) Spike like shapes
NBCC JE 2017 (d) Round in shape
Ans. (b) : • Two value of CBR is obtained if the value WBPSC SAE 2002
of 2.5 mm is greater than that of 5.0 mm penetration, Ans. (a) : The stone pieces used as road stones should
the former is adopted. be flaky in shape.
• If the CBR value obtained from test at 5.0 mm 1213. The maximum water content in bitumen
penetration is higher than that at 2.5 mm, then the test is should not exceed _______ by weight.
to be repeated for checking. (a) 0.5% (b) 0.4%
• If the check test again gives similar results, then (c) 1 (d) 0.2%
higher value obtained at 5.0 mm penetration is reported GAIL 2018
as the CBR value.
Ans. (d) : • The maximum water content in bitumen
1209. The minimum ductility value generally
should not exceed 0.2 percent by weight.
specified in pavement construction is:
(a) 75-100 (b) 40-50 • It is desirable that the bitumen contains minimum
(c) 50-75 (d) 25-75 water content to prevent foaming of the bitumen when
ESIC 2019 it is heated above the boiling point of water.
Ans. (c) • Ductility value varies from 5 to 100 1214. Bitumen is the binding material which is
• A minimum value of 50 cm is commonly specified. present in :
• For waxy bitumen, the value may be as low as 15 (a) asphlat (b) petrol
• ISI has recommended a minimum ductility value of (c) carbon (d) crude oil
75 cm for grades of 45 and above. GAIL 2018
Highway Engineering 649 YCT
 Ans. (d) : Bitumen is widely used in road construction Ans. (d) : • There are various test performed over the
and maintenance. bitumen
• Bitumen may be further divided as petroleum asphalt • Viscosity test
and native asphalt. • Ductility test
• The most common source of bitumen is comes • Penetration test
through petroleum crude. It is also found as rock • float test
asphalt in some part of Europe and as lake asphalt in • Flash and fire point test
(trinided). • Solubility test
• India gets its entire bitumen through imported crude. • Water content test
1215. Paving Bitumen from Assam petroleum is • Specific gravity test
denoted as : • Loss of heating
(a) A - Type (b) As - Type 1219. For bituminous materials, vacuum capillary
(c) Assam - Type (d) AS - Type viscometers are used for the determination of :
GAIL 2018 (a) Absolute viscosity (b) Industrial viscosity
Ans. (a) : • A-Type paving bitumen is called- Assam (c) Both the above (d) None of the above
type paving bitumen SSC JE 2005
1216. Bitumen is used for : Ans. : (a) For bituminous materials, a vacuum
(a) manufacturing roofing and damp proofing capillary viscometer is used to measure ultimate
felts viscosity. In this test, the bitumen material is filled in a
(b) sealing accumulators and batteries vessel with a hole in the bottom and placed on the
(c) all of the given options reservoir at a temperature of 15.50C. The more time it
(d) heating insulation materials for buildings takes for the bitumen to drip from the hole, the greater
GAIL 2018 its viscosity.
Ans. (c) : Bitumen is used for– 1220. Aggregate crushing value of road aggregate for
• Attainment of desired stability of the mix. use in base course should not exceed
(a) 45% (b) 30%
• To maintain the stability under adverse weather
(c) 15% (d) 10%
conditions.
WBPSC SAE 2000
• To maintain sufficient flexibility and thus avoid
Ans. (a) : The aggregates used in roads and Pavement
cracking of bituminous surface.
construction must be strong enough to withstand
• To have sufficient adhesion with the aggregate.
crushing under roller and traffic.
• Used for heat insulation in building
w
• Manufacturing of roofing damp proofing felts. Aggregate crushing value = 2 ×100
1217. When the bitumen is being distilled to a w1
definite viscosity or penetration without where, Each layer tempered 25 times and weighted w1.
further treatment, it is known as the • Crushed aggregate passed through 2.36 mm sieve
(a) Plastic Bitumen and Passing material weight w2.
(b) Cut-block bitumen • Crushing value for surface course should be less than
(c) Straight run bitumen 30% and should not exceed 45% for base course.
(d) Blown bitumen
GSSSB Municipal Engineer 8.10.2017 Exam Point
Ans. (c) : A straight run bitumen is a petroleum A solution of bitumen in a volatile or partly
bitumen of which the viscosity composition has not volatile solvent such as kerosene or creosote is
been adjusted by blending or by softening with fluxing known as– Cut-back
or cutting-back oil or by any other treatment. For rapid curing cutbacks, the oil used is–
Gasoline
• A blown bitumen is a bitumen obtained by further The purpose of conducting marshall stability
treatment of straight run bitumen by running it, while test– For Bituminous mix Design
not, into a vertical column and blowing air through it. As per I.R.C. specification, in the construction of
In this process, bitumen undergoes a chemical change premix carpet, the grade of bitumen to be used
as a result of which it attains a rubbery consistency, should be of penetration– 80/100
has higher softening point than a straight run bitumen Which is represents hardest grade of bitumen–
of the same hardness and a greater resistance to flow- 30/40
1218. Which of the following test(s) does not pertain Cut-Back have– 80% Bitumen, 20% Solvent
to bitumen testing ? Specific density of pure Bitumen is– 0.97 to 1.02
(a) Flash and fire point test Specific density of Tar is– 1.10 to 1.25
(b) Viscosity test The ductility value of bitumen is–
(c) Penetration test Less than that of tar
(d) None of these The binders is recommended for a wet and cold
HPSSC JE 396/2018 climate– Emulsion

Highway Engineering 650 YCT

1221. Which of the following test measures the 1226. The flash point temperature (degree C) of
hardness of road aggregates? paving grades of bitumen as per the Indian
(a) crushing test (b) abrasion test standard is:
(c) impact test (d) soundness test (a) 200 (b) 220
Kerala PSC Poly. Lect 2016 (c) 180 (d) 160
Ans. (b) : Abrasion test – Gives hardness of aggregate DDA 23.04.2018 Shift-I
crushing test – Gives crushing, strength of Agg. Ans. (b) : The flash point temperature (degree C) of
Impact test – Gives toughness of aggregate paving grades of bitumen as per the Indian standard is
Soundness test– Gives resistance of Aggregate to 220.
weathering action (Durability) Flash point–The lowest temperature at which the
1222. The impact value for the aggregates used in vapour of a substance momentarily takes fire in the
concrete for the construction of wearing form of flash.
surfaces such as pavements, roads & runway Characteristics VG10 Test method
etc. shall not exceed
Flash point (ºC) 220oC min IS 1448
(a) 60% (b) 50% (c) 40% (d) 30%
Karnataka PSC JE Code 126/2018 1227. Bitumen is graded by viscosity at T°C, where T
Ans. (d) : is:
Aggregate (a) 70 (b) 60
S. (c) 50 (d) 40
Type of pavement impact value not
N. DDA JE 24.04.2018 Shift-II
more than
1. Wearing course Ans. (b) : Bitumen is graded by viscosity at 60ºC.
(a) Bituminous surface dressing Viscosity grade bitumen–
(b) Penetration macadam 30 • Viscosity grade bitumen (Asphalt) is a bitumen
(c) Bituminous carpet concrete grade mostly used as a paving grade and it's suitable
(d) Cement concrete for road construction and for the asphalt pavements
2. Bitumen bound macadam base 35 producing with premier attributes.
course • VG bitumen is usually used in the production of hot
3. WBM base course with 40 mix asphalt.
bitumen surfacing We have two methods of grading–
4. Cement concrete base course 45 • Standard viscosity grade bitumen (AC-Grades), in
1223. The penetration test of bitumen is done under a which the viscosity of the standard bitumen
load of 100 gm at 250C for (Asphalt) is measured at 60ºC
(a) 15 second (b) 10 second
• RTFOT viscosity grade bitumen (AR-Grades), in
(c) 5 second (d) 3 second
which the viscosity of bitumen (asphalt) is measured
KMC 2009
at 60ºC (140ºF) after the roll on thin film oven test.
Ans. (c) : The penetration test of bitumen is done
under a load of 100 gm at 25°C for 5 seconds. 1228. Which of the following bituminous material
has low carbon content?
1224. In laboratory CBR is usually selected at
(a) 2.0 mm penetration (b) 2.5 mm penetration (a) Asphalt (b) Coal tar
(c) 3.0 mm penetration (d) 3.5 mm penetration (c) Plastic bitumen (d) Bitumen
KMC 2009 PGCIL DET 17.11.2018 Shift - II
Ans. (b) : CBR = Maxm selected for the 2.5 mm Ans. (a) : Asphalt–If the bitumen contains some inert
penetration value. material of minerals, it is called 'Asphalt'.
P • Asphalt is found as deposits in the form of natural
CBR2.5 = 2.5 ×100 asphalt or rock asphalt.
1370
• At temperature between 50-100ºC, it is in liquid
P
CBR5 = 5.0 ×100 state but at temperature less than this, it remain in
2055 solid state.
1225. VG 30 grade of paving bitumen is suitable for 7 • Asphalt has low carbon content.
day Average Maximum Air Temperature (0oC)
ranging between: 1229. Loss angles abrasion value of good quality
(a) 30–38 (b) 0–30 pavement material should not be less than
(c) 38–45 (d) 45–60 (a) 10% (b) 20%
DDA 24.04.2018 Shift-I (c) 30% (d) 40%
NPCC 2017 Nagaland PSC CTSE 2017 Paper-I
Ans. (c) : Grade Suitable for 7 day average Ans. (c) : Loss angles abrasion test is based on the
maximum air temperature oC rubbing action between the aggregates and steel balls.
VG10 < 30 The machine is rated at 30-33 rpm for 500 to 1000
VG20 30–38 revolution. The abrasion value of good aggregates for
VG30 38–45 high quality pavement material should be less than
VG40 >45 30%.
Highway Engineering 651 YCT
1230. What are the maximum value of group index of Ans. (a) : Bitumen–Bitumen is a petroleum product
any material respectively? obtained by the distillation of petroleum crude, where-
(a) 20, 0 (b) 100, 0 as road tar is obtained by the destructive distillation of
(c) 100, 20 (d) 10, 0 coal or wood.
Nagaland PSC CTSE 2017 Paper-I • Bitumen is a complex organic material and occurs
Ans. (a) : Group index is a number assigned to the soil either naturally, or may be obtained artificially during
based on its physical properties like particle size, the distillation of petroleum.
liquid limit and plastic limit. It varies from a value of 1234. The specific gravity of bitumen
0 to 20 lower the value higher is the quality of the sub- (a) 0.8 (b) 0.9
grade and greater the value, poor in the sub grade. (c) 2.09 (d) 1.09
1231. Aggregate crushing value indicates which one Bihar WRD JE 2016
of the following crushing value
Ans. (b) : • Generally the specific gravity of pure
(a) Durability (b) toughness
(c) hardness (d) strength bitumen is in the range of 0.97 to 1.02.
Nagaland PSC CTSE 2017 Paper-I • The specific gravity of cutback bitumen may be
Ans. (d) : Aggregate crushing value indicates strength lower depending on the type and proportion of diluents
of sample. used.
Soundness test Durability • Tar have specific gravity ranging from 1.10 to 1.25.
Aggregate impact value Toughness 1235. The name of the test associated with road
Abrasion value Hardness aggregates for determining hardness property
Aggregate crushing value Strength is known as
(a) Los Angele's abrasion test
Exam Point (b) Soundness test
In highway pavements emulsions are mainly (c) Toughness test
used in– Asphaltic concrete (d) Crushing test
For carrying out bituminous patch work during WBPSC JE 2016
the rainy season, the most suitable binder is–
Ans. (a) : The name of the test associated with road
Bituminous emulsion
Percentage of free carbon in bitumen is– aggregates for determining hardness property is known
Less than that in tar as Los Angels abrasion test.
Bitumen grade 80/100 indicates that under the 1236. Road tar RT-4 is recommended for
standard test conditions, penetration value of (a) surface painting
bitumen would vary from– 8 mm to 10 mm (b) renewal of coats
According to Indian road congress which type of (c) premixing tar macadam in base course
Bitumen used for Grouted macedam in cold (d) All of the above
area– 175/225 WBPSC JE 2018
The by-product of distillation or evaporation of Ans. (c) : List of uses of different grade road tar–
crude petroleum either by natural processes or in Grade Uses
a refinery and is the basic constituent of asphalt, (1) RT-1 For surface painting under exceptionally
is known as– Bitumen cold weather conditions and on hill roads.
The represents a carpet of sand-bitumen mix (2) RT-2 Standard surface painting under normal
without coarse aggregates– Sheet asphalt Indian climatic condition.
1232. The solution of bitumen, asphalt or coal tar in (3) RT-3 Surface paintings, renewal coats,
solvents is premixing chips for top course
(a) Emulsion (b) Cut backs (4) RT-4 Premixing tar macadam in base course
(c) Bitumen macadam (d) Sheet asphalt (5) RT-5 For grouting
KPSC Overseer/Draftsman 2020 1237. Which one of the following binders is
Ans. (b) : Cut-Back Bitumen–Cut-back bitumen is recommended for a wet and cold climate?
obtained by blending bitumen binder with suitable (a) 80/100 penetration asphalt (b) Tar
volatile or solvents in required proportion to reduce its (c) Cutback (d) Emulsion
viscosity to the desired range. WBPSC JE 2018
Use– Ans. (d) : Bitumen emulsion–
• For colder region • Emulsion in the two phase system consisting of two
• Tack coating without heat immiscible liquid.
• Bituminous mixer • The bitumen content in emulsion range from 40–
• Soil-Bitumen stabilization 60% and remaining portion of water.
1233. Bitumen is generally obtained from • The average size of bitumen particle in this
(a) Petroleum product (b) Organic material emulsion is about 2 mm.
(c) Coal (d) Synthetic material • These are generally used in maintenance, patch
Bihar WRD JE 2016 repair work and even in wet weather condition.
Highway Engineering 652 YCT
1238. In water bound macadam roads binding Exam Point
materials used is: The binders is recommended for a wet and cold
(a) Stand (b) Clay
climate– Emulsion
(c) Brick dust (d) Stone dust
WBPSC SAE 2004 The suitable surfacing material for a bridge deck
Ans. (d) : Water Bound Macadam Roads– Water slab is– Mastic asphalt
bound macadam road is a road in which the wearing The cutback bitumens with a high percentage of
course of clean crushed aggregates. Which are diesel or heavy type oil, used for water proofing
mechanically inter locked by rolling. earth roads, and for dust control, is known as–
In construction of Water Bound Macadam (WBM)
Road oils
road there are mainly 3 types of materials. Which are
used such as: The Bitumen used in surface dressing for
• Coarse aggregate consist of a mixture of hard and spraying purpose is generally heated to an
durable crushed aggregates and broken stones and approximate temperature of– 180° C
aggregates should be properly graded for each layer Which types of bituminous constructions is
of the WBM road construction. proportioning of materials determined from
• Binding approved by engineer and it should have a laboratory tests–Bituminous or asphalt concrete
plasticity index value less than 6 for the
construction of water bound macadam road. Which type of softening point Bitumen is
1239. Requirement of road aggregates in the Permissible for pavement– 35 to 70
bituminous road is: 1242. What is Bitumen in solid state called?
(a) hardness (a) Petroleum concentrate
(b) toughness
(b) Molten tar
(c) cementation and adhesiveness
(d) all of the above (c) Asphalt
WBPSC SAE 2004 (d) None of the above
Ans. (d) : Desirable properties of road aggregate KPCL JE 2012
• Strength Ans. (c) : Bitumen is an oil based substance. It is a
• Hardness semi-solid hydrocarbon product produced by removing
• Toughness
the lighter fraction (such a liquid petroleum gas, petrol,
• Durability
diesel) from heavy crude oil during the refining
• Shape of aggregates
process. Bitumen in solid state called Asphalt.
• Cementations and adhesiveness
1240. The most suitable road material out of the 1243. Which test is performed in laboratory for
following would be : determination of quality of subgrade soil used
(a) coarse-grained igneous rocks for design of flexible pavement?
(b) volcanic rocks (a) CBR
(c) plutonic rocks (b) Plate load test
(d) hypabyssal rocks
MGVCL JE 2017 (c) Atterberg limits
Ans. (a) : The most suitable road material out of the (d) Shear strength tests
following would be coarse-grained igneous rocks. PSSSB JE 22.11.2015
1241. Which of the following represents hardest Ans. (a) : CBR test–The CBR test is penetration test
grade of bitumen for evaluation of the mechanical strength of road
30 60 subgrades and base coarse.
(a) (b)
40 70 Load sustained the specimen
80 100
(c) (d) at 2.5or 5.0 mm penetration
100 120 CBR% = ×100%
Load sustained bystandard
HSSC JE (CAT-13) 2015
Ans. (a) : aggregateat thecorresponding
• The hardest grade of bitumen is 30/40 penetration level
• The unit of penetration is 1/10 mm. or
• Thus 80/100 grade bitumen means a penetration of
Test load
8-10 mm. CBR% = ×100%
• Common grades are 30/40, 60/70 and 80/100. Penetration load (standard material)

Highway Engineering 653 YCT

1244. The maximum allowable Los Angels abrasion
value for high quality surface courses is
6.
Pavement Design
(Flexible & Rigid)
(a) 10% (b) 20%
(c) 30% (d) 45% 1247. Bottom most layer of pavement is known as
(a) Wearing course (b) Base course
WBPSC JE 2007 (c) Sub-base course (d) Sub grade
Ans. (c) : The maximum allowable Los Angels Panjab PSC SDO 14.06.2021
abrasion value for high quality surface courses is 30%. Tamil Nadu PSC 2019
M.P. VYAPAM Draftsman 1.9.2018 9.00 am
Los Angels abrasion test–This test helps to determine Nagaland PSC 2016 Paper-I
the abrasion value of coarse aggregates as per IS : Kerala PSC Poly. Lect 2016
2386 (Part IV) - 1963. The apparatus used in this test MH PWD 2016
UPSSSC JE 2015 Paper-I
are Los Angels abrasion testing machine, IS sieve of Odisha JE (Mains) 02.08.2015
size - 1.7 mm, abrasive charge - 12 nos. Odisha JE (Main) 2014
SSC JE 2012
1245. In tack coat, bitumen is used at the rate of WBPSC JE 2009
(a) 0.5 kg/m2 (b) 1.5 kg/m2 WBPSC SAE 2004
(c) 2.0 kg/m 2
(d) 5.0 kg/m2 Ans. (d) : Bottom most layer of pavement is known as
sub-grade.
Nagaland PSC 2015 Paper-I
• Pavements are generally classified into two
HPSSC JE CODE 502/2018 categories on the basis of structural behavior.
WBPSC JE 2007 (1) Flexible pavement
Ans. (a) : In tack coat, bitumen is used at the rate of 0.5 • Flexible pavement is described in IRC : 37 – 2012
kg/m2. In the application of bituminous material over an
existing pavement surface which is relatively
impervious like an existing bituminous surface or a
cement concrete pavement.
Quantity of liquid
Type of surface bituminous binder
in kg/m2 (2) Rigid pavement
Normal bituminous surface 0.2–0.25
Dry and hungry bituminous 0.25– 0.30
surface
Granular surface treated with 0.28–0.30
primer 1248. Tie bars in cement concrete pavements are at:
(a) expansion joints (b) contraction joints
Non-bituminous surface (c) warping joints (d) longitudinal joints
• Granular base 0.35–0.40 Punjab PSC SDE 15.06.2021
• Cement concrete pavement 0.30–0.45 MH PWD 2019
Nagaland PSC 2017 Paper-I
1246. Bituminous materials are commonly use in Kerala PSC Poly. Lect 2016
highway construction because of their good Nagaland PSC 2016 Paper-I
(a) tensile and compression properties. DMRC JE 2014 PAPER-I
(b) binding and water proofing properties. [ESE-1999]
Ans. (d) : Longitudinal joint– Longitudinal joint are
(c) shear strength and tensile properties. provided in longitudinal direction to allow the
(d) bond and tensile properties. expansion and contraction in transverse directions to
MH PWD 2016 holds the slabs in position, tie bars are provided in
longitudinal joint.
Ans. (b) : Bituminous material– The term bitumen is
applied to various mixtures of hydrocarbon. The most
common materials of bitumen's are tar, asphalts,
cutback bitumen. Bitumen emulsion. Generally
bituminous material used in highway construction
because of their good binding and water proofing
properties. Butt type longitudinal joint with tie bar
Highway Engineering 654 YCT
 • Tie bars are not designed as load transfer device but Ans. (b) : • Weight of the vehicle affects the design of
ensures, that two slabs remains firm together. pavement thickness and gradient of the road.
length of tie bar = 2 × development length • The height of vehicles affects the clearance to be
Expansion joint– Provided to prevent expansion due provided in designing road under bridges, electric
to rise in temperature with respect to construction service lines, and other overhead structures.
temperature. 1252. The maximum legal axle load for highways
As per IRC, max spacing between expansion joints is as specified by IRC is
140 m and thickness is 2.5 cm. (a) 1990 kg (b) 7200 kg
Contraction joint– To provided control due to (c) 8170 kg (d) 2340 kg
shrinkage and moisture variation max, spacing of DSSSB JE (Mains) 20.03.2021 (Evening)
contraction joint without reinforcement is 4.5m
Ans. (c) : • The maximum legal axle load for highways
Warping joint– These are called as hinged joints.
These are provided along longitudinal direction to as per IRC is 8170 kg.
relieve stresses due to warping. • Maximum equivalent single wheel load for highways
as per IRC is 4100 kg.
1249. The expansion joints in rigid pavement
(concrete roads) are filled with : 1253. Consider the following statements :
(a) cork bound with bitumen (A) Coefficient of friction between tyre and
(b) impregnated fiber boards pavement increases with load and
(c) imperious elastic materials temperature.
(d) All of the above (B) Coefficient of friction increases with speed
Punjab PSC SDE 15.06.2021 of the vehicle.
Which of the following option is correct :
Ans. (d) : Following are one of the few type of
(a) Both A and B are true
expansion joints filler materials–
(b) Both A and B are false
(a) Soft wood
(c) A is correct but B is false
(b) Impregnated fiber board
(d) B is true but A is false
(c) Cork or cork bound with bitumen
Nagaland PSC 2015 Paper-I
Thus pre–formed fillers are made from fiber of soft
board, fiber board, cork. It is required that the pre Ans. (c) : Coefficient of friction between tyre and
formed strips of these materials are properly bounded pavement increases with load and temperature.
together with bitumen. • Coefficient of friction decreases with speed of the
• The bitumen content specified by IRC is 35% by vehicle.
weight. 1254. Minimum percentage of bitumen in cold mix
1250. For the construction of sub-base of the WBM bituminous material by total weight of mix
road, the size of the boulders, broken stones or should not be less than:
over-burnt bricks should be in the range of : (a) 3.5% (b) 2.5%
(a) 150 mm to 180 mm (b) 220 mm to 250 mm (c) 5.0% (d) 4.5%
(c) 100 mm to 200 mm (d) 90 mm to 100 mm HPSSC JE - 18.04.2021
Punjab PSC SDE 15.06.2021 Ans. (c) : • Minimum percentage of bitumen in cold
Ans. (c) : WBM road is the type of macadam road mix bituminous by total weight of mix should not be
whose wearing coarse is constructed with clean less than 5%.
crushed aggregates. Which are mechanically • Bituminous concrete is used for wearing course and
interlocked by rolling and bounded together with the profile corrective course. It is generally laid in single
mixture of the filler material (sand and clay) and water layer on a previously prepared bituminous bound
that is laid on a prepared base coarse. surface.
Construction of sub-base– 1255. Which one of the following causes reveling in
• On a prepared sub-grade, boulders, broken stones or bituminous pavement?
over burnt brick in layer of 15 cm thickness are spread. (a) low bitumen content
The size of these materials should range between 10 (b) use of soft bitumen
cm to 20 cm. (c) use of open-graded aggregates
• Total width of the sub-base should be 60 cm more (d) excessive bitumen content
than the width of the pavement (30 cm more on each JPSC AE Paper-II 10.04.2021
side) RPSC Lect. (Tech.Edu.) Paper-II 2021
• The compaction is done using the rollers of weight 6
to 10 tonnes. Ans. (d) : • Excessive bitumen content causes reveling
1251. Weight of the vehicle effects the design of in bituminous pavement.
(a) Cross drainage works • Loss of bond between aggregate particles and the
(b) Pavement thickness and gradient of the road binder results occurs reveling.
(c) Permissible speeds for vehicles • Reveling occurs commonly in high traffic areas due
(d) Curves in the road to wear and traffic, the chances of reveling are even
DSSSB JE (Mains) 19.03.2021 (Evening) high.
Highway Engineering 655 YCT
1256. The initial concavity in the load-penetration 1258. Find the CBR value at 2.5 mm penetration.
curve of a CBR test is due to : The load sustained by the specimen at 2.5 mm
(a) Improper compaction penetration is 64.6 kg and the load sustained by
(b) Soft top layer standard aggregates at 2.5 mm penetration
(c) Inclined plunger level is 1370 kg :
(d) All of these (a) 10.3% (b) 4.7% (c) 8.4% (d) 2.1%
HPPCL JE Civil 13.02.2021 JMRC JE 05.02.2021
Ans. (d) : • CBR method is an empirical method P 
based on arbitrary soil strength tests. Ans. (b) : CBR value =  T  × 100
• The initial concavity in the load-penetration curve of  PS 
64.6 × 9.8
a CBR test is due to– PT = ∵ ( area = πr 2 )
(i) Inclined plunger 1962.5
(ii) Soft top layer = 0.32 N/mm2
(iii) Improper compaction 1370 × 9.8
• CBR of a soil gives an idea about quality of the Ps = = 6.84 N/mm2
subgrade material compacted to that of an excellent 1962.5
base materials. 0.32
∴ CBR value = ×100 = 4.67 or = 4.7%
6.84
Exam Point 1259. If the modulus of sub-grade reaction of soil is
The thickness of bituminous carpet varies form– 20 kg/cm3 when tested with a 30 cm diameter
20 to 25 mm plate, then the corrected modulus of sub-grade
For all important Indian highways, flexible reaction for the standard diameter plate will be
pavements are designed for a design life of Y (kg/cm3) :
years, where Y is– 15 (a) 12 (b) 10
The Thickness of 'Domer' laid (Roads)– layer in (c) 8 (d) 16
JMRC JE 05.02.2021
'Bitumen' Roads is– 2 to 3 cm
The method of design of flexible pavement as Ans. (c) : d 1 = 30 cm, k2 = ?
k1 = 20 kg/cm3, d2 = 75 cm
recommended by IRC is– CBR method
k1d1 = k2d2
In flexible pavement analysis, it is assumed that
the load transferred through layers by– kd 30 × 20
k2 = 1 1 =
Grain to grain transfer through points of d 2 75
2
contact K2 = 8 kg/cm
The wearing course in the case of flexible 1260. Tar felts are made by impregnating :
pavements consist of– (a) vegetable or animal fibre mat with clay
A mixture of bituminous material and (b) glass fibre mat with bentonite
aggregate (c) steel fibre mat with bitumen
Benkelman beam deflection method is used for (d) vegetable or animal fibre mat with bitumen
design of– JMRC JE 05.02.2021
Flexible overlay on flexible pavement Ans. (d) : Tar felts are made by impregnating
1257. As per IRC : 37-2012, in order to control vegetable or animal fibre mat with bitumen. Tar felts is
subgrade rutting in flexible pavements, the a heavy-duty paper used in construction.
parameter to be considered is : 1261. Which one of the following sets of factors is
(a) vertical compressive strain on top of related to design of thickness of rigid pavement
subgrade. by Westergaard method?
(b) vertical compressive stress on top of granular (a) CBR value and stiffness index of soil
(b) Deflection factor and traffic index
layer. (c) Swelling index and bulk modulus
(c) vertical deflection at the surface of the (d) radius of relative stiffness and modulus of
pavement. subgrade reaction
(d) None of these JPSC AE Paper-II 10.04.2021
HPPCL JE Civil 13.02.2021 Ans. (d) : • Radius of relative stiffness and modulus of
Ans. (a) : • As per IRC : 37-2012, in order to control subgrade reaction is a sets of factors is related to
subgrade rutting in flexible pavements, the parameter design of thickness of rigid pavement by westerguard
to be considered is vertical compressive strain on top method.
of subgrade. • Equivalent radius of resisting section (b)
• It reflects deformations of subgrade and subsequent b = 1.6a 2 + h 2 − 0.675h
layers on the surface. A. a < 1.724 h, B. b = a when a > 1.724 h
• It functions by way of load distribution through the where, a = Radius of contact (c.m)
component layers. h = slab thickness (c.m)
Highway Engineering 656 YCT
1262. As per latest IRC guidelines for design of Exam Point
flexible pavement of CBR method, the load In case of water bound macadam roads with
parameter required is
traffic upto 1000 tonnes per day life may be
(a) number of commercial vehicles per day
(b) cumulative standard axles in Msa expected as– 1 – 2 years
(c) equivalent single axle load Weight of vehicle affects– Pavement thickness
(d) number of vehicles (all types) during design The surface layer of a road in which road metal
life has been consolidated with water and earthy
JPSC AE Paper-II 10.04.2021 material or rock particles is known as–
Ans. (b) : • As per latest IRC guidelines for design of Water-bound macadam
flexible pavement of CBR method, the load parameter Water bound macadam road is used as–
required is cumulative standard axle load. Village road
• According to IRC-37 Flexible pavement the A Bitumen Bound Macadam Pavement is best
guidelines were revised in 2001. suited where–
• Designed for traffic as high as 150 Msa. Ground water table is at shallow depths
• Based on semi-mechanistic approach. Base course of a WBM road consists of–
• Based on the results of the MORTH's research 120 to 180 mm stone placed on their ends
scheme.
upwards + 50 mm stone Macadam + Water
1263. Soil-cement is an example of which type of Thickness of pavement may be reduced
pavement?
(a) Semi-rigid pavement considerably by– Compaction of soil,
(b) Rigid pavement Stabilization of soil, Drainage of soil
(c) Bi-flexible pavement 1266. The recommended minimum thickness of
(d) Flexible pavement granular base course for traffic exceeding 2
DSSSB JE 20.03.2021 Morning msa is
Ans. (a) : • Soil-cement is an example of semi-rigid (a) 300 mm (b) 250 mm
pavement. (c) 225 mm (d) 200 mm
• Semi-rigid materials have low resistance to impact DSSSB JE (Mains) 19.03.2021 (Evening)
and abrasion and therefore are usually provided with
Ans. (b) • The recommended minimum thickness of
flexible pavement surface course.
• When intermediate class of material used in the base granular base course for traffic exceeding 2 msa is 250
or sub-base course layer of the pavement they are mm.
called semi-rigid pavement. • The recommended minimum thickness of granular
1264. In road oil lining, the road oil sprinkled on base is 225 mm.
subgrade in a thickness of about _______ is • Minimum thickness of the base of a flexible
sufficient enough to saturate subgrade to a pavement is 10 cm.
depth of _______. 1267. Pavements are classified as flexible and rigid,
(a) 4.0 mm and 6 cm (b) 2.5 mm and 6 cm
based on
(c) 1.5 mm and 8 cm (d) 3.5 mm and 8 cm
(a) Base (b) Wearing coarse
DSSSB JE (Mains) 19.03.2021 (Morning)
(c) Sub-base (d) Sub-grade
Ans. (c) : • In road oil lining the road oil sprinkled on
subgrade in a thickness of about 1.5 mm is sufficient DSSSB JE (Mains) 19.03.2021 (Evening)
enough to saturate subgrade to a depth of 8 cm. Ans. (b) : • Pavement are classified as flexible and
• Uniform thickness not exceeding 200 mm then the rigid on the basis of wearing coarse.
compaction is done by rolling with 8 to 10 tonnes Flexible pavement– In flexible pavement wearing
power road roller. course as binding surface of flexibility even in case of
1265. Tensile strength of geo synthetics for using in rigid pavement wearing course as slab which is
highway pavements shall not be less than considered as liquid plate very low flexibility, other
(a) 20.3 kgs (b) 36.3 kgs lower layers are foundation material.
(c) 16.3 kgs (d) 26.3 kgs On the other hand, rigid pavement and flexible
DSSSB JE (Mains) 19.03.2021 (Evening)
pavement are changeable only wearing course and
Ans. (b) : Tensile strength of geo synthetics for using
other formation course.
in highway pavements shall not be less than 36.3 kgs.
• Geosynthetics are an established family of 1268. In a road, the subgrade shall be consolidated
geomaterials used in a wide variety of civil and compacted each with a camber of
engineering applications. Many polymers like (a) 1 in 20 (b) 1 in 60
polyolefins and polyester common to everyday life are (c) 1 in 30 (d) 1 in 10
found in geosynthetics. DSSSB JE (Mains) 20.03.2021 (Evening)
Highway Engineering 657 YCT
 Ans. (b) : • In a road, the subgrade shall be Ans. (d) : • The thin layer of bitumen coating between
consolidated and compacted each with a camber of 1 an existing bituminous layer and a new bituminous
in 60. layer is tack coat.
1269. The standard axle load for the design of • Prime coat–The interface treatment provided to plug
flexible pavement overlay over existing flexible in the voids of porous surface and to bond loose
pavement in India using Benkelman beam particles in bituminous pavement is called prime coat.
rebound deflection method is taken as • Seal coat–Seal coating consists of application of
(a) 5.1 t (b) 10 t liquid asphalt material to the roadway followed
(c) 8.17 t (d) 12.6 t immediately by the application of the aggregate.
DGVCL 06.01.2021 (Morning) 1273. Flexible pavements are constructed using
Ans. (c) : • The standard axle for the design of ______.
flexible pavement overlay existing flexible pavement (a) Bituminous materials
in India using Benkelman beam rebound deflection (b) Chemical compounds
method it is taken as 8.17 t or 8170 kg. (c) Cementious materials
• Benkelman beam rebound deflection method is (d) Epoxy materials
quasi-static procedure. DGVCL 5.1.2021 Afternoon
• The vertical deflection is recorded by a special Ans. (a) : • Flexible pavements are constructed using
measuring beam which is mounted on a support frame bituminous materials.
that can be rotated at a ratio of 1 : 2. • Design of flexible pavements are as follows–
1270. Due to the ability of flexible pavement layers to
distribute the compressive stresses to a larger
area in the shape of a truncated cone, the
compressive stresses
(a) Get decreased at the lower layers
(b) Get increased abnormally
(c) Get equal stresses at the upper and lower
layers
(d) Get increased at the lower layers • Surface course is upper most layer which contain
DGVCL 06.01.2021 (Morning) bituminous materials.
Ans. (a) : • Due to the ability of flexible pavement 1274. The test commonly adopted to determine the
layers to distribute the compressive stress to a layer grade of bitumen in terms of its hardness is :
area in the shape of a truncated cone, the compressive (a) the penetration test
stresses get decreases at the lower layers. (b) the ductility test
• In the flexible pavement the vertical compressive (c) the softening point test
strain at the top of the subgrade layer is more. (d) the flash and fire point test
• A flexible pavement is modeled as an elastic SSC JE 23.03.2021 (Morning)
multilayer structure. Ans. (a) : • The penetration test commonly adopted to
1271. In the flexible pavements, fatigue cracking is determine the grade of bitumen in terms of its
caused due to _____. hardness.
(a) Poor workmanship • Penetration test is applied almost exclusively to
(b) Tensile strain bitumen.
(c) Vertical strain • Penetration test of bitumen determines the hardness
(d) Poor quality of aggregate or softness of bitumen by measuring the depth in
DGVCL 5.1.2021 Evening millimeter.
Ans. (b) : • In the flexible pavements, fatigue 1275. Identify the test to be conducted for the
cracking is caused due to tensile strain. determination of the modulus of subgrade
• Fatigue, cracking is an asphalt pavement distress reaction in pavement design.
most often instigated by failure of the surface due to (a) Plate bearing test (b) Triaxial test
traffic loading. (c) CBR test (d) Direct shear test
• Stripping or reveling is another possible cause of SSC JE 23.03.2021 (Morning)
fatigue cracking. Ans. (a) : • Plate bearing test to be conducted for the
1272. The thin layer of bitumen coating between an determination of the modulus of subgrade reaction in
existing bituminous layer and a new pavement design.
bituminous layer is _______. • In plate bearing test a compressive stress is applied to
(a) Seal coat (b) Prime coat the soil pavement layer through rigid plates of
(c) Binder coat (d) Tack coat relatively large size and the deflections are measured
DGVCL 5.1.2021 Afternoon for various stress values.
Highway Engineering 658 YCT
1276. Select the correct option with regard to the (i) Parabolic Camber:- The shape of parabola or an
following statements (S1, S2) pertaining to ellipse in given to road surface. This is also known as
pavements. barrel camber and it consists of a continuous curve of
S1 : Present serviceability index is used for the either parabolic or elliptical shape. Such a shape of
functional evaluation of pavement surface camber gives flat profile at the middle and steep
condition. profile towards the edges. The shape of camber is
S2 : Rigid pavements are less affected by preferred by fast moving vehicles as they have to cross
temperature variations than flexible the crown line frequently during overtaking operations.
pavements.
(a) Statement S1 is true and Statement S2 is Exam Point
false. The layer that is directly coming in contact with
(b) Both statements S1 and S2 are false the traffic is– Wearing course
(c) Statement S1 is false and Statement S2 is true The formation width of a road means the width of–
(d) Both Statements S1 and S2 are true Embankment at the top level
SSC JE 23.03.2021 (Morning) The foundation of a road is also called–
ESE 2017 soling/base
Ans. (a) : • Present serviceability index is used for the The thickness of base, in no case, should be
functional evaluation of pavement surface condition. more than– 30cm
• Rigid pavements or concrete pavements are impacted The sub-base course is placed immediately
by temperature changes through alterations in above the– sub-grade
expansion and contraction movements and The natural soil on which the pavement rests and
subsequently cracks form. to which the entire load of structure is ultimately
• Temperature variations cause curling and thermal- transferred, is known as the– sub-grade of road
expansion stresses within the concrete. For a poorly graded sub-grade soil, thickness of
1277. The order of the components of a typical sub base, is– 30cm
flexible pavement from bottom to top is : 1279. Commonly used method for strengthening of
(a) Prepared soil subgrade, Granular base course, existing bituminous pavements is
Granular sub-base cum drainage layer, (a) Asphalt concrete (b) Built-up spray grout
Bituminous binder and/or surface course (c) Sheet asphalt (d) Mastic asphalt
(b) Prepared soil subgrade, Granular sub-base RPSC Lect. (Tech.Edu.) Paper-II 2021
cum drainage layer, Granular base course,
Ans. (b) : Built-Up Spray Grout:- Built-Up Spray
Bituminous binder and/or surface
Grout consists of two layer composite construction of
(c) Granular base course, Bituminous binder
compacted crushed aggregates with application of
and/or surface course, Prepared soil subgrade,
bituminous binder after each layer for bonding and
Granular sub-base cum drainage layer
finished with key aggregates of the top to provide a total
(d) Granular sub-base drainage layer, Prepared
compacted thickness of 75mm. This method is commonly
soil subgrade, Granular base course,
used for strengthening of existing bituminous pavement.
Bituminous binder and/or surface course
A suitable wearing course is in variably provided over
SSC JE 23.03.2021 (Afternoon)
this layer before opening to traffic.
Ans. (b) : • The order of the component of a typical
1280. In the group index method of flexible pavement
flexible pavement from bottom to top is–
design, which one of the following factors
Prepared soil subgrade → Granular sub-base cum decides the thickness of base and surface
drainage layer → Granular base course → Bituminous course?
binder or surface. (a) type of surface and base course materials
• The method of design of flexible pavement as (b) percentage of sub-grade soil passing 75
recommended by IRC is CBR method. micron sieve
1278. Which shape of camber is best suited for (c) daily volume of commercial vehicles
flexible pavements? (d) percentage of liquid limit by subgrade soil
(a) Straight line RPSC Lect. (Tech.Edu.) Paper-II 2021
(b) Parabolic Ans. (b/d) : Group Index of Soil:- Fine grained soils
(c) Hyperbolic of each classification group exhibit a wide range of
(d) Combination of straight and hyperbolic properties as subgrade material to classify the fine
RPSC Lect. (Tech.Edu.) Paper-II 2021 grained soil within one group and for judging their
Ans. (b) : • Parabolic camber is best suited for flexible suitability which is termed as GI. GI is function of %
pavements. material passing 200 mesh sieve (0.074 mm), liquid
• The three commonly adopted shapes of cambers for limit and plastic limit and plasticity index of soil.
road surfaces are as follows: GI chart gives the chart for finding the GI
(i) Parabolic camber value from the the values of % passing 0.074 mm
(ii) Straight line camber sieve, LL and IP, instead of using USCS for group
(iii) Combined camber index.
Highway Engineering 659 YCT
1281. In Marshall testing of bituminous mixes, as the 1285. California bearing Ratio (CBR) Test is
bitumen content increases the flow value conducted for evaluating :
(a) remain constant (a) Consistency of the sub grade
(b) increase monotonically (b) Bearing capacity of the sub grade
(c) decreases first and then increases (c) Specific gravity of the sub grade
(d) increases first and then decreases (d) Stability of the sub grade
RPSC Lect. (Tech.Edu.) Paper-II 2021 TNCSC AE 16.12.2020
Ans. (d) : CBR test is a penetration test developed by
Ans. (b) : • In Marshall testing of bituminous mixes,
California division of highways, as a method for
as the bitumen content increases the flow value is
evaluating the stability of soil subgrade and other
increases monotonically. flexible pavement materials. The test results have been
• Bitumen concrete mix is commonly designed by correlated with flexible pavement thickness
Marshall method. requirements for highways and air fields.
• The Marshall test is a popular and proven method to 1286. For national highways the material used for
measure the load and flow rate of asphalt specimens. subgrade construction should have the dry
1282. Which of the following factors is not considered density of not less than .......... gm/cc.
for the design of pavements? (a) 1.50 (b) 1.75
(a) Climatic factors (b) Subgrade soil (c) 2.00 (d) 2.25
(c) Lane width (d) Environmental factors TNCSC AE 16.12.2020
RPSC Lect. (Tech.Edu.) Paper-II 2021 Ans. (b) :
Ans. (c) : • Factors considered for the design of • For national highways the material used for sub-
pavements are- grade construction should have the dry density
(i) Subgrade soil should not be less than 1.75 g/cc.
(ii) Climate factor • The sub-grade should be compacted to 97% of the
(iii) Environmental factors dry density with heavy compaction as per IS : 2720
(Part 8)
(iv) Traffic volume
(v) Material characteristics 1287. Which one of the following is not the correct
But lane width is not considered for the design of type of critical load position in pavement slab
design for the load on the pavement surface?
pavement.
(a) Interior loading (b) Edge loading
1283. The ductility test of bitumen is conducted at a (c) Eccentric loading (d) Corner loading
temperature of : ESE 2020
(a) 270C (b) 250C Ans. (c) : Critical Load Position–Since the pavement
0
(c) 22 C (d) 290C slab has finite length and width, either the character or
RPSC ACF and FRO 24.02.2021 the intensity of maximum stress induced by the
Ans. (a) : The ductility test of bitumen is conducted at application of a given traffic load is dependent on the
a temperature of 270C. location of the load on the pavement surface. There are
1284. ___________ is a vertical sloping member three typical locations namely the interior, edge and
along the edge of pavement forming part of a corner, where differing conditions of slab continuity
gutter and clearly defining the edge to vehicle exist. These locations are termed as critical load
positions.
users.
Westergaard developed relationships for the stress at
(a) Curbs
interior, edge, and corner regions, denoted as σi, σe, σc,
(b) Side slope in kg/cm2
(c) Camber Respectively and given by the equation–
(d) Shoulders
0.316P  
4 log10   + 1.069 
ℓ
DSSSB JE 20.03.2021 Morning σi =
Ans. (a) : Curbs is a vertical sloping member along h 2  b 
the edge of pavement forming part of a gutter and 0.572P  
4 log10   + 0.359
ℓ
clearly defining the edge to vehicle users. σe = 
h 2
  
b 
• Sub surface drainage of road means removal of rain
3P   a 2  
0.6
water from surface of the road.
σc = 1 –  
h2   ℓ  
 
where,
h → slab thickness (cm)
p → wheel load (kg)
a → radius of the wheel load distribution (cm)
ℓ → radius of relative stiffness (cm)
b → radius of resisting section (cm)

Highway Engineering 660 YCT

1288. What types of joints are used in concrete (d) Rigidity factor = Contact pressure × tyre
structures? pressure
(a) Construction joints NLC GET 24.11.2020
(b) Expansion joints and contraction joints MH PWD 2019
(c) Both construction joints, expansion joints and JKSSB JE 2013
contraction joints Ans. (b) : Rigidity factor is the ratio of contact
(d) Rusticated joints pressure to tyre pressure.
NPCIL JE 2020 Pc
Ans. (c) : There are three type of joints are provided in Gf =
cement concrete structures Pt
(i) Expansion joint Rigidity factor–
(ii) Contraction joint = 1, for tyre pressure of 7 kg/cm2
(iii) Construction joint > 1, for low tyre pressure < 7 kg/cm2
Expansion joints– < 1, for high tyre pressure > 7 kg/cm2
• Due to rise in temperature the pavement is allowed Note– Tyre pressure is important for upper layers, and
to expand. contact pressure is important for deeper layers.
• We provide 2.5 cm max thickness of joint specified 1291. Layer directly in contact with moving traffic is:
by IRC. (a) Base course (b) Wearing course
• The maximum spacing between joint is 140 m. (c) Sub base (d) Sub grade
• Dowell bars are provided, which develops bearing, Nagaland PSC 2015 Paper-I
bending and shearing stress to help in load transfer.
Ans. (b) : • Wearing course is the layer directly in
Contraction joint–It is provided to control cracks duecontact with traffic loads and generally contains super
to shrinkage and moisture variation. quality material.
• When reinforcement in not provided, the maximum • To give a smooth riding surface.
spacing between contraction joint is taken 1.5 m.
• It resist pressure exerted by tyres and takes up wear
1289. The California Bearing Ratio (CBR) method of and tear due to traffic.
flexible pavement design gives an idea about
1292. The plasticity index of the fraction passing 425
(a) The quality of road making material
micron IS sieve in case of sub-base/base course
(b) The traffic intensities
(c) The characteristics of soil should be:
(d) All the above [ESE-1996]
ISRO TA 21.04.2018 (a) Less than 6 (b) greater than 6
(c) greater than 9 (d) between 15 and 30
Ans. (a) : The California Bearing Ratio (CBR) method
of flexible pavement gives an idea about: Ans. (a) The material passing 425 micron (0.425 mm)
• The quality of road making material sieve for all the three grading when tested shall have
liquid limit and plasticity index not more than 25% and
• The traffic intensities
6% respectively.
• The characteristics of soil
Material used in road construction like as Bitumen,
• Thickness of pavement
asphalt, coal tar, cut back, Emulsion, lime, cement etc.
Exam Point 1293. The corrected characteristic rebound
deflection on a pavement, using Bankelman
As per IRC: 37–2001, the minimum thickness of
granular base course to be provided on a beam study is 2mm. The equivalent granular
National or State Highway is– 250 mm overlay thickness required for an allowable
Bottom most layer of Pavement is known as – deflection of 1mm as per original IRC
Sub grade guidelines is:
The function of the sub base layer in the (a) 33mm (b) 66mm
pavement is– (c) 133mm (d) 166mm
To minimize the damaging effect of frost [ESE-1999]
Action Ans. (d) Correct rebound deflection :
A water bound macadam road is an example of– Dc = 2mm
Flexible pavement Allowable deflection Da = 1mm
1290. The correct expression for Rigidity factor is : D 
(a) Rigidity factor = Contact pressure - type Overlay thickness h = 550 log10  c 
pressure  Da 
(b) Rigidity factor = Contact pressure / type h = 550 log10 2
pressure h = 550 × 0.301
(c) Rigidity factor = Tyre pressure / contact h = 165.5 mm
pressure h = 166 mm
Highway Engineering 661 YCT
1294. As per latest IRC guidelines for designing 1298. With addition of lime in soil:
flexible pavement of CBR method, the load (a) LL increases and PL decreases
parameter required is: (b) Plasiticity Index increases
(a) number of commercial vehicles per day (c) LL change very slightly and PL increases
(b) cumulative standard axles load (d) LL and PL both decrease
(c) equivalent single axle load [ESE-2002]
(d) number of vehicles (all types) during design Ans. (c) Factors Affecting Properties of Soil-lime
life Lime Content:- Generally an increase in lime content
[ESE-1999] causes a slight change in liquid limit and a considerable
Ans. (b) As per IRC 37–1984 has revised the guide increase in plastic limit resulting in reduction in
lines for design flexible pavements based on the concept plasticity index. The rate of increase in plastic limit is
of cumulative standard axle loads rather than the total first rapid and then the rate decreases beyond a certain
number of commercial vehicles as done earlier. lime content. This point is often termed lime fixation
• The value of Ns and CBR value of sub grade soil point. This is the approximate lime content that is
determined in the laboratory. considered to be used up for modification of clay.
(Ns–million standard axle.) During this range the increase in stability of the clay-
1295. If the load, warping and frictional stresses in a lime may not be noteworthy. When the lime content in
cement concrete slab are 210N/mm2, 290N/mm2 the mix is further in increased, there is a high rate of
and 10N/mm2 respectively, the critical increase in stability. However when the lime content is
combination of stresses during summer mid- increased beyond a certain proportion, the stability
day is: values generally start decreasing.
(a) 290N/mm2 (b) 390N/mm2
(c) 490N/mm2 (d) 590N/mm2 Exam Point
[ESE-1999] For Indian conditions, water bound macadam
Ans. (c) Critical Combination of Stress, During roads, are suitable if daily traffic does not
summer mid-day : exceed– 2000 tonne
= Load stress + warping stress – friction stress In general, the drainage layer facility is provided
= 210 + 290 – 10 = 490 N/mm2 in which layer of the pavement– sub-base
1296. Which one of the following is useful in A pavement is classified as flexible or rigid
functional evaluation of pavement? based on its– Base
(a) PCU (b) PSI A pavement in which the weight of wheels are
(c) PIEV (d) Bankelman beam transferred to the sub grade and having flexural
[ESE-2000] strength is known as– Rigid pavement
Ans. (b) Present serviceability index (PSI) : In concrete pavements, the critical combination
The present serviceability index of a pavement is of stresses at the edge of the slab during summer
related to a pre-determined scale by a panel of Judges mid-day is–
sensitive to the wishes of motor vehicle users by Load stress + warping stress - frictional stress
actually riding one the pavement. 1299. California Bearing Ratio (CBR) is a:
• The present serviceability index is the mean opinion (a) measure of soil strength
of the members of the rating panel and this is (b) method of soil identification
correlated with the physical measurement such as (c) measure to indicate the relative strength of
longitudinal and transverse profile of the pavement. paving materials
1297. Modulus of subgrade reaction using 30cm (d) measure of shear strength under lateral
diameter plate is obtained as 200N/cm3. The confinement
value of the same (in N/cm3) using the standard [ESE-2005]
plate will be: Ans. (c) CBR test : A test for evaluating the stability of
(a) 5000 (b) 200 soil sub grade and other flexible pavements.
(c) 85 (d) 80 • Flexible pavement thickness is determined based on
[ESE-2001] this test.
Ans. (d) Correction for small plate size in bearing test. • It may be conducted in the laboratory as well as in
Some time the load capacity may not be adequate to the fields.
cause 75 cm diameter plate to settle 0.175 cm. • CBR is measure to indicate the relative strength of
paving materials.
1
K∝ • It is an arbitrary strength test and hence can not be
a used to evaluate the soil properties like cohesion or
K 1a 1 = K 2a 2 internal friction or shearing resistance.
K1 = 200 N/cm3, a1 = 30 cm, a2 = 75 cm 1300. Which one of the following methods is used in
30 × 200 the design of rigid pavements?
K2 =
75 (a) CBR method
K2 = 80N/cm3 (b) Group index method
Highway Engineering 662 YCT
 (c) Westergaard's method percentage passing 75 µm sieve, the liquid limit and
(d) McLeod's method plasticity index.
HPSSC JE CODE 502/2018 • A graphical method of calculating the group index
Nagaland PSC CTSE 2017 Paper-I is used to simplify the method.
KPSC JE 2.7.2016 1303. What is the deflection at the surface of a
[ESE-2009] flexible pavement due to a wheel load of 40kN
Ans. (c) • Westergaard's method are used in the design and a tyre pressure of 0.5MPa? The value of E
of rigid pavements. for pavement and subgrade is 20MPa.
• CBR method group index method and McLeod (a) 15mm (b) 11mm
method are some of the methods which are used in (c) 9mm (d) 6mm
the design of flexible pavements. [ESE-2014]
Note:- Design of rigid pavement is based on 1.5P.a
Westergaard's analysis, where modulus of subgrade Ans. (d) Deflection (∆) = (For flexible plate)
reaction, radius of relative stiffness, radius of wheel Es
load distribution are used. For critical design a P = 0.5MPa
combination of load stress, frictional stress and Wheel load
warping stress is considered. contact area =
Tyre Pressure
40 × 103 N
=
0.5N / mm 2
π × a = 80 × 103 mm2
2

80 × 103
a=
1301. Radius of relative stiffness of cement concrete π
pavement does not depend upon which one of a = 159.615mm
the following? Es = 20 MPa
(a) Modulus of subgrade reaction 1.5 × 0.5 × 159.617
So, ∆=
(b) Wheel load 20
(c) Modulus of elasticity of cement concrete ∆ = 5.98 ≃ 6mm
(d) Poisson's ratio of concrete
[ESE-2009] 1304. Bankelman beam deflection method is used for
Ans. (b) Radius of relative stiffness of cement concrete design of:
pavement is : (a) Rigid overlays on rigid pavements
1/ 4
(b) Rigid overlays on flexible pavements
 Eh 3  (c) Flexible overlays on flexible pavements
l=  2 
12K(1 − µ )  (d) Flexible overlays on rigid pavements
where : Gujarat Electric Board 2017
K= Modulus of sub-grade reaction. Mizoram PSC Disaster Mgmt. 2015, Paper III
E= Modulus of elasticity of cement concrete. [ESE-2014]
µ= Poisson's ratio of concrete. Ans. ( c )
h= thickness of pavement. • Bankelman beam is a device which can be
So, Radius of relative stiffness of cement concrete conveniently used to measure the rebound
pavement does not depend the wheel load. deflection of a pavement due to dual wheel load
1302. Consider the following in relation to group assembly or the design wheel load.
index of soil: • Bankelman beam deflection measurement is used to
1. Liquid limit design the flexible overlay thickness over flexible
2. Sandy loam pavement.
3. Plasticity index • Design of flexible pavements are done by following
4. Percent passing 75 microns sieve methods.
Which of the above is/are used for estimating (1) California bearing ratio method
the group index? (2) Group index method
(a) 1 (b) 1 & 2 (3) Burmister method
(c) 2 & 3 (d) 1, 3 & 4 (4) Triaxial test method
[ESE-2009] 1305. The water bound macadam road is in the
Ans. (d) Group index of soil: category of
• This method describes the procedure for obtaining (a) Rigid pavement
the group index and unified classification of soils (b) Semi-rigid pavement
based on the plasticity index and gradation. (c) Flexible pavement
• The group index value range from 0 to 20, and is a (d) none of the above
combination of weighted variables related to WBPSC SAE 2000
Highway Engineering 663 YCT
 Ans. (c) : In flexible Pavement compressive stresses 1307. The wearing course in the case of flexible
are transmitted to the lower layer by grain to grain pavement consist of
transfer through the point of contact. Load carrying (a) broken stone with sand mixed with tar
capacity of flexible Pavement is derived from load (b) hard well burnt clinker
distribution Property and not from its flexural. (c) a mixture of bituminous material and
Bituminous concrete and water bound macadam is one aggregate
of the best flexible layer materials. (d) all the above
WBPSC SAE 2000
1306. Which of the following statements are correct
regarding Westergaard’s concept for Ans. (c) : The wearing course in the case of flexible
temperature stresses? pavement consist of a mixture of bituminous material
1. During the day, the top of the pavement slab and aggregate. Wearing course is the surface course of
gets heated under the sun light when the flexible Pavement.
bottom of the slab becomes hot 1308. In CBR test, the value of CBR is calculated at :
2. During summer season as the mean (a) 2.5 mm penetration only
temperature of the slab increases, the concrete (b) 5.0 mm penetration only
pavement expands towards the expansion (c) 7.5 mm penetration only
joints (d) Both (a) and (b)
3. Due to frictional force at the interface, (e) 10 mm penetration only
compressive stress is developed at the bottom Odisha JE (Mains) 30.06.2019
of the slab as it tends to expand Ans. (d) : • The CBR value usually calculated for 2.5
(a) 1 and 2 only (b) 2 and 3 only mm and 5 mm penetration.
(c) 1 and 3 only (d) 1, 2 and 3  Corrected test load for 
ESE 2020  
chosen penetration in MPa 
Ans. (b) : Temperature is an important factor, that CBR =  ×100%
 Standard load for the same 
influencing stress and deflection in concrete pavements.  
(i) Top layer of slab will have high temperature  depth of penetration 
compared to bottom layer at day time which will 1309. In India the type of traffic used to design
be vice-versa at night. pavement is :
(ii) During summer season, the mean temperature of (a) Low traffic (b) Heavy traffic
slab increases, the concrete pavement expands (c) Mixed traffic flow (d) Very low traffic
towards the expansion joints. Odisha JE (Mains) 2015
(iii) Due to frictional resistance of the interface, Ans. (c) : • In India generally there is always a mixed
compressive stress is developed at the bottom of traffic flow except during midnight hours and early
the slab as it tends to expand. morning hours, so the designer has to assume mixed
(iv) During winter season, the slab contracts causing traffic flow only.
tensile stress at the bottom due to the frictional • Mixed traffic facilities are most appropriate on roads
resistance again opposing movement of the slab. with low volumes of traffic operating at low speeds.

Exam Point Exam Point

Minimum lateral clearance desirable from the The structure of a road is composed of–
pavement edge is– 1.85 m Sub-grade, sub-base, base
Weight of a vehicle affects– The fundamental factor in the selection of
Pavement thickness pavement type is– type and intensity of traffic
Maximum equivalent single wheel load as per The finished top width of earthwork in fill or cut
IRC is– 4080 kg for receiving the road structure is–
Formation width on straights for motorable road Formation width
carrying a total load less than 100 tonnes per The major structural component of a road
day, is– 4.5 to 5m composed of stone aggregate is–
Formation width on curves of motorable road The base course
carrying a total load above 400 tonnes per day is The surface of the ground in its final shape and
kept as– 11m level after completion of earth work– Formation
Strength, stability and bearing power of a
The top of ground on which the foundation of
highway depend on– Sub grade
road rest is called– Subgrade
When the bearing capacity of soil is poor and the
intensity of traffic is high, an additional layer is The position of base course in a flexible
provided between the soling and sub-grade. This pavement is– Over the sub-base
additional layer is called– Sub-base NOT a limitation of the California Bearing Ratio
The road surfacing should be– Impervious, (CBR) used for designing flexible pavement–
durable, stable Easy and simplicity

Highway Engineering 664 YCT

1310. Consider the following data with respect to the Ans. (a) : The sample is pulled 50 mm per minute until
design of flexible pavement: rupture. The distance to the braking point in cm is
Design wheel load = 4200 kg ductility value that depends on the temperature,
Tyre pressure = 6.0 kg/cm2 briquette size, traction rate. Ductility values can vary
Elastic modulus = 150 kg/cm2 from 5 to 100 cm. A minimum value 5 cm is required
Permissible deflection = 0.25 cm for bitumen grade 4 and above.
1 1314. In which of the following road construction, the
(take π1/2 = 1.77, π–1/2 = 0.564, = 0.318, and π2
π finished surface layer of the pavement is given
= 9.87 a cross slope of 1 in 45?
The total thickness of flexible pavement for a (a) Macadam construction
single layer elastic theory will be nearly. (b) Telford construction
(a) 42 cm (b) 47 cm (c) Tresaguet construction
(c) 51 cm (d) 56 cm (d) Metcalf construction
ESE 2019 SSC JE Civil 28.10.2020 (Evening)
P 4200 Ans. (b) : Telford Construction–His work started in
Ans. (c) Pressure, P = ⇒ =6 early 19th century in England.
πa 2 π (a )
2
Main feature are–
a = 15 cm He provided level subgrade of width 9 m.
Thickness of pavement by single layer elastic A binding layer of bearing course 4 cm thick was
2 provided with cross slope of 1 in 45.
 3P  2 Thickness of foundation stone varied from 17 cm at
theory, h =  2πEδ  – a
  edges to 22 cm at centre.
1315. Heavy foundation stones are not at all
2 necessary to be placed at the bottom layer of
 3 × 4200  2 road with sub grade cross slope of 1 in 36.
=   – 15 = 51cm
 2 × π× 150 × 0.25  Which of the following methods of construction
used this concept?
1311. CBR Test is widely used in the design of :
(a) Telford construction
(a) Flexible Pavements (b) Rigid Pavements
(b) Tresaguet construction
(c) Semi Rigid Pavements(d) All of the above
(c) Macadam construction
UKSSSC JE 2017 (PTCUL, UPCL)
(d) Metcalf construction
Ans. (a) : The California bearing ratio (CBR) test is SSC JE Civil 28.10.2020 (Evening)
penetration test used to evaluate the subgrade of roads
Ans. (c) : Macadam was the first person who
and pavements. The results of these tests are used with
suggested that heavy foundation stones are not at all
the curves to determine the thickness of pavement and
required to be placed at the bottom layer.
its component layers this is the most widely used
method for the design of flexible pavement. • He provided stone of size 5 mm to a uniform
thickness of 10 cm
1312. Test on Bitumen are :
• The importance to subgrade drainage and
(a) Penetration & Ductility Test
compaction was given so the subgrade was
(b) Softening Point, Flash + Fire Test
compacted and prepared with cross slope of 1 in
(c) Both (A) & (B)
36.
(d) None of the above
• The pavement surface was also given the cross
UKSSSC JE 2017 (PTCUL, UPCL)
slope of 1 in 36.
Ans. (c) : Test for bitumen with IS-codes–
• Total thickness was kept uniform from edge to
Penetration test IS 1203-1978 centre to a minimum value of 25 cm
Ductility test IS 1208-1978 • The size of broken stone for the top layer was
Softening test IS 1205-1978 decided on the basis of stability under animal
Specific gravity test IS 1202-1978 drawn vehicles.
Viscosity test IS 1206-1978 1316. Which of the following is NOT a critical
Flash and fire point test IS 1209-1978 parameter to control cracking and rutting in a
Float test IS 1210-1978 flexible pavement?
Determination of water content IS 1211-1978 (a) Vertical subgrade strain
Determination of loss of heating IS 1212-1978 (b) Tensile strain at the bottom of bituminous
1313. The rate of pull of the sample, in bitumen layer
ductility test apparatus is : (c) Tensile strain near the surface close to the
(a) 50 mm per minute (b) 50 cm per minute edge of the wheel
(c) 50 cm per second (d) 50 mm per second (d) Vertical sub-base strain
UKSSSC JE 2017 (PTCUL, UPCL) SSC JE Civil 30.10.2020 (Morning)
Highway Engineering 665 YCT
 Ans. (d) : Failure criteria in flexible pavement– 1319. Which of the following is best suited for the
• A flexible pavement is modeled as an elastic compaction of concrete in rigid pavements?
multilayer structure, there are two critical (a) Screed board vibrator
parameters for the design of a flexible pavement. (b) Table vibrator
1. Horizontal tensile strain at the bottom of the (c) Needle vibrator
bituminous layer or tensile strain near the surface (d) Formwork vibrator
close to the edge of the wheel. SSC JE Civil 30.10.2020 (Morning)
2. Vertical compressive strain at the top of the Ans. (a) : Screed Board Vibrator is best suitable for
subgrade layer. the compaction of concrete in rigid pavement.
Note–These two parameters are considered while • Screed board vibrator is used to vibrate the concrete
designing different layers of the flexible pavement are to give a compact and leveled surface, these vibrator
rutting and cracking (limit) in the bituminous layer and are self-travelling and only require guiding along
non-bituminous layer respectively. formwork, dragged at end by two operators without
working in the concrete.
1317. Which of the following binders is best suited
for repair work of bituminous pavements 1320. The interface treatment provided to plug in the
during rainy weather? voids of porous surfaces and to bond loose
(a) Paving grade bitumen (b) Bitumen emulsion particles in bituminous pavements is called:
(c) Cutback bitumen (d) Coal tar (a) surface dressing (b) prime coat
SSC JE Civil 30.10.2020 (Morning) (c) tack coat (d) seal coat
SSC JE Civil 30.10.2020 (Morning)
Ans. (b): Bitumen Emulsion binders is best suited for
Ans. (b) : Prime Coat–The interface treatment
repair work of bituminous pavements during rainy
provided to plug in the voids of porous surface and to
weather.
bond loose particles in bituminous pavement is called
Premix and surface dressing in cold weather
prime coat.
condition. Surface Dressing–It is a process of spraying a road
Penetration grade 30/40–Reads with high volume of surface with bituminous binder and then covering the
traffic. binder with clean, crushed aggregate or natural gravel.
Penetration grade 60/70–Superior type of roads with Tack Coat–It is bitumen emulsion that is sprayed on
high traffic in normal summer temperature. existing pavement surface which is relatively impervious
1318. What nature of warping stresses are generated like an existing bituminous surface or a cement concrete
in a reinforced cement concrete pavement pavement, or a pervious surface like the WBM which has
during a summer mid-day? already been treated by a prime coat.
(a) Tensile in bottom fibre and compressive in Seal Coat–Seal coating consists of the application of
top fibre liquid asphalt material to the roadway followed
(b) Tensile in both top and bottom fibre immediately by the application of the aggregate.
(c) Compressive in bottom fibre and tensile in 1321. The stability of sub-grade in a pavement is
top fibre influenced by
(d) Compressive in both top and bottom fibre (a) Water contact (b) Compaction
SSC JE Civil 30.10.2020 (Morning) (c) Materials used (d) Rigidity
Ans. (a) : Warping Stress–Temperature difference RRB JE CBT-II 28–08–2019 (morning)
between the top and the bottom surfaces of a cement Ans. (a) : The stability of sub-grade in a pavement is
concrete slab is a common phenomenon weather its influenced by soil texture, water content, density, frost
day or night. action, shrinkage and swelling and other climate factors.
• During day time the temperature of the top portion 1322. The rain waterholes in the parapet or in edging
slab may be considerably grater than that of bottom. is called as-
• The top portion of slab tends to expand more than (a) Weep hole (b) Hole
bottom portion. (c) Water proofing (d) Edge hole
• During night time top of the slab tends to shrink RRB JE CBT-II 28–08–2019 (evening)
more than bottom portion. Ans : (a) Weep holes are provided in earth retaining
structure like retaining walls, underpasses, wingwalls
and parapet and in other structure.
• They are basically provided in structure to relive
hydrostatic pressure or water pressure on the wall, that
will ultimately reduce structure design.
1323. Equivalent number of standard axles per
commercial vehicle is known as _______.
(a) Lane distribution factor
(b) Vehicle damage factor
(c) Passenger Car unit
(d) Rate of growth factor
Punjab JE July 2018
Highway Engineering 666 YCT
 Ans. (b) : Vehicle damage factor– Ans. (a) : • In the design of flexible pavements as per
It is defined as a equivalent number of standard axles IRC : 37-2012 guidelines, with every load repetition
per commercial vehicle. The vehicle damage factor is horizontal tensile strain developed at the bottom of the
used to convert the number of commercial vehicles of bituminous layer is indicative of fatigue cracking in
different axle loads and axle configuration to the bituminous layers.
number of standard axle load repetitions. • As per guidelines for the design of plain jointed
4
 Axle load in kg  cement concrete the number of allowable fatigue is
(i) Single axle load, VDF =   infinity repetions.
 8200 
(ii) Tandem axle load, VDF= 1326. As per the IRC guidelines, Benkelman beam
4 readings are used for the design of which one
 Axle load in kg  of the following?
VDF =  
 14500  (a) Bituminous mixes
1324. As per IRC:58-2015 guidelines for the design of (b) Overlay thickness for existing highway
plain jointed cement concrete pavements; what (c) Granular mixes
would be the number of allowable fatigue (d) Pavement crust for new highway
repetitions for a stress ratio corresponding to Punjab JE July 2018
0.30 using M40 grade of concrete having Ans. (b) : • As per the IRC guidelines, Benkelman
minimum flexural strength of 4.5 MPa? beam readings are used for the design of overlay
(a) Zero (b) 300000 thickness for existing highway.
(c) 400000 (d) Infinite • For most of the commercial highway vehicles, the
Punjab JE July 2018 commonly used tyre inflation pressure range from
Ans. (d) : • As per IRC : 58-2015 guidelines for the about 0.7 MPa to 1 MPa. It is found that stresses in
design of plain jointed cement concrete the number of concrete pavements having thickness of 200 mm.
allowable fatigue is infinity repetitions for a stress ratio 1327. As per IRC: 81-1997 guidelines the interval
corresponding to 0.30 using M40 grade and 4.5 MPa between the two readings, in the Benkelman
flexural strength. Beam Deflection studies, should not be more
• Design of pavements considering the flexural stress than _______.
under the simultaneous action of load and temperature (a) 10 m (b) 20 m
gradient for different categories of axles. (c) 50 m (d) 75 m
Punjab JE July 2018
Exam Point Ans. (c) : According to IRC-81-1997 and clause no.
4.3.1
A well prepared WBM road can accept–
Deflection Measurements:- In each road section of
450 t of pneumatic traffic + 450t of iron uniform performance mini of ten points should be
wheeled traffic/day marked at equal distance in each lane of traffic for
For iron wheeled traffic, the best suitable making the deflection observation in the outer wheel
pavement is– Flexible pavement path.
The binder normally used in flexible pavement
• The interval b/w points should not be more than
construction is– bitumen
50m.
The positions of base course in a flexible
pavement is– Over the sub-base • If the highest or lowest values of differ from the
The binder normally used in flexible pavement mean by more than one-third of mean then extra
construction is– bitumen deflection measurements should be made at 25m on
The minimum thickness of the base of a flexible either side of point where high or low values are
pavement is kept as– 10cm observed.
The magnitude of tyre pressure controls the 1328. Pavement Quality Concrete (PQC) slab is
…...– designed for a slab thickness of 300 mm. The
Quality of material to be used in the upper transverse contraction joints are provided with
layers of pavement dowels bars after every 4.5 m. What is the
1325. In the design of flexible pavements as per recommended depth (from top of the slab) at
IRC:37-2012 guidelines, with every load which the dowel bars should be positioned in
repetition horizontal tensile strain developed at the PQC slab as per IRC:15-2011 guidelines?
the bottom of the bituminous layer is indicative (a) 25 mm (b) 50 mm
of which one of the followings? (c) 100 mm (d) 150 mm
(a) Fatigue cracking in bituminous layers Punjab JE July 2018
(b) Rutting in the subgrade layer Ans. (d) : The recommended depth (from top if the
(c) Rutting in wet mix macadam layer slap) at which the dowel bars should be positioned in
(d) Fatigue cracking in the wet mix macadam the PQC (Pavement Quality Concrete) slab as per IRC
layer 15 : 2011 and clause no. 8.3.2.2 guidelines is 150 mm,
Punjab JE July 2018 dowel bars as per dimensions, location and spacing
Highway Engineering 667 YCT
 shown on the drawing are required at expansion joints 1332. In designing the thickness of base should not be
to transfer wheel loads to the adjacent slab for slab greater than :
thickness less than 150 mm dowel bars may not be (a) 300 mm (b) 200 mm
provided (IS 6509 : 1972). (c) 150 mm (d) 100 mm
1329. Best road suitable for iron wheeled traffic is : Nagaland PSC 2015 Paper-I
(a) Water bound macadam road Ans. (a) : Design thickness of flexible pavement–
(b) Rigid pavement
(c) Earthern road
(d) Any of the above
Nagaland PSC 2015 Paper-I
TSPSC Observers 2013
Ans. (a) : Water bound macadam road (WBM)–
• The term macadam in the present day means, the
pavement base course made of crushed or broken
aggregate mechanically interlocked by rolling and 1333. Which of the following statement is correct for
the voids filled with screening and binding material the spacing of contraction joint in cement
with the assistance of water. concrete pavements?
When WBM, used as a surface course then it gets (a) The maximum spacing of contraction joint
deteriorated rapidly under adverse conditions of for unreinforced slabs is 4.5 m
traffic and weather. Therefore it is desirable to (b) In reinforced slabs the spacing may be 13 m
provide a bituminous surfacing course over the for 15 cm thick slab with steel reinforcement
WBM layer. of 3.8 kg/m2
• The WBM roads are not suitable for fast-moving (c) In reinforced slabs the spacing may be 14 m
vehicles with pneumatic wheels. for 20 cm thick slab with steel reinforcement
• These roads are only suitable for moving iron of 2.7 kg/m2
wheeled traffic such as ton gas, bullock carts etc. (d) All of the above
• Constant use of the road by iron wheels, the road (UPSSSC JE 31-07-2016)
mental gets crushed. Ans : (a) Contraction joint– Contraction joint are
1330. The course not required in concrete roads is : provided in the transverse direction to allow
(a) Subgrade (b) Sub base longitudinal contraction of slab due to increase in
(c) Base coat (d) Wearing course environmental temperature.
Nagaland PSC 2015 Paper-I • It can be provided without dowel bar.
Ans. (b) : The sub-base course not required in concrete • As per IRC spacing between contraction joint,
roads, concrete road is examples of rigid pavement. L ≥ 4.5m for PCC
• Rigid pavements are those which posses note worthy 1334. Which of the following is/are correct with
flexural strength or flexural rigidity. respect to sub surface drainage of highways?
• The stresses are not transferred from grain to grain to (1) The water table should be kept at least 1.5 m
the lower layers as in the ease of flexible pavements below the subgrade
layers. (2) Transverse drains are used when soil is
relatively less permeable
(3) Transverse drains are used for all types of
soils
Select the answer from the codes given
below:
(a) Only 1 (b) 1 & 3
(c) Only 2 (d) 1 & 2
1331. For _____ contact pressure rigidity factor is 1 : (UPSSSC JE 31-07-2016)
(a) 12 kg/cm2 (b) 9 kg/cm2 Ans : (c)
(c) 7 kg/cm 2
(d) 5 kg/cm2 • The water table should be kept at least 1 to 1.2m
Nagaland PSC 2015 Paper-I below the sub-grade.
Ans. (c) : • Transverse drains are used when soil is relatively
contact pressure less permeable.
Rididity factor (R.F.) = • In order to that the sub grade and pavements are not
Tyre pressure
subjected to excessive moisture.
Contact Tyre pressure Rigidity factor 1335. The method of design of flexible pavement as
pressure recommended by IRC is
7 kg/cm2 7 kg/cm2 =1 (a) Group index method
2 2
> 7 kg/cm < 7 kg/cm >1 (b) CBR method
< 7 kg/cm2 > 7 kg/cm2 <1 (c) Westergaard method
Highway Engineering 668 YCT
 (d) Benkelman beam method Construction joint–
Assam PSC AE (PRD) 2020 • There are provided to permit the contraction of the
KPSC JE 13.11.2016 slab. These joint are spaced closer than expansion
Nagaland PSC 2016 Paper-I joints.
CG PWD, NRDA JE Exam 2015 • As per IRC, maximum spacing of contraction joints
Karnataka PSC JE Code 126/2018 in requirement C.C. slab is 4.5 m and in reinforced
(UPJAL NIGAM JE 2016, 1ST Shift) slab of thickness 20 cm is 14 m.
Karnataka PSC JE Code 114/2016 1337. Contact pressure is defined as the ratio of -
Ans. (b) : (a) Load on wheel/Contact area
• The method of design of flexible pavement as (b) Contact area/Load on wheel
recommended by IRC is CBR method. (c) Average type pressure/Lower type pressure
• Westergaard method is used for rigid pavement. (d) Lower tyre pressure/Average tyre pressure
• Benkelman beam method is used for overlays. NPCIL JE 2020
• Group index method is used for flexible pavement. Ans. (a) : Contact pressure–
Note:- Group index method of design of flexible • At low tyre pressure the tyre comes under
pavements has been absolute nowadays. compression hence contact pressure is greater than
In the recent revision of IRC 37-2018 IIT PAVE tyre pressure.
software is used to determine the thickness of Load on wheel
composition & pavement based on the CBR value. Contact pressure =
Contact area
Exam Point • The ratio of contact pressure to tyre pressure is
defined as rigidity factor.
The mechanism of load transfer in a flexible Value of rigidity factor
pavement is by–
Contact Tyre Rigidity
Bending action of the pavement layers pressure pressure factor
Tyre pressure influences the–
7 kg/cm2 7 kg/cm2 1
Quality of surface course
> 7 kg/cm2 < 7 kg/cm2 >1
The value of rigidity factor for design of flexible
pavement is- greater than 1 for lower tyre < 7 kg/cm2 > 7 kg/cm2 <1
pressure (<7kg/cm2) 1338. Which test is conducted to determine the
The design of the road is based on– strength of pavement in horizontal direction?
Equivalent wheel load (a) Triaxial test
Weight of a vehicle affects the design of– (b) CBR test
Pavement thickness and gradient of a road (c) Hveem's stabilometer test
In semigrouted Macadam Pavement the hoggin (d) Stability test
material is– Stone powder NPCIL JE 2020
Flexible pavement distribute the wheel load– Ans. (c) : Hveem's stabilometer test– It is used to
Through a set of layers to the subgrade determine the strength of pavement in horizontal
Radius of relative stiffness of cement concrete direction.
pavement does not depend upon of the The test is performed on the mixed asphalt-aggregate
following– Wheel load material to evaluate resistance value (R-value) in an
asphlat mix to achieve the stabilometer value (S-
1336. The design of highways, expansion and value).
contraction joints should respectively be
22.2
provided at S=
(a) 50 m and 32 m (b) 50 m and 10 m  Ph × D 
(c) 25 m and 10 m (d) 25 m and 32 m   − 0.222
 Pv − Ph 
Karnataka PSC JE Code 114/2016 Where,
KPSC JE 2.7.2016 S = stabilometer value.
HPSSC JE Code 502/2018 Pv = Vertical pressures, typically 2800 kPa (400 psi).
Ans. (b) : Expansion joint– Pn = horizontal pressure corresponding to Pv in kPa
• These are provided to allow for expansion of the slab (psi)
due to rise of temperature. These also permit the D = displacement of specimen in 0.25 mm (0.01 inch)
contraction of slabs. unit.
• The approximate gap width for this type of joint is Note– Correction to the stabiliometer value is made if
from 20 to 25 mm. the sample height is not 64 mm (2.5 inches).
• Spacing of expansion joint for smooth interface– 1339. As per IRC:37-2012 guidelines, for the
Summer = 90 to 120 m calculation of equivalent cumulative standard
Winter = 50 to 60 m axle load repetitions in a four lane singe
• For rough interface the spacing between expansion carriageway road, the design should be based
joint should not be > 140 m. upon:
Highway Engineering 669 YCT
 (a) 40 percent of the total number of commercial Exam Point
vehicles in both directions
Flexible pavement derive stability primarily
(b) 50 percent of the total number of commercial
from– Cohesion alone
vehicles in both directions
In a flexible pavement–
(c) 60 percent of the total number of commercial
vehicles in both directions Vertical compressive stresses decreases with
(d) 75 percent of the total number of commercial depth of the layer
vehicles in both directions The flexible pavement distribute the wheel load–
Punjab JE 2016 Through a set of layers to sub-grade
Ans. (a) : • As per IRC : 37-2012 guidelines, for the Excessive deformation in foundation course of a
calculation of equivalent cumulative standard axle load flexible pavement is known as–
repetitions in a four lane single carriage way road, the Base course failure
design should be based on 40% of the total number of Vehicle damage factor (VDF) as given by I.R.C,
commercial vehicles in both directions. is used in– CBR method of drainage system
• The recommended method considers design traffic in Benkelman beam deflection method is used for
terms of the cumulative number of standard axles (80 kN) design of–
to be carried by the pavement during the design life. Flexible overlay on flexible pavement
1340. Based on structural behaviour, pavements are In case of highway construction, water bound
generally classified into ______ categories. macadam (WBM) grading no. 1 (G–1) consists
(a) five (b) four of coarse aggregates in the range of–
(c) three (d) two 90 mm – 45 mm
Tamil Nadu PSC 2019 The binding material is in water bound macadam
Ans. (d) : Types of pavement structure– Pavements roads– Stone dust
are generally classified into two categories on the 1343. For all important Indian highways, flexible
basis of structural behavior. pavements are designed for a design life of Y
Flexible pavement Rigid pavement years, where Y is:
• IRC 37 : 2012 : Design • IRC 58 : 2012 : Design (a) 15 (b) 30
code for the design of code for the design of (c) 25 (d) 20
flexible pavement. rigid pavement. NPCC 2017
• Flexible pavement are • Rigid pavement are Ans : (a) Design life (As per IRC 37-2001)
commonly designed using designed using elastic • It is recommended that pavements for national
empirical or equations. theory. highways and state highways should be designed for a
1341. Base course is used in rigid pavements for life of 15 years.
(a) prevention of subgrade settlement • Expressways and urban roads may be designed for a
(b) prevention of slab cracking longer life of 20 years for other categories of roads, a
(c) prevention of pumping design life of 10 to 15 years may be adopted.
(d) prevention of thermal expansion 1344. What is the objective of having tie bars in rigid
Mizoram PSC/ (PWD) 2020 Paper-III pavements?
Ans. (c) : Sub-base and base course (a) To firmly tie longitudinally adjacent slabs
Rigid pavement Flexible pavement and prevent opening of joints
In rigid pavement it In flexible pavement it (b) Resisting changes due to temperature
prevents pumping and improves load carrying (c) Load transfer
protects subgrade against capacity. (d) Preventing trailing cracks
frost action. NPCC 2017
1342. The structural damage caused by an axle load Ans : (a) Tie bar– Tie bar are used across the
varies as the _____ power of its ratio to the longitudinal joint of cement concrete pavement. These
standard axle load. bars are not designed to act as load transfer devices.
(a) first (b) second Thus tie bars are designed to withstand tensile stresses.
(c) third (d) fourth • The maximum tensile force in tie bars being equal to
LMRC AM 2018 Shift-II the force required to overcome frictional force between
Ans. (d) : Equivalent axle load factor (EALF) – The the bottom of the adjoining pavement slab and the soil
damage caused to the pavement by one application of subgrade.
the axle load under consideration relative to the • Their length is smaller than the dowel bars and placed
damage caused by single application of standard axle at large intervals.
load of 80 kN. 1345. During the clear, cool night followed by a hot
In this, design is governed by no. of repetitions of
sunny day, the edge and corners of slab in rigid
standard axle. pavements will
4
 Axle load  (a) wrap downward
EALF of axle load =   (b) warp upward
 Standard axle load  (c) wrap upwards and downwards
Highway Engineering 670 YCT
 (d) wrap laterally Ans. (c) : As per Westergaard's concept –
WB AE 2020 (a) Warping stress– The warping stress expressions
Ans. (b) : Warping are due to daily variation of developed by Bradhury at the interior, edge and corner
temperature, therefore the warp will turn upward as in regions, denoted as St ,St ,St in (kg/cm2) respectively
i e c
the hot sunny day the comparison which wrap the
are given below.
corners and edge of slab downward.
At day time (T1 > T2) At night time (T1 < T2) E ∝ t  C x + µC y 
Sti =  
Top – compression Top– Tensile 2  1 − µ2 
Bottom –Tensile Bottom– Compression  C E ∝ t CyE ∝ t 
Where, T1 and T2 temperature variation St e = max  x , 
 2 2 
1346. Identify the test that is NOT commonly used to
measure the strength of soil subgrade in E∝t a
St c =
highway pavement? 3 (1 − µ ) ℓ
(a) Plate bearing test
(b) California bearing ratio test Where,
(c) Triaxial compression test E = Modulus of elasticity of concrete in (kg/cm2) (3×105)
(d) Standard penertration test (
∝ = Thermal coefficient of concrete per 0C 1× 10−7 )
SSC JE 25.09.2019 (10 AM) Shift I t = Temperature difference between the top and bottom
Ans. (d) Some of Test commonly used to measure the of the slab.
strength of soil sub grade in highway pavement are– L
L
• Triaxial compression test Cx and Cy = Coefficient based on the x and y
• Plate bearing test. ℓ ℓ
• California Bearing Ratio (CBR) Test µ = Poisson's ratio of concrete (0.15)
a = Radius of contact area
• Stabilometer test
Note:- Standard penetration test is used to determine the ℓ = Radius of relative stiffness
consistency of bitumen material (At 25ºC) (b) Fricational stress (Sf)
1347. Which one of the following is/are regions WLf
Sf =
considered by the Westergaard's for the 2 × 10 4
analysis of stresses of cement concrete Where,
pavement? Sf = Frictional stress (kg/cm2)
(a) Interior of slab (b) Edge of slab W = Unit weight of concrete (2400kg/cm3)
(c) Corner of slab (d) All the other options f = Friction constant or coefficient of subgrade restraint
MH WCD 2019 L = Slab length (m)
Ans. (d) : Westergaard's for the analysis of stress of B = slab width (m)
cement concrete pavement– 1349. The thickness of road surfacing depends upon
"Westergaard develop relationship for the stress at the
interior, edge and corner regions denoted as Si, Se and (a) type of traffic (b) type of material
Sc in kg/cm2 respectively and given by the equation. (c) intensity of traffic (d) all of above
0.316P  ℓ  MH Pimpri-Chinchwad MNC 2015
Si = 4 log10   + 1.069 
h 2  b 
Ans. (d) : The Thickness of road surfacing depends on
(i) Type of material, (ii) Intensity of traffic,
0.572P  ℓ  (iii) Type of traffic
Se =  4 log10   + 0.359 
h 2
 b  The road surfacing should be Impervious, durable and
stable etc.
3P   a 2  
0.6
1350. The main advantage of concrete pavements is
Sc = 2 1 −   
h   ℓ   that
  (a) it offers less resistance to traffic
Where, (b) it is not sleepary
h = slab thickness in cm (c) low maintenance cost
P = Wheel load in kg (d) all of these
a = Radius of wheel distribution in cm MH Pimpri-Chinchwad MNC 2015
ℓ = Radius of the relative stiffness in cm Ans. (d) : The main advantage of concrete pavement-
b = Radius of the resisting section in cm • It offers less resistance to traffic
1348. As per Westergaard's concept, which one of the • It is not sleepary
following is/are type(s) of stress produced due • Low maintenance cost
to temperature in a concrete pavement? Other advantage –
(i) Warping stress (ii) Frictional stress • High strength and high bearing capacity
(a) Only (i) (b) Only (ii) concrete road are durable
(c) Both (i) & (ii) (d) Neither (i) nor (ii) • They are considerably less prone to wear and tear
MH Nagar Parishad Mains 2018 • Defect like rutting cracking, stripping, etc.
Highway Engineering 671 YCT
1351. The average daily traffic on a stretch of road is 1353. Tyre pressure influences the
300 commercial vehicles per lane per day. (a) total depth of pavement
Design traffic repetitions, for 10 years when (b) quality of surface course
vehicle damage factor is 2.5 and traffic growth (c) both the above
rate is 7% (d) none of above
(a) 3.8 msa (b) 23.5 msa MH PWD 2016
(c) 16 msa (d) 45.4 msa Ans. (b) : The influence of tyre pressure is pre
MH Pune MNC 2016 dominating in the upper layer.
Ans. (a) : Given, • At the greater depth the effect of tyre pressure
A' = 300 × (commercial vehicles per lane per day.) diminishes and total load exhibits considerable
n = 10 year influence on the vertical stress.
D.f = 2.5 • Tyre pressure of high magnitudes therefore demand
traffic growth rate (r) = 7% high quality of material in upper layers in
CBR method of pavement design by cumulative pavements.
standard axle load. • The total depth of pavement is however not
 (1 + r ) n − 1  influenced by the tyre pressure.
N s = 365A '   .DF 1354. The value of Possion's ratio in the formula of
 r  calculation of radius of relative stiffness for
 (1 + 0.07) − 1 
10 design of rigid pavement is taken as
= 365 × 300   × 2.5 (a) 0.15 (b) 1.5
 0.07  (c) 0.1 (d) 1
Ns = 3.8 msa (million standard axles) MH Nagar Parishad Mains 2018
1352. Which one of the following statements is
Ans. (a) : Radius of relative stiffness (ℓ)
correct?
(a) The ratio of load on wheel to contact area or 1/ 4
 Eh 3 
area of imprint is called as contact pressure ℓ= 
(b) The ratio of load on wheel to contact pressure 12k (1 − µ ) 
2

is called as rigidity factor

(c) The value of rigidity factor is more than three Where,
for an average tyre pressure of 7 kg/cm2 ℓ = Radius of relative stiffness, cm
(d) Rigidity factor does not depend upon the E = modulus of elasticity of cement concrete (kg/cm2)
degree of tension developed in walls of tyres µ = Poisson's ratio for concrete = 0.15
ESE 2020 h = slab thickness (cm)
Ans. (a) k = Subgrade modulus or modulus of subgrade
(i) The ratio of load on wheel to contact area or area reaction (kg/cm3)
of imprint is called as constant pressure. 1355. Which one of the following is the range of
(ii) The ratio of contact pressure to tyre pressure is specific gravity of tars?
called as rigidity factor. (a) 0.97 to 1.02 (b) 1.02 to 1.10
(iii) The value of rigidity factor is unit for an average (c) 1.10 to 1.25 (d) 1.25 to 1.50
tyre pressure of 7 kg/cm2. MH Nagar Parishad Mains 2018
(iv) Rigidity factor depends up on the degree of Ans. (c) : Specific gravity of tar = 1.10 to 1.25
tension developed in the walls of tyres. Specific gravity of bitumen = 0.97 to 1.02
The ductility of bitumen is less than that of tar.
Exam Point Tar is produced by the destructive distillation of coal
The premix methods is used for base course– or wood
Bituminous bound macadam 1356. In a rigid pavement, let the load stress,
Water Bound macadam Roads are constructed warping stress and frictional stresses are 200
with the _____ type of materials– Mpa, 250 Mpa and 10 Mpa respectively. The
Crushed stone aggregates critical combination of stresses at edge region
In Bitumen Bound Macadam roads a Bituminous (a) 440 Mpa (b) 450 Mpa
premix at the temperature is applied– 1500C (c) 460 Mpa (d) 230 Mpa
The method of design of flexible pavement as MH Nagar Parishad Mains 2018
recommended by IRC is– CBR method Ans. (c) : Critical combined stress for rigid pavement
Group index method of design of flexible at the edge–
pavement is–An empirical method based on (Load stress + warping stress + frictional stress)
physical properties of subgrade soil = 200 + 250 + 10 (MPa) = 460 MPa
In Burmister's theory displacement factor 1357. A construction joint is provided where
depends on–Ratio of modulii of elasticity of (a) bending moment is small
pavement and subgrade layers (b) shear force is small
Highway Engineering 672 YCT
 (c) the member is supported by other member Exam Point
(d) All option are correct
SSC JE 27.01.2018, 10.15 am The selection of design curve in Wyoming
Ans. (d) The construction joints are provided at method of flexible pavement design, is based
locations where the construction is stopped either at upon– Annual precipitation,
the end of the day or for any other reason. water-table, frost action
The provision of a construction joint becomes The group index method of designing flexible
necessary to ensure proper bond between the old work pavement is–
and the new one. An empirical method based on the physical
The construction joint should be located along or near the properties of the sub-grade soil
planes of the least bending moment and shear force. The California bearing ratio (CBR) method of
1358. Which of these is not a requirement of highway flexible pavement design gives an idea about–
drainage system? The quality of road making material
(a) Surface water from the carriageway and The relation between pavement layers of
shoulder should efficiency be drained off thickness t1 and t2 with elastic modulus E1 and E2
without allowing it to percolate to subgrade 1
(b) In waterlogged areas special precautions t1  E2  3
is given by- = 
should be taken, especially if detrimental salts t 2  E1 
are present
(c) Side drain should have sufficient capacity and Design of flexible pavements is based on–
longitudinal slope to carry away all the A combination of pure theory and pure
surface water collected empirical formula
(d) Highest level of ground water table should be 1361. Flexible pavements derive stability primarily
kept well above the level of subgrade from
UPPCL JE 25.02.2020 (a) aggregate interlock, particle friction and
Ans. (d) : The highest level of ground water table cohesion
above level of subgrade is not recommended in the (b) cohesion alone
design of highway in drainage system as because. (c) binding power of bituminous materials
• In the drainage system of the highways, drainage (d) flexural strength of the surface course
consists of removing or controlling surface water and ISRO TA 08.04.2018
subsurface water away from the road surface and the Ans. (a) : Flexible pavements derive stability primarily
subgrade supporting it. Part of the rain water flows on from aggregate interlock, particle friction and
the ground or road surface, while the other part cohesion.
percolates into the ground and reaches the ground • Flexible pavements are so named because the total
water table, raising its level. The subgrade soil above pavement structure deflects or flexes, under loading. A
the ground water table may raise through the soil pores flexible pavement structure is typically composed of
due to the phenomenon of capillarity. So subgrade several layers of different materials.
preparation is does as much height above the water table. • Flexible pavements derive stability primarily from
1359. The road surfacing should be aggregate interlock, particle friction and cohesion.
(a) Impervious (b) Durable 1362. The surface prepared using the local soil which
(c) Stable (d) All of these forms the bottom most layer of flexible and
SJVNL JE 07.10.2018 rigid pavement is
Nagaland PSC 2015 Paper-I (a) Wearing course (b) Sub-base
Ans. (d) : The road surfacing should be impervious, (c) Base (d) Sub grade
durable and stable. ISRO TA 28.08.2016
A paved road surface, commonly constructed of Ans. (d) : The surface prepaid using the local soil
bituminous material, should provide a durable, even which form the bottom most layer of flexible and rigid
running surface with adequate skid resistance which is
pavement is sub-grade.
able to withstand the effects of weather
1363. Which one of the following percentile speed is
1360. Los Angles testing machine is used to conduct
considered as upper safe unit for vehicles?
(a) Abrasion test (b) Impact test
(a) 15th percentile speed
(c) Attrition test (d) Crushing strength
(b) 85th percentile speed
SJVNL JE 07.10.2018
(c) 98th percentile speed
Ans. (a) : Los Angles test– Resistance to abrasion is (d) None of the above
evaluated by this method. Maharashtra JE 2018 Shift-I
• 5 to 10 kg specimen-votated at 30 to 33 rpm - 500 to
Ans. (b) : 85th percentile speed– 85th percentile speed
1000 revolutions depending on the grading of specimen.
is that speed at or below which 85% of the vehicle are
Weight of aggregate passing 1.7mm sieve
×100 passing the point on the highway or 15% of the
Total weight vehicles exceeds the speed at the spot.

Highway Engineering 673 YCT

 (a) P-1, Q-2, R-3, S-4 (b) P-2, Q-4, R-3, S-1
(c) P-4, Q-2, R-1, S-3 (d) P-3, Q-1, c-R, S-2
MP VYAPAM Sub Engg. 8.07.2017, 2.00 pm
Ans : (b)
Test property Specified value
(p) Marshall stability 340 (minimum)
(q) Flow value, 0.25 mm units 8 to 16
(r) Air voids in total mix VV% 3 to 5
(s) Voids filled with bitumen 75 to 85
VFB%
• This is known as safe speed limit
1368. The repeated application of load along the
1364. In flexible pavement analysis, it is assumed that
the load transferred through layers by : same wheel path causes cumulative
(a) Load stresses are absorbed in the top layer deformation of flexible pavement resulting in
(b) Grain to grain transfer through points of contact ________.
(c) Beam action (a) shear cracking (b) alligator cracking
(d) Slab action (c) longitudinal rut (d) reflection cracking
M.P. VYAPAM Sub Engg. 4.9.2018 9.00 am MP VYAPAM Sub Engg. 9.07.2017, 9.00 am
Ans (b) : Flexible pavements– Ans. (c) : Longitudinal ruts are formed due to
• Design is based on IRC : 37-2001. repeated application of heavy loads along the same
• It consist of a series of layers with the highest quality wheel path resulting in cumulative non-recoverable or
materials at or near the surface. permanent deformation of the pavement layers
• It reflects the deformation of sub grade and including sub grade and one or more pavement layers.
subsequent layers on the surface.
1369. Which of the following parameters due to
• Its stability depends upon aggregate interlock particle
friction and cohesion. changes in atmospheric conditions do not
• It functions by way of load distribution through the produce stresses in flexible pavements?
compound layers. (a) temperature (b) pressure
1365. Which of the following is an unmetalled road? (c) tension (d) capacity
(a) Cement concrete roads only MP VYAPAM Sub Engg. 3.04.2016, 2.00 pm
(b) Earthen roads only Ans : (a) • Due to temperature changes in atmospheric
(c) All of the above condition do not produce stresses in flexible pavements.
(d) Bituminous roads only • The vertical pavement layers transmit the vertical or
M.P. VYAPAM Sub Engg. 4.9.2018 9.00 am compressive stresses to the lower layer by grain to
Ans (b) : Earthen roads– The earthen road is the grain transfer through the points of contact in the
cheapest type of road in which the pavement structure granular structure.
is constructed totally from the soil available at the site.
It is also called the earth road. 1370. In the design of rigid pavements the flexural
• This type of road is generally found in village areas. strength of concrete represents what type of
• In this road no metal is used. factor?
1366. Who was the first person to suggest the basic (a) major (b) minor
formula for determination of pavement (c) below major (d) above minor
thickness? MP VYAPAM Sub Engg. 3.04.2016, 2.00 pm
(a) Kelly (b) Spanglar Ans : (a) Rigid pavements– Rigid pavements are
(c) Picket (d) Goldbeck those which posses note worthy flexural strength or
M.P. VYAPAM Draftsman 1.9.2018 9.00 am flexural rigidity. the stresses are not transferred from
Ans : (d) Gold beck was the first person to suggest the grain to grain to the lower layers as in the ease of
basic formula for determination of pavement thickness. flexible pavement layers. The rigid pavements are made
1367. The table below shows Marshall mix design of Portland cement concrete-either plain, reinforced or
criteria for bituminous concrete. Identify the prestressed concrete The plain cement concrete slabs
correct specified value for the test property.
are expected to take-up about 40 kg/cm2 flexural stress.
Test property Specified value
P) Marshall stability, kg 1) 75 to 85 1371. What is the purpose of conducting marshall
Q) Flow value, 0.25 mm 2) 340 (minimum) stability test?
units (a) For Bituminous mix Design
R) Air voids in total mix, 3) 3 to 5 (b) For Cement concrete pavement Design
V v% (c) For strength of subgrade
S) Voids filled with 4) 8 to 16 (d) For suitability of Bitumen
bitumen, VFB% MP VYAPAM Sub Engg. 22.02.2015
Highway Engineering 674 YCT
 Ans. (a) : Marshall stability test– Exam Point
• Applicable to hot mix-paving mixture design using A layer of dry bricks put below the foundation
penetration grade bitumen and containing aggregate concrete, in the case of soft soils, is called–
with maximum size of 2.5 cm. Soling
• Not suitable for open graded mixes and is doubtful for Concrete pavement is provided if daily traffic
course grade mixes. load per lane exceeds– 1000 tonnes
• It is a type of unconfined compressive strength test, in Most suitable material for highway
which a cylindrical specimen 10 cm and 6.3 cm height embankments is– Granular soil
is compressed radially at a constant rate of strain of 5 For all important Indian highways, rigid
cm per minute. pavements are designed for a design life of Y
• Standard temperature is 600C. years, where Y is– 30
1372. What is the minimum strength of concrete An example a rigid pavement is– Concrete road
required for Rigid pavement construction for Mud pumping is a problem occurring in which
low volume rural Roads? type of pavement– Rigid concrete roads
(a) M : 20 Mix (b) M : 25 Mix Effect of impact on the design of rigid pavement
(c) M : 30 Mix (d) M : 40 Mix is accounted for–Adopting a reduced flexural
MP VYAPAM Sub Engg. 22.02.2015 strength of concrete through a factor of safety
Ans. (c) : The minimum strength of concrete required Flexible pavement distributes the wheel load–
for rigid pavement construction for low volume rural Through a set of layer to the subgrade
For designing plain cement concrete pavement,
roads is M 30 mix.
the critical loading combination is–
• The rigid pavement made of Portland cement concrete
Load stress – frictional stress+warping stress
either plain reinforced prestressed concrete.
• The plain cement concrete slabs are expected to take 1375. Frost action creates _____ in the subgrade :
up about 40 kg/cm2 flexural stress. (a) Void (b) Rots
(c) Water pockets (d) Settlement
1373. The following is not the flexible pavement
Nagaland PSC 2015 Paper-I
failure.
(a) Alligator Cracking (b) Mud Pumping Ans. (a) : Frost action– Frost action refers to the
(c) Reflection Cracking (d) Frost Having adverse effective due to frost heave, frost melting or
thaw and the alternate cycles of freezing and thawing.
MP VYAPAM Sub Engg. 22.02.2015
• The load carrying capacity of the subgrade is
Ans. (b) : Different types of failure encountered in
considerably decreased at this stage due to the
flexible pavements are as follows–
voids created by the melted ice crystals and the
• Alligator cracking or map cracking. excessive water trapped in the thawed soil below
• Shear failure cracking the pavement.
• Reflection cracking • The soil type grain size distribution, permeability
• Frost having and capillarity of soil influence frost action.
• Formation of waves and corrugation. 1376. Name the equipment which is used to measure
• Consolidation of pavement layers (rutting) the pavement surface condition in terms of
• Major rigid pavement failure are fatigue cracking and unevenness index
mud pumping. (a) CBR apparatus
1374. The strength of the subgrade of Roads is (b) None of the above
expressed by: (c) Ring and ball apparatus
(a) Bearing capacity (d) Bump integrator
(b) Modulus of subgrade reaction M.P. VYAPAM Sub Engg. 4.9.2018, 2.00 pm
(c) C.B.R. value Ans : (d)
(d) maximum dry density at O.M.C. • Bump integrator is used to measure the pavement
MP VYAPAM Sub Engg. 22.02.2015 surface condition in terms of unevenness index.
Ans. (c) : CBR test– • Unevenness index (UI) is calculated in terms of
• A test for evaluating the stability of soil sub grade mm/km.
and other flexible pavements. • Bump integrator also known as roughometer or
• Flexible pavement thickness is determined based on automatic road unevenness recorded gives
this test. quantitative integrated evaluation.
• It may be conducted in the laboratory as well as in 1377. The slope of the road pavement in the
the filed. longitudinal direction is called
• It is an arbitrary strength test and hence cannot be (a) Alignment (b) Saddle
used to evaluated the soil properties like cohesion (c) Altitude (d) Gradient
or internal friction or shearing resistance. M.P. VYAPAM Sub Engg. 2.9.2018, 2.00 pm
Highway Engineering 675 YCT
 Ans : (d) Gradients– On the other hand, rigid pavement and flexible
• Gradients is the rate of rise or fall along the length of pavement are changeable only wearing course and
the road with respect to horizontal. other formation course.
• Expressed as '1' vertical unit to 'N' horizontal units. 1381. Maximum equivalent single wheel load as per
IRC is
• Types of gradient (a) 8160 kg (b) 2040 kg
(a) Ruling gradient (c) 4080 kg (d) 1020 kg
(b) Limiting gradient Nagaland PSC 2015 Paper-I
TSPSC Observers 2013
(c) Exceptional gradient
Ans. (c) : Design wheel load–
(d) Minimum gradient Rigid
Flexible
1378. The California bearing ratio test is a strength Type of load paveme
pavement
test for nt
Maximum legal axle load 8170 kg 10.2 t
(a) Sub-grade soil
Maximum equivalent
(b) Cement concrete 4080 kg 5.1 t
single wheel load
(c) Bituminous mixes Maximum tandem axle
14500 kg 19 t
(d) Fly ash and cement mix load
Maximum wheel load–
APPSC AE Env. & Civil Common 2016 Paper-II
• Total load influences the thickness requirements of
Ans. (a) : California bearing ratio method– pavements.
• CBR method of flexible pavement design is based on • Design of pavement is passed on 98th percentile of
strength parameter of subgrade soil and subsequent axle load.
pavement material. 1382. Dowel bars are used in concrete pavements for
• The total thickness of pavement needed to cover the (a) transfer of load from vehicle to the slab
subgrade of the known CBR value is obtained. (b) transfer of load from slab to the base course
(c) transfer of load from slab to slab
Note– This formula is applicable only when the CBR (d) transfer of load from vehicle to the subgrade
value of the subgrade soil is less than 12%. Assam Engg. College Lecturer 2021
1379. As per IRC maximum load of axle of a vehicle UKSSSC JE 19.12.2020 Afternoon
should not exceed : Ans. (c) : At the expansion joint, dowelbar are
(a) 810 kg (b) 7500 kg provided which develop bending, bearing and sharing
(c) 8170 kg (d) 7510 kg stresses and help in load transfer from slab to slab.
• Dowel bars are mild steel round bars of short length
Maharashtra PSC HOD 5.10.2014
(coated with zinc or lead based paints coated).
Ans. (c) : • The Indian road congress IRC : 37-1984
has revised the guidelines for the design of flexible Exam Point
pavements, based on the concept of cumulative The first person to suggest the basic formula for
standard axle load. determination of pavement thickness–
• As per IRC maximum load of axle of a vehicle Gold beck
should not exceed 8170 kg carried during the design Design of rigid pavements is based on–
Modulus of subgrade reaction
life of the road.
In rigid pavement stress due to corner load is
1380. A pavement is classified as flexible pavement 3P
or rigid pavement based on its. given by–
h2
(a) base course (b) wearing course The critical combination of stresses for corner
(c) sub- grade (d) sub- base region in cement concrete roads is–
TSPSC Observers 2013 Load stress + warping stress
Temperature stresses in concrete pavements may
Ans. (b) : • Pavement are classified as flexible and
cause the slab to crack. If a pavement slab cools
rigid on the basis of wearing coarse.
uniformly then the crack will develop at the
Flexible pavement– In flexible pavement wearing locations of the slab– At centre
course as binding surface of flexibility even in case of Since the moisture content at the bottom of a
rigid pavement wearing course as slab which is rigid pavement slab is generally more than at the
considered as liquid plate very low flexibility, other top–
lower layers are foundation material. The bottom of the slab is generally in tension
Highway Engineering 676 YCT
1383. The thickness of a flexible pavement as per the 1387. Interface treatment for bituminous pavement
recommendations of the IRC : 37-2012 depend construction are:
on (a) Prime coat and Tack coat
(a) Subgrade CBR, traffic volume, axle load (b) Penetration macadam and built up spray grout
spectrum and transverse distribution of axle (c) Surface dressing and seal coat
loads (d) Bituminous grouting and mastic asphalt
(b) Subgrade CBR, CBR of pavement component CG Housing Board AE Exam 2014
layers and traffic volume Ans. (a) : The interface treatment may either be a
(c) Subgrade CBR, total commercial traffic prime coat or a tack coat and a some cases, the prime
volume coat followed by a tack coat.
(d) Subgrade CBR, total traffic volume and (a) Prime coat– Bituminous prime coat is the first
rainfall application of a low viscosity liquid bituminous
Assam Engg. College Lecturer 2021 material over an existing porous or absorbent
Ans. (a) : The thickness of a flexible pavement as per pavement surface like the WBM base course.
the recommendations of the IRC : 37-2012 depend on (b) Tack coat– Bituminous tack coat is the application
subgrade CBR, traffic volume, axle load spectrum and of bituminous material over at existing pavement
transverse distribution of axle loads. surface which is relatively impervious like an existing
• CBR value is taken at 2.5 mm & 5 mm penetration in bituminous surface or a cement concrete pavement.
subgrade material CBR value should be nearly 15-19%. 1388. The surface dressing over an existing worm-out
1384. Dowel bar used in a cement concrete pavement flexible pavement if known as-
is (a) Prime coat (b) Seal coat
(a) Expansion joint (b) contraction joints (c) Tack coat (d) Grout coat
(c) warping joint (d) longitudinal joint CG PWD, NRDA JE Exam 2015
Nagaland PSC 2017 Paper-I
Ans. (b) : Seal coat–
Ans. (a) : Expansion joint–
• Seal coat is usually recommended as a top coat over
• The purpose of the expansion joint is to allow the
certain bituminous pavements which are not
expansion of the pavement due to rise in temperature
impervious.
with respect to construction temperature.
• At the expansion joint, dowel bar are provided which • Seal coat is also provided over an existing
develops bending, bearing and help in load transfer. bituminous pavement which is worn-out.
• The maximum spacing between expansion joint is • The seal coat is a very thin surface treatment or a
140 m. single coat surface dressing which is usually applied
over an existing black top surface.
1385. What are the maximum value of group index of
any material respectively? 1389. Depression of flexible pavement along the
(a) 20.0 (b) 100.0 wheel path due to repetitive traffic load
(c) 100.0 (d) 10.0 applications know as-
Nagaland PSC 2017 Paper-I (a) Faulting (b) Distortion
Ans. (a) : The group index values of soil vary in the (c) Raveling (d) Rutting
range of 0 to 20. CG Housing Board AE Exam 2014
• The higher the GI value, weaker is the soil subgrade Ans. (d) : Rutting– The depression formed in flexible
and for a constant value of traffic volume, the greater pavement along the wheel path due to repetitive traffic
would be the thickness requirement of the pavement. load is called the rutting.
1386. Dowel bars are placed in concrete pavement • Rutting occurs only on flexible pavements as
(a) Along the direction of traffic indicated by permanent deformation.
(b) Perpendicular to the direction of traffic 1390. Alligator cracking is mainly due to –
(c) Along 45º to the direction of traffic (a) Fatigue
(d) Can be placed along any direction (b) Foundation failure
Nagaland PSC 2017 Paper-I (c) Excessive bitumen
Ans. (a) : Dowel bar– (d) Bitumen deficiency
• Dowel bar provided along the longitudinal direction. (e) None of these
• Dowel bars of expansion joints are mild steel round CG Housing Board AE Exam 2014
bar of short length. Half length of this bar is bonded in Ans. (a) : Alligator cracking–
one cement concrete slab and the remaining portion is • This is the most common type of failure and occurs
embedded. due to relative movement of pavement layer materials.
• The dowel bars allow opening and closing of the • This may be caused by the repeated application of
joint, maintaining the slab edges at the same level and heavy wheel loads resulting in fatigue failure or due to
the load transference is affected from one slab to the the moisture variation resulting in swelling and
other. shrinkage of subgrade and other pavements materials.

Highway Engineering 677 YCT

1391. Temperature stresses in concrete pavements 1393. The critical stress concentration in rigid
may cause the slab to crack. If a slab cools pavement design at corner region is the
uniformly that the crack will develop at which following:
location? 1. Load stress+Warping stress+Frictional stress
(a) At center (b) Near edges 2. Load stress + Warping stress – Frictional
(c) At corners (d) All of above stress
(e) None of above 3. Load stress + Warping stress
CGPSC, AP, Lecturer Exam 2016 4. Load stress–Warping stress+Frictional stress
Ans. (d) : Temperature stresses– Temperature (a) 1, 3 (b) 4
stresses are developed in cement concrete pavement (c) 3 (d) 2
due to variation in slab temperature. CG Housing Board AE Exam 2014
• The bottom of the slab gets heated up due to heat Ans. (c) : Critical stress concentration
transfer from the top and as the atmospheric (a) Summer and mid-day (at edge) →
temperature falls, the top of the slab becomes colder Load stress + warping stress – frictional stress
resulting in warping of the slab. (b) Mid-night (At corner region) →
• Thus the daily variation in temperature causes Load stress + warping stress
warping stresses in reverse directions at the corner, (c) Winter and mid-day (at edge) →
edge and interior regions of the slab. Load stress + warping stress + frictional stress
1394. Expansion joints are provided of the length of
Exam Point concrete structure exceeds
The formula for calculating the thickness of (a) 10m (b) 15m
concrete pavements d as suggested by Goldback (c) 35m (d) 45m
Rajasthan JEn (Diploma) 2020
3w MH Aurangabad MNC 2019
is– d=
σ max SSC JE 24.01.2018 (Evening)
Critical load position in a rigid pavement design Ans. (d) : The function of an expansion joint in rigid
is taken as– pavement is to allow free expansion.
Interior loading, edge loading, corner The maximum thickness of expansion joint in rigid
The general requirement in constructing a pavement is 25 mm.
reinforced concrete road is to place a single layer Maximum spacing of expansion joint in rigid
of reinforcement– Near the top of the slab pavement range from 25–27m in jointed reinforced
In the design of rigid pavements the flexural concrete slab and from 40m (for slab < 230 mm thick)
strength of concrete represents what type of to 60m (for slabs > 230 mm thick) in unreinforced
factor– Major concrete.
Identify the items is not considered while 1395. Which one of the following is/are regions
designing rigid pavements– considered by the Westergaard for the analysis
Centre of the panel of stresses of cement concrete pavement?
1392. In context of flexible pavement design, the ratio (a) Interior of slab (b) Edge of slab
of contact pressure to tyre pressure is called (c) Corner of slab (d) All of the above
the rigidity factor. This factor is less than unity MH PWD 2019
when the tyre pressure is : Ans. (d) : Westergaard stress equation–
(a) Less than 0.56 N/mm2 (i) stress at interior loading
(b) Equal to 0.56 N/mm 2
0.316P  ℓ 
2  4 log10   + 1.069 
(c) Equal to 0.7 N/mm h 2
 b 
(d) More than 0.7 N/mm2 (ii) stress at edge loading
(e) None of the above
0.572P  ℓ 
CGPSC, AP, Lecturer Exam 2016 2  4 log10  b  + 0.359 
Ans. (d) : • Tyre pressure for the design is 0.8 MPa (8 h    
kg/cm2) in the design of rigid pavements as per IRC. (iii) stress at corner loading
3P   a 2  
0.6
contact pressure
Rigidity factor = = 1, 1 −   
tyre pressure h 2   ℓ  
 
• R.F. > 1, tyre pressure = 0.7
• R.F. < 1, tyre pressure = 0.7 1396. In a rigid pavement, let the load stress,
• R.F. = 1, tyre pressure = 0.7 warping stress and frictional stresses are 190
MPa, 260 MPa and 10 MPa respectively. The
Wheel load
Contact pressure = critical combination of stresses at edge region
Area of imprint during Winter is
Highway Engineering 678 YCT
 (a) 450 MPa (b) 460 MPa 1399. Which one of the following represents the
(c) 440 MPa (d) 470 MPa critical combination of stresses for rigid
MH PWD 2019 pavement during summer?
Ans. (b) : Combination of stress of rigid pavement in (a) (Load stress + warping stress – frictional
winter at the edge- stress)
load stress + warping stress + frictional stress (b) (Load stress + warping stress + frictional
= 190 + 260 + 10 = 460 MPa stress)
1397. Which one of the following represent the (c) (Load stress + warping stress)
critical combination of stresses for rigid (d) None of the above
pavement during winter? MH PWD 2019
(a) (Load stress + warping stress – frictional
stress) edge region Ans. (a) : Combination of stress at the edge of rigid
(b) (Load stress + warping stress + frictional pavement.
stress) edge region During summer- Load stress + warping stress–
(c) (Load stress + warping stress) corner region frictional stress.
(d) None of the above During winter- Load stress + warping stress +
MH PWD 2019 frictional stress.
MH Nagar Parishad Mains 2018 1400. Which one of the following factors affects the
Ans. (b) : • In winter season– Critical stress road user characteristics?
combination (At the edge ) (a) Physical
• Load stress + warping stress + frictional stress. (b) Mental
Stress for corner = Load stress + warping stress.
(c) Psychological & Environment
• In summer season– combination of critical stress.
(At the edge) Load stress + warping stress– frictional (d) All of the above
stress. MH WCD 2019
• Mid-night (At corner region) → Load stress + Ans. (d) : Road user characteristics– Road user
warping stress. behavior is affected by both external and internal
1398. In a district where the rainfall is heavy, major factor.
district road of WBM pavement, 3.8m wide be • The internal factor can be classified as following.
constructed. What should be the height of the (i) Physical factor –
crown with respect to edge? Temporary factors
(a) 0.058m (b) 0.068m Permanent factors
(c) 0.035m (d) None of these
(ii) Psychological factors.
MH PWD 2019
(iii) Mental factors
Ans. (a) : Pavement width = 3.8 m
for WBM road (heavy rainfall) camber – 1 in 33 The environment factor are consider as external factor
W 3.8 1401. In a rigid pavement, let the load stress,
then height of crown = = warping stress and frictional stresses are 210
2n 2 × 33
MPa, 250 MPa and 10 MPa respectively. The
3.8
= = 0.0575 ≃ 0.058m critical combination of stresses at edge region
66 during Summer is–
Exam Point (a) 450 MPa (b) 460 MPa
(c) 440 MPa (d) 470 MPa
The pressure sustained per unit deformation of MH WCD 2019
subgrade at specified deformation level using
specified plate size is termed as– Ans. (a) : combination of stress of rigid pavement in
Modulus of subgrade reaction summer .
Cement grouted pavement is classified as– At the edge–
Semi-rigid pavement Load stress + warping stress– frictional stress.
Cement concrete road can be laid over– = 210 + 250 – 10
A WBM road of thickness greater than 150 = 450 MPa
mm and subjected to traffic for 1 month 1402. As per Westergaard's concept, which one of the
Calculate the ratio of radius of the relative following is/are type (s) of stress produced due
stiffness for concrete pavements if the ratio of to temperature in a concrete pavement?
their thickness is 1.5– 1.355 (i) Warping stress
Critical load position in a rigid pavement design (ii) Frictional stress
is taken as– Interior, edge and corner loading (a) Only (i) (b) Only (ii)
Westergaard's method is used for the design of– (c) Both (i) & (ii) (d) Neither (i) nor (ii)
Rigid pavements MH WCD 2019
Highway Engineering 679 YCT
 Ans. (c) : As per Westergaard's concept (c) Semi rigid pavement
Two type of stresses are produced due to temperature (d) Both Rigid pavement and Semi rigid pavement
variation in concrete pavement. DSSSB JE 20.11.2019, Morning
(i) Warping stress–It is due to temperature difference Ans. (b) : Flexible pavements– A flexible pavement is
between the top and bottom of the pavement as a result one that is made up of one or more layers of materials, the
of daily variation in temperature at the location. highest quality material forming the top layer.
(ii) Frictional stress–It is due to over all increase or • Flexible pavements are those, which on the whole
decrease in temperature of the pavement slab as a result have low or negligible flexural strength and are rather
of seasonal variation in temperature at the location. flexible in their structural action under the loads.
1403. Which one of the following is/are different 1406. What is the minimum height of the bottom of a
methods considered in the design of flexible pavement fallowed while drawing the
pavement design? longitudinal profile of embankment in order to
(a) Group index method find its height?
(b) California bearing ratio method (a) 0.4 m (b) 0.6 m
(c) Tri-axial test method (c) 0.7 m (d) 0.5 m
(d) All the other options DSSSB JE -23.10.2019 Second Shift
MH WCD 2019 Ans. (b) : • The minimum height of the bottom of
Ans. (d) : There are three type of method to design a pavement while drawing the longitudinal profile of
flexible pavement they are – embankment existing subgrade is less than 0.60 m
• Empirical method from the HFL, the existing height of the embankment
• Semi empirical method should be raised to ensure a minimum 1.0 m clearance
• Theoretical method. of the bottom of subgrade from HFL.
• Different methods considered in the doing of • For the new road, the bottom of subgrade will be 1.0
flexible pavement design m above the HFL.
(i) CBR Method 1407. The IRC has recommended that the maximum
(ii) Group Index method spacing between expansion joints should not
(iii) Tri-axial method. exceed_______ for rough interface layer.
1404. What is the equivalent single wheel load of a (a) 200 m (b) 100 m
dual wheel assembly carrying 20, 440 N each (c) 120 m (d) 140 m
for pavement thickness of 20 cm? Center to NLC GET 24.11.2020
center spacing of tyres is 27 cm and the Ans. (d) : The IRC has recommended that the
distance between the wall of tyres is 11 cm? maximum spacing between expansion joints should not
(a) 27,600 N (b) 32,300 N exceed 140 m for rough interface layer.
(c) 40,880 N (d) 30,190 N The maximum spacing between expansion joint is 140
PHED JE Dept. (Cat -9) 2015 m. Expansion joint are provided along the transversed
Ans. (d) : Given that– direction to allow the movement of the concrete slab
P = 20440 N (Dual wheel assembly) due to temperature and subgrade moisture variation.
20440 • The maximum spacing between contraction joint is
P= = 10220 N (Single wheel assembly) taken as 4.5 m. Contraction joint are provided along the
2 transverse to take care of the contraction of concrete slab
z = 20 cm due to natural shrinkage and temperature variation.
S = 27 cm
1408. In Flexible pavement design methods,_____ is a
d = 11 cm
semi-empirical method.
From formula,
(a) Maclod method
0.301 log10  z / ( d / 2 )  (b) Triaxial test method
log10 ESWL = log10 P +
 2×s  (c) California bearing ratio test
log10   (d) Group index method
 d/2
NLC GET 24.11.2020
0.301 log10  20 / (11/ 2 )  Ans. (b) : The various ways of flexible pavement to
log10 ESWL = log10 20440 +
 2 × 27  designs are:.
log10   1. Empirical method–They are based of strength
 11/ 2 
pavement of soil design sub grade. Ex: GI method
0.16876 (Group Index), CBR method and Maclod method.
log10 ESWL = log10 20440 +
0.99203 2. Semi-Empirical Or semi theoretical method–
ESWL = 30240 N Based up on the stress strain function Eg: Triaxial
1405. Which type of pavement have low or negligible method.
flexural strength ? 3. Theoretical method–Totally depend upon the
(a) Rigid pavement theoretic analysis and mathematical calculation.
(b) Flexible pavement Eg: Burmister method.
Highway Engineering 680 YCT
1409. The pavement in which the weight of the wheel • When reinforcement is not provided, the maximum
has been transferred to sub grade and it is spacing between contraction joint is taken as 4.5 m.
called from flexural strength of pavement :
(a) Sleeve pavement
(b) Structural pavement
(c) Flexible pavement
(d) Rigid pavement
UPRVUNL JE 2014
Ans. : (d) Rigid pavement– A rigid pavement
(constructed with cement concrete slab) depends upon Exam Point
the flexible strength or beam action of the slab for with
standing the wheel load. In using the data from a plate bearing test for
• Flexural strength of concrete is major factor for design. determining the modulus of subgrade reaction,
• It distributes load over a wide area of sub grade the value of settlement to be used is– 1.25 mm
because of its rigidity and high modulus of elasticity. The minimum strength of concrete required for
1410. Function of tie member in C.C. pavements Rigid pavement construction for low volume
(a) To ensure two adjacent slabs to remain fully rural Roads– M : 30 Mix
together and not designed to act as load Reinforcement in cement concrete slab of road
transfer device pavement is placed–
(b) To ensure two adjacent slabs to remain fully In the form of welded wire mesh
together and designed to act as load transfer The general requirement in constructing a
device. reinforced concrete road is to place a single layer
(c) To ensure two adjacent slabs to remain of reinforcement– At the middle
independent and not designed to act as load The ideal pavement is constructed with–
transfer device.
Portland cement concrete
(d) To ensure two adjacent slabs to remain
independent and designed to act as load In a concrete road, when subgrade is very poor
transfer device. and the road is subjected to heavy traffic, then–
HPSSC JE CODE 552/2018 Reinforcement is provided
Ans. (a) : • Tie bars are not designed as load transfer 1413. Effect of impact on the design of a rigid
device but ensure that the two slabs remains firmly pavement is accounted by
together. Load is actually transferred to the adjacent (a) increasing the thickness as would be
slab due to aggregate interlock. calculated with static wheel load
• Their length is smaller than the length of dowel bar. (b) providing base course
1411. In a flexible pavement (c) adopting a reduced flexural strength of
(a) The vertical compressive stress is the concrete through a factor of safety
maximum at the lowest layer (d) adopting an increased stress relative to that
(b) Vertical compressive stresses decrease with produced by static wheel load
depth of the layer KPSC JE 2.7.2016
(c) Tensile stresses get developed Karnataka PSC JE Code 114/2016
(d) Maximum stress induced by a given traffic Ans. (a) : The load carrying capacity of rigid
load is dependent on the location of the load pavement is due to the rigidity and high modulus of
on the pavement surface. elasticity of the slab.
HPSSC JE CODE 552/2018 • The impact load will produce stresses higher than
Ans. (b) : • The maximum intensity of stresses occurs that by the static wheel load.
in the top layer of the pavement. 1414. Flexible pavement distribute the wheel load
• The load magnitude of load stress reduces at lower (a) directly to sub-grade
layers. Hence the superior pavement materials are used (b) through structural action
in top layers of flexible pavements. (c) through a set of layers to the sub-grade
• If function by way of load distribution through the (d) none of the above
component layer. Mizoram PSC JE (Irr.& WRD) Oct. 2018 Paper II
1412. In rigid pavements, the contraction joints MH PWD 2016
spacing is normally provided as– Ans. (c) : The wheel load acting on the pavement will
(a) 2.5 m (b) 3.5 m (c) 4.5 m (d) 5.5 m be distributed to a wider area and the stress with the
AAI (Aeronautical JE) 2015 depth.
Ans. (c) Spacing of contraction joint– • The purpose Flexible pavement layer reflect the deformation of the
of the contraction joint is to allow the contraction of the lower layers on to the surface layer.
slab due to fall in slab due to fall in slab temperature Flexible pavement distribute the wheel load through a
below the construction temperature. set of layer to the sub grade.

Highway Engineering 681 YCT

1415. Group index method of design of flexible Exam Point
pavement is
Expansion joints in cement concrete pavements
(a) a theoretical method are provided at an interval of– 18 m to 21 m
(b) an empirical method based on physical In cement concrete slabs in pavements, tie bars
properties of subgrade soil are installed in– Longitudinal joints
Joint filler used during highway construction
(c) an empirical method based on strength are– Soft wood, Impregnated fibre board
characteristics of sub grade soil The tie bars in a concrete pavement are provided
(d) a semi-empirical method in– Longitudinal joints
In rigid pavements, the contraction joints spacing
ASSAM PSC AE (PWD) 2020 is normally provided as– 4.5 m
Ans. (b) : Group index method– The objective of having tie bars in rigid
pavements–
• The GI method of pavement design is essential an
To firmly tie longitudinally adjacent slabs and
empirical method based on physical properties of the prevent opening of joints
subgrade soil. The function of an expansion joint in rigid
pavements is to– Allow free expansion
• This method does not consider the strength
1418. Construction joints are provided
characteristics of the subgrade soil and therefore is (a) where B.M. and S.F. are small
open to question regarding the reliability of the design (b) where the member is supported by other
based on the index properties of the soil only. member
(c) at 18m apart in huge structures
1416. The portion of the road surface which is used (d) All option are correct
for vehicular traffic: SSC JE 23.1.2018, Morning Shift
(a) Right of way (b) Formation Ans. (d) : Construction joints are provided for –
(c) Carriage way (d) Shoulder (a) Where BM and SF are small.
(b) Where the member is supported by other member.
KPSC JE Code 53/2015 (c) At 18m apart in large structure.
Ans. (c) : The portion of the road surface which is (d) Construction joints in columns are provided a few
used for vehicular traffic is known as carriage way. cm below the junction of beam.
(e) Construction joints in beams and slabs the joints
Width of carriage way– It is decided on the basis of
are usually located or provided at midspan on in the
capacity which depend on traffic lane and number of middle third of the span.
lanes. 1419. Pick up the correct statement from the
following
1417. Calculate the equivalent radius (cm) of the (a) Construction joints are necessarily planned
for their locations
resisting section of 20 cm slab, if the ratio of (b) Expansion joints are provided to
radius of wheel load distribution to the accommodate thermal expansion
thickness of the slab is 2. (c) Contraction joints are provided to control
(a) 20 (b) 35.6 shrinkage cracks
(d) All option are correct
(c) 40 (d) 40.9
SSC JE 23.1.2018, Morning Shift
SSC JE 22.1.2018, Morning Shift Ans. (d) : Contraction joints are necessarily planned
Ans. (c) Let the radius of wheel is 'a' and the thickness for their locations and expansion joints are provided to
of slab is 'h'. accommodate thermal expansion and contraction joints
are also provided to control the shrinkage cracks.
a
Then, = 2, a = 2h .... (i) 1420. Which instrument is used for the measurement
h
of the longitudinal coefficient of friction?
For the resisting slab of 20cm– (a) Bump integrator
∵ a > 1.724h (b) Both bump integrator and roughometer
(c) Roughometer
a > 34.48 then a = b (d) Speedometer
a = 2 × 20 SSC JE 24.1.2018, Morning Shift
Ans. (b) : For the measurement of longitudinal
a = 40 cm coefficient of friction following instruments are used–
Highway Engineering 682 YCT
 (i) Roughometer– From equation (i)/(ii)
• Roughometer is a high speed device used for 3
measuring pavement surface roughness. ℓ1 h 
=4 1
• The output is in the units of international roughness ℓ2  h2 
index (IRI)
ℓ1 4
= (1.5) = 1.355
3
Bump integrator–
• It is an automatic road unevenness recorder, an ℓ2
indigenous device developed by (RRI). 1423. The surface where two successive placements
(ii) Response type road roughness meters (RTRRM) of concrete meet are known as
(iii) Profiling devices. (a) Contraction joint
1421. Calculate the equivalent radius of the resisting (b) Expansion joint
section of 20 cm thick slab, if the ratio of the (c) Construction joint
radius of wheel load distribution to the (d) both Contraction joint and expansion joint
thickness of ------ is 0.5. SSC JE 25.01.2018, Evening Shift
(a) 8 (b) 10.16
(c) 20 (d) 23.66 Ans. (c) : The construction joints are provided at
SSC JE 25.1.2018, Morning Shift locations where the construction is stopped either at
the end of the day or for any reason. The provision of a
Ans. : (b) h = 20 cm
construction joint becomes necessary to ensure proper
a
= 0.5 (given) bond between the old work and the new one. The
h construction joints may be horizontal or vertical.
a  1424 . Identify which of the following items is not
a = 0.5×h = 0.5×20  h = 0.5 
  considered while designing rigid pavements:
a = 10 cm (a) Centre of the panel
a 1.724h (b) Edge of the panel
10 1.724h (c) Corner of the panel
Equivalent radius of resisting section (d) Dowel bar between edges
SSC JE 2011 (Morning )
b = 1.6a 2 + h 2 − 0.675h
Ans. (a) Center of panel is not considered while
where, h = slab thickness & a = radius of wheel load
designing the rigid pavements. Westergaard Analysis
distribution
gives formula for stress at edge, corner and interior.
so, b = 1.6 × 10 2 + 20 2 – 0.675 × 20 1425. In the Revised CBR design method
b = 10.1643cm recommended by the IRC (Indian Road
Congress) for the design of flexible pavement,
1422. Calculate the ratio of radius of the relative
the total thickness depends upon :
stiffness for concrete pavements if the ratio of
(a) CBR value of soil only
their thickness is 1.5.
(a) 1.106 (b) 1.355 (b) CBR value of soil and magnitude of wheel
(c) 1.837 (d) 3.375 load
SSC JE 29.01.2018, Evening Shift (c) CBR value of soil and number of commercial
vehicles per day
h
Ans. (b) Given that 1 = 1.5 (d) CBR value of soil and cumulative standard
h2 axle loads
Eh 3 Karnataka PSC JE 2017
Radius of relative stiffness (ℓ) = 4 KPSC JE 9.9.2017
12k (1− µ )
2
ESE 2017
Where, Ans. (d) : The CBR method of pavement design gives
E = modulus of elasticity of concrete. the total thickness requirement of the pavement above
a subgrade.
ℓ = Radius of relative stiffness In revised CBR method for the design of flexible
µ = poison's ratio of concrete, taken as 0.15 pavement IRC has provided charts for different CBR
h = slab thickness in which relation b/w pavement thickness and
k = modulus of subgrade reaction cumulative traffic axle is given.
In this method, the chart contains feveral curves (A,
Eh13 B, C, D, E, F, and G) which represent the different
ℓ1 = ………… (i)
12k (1 − µ 2 )
4
levels of traffic intensities. Based on this we can find
out the layers thickness.
Eh 32 1426. Design of flexible pavements is based on :
ℓ2 = ………… (ii)
12k (1 − µ 2 )
4 (a) Mathematical analysis
(b) Empirical formula
Highway Engineering 683 YCT
 (c) a compromise of pure theory and pure Ans. (c) : The California Bearing Ratio (CBR) test is
empirical formula a penetration test used to evaluate the subgrade
(d) none of these strength of roads and pavements.
MGVCL JE 2017 The results of these test are used with the curves to
Ans. (c) : Flexible pavement is designed based upon pure determine the thickness of pavement and its
theory and empirical formulas both are empirical method component layers.
• Group index This is the most widely used method for the design of
• CBR test flexible pavement.
• Modified CBR 1429. Which of the following forms the pavement
• California resistance method layer?
• Maclord method BMC TA 2019
Note:- Flexible pavements are commonly designed Or
using empirical design charts or equations taking into
The total thickness of pavement by CBR
account some of the design factors. There are also
method depends on the CBR value of
semi-empirical and theoretical design methods.
(a) base course (b) surface course
1427. According to Westergaard, the equivalent
(c) subgrade (d) all layers
radius of resisting section b is given as b =
MH PWD 2016
_____ where 'a' is the radius of wheel load
distribution and 'h' is the slab thickness. Ans. (d) :
(a) 1.6a 2 + h 2 − 0.675h when a < 1.724 'h'
(b) 1.6a 2 + h 2 − 0.625h when a < 1.724 'h'
(c) 1.6a 2 + h 2 − 0.675h when a > 1.724 'h'
(d) 1.6a 2 + h 2 − 0.625h when a > 1.724 'h'
UPRVUNL JE 2019
Ans. (a) : Equivalent Radius of resisting section (b)
b = 1.6a 2 + h 2 − 0.675 h
(a) a < 1.724 h
(b) b = a, when a> 1.724 h
where, a = Radius of contact (cm) CBR value depend on base course, surface course and
h = slab thickness (cm) sub grade in pavement thickness. CBR value used for
Exam Point the evaluation of sub-grade strength of road and
To transfer wheel load at expansion joints from pavement .
one slab to the other– Dowel bars are used Flexible Pavement : Flexible pavements are those,
Expansion joints in cement concrete pavements which on the whole have low or negligible flexural
provided at an interval of– 20m to 30m strength and are rather flexible in the structural action
The maximum thickness of expansion joint in under the loads.
rigid pavements is– 25 mm
The objective of having tie bars in rigid
pavements– To firmly tie longitudinally
adjacent slabs and prevent opening of joints
In the design of highways, expansion and
contraction joints should respectively be
provided at– 50m and 10m Rigid Pavement : Rigid pavements are those
The longitudinal joints are provided when the which posses note worthy flexural strength or flexural
width of road is more than– 4.5 m rigidity.
The joints, parallel to the centre-line of the road, The stresses are not transferred from grain to grain to
are called– Longitudinal joints the lower layers as in the case of flexible pavement
layers.
The longitudinal joint in concrete pavements, as
The rigid pavements are made of port land cement
recommended by IRC, is of– Butt type
concrete either plain, reinforced or prestressed
1428. Which of the following affects the pavement concrete. The plain cement concrete slabs are expected
thickness design? to take-up about 40 kg/cm2 flexural stress.
(a) Ground Water Table
(b) Non-motorized traffic
(c) Subgrade CBR
(d) Design Speed of vehicles
BMC TA 2019
Highway Engineering 684 YCT
1430. Thickness of a pavement may be reduced Ans. (a) : Subgrade Soil Layer:- A pavement may be
considerably by constructed in a number of layers and the top layer has
(a) compaction of soil to be of the best quality to sustain maximum
(b) stabilisation of soil compressive stress, in addition, to wear and tear. The
(c) drainage of soil lower layers will experience the lesser magnitude of
(d) combination of all the above stress and low-quality material can be used.
HESCOM AE 2017 ∴ The top of the ground on which foundation of road
rests is subgrade.
Ans. (d) : Thickness of a pavement may be reduced
considerably by compaction of soil stabilization of soil
and drainage of soil.
1431. Generally the thickness of asphaltic concrete
adopted is–
(a) 2 cm (b) 3 cm
(c) 4 cm (d) None of these
Punjab JE (Local Govt.) 2014 1434. The load carrying capacity of cement concrete
MH Parbhani MNC 2015 pavement is mainly due to :-
(a) Beam action
Ans. (c) : Bituminous Concrete or Asphalt
(b) Grain to grain transfer action
concrete– Bituminous concrete or Asphaltic Concrete
(c) Slab action
(AC) is a dense graded premixed bituminous mix (d) Elasticity action
which is well compacted to form a high quality Mizoram PSC JE (PWD) Nov, 2018 Paper-II
pavement surface course. The AC consists of a Ans. (c) : • Rigid pavement transfer the load through
carefully proportioned mixture of coarse aggregates, slab action but not grain to grain as in case of flexible
fine aggregates, mineral filler and bitumen and the mix pavement.
is designed by an appropriate method such as the 1435. Which of the following is not considered to
Marshall method to fulfil the requirements of stability, contribute in the structural strength of
density, flexibility and voids. The thickness of pavement :
bituminous concrete surface course layer usually (a) DBM (b) OPMC
ranges from 40 to 75 mm. The IRC has provided (c) BC (d) BM
specification for 40 mm thick AC surface course for Mizoram PSC JE (PWD) Nov, 2018 Paper-II
highway pavements. Ans. (b) : Dense graded Bitumen Mixed for pavement-
1432. The function of an expansion joint in rigid (a) DBM → Dense Bitumen Macadam
pavement is to : (b) BC → Bituminous Concrete
(a) allow free expansion Three open graded mixed types are employed as the
(b) relive warping stresses base mixes. They are,
(c) relive shrinkage stresses (1) ATPB - Asphalt treated permeable base
(d) resist stress due to expansion (2) BM - Bituminous Macadam
Gujarat Electric Board 2017 (3) BUSG - Built of spray grout
Mizoram PSC JE (Irr.& WRD) Oct. 2018 Paper II 1436. The normal thickness of Bituminous Concrete
Mizoram PSC/ (PWD) 2020 Paper-III (BC) layer is
Ans. (a) : Expansion Joint– An expansion joint is (a) 100 mm (b) 75 mm
placed at a specific location to allow the pavement to (c) 30 mm (d) 60 mm
expand without damaging adjacent structures or the MESCOM AE 2017
pavement itself. Ans. (c) : The normal thickness of bituminous
Longitudinal joints– Longitudinal joints are used to concrete (BC) layer is 30 mm.
relive warping stresses and are generally needed when Bituminous Concrete or Asphalt concrete–
slap widths exceed (4.5m). To aid load transfer, tie Bituminous concrete or Asphaltic Concrete (AC) is a
bars are after used across longitudinal joints. dense graded premixed bituminous mix which is well
compacted to form a high quality pavement surface
1433. The top of the ground on which the foundation
course. The AC consists of a carefully proportioned
of road rests, is called:
mixture of coarse aggregates, fine aggregates, mineral
(a) subgrade (b) soiling
filler and bitumen and the mix is designed by an
(c) base (d) wearing course
appropriate method such as the Marshall method to
PSSSB JE 22.11.2015
fulfil the requirements of stability, density, flexibility
MPPEB SE/Draftsman 4.4.2016, Morning
SJVNL JE 07.10.2018 and voids. The thickness of bituminous concrete
KMC 2007 surface course layer usually ranges from 40 to 75 mm.
WBPSC SAE 2000 The IRC has provided specification for 40 mm thick
WBPSC JE 2005 AC surface course for highway pavements.
Highway Engineering 685 YCT
 Exam Point 1439. As per IRC, the theoretical compacted
thickness of an Water Bound Macadam layer is
The maximum spacing of contraction joints in always in multiples of
rigid pavements is– 4.5 m (a) 6.00 cm (b) 6.50 cm
The transverse joint may be a– Expansion joint, (c) 7.00 cm (d) 7.50 cm
contraction joint, warping joint Mizoram PSC JE (PHE&PWD) Apr. 2016 Paper-II
The bars in longitudinal joints in concrete Ans. (d) : Thickness of courses–
pavements– Prevent abutting slabs from
• The water bound macadam is constructed by
separating along the longitudinal joint
spreading loose metal which gives a consolidated
The dowel bars are used in rigid pavements for–
thickness of 75 mm to 100 mm.
Transferring load from one portion to
another • A compacted layer less than 75 mm thickness is not
For sandy soils, the most common method of soil desirable and a compacted layer more than 100 mm is
stabilization is– Mechanical stabilization equally undesirable.
The basic action involved in sheepfoot rolling • If thickness of the base is more than the above value
is– kneading the construction is done multiple layers.
The terrain may be classified as rolling terrain if 1440. This layer is also known as ‘Drainage Layer’ in
the cross slope of the land is– modern flexible pavement construction.
Between 10% and 25% Identify the layer.
1437. Los Angels Abrasion (LAA) test is conducted (a) Sub-grade (b) Granular Sub-base
on this layer in flexible pavement construction. (c) Wet Mix Macadam (d) Mix Seal Surfacing
Identify the layer. Mizoram PSC JE (PHE&PWD) Apr. 2016 Paper-II
(a) Sub-grade (b) Granular Sub-base Ans. (b) : Granular sub-base–
(c) Wet Mix Macadam (d) Sand Seal Coat • Laying and compacting well-graded material on
Mizoram PSC JE (PHE&PWD) Apr. 2016 Paper-II prepared sub-grade.
Ans. (b) : Los Angels Abrasion (LAA) test is • Material shall be laid in one or more layers.
conducted on sub base and base coarse in flexible • The material to be used for the work shall be natural
pavement constructive. sand, moorum, gravel, crushed stone.
• Sub base and base coarse are broken stone • only crushed stone to be used in Mumbai region.
aggregates.
1441. The thickness of road surfacing depends upon
• These granular courses are used under flexible
the
pavements primarily to improve load supporting
(a) Type of traffic and intensity of traffic
capacity by distribution of load through a finite
(b) Type of material, type of traffic and intensity
thickness.
of traffic
• The LAA, value of good aggregates for high
(c) Type of material and intensity of traffic
quality pavement materials should be less than 30%
(d) Temperature and humidity
flower for should be less than 30% flower for base
course in WBM it may be 50% . MANIPUR AE PAPER-II 2016
1438. Sand Replacement method is adopted for Ans. (b) : The thickness of road surfacing depends
testing WMM layer in a flexible pavement upon the–
construction work in progress. What (i) Type of material
properties of the WMM layer is being tested? (ii) Type of traffic and
(a) California Bearing Ratio (iii) Intensity of traffic
(b) Aggregate Impact Value 1442. All the specifications for highway planning and
(c) Gradation design are given by-
(d) Field Density (a) IRC (b) CRRI
Mizoram PSC JE (PHE&PWD) Apr. 2016 Paper-II (c) MVA (d) HRB
Ans. (d) : WMM (Wet mix mecadam) – SSC JE 2019 (Evening)
• Thickness of single compacted wet mix macadam Ans. (a)
layer shall not be less than 75 mm. The Indian Roads Congress (IRC) is the Apex
• Coarse aggregate shall be crushed stone. Body of Highway Engineers in the country. The
• Laying and compacting clean, crushed, graded IRC was set up in December 1934. On the
aggregate and granular material, premixed with water recommendation of the Indian Road Development
to a dense mass on prepared sub-grade or existing Committee best known as Jayakar Committee set
pavement. up by the Govt. of India with the objective of Road
Note:- Sand replacement method is conducted for Development in India.
WMM layer in flexible pavement to fined out field All the specifications for highway planning and
density. design are given by IRC.

Highway Engineering 686 YCT

 HRB– Highway Research Board was set up in 1446. In a rigid pavement, let the load stress,
October, 1973 under the auspices of the IRC for warping stress and frictional stresses are 210
giving undivided attention to research and MPa, 260 MPa and 10 MPa respectively. The
development activities. critical combination of stresses at edge region
CRRI– The Central Road Research Institute Delhi during Summer is–
in 1950. It is an organ of the council of scientific (a) 450 MPa (b) 460 MPa
and industrial research. (c) 440 MPa (d) 480 MPa
1443. Which of the following is the function of the MH WCD 2019
sub base layer in the pavement? Ans. (b) : Combination of stress if rigid pavement in
(a) To provide skid resistance surface summer at the edge– traffic stress + warping stress –
(b) To minimize the damging effect of frost frictional stress
action = 210 + 260 – 10
(c) To provide a smooth and uniform surface for = 460 MPa
riding
1447. In a rigid pavement, let the load stress,
(d) To resist the abrasive forces of traffic
warping stress and frictional stresses are 225
SSC JE 23.09.2019 (Morning)
MPa, 275 MPa and 15 MPa respectively. The
Ans. (b) : The AASHTO Guide for design of critical combination of stresses at edge region
pavement structures (AASHTO 1993 : I–21) defines a during Summer is
sub-base as "one or more compacted layers of granular (a) 450 MPa (b) 475 MPa
or stabilized material" between the subgrade and (c) 485 MPa (d) 515 MPa
concrete pavement slab. The function of the sub-base MH WCD 2019
layer in the pavement–
Ans. (c) : Critical stress combination in summer (rigid
• To minimize the damaging effects of frost action. pavement) at edge – traffic stress + warping stress–
• To provide uniform, stable and permanent support. frictional stress.
• To increase the modulus of subgrade reaction = 225 + 275 – 15 = 485 MPa
• To prevent pumping of fine-grained soils at joints, 1448. The life of a bitumen road having average
cracks and edges of the rigid slab. traffic of 1200 tonnes per day, may be expected
• To provide a working platform for construction to be–
equipment. (a) 1 year (b) 2-5 years
1444. In a rigid pavement, let the load stress, (c) 5-7 years (d) None of these
warping stress and frictional stresses are 210 MH Parbhani MNC 2015
MPa, 250 MPa and 10 MPa respectively. The Ans. (d) : The life of a bitumen road having average
critical combination of stresses at edge region traffic of 1200 tonnes per day, may be expected to be
during Winter is– 10-15 year.
(a) 450 MPa (b) 460 MPa If a cement concrete road is properly constructed and
(c) 440 MPa (d) 470 MPa maintained, then its expected life will be 30 to 40 year.
MH WCD 2019 1449. Which of the following is an unmetalled road?
Ans. (d) : Combination of stress of rigid pavement in (a) Cement concrete roads only
winter at the edge– (b) Earthen roads only
= traffic stress + warping stress + frictional stress (c) All of the above
= 210 + 250 + 10 = 470 MPa (d) Bituminous roads only
1445. Which one of the following is/are typical rigid RRB JE Mumbai : 04.01. 2015
pavement failure? Ans. (b) : • Earthen roads is an unmetalled roads.
(a) Scaling of cement concrete • Unmetalled roads, also known as gravel roads, are
(b) Shrinkage cracks rough and can sustain less weight.
(c) Spalling of joints
• Road surfaces are frequently marked to guide traffic.
(d) All of the above
• Unmetalled roads are made in the absence of cement
MH WCD 2019
and concrete and sometimes made even of sand and
Ans. (d) : Type of typical in Rigid pavement - laid as extended roads.
The following 5 form of failure are commonly 1450. Which type of stresses develop in cement
found in rigid pavement– concrete pavement due to temperature?
(i) Scaling of cement concrete (a) Frictional stresses
(ii) Shrinkage crack (b) Warping stresses
(iii) Spalling (c) Warping stress and frictional stress
(vi) Warping crack (d) No stress develops due to temperature
(v) Mud Pumping LMRC AM 2019
Highway Engineering 687 YCT
Ans. (c) Due to variation in slab temperature warping (c) compaction factor
stress and frictional stress develop in cement concrete (d) vehicle density factor
pavement. DSSSB JE 5.11.2019, Morning
1451. Which of the following standards helps design LMRC AM 2019
flexible pavements? Contact pressure
(a) IRC 81 (b) IRC 58 Ans. (a) : • Rigidity factor =
(c) IRC 16 (d) IRC 37 Type pressure
LMRC AM 2019 • The value of rigidity factor is 1 for an average tyre
Ans. (d) IRC 37 Standards helps design flexible pavements. pressure of 7 kg/cm2.
1452. The Thickness of 'Domer' laid (Roads)- • This value is higher than unity for lower tyre
layer in 'Bitumen' Roads is - pressures and less than unity for tyre pressure higher
(a) 5 to 10 cm (b) 2 to 3 cm than 7 kg/cm2.
(c) 1 to 2 cm (d) 0.5 to 1.0 cm • Rigidity factor depends upon degree of tension
UPSSSC JE 2015 Paper-I development in the walls of the tyres.
Ans. : (b) The thickness of domer laid (Roads) layer 1455. When the sub-grade is of poor quality, a layer
in bitumen roads is 2 to 3 cm. of granular material is placed above the sub-
grade and is known as:
Exam Point (a) Wearing course (b) Base course
The following is considered to be the highest (c) Base coat (d) Sub-base
quality construction in the group of black-top WBPSC SAE 2000
roads– Bituminous concrete Ans. (d) : Sub-base Course– The layer between
The following is used in a regular pavement the base course and subgrade. It functions primarily as
maintenance activity– Fog seal structural support but it can also minimize the intrusion
Alligator or map cracking is the common type of of fines from the subgrade into the pavement structure
failure in– Bituminous surfacing and improve drainage.
Bituminous surfacing done on already existing The sub-base generally consists of
impervious pavement, is known as– Tack coat lower quality materials than the base course but better
As per Indian Road Congress the slope of earth than the subgrade soils. A sub-base course is not
in cutting should be– 1:1 always needed or used. Sub-base course are generally
In pavement design considerations, the constructed out of crushed aggregate fill.
maximum width of the vehicle is usually fixed Base Course– The layer immediately beneath
and followed. The vehicle width affects all of the the surface course. It provides additional load
following except– Drainage layer distribution and contributes to drainage. Base course
The tests are conducted on the coarse aggregates are usually constructed out of crushed aggregate.
for Road Construction– 1456. For a poorly graded sub-graded soil, thickness
Bitumen Adhesion test, Abrasion test of sub-base is:
1453. For the construction of water bound macadam (a) 15 cm (b) 20 cm
roads, the correct sequence of operation after (c) 25 cm (d) 30 cm
spreading coarse aggregates is WBPSC SAE 2000
(a) Dry rolling, wet rolling, application of Ans. (d) : • For a poorly graded sub-graded soil,
screening and application of filler thickness of sub-base is 30 cm.
(b) Dry rolling, application of filler wet rolling,
and application of screening
(c) Dry rolling, application of screening, wet
rolling, and application of filler
(d) Dry rolling, application of screening,
application of filler and wet rolling
JKSSB JE 2013
Ans. (c) : In WBM mainly stone dust is used as
binding material.
• In WBM the voids are filled with screening and
binding material with the assistance of water.
• WBM is the sub-base layer of flexible pavement.
• Thickness of each compacted layer of WBM ranges 1457. The minimum thickness of base of a flexible
from 10.0 cm to 7.5 cm (descending on size of pavement is
aggregate and gradation). (a) 10 cm (b) 15 cm
1454. The ratio of contact pressure to tyre pressure is (c) 20 cm (d) 25 cm
called the : ASSAM PSC AE (PWD) 2020
(a) rigidity factor HSSC PWD JE DEPT. (CAT-7) 2015
(b) friction factor WBPSC SAE 2000

Highway Engineering 688 YCT

 Ans. (a) : The minimum thickness of base of a flexible Exam Point
pavement is 10 cm. The height of the dowel above the road level
• Flexible pavement are those, which on the whole should not be more than– 30 cm
have low or negligible flexural strength and are rather Indicating works left in excavated trenches to
flexible in their structural action under the loads. facilitate the measurement of borrow pits are
known as– Tell–tale
1458. The longitudinal joint in concrete pavements, The major cause of flexible pavement failure by
as recommended by IRC, is of : frost having– Presence of groundwater and
(a) Butt type (b) Weakened plane type Climatic condition
(c) Hinged type (d) Tongue and groove type As per IRC : 73-1980 (Rural Highway), the
UKSSSC JE 20.12.2020 Evening Roadway width of the Major District Roads, for
WBPSC SAE 2003
single lane and two-lane roads in plain and
rolling terrain shall be– 9m
Ans. (a) : In the longitudinal joints tie bars are Slip form Paver is an equipment used for
provided to hold the adjacent slabs together. IRC constructing– Pavements
recommends to use plain butt with tie bar type of The stability of sub-grade in a pavement is
joints. influenced by– Water contact
A butt joint is the simplest longitudinal joint and is When bitumen is allowed to fill in the full depth
formed by painting the joint faces with bitumen. the tie of the stone layer, it is called– Full grout
bars are also placed in the type of butt joint with tie bar. 1461. In case of flexible pavements the design guide is:
Recommended size and spacing of tie bars are as follows: (a) C.B.R.
(b) Strength of concrete
1459. The natural soil on which the pavement rests (c) Poisson's ratio
and to which the entire load of structure is (d) Modulus of elasticity of concrete
ultimately transferred is known as: WBPSC SAE 2003
(a) Base of road (b) Sub base of road Ans. (a) : Method of flexible pavement design–
(c) Sub-grade of road (d) Lining of road • Group index method
WBPSC SAE 2003 • C.B.R. method
• California resistance value method
Ans. (c) : Soil subgrade– It is a layer of natural soil • Triaxial method
the loads on pavement are ultimately received by the • MC load method
soil subgrade. At least 50 cm layer of the subgrade soil • Burmister method (Layered system)
is well compacted at optimum moisture content and 1462. The transverse joints constructed to allow for
maximum dry density. shrinkage of the road slab due to decrease in
• Common tests which are used to evaluate the temperature is known as:
strength of soil subgrade are : (a) construction joint (b) longitudinal joint
(c) contraction joint (d) warping joint
(a) California bearing ratio test WBPSC SAE 2001
(b) California resistance value test Ans. (c) : Contraction joint– The purpose of the
(c) Plate bearing test contraction joint is to allow the contraction of the slab
(d) Triaxial compression test due to face in slab temperature below the construction
temperature. If joints are placed at suitable intervals
1460. Cement-grouted pavement is classified as :
transversely, the appearance of cracks at place other
(a) Rigid pavement than the joints can be climinated.
(b) Semi-rigid pavement 1463. In water bound macadam, the best
(c) Flexible pavement consolidation is achieved when the ratio of
(d) Reinforced pavement coarse aggregate and fine aggregate is:
WBPSC SAE 2003 (a) 60 : 40 (b) 67 : 33
(c) 75 : 25 (d) 80 : 20
Ans. (b) : Semi rigid pavement– WBPSC SAE 2001
• A semi-rigid pavement is the intermediate stage Ans. (a) : • In water bound macadam, the best
between the flexible and the rigid types. consolidation is achieved when the ratio of coarse
• It derives strength by both load-spreading and aggregate and fine aggregate is 60 : 40.
flexural action. • As per IRC recommendation the range of camber of
water bound macadam is (2.5% to 3%).
• If the sub-base coarse and base coarse of a flexible
• The road whose wearing coarse consists of clean
pavement it replace by pozzolanic concrete then crushed aggregates, mechanically interlocked by
pavement it is called semi-rigid pavement. rolling and bound together with filler material and
Rigid pavement > Semi rigid pavement > flexible water laid on a well compacted base coarse, is called
pavement water bound macadam.
Highway Engineering 689 YCT
1464. Better drainage condition of the sub-grade is (i) Jointed plain concrete pavement (JPCP)
ensured through: (ii) Jointed reinforced concrete pavement (JRCP)
(a) Sandy soils (b) Silty soils (iii) Continuous reinforced concrete pavement (CRCP)
(c) Clayey Soils (d) Clayey silty soils (iv) Pre-stressed concrete pavement (PCB)
WBPSC SAE 2002 1468. Lack of stability in sub-base or base course in
Ans. (a) : • Better drainage condition of the sub grade pavements results primarily from:
is ensured through sandy soils. (a) Pore water pressure
• Sub surface drainage is concerned with removing (b) Formation of dust
water that percolates through or is contained in the (c) Poor mix proportioning/inadequate thickness
underlying sub-grade. (d) Shear failure
• In sub-surface drainage it is practiced to keep the MP Sub Engineer 2020
variation of moisture in sub-grade to a minimum. Ans. (c) : Instability of base and sub-base coarse of
1465. Given figure represents which type of pavements is due to poor mix proportion and
bituminous road : inadequate thickness of pavement.
1469. Which one of following causes raveling in
bituminous pavement ?
(a) Use of soft bitumen
(b) Excessive bitumen content
(c) Low bitumen content
(A) Bituminous macadam road (d) Use of Open graded aggregates
(B) Bituminous full grouted macadam road HPSSC JE 396/2018
(C) Bituminous concrete Ans. (d) : The removal of materials from base course
(D) Bituminous sheet asphalt is called raveling the loss of base course materials is
MPPEB SE/Draftsman 4.4.2016, Morning
only possible when either the base course is not
Ans. (a) Bituminous macadam– covered by a wearing course or the wearing course has
• Bituminous macadam consists of aggregate and completely worn out.
appropriate binder, mixed in a hot mix plant • Due to the fast moving vehicles plying on road, there
• It is an open graded mixture suitable for base course is a suction caused between the exposed base course
and is laid in a single course. material and pneumatic tyres. This causes removal of
1466. If the temperature of bitumen at the surface of binding material in WBM base and the stone
a road rises, its viscosity reduces. This reduced aggregates are left in a loose state. Thus, in such a state
viscosity allows the bitumen to creep up the if the stone aggregates are open graded, they cause
surface of any water droplets which fall on the raveling.
surface and cause?
(a) Film Rupture (b) Detachment 1470. Generally, CBR test is a penetration test meant
(c) Blistering (d) Pitting for the evaluation of subgrade strength of
PGCIL JE CE 17.12.2020 roads and pavements. What is the full form of
CBR?
Ans. (d) : • If the temperature of bitumen at the
(a) Circumferential Ballasted Road
surface of a road rises, its viscosity reduces. This
(b) California Bearing Road
reduced viscosity allows the bitumen to creep up the
surface of any water droplets which fall on the surface (c) Circumferential Bearing Ratio
and cause pitting. (d) California Bearing Ratio
• When temperature of bitumen at the surface of road BSPHCL29.01.2019 Shift-I
increases, viscosity decreases then allow the bitumen Ans. (d) : CBR (California bearing ratio)– This
to creep up to surface of water drops is called method is based on the strength parameters of
blistering. subgrade soil and subsequent pavement materials. In
1467. Which of the following is NOT a rigid this method, first the soaked CBR values of the soil
pavement type? subgrade is calculated.
(a) Jointed reinforced concrete pavement (JRCP) 1471. California Bearing Ratio method of designing
(b) Mortar Pavement (MP) flexible pavements is more accurate as it
(c) Jointed plain concrete pavement (JPCP) involves
(d) Pre-stressed concrete pavement (P CP) (a) character of the road making materials
MP Sub Engineer 2020 (b) characteristics of soil
Ans. (b) : Rigid pavements : Rigid pavement is (c) traffic intensities
constructed of portland cement concrete slabs resting (d) none of the above
on a prepared sub-base of granular material or directly Mizoram PSC 26.03.2010 Paper-II
on a granular subgrade. Load is transmitted through Ans. (a) : California bearing ratio method of designing
slab action. flexible pavements is more accurate is it involves
Rigid pavement can be classified into full types. character of the road making materials.

Highway Engineering 690 YCT

1472. The following road pavement is called Ans. (c) : Given,
Load stress = 24 kg/cm2
Warping stresses = 30 kg/cm2
Frictional stress = 25.5 kg/cm2
Critical stresses combination = 24 + 30 – 25.5
= 28.5 kg/cm2

Exam Point
(a) Flexible pavement Which is not considered as a commercial vehicle
(b) Rigid pavement in traffic surveys–
(c) Semi rigid pavement Tractor with axle load less than 3.5 tons
(d) Composite pavement The value of rigidity factor for design purpose, if
Mizoram PSC 26.03.2010 Paper-II the tyre pressure is greater than 0.7 MPa is–
Ans. (b) : Rigid pavements are constructed of Portland Less than 1
cement concrete slabs resting on a prepared sub base The width of carriageway for multi–lane
of granular material or directly on a granular subgrade. pavements as recommended by the Indian Roads
1473. Surface dressing applied to bituminous Congress is– 3.5 m per lane
pavement is used for Minimum recommended road width in case of
(a) wearing course of new bituminous pavement national highway is– 45 m
(b) repair of existing wearing course of The minimum land width required for National
bituminous pavement and State Highway in built-up-area should be–
(c) seal coat of existing old bituminous pavement 45, 30 m
(d) seal coat to new bituminous pavement If 'W' is the wheel load and 'σ' is the unit stress
WBPSC SAE 2000 in tension, then the thickness of concrete
Ans. (b) : Surface dressing applied to bituminous 3W
pavement is used for repair of existing wearing course pavement (t) is given by– t=
σ
of bituminous pavement.
1474. Tyre pressure influences the : 1477. The type of highway pavements which
(a) Total depth of pavement have very high flexural strength, is:
(b) Quality of surface course (a) Rigid pavements
(c) Both of the above (b) Semi rigid pavements
(d) None of the above (c) Flexible pavements
Kerala PSC Poly. Lect 2016 (d) Water bound Macadam roads
Ans. (b) : Tyre pressure influences the quality of UKSSSC JE 20.12.2020 Morning
surface course and contract pressure influences the Ans. (a) : Rigid pavements have very high flexural
total depth of pavement. strength as compared to flexible pavements.
1475. The joint, parallel to center line of the concrete 1478. Which of the following strengths is most
road, are called important for pavement concrete?
(a) Longitudinal joint (b) Transverse joint (a) Shear (b) Flexural
(c) Expansion joint (d) All of these (c) Tensile (d) compressive
Karnataka PSC JE Code 126/2018 DDA 24.04.2018 Shift-I
KPSC JE 13.11.2016 Ans. (b) : Flexural strengths is most important of
Ans. (a) : Longitudinal joint– pavement concrete.
• Longitudinal joints are provided along the length of Flexural strength–
pavements. • Flexural strength of concrete is major factor for
• It reduces the warping stress. design pavement
• We generally provided tie bars at the longitudinal • It distributes load over a wide area of sub grade
joint.
because of its rigidity and high modulus of elasticity
• The normal width of slab is generally 3 to 5 m.
• Design is based on IRC : 58-2002
• Here it is assumed that the upward reaction is
proportional to the deflection. • Flexural (fcr) strength = 0.7 f ck
2
1476. If the load stresses are 24 kg/cm , warping fcr is the compressive characteristics compressive
2
stresses are 30 kg/cm2 and frictional stresses strength of concrete in N/mm
2
are 25.5 kg/cm , then what would be the value 1479. Structures in which marked changes in plan
of critical stresses combination (in kg/cm2) at dimensions take place abruptly shall be
edge region during summer mid-day ? provided with:
(a) 24 (b) 54 (a) Contraction joint (b) Infiltration stresses
(c) 28.5 (d) 57 (c) Expansion joint (d) Dowel bars
HPSSC JE Code 386/2018 DDA JE 24.04.2018 Shift-II
Highway Engineering 691 YCT
 Ans. (c) : Expansion joint– 1483. The pavement which can resist tensile stresses
• Structure in which marked changes in plan and having very little resistance to deformation
dimensions take place abruptly shall be provided with under the wheel load
expansion on joints at the section where such changes (a) Flexible pavement (b) WBM pavement
occur. (c) Shoulder pavement (d) Rigid pavement
• Expansion joint shall be provided that the necessary KPSC Overseer/Draftsman 2020
movement occurs with a minimum resistance at the Ans. (d) : Rigid Pavement–Rigid pavement are those
joint. which posses note worthy flexural strength or flexural
• Normally structures exceeding 45 m in length are rigidity. The stresses are not transferred from grain to
designed with one or more expansion joints. the lower layers as in the ease of flexible pavement
1480. In highway pavement emulsion are mainly layers. The rigidity pavements are made of Portland
used in cement concrete-either plain reinforced or pre-stressed
(a) Surface dressing concrete. The plain cement concrete slabs are expected
(b) Patching and maintenance to take-up about 40 kg/cm2 flexural stress.
(c) bitumen macadam
(d) asphalt concrete
Nagaland PSC CTSE 2017 Paper-I
Ans. (b) : Emulsions are used in bituminous road
constructions more specifically in maintenance and
patch repair work. Emulsion can be used in wet 1484. To prevent the development of excessive
weather even when it is raining. compressive stress in the concrete pavement as
1481. Dowel bar used in a cement concrete pavement a result of expansion caused by increase in
material should not be less than temperature, the type of transverse joint
(a) 10% (b) 20% provided is
(c) 30% (d) 40% (a) Construction joint (b) Expansion joint
Nagaland PSC CTSE 2017 Paper-I (c) Contraction joint (d) All of the above
Ans. (d) : Dowel bar– Dowel bars are provided in the WBPSC JE 2005
direction of the traffic (longitudinal). Half length of Ans. (b) : To prevent the development of excessive
this bar is bonded in one cement concrete slab and the compressing stress in the concrete pavement as a
remaining portion is embedded in adjacent slab, but is result of expansion caused by increase in temperature
kept free for the movement during expansion and provided the expansion joint.
contraction of the slab.
Design specification of dowel bars– Exam Point
• Maximum load transferred through dowel basis 40% The value of group index of a soil varies from–
of maximum axle load. 0 to 20
• Dowel bars are not provided for the slab thickness According to Sheets' formula, the thickness of
less than 150 mm.
2.4WC
• Generally length of dowel bar provided is 0.5 whose slab (t) is given by– t=
diameter is 25 mm. σ
• Spacing of dowel bar is of the order of 200 mm for The effect of curvature is to make the objects
150 mm thick slab and 300 mm for 200 mm thick slab appear– Lower than they really
and 300 for 200 mm thick slab. The reduction in load carrying capacity at a
• Minimum dowel length = Ld + ∆ gradient of 1 in 20 is– 10%
The number of repetitions, which the pavement
1482. The circular isolated depression formed on a
thickness designed for a given wheel load should
road surface
(a) Corrugation (b) Deformation be able to support during the life of pavement is–
(c) Pot holes (d) Borrow pit 1000000
Rigidity factor for a tyre pressure less than
KPSC Overseer, Gr-II, Irri. Dept. (code 24/2017)
7kg/cm2 is– Greater than 1
KPSC Overseer (Irrigation) 2017
The CBR pavement design curves give–
Ans. (c) : • A pot hole is a depression in a road Thickness of the layer
surface, usually asphalt pavement, where traffic has The rout along which amount of work required
removed broken pieces of the pavement. It is usually to move a given load is least, is called–
the result of water in the underlying soil structure and Economical rout
traffic passing over the affected area.
1485. When the bituminous surfacing is done on
• Water first weakens the underlying soil, traffic then
already existing black top road or over existing
fatigues and breaks the poorly supported asphalt concrete road, the type of treatment to be given is
surface in the affected area. Continued traffic action (a) seal coat (b) tack coat
rejects both asphalt and the underlying soil material to (c) prime coat (d) spray of emulsion
create a hole in the pavement. WBPSC JE 2018
Highway Engineering 692 YCT
 Ans. (b) : When the bituminous surfacing is done one 1489. To transfer wheel load at expansion joints from
already existing black top road or over existing concrete one slab to other
road. The type of treatment to be given is tack coat. (a) Tie bars are used.
• Tack coat is bitumen emulsion that is sprayed on (b) Dowel bars are used
existing pavement surface which is relatively (c) Hanger bars are used.
impervious like an existing bituminous surface or a (d) Bitumen filler is used.
cement concrete pavement or a pervious surface like HPSSC JE CODE 502/2018
the WBM which has already been treated by a prime Nagaland PSC 2015 Paper-I
coat (higher viscosity then prime coat). WBPSC SAE 2004
1486. Reinforcement in cement concrete slab of road Ans. (b) : At the expansion joint, dowell bar are
pavement is placed: provided which develops bending, bearing and help in
(a) in the form of welded mesh load transfer from one slab to other.
(b) longitudinally • It also maintains the vertical and horizontal
(c) transversely alignment of slabs.
(d) longitudinally and diagonally • The maximum spacing between expansion joint is
WBPSC SAE 2004 140 m as per IRC.
Ans. (a) : Reinforcement in cement concrete slab of
1490. Weight of vehicles affects:
road pavement is placed in the form of welded mesh.
(a) passing sight distance (b) width of lanes
1487. Which one of the following defects indicates (c) pavement thickness (d) grade
progressive disintegration of bituminous WBPSC SAE 2004
premix carpet surfacing by loss of aggregates ?
(a) Pot holes (b) Revelling Ans. (c) : The weight of vehicles affects–
(c) Edge breaking (d) Rutting • Pavement thickness
HPSSC JE CODE 552/2018 • Ruling gradient
[ESE-2004] • Limiting gradient
Ans. (b) : Revelling– Revelling is the progressive • Design of bridges
disintegration of a pavement surface through loss of 1491. Pick up the rigid pavement from the following:
both binder and aggregate. (a) water-bound macadam pavement
Rutting– Rutting is the longitudinal depression in the (b) bituminous pavement
wheel path in bituminous pavement. (c) gravel pavement
Pot hole– A pot hole is a depression in a road surface, (d) cement concrete pavement
usually asphalt pavement, where traffic has removed WBPSC SAE 2004
broken piece of the pavement. Ans. (d) : Rigid pavement– A rigid pavement is
1488. Minimum thickness of a layer of fine sand constructed from cement concrete or reinforced
required to cut off movement of moisture from concrete slabs. Load is transmitted through beam
subgrade to road pavement is: action of slab in rigid pavements.
(a) 30 cm (b) 76 cm
(c) 52 cm (d) 80 cm
WBPSC SAE 2004
Ans. (a) : Minimum thickness of granular layer for fine
sand is 300 mm or 30 cm and coarse sand is 10 cm and
for graded gravel is 10 cm.
IRC : 34-2011, Table 4.7.2 Recommended Thickness
of Layer of Capillary Cutoff.
Sr. Situations Minimum thickness of granular
No. layer (mm) classified as per IS Components of rigid pavement
1498 1492. Subsurface drainage of a road means removal
Fine Sand Coarse Graded of rain water from
(425 Sand (2 Gravel (a) Surface of the road
micron to mm to (4.75
2 min) 4.75mm) mm to (b) Subgrade or subsurface of the road
20 mm) (c) Surface and subsurface of the road
(1) Subgrade 0.6 - 350 150 150 (d) Soil of permanent land of the road
1.0 m above KPCL JE 2012
(2) Subgrade 0.6 - 300 100 100 Ans. (b) : Sub-Surface Drainage:- Changes in
1.0 m above moisture content of subgrade are caused by fluctuations
HFL, the in ground water table seepage flow, percolation of rain
subgrade soil water and movement of capillary water and even water
being sandy in
nature (PL < 5;
vapour. In sub-surface drainage of highways, it is
sand content attempted to keep the variation of moisture in subgrade
not less than 50 soil to a minimum. However only the gravitational water
percent) is drained by the usual drainage system.

Highway Engineering 693 YCT

1493. A carriage way in which a cement concrete Ans. (b) : Longitudinal joint– Longitudinal joints
wearing surface is provided for wheel tracks only: are provided along the length of pavement. They are
(a) Pavement provided if pavement width is more than 4.5 m. It
(b) sub crest reduces the warping stress and uneven settlement of
(c) Create ways subgrade. Tie bars are generally provided across
(d) Carpet longitudinal joint of transfer the load.
KPSC JE Code 102/2014
Ans. (c) : A carriage way in which a cement concrete
wearing surface is provided for wheel tracks only in
create ways.
1494. A contraction joint is provided in concrete
pavement to
(a) Prevent contraction of the pavement
(b) Permit cracking at the edge
(c) Lower the bending moment in the pavement 1497. Which of the following is NOT a functional in
to reduce pavement thickness rigid pavements?
(d) Lower the temperature gradient across the (a) Ravelling (b) Structural cracking
depth of the pavement (c) Spalling (d) Roughness
Mizoram PSC Disaster Mgmt. 2015, Paper III NPCC 2017
Ans. (a) : Contraction joints– These are purposely Ans : (b) Structural cracking is not a functional in rigid
made weakened planes which relieve the tensile pavements.
stresses in the concrete due to changes in the moisture Ravelling– Ravelling is the loss of material from the
content (Drying shrinkage) and / or temperature and pavement surface. It is a result of insufficient adhesion
• Prevent the formation of irregular cracks due to between the asphalt cement and the aggregate.
restrain in free contraction of concrete. Spalling– A concrete spalling or scaling is a defect that
• Purpose of joints in concrete roads– is administered in a hardened concrete structure or
1. To absorb expansion and contraction due to block situated in colder climates, where the concrete is
variation in temperature. slowly broken down into small flakes known as spalls
2. To avoid warping of slab edges. from a larger solidified concrete body.
3. To grant facility in construction. Roughness– Pavement roughness is generally defined
as an expression of irregularities in the pavement
1495. If a cement concrete road is properly
surface that adversely affect the ride quality of a
constructed and maintained, then its expected
vehicle.
life will be
(a) One year Exam Point
(b) 10 years According to I.R.C. recommendations, the gross
(c) 20 years load of any vehicle (in kg) shall not exceed–
(d) 30 to 40 years 1525 (L + 73) – 14. 7 L2
Mizoram PSC Disaster Mgmt. 2015, Paper III In the penetration macadam construction, the
Ans. (d) : A cement concrete road is properly bitumen is–Sprayed after the aggregates are
constructed and maintained, then its expected life will spread sand compacted
be 30 to 40 year. The thickness of the road surfacing depends
The life of a bitumen road having average traffic of upon the– Type of traffic,
1200 tonnes per day, may be expected to be 10-15 year. Intensity of traffic, Type of material
1496. The longitudinal joints are provided when In earthen road, the common stabilizers used
width of road is more than : are– Cement, Bitumen, Lime
(a) 3 m (b) 4 m The layer of the road that may not contribute to
(c) 5.5 m (d) 6.75 m unevenness is– Base coat
WBPSC JE 2007 Test is carried out to know the resistance to flow,
WBPSC SAE 2003 of the given bituminous material– Viscosity
Highway Engineering 694 YCT
 1501. Tie bars in cement concrete pavements are at
7. Highway Maintenance & (a) expansion joint
(c) contraction joint
(b) warping joint
(d) longitudinal joint
Construction RPSC Lect. (Tech.Edu.) Paper-II 2021
Ans. (d) : • In the longitudinal joints tie bars are
1498. If the water proofing method was not properly provided to hold the adjacent slabs together.
executed, peeling or de-bonding of membranes • Longitudinal joints are provided in cement concrete
may happen after some time in the______. roads which have width are 4.5 m.
(a) Bituminous coating method
1502. The cement stabilization of soil is the
(b) Liquid Waterproofing meted
economical and best way for improving
(c) Polyurethane Liquid Membrane method
strength for
(d) Cementitious method
(a) Well graded sandy soil
DGVCL 5.1.2021 Afternoon
(b) Black cotton soil
Ans. (c) : Polyurethane Liquid Membrane method– (c) Silty soil
• This method is used for flat roofs, which is exposed (d) Organic soil
to weathering and has high ductility. Assam Engg. College Lecturer 2021
• Polyurethane is very sensitive to moisture content, Ans. (a) : Cement stabilization of soil– As the
should be used in evaluating moisture before plasticity of soil increases, the amount of cement
application. needed to effectively react increases, highly plastic soil
• Otherwise membrane peeling or de-bonding may cannot be economically stabilized with cement.
occur after some time. • It is recognized that a well graded mixture requires
1499. For rapid curing cutbacks, the oil used is less of cement and is preferred.
(a) Gasoline 1503. Joint filler used during highway construction are
(b) Kerosene (a) Soft wood
(c) Light diesel (b) Impregnated fibre board
(d) Heavy diesel (c) Both (a) and (b)
GSSSB AAE 07.02.2021 (d) None of the above
Ans. (a) : • For rapid curing cutbacks, the oil used is HPSSC JE Code 386/2018
gasoline. Ans. (c) :
• Joint filler used during highway construction are
soft wood and impregnated fibre boards.
• Joints are formed in concrete slabs as part of the
process of constructing rigid paving for roads.
• Suitable jointing materials include cork, sheet
bitumen and rubber. The joint sealing compound
must have good adhesion to concrete.
1504. Prime coat is _______ viscous than tack coat
and hence applied _______ tack coat.
(a) less, before (b) less, after
1500. Reflection cracking is observed in (c) more, before (d) more, after
(a) Rigid pavement HPSSC JE Code 386/2018
(b) Bituminous overlay over cement Ans. (a) :
(c) Flexible pavement • Prime coat is less viscous than tack coat and hence
(d) Rigid overlay over flexible pavement applied before tack coat.
RPSC Lect. (Tech.Edu.) Paper-II 2021 • The main object of priming is to plug in the
Ans. (b) : Reflection cracking is observed in capillary voids of the porous surface and to bond the
bituminous outlay provided over existing cement loose material particles on the existing surface.
concrete pavements.
Reflection cracking–This type of cracking is observed Exam Point
in bituminous overlays provided over existing cement Longitudinal ruts are formed because of–
concrete pavements. Heavy traffic
In a bituminous pavement, alligator cracking is
mainly due to– Fatigue arising
from repeated stress applications
The parameters due to changes in atmospheric
conditions do not produce stresses in flexible
pavement– Temperature
Name the equipment which is used to measure
the pavement surface condition in terms of
unevenness index– Bump Integrator
Highway Engineering 695 YCT
1505. In case of highway construction, water bound Ans. (d) : The unit of Tack coat is taken as sq.m
macadam (WBM) grading no. 1 (G-I) consists because the thickness is very small, so thickness is not
of coarse aggregates in the range of considered.
(a) 63 mm – 40 mm (b) 90 mm – 45 mm Tack coat– Bituminous tack coat is the application of
(c) 50 mm – 20 mm (d) None of the above bituminous material over an existing surface which is
HPSSC JE Code 386/2018 relatively impervious like an existing bituminous
Ans. (b) : Size and grading requirement of coarse surface or cement concrete pavement or a pervious
aggregates– The coarse aggregates for each layer of surface like coat. Bituminous material of higher treated
construction should be of any one of the three gradings by a prime coat. Bituminous material of higher
given below. viscosity like hot bitumen is used and in cold state,
• Grading number 1 consists of coarse aggregates size bituminous emulsion may also be applied.
range 90 to 40 mm and is more suitable for sub-base 1509. The full form of DBM is
course. Thickness of compacted layer is usually 100 (a) Double bituminous macadam
mm. (b) Dry Bituminous macadam
• Grading number 2 consists of aggregates of size (c) Dense bituminous macadam
range 63 to 40 mm. (d) None of these
• Grading number 3 consists of range 50 to 20 mm Mizroam PSC JE RRD 2016 Paper-II
and compacted thickness of each layer is normally Ans. (c) : DBM–The full form of DBM is dense
75 mm. bituminous macadam.
1506. Which of the following premix methods is used • DBM is a binder course used for roads with more
for base course? number of heavy commercial vehicles. Thickness of a
(a) bituminous carpet single compacted layer shall be 50 mm to 100 mm.
(b) mastic asphalt 1510. Mud pumping is a problem occurring in which
(c) sheet asphalt type of pavement
(d) bituminous bound macadam (a) Moorum roads
MH PWD 2016 (b) Earthen roads
Ans. (d) : Bituminous bound macadam– (c) Flexible bitumen roads
• It is base course or binder course and should be (d) Rigid concrete roads
covered by a suitable surface course before exposing to RRB JE CBT-II 29–08–2019 (evening)
traffic. WBPSC SAE 2000
• Bituminous macadam base course is considered to be Ans. (d) Mud pumping occurs in rigid pavement as
much superior than other type of base course such as when the soil slurry comes out through the joint and
water bound macadam with respect to load dispersion crack of cement concrete pavement due to heavy wheel
characteristics and durability. load.
1507. As per I.R.C. for bitumen bound macadam 1511. The maximum limit of water absorption for
maximum aggregate impact value in % will be: aggregates for road construction is :
(a) 35 (b) 20 (a) 0.4% (b) 0.6%
(c) 30 (d) 25 (c) 0.8% (d) 1.0%
UPRVUNL JE 2016 (e) 1.2%
Ans : (a) As per IRC recommended aggregate impact Odisha JE (Mains) 30.06.2019
test values. Ans. (b) : • The maximum limit of water absorption
Aggregate for aggregates for road construction is 0.6%.
S.N. Type of pavement impact value • This test helps to determine the water absorption of
not more than coarse aggregates as per IS 2386 (Part III)-1963.
1. Bitumen bound macadam 35 A−B
• Water absorption = × 100%
base course B
2. Cement concrete 30 A = Weight of saturated surface-dried sample in (g)
3. WBM base course with 40 B = Weight of over-dried sample in (g)
bitumen surfacing 1512. For the construction of highway (or railway) :
4. Cement concrete base 45 (a) Longitudinal sections are required
course (b) Both longitudinal and cross sections are
1508. The Unit of tack coat in bituminous pavement required
work is taken as sqm. because (c) Cross sections are required
(a) It is a surface work (d) Either (a) or (c)
(b) It is a bituminous work (e) None of these
(c) The thickness is very small to measure Odisha JE (Mains) 02.08.2015
(d) All of these Ans. (b) : For the construction of highway both the
Mizroam PSC JE RRD 2016 Paper-II longitudinal section and cross section are required.
Highway Engineering 696 YCT
 Exam Point (c) Layer of damp proofing course
For filling the pot hole of an earth road, the (d) Layer of coarse sand and bitumen
hardness of the filling material– Nagaland PSC 2015 Paper-I
Should have the same hardness of Ans. (d) : Seal coat– Layer of course sand and bitumen.
neighboring material • Seal coat is usually recommended as a top coat over
In cement concrete roads, the repair work of certain bituminous pavements which are not
cracks should be done just at the end of– impervious. Seal coat is also provided over an existing
Summer season bituminous pavement which is worn out. The seal coat
Patching should be done just– is very thin surface treatment or single coat surface
After rainy season dressing which is usually applied over an existing
The loosening of a wearing surface under the black top surface.
action of traffic or weather associated with the Main function of seal coat are–
failure of the binding agent to keep the surface (a) To seal the surfacing against the ingress of water.
consolidated is known as– Fretting (b) To develop skid resistance texture.
(c) To enliven an existing dry or weathered bituminous
1513. Road Machinery for road construction are :
surface.
(a) Bull Dozer (b) Roller
(c) Bitumen Boiler (d) All of the above 1517. In case of road works, annual repairs and
UKSSSC JE 2017 (PTCUL, UPCL) maintenance estimate includes–
(a) Patch work (b) Repairs of bridges
Ans. (d) : Road machinery for road construction are
(c) Repair of culverts (d) All of the above
heavy construction equipment used–
NPCIL JE 2020
(i) Bull Dozer
(ii) Graders Ans. (d) : • In case of road works, annual repair and
(iii) Roller maintenance estimate includes–
(iv) Bitumen boiler (i) Repair of culverts
(v) Dragline excavator (ii) Repairs of bridges
(vi) Wheel tractor scraper (iii) Patch work
(vi) Erosion control
1514. If on a highway, an ascending gradient of 1 in
• Annual maintenance is to maintain structure or work
55 meets another ascending gradient of 1 in 30,
in proper order and safe condition.
then the deviation angle is :
1518. ______ is a type of crack that resembles like
1 1
(a) (b) spider web.
66 55 (a) Crazing cracks
2 17 (b) Crusting cracks
(c) (d) (c) Settling concrete cracks
85 330
JMRC JE 05.02.2021 (d) Heaving concrete cracks
NPCIL JE 2020
Ans. (a) : Deviation angle is the difference between
Ans. (a) : Crazing crack– Crazing cracks are very
 + = ascending  fine surface cracks that resemble spider web or
the two gradient N = [(+n1)–(+n2)  
 − = descending  shattered glass.
1 1 When the top of concrete slab loses moistures too
=  −  quickly, while unsightly crazing cracks are not a
 30 55  structural concern.
1
=
66
1515. In Highway Construction engineering, the
equipment HMA means-
(a) Hot Mix Aggregate Plant
(b) Hot Mix Admixture Crusting crack– On sunny or windy days where the
(c) Hard Mix Asphalt Plant top of the slab dries out quicker than the bottom the
(d) Hot Mix Asphalt Plant top of concrete surface become crusty.
RRB JE CBT-II 28–08–2019 (evening) Heaving cracks– When the ground freezes, it can
Ans : (d) Hot mix asphalt Plant is a plant used for sometimes life many inches before thawing and
manufacture of asphalt, macadam and other form of settling backdown.
coated roadstone sometimes. If the slab is not free to move with ground, the slab
• In include high quality aggregate, RAP and liquid will crack.
asphat cement. Settling concrete cracks– Ground settling below a
1516. Seal coat is a– concrete slab can also cause cracking settling cracks
(a) Layer of cement concrete occur where voids are created in the ground below the
(b) Water repelling agent concrete surface.

Highway Engineering 697 YCT

1519. Which of the following is considered to be the 1522. Which one of the following is/are typical
highest quality construction in the group of flexible pavement failure?
black top pavements? (a) Alligator cracking
(a) Mastic asphalt (b) Consolidation of pavement layers
(b) Sheet asphalt (c) Shear failure
(c) Bituminous carpet (d) All of the above
(d) Bituminous concrete MH Nagar Parishad Mains 2018
Chandigarh JE 17.07.2016 Ans. (d) : Flexible pavement failure–
Ans. (d) : Bituminous concrete (Asphaltic (i) Alligator cracking or map cracking (Fatigue)
concrete)– Asphaltic concrete is a pavement (ii) Shear failure cracking
composed of a thoroughly controlled hot mixed (iii) consolidation of pavement layer (rutting)
material having as ingredient (i) graded mineral (iv) Reflection cracking
aggregate (ii) Filler (iii) bitumen. (v) Bleeding/Pumping/frost heaving .. etc
Sheet asphalt– Sheet asphalt, also known as sand (vi) Longitudinal cracking
sheet, is mixture of well graded fine aggregate (sand), (vii) Lack of binding to the lower course
mineral filler and bitumen. (viii) Formation of waves and corrugation.
Mastic asphalt– Mastic asphalt is a mixture of 1523. Bitumen stabilization acts as a
bitumen, mineral filler and fine aggregates in such (a) hydrophilic medium
proportion as to yield a void less compact mass. It (b) adhesive for coarse grains and water proofing
flows like a fluid at a temperature of about 2000C, but agent for fine grains
on cooling to normal temperature, it solidifies. (c) destroyer of organic matter and hence more
1520. The maximum thickness of expansion joint in strength
rigid pavements is (d) thin cover that gets oxidised in a few days
(a) 0 mm (b) 25 mm MH Asst. Town Planning 2018
(c) 50 mm (d) 100 mm Ans. (b) : Stabilization of soil using bituminous
MH PWD 2016 materials:- In granular soil the coarser grains may be
Ans. (b) : The function of an expansion joint in rigid individually coated and stuck together by a thin film of
pavement is to allow free expansion. The maximum bituminous materials. But in fine grained soils
thickness of expansion joint in rigid pavement is 25 bituminous material plugs up the voids between small
mm. Maximum spacing of expansion joint in rigid soil clods, thus water proofing the compacted soil-
pavement range from 25–27m in jointed reinforced bitumen.
concrete slab and from 40m (for slab < 230 mm thick) Note:- The particle size, and the gradation of the soil
to 60m (for slabs > 230 mm thick) in unreinforced influence the properties of the soil-bitumen mix. A
concrete. small proportion of fines in the soil is preferred,
though high clay content is not desirable.
1521. In hill roads the side drains are provided
(a) only on the hill side of road 1524. Cement concrete road can be laid over
(b) only on the opposite side of hill (a) any surface of ground
(c) on both sides of road (b) an earthen road subjected to traffic for 1 year
(d) none of the above (c) a WBM road of thickness greater than
MH PWD 2016 150mm and subjected to traffic for a month
(d) any block top road in use at least for 2 weeks
Ans. (a) : In hilly roads the side drain provide Only on
MH Asst. Town Planning 2018
the hill side of road.
• Side drains runs parallel to the length of road. Ans. (c) : Cement concrete read can be laid over a
WBM road of thickness greater than 15cm (150mm)
• To collect and drain off rain water collected from
and subjected of traffic for a month.
camber of road.
• Cement concrete road not be provided with sub
base/base course and they may be constructed directly
over a well-compacted soil subgrade.
1525. Statement (I): PCA is a preferred raw material
for construction of Bituminous pavements in
areas of heavy rainfall.
Statement (II): In PCA, no stripping is needed
as there is improved binding; and thereby
stability is also improved.
Codes:
(a) Both Statement (I) and Statement (II) are
individually true; and Statement (II) is the
correct explanation of Statement (I)
Highway Engineering 698 YCT
 (b) Both Statement (I) and Statement (II) are Ans : (a)
individually true; but Statement (II) is NOT Total annual cost of highway transportation(A)
the correct explanation of Statement (I) B
(c) Statement (I) is true; but Statement (II) is =
false CN
(d) Statement (I) is false; but Statement (II) is Annual cost of highway (B) = 40000
true Annual cost of vehicle operation (C) = 200
ESE 2018 Total number of vehicles on the road per year (N) =
Ans. (a) PCA: Plastic-waste coated aggregate is 100
40000
preferred raw material for the construction of A= =2
bituminous pavements in the areas of heavy rainfall. 200 × 100
Statement-1 is true. 1529. In WBM roads, binding material used is–.
With PCA it is observed to have no stripping even (a) Sand (b) Stone dust
after 96 hours of immersion in water. Here, Statement- (c) Cement (d) Brick dust
2 explains correctness of statement-1. Nagaland PSC 2016 Paper-I
1526. In a bituminous construction, which of the MH PWD Mumbai 2015
following is used to water proof the pavement Ans. (b) : : WBM Road– The pavement base coarse
surface and to prevent infiltration of surface made of crushed or broken aggregates mechanically
water? interlocked by rolling and voids filled by screening and
(a) Prime coat binding material with the assistance of water.
(b) Tack coat • In water bound macadam roads.
(c) Bituminous surface dressing • Small broken stone are laid in two layers void
(d) Seal coat between the stone are filled by stone dust.
MH PWD 2018 • Camber for drainage is given at the formation level
Ans. (c) : Bituminous surface dressing in a thin surface itself.
treatment consisting of successive layer of bitumen 1530. The pavement layer usually used as base
emulsion and aggregates provided to water proof the course without Bitumen in which graded
pavement surface and prevent in filtration of surface aggregates and granular materials, pre-mixed
water. with water and compacted to a dense mass is :-
1527. Calculate spacing between expansion joints, if (a) WMM (b) WBM
the expansion joint gap is 2.0 cm in a cement (c) DLC (d) GSB
concrete pavement. The laying temperature is Mizoram PSC JE (PWD) Nov, 2018 Paper-II
100C and the maximum slab temperature in Ans. (b) : WBM– The pavement base course made of
summer is 500C. Assume coefficient of thermal crushed or broken aggregate mechanically interlocked
expansion of concrete as 10×10-6 per0C. by rolling and voids to be filled with screening and
(a) 30 m (b) 25 m binding material with assistance of water.
(c) 100 m (d) 20 m
• WBM can be used as a sub-base, base course or
MP VYAPAM Sub Engg. 9.07.2017, 2.00 pm
surfacing.
Ans. (b) Spacing of expansion joints • Thickness of each layer of WBM ranges from 10.0
∆
= L. ∝ .t cm to 7.5 cm depending on size and gradation.
2 1531. A water bound macadam road is an example
∆ – width of expansion joint of:
L – Length of the slab (a) rigid pavement
OR Spacing between transverse joint (b) semi rigid pavement
t – Temperature difference in 0C (c) flexible pavement
2 (d) None of the above
Expansion joint Gap (∆) = 2 cm = m
100 MH Nanded Zila Parishad 2014
Temperature difference = 50 – 10 Ans. (c) : A pavement which consist of a mixture of
t = 400C asphaltic or bituminous material and aggregate place
Coefficient of thermal expansion of concrete (∝) on a good quality and completed granular material is
= 10 × 10–6 /0C term as flexible pavement
2 A WBM road is an example of flexible pavement the
= L × 10 × 10 −6 × 40
2 × 100 flexible pavement has low or negligible flexural
Length of expansion joint = 25 m. strength
1528. The total annual cost of highway WBM Road– the roads where bearing coarse consist
transportation, if B= Rs. 40000, C= 200, N=100 of clean crushed aggregates, mechanically interlocked
(a) 2 (b) 3 by rolling and bound together with filler material and
(c) 4 (d) 5 water and laid on a well compacted base coarse is
MP VYAPAM Sub Engg. 3.04.2016, 2.00 pm called WBM Raod.
Highway Engineering 699 YCT
1532. In water-bound Macadam roads (c) 10.5 centre to centre
(a) small broken stones are laid in two layers (d) 14.0 m centre to centre
(b) voids between the stones are filled by stone DSSSB JE 20.11.2019, Shift II
dust MH PWD 2016
(c) camber for drainage is given at the formation MP VYAPAM Sub Engg. 22.02.2015
level itself HSSC PWD JE DEPT. (CAT-7) 2015
(d) all of the above Ans. (b) : As per IRC specifications the maximum
MH Pimpri-Chinchwad MNC 2015 spacing of contraction joints in unreinforced cement
Ans. (d) : WBM Road– The pavement base coarse concrete slab is 4.5 m and in reinforced slab of
made of crushed or broken aggregates mechanically thickness 20 cm is 14 m.
interlocked by rolling and voids filled by screening and 1536. Under Indian conditions, water bound
binding material with the assistance of water. Macadam roads are considered suitable, if the
In water bound macadam roads. daily traffic does not exceed
Small broken stone are laid in two layers (a) 1000 t (b) 2500 t
void between the stone are filled by stone dust. (c) 3000 t (d) 3500 t
camber for drainage is given at the formation level APPSC AE 2004 Paper-II
itself.
Ans. (a) : Water bound macadam surface is suitable
Exam Point for about 1000 tonnes of traffic per lane per day.
1537. Which one of the following items of hill road
Physical life of an equipment is defined as– construction does not help in the prevention of
Age at which the equipment is worn out and it lands slide during the monsoon season
can no longer reliably produce (a) Breast walls
Minimum thickness of a layer of fine sand
(b) hair-pin method
required to cut off capillary rise of water
(c) catch-water drains
completely should be– 76 cm
(d) Retaining Walls
The most suitable equipment for compacting
clayey soils is a– Sheep foot roller Nagaland PSC 2017 Paper-I
Ans. (b) : Hair pin method/hair pin bend– A hair
1533. On the WBM road the roller used for rolling
pin turn is a bend in a road with a very acute inner
purposes is of weight–
angle, making it necessary for an oncoming vehicle to
(a) 8 to 10 tonnes (b) 5 to 8 tonnes
turn about 1800 to continue on the road.
(c) 15 to 20 tonnes (d) 3 to 5 tonnes
Assam Power Distribution 2017 • Breast walls.
Nagaland PSC 2015 Paper-I • Catch water drains.
MH Yavatmal MNC 2016 • Retaining walls
Ans. (a) : Precaution in rolling WBM road– All method to help in prevention of land slide during
(i) Roller to be used 8–10 tonnes the mansoon season.
(ii) Rolling should be done from edges to the centre. 1538. Side drains on both sides of a hill road are
(iii) Length of each rolling should be < 200m essential when the road is
(iv) The successive rolling strips should be overlapped. (a) along the spur curves
(v) Water should be sprinkled and not poured by (b) along the re-entrant curves
bucket. (c) in cutting
(vi) The rolling should be done for 80 passes or until (d) None of the above
the aggregates are broken MH Aurangabad MNC 2019
1534. WBM stands for: Ans. (c) : In hill road the side drain provided only on
(a) Water Bound Macadam the hill side of road.
(b) Water Bearing Macadam If hill road is in cutting the side drain provided on both
(c) Whole Bearing Method sides of a hill road.
(d) Wall Building Method 1539. Recommended slump of concrete for road
KPSC JE Code 30/2014 construction is ................
Ans. (a) : The water bound macadam (WBM) is the (a) 20 to 40 mm (b) 40 to 60 mm
construction known after the name of john macadam (c) less than 20 mm (d) more than 100 mm
the pavement base course made of crusted or broken (BMC 2019)
aggregate mechanically interlocked by rolling and the
Ans. (a) : Recommended slump of concrete–
voids filled with screening and binding material with
Type of concrete Slump
the assistance of water.
(i) Concrete for road construction 20 to 40 mm
1535. What is the maximum spacing of contraction (ii) Mass concrete 25 to 50 mm
joints in unreinforced cement concrete
(iii) Normal RCC work 80–150 mm
pavements?
(a) 8 m centre to centre (iv) concrete for canal linings 70-80 mm
(b) 4.5 m centre to centre (v) concrete to be vibrated 10 to 25 mm

Highway Engineering 700 YCT

1540. At a curved section of road not provided with Codes:
super elevation, deterioration of road is most (a) Both Statement (I) and Statement (II) are
likely to start from individually true; and Statement (II) is the
(a) Anywhere on the road correct explanation of Statement (I)
(b) Outer edge of the road (b) Both Statement (I) and Statement (II) are
(c) Inner edge of the road individually true; but Statement (II) is NOT
(d) Centre of the road the correct explanation of Statement (I)
NWRD Shift III, 25.11.2016 (c) Statement (I) is true; but Statement (II) is
Ans. (b) : At a curved section of road not provided false
with super elevation, deterioration of road is most (d) Statement (I) is false; but Statement (II) is
likely to start from outer edge of the road. true
• In order to counteract the effect of centrifugal force ESE 2018
and to reduce the tendency of the vehicle to over turn Ans. (a) Bituminous pavements disintegrate even with
or skid, the outer edge of the pavement is raised with light traffic, but those failures are not attributable
respect to the inner edge, thus providing a transverse because of wrong design of surface layers.
slope throughout the length of the horizontal curve. ∴ Statement-1 is true.
• This transverse inclination to the pavement surface is Improper preparation of subgrade soil is the reason for
known as super-elevation or cant or banking. this failure. Statement-2 explains correctness of
1541. The unit of measurement for providing statement-1.
expansion or contraction joint in a structure is: 1544. As per IRC the slope of cutting in earth should
(a) metre (b) sq. m. be
(c) each (d) no (a) 1 : 1 (b) 1 : 2
HPSSC JE CODE 552/2018 (c) 1 : 4 (d) 2 : 3
Ans. (a) : Unit of measurement for providing HPSSC JE CODE 502/2018
expansion or construction joint in a structure is metre. Ans. (a) : As per IRC the slop of cutting in earth
1542. The ductility value of bitumen for suitability in should be 1 : 1 (H : V).
road construction should not be less than 1545. Carpeting is
(a) 30 cm (b) 40 cm (a) Smoothening of a road surface
(c) 50 cm (d) 60 cm (b) Laying of red carpet on road
HPSSC JE CODE 502/2018 (c) Laying of bitumen or concrete layer on a
Ans. (c) : Ductility–The ductility of binder is an road
indication of its elasticity and ability to deform under (d) Operation of removing snow from road
load and return to original condition upon removal of HPSSC JE CODE 502/2018
load. Ans. (c) : • Carpeting is laying of bitumen or concrete
• Standard briquette of bitumen layer on a road.
• Cross section 1 cm2 • Carpeting consists of coarse aggregates of 12.5 mm
• Elongation rate 5 cm/min and 10 mm sieve sizes, premixed with bitumen binder
• Standard Temperature 27ºC are compacted to a thickness of 20 mm to serve as a
• The ductility value should be minimum of 50 cm as surface course of the pavement.
per the IS • The recycling of aggregate is a process in which used
aggregate is reused for new road construction.
1546. In gravel road the binding material used is
............
(a) Cement (b) Lime
(c) Clay (d) Surkhi
GSSSB Surveyor 2016
Ans. (c) : In gravel road the binding material used in
clay.
• Gravel surfaced roads can be used for light traffic, on
village roads and other district road.
1547. The purpose of the wearing course is
1543. Statement (I): Bituminous roads disintegrate (a) To improve the load supporting capacity
even with light traffic, but such failures are not (b) To give a smooth riding surface
exclusively attributable to wrong surface (c) To receive the load on the pavement for
treatment. dispersion to the earth mass
Statement (II): Improper preparation of the (d) To provide a stress transmitting medium to
subgrade and the foundation is often spread the surface wheel load
responsible for this disintegration. Mizoram PSC JE (Irr.& WRD) Oct. 2018 Paper II
Highway Engineering 701 YCT
 Ans. (b) : Purpose of the wearing course is to give a 1550. A semi-rigid material which forms a durable
smooth riding surface. and impervious layer for damp proofing:
Wearing course– The wearing course in the upper (a) Mastic asphalt (b) Asphaltic felts
layer in roadway, airfield and dockyard construction. (c) Metal sheets (d) Hot bitumen
Or the surface layer of a pavement that takes the wear KPSC JE Code 53/2015
of traffic. Ans. (a) : Mastic asphalt– Mastic asphalt is a
1548. A depression formed in a surface layer mixture of bitumen, mineral filler and fine aggregates
longitudinal to the road by the wheels of in such a proportion as to yield a void less compact
travelling vehicles is called: mass. It flows like a fluid at temperature about 2000C,
(a) Depression (b) Blow hole but on cooling the normal temperature is solidifies.
(c) Pot hole (d) Rut 1551. When the bituminous surfacing is done on
KPSC JE Code 64/2016 already existing blacktop road or over existing
Ans. (d) Rutting– Permanent deformation or cement concrete road, the type of treatment
consolidation accumulates in on asphalt pavement given is
(a) seal coat (b) tack coat
surface over time.
(c) prime coat (d) spray of emulsion
• Shown by the wheel path being engraved in the road.
ASSAM PSC AE (PWD) 2020
• Caused by lack of compaction, Insufficient pavement SSC JE 2012
thickness and weak asphalt mixture.
Ans. (b) : Tack coat– A tack coat is an application of
Blow hole– Blowholes are also called bug holes.
a bitumen binder to an existing surface (black topped
• Individual rounded or irregular cavities are formed or otherwise) to ensure a bond between the new
against formwork and become visible when it is construction and the old surface.
stripped. (less than 10 mm). Prime coat– A prime coat is an initial application of a
Pot hole– Usually in asphalt pavement is found. low viscosity liquid bituminous material to an
• It is found where traffic has removed broken pieces absorbent surface preparatory to any super imposed
of the pavement. bituminous treatment or construction.
• It is caused due to result of water in under lying sub 1552. The usual width of parapet walls along
base. highways in hilly region, is :
(a) 50 cm (b) 60 cm
Exam Point (c) 70 cm (d) 80 cm
Push–loaded scrapers are to be used for MGVCL JE 2017
transporting materials. Out of the following Ans. (b) : Width of parapet walls along highways in
options, upto what distance can this be done hilly region is 0.6 m or 60 cm.
cost–effectively– 1000 m 1553. A bituminous pavement, alligator cracking is
At a site, some underwater excavation and mainly due to.................
dredging is to be performed. The equipments (a) Inadequate wearing course
will be most suitable for this job– Drag line (b) Inadequate thickness of sub base
The bituminous constructions, compaction by (c) Use of excess bituminous material
pneumatic roller also is specified– (d) Fatigue arising from repeated stress
Bituminous macadam applications
On a W.B.M. road the roller used for rolling GSECL AE 2018 Shift -I
purposes is of weight– 8 to 10 tonnes Ans. (d) : Alligator cracking in mainly due to fatigue
1549. Rolling of road should be arising from repeated stress application.
(a) From center to edge Alligator cracking– Alligator cracking / map cracking
(b) From one edge to another of the bituminous surfacing this is the most common
(c) From edge to center with an overlap of type of failure and occur due to relative movement of
pavement layer materials this may be caused by
minimum 30 cm
repeated application of heavy wheel loads resulting in
(d) From edge to centre
fatigue failure or due to the moisture variation
KPSC JE Code 11/2016
resulting in swelling and shrinkage of sub-grade and
Ans. (c) : Rolling of road should be from edge to other pavement material.
center with an overlap of minimum 30 cm.
1554. Which of the following is the major cause of
• A rolling road is a piece of machinery on which the flexible pavement failure by frost heaving?
wheels of a vehicle can ride in order to test how well (a) Heavy loading
the vehicle works under road conditions that are (b) Improper bonding
created artificially with the car on the rolling road, the (c) Improper mixture
engine is placed under load with the throttle wide (d) Presence of groundwater
open. UPRVUNL JE 2019
Highway Engineering 702 YCT
 Ans. (d) : Major cause of flexible pavement failure by 1559. The wall constructed towards up slope side to
frost heaving is presence of groundwater and De- prevent the hill side from sliding down is
lamination is a failure of an overlay due to a loss of called:
bond between the overlay and the order pavement (a) Breast wall (b) Retaining wall
common causes of de-lamination include, wet or dry (c) Guard wall (d) Parapet wall
surface during paving of the overlay. Mizoram PSC/ (PWD) 2020 Paper-III
WBPSC JE 2005
1555. Road Rollers of various types are extensively WBPSC SAE 2003
used in modern highway construction projects. WBPSC SAE 2000
They are used for Ans. (a) : Breast walls are constructed to support the
(a) Consolidation (b) Compression uphill slopes of the road cross-section. This wall is
(c) Contraction (d) Compaction constructed when the hill side is steep and there is a
Mizoram PSC JE (PHE&PWD) Apr. 2016 Paper-II tendency of it’s sliding down towards the road.
Ans. (d) : Road rollers are used for compaction– Breast walls are constructed in stone masonry, brick
Compaction– Soil compaction is the process in which masonry or cement concrete.
stream applied to a soil cause densification as air is • The wall provided above the formation level of a hill
displaced from the pores between the soil grains. road, usually towards the downslope side is known as
1556. Lean concrete base is an example for ........... the parapet wall.
(a) Composite pavement • Retaining walls are the most important structure in
(b) Semi-rigid pavement hill road construction. It provides adequate stability to
(c) Flexible pavement the roadway & to the slope.
(d) Rigid pavement
SSC JE 23.09.2019 (Morning)
Ans. (b) Semi-rigid pavements:- When bonded
materials like the pozzolanic concrete (lime-flyash-
aggregate mix), lean cement concrete or soil-cement
are used in the base course or sub-base course layer the
pavement layer has considerably higher flexural
strength than the common flexible pavement layers.
However these bonded materials do not possess as
much flexural strength as the cement concrete
pavements. Therefore when this intermediate class of
materials are used in the base or sub-base course layer
of the pavements, they are called semi-rigid 1560. Lead is the distance of car....... excavated earth
pavements. from the point of excavation:
1557. The best solution for construction of low-cost (a) Vertically (b) Horizontally
rural roads is (c) Inclinedly (d) All of these
(a) cement concreter road WBPSC SAE 2000
(b) paver block Ans. (b) : The horizontal distance through which the
(c) soil stabilization excavated earth from a borrow pit is carried to the
(d) bituminous macadam place of the embankment is known as lead. The
ASSAM PSC JE 27.12.2020 vertical height through which the excavated earth from
Ans. (c) : Soil stabilization or natural gravel surfacing a borrow pit is to be lifted is known as lift.
is generally used as the principle low - cost rural roads. 1561. The cumulative vertical undulations of the
This material provides an intermediate surface between surface recorded per km of the road is called as
basic engineered earth and higher cost, often ______
bituminous, paving. (a) profile (b) cross section
1558. As compared to roadways, maintenance cost of (c) unevenness index (d) alignment
railways is Karnataka PSC JE Code 126/2018
(a) More (b) Less KPSC JE 13.11.2016
(c) Same (d) None of above Ans. (c) : • The cumulative vertical undulation of the
UPSSSC JE 2015 Paper-I surface recorded per km of the road is called as
Ans. : (a) unevenness index.
• As compared to roadways, maintenance cost of • Bump integrator is used to measure unevenness.
railway is more. Unevenness index Types of pavement
• Railways do not provide door to door services, but 0-1500 mm/km Good
roadways provides door to door services. 1500-2500 mm/km Satisfactory
• Railway is the fastest mode of transportation 2500-3200 mm/km Ban
compared to roadways. > 3200 mm/km Uncomfortable

Highway Engineering 703 YCT

1562. Polymer impregnated concrete is an excellent (c) 2 m (d) 3 m
material for; WBPSC JE 2007
(a) Railway sleepers Ans. (d) : The minimum distance between the inner
(b) High rise buildings edge of the borrow pit and toe of embankment is kept
(c) Airport runways as 3 m. From IS code 4701 (1982) the borrow pits
(d) Marine and underwater applications should start from a point at a distance more than 5 m
UKSSSC JE 20.12.2020 Evening from the toe for small channels and 10 m for large
Ans. (d) : Polymer impregnated concrete is an channels.
excellent material for marine and under water 1567. In highway construction rolling starts from
application. (a) Sides and proceed to center
• It is conventional precast concrete, which is cured (b) Center and proceed to sides
and dried in oven or by dielectric heating from which (c) One side and proceed to other side
the air in open cell is removed by vacuum process. (d) Any one of the above
1563. Parapet walls along hill roads are provided: ASSAM PSC AE (PWD) 2020
(a) to retain the back filling WBPSC JE 2009
(b) to prevent the hill from sliding WBPSC JE 2007
(c) to prevent the wheels of the vehicle from Ans. (a) : In highway construction rolling starts from
coming to the retaining wall sides and proceed to center. For drainage the center
(d) to provide good drainage portion is higher than sides so rolling starts sides and
WBPSC SAE 2004 proceed to center.
Ans. (c) : The wall provided above the formation level1568. Main purpose(s) of seal coat is/are
of a hill road. Usually towards the downside in known (a) to seal the surface against ingress of water
as the parapet wall. (b) to develop skid resistance texture
• This wall provides protection to traffic against falling (c) to enliven the existing dry surface
down the hill slope. (d) All of the above
1564. Generally, the premix carpet laid in India is of HPSSC JE Code 386/2018
thickness Ans. (d) : Seal coat– Seal coat is usually
(a) 5 to 7.5 cm (b) 10 cm recommended as a top coat over certain bituminous
(c) 15 cm (d) 2 cm pavements.
Mizoram PSC Disaster Mgmt. 2015, Paper III • Which are not impervious such as open graded
Ans. (d) : According IRC 14-2004 Open graded bituminous construction like premixed and grouted
premix carpet– macadam the seal coat is a very thin surface treatment
• When using concrete mixer for preparing the premix, or a single coat surface dressing which is usually
0.135 cum of aggregate per batch shall be used to applied over an existing black top surface.
cover 5 sqm area of road surface with 20 mm average Main function of seal coat are–
thickness. (a) To seal the surfacing against the ingress of water.
1565. In road estimating, the quantity of earth work (b) To develop skid resistance texture.
is equal to (c) To enliven an existing dry or weathered bituminous
(a) Length × Height surface.
(b) Section Area × Length (d) Penetration macadam.
(c) Section Area × Width 1569. The final ground surface after completion of
(d) Length× Width earthwork in the construction of road is:
HSSC JE Cat-30, 6-2016 Afternoon (a) Base course
Ans. (b) : (b) Base-coat
Quantity of earthwork = Sectional area × length. (c) Formation
(d) Sub-crust
1566. The minimum distance between the inner edge
of the borrow pit and toe of embankment is Kerala PSC Code 67/2014
kept as Ans. (c) : Formation of profile– Final shape of the
(a) 0.5 m (b) 1 m ground after excavation as filling up.

Highway Engineering 704 YCT